Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4

Are you looking everywhere to learn about Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 4th Chapter Fluently Add within 100 Answers? The answer key included topics like related addition questions. Those who are preparing for the BIM Grade 2 Chapter 4 will get the answer key which is extremely useful. You can improve the problem-solving skills by solving all the questions from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100

The list of topics in the 2nd Grade 4th Chapter Fluently Add within 100 are given below. Have a look at the answers for topics like Fluently Add within 100 Vocabulary, Use Partial Sums to Add, More Partial Sums, Regroup to Add, Add Two-Digit Numbers, Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers, Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers, and Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers. after solving this chapter, you will be able to solve addition problems.

Students must have the best preparation strategy to score good marks in the exam. Solve all the problems by checking the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100. Download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 PDF for free of cost and practice the problems.

Vocabulary

Lesson 1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Lesson 2 More Partial Sums

Lesson 3 Regroup to Add

Lesson 4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 5 Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson 7 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Performance Task

Activity

Chapter Practice

Cumulative Practice

Fluently Add within 100 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 1

Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 2

Answer:
In the above image, the group of rows and columns is known as an array.
The horizontal dots are known as rows.
The vertical dots are known as columns.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-2
Array:
An array means arranging the group rows and columns in a group. Mostly the data will be the same such as integers or strings and these are used to store the collected data. In the above image, the group of rows and columns is known as an array.
Column:
A column is a group of values that are represented vertically and will be in multiple rows and they run from top to bottom.
Row:
A row is a group of values that are represented horizontally which will be lying side by side in a horizontal line. These rows usually arranged in a straight line.

Define it

Use your vocabulary cards to match.

Question 1.
partial sums
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 3

Question 2.
regroup
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 4

Chapter 4 Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 5

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 6

Lesson 4.1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Explore and Grow

Model the problem. Make a quick sketch to show how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 7

Answer:
The sum f 32 + 27 is 59.

Explanation:
To model the given problem 32 + 27 we will model with 50 blocks and 9 blocks, as the sum of 32 + 27 is 59. So we will model with 50 blocks and 9 blocks.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 8

Answer:
The partial sum of 73 + 12 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-8
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 73 + 12 which is 85. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 2 will be 5. So the total value of 73 + 12 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 9

Answer:
The partial sum of 32 + 24 will be 50 + 6= 56.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-9
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with a left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 32 + 24 which is 56. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 4 will be 6. So the total value of 32 + 24 will be 50 + 6= 56.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 10

Answer:
The partial sum of 37 + 42 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-10
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with a left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 42 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 2 will be 9. So the total value of 37 + 42 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 11

Answer:
The partial sum of 63 + 5 will be 60 + 8= 68.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-11
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 63 + 5 which is 68. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 5 will be 8. So the total value of 63 + 5 will be 60 + 8= 68.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 12

Answer:
The partial sum of 16 + 72 will be 80 + 8= 88.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-12
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 16 + 72 which is 88. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 2 will be 8. So the total value of 16 + 72 will be 80 + 8= 88.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 13

Answer:
The partial sum of 33 + 43 will be 70 + 6= 76.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-13
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 33 + 43 which is 76. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 3 will be 6. So the total value of 33 + 43 will be 70 + 6= 76.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 14

Answer:
The partial sum of 91 + 7 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-14
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 91 + 7 which is 98. So here first we will add tens which are 90 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 7 will be 8. So the total value of 91 + 7 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 15

Answer:
The partial sum of 25 + 64 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-15
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 25 + 64 which is 89. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 4 will be 9. So the total value of 25 + 64 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 16

Answer:
The missing digits are 2, 4, 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-16
Here, the missing digits are 2, 4, 2. We had found those values by subtracting the given sum and the addend. So we can get the missing value. In the first image, we can see that the addition of two addends. So here we can see that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is
46 – 14 and the result will be 32. So we have found out the missing digit which is 2. And we can see in the second addition that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is 69 – 45 and the result will be 24. So we have found out the missing digit which is 4. And we can see in the third addition that one number is missing in the second addend. So here we will subtract the addend with the sum which is 61 – 87 and the result will be 26. So we have found out the missing digit which is 2.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You read 34 pages one day and 23 the next day. How many pages do you read in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 17

Answer:
The number of pages that were read is 57 pages.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-17
Given that 34 pages were read on one day and the other 23 pages were read on the next day. So to find the number of pages that were read, we will add the number of pages which was read on both days. So the number of pages that were read is 34 + 23 which is 57. And the number of pages that were read is 57 pages.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 57 common trading cards and 11 rare trading cards. How many trading cards do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 18

Answer:
The total number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards.

Explanation:
The number of common trading cards is 57 and there are 11 rare trading cards. And the number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards. So the total number of trading cards do we have in all is 57 + 11= 68 cards.

Question 11.
A florist has 7 roses, 6 daisies, and 15 tulips. How many flowers are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 19

Answer:
The total number of flowers are there in all is 28 flowers.

Explanation:
As the florist has 7 roses, 6 daisies, and 15 tulips. So the total number of flowers will be 7 + 6 + 15= 28 flowers. And the total number of flowers are there in all is 28 flowers.

Use Partial Sums to Add Homework & Practice 4.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 20

Answer:
The partial sum of 55 + 14 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-20
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 55 + 14 which is 69. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 4 will be 9. So the total value of 55 + 14 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 21

Answer:
The partial sum of 62 + 13 will be 70 + 5= 75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-21
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 62 + 13 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 3 will be 5. So the total value of 62 + 13 will be 70 + 5= 75.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 22

Answer:
The partial sum of 71 + 8 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-22
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 71 + 8 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 8 will be 9. So the total value of 71 + 8 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 23

Answer:
The partial sum of 22 + 26 will be 40 + 8= 48.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-23
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 22 + 26 which is 48. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 6 will be 8. So the total value of 22 + 26 will be 40 + 8= 48.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 24

Answer:
The missing digits are 2, 5, and the sum of the given values is 39.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-24
In the above image, we can see the missing values and we can see the tens and ones. So the missing values will be 2 in the tens place and 5 in the ones place. As the sum is 20 + 10 and 4 + 5, so the missing digits will be 2 and 5. Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 24 + 15 which is 39. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 5 will be 9. So the total value of 24 + 15 will be 30 + 9= 39. So the sum of the given values will be 30 + 9= 39

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 45 balloons. Your friend has 31. How many balloons do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 25

Answer:
The total number of balloons do my friend and mine will be 76 balloons.

Explanation:
As I have 45 balloons and my friend has 31 balloons and the total number of balloons will be 45+31= 76 balloons. So the total number of balloons do my friend and mine will be 76 balloons.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You have 8 toy trains, 4 bouncy balls, and 36 toy soldiers. How many toys do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 26

Answer:
The total number of toys do we all have in all will be 48 toys.

Explanation:
As there are 8 toy trains and 4 bouncy balls and 36 toy soldiers. So the number of toys will be 8 + 4 + 36= 48 toys. So the total number of toys do we all have in all will be 48 toys.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
16 + 10 = ___

Answer:
The addition of 16 and 10 is 26.

Explanation:
On adding 16 and 10 we will get the result as 26.

Question 9.
45 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference of 45 – 10 is 35.

Explanation:
On subtracting 10 with 45 we will get the result as 35.

Question 10.
50 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference of 50 – 10 is 40.

Explanation:
On subtracting 10 with 50 we will get the result as 40.

Question 11.
63 + 10 = ___

Answer:
The sum of 63 + 10 is 73.

Explanation:
On adding 63 and 10 we will get the result as 73.

Lesson 4.2 More Partial Sums

Make a quick sketch to find 38 + 19.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 27

Answer:
The partial sum of 38 + 19 will be 40 +17= 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-27

Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 38 + 19 which is 57. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 9 will be 17. So the total value of 38 + 19 will be 40 + 17= 57.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
25 + 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 28

Answer:
The partial sum of 25 + 19 will be 30 +14= 44.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-28
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 25 + 19 which is 44. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 9 will be 14. So the total value of 25 + 19 will be 30 + 14= 44.

Question 2.
48 + 33 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 29

Answer:
The partial sum of 48 + 33 will be 70 +11= 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-29
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 48 + 33 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 3 it will be 11. So the total value of 48 + 33 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Question 3.
57 + 35 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 30

Answer:
The partial sum of 57 + 35 will be 80 +12= 92.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-30
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 57 + 35 which is 92. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 5 it will be 12. So the total value of 57 + 35 will be 80 + 12= 92.

Question 4.
34 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 31

Answer:
The partial sum of 34 + 28 will be 50 +12= 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-31
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 34 + 28 which is 62. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 8 it will be 12. So the total value of 34 + 28 will be 50 + 12= 62.

Question 5.
15 + 76 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 32

Answer:
The partial sum of 15 + 76 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-32
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 15 + 76 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 6 it will be 11. So the total value of 15 + 76 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 6.
29 + 62 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 33

Answer:
The partial sum of 29 + 62 will be 80 +11= 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-33
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 29 + 62 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 2 it will be 11. So the total value of 29 + 62 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Which choices are equal to 35 + 27?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 34

Answer:
The choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.

Explanation:
The choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.
As 35 + 27 was divided into tens and ones so the result will be 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and after adding tens separately and ones separately we will get 50 + 12 by adding both the numbers we will get the result as 62. So the choices which are equal to 35 + 27 is 30 + 20 + 5 + 7 and 50 + 12 and 62.

Question 8.
A giraffe eats 37 pounds of food in the morning and 38 pounds of food in the afternoon. How many pounds of food does the giraffe eat in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 35

Answer:
The total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all is 75 pounds.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-35
Given that the Giraffe eats 37 pounds of food in the morning and 38 pounds of food in the afternoon. So to find the total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all we will add the food that the giraffe had in the morning and the evening. So here we will perform a partial sum which is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 38 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are
30 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 8 it will be 15. So the total value of 37 + 38 will be 60 + 15= 75. So the total number of pounds did the giraffe ate in all is 75 pounds.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You find 29 items on a scavenger hunt. Your friend finds 17 more than you. How many items does your friend find?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 36
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 37

Answer:
The number of items does my friend finds is 46 items.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-37
Given that there are 29 items on a scavenger hunt and my friend finds 17 more than me. So to find how many items my friend finds in the hunt, we will add those items which are 29 + 17= 46 items. So the number of items does my friend finds is 46 items.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your friend climbs 48 stairs. You climb 36 more than your friend. How many stairs do you climb?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 38

Answer:
The number of stairs does I climb is 48 + 36= 84 stairs.

Explanation:
Given that my friend climbs 48 stairs and I climb 36 stairs more than my friend. So to find how many stairs did I climb we will add the stairs that my friend climbed and the stairs that I have climbed more stairs. So the number of stairs does I climb is 48 + 36= 84 stairs.

Question 10.
You write 13 fewer words than your friend. You write 39 words. How many words does your friend write?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 39

Answer:
The number of words written by my friend is 26 words.

Explanation:
Given that the number of words written by me is 39 words and my friend wrote 13 fewer words than me so to find that how many words my friend wrote we will subtract the number of words written by me and the fewer words that my friend has written. So the number of words written by my friend is 39 – 13= 26 words.

More Partial Sums Homework & Practice 4.2

Question 1.
27 + 46 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 40

Answer:
The partial sum of 27 + 46 will be 60 +13= 73.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-40
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 27 + 46 which is 73. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 27 + 46 will be 60 + 13= 73.

Question 2.
54 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 41

Answer:
The partial sum of 54 + 28 will be 70 +12= 82.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-41
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 54 + 28 which is 82. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 8 it will be 12. So the total value of 54 + 28 will be 70 + 12= 82.

Question 3.
18 + 72 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 42

Answer:
The partial sum of 18 + 72 will be 80 +10= 90.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-42
Here we will perform partial sum, the partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 18 + 72 which is 90. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 2 it will be 10. So the total value of 18 + 72 will be 80 + 10= 90.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Write the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 43

Answer:
The missing digits are 7,3,1 and 3,7,8.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-43

As in the above image, we can see that some of the digits are missing. So to find the missing digits we will parallel check with the result. As we can see that 5 in ones place and 8 in the addend, so by adding 7 we can get the value as 15. So we have got the digit 5 in ones place of the result. Now as we know the value of the addend, we will subtract the addend with the result, so that we can get the other addend. So 75 – 37= 38. So the other missing digit is 3. And the missing value in ones place is 1. Now we will repeat the same process to find the other values. As we can see that 6 in ones place and 9 in the addend, so by adding 7 we can get the value as 16. So we have got the digit 7 in ones place of the result. Now as we know the value of the addend, we will subtract the addend with the result, so that we can get the other addend. So 96 – 57= 39. So the other missing digit is 3. And the missing value in tens place is 8.

Question 5.
You recycle 42 cans and 29 jars. How many items do you recycle in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 44

Answer:
The total number of items recycled is 71 items.

Explanation:
Given that 42 cans and 29 jars are recycled and to know that how many items are recycled we will perform the addition, we will add both the cans and jars that are recycled. So 42 cans + 29 jars= 71 items. So the total number of items recycled is 71 items.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Newton plants 63 seeds. Descartes plants 18 more than Newton. How many seeds does Descartes plant?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 45

Answer:
Descartes has planted 81 seeds.

Explanation:
Given that Newton has planted 63 seeds and Descartes has planted 18 more trees than the Newton. That means Descartes has planted 63 + 18 which is 81 seeds. So Descartes has planted 81 seeds.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 46

Answer:
The most favorite instrument is the Drum.

Explanation:
As each emoji represents one student,
so the Drum has six emojis which means 6 × 1= 6 students and
the Triangle has four emojis which means 4 × 1= 4 students.
So the most favorite instrument is the drum as the drum has more number of students which is 6.

Lesson 4.3 Regroup to Add

Explore and Grow

Model the problem. Make a quick sketch to show how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 47

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 48

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 46 + 26 is 72.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-48
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 46 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 46 + 26 is 72.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 49

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 15 + 37 is 52.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-49

Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 15 and 37. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 15 + 37 is 52.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 50

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 39 + 32 is 71.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-50
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 39 and 32. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 39 + 32 is 71.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
When do you need to regroup to add two numbers?
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________
__________________________________

Answer:
We need to regroup for the addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You must spell 60 words correctly to win a spelling game. You spell 19 words correctly in Round 1 and36 in Round 2. Do you win?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 51

Answer:
As I spell 55 words correctly, so didn’t win the game.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-51

Given that to spell 60 words correctly to win in a spelling game. I spell out 19 words correctly in Round 1 and 36 words in Round 2. So to find that I had won in the spelling game we will perform regrouping addition. We need to regroup for the addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers.
So the regrouping addition of 19 and 36 is 55, as to win the game we should spell 60 words correctly. So I did not win the spelling game.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You want to do 80 jumping jacks. You do 45 in the morning and 39 in the evening. Do you reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 52

Answer:
As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I have reached 84 jumping jacks, so I reach the goal.

Explanation:
As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I did 45 jumping jacks in the morning and 39 jumping jacks in the evening. So the total number of jumping jacks is 45 + 39= 84 jumping jacks. As the goal is to reach 80 jumping jacks and I have reached 84 jumping jacks, so I reach the goal.

Question 6.
You raise $38 selling ham sandwiches and $43 selling turkey sandwiches. Your friend raises $72. Who raises more money?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 53

Answer:
I have raised more money.

Explanation:
As my friend raises $72  money and I raise $38 by selling ham sandwiches and $43 by selling turkey sandwiches, so the total money raised by me by selling the sandwiches is 43 + 38= 81. So I have raised more money.

Regroup to Add Homework & Practice 4.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 54

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 36 + 16 is 52.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-54
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 36 and 16. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 36 + 16 is 52.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 55

Answer:
The addition of regrouping of 47 + 39 is 86.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-55
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 47 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 47 + 39 is 86.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Do you have to regroup to add?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 56

Answer:
43 + 29= 72  yes, we have to regroup to add.
54 + 32= 86 no, we can add normally without performing regroup.
33 + 64= 97 no, we can add normally without performing regroup.
17 + 25= 42 yes, we have to regroup to add.

Explanation:
43 + 29= 72  yes, we have to regroup to add. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 29. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 29 is 72.
54 + 32= 86 no, we can add normally without performing regroup. As the place value column is not greater than nine. So here we cannot perform regrouping of addition.
33 + 64= 97 no, we can add normally without performing regroup. As the place value column is not greater than nine. So here we cannot perform regrouping of addition.
17 + 25= 42 yes, we have to regroup to add. Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 29. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 29 is 72.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
There are 50 words in a word search. You find 25 words in rows and 18 words in columns. Did you find all of the words?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 57

Answer:
No, I have not found all the 50 words.

Explanation:
As there are 50 words in the word search and I have found 25 words in rows and 18 words in columns, so the total number of words did I had found is 25 + 18 which is 43. So I have not found all the 50 words.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You find 15 white shells and 17 spotted shells. Your friend finds 34 shells. Who finds more shells?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 58

Answer:
My friend finds more shells than me.

Explanation:
As I had found 15 white shells and 17 spotted shells, so the total number of shells did I have found is 15 + 17= 32 shells. And my friend finds 34 shells, so my friend finds more shells than me.

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 59

Answer:
We will use the “<” sign which is 34 < 80.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 34 is less than 80. So we can represent with < sign as one value is smaller than another we will use < lesser than sign, so 34 < 80.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 60

Answer:
We will use the “>” sign which is 15 > 8.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 15 is less than 8. So we can represent with > sign as one value is greater than another we will use > greater than sign, so 15 > 8.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 61

Answer:
We will use the “=” sign which is 67 = 67.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see that 67 and the opposite number also 67 which are equal to each other. So we can represent with = sign as one value is equal to each other so we will use = equal to sign, so 67 = 67.

Lesson 4.4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Make a quick sketch to find 38 +24

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 62

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 38 and 24 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-62

Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 38 and 24. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 38 + 24 is 62.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
69 + 22 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 63

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 69 and 22 we will get the result as 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 69 and 22. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 69 + 22 is 91.

Question 2.
25 +37 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 64

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 25 and 37 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-1
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 25 and 37. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 25 + 37 is 62.

Question 3.
31 + 26 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 65

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 31 and 26 we will get the result as 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-2
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 31 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 31 + 26 is 57.

Question 4.
15 + 38 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 66

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 15 and 38 we will get the result as 53.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-3
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 15 and 38. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 15 + 38 is 53.

Question 5.
62 + 13 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 67

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 62 and 13 we will get the result as 75.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-5
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 62 and 13. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 62 + 13 is 75.

Question 6.
46 + 49 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 68

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 46 and 49 we will get the result as 95.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-6
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 46 and 49. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 46 + 49 is 95.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
33 + 39 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 69

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 33 and 39 we will get the result as 72.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-7
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 33 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 33 + 39 is 72.

Question 8.
23 + 71 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 70

By regrouping addition of 23 and 71 we will get the result as 94.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-8
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 23 and 71. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 23 + 71 is 94.

Question 9.
17 + 64 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 71

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 17 and 64 we will get the result as 81.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-9
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 17 and 64. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 17 + 64 is 81.

Question 10.
54 + 25 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 72

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 54 and 25 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-10
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 54 and 25. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 54 + 25 is 79.

Question 11.
47 + 39 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 73

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 47 and 39 we will get the result as 86.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-11
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 47 and 39. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 47 + 39 is 86.

Question 12.
28 + 26 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 74

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 28 and 26 we will get the result as 54.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63-12
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 28 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 28 + 26 is 54.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton finds 26 + 36. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 75

Answer:
No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Newton is not correct. Newton has performed only addition but he did not perform any regroup. So he got the wrong answer. If he perform regrouping, and regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 2 and 36. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 26 + 36 is 62.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 24 gel pens and you buy 36 more. Your friend has 48 and buys 18 more. Who has more gel pens?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 76

Answer:
I have more pens than my friend as 66 is greater than 60.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-76
As I have 24 gel pens and I bought 36 more gel pens so the total number of pens I have bought is 24 + 36= 60 pens and my friend has 48 and buys 18 more, so the total number of pens my friend has bought is 48 + 18= 66 pens. So by comparing we can see that I have more pens than my friend as 66 is greater than 60.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You have 32 stencils and you buy 16 more. Your friend has 14 and buys 28 more. Who has more stencils?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 77

Answer:
I had more stencils than my friend.

Explanation:
As I have 32 stencils and bought 16 more stencils, so the total number of stencils I had is 32 + 16= 48 stencils. And my friend has 14 stencils and bought 28 stencils, so the total number of stencils my friend had is 14 + 28= 42 stencils. So I had more stencils than my friend.

Question 15.
You have 22 green stars and 17 orange stars. Your friend has 26 blue stars and 12 pink stars. How many stars do you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 78

Answer:
The total number of stars I and my friend had is 77 stars.

Explanation:
As I have 22 green stars and 17 orange stars, so the total number of stars I had is 22 + 17= 39 stars. And my friend has 26 blue stars and 12 pink stars, so the total number of stars my friend had is 26 + 12= 38 stars. So the total number of stars I and my friend had is 39 +38= 77 stars.

Add Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.4

Question 1.
47 + 36 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 79

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 28 and 26 we will get the result as 54.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-63
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 28 and 26. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 28 + 26 is 54.

Question 2.
51 + 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 80

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 51 and 28 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-1
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 51 and 28. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 51 + 28 is 79.

Question 3.
13 + 79 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 81

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 13 and 79 we will get the result as 92.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-2
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 13 and 79. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 13 + 79 is 92.

Question 4.
54 + 42 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 82

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 54 and 42 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-3
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 54 and 42. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 54 + 42 is 96.

Question 5.
38 + 23 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 83

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 38 and 23 we will get the result as 61.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-4
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 38 and 23. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 38 + 23 is 61.

Question 6.
45 + 44 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 84

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 45 and 44 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-5
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 45 and 44. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 45 + 44 is 89.

Question 7.
Writing
Find the sum. Write an addition story to match.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 85

Answer:
By regrouping addition of 26 and 35 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-79-6
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 26 and 35. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 26 + 35 is 89.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 35 dimes and you find 17 more. Your friend has 42 and finds 11 more. Who has more dimes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 86

Answer:
My friend has more dimes than me

Explanation:
Given that I have 35 dimes and then I found 17 more, so the total number of I had is 52 dimes, and my friend has 42 dimes and then finds 11 more so the total number of dimes my friend had is 42 + 11= 53 dimes. So on comparing, my friend has more dimes than me.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Newton plants 14 red flowers and 14 purple flowers. Descartes plants 26 pink flowers and 26 yellow flowers. How many flowers do Newton and Descartes plant in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 87

Answer:
The total number of flowers planted by both Newton and Descartes is 80 flowers.

Explanation:
Given that Newton has planted 14 red flowers and 14 purple flowers, so the total number of plants that was planted by Newton is 14 + 14= 28 flowers. And Descartes has planted 26 pink flowers and 26 yellow flowers so the total number of plants that were planted by Descartes is 26 + 26= 52 flowers. So the total number of flowers planted by both Newton and Descartes is 52 + 28= 80 flowers.

Question 10.
Model 56 two ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 88

Answer:
The two models of 56 is 5 tens and 6 six and the other model is 4 tens and 16 ones

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-88
To model 56 in two ways we will divide the 56 as 5 tens and 6 ones, and in another way, we will divide the 56 as 4 tens and 16 ones.

Lesson 4.5 Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers

Use any strategy to find 17 + 23.

Compare your strategy to your partner’s strategy. Are they the same or different? Explain.
_________________________________
_________________________________

Answer:
I have used the partial sum procedure and my friend has used the regrouping of addition procedure. So here the answer will be the same but the procedure is different.

Explanation:
To find 17 + 23 I have used partial sum, here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 17 + 23 which is 40. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 17 + 23 will be 30 + 10= 40. And my friend used regrouping of addition, here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two-digit numbers or larger than the two-digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 17 and 23. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 17 + 23 is 40. So here the answer will be the same but the procedure is different.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 89

Answer:
The partial sum of 43 and 17 is 60.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 43 + 17 which is 60. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 43 + 17 will be 50 + 10= 60.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 90

Answer:
The partial sum of 56 and 25 is 81.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 56 + 25 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 5 it will be 11. So the total value of 56 + 25 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 91

Answer:
The partial sum of 19 and 55 is 74.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 19 + 55 which is 74. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 5 it will be 14. So the total value of 19 + 55 will be 60 + 14= 74.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 92

Answer:
The partial sum of 41 and 52 is 93.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 41 + 52 which is 93. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 2 it will be 3. So the total value of 41 + 52 will be 90 + 3= 93.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 93

Answer:
The partial sum of 47 and 26 is 73.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 47 + 26 which is 73. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 47 + 26 will be 60 + 13= 73.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 94

Answer:
The partial sum of 33 and 49 is 82.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 33 + 49 which is 82. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 9 it will be 12. So the total value of 33 + 49 will be 70 + 12= 82.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 95

Answer:
The partial sum of 29 and 22 is 51.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 29 + 22 which is 51. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 2 it will be 11. So the total value of 29 + 22 will be 40 + 11= 51.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 96

Answer:
The partial sum of 54 and 44 is 98.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 54 + 44 which is 98. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 4 it will be 8. So the total value of 54 + 44 will be 90 + 8= 98.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 97

Answer:
The partial sum of 36 and 45 is 81.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 36 + 45 which is 81. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 5 it will be 11. So the total value of 36 + 45 will be 70 + 11= 81.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 98

Answer:
The partial sum of 24 and 16 is 40.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 24 + 16 which is 40. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 30 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 6 it will be 10. So the total value of 30 + 10 will be 30 + 10= 40.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 99

Answer:
The partial sum of 37 and 46 is 83.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 37 + 46 which is 83. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 6 it will be 13. So the total value of 70 + 13 will be 70 + 13= 83.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 100

Answer:
The partial sum of 18 and 59 is 77.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 18 + 59 which is 77. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 9 it will be 17. So the total value of 18 + 59 will be 60 + 17= 77.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 101

Answer:
The partial sum of 61 and 34 is 95.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 61 + 34 which is 95. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 4 it will be 5. So the total value of 61 + 34 will be 90 + 5= 95.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 102

Answer:
The partial sum of 23 and 28 is 51.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 23 + 28 which is 51. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 8 it will be 11. So the total value of 23 + 28 will be 40 + 11= 51.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 103

Answer:
The partial sum of 42 and 57 is 99.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 42 + 57 which is 99. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 7 it will be 9. So the total value of 42 + 57 will be 90 + 9= 99.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 104

Answer:
The partial sum of 73 and 17 is 90.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 73 + 17 which is 60. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 7 and 3 it will be 10. So the total value of 73 + 17 will be 80 + 10= 90.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 105

Answer:
The partial sum of 82 and 12 is 94.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 82 + 12 which is 94. So here first we will add tens which are 80 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 90 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 2 it will be 10. So the total value of 82 + 12 will be 90 + 4= 94.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 106

Answer:
The partial sum of 15 and 77 is 92.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 15 + 77 which is 92. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 70 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 7 it will be 12. So the total value of 15 + 77 will be 80 + 12= 92.

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes finds 38 + 53. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 107

Answer:
No, Descartes is not correct.

Explanation:
No, Descartes is not correct. As Descartes just performed the addition and he placed the carry forward in the result. Descartes should not place the carry forward into the result, it should be added to the next addend. So Descartes was not correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Are there more state parks in North Carolina and Kentucky or in Kentucky and South Carolina?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 108
There are more state parks in ___ and ___.

Answer:
There are more state parks in South Carolina and Kentucky.

Explanation:
Given that the state of North Carolina has 29 state parks and 38 state parks in the state of Kentucky, so the total number of state parks in both North Carlina and Kentucky is 29 + 38= 67 state parks. And the number of state parks in the state of South Carolina is 43, so the total number of state parks in both South Carlina and Kentucky is 43 + 38= 81 state parks. So there are more state parks in South Carolina and Kentucky. On comparing 81 is greater than 67.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
Are there more students in first and second grade or in first and third grade?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 109
There are more students in ___ and __ grade.

Explanation:
Given that the state first grade has 37 students and 53 students in the second grade, so the total number of students in both first grade and second grade is 37 + 53= 90 students. And the number of students in the third grade 49, so the total number of students in both first grade and third grade is 37 + 49= 86. So there are more students in first grade and second grade than first grade and third grade.

Practice Adding Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 110

Answer:
The partial sum of 63 and 12 is 75.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 63 + 12 which is 75. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 2 it will be 5. So the total value of 63 + 12 will be 60 + 5= 65.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 111

Answer:
The partial sum of 32 and 58 is 90.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 32 + 58 which is 90. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 50 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 8 it will be 10. So the total value of 32 + 58 will be 32 + 58= 90.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 112

Answer:
The partial sum of 53 and 38 is 91.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 53 + 38 which is 91. So here first we will add tens which are 50 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 8 it will be 11. So the total value of 53 + 38 will be 80 + 11= 91.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 114

Answer:
The partial sum of 13 and 39 is 52.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 13 + 39 which is 52. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 40 and now we will add ones which are 3 and 9 it will be 12. So the total value of 13 + 39 will be 40 + 12= 52.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 115

Answer:
The partial sum of 62 and 18 is 80.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 62 + 18 which is 80. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 8 it will be 10. So the total value of 62 + 18 will be 70 + 10= 80.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 116

Answer:
The partial sum of 48 and 16 is 64.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 48 + 16 which is 64. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 8 and 6 it will be 14. So the total value of 48 + 16 will be 50 + 14= 64.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 117

Answer:
The partial sum of 11 and 66 is 77.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 11 + 66 which is 77. So here first we will add tens which are 10 and 60 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 6 it will be 77. So the total value of 11 + 66 will be 70 + 7= 77.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 118

Answer:
The partial sum of 64 and 21 is 85.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 64 + 21 which is 85. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 1 it will be 5. So the total value of 64 + 21 will be 80 + 5= 85.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 119

Answer:
The partial sum of 79 and 14 is 93.

Explanation:
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 79 + 14 which is 93. So here first we will add tens which are 70 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 9 and 4 it will be 13. So the total value of 79 + 14 will be 80 + 13= 93.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 120

Answer:
The missing digits are 6, 8, 6, 2, 2, 2.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-2nd-Grade-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-120
To find the missing digits, in the first image we can see that the sum is 1 and one of the addends is 5 so to get the sum as 1 we will place 6, so the sum will be 81 and the addend will be 36. And in the second image, we can see that the sum is 97, and the other addend is 5 so let’s take the other addend to be 2 so the missing digit is 2 and to find the other addend we will subtract the 32 with the sum 97 which is 97 – 32= 65. And in the third image, we can see that the addend is 48 and the other addend with digit 4 so by adding the sum will be 72 so to find the other addend we will subtract the addend 48 with the result 72 so the other addend will be 72 – 48= 24.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Do more people attend the show on Monday and Tuesday or on Tuesday and Wednesday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 121

Answer:
More people attended the show on Tuesday and Wednesday.

Explanation:
Given that the number of people on Monday is 48 people and the number of people on Tuesday is 26 people, so the number of people on Monday and Tuesday is 48 + 26= 74 people. And the number of people on Wednesday is 56 people, so the number of people on Tuesday and Wednesday is 26 + 56= 82 people. So more people attended the show on Tuesday and Wednesday than Monday and Tuesday.

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 122

Answer:
Purple is Shortest,
Red is Longer,
Purple is Longest.

Explanation:
In the above, we can see that the purple crayon is the shortest crayon and red crayon is a longer crayon and the green crayon is the longest crayon.

Lesson 4.6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Add the circled numbers first. Then find the sum of all three numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 123

Answer:
In the first image, the sum of the circled numbers is 60,
In the second image, the sum of the circled numbers is 50,
In the third image, the sum of the circled numbers is 58,

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see that 34 and 26 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 34 + 26= 60. And the number which is not circled is 24, so the sum of all three numbers is 60 + 24= 84.
In the second image, we can see that 26 and 24 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 24 + 26= 50. And the number which is not circled is 34, so the sum of all three numbers is 50 + 34= 84.
In the third image, we can see that 34 and 24 are circled, so the sum of circled numbers is 34 + 24= 58. And the number which is not circled is 26, so the sum of all three numbers is 58 + 26= 84.

What is the same? What is different?
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________

Answer:
In the above problem, the result is the same and the circled numbers are different and the sum of circles numbers is different.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 125

Answer:
On adding 16 + 34 + 21 we will get the result as  71.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 4 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 16 + 34 + 21= 71.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 126

Answer:
On adding 33 + 15 + 17 we will get the result as  65.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 10 + 5= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 33 + 15 + 17= 65.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 127

Answer:
On adding 31 + 12 + 24 we will get the result as  67.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, so first, we will add 31 + 12 and the result is 43. Now we will perform the addition for all three numbers and the result will be 31 + 12 + 24= 67.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 128

Answer:
On adding 25 + 15 + 13 we will get the result as  53.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 5 + 5 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 10 + 3= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 25 + 15 + 13= 53.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 129

Answer:
On adding 29 + 22 + 23 we will get the result as 74.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 11 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 2 which makes 11 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 11 + 3= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 29 + 22 + 23= 74.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 130

Answer:
On adding 19 + 32 + 11 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 1 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 19 + 32 + 11= 62.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 131

Answer:
On adding 18 + 28 + 42 we will get the result as  88.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 10 + 8= 18. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 18 + 28 + 42= 88.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 132

Answer:
On adding 53 + 13 + 19 we will get the result as  85.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 53 + 13 + 19= 85.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 133

Answer:
On adding 27 + 27 + 25 we will get the result as 79.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 5 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 7, so 12 + 7= 19. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 27 + 27 + 25= 79.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 134

Answer:
On adding 23 + 42 + 17 we will get the result as 82.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 23 + 42 + 17= 82.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 135

Answer:
On adding 18 + 34 + 26 we will get the result as 78.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 53 + 13 + 19= 85.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 136

Answer:
On adding 51 + 22 + 26 we will get the result as 99.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum by adding two addends which help us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 2 + 6 which makes 8 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 8 + 1= 9. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 51 + 22 + 26= 99.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 137

Answer:
On adding 30 + 45 + 19 we will get the result as 94.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 14 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 5 which makes 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 14 + 0= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 30 + 45 + 19= 94.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 138

Answer:
On adding 24 + 21 + 28 we will get the result as 73.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 4 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 12 + 1= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 24 + 21 + 28= 73.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 139

Answer:
On adding 39 + 12 + 31 we will get the result as 82.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 1 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 13. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 39 + 12 + 31= 82.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 140

Answer:
On adding 14 + 20 + 35 we will get the result as 69.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 4 + 5 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 9 + 0= 9. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 14 + 20 + 35= 69.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 141

Answer:
On adding 46 + 11 +32 we will get the result as 89.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 8 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 2 which makes 8 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 8 + 1= 9. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 46 + 11 +32= 89.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 142

Answer:
On adding 35 + 33 + 29 we will get the result as 97.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 11 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 +3 which makes 11 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 11, so 11 + 5= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 35 + 33 + 29= 97.

Question 19.
Reasoning
You make a 10 to add 16, 38, and 24. Which digits do you add first? Explain.
________________________

________________________

________________________

Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 143

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Newton is $51.

Explanation:
Given the cost the items that Newton has bought is, the cost of the first item is $12, the cost of second item is $21 and the cost of third item is $18. So the total money spent by the Newton is 12 + 21 + 18= $51. The total amount spent by the Newton is $51.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
Descartes buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 144

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Descartes is $47.

Explanation:
Given of the cost the items that Descartes has bought is, the cost of the first item is $19, the cost of second item is $15 and the cost of third item is $13. So the total money spent by the Descartes is 19 + 15 + 13= $47. The total amount spent by the Descartes is $47.

Question 21.
Newton sells 2 large candles and 1 small candle. How much money does he earn?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 145

Answer:
The total amount earn by the Newton is $66.

Explanation:
Given the cost the large candle that Newton has bought is $26, and the cost of the small candle is $14, so Newton sells two large candles which is 2 × 26= $52 and one small candle which is 1 × 14= $14  . So the total money earn by the Newton is 52 + 14= $66. The total amount earn by the Newton is $66.

Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 4.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 146

Answer:
On adding 11 + 23 + 47 we will get the result as 81.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 +3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 11 + 23 + 47= 81.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 147

Answer:
On adding 32 + 14 + 28 we will get the result as 74.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 +2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 4= 14. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 32 + 14 + 28= 74.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 148

Answer:
On adding 16 + 37 + 33 we will get the result as 86.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 6= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 16 + 37 + 33= 86.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 149

Answer:
On adding 43 + 17 + 37 we will get the result as 97.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 10, so 10 + 7= 16. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 43 + 17 + 37= 97.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 150

Answer:
On adding 15 + 44 + 11 we will get the result as 70.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 5 + 4 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 9, so 9 + 1= 10. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 15 + 44 + 11= 70.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 151

Answer:
On adding 16 + 29 + 38 we will get the result as 83.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 15 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 6 which makes 15 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 15 + 8= 23. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 16 + 29 + 38= 83.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 152

Answer:
On adding 31 + 28 + 12 we will get the result as 71.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 1, so 10 + 1= 11. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 31 + 28 + 12= 71.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 153

Answer:
On adding 56 + 26 + 13 we will get the result as 95.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 6 + 6 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 3, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 56 + 26 + 13= 95.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 154

Answer:
On adding 35 + 23 + 29 we will get the result as 87.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 12 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 9 + 3 which makes 12 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 12 + 3= 15. Now we will perform the addition and the result will be 35 + 23 + 29= 87.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Solve two different ways.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 155

Answer:
The sum of the three numbers is 38 + 36 + 22= 96.

Explanation:
The two different ways to add the above problem is, the first method is we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 6, so 10 + 6= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 38 + 36 + 22= 96. The other way to find the addition of the numbers is we will add the numbers in any order, first we will add 8 + 6 which is 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 14 + 2= 16 and the regrouping of addition and the result will be 38 + 36 + 22= 96.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes buys the items shown. How much money does he spend?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 156

Answer:
The total amount spent by the Descartes is $81.

Explanation:
Given the cost the items that Descartes has bought is, the cost of the first item is $41, the cost of second item is $27 and the cost of third item is $13. So the total money spent by the Descartes is 41 + 27 + 13= $81. The total amount spent by the Descartes is $81.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Your cousin buys the items shown. How much money does she spend?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 157

Answer:
The total amount spent by the my cousin is $67.

Explanation:
Given of the cost the items that my cousin has bought is, the cost of the first item is $24, the cost of second item is $7 and the cost of third item is $36. So the total money spent by my cousin is 24 + 7 + 36= $67. The total amount spent by mu cousin is $67.

Review & Refresh

Is the number even or odd?

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 158

Answer:
The number 18 is even number.

Explanation:
The number 18 is even number as the number 18 has two pairs of 9 and the number is divided by 2 and if the number is not divisible by 2 then it will be odd number. As 18 is divisible by 2 so the number 18 is a even number.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 159

Answer:
The number 17 is odd number.

Explanation:
The number 17 is even number as the number 17 is not divisible by 2 and if the number is not divisible by 2 then it will be odd number. As the number 17 is not divisible by 2 so the number 17 is odd number.

Lesson 4.7 More Problem Solving: Addition

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

There are 11 red ants and 14 black ants. 15 more black ants join them. How many ants are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 160
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 160.1

Answer:
The total number of ants is 40 ants.

Explannation:
Given that there are 11 red ants and 14 black ants and 15 more black ants join with them, so to find the number of ants in total we will add the given number of ants, so the total number of ants is 11 + 14 + 15= 40 ants.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 66 marbles. You have 26 fewer marbles than your friend. How many marbles does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 161

Answer:
My friend has 40 marbles.

Explanation:
As I have 66 marbles and my friend has 26 fewer marbles than me, so to find how many marbles does my friend had we will subtract 66 – 26= 40 marbles. So my friend has 40 marbles.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You collect 16 red leaves, 21 orange leaves, and 14 yellow leaves. How many leaves do you collect in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 162

Answer:
The number of leaves collected by me is 16 + 21 + 14= 51 leaves.

Explanation:
As I have collected 16 red leaves, 21 orange leaves and 14 yellow leaves, so the number of leaves collected by me is 16 + 21 + 14= 51 leaves.

Question 3.
A dentist has 41 toothbrushes. She buys some more. Now she has 85. How many toothbrushes did the dentist buy?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 163

Answer:
The number of toothbrushes did the dentist bought is 85 – 41= 44 toothbrushes.

Explanation:
As dentist has 41 toothbrushes and she bought some more, so now she had 85. So the number of toothbrushes did the dentist bought is 85 – 41= 44 toothbrushes.

Question 4.
You make 17 origami dogs and 13 origami fish. Your friend makes 12 more origami animals than you. How many origami animals does your friend make?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 164
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 165

Answer:
The number of origami animals does my friend make is 42 animals.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-165
As I make 17 origami dogs and 13 origami fish so the total origami animals do I make is 17 + 13= 30 animals. And my friend makes 12 more origami animals than me, so the number of origami animals does my friend make is
30 + 12= 42 animals.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You make a paper chain. Your friend adds 24 links to your chain. Now there are 57. How many links were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 166

Answer:
The number of links is 33 links.

Explanation:
As I make a paper chain and my friend adds 24 links to my chain. Now there are 57 paper chains, so the number of links there to start is 57 – 24= 33 links.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You have some stickers. Your friend gives you 32 more stickers. Now you have 58. How many stickers did you have to start? Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 167

Answer:
The number of stickers I have to start is 58 – 32 = 26 stickers.

Explanation:
As I have some stickers and my friend gives me 32 more stickers. Now I have 58, so the number of stickers I have to start is 58 – 32 = 26 stickers.

Question 6.
There are 3 buses. There are 29 students on each of the first 2 buses. There are 88 students in all. How many students are on the third bus?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 168

Answer:
The number of students are on the third bus is 30 students.

Explanation:
As there are 3 buses and there are 29 students on each of the first 2 buses so the students in the two buses is
2 × 29= 58 students and there are 88 students in all so the number of students are on the third bus is
88 – 58= 30 students.

More Problem Solving: Addition Homework & Practice 4.7

Question 1.
You study for 31 minutes. You study 11 fewer minutes than your friend. How long does your friend study?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 169

Answer:
My friend studied 20 minutes longer.

Explanation:
As I have studied for 31 minutes and  studied 11 fewer minutes than my friend so how long does your friend studied is 31 – 11= 20 minutes.

Question 2.

You see 23 red cars, 25 black cars, and 15 blue cars. How many cars do you see in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 170

Answer:
The number of cars I have seen is 63 cars.

Explanation:
As I saw 23 red cars, 25 black cars, and 15 blue cars, so the number of cars I have seen is 23 + 25 + 15= 63 cars. The number of cars I have seen is 63 cars.

Question 3.
Number Sense
Your friend scores 29 points. You score 16 more points than your friend. Use the given numbers to find how many points you and your friend score in all.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 171
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 172

Answer:
The total points I have scored is 45 points and the total points scored by me and my friend is 74 points.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-172

As my friend scores 29 points and I score 16 more points than your friend. So the total points I have scored is
29 + 16= 45 points. And the total points scored by me and my friend is 74 points.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have some plastic bugs. Your friend gives you 37 more plastic bugs. Now you have 59. How many plastic bugs did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 173

Answer:
The number of plastic bugs I do have to start is 22 plastic bugs.

Explanation:
As I have some plastic bugs and my friend gives me 37 more plastic bugs. So now I have 59 plastic bugs, so the number of plastic bugs I do have to start is 59 – 37= 22 plastic bugs.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
There are 3 subway cars. There are 36 people on each of the first 2 subway cars. There are 92 people in all. How many people are on the third subway car?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 174

Answer:
The number of people in the third subway car is 20 people.

Explanation:
As there are 3 subway cars and there are 36 people on each of the first 2 subway cars, so the number of people in the 2 subway cars is 2 × 36= 72 people. There are 92 people in all and the number of people in the third subway car is 92 – 72= 20 people.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
50 – 10 = ___

Answer:
The difference between 50 and 10 is 40.

Explanation:
On subtracting 50 – 10 we will get the result as 40.

Question 7.
90 – 40 = ___

Answer:
The difference between 90 and 40 is 50.

Explanation:
On subtracting 90 – 40 we will get the result as 50.

Fluently Add within 100 Performance Task 4

Question 1.
a. You swim for 37 minutes on Monday. You swim 12 more minutes on Tuesday than on Monday. How many minutes do you swim in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 175
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 176

Answer:
The total number of minutes do I swim in all is 86 minutes.

Explanation:
As I swim for 37 minutes on Monday and again swim for 12 more minutes on Tuesday than on Monday, so the number of minutes I have a swim on Tuesday is 37 + 12= 49 minutes. And the total number of minutes do I swim in all is 37 + 49= 86 minutes.

b. Do you swim an even or odd number of minutes in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 177

Answer:
The number of minutes 86 is an even number.

Explanation:
As the total number of minutes do I swim in all is 86 minutes and 86 is divisible by 2 so the number of minutes 86 is an even number.

Question 2.
a. There are 35 girls and some boys signed up for swim lessons this year. There are 83 kids signed up in all. Then some more boys sign up. Now there are 56 boys signed up. How many more boys signed up for swim lessons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 178

Answer:
The number of more boys signed up is 8 more boys.

Explanation:
As there are 35 girls and some boys signed up for swim lessons this year. And there are 83 kids signed up in all, so the number of boys is 83 – 35= 48 boys and then some more boys sign up. Now there are 56 boys signed up, so the number of more boys signed up is 56 – 48= 8 more boys.

b. Last year there were 95 kids signed up for swim lessons. 45 were girls. Are there more boys signed up for swim lessons this year or last year?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 179

Answer:
The more boys signed up for swimming is last year than this year.

Explanation:
As in the last year, there were 95 kids signed up for swim lessons and in that 45 were girls and the number of boys is 95 – 45= 50  boys. And the more boys signed up for swimming is last year as the total number of boys in the last year is 56 boys.

Fluently Add within 100 Activity

Solve and Cover: Addition

To Play: Place a Solve and Cover: Addition Sum Card on each box. Players take turns. On your turn, flip over a Solve and Cover: Addition Problem Card. Solve the problem. Place the problem card on the sum. Play until all sums are covered.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 180

Fluently Add within 100 Chapter Practice

4.1 Use Partial Sums to Add

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 181

Answer:
The partial sum of 35 + 22 will be 50 + 7= 57.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-181
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 35 + 22 which is 57. So here first we will add tens which are 30 and 20 we will add both the numbers which will be 50 and now we will add ones which are 5 and 2 will be 7. So the total value of 35 + 22 will be 50 + 7= 57.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 182

Answer:
The partial sum of 81 + 8 will be 80 + 9= 89.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-182
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 81 + 8 which is 89. So here first we will add tens which are 80 and 0 we will add both the numbers which will be 80 and now we will add ones which are 1 and 8 will be 9. So the total value of 81 + 8 will be 81 + 8= 89.

4.2 More Partial Sums

Question 3.
26 + 43 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 183

Answer:
The partial sum of 26 + 43 will be 60 + 9= 69.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-183
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 26 + 43 which is 69. So here first we will add tens which are 20 and 40 we will add both the numbers which will be 60 and now we will add ones which are 6 and 3 will be 69. So the total value of 26 + 43 will be 26 + 43= 69.

Question 4.
64 + 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 184

Answer:
The partial sum of 64 + 19 will be 70 + 13= 83.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-184
Here partial sum is the sum of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 64 + 19 which is 83. So here first we will add tens which are 60 and 10 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 4 and 9 will be 13. So the total value of 64 + 19 will be 70 + 13= 83.

4.3 Regroup to Add

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You want to complete 40 hours of volunteer work this year. You complete 28 hours during the school year and 13 during the summer. Do you reach your goal?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 185
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 186

Answer:
Yes, I have reached my goal.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-186
As I want to complete 40 hours of volunteer work this year and I have complete 28 hours during the school year and 13 during the summer so the total number of hours I have completed is 28 + 13= 41 hours. And I have reached my goal.

4.4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 187

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 14 and 77 we will get the result as 91.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 14 and 77. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 14 + 77 is 91.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 188

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 35 and 35 we will get the result as 70.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 35 and 35. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 35 + 35 is 70.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 189

Answer:
By regrouping the addition of 43 and 49 we will get the result as 92.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-187
Here, regrouping is defined as the process of making and then carrying out the operation like addition with the two digit numbers or larger than the two digit numbers. And we use regrouping in addition when the sum of two digits in the place value column is greater than nine. And Regrouping in subtraction is a method of interchanging one ten into ten ones. This regrouping of subtraction is used to work out the different subtraction problems. Here in the above image, we can see that the addition of 43 and 49. So by regrouping, we will carry forward one and the sum of 43 + 49 is 92.

4.5 Practice Adding Two-Digit numbers

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 190

Answer:
The sum of 36 + 38 is 74.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 36 + 38 is 74.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 191

Answer:
The sum of 62 + 29 is 91.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 62 + 29 is 91.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 192

Answer:
The sum of 25 + 45 is 70.

Explanation:
The addition of the two numbers is 25 + 45 is 70.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 193

Answer:
The missing digits are 1, 4, 8, 7, 5, 0.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-193
To find the missing digits, in the first image we can see that the sum is 9 and one of the addends is 5 so to get the sum as 9 we will place 4 and place the 1 to get the sum as 4, so the sum will be 49 and the addend will be 34 and 15. And in the second image, we can see that the sum is 6, and the other addend is 8 so let’s take the other addend to be 8 so the missing digit is 8 and by the regrouping of addition we will get the result as 76, so the missing digit is 7. And in the third image, we can see that the addend is 14 and the other addend with digit 6 so by placing the digit as 5 the sum will be 70 and the missing digits will be 5 and 0.

4.6 Add Up to 3 Two-Digit Numbers

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 194

Answer:
On adding 12 + 32+ 18 we will get the result as 62.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 2 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 2, so 10 + 2= 12. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 12 + 32+ 18= 62.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 195

Answer:
On adding 50 + 28 + 18 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 16 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 8 which makes 16 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 16 + 0= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 50 + 28 + 18= 96.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 196

Answer:
On adding 50 + 28 + 18 we will get the result as 96.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 16 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 8 which makes 16 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 0, so 16 + 0= 16. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 50 + 28 + 18= 96.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 197

Answer:
On adding 17 + 26 + 12 we will get the result as 55.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 9 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7 + 2 which makes 9 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 6, so 9+ 6= 15. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 17 + 26 + 12= 55.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 198

Answer:
On adding 27 + 33 + 18 we will get the result as 78.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 10 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 7+ 3 which makes 10 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 8, so 10 + 8= 18. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 27 + 33 + 18= 78.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 199

Answer:
On adding 15 + 18 + 16 we will get the result as 49.

Explanation:
In the above image, given that three numbers for addition. Here we can add the three numbers by any order, and we can make the sum 14 by adding which helps us to perform the addition easily. So we will add the right side digits 8 + 6 which makes 14 and then we will add the remaining digit which is 5, so 14 + 0= 14. Now we will perform the regrouping of addition and the result will be 15 + 18 + 16= 49.

Question 19.
Modeling Real Life
You, Newton, and Descartes play paddle ball. You record how many times each of you hits the ball in a row. How many times is the ball hit in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 200
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 201

4.7 More Problem Solving: Addition

Question 20.
Modeling Real Life
You pick 11 berries and 23 apples. Your friend picks 18 more pieces of fruit than you. How many pieces does your friend pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 202
Step 1: How many pieces of fruit do you pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 203

Answer:
The number of pieces of fruits does I have is 34 fruits.

Explanation:
As I pick 11 berries and 23 apples, so the number of fruits I have picked is 11 + 23= 34 fruits.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-203
Step 2: How many pieces of fruit does your friend pick?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 204

Answer:
The number of fruits that my friend picked is 52 fruits.

Explanation:
As I pick 11 berries and 23 apples and my friend picks 18 more pieces of fruit than me, so the number of fruits that my friend picked is 34 + 18= 52 fruits.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-2-Chapter-4-Fluently-Add-within-100-203

Fluently Add within 100 Cumulative Practice 1-4

Question 1.
Which equation represents the array?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 205

Answer:
The equation that represents the array is 3 + 3 + 3 + 3= 12.

Explanation:
The equation that represents the array is 3 + 3 + 3 + 3= 12 as the array has three rows and four columns, so the equation is 3 + 3+ 3 +3 = 12.

Question 2.
Which expressions are equal to 62 + 24?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 206

Answer:
The expressions which are equal to 62 + 24 is 60 + 20 + 2 + 4, 60 + 26, 80 + 6.

Explanation:
The expressions which are equal to 62 + 24 and the result is 86 so the expressions which are equal to the sum of 86 is 60 + 20 + 2 + 4 and the result is 86, 60 + 26 the result is 86, 80 + 6 the result is 6.

Question 3.
Is each sum equal to 7 + 4?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 207

Answer:
The equation which is equal to 7 + 4 is 10 + 1.

Explanation:
The sum which is equal to 7 + 4 is 10 + 1 as the sum of both equations is 11 so they both are equal.

Question 4.
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 208

Answer:
The number line equation is 10 + 40= 50.

Explanation:
The equation that matches the number line is 10 + 40 and the result is 50. As we start from 10 and then jump from 10 and the size of the jump is 10 and we will take up to 50 jumps. So the equation of the number line is
10 + 40= 50.

Question 5.
Which expressions do you need to regroup to solve?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 209

Answer:
The expressions which we need to regroup is 54 + 38 and the result is 92 and the other expression is 62 + 28 and the result is 90.

Explanation:
The expressions do we need to regroup and is 54 + 38 as by adding 8 + 4 we will get the result as 12, so we will regroup and add 54 + 38 and the result will be 92. And the other expression is 62 + 88 as by adding 2 + 8 we will get the result as 10, so we will regroup and add 62 + 28 and the result will be 90.

Question 6.
Which equation has an even sum greater than 14?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 210

Answer:
The equation that has an even sum whihc is greater than 14 is 8 + 8 which is 16.

Explanation:
In the above, we can see that even sum greater than 14 is 8 + 8 as the sum of 8 + 8 is 16 and 16 is divisible by 2 which is an even number and the number 16 is greater than 14.

Question 7.
There are 4 rows of trees. Each row has 5 trees. How many trees are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 211

Answer:
The number of trees there in all is 20 trees.

Explanation:
As there are 4 rows of trees and each row has 5 trees, so the number of trees is 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4= 20 trees. So the number of trees is 20 trees.

Question 8.
You have 16 oranges. You give 7 away. How many oranges do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 212

Answer:
The number of oranges does I have left is 11 oranges.

Explanation:
As I have 16 oranges and I gave 7 away, so the total number of oranges does I have left is 16 – 7= 11 oranges.

Question 9.
Find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 213

Answer:
The result of the first image is 71 and the result of the second image is 87.

Explanation:
The sum of the first image is 24 + 12 + 35 and the result is 71 and the sum of the second image is 31 + 14 + 42 and the result is 87.

Question 10.
Find the sum. Write the double you used.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 215

Answer:
The sum of the double of the addends is 30.

Explanation:
The sum of 7 + 8 is 15, so the double of the addends is 14 + 16, and the sum of the addends is 14 + 16= 30.

Question 11.
Break apart the addends to find 42 + 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 216

Answer:
The Break apart of the addend is 42 + 37= 79.

Explanation:
Here to break apart the addends of part of the sequence and a sequence that sets the numbers in order. This partial sum calculates partial sum which will be working one place value column at a time and then add all the partial sums to find the total. And this partial sum can be added in any order but working with the left to right is the usual procedure. So here we will add tens and add the ones and then we will add the partial sum to find the whole sum of the 42 + 37 which is 79. So here first we will add tens which are 40 and 30 we will add both the numbers which will be 70 and now we will add ones which are 2 and 7 will be 9. So the total value of 70 + 9 will be 70 + 9= 79.

Question 12.
You have 64 craft sticks for a project. 22 are red. The rest are yellow. You buy 39 more yellow craft sticks. How many yellow craft sticks do you have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 217
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 218

Answer:
The total number of yellow craft sticks do I have is 81 sticks.

Explanation:
As I have 64 craft sticks for a project and there are 22 red sticks so the number of yellow sticks is 64 – 22= 42 yellow sticks and I bought 39 more yellow craft sticks, so the number of yellow sticks is 42 + 39= 81 yellow craft sticks.

Conclusion:

I wish that the useful data of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 Answer Key is provided here. This BIM Book Solutions of Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 is prepared by the experts. Get the detailed solution for each and every topic of Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 chapter. If you have any queries, leave a comment below. Please share this Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 4 Fluently Add within 100 with your friends for helping them to complete homework in time.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division: Get the solutions for all the questions in BIM Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Textbook. This answer key is useful for the students while preparing for the exam or practice test. In the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Solutions PDF, students can see the detailed explanation for each problem that helps them to understand the concept easily.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Download Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Understand Multiplication and Division Answer Key PDF for free of cost. The different lessons in Grade 3 Chapter 1 are Use Equal Groups to Multiply, Use Number Lines to Multiply, Use Arrays to Multiply, Multiply in Any Order, Divide: Size of Equal Groups, Divide: Number of Equal Groups, and Use Number Lines to Divide.

Here, you can get the different methods of solving multiplication and division problems. Solve all the questions from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division. Tap on the links mentioned below to get help while solving multiplication and division problems.

Lesson 1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Lesson 2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Lesson 3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Lesson 4 Multiply in Any Order

Lesson 5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Lesson 6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Lesson 7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Performance Task

Lesson 1.1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Put 24 counters into equal groups. Draw to show your groups.
Answer:
24 counters in four equal groups

Explanation:
To keep 24 counters into an equal group, we will find the factors of 24 and then we can put 24 counters into equal groups. The factors of 24 are 2,3,4,6,8,12. Now we can pick any of the numbers from the factors of 24 and then put these 24 counters in equal groups. Let’s take four equal groups and arrange 24 counters in four equal groups as shown in the below image.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters into a different number of equal groups. Draw to show your groups.
Answer:
7 counters in the first group, 8 counters in the second group, 6 counters in the third group, and 4 counters in the fourth group.

Explanation:
In this, we will take some number of groups and in that, we will place some different number of counters in that group. In the given image, we will take four groups, and we will place 7 counters in the first group, 8 counters in the second group, 6 counters in the third group, and 4 counters in the fourth group.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Structure
Compare your models. How are the models the same? How are they different?
Answer:
In the first model, we can see that there is an equal number of counters in each group, and in the second model, we can see the different number of counters in each group. They are the same with an equal number of groups.

Show and Grow

Use the model to complete the statements.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 1
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ +____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
4 groups of 5,
5+5+5+5= 20,
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups and in each group, 5 counters are there, and the product is 4×5= 20. And we can also write by adding 5+5+5+5= 20. There are 4 groups of 5.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 2
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
2 groups of 6,
6+6= 12,
2×6= 12.

Explanation:
As we can see there are 2 groups of 6 which are two groups with the number 6 in the box. So the product of the two groups is 2×6= 12 and the sum of the two groups is 6+6= 12.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 3
____ groups of ____
____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
2 groups of 9
9+9= 18,
2×9= 18.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 groups with 9 counters in each group, and the product is 2×9= 18. By adding these two groups we will get 18, which is 9+9= 18.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.
Question 4.
4 groups of 2
____ + ____ + ____ + ____ =____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
4 groups of 2
2+2+2+2= 8,
4×2= 8.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups with 2 counters in each group, and the product is 4×2= 8. By adding these four groups we will get 8, which is 2+2+2+2= 18.

Question 5.
3 groups of 5
____ + ____ + ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
Answer:
3 groups of 5,
5+5+5= 15,
3×5= 15.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 3 groups with 5 counters in each group, and the product is 3×5= 15. By adding these three groups we will get 15, which is 5+5+5= 15.

Write the addition equation as a multiplication equation.
Question 6.
8 + 8 + 8 = 24
Answer:
3×8= 24.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 3 times 8 which can be written as 3×8= 24.

Question 7.
7 + 7 + 7 + 7 + 7 = 35

Answer:
5×7= 35.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 5 times 7 which can be written as 5×7= 35.

Question 8.
You Be The Teacher
Newton says he circled 3 groups of 4 counters. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 4
Answer:
No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 groups of 3 counters. So Newton is not correct.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You wash 5 cars. How many times do you wash?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 5
Answer: 20 tires.

Explanation:
As the car has 4 tires and there are 5 cars to wash, so there are 5 groups of 4. The number of tires to wash is
5×4= 20. So there are 20 tires to wash.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Question 1.
You buy 6 packs of 10 trading cards. How many cards do you buy in all?
Complete the statement: ______ groups of ________
Repeated addition equation:
Multiplication equation:
You buy _____ cards in all.

Answer:
6 groups of 10
6×10= 60.

Explanation:
As there are 6 packs of 10 trading cards, which means 6 groups of 10. So 6×10= 60 cards can we buy in all.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You buy 8 packs of 4 highlighters. How many highlighters do you buy in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 6
Answer:
8 groups of 4
8×4= 32

Explanation:
As there 8 packs of 4 highlighters, which means 8 groups of 4. The number of highlighters bought is 8×4= 32.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You make 5 bracelets. Each of your bracelets has 3 beads. Your friend makes 6 bracelets. Each of your friend’s bracelets has 2 beads. How many beads do you and your friend use in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 7
Answer:
27 beads.

Explanation:
In this query, we can see 5 bracelets have 3 beads which are 5×3= 15, and a friend makes 6 bracelets that have 2 beads which are 6×2= 12. So the total number of beads used in all is 15+12= 27 beads.

Use Equal Groups to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.1

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 8
___ groups of ____
___ + ___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___
Answer:
3 groups of 4,
4+4+4= 12,
4×3= 12.

Explanation:
We can see in the above image there are 3 groups with 4 counter in each group, which means 3 groups of 4.
The sum is 4+4+4= 12 and the product is 4×3= 12.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.
Question 2.
2 groups of 8
___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___
Answer:
8+8= 16
2×8= 16.

Explanation:
2 groups of 8 means, there are 2 groups with 8 counters in each group. So the sum is 8+8= 16 and the product is 2×8= 16.

Question 3.
5 groups of 3
___ + ___ + ___ + ___ + ___ = ___
___ × ___ = ___

Answer:
3+3+3+3+3= 15,
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
5 groups of 3 means, there are 5 groups with 3 counters in each group. So the sum is 3+3+3+3+3= 15, and the product is 5×3= 15.

Write the addition equation as a multiplication equation.
Question 4.
3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 = 18
Answer:
6×3= 18.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 6 times 3, which can be written as 6×3= 18.

Question 5.
2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 + 2 = 14
Answer:
7×2= 14.

Explanation:
To write the addition equation as a multiplication equation in the above we can see 7 times 2, which can be written as 7×2= 14.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 16 action figures. Can you put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves? Explain
Answer:
No, we cannot put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves.

Explanation:
As given that we have 16 action figures and asked to determine whether it is possible to an equal number of figures on 3 shelves. As factors of 16 are 1,2,4,8,16 as 16 is not divisible by 3, so we cannot put an equal number of figures on 3 shelves.

Question 7.
Which One Doesn’tBelong?
Which one does not belong with the other two?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 9
Answer:
2 groups of 3 don’t belong with the other two.

Explanation:
As 2 groups of 3 means in 2 groups, there will be 3 counters, which does not belong to the other two. Because in the above image we can see 3 groups of 2, which means 3 groups with 2 counters in each group which is equal to 2+2+2= 6.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You make 7 gift bags for your friends. Each gift bag has 3 pom-pom pets. How many pom-pom pets are there in all?
Answer:
21 pom-pom pets.

Explanation:
As there are 7 gift bags and each gift bag has 3 pom-pom pets, so the number of pom-pom pets are 7×3= 21.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER
Newton has 2 stacks of 5 books. Descartes has 3 stacks of 4 books. How many books do they have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.1 10
Answer:
22 books.

Explanation:
As Newton has 2 stacks of 5 books, which is 2×5= 10 books and Descartes has 3 stacks of 4 books which is 3×4= 12 books. So the number of books is 10+12= 22books.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
50 + 30 = ____

Answer:
80

Explanation:
By adding 50+30 we will get 80.

Question 11.
27 + 40 = ______

Answer:
67

Explanation:
By adding 27+40 we will get 67.

Question 12.
19 + 20 = _____

Answer:
39

Explanation:
By adding 19+20 we will get 39.

Lesson 1.2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Find the sums. Use each sum as the missing addend in the next equation. Model the problems on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 1
Answer:
0+3= 3,
3+3= 6,
6+3= 9,
9+3= 12.

Explanation:
First, we must begin at 0 and then skip the count by 3’s then make jumps until you get 12.
So 3 x 4 = 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Reasoning
How can you use a number line to help you find 4 × 3?

Answer:
4×3= 12.

Explanation:
To find 4×3 using the number line, we will make a jump from 0 to 4 for 3 times.

Think and Grow: Multiplication and Number Lines

Example Find 3 × 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 2
3 × 4 means 3 groups of 4.
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Start at 0. Skip count by 4s three times.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 3
3 × 4 ____

Answer:
3 × 4 = 12
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 4.

Explanation:
To represent the given value in the number line, we will start from 0 and skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of each jump is 4.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find 2 × 4
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 4
2 × 4 = _____
Answer:
2 × 4 = 8,
Number of jumps: 2
Size of each jump: 4

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

To find the product of 2×4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s two times. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of each jump is 4.

Question 2.
Fing 6 × 3
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 5
6 × 3 = _____
Answer:
6 × 3= 18
Number of jumps: 6
Size of each jump: 3

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 6 × 3 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 3s six times. So the number of jumps is 6 and the size of each jump is 3.

Apply and Grow: Practice
Question 3.
Find 3 × 5
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 6
3 × 5 = _____
Answer:
3 × 5= 15
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 5

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 3 × 5 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 5s three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of each jump is 5.

Question 4.
Fing 5 × 4
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 7
5 × 4 = _____
Answer:
5 × 4= 20
Number of jumps: 5
Size of each jump: 4

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 5 × 4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s five times. So the number of jumps is 5 and the size of each jump is 4.

Question 5.
Find 3 × 8
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 8
Answer:
3 × 8= 24
Number of jumps: 8
Size of each jump: 3

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 3 × 8 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 3s eight times. So the number of jumps is 8 and the size of each jump is 3.

Question 6.
Structure
Draw jumps to show 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4. Think: How are they the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 9

Answer:
4 groups of 6
4×6= 24
Number of jumps: 6
Size of each jump: 4
6 groups of 4
6×4= 24
Number of jumps: 4
Size of each jump: 6
The product of 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4 is 24 this is the same in 4 groups of 6 and 6 groups of 4. The number of jumps and the size of the jumps is different.

Explanation:
To find the product of 4 × 6 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 4s six times. So the number of jumps is 6 and the size of each jump is 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
To find the product of 6 × 4 using the number line, we will start from zero and then skip the count by 6s four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of each jump is 6.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
A group of lions is called a pride. There are 2 prides in a savanna. Each pride has 9 lions. How many lions are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 10
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 11
There are ____ lions in all.

Answer:
2×9= 18 lions.

Explanation:
As there are 2 prides in the savanna and each pride has 9 lions, the total number of lions is 2×9= 18 lions.
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 9 twice. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Show and Grow

Question 7.
There are 3 bike racks at a park. Each bike rack has 4 bikes. How many bikes are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 12
Answer:
3×4= 12 bikes.

Explanation:
As there are 3 bike racks and each rack has 4 bikes, so the number of bikes are there is 3×4= 12.
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 4.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You dig 8 holes. You plant 2 flower bulbs in each hole. You have5 bulbs left. How many flower bulbs did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 13
Answer:
3×5= 15 flower bulbs.

Explanation:
The number of holes dug is 8 and in each hole, 2 flower bulbs are planted, so the number of flower bulbs planted is 2×5= 10 and still, there are 5 bulbs left. So the total number of flower bulbs is 10+5= 15. To represent this in the number line, as there are 5 bulbs added then it will be 3 groups of 5 which is 3×5= 15. So we will start from 0 then skip the count by 5 three times and the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 5.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use Number Lines to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.2

Question 1.
Find 3 × 6
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 14
3 × 6 = _____
Answer:
3 × 6= 18
Number of jumps: 3
Size of each jump: 6.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 6 three times. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 6.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Find 4 × 5
Number of jumps: _____
Size of each jump: ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 15
4 × 5 = _____
Answer:
4 × 5= 20
Number of jumps: 4
Size of each jump: 5.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 5 four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Structure
Complete the multiplication equations in two different ways. Model each equation on the number line.
____ × ____ = 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 16
Answer:
2×6= 12

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 6 two times. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

____ × ____ = 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 17
Answer:
4×3= 12

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 3 four times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Writing
Explain how you can use a number line to find 5 × 3.
Answer:
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
To represent this in the number line, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 3 five times. So the number of jumps is 5 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have6 boxes of blueberry muffins. Each box has 4 muffins. How many muffins do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.2 18
Answer:
6×4= 24.

Explanation:
As we have 6 boxes of blueberry muffins with 4  muffins in each box, which means 6×4 = 24 muffins do we have it all.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You fill 8 pages of a photo album. Each page has 3 photos. You have one photo left. How many photos did you have to start?
Answer:
25 photos.

Explanation:
The total number of pages in a photo album is 8 and each page contains 3 photos, which means 8×3= 24, so there will be a total of 24 photos. Now 1 photo left, which means 24+1= 25. So there will be a total of 25 photos.

Review & Refresh
Question 7.
9 + 8 + 2 = _____

Answer:
19.

Explanation:
On adding 9+8+2 we will get the sum as 19.

Question 8.
6 + 5 + 3 = _____

Answer:
14.

Explanation:
On adding 6+5+3 we will get the sum as 14.

Question 9.
7 + 4 + 7 = ______

Lesson 1.3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Put 24 counters into equal rows. Draw your model.
Answer:
6×4= 24.
rows and 4 columns.

Explanation:
To keep 24 counters into equal rows, we will find the factors of 24 and then we can put 24 counters into equal rows. The factors of 24 are 2,3,4,6,8,12. Now we can pick any of the numbers from the factors of 24 and then put these 24 counters in equal groups. Let’s take six equal rows and arrange 24 counters in four equal rows as shown in the below image.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters into a different number of equal rows. Draw your model.
Answer:

Question 3.
Structure Compare your models. How are the models the same? How are they different?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Multiplication and Arrays

An array is a group of objects organized into rows and columns. Each row has the same number of objects.
Example
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 2
Answer:
5 rows and 4 columns,
5+5+5+5= 20,
5×4= 20.
The total number of counters is 20.

Explanation:
From the above image, we can see there are 5 rows and 4 columns. The product is 5×4= 20 and the sum is 5+5+5+5= 20.

Question 2.
Draw an array to multiply 6 × 3.
6 × 3 = ______
Answer:
6 × 3 = 18

Explanation:
To draw an array of  6 × 3, we will place 6 rows and 3 columns. By that, we can form an array of 6×3 which is 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw an array to multiply.
Question 3.
4 × 8 = _____
Answer:
4 × 8 = 32

Explanation:
To draw an array of  4 × 8, we will place 4 rows and 8 columns. By that, we can form an array of 4×8 which is 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
3 × 9 = ____
Answer:
3×9= 27

Explanation:
To draw an array of  3×9, we will place 3 rows and 9 columns. By that, we can form an array of 3×9 which is 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
7 × 3 = _____
Answer:
7 × 3 = 21

Explanation:
To draw an array of  7×3, we will place 7 rows and 3 columns. By that, we can form an array of 7×3 which is 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
6 × 5 = _____
Answer:
6×5= 30

Explanation:
To draw an array of  6×5, we will place 6 rows and 5 columns. By that, we can form an array of 6×5 which is 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
Number Sense
Newton has a 2 × 10 array of baseballs. He adds another row. How many baseballs does he add? Write a multiplication equation for his new array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 3
He adds ______ baseballs
____ × _____ = _____
Answer:
Newton adds 30 baseballs.
3×10= 30.

Explanation:
As Newton has an array of 2 × 10 of baseballs which are 20 baseballs as he adds another row, which means 3×10 of baseballs which are 30 baseballs. So he adds 30 and 20 which is 10 baseballs Newton was added and the multiplication equation for his new array is 3×10 which is 30 baseballs.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Use 6 counters to make as many different arrays as possible using all of the counters. Draw the arrays. Then write a multiplication equation for each array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 4
Answer:
2×3= 6,
3×2= 6.

Explanation:
The different possible arrays for 6 counters are 2×3= 6 which has 2 rows and 3 columns and 3×2= 6 which has 3 rows and 2 columns.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division This array consists of 2 rows and 3 columns

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division  This array consists of 3 rows and 2 columns.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A phone has 6 rows of apps with 4 apps in each row. How many apps are on the phone?
Draw:
Equation:
There are _____ apps on the phone.

Answer:
6×4= 24

Explanation:
As a phone has 6 rows of apps with 4 apps in each row, The number of apps on the phone are 6×4= 24.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Your classroom has 3 rows of desks with 10 desks in each row. How many desks are in your classroom?
Answer:
3×10= 30 desks.

Explanation:
The number of rows in the classroom is 3 rows with 10 desks in each row, which means 3×10= 30 desks in the classroom.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A square array has an equal number of rows and columns. A farmer has 9 corn seeds to plant in a square array. Draw the square array the farmer can use to plant all of the seeds. How many rows and columns are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 5
Answer:
3×3= 9.

Explanation:
As the farmer has 9 corn seed to plant in a square array, so the possible square array is with 3 rows and 3 columns, which is 3×3= 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use Arrays to Multiply Homework & Practice 1.3

Question 1.
How many counters are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 6
Answer:
4×9= 36 counters.
4 rows, 9 columns.
9+9+9+9= 36.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 rows and 9 columns which makes 36 counters. The product is 4×9= 36 and the sum is 9+9+9+9= 36.

Draw an array to multiply.
Question 2.
9 × 2 = _____
Answer:
9×2= 18.

Explanation:
This array contains 9 rows and 2 columns which makes 18 counters. The product is 9×2= 18 and the sum is
9+9= 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
4 × 5 = _____
Answer:
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
This array contains 4 rows and 5 columns which makes 20 counters. The product is 4×5= 20 and the sum is
5+5+5+5= 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes has 24 counters. He says he can use all the counters to make an array with 3 rows. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 7
Answer:
With 3 rows and 8 columns, 24 counters can be made.

Explanation:
Yes, he is correct. With 3 rows and 8 columns, he can make 24 counters. The product of the array is 3×8= 24 and the sum of the array is 8+8+8= 24.

Question 5.
Number Sense
Newton has a 4 × 8 array of dominoes. He adds 2 more rows. How many dominoes does he add? Write a multiplication equation for his new array.
He adds _____ dominoes
_____ × ____ = _____
Answer:
Newton adds 16 dominoes,
6×8= 48.

Explanation:
As Newton has a 4×8 array of dominoes which is 32 dominoes and he adds 2 more rows, which is 4+2= 6. Then the dominoes will be a 6×8 array. And the multiplication equation for Newton’s new array is 6×8= 48. So the number of dominoes added is 48-32 which is 16 dominoes he was added.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
An art teacher hangs 2 rows of paintings with 10 paintings in each row. How many paintings does she hang?
Answer:
20 paintings.

Explanation:
As an art teacher hangs 2 rows of paintings in each row, so the number of paintings is 2×10= 20 paintings.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
A museum has 16 shark teeth to display in a square array. Draw the square array the museum can use to display all of the teeth. How many rows and columns are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.3 8
Answer:
There are 4 rows and 4 columns.

Explanation:
As the museum has 16 shark teeth to display in a square array, so the array can be written as 4×4= 16 which has 4 rows and 4 columns.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Review & Refresh

Complete the equation
Question 8.
3 + 8 = 8 + ____
Answer:
3+8= 8+3

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 3+8= 8+3.

Question 9.
10 + 0 = ____ + 10
Answer:
10+0= 0+10.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 10+0= 0+10.

Question 10.
6 + ____ = 7 + 6
Answer:
6+7= 7+6.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 6+7= 7+6.

Question 11.
____ + 8 = 8 + 9
Answer:
9+8= 8+9.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of addition, we can change the order of the addends which does not change the sum. So 9+8= 8+9.

Lesson 1.4 Multiply in Any Order

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Write the multiplication equation for the array. Turn your paper and write the equation for the array.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 1
Answer:
5×3= 15.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 5 rows and 3 columns. So the product of the array is 5×3= 15.

Structure
Compare the equations. How are they the same? How are they different?

Think and Grow: Commutative Property of Multiplication

Ina multiplication equation, the numbers that are multiplied are called factors. The answer is called the product.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 2
Commutative Property of Multiplication: Changing the order of factors does not change the product.
Example
Complete the statements
Selina Concise Mathematics Class 6 ICSE Solutions Chapter 2 Estimation 1Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 3

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the statements
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 4
Answer:
5×2= 2×5.

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see 5 rows and 2 columns, this means 5 rows of 2. And in the second image, we can 2 rows and 5 columns, this means 2 rows of 5. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 5×2= 2×5.

Question 2.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 5
____ × ____ = _____
_____ × ____ = _____
So, ____ × _____ = ____ × ____
Answer:
2×3= 6,
3×2= 6.
So, 2×3= 3×2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 rows and 3 columns, this means 2 rows of 3. And we can also write as 3 rows and 2 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 2×3= 3×2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 6
Answer:
1×4= 4,
4×1= 4.
So, 1×4= 4×1.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 1 row and 4 columns. Which makes 1 row of 4. And we can also write as 4 rows and 1 column as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 1×4= 4×1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 7
Answer:
2×6= 12,
6×2= 12,
2×6= 6×2.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 2 rows and 6 columns. Which makes 2 rows of 6. And we can also write as 6 rows and 2 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 2×6= 6×2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 8
Answer:
4×5= 20,
5×4= 20.
So, 4×5= 5×4.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 4 rows and 5 columns. Which makes 4 rows of 5. And we can also write as 5 rows and 4 columns as we can see in the given below image. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 4×5= 5×4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Complete the equation.
Question 6.
8 × 3 = 3 × ____
Answer:
8×3= 24,
3×8= 24.
So, 8×3= 3×8.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 3 rows and 8 columns as we can see in the given below image which is 8×3= 3×8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
10 × 2 = ____ × 10
Answer:
10×2 = 20,
2×10= 20.
So, 10×2= 2×10.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 2 rows and 10 columns as we can see in the given below image which is 10×2= 2×10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 8.
1 × ____ = 9 × 1
Answer:
1×9= 9,
9×1= 9.
So, 1×9= 9×1.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can also write as 9 rows and 1 column which is 1×9= 9×1.

Question 9.
Structure
Which shape completes the equation?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 9
Answer:
Moon shape.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, the missing shape is the moon.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend makes 7 rows of 6 stickers. You want to put the same number of stickers into 6 rows. How many stickers do you put in each row? Explain.
You put ____ stickers in each row.
Explain.

Answer:
7×6= 42,
6×7= 42.
So, 7×6= 6×7.
You can put 7 stickers in each row.

Explanation:
The number of stickers made is 7 rows of 6 stickers and want to put the same number of stickers into 6 rows. So, by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can make 6 rows of 7 stickers, which has 6 rows and 7 columns.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Your friend makes 9 rows of 4 award ribbons. You want to put the same number of award ribbons into 4 rows. How many award ribbons do you put in each row? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 10
Answer:
9×4= 36,
4×9= 36.
So, 9×4= 4×9.
So 9 award ribbons can be put in each row.

Explanation:
Given, 9 rows of 4 award ribbons and we need to put the same number of award ribbons into 4 rows. So by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, we can make 4 rows of 9 award ribbons, which has 4 rows and 9 columns and 9 award ribbons can be put in each row.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 2 rows of 8 toy cars. Your friend has 5 rows of 2 toy cars. How can you use the Commutative Property of Multiplication to find how many rows your friend needs to add so that you both have the same number of toy cars?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 11
Answer:

Explanation:

Multiply in Any Order Homework & Practice 1.4

Question 1.
Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 12
Answer:
3 rows of 6,
3×6= 18.
6 rows of 3
6×3= 18,
So, 3×6= 6×3.

Explanation:
In the first image, we can see 3 rows and 6 columns, this means 3 rows of 6. And in the second image, we can 6 rows and 3 columns, this means 6 rows of 3. By the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 3×6= 6×3.

Question 2.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 13
Answer:
7×4= 28,
4×7= 28.
So, 7×4= 4×7

Explanation:
In the image, we can see 7 rows and 4 columns, this means 7 rows of 4. And by the commutative property of multiplication, we can state that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. To draw an array by the Commutative Property of Multiplication, we will take 4 rows of 7, which means 4 rows and 7 columns as in the below image. So, 7×4= 4×7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Which two arrays can you use to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 14
Answer:
The first image and third image shows the commutative property of multiplication.

Explanation:
From the above image, the first and third arrays show the Commutative property of multiplication. Which states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. As in the first image, we can see 4 rows of 3 which have 4 rows and 3 columns and in the third image, we can see 3 rows of 4 which has 3 rows and 4 columns.

Question 4.
Precision
Write two equations that show the Commutative Property of Multiplication.
____ × ____ = ____ × _____
____ × _____ = ____ × ____
Answer:
5×6= 6×5,
2×3= 3×2.

Explanation:
The Commutative property of multiplication states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. For example, if we take 5×6= 30 then the commutative property is 6×5= 30.
So 5×6= 6×5.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A computer lab has 6 rows of 5 computers. A technology teacher wants to rearrange the computers into5 rows. How many computers does the teacher put in each row? Explain.
Answer:
6 computers do the teacher put in each row.

Explanation:
As a computer lab has 6 rows of 5 computers, and the technology teacher rearranged the computers into 5 rows, so the teacher will put 6 computers by commutative property as it states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So 6×5= 5×6.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 6 rows of 4 pennies. Your friend has 2 rows of 6 pennies. How many rows does your friend need to add so that you both have the same number of pennies?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.4 15
Answer:
So, a friend needs 2 rows to add then both will have the same number of pennies.

Explanation:
There are 6 rows of 4 pennies, which is 6 rows and 4 columns and the friend has 2 rows of 6 pennies which is 2 rows and 6 columns. So my friend needs to add 2 rows and then it will be 2 rows+2 rows= 4 rows and there will be 6 columns. So, by the commutative property, as it states that the order in which we multiply the numbers does not change the product. So, 6×4= 4×6.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Newton hits a ball 5 fewer times than Descartes does. Newton hits the ball 9 times. How many times does Descartes hit the ball?

Answer:

Explanation:

Lesson 1.5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Put 18 counters in 6 equal groups. Draw to show your groups
Number of counters in each group: _____
Answer:
The number of counters in each group is 3 counters.

Explanation:
To put 18 counters in 6 equal groups, we will divide 18 by 6 then the result is 3. So, we can put counters in 3 counters in 6 equal groups as shown in the given below image.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 18 counters in 3 equal groups. Draw to show your groups
Number of counters in each group: _____
Answer:
The number of counters in each group is 6.

Explanation:
To put 18 counters in 3 equal groups, we will divide 18 by 3 then the result is 6. So, we can put counters in 6 counters in 3 equal groups as shown in the given below image.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Structure
How does changing the number of equal groups change the number of counters in each group?
Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Using Equal Groups to Divide

Division is an operation that gives the size of equal groups or the number of equal groups. When you know the total number of objects and the number of equal groups, you can divide to find the size of each group.3 equal groups
Example
Divide 12 counters into. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Divide 15 counters into5 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 2
15 ÷ 5 = ____

Answer:
The number of counters placed in 5 equal groups is 3 counters.

Explanation:
There are 15 counters and we need to place those 15 counters in 5 equal groups. So we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 5 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 3
Answer:
The number of counters placed in 5 equal groups is 3 counters.

Explanation:
There are 15 counters and we need to place those 15 counters in 5 equal groups. So we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 5 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Divide 30 counters into 6 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 4
30 ÷ 6 = ____

Answer:
The number of counters placed in 6 equal groups is 5 counters. AS 30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
There are 30 counters and we need to place those 30 counters in 6 equal groups. So we will divide 30 by 6,
30÷6= 5. So we will pace 5 counters in 6 equal groups.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 5
Answer:
The number of counters placed in 6 equal groups is 5 counters. AS 30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
There are 30 counters and we need to place those 30 counters in 6 equal groups. So we will divide 30 by 6,
30÷6= 5. So we will pace 5 counters in 6 equal groups.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 3.
Divide 16 counters into 2 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
16 ÷ 2 = ____
Answer:
16÷2= 8.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 2 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 2,
16÷2= 8. So we will pace 8 counters in 2 equal groups.

Question 4.
Divide 9 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
9 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:
9 ÷ 3= 3.

Explanation:
There are 9 counters and we need to place those 9 counters in 3 equal groups. So we will divide 9 by 3,
9÷3= 3. So we will pace 3 counters in 3 equal groups.

Question 5.
Structure
Write the division equation that matches the tape diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 6
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
18÷2= 9.

Explanation:
There are 18 counters and we need to place those 18 counters in 2 equal groups. So we will divide 18 by 2,
18÷2= 9. So we will pace 9 counters in 2 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton has a tennis ball collection. He can divide the balls into3 equal groups with none left over. He can also divide the balls into4 equal groups with none left over. How many tennis balls does he have?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 30 seashells. You put an equal number of seashells in 5 bags. How many seashells are in each bag?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 7
Model:
Division equation:
There are _____ seashells in each bag.

Answer:
Division equation: 30÷5= 6.
There are 6 seashells in each bag.

Explanation:
As there are 30 seashells and we need to put an equal number of seashells in 5 bags, we will divide 30÷5= 6. So we will 6 seashells in each bag.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You have 28 rocks. You put an equal number of rocks in 4 piles. How many rocks are in each pile?
Answer:
28÷4= 7.

Explanation:
There are 28 rocks and we should put an equal number of rocks in 4 piles, we will divide 28 by 4. So 28÷4= 7. So there will be 7 rocks in each pile.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes each have40 quarters. Newton puts his quarters into5 equal groups. Descartes puts his quarters into4 equal groups. Who has more quarters in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 8
Answer:
Descartes has more quarters than Newton.

Explanation:
As both Newton and Descartes have 40 quarters and Newton puts his quarters into 5 equal groups, which means 40÷5= 8. Newton put his 8 quarters into 5 equal groups and Descartes puts his quarters into 4 equal groups, which means 40÷4= 10. Descartes put his 10 quarters into 4 equal groups. So, Descartes has more quarters than Newton.

Divide: Size of Equal Groups Homework & Practice 1.5

Question 1.
Divide 16 counters into 4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 9
16 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 4 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 4,
16÷4= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 4 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 10
Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
There are 16 counters and we need to place those 16 counters in 4 equal groups. So we will divide 16 by 4,
16÷4= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 4 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Divide 28 counters into 7 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
28 ÷ 7 = ____
Answer:
28 ÷ 7= 4.

Explanation:
There are 28 counters and we need to place those 28 counters in 7 equal groups. So we will divide 28 by 7,
28 ÷ 7= 4. So we will pace 4 counters in 7 equal groups.

Question 3.
Divide 27 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
27 ÷ 3 = ____
Answer:
27 ÷ 3 = 9.

Explanation:
There are 27 counters and we need to place those 27 counters in 3 equal groups. So we will divide 27 by 3,
27 ÷ 3= 9. So we will pace 9 counters in 3 equal groups.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says you divide 18 counters into 3 equal groups. Is he correct?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 11
Answer:
Yes, Newton is correct.

Explanation:
Yes, Newton is correct. As we can see in the above image he divided 18 counters into 3 equal groups with different numbers of counters in each group.

Question 5.
Precision
A class has 14 boys and 18 girls. Can the teacher divide the class equally into 4 groups with no students remaining? Explain.
Answer:
The teacher places 8 students in 4 equal groups with no students remaining.

Explanation:
As a class has 14 boys and 18 girls, so the total number of students is 14+18= 32 students. As the teacher divided the class equally into 4 groups, 32÷4= 8. So the teacher places 8 students in each group with no students remaining.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 14 erasers. You and your friend share them equally. How many erasers do you and your friend each get?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 12
Answer:
7 erasers will get each.

Explanation:
There are 14 erasers and those erasers are shared equally among two of them, so we will divide 14 by 2 which is 14÷2= 7. So 7 erasers will get each.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes each have 42 glow-in-the-dark stickers. Newton divides into 6 equal groups. Descartes divides his into7 equal groups. Who has more stickers in each group?
Answer:
Newton has more stickers than Descartes in each group.

Explanation:
As Newton and Descartes, each have 42 glow-in-the-dark stickers and Newton divides them into 6 equal groups, which is 42÷6= 7. So Newton has 7 glow-in-the-dark stickers in 6 equal groups. And Descartes divides his into7 equal groups which is 42÷7= 6. So Descartes has 6 glow-in-the-dark stickers in 7 equal groups. Newton has more stickers than Descartes in each group.

Review & Refresh

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 13
Answer:
41

Explanation:
On adding 26+15 we will get 41.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 14
Answer:
87.

Explanation:
On adding 32+55 we will get 87.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 15
Answer:
61.

Explanation:
On adding 49+12 we will get 61.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.5 16
Answer:
92.

Explanation:
On adding 24+68 we will get 92.

Lesson 1.6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Explore and Grow
Question 1.
Put 24 counters in equal groups of 4. Draw to show your groups.
Number of groups: ______

Answer:
The number of groups is 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and DivisionBig Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Put 24 counters in equal groups of 6. Draw to show your groups.
Number of groups: ______
Answer:
The number of groups is 4.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 24 by 6, 24÷6= 4. So we will put 6 counters in 4 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Structure
How does changing the size of the groups change the number of equal groups?

Think and Grow: Using Equal Groups to Divide

When you know the total number of objects and the size of each group, you can divide to find the number of equal groups.
Example
Divide 12 counters into. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Divide 10 counters into groups of 2. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 2
10 ÷ 2 = ____

Answer:
10 ÷ 2 = 5.

Explanation:
To put 10 counters in equal groups of 2, we will divide 10 by 2, 10÷2= 5. So we will put 2 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 3
Answer:
10÷2= 5.

Explanation:
To put 10 counters in equal groups of 2, we will divide 10 by 2, 10÷2= 5. So we will put 2 counters in 5 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Divide 24 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 4
24 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
24÷4= 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 5
Answer:
24÷4= 6.

Explanation:
To put 24 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 24 by 4, 24÷4= 6. So we will put 4 counters in 6 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Divide 30 counters into groups of 6. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 6
30÷6=

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 7
Answer:
30÷6= 5.

Explanation:
To put 30 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 30 by 6, 30÷6= 5. So we will put 5 counters in 6 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 4.
Divide 15 counters into groups of 5. How many groups are there?
15 ÷ 5 = _____
Answer:
15÷5= 3.

Explanation:
To put 15 counters in equal groups of 5, we will divide 15 by 5, 15÷5= 3. So we will put 3 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Question 5.
Divide 16 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
16 ÷ 4 = _____
Answer:
16÷4= 4.

Explanation:
To put 16 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 16 by 4, 16÷4= 4. So we will put 4 counters in 4 equal number of group.

Question 6.
Structure
You want to bake as many loaves of banana bread as possible with 12 eggs. Each loaf of bread requires 2 eggs. Which models can you use to find how many loaves of bread you can make?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 8
Answer:

Explanation:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real life
A florist uses 35 roses to make bouquets. Each bouquet has 7 roses. How many bouquets does the florist make?
Equation:
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 9
The florist makes ______ bouquets

Answer:
Equation: 35÷7= 5

Explanation:
As the florist has 35 roses to make bouquets and each bouquet has35 7 roses, so the florist can make 35÷7= 5 bouquets.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
A farmer puts 48 eggs into cartons. He puts 6 eggs in each carton. How many cartons does he use?
Answer:
8 cartons.

Explanation:
As the farmer puts 48 eggs into cartons and in each carton, there are 6 eggs. So the farmer uses 48÷6= 8 cartons.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton uses his subway pass 3 times each day. Descartes uses his pass 2 times each day. Who will use all of his rides first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 10
Would your answer change if Newton and Descartes both use their passes 3 times each day? Explain.
Answer:
Newton will finish his rides first then Descartes.
Descartes will use all of his rides first if Descartes use passes 3 times each day.

Explanation:
As Newton has 24 subway rides left and he uses subway pass 3 times each day, so the number of rides left are
24-3= 21. Descartes has 18 subway rides and he uses his pass 2 times each day, so the number of rides left are
18-2= 16. By using repeated subtraction which starts from 24 as given and then we will subtract 3 until we get 0.
24-3= 21
21-3= 18
18-3= 15
15-3= 12
12-3= 9
9-3= 6
6-3= 3
3-3=0.
So, Newton will complete the subway pass by 8 times.
18-2= 16
16-2= 14
14-2= 12
12-2= 10
10-2= 8
8-2= 6
6-2= 4
4-2= 2
2-2= 0.
And Descartes will complete the subway pass by 9 times. So Newton will use all his rides first.
And if Descartes uses 3 times of his pass then
18-3= 15
15-3= 12
12-3= 9
9-3= 6
6-3= 3
3-3= 0.
Descartes will complete the subway pass by 6 times, So Descartes will complete his pass first.

Divide: Number of Equal Groups Homework & Practice 1.6

Question 1.
Divide 28 counters into groups of 4. How many groups are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 11
28 ÷ 4 = ____

Answer:
28 ÷ 4 =7

Explanation:
To put 28 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 28 by 4, 28÷4= 7. So we will put 4 counters in 7 equal number of group.

Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 12
Answer:
28÷4= 7.

Explanation:
To put 28 counters in equal groups of 4, we will divide 28 by 4, 28÷4= 7. So we will put 4 counters in 7 equal number of group.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division
Question 2.
Divide 25 counters into groups of 5. How many groups are there?
25 ÷ 5 = _____
Answer:
25 ÷ 5 = 5.

Explanation:
To put 25 counters in equal groups of 5, we will divide 25 by 5, 25÷5= 5. So we will put 5 counters in 5 equal number of group.

Question 3.
Divide 12 counters into groups of 6. How many groups are there?
12 ÷ 6 = _____
Answer:
12 ÷ 6 = 2.

Explanation:
To put 12 counters in equal groups of 6, we will divide 12 by 6, 12÷6= 2. So we will put 2 counters in 6 equal number of group.

Question 4.
Writing
Write and solve a problem in which you need to find the number of equal groups.
Answer:
Divide 22 counters into groups of 11. How many groups are there?

Explanation:
To put 22 counters in equal groups of 11, we will divide 22 by 11, 22÷11= 2. So we will put 2 counters in 11 equal number of group.

Question 5.
Reasoning
Your classroom has 30 chairs that need to be stacked with 5 chairs in each stack. Your teacher already made 2 stacks. How many stacks of chairs still need to be made?
Answer:
The number of stacks of chairs that still need to be made is 4.

Explanation:
As a classroom has 30 chairs and that needed to be stacked with 5 chairs in each stack, so 30÷5= 6 stacks. And the teacher already made 2 stacks, which means 6-2= 4. So the number of stacks of chairs that still need to be made are 4 stacks.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You have more than 30 and fewer than 40 piñata toys. You divide them into groups with 8 in each group. How many groups do you make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 13
Answer:
There will be 4 groups with 8 pinata toys in each group.

Explanation: As there are more than 30 and fewer than 40 pinata toys, and we need to divide them into groups with 8 in each group. So we need to choose the number between 30-40. As we can see fewer than 40 and more than 30, so we will choose 32 as it will divide them into groups with 8 in each group, 32÷8= 4. So there will be 4 groups with 8 pinata toys in each group.

Question 7.
A street vendor puts 42 apples into baskets. She puts 6 apples in each basket. How many baskets does she use?
Answer:
7 baskets.

Explanation:
As a street vendor puts 42 apples into baskets and she puts 6 apples in each basket, so she needs 42÷6= 7 baskets.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes are at an amusement park. Newton uses 2 tickets to ride each roller coaster. Descartes uses 3 tickets to ride at the front of each roller coaster. Who runs out of tickets first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 14
Newton Descartes, They run out of tickets at the same time

Answer:
Newton will run out of tickets first, as he has fewer tickets.

Explanation:
As Newton has 14 coaster tickets and uses 2 tickets to ride each roller coaster, so there will 14-2= 12 tickets remaining. And Descartes has 21 coaster tickets and uses 3 tickets to ride, so the remaining tickets are 21-3= 18 tickets. Newton will run out of tickets first, as he has fewer tickets.

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 15
Answer:
96-58= 38,
38+58= 96.

Explanation:
On subtracting 96-58 we will get 38 and by adding 58 and 38 we will get 96. So by adding we can check your answer.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.6 16
Answer:
48-32= 16,
16+32= 48.

Explanation:
On subtracting 48-32 we will get 16 and by adding 32 and 16 we will get 48. So by adding we can check your answer.

Lesson 1.7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Explore and Grow

Question 1.
Find the difference. Use each difference as the starting number in the next equation. Model the problems on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 1
Answer:
12-3= 9,
9-3= 6,
6-3= 3,
3-3= 0.

Explanation:
To represent a number line, we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 12 as given and then we will subtract 3 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
Structure
How can you use a number line to help you find 12 ÷ 3?
Answer:
12÷3= 4.

Explanation:
To use the number line for the given value 12÷3 which is 4, we will start from 0 then skip the count by 4 three times. So the number of jumps is 4 and the size of the jump is 3. And we can also use the subtraction method, which starts with 12 and subtract 3 until we get 0.

Think and Grow: Number Lines and Repeated Subtraction

Example Find 20 ÷ 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 2

Another Way:
Use repeated subtraction. Start with 20. Subtract 4 until you reach 0.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 3

Show and Grow

Complete the equations.
Question 1.
24 ÷ 6 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 4
Answer:
24 ÷ 6 = 4.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 6s from 24 until we reach 0,
24÷6= 4, so there are 4 groups of 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 2.
16 ÷ 8 = _____
16 – 8 = _____
____ – 8 = 0
Answer:
16 ÷ 8 = 3,
16-8= 8,
8-8= 0.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts from 16 as given and then we will subtract 8 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 8.
16 ÷ 8 = 3,
16-8= 8,
8-8= 0.

Question 3.
27 ÷ 9 = _____
27 – 9 = _____
____ – 9 = ____
_____ – 9 = 0
Answer:
27 ÷ 9 = 3,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts from 27 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 9.
27 ÷ 9 = 3,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Complete the equations.
Question 4.
25 ÷ 5 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 5
Answer:
25 ÷ 5 = 5.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 5s from 25 until we reach 0,
25÷5= 5, so there are 5 groups of 5.

Question 5.
21 – 7 = _____
____ – 7 = _____
_____ – 7 = 0
____ ÷ _____ = ____
Answer:
21-7= 14,
14-7= 7,
7-7= 0,
21÷7= 3.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 21 as given and then we will subtract 7 until we get 0.
21-7= 14,
14-7= 7,
7-7= 0,
21÷7= 3.

Question 6.
36 – 9 = _____
____ – 9 = ____
____ – 9 = ____
_____ – 9 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
36-9= 27,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.
36÷9= 4.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 36 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0.
36-9= 27,
27-9= 18,
18-9= 9,
9-9= 0.
36÷9= 4.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes uses a number line to find 18 ÷ 2. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 6

Explanation:
No, Descartes is not correct. As 18÷2= 9 and here the given result 8. So Descartes is incorrect.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real life

Each age group is divided into teams with 6 players on each team. Each team receives a trophy at the end of the season. How many trophies are needed?

Age GroupNumber of Players
 6 – 7 Years old18
8 – 9 Years old24

Division equations:
Addition equations:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 7
_____ trophies are needed

Answer:
7 trophies are needed.

Explanation:
As each age group is divided into teams with 6 players on each team and each team receives a trophy at the end of the season, so the number of trophies needed for age group 6-7 years old is 18÷6= 3 trophies. And for the age group 8-9 years old is 24÷6= 4 trophies.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Each age group is put into cabins with 8 campers in each cabin. How many cabins are needed?

Age GroupNumber of Campers
 5 – 7 Years old32
8 – 10 Years old24

The two age groups are combined into one group. Does the total number of cabins that are needed change? Explain
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 8
Answer:
The number of cabins needed for the age group of 5-7 years is 4 cabins and the number of cabins needed for the age group of 8-10 years old is 3 cabins. There will be no change in the total number of cabins.

Explanation:
For the age group of 5-7 years old number of cabins needed are 32÷8= 4 cabins. And for the age group 8- 10 years old number of cabins needed are 24÷8= 3 cabins. If two age groups are combined into one group then the total number of campers are 24+32= 56. So the total number of cabins needed are 56÷8= 7 cabins. So there will be no change.

Use Number Lines to Divide Homework & Practice 1.7

Complete the equations

Question 1.
9 ÷ 3 = _____
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 9
Answer:
9÷3= 3.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 3s from 9 until we reach 0,
9÷3= 3, so there are 3 groups of 3.

Question 2.
20 – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = ____
____ – 5 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
20-5= 15,
15-5= 10,
10-5= 5,
5-5= 0,
20÷5= 4.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 20 as given and then we will subtract 5 until we get 0.
20-5= 15,
15-5= 10,
10-5= 5,
5-5= 0,
20÷5= 4.

Question 3.
10 – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = ____
____ – 2 = 0
____ ÷ ____ = ____
Answer:
10-2 = 8,
8-2= 6,
6-2= 4,
4-2= 2,
2-2= 0,
10÷5= 5.

Explanation:
we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 10 as given and then we will subtract 2 until we get 0.
10-2 = 8,
8-2= 6,
6-2= 4,
4-2= 2,
2-2= 0,
10÷5= 5.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes uses repeated subtraction to find 15 ÷ 5. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 10
Answer: Yes, he is correct.

Explanation:
As Descartes uses repeated subtraction which starts from 15 as given and then we will subtract 5 until we get 0. So Descartes is correct.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find Newton’s missing number. Explain how you solved.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 11
Answer:
18-6= 12,
12-6= 6,
6-6 = 0.

Explanation:
Here, given subtract 6 from a number 3 times, and reach 0, so we will multiply 6 by 3 and we will get a number,
which is 6×3= 18. So the number is 18 if we subtract 6, 3 times we will reach 0.
18-6= 12,
12-6= 6,
6-6 = 0.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Each age group is divided into groups of 7 swimmers. How many groups are there in each age group?

Age GroupNumber of Swimmers
 6 – 8 Years old28
9 – 11 Years old14

The two age groups are combined into one group. Does the total number of groups change? Explain.
Answer:
By combining two age groups into one group the total number of groups does not change, as the total number of groups and the combined two age group is equal.

Explanation:
As each age was divided into groups of 7 swimmers, so the number of groups in the 6-8 years old age group is 28÷7= 4 groups. And the number of groups in the 9-11 years old age group is 14÷7= 2 groups. And the total number of groups is 4+2= 6. As the two age groups are combined into one group, so 28+14= 42. So the total number of groups will be 42÷7= 6 groups.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Circle the values of the underlined digit.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division 1.7 12
Answer:
8 tens.

Explanation:
The value of 8 in the digit 581 is 8 tens.

Understand Multiplication and Division Performance Task

Question 1.
a. Your science teacher gives you 71 picture cards to sort into categories, living and nonliving. You sort 11 cards into the nonliving category. How many cards do you sort into the living category?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 1
b. You sort the living cards into 2 categories, plants, and animals. The numbers of cards in each category are equal. How many cards are in the animal category?
c. You divide the animal cards into 6 equal groups. How many animal cards are in each group?
d. The animals in 5 of the groups have backbones, and the animals in the other group do not have backbones. How many more cards have animals with backbones? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 2
Answer:
a) 60.
b) 30 cards in the animal category.
c) 5 animal cards.
d)

Explanation:
a) As there are 71 picture cards and 11 of them are sorted into the non-living category, so the remaining cards in the living category are 71-11= 60.
b) As the living cards are 60 and those are divided into two equal categories 60÷2= 30, which is 30 plants and 30 animal cards. So there are 30 cards in the animal category.
c) To divide the animal cards into 6 equal groups, we will divide 30 by 6 and there will be 30÷6= 5  animal cards are in each group.
d)

Understand Multiplication and Division Activity

Hooray Array!

Getting Started: Fill in your board with each number from the Number List. You may write each number in any square. Each square can only have one number.
Directions:
1. Choose a player to be the caller. The caller selects a Hooray Array Equation Card and reads the equation.
2. All players solve the equation and place a counter on the answer. Cover only 1 number per turn.
3. Repeat the process with players taking turns as the caller.
4. The winner is the first player who creates a 3 × 3 array on the board and yells, “HOORAY ARRAY!”
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 3
Answer:

Understand Multiplication and Division Chapter practice

1.1 Use Equal Groups to Multiply

Question 1.
Use the model to complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 4
Answer:
2 groups of 3,
3+3= 6,
2×3= 6.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 2 groups with 3 counters in each group.
So, 2 groups of 3 which is 6, which means 2×3= 6.
And if we add 2 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 3+3= 6.

Draw equal groups. Then complete the equations.

Question 2.
3 groups of 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 5
Answer:
3 groups of 6,
2+2+2= 6,
3×6= 18.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 3 groups with 6 counters in each group.
So, 3 groups of 6 which are 18, which means 3×6= 18.
And if we add 3 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 2+2+2= 6.

Question 3.
4 groups of 5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 6
Answer:
4 groups of 5,
5+5+5+5= 20,
4×5= 20.

Explanation:
Here, we can see 4 groups with 5 counters in each group.
So, 4 groups of 5 which is 20, which means 4×5= 20.
And if we add 4 groups of the counter, we will get the  same result,
which is 5+5+5+5= 20.

1.2 Use Number Lines to Multiply

Question 4.
Find 8 × 3
Number of jumps: ___
Size of each jump: ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 7
8 × 3 = ____
Answer:
8×3= 24.

Explanation:
Here, we will start at 0 and then we will skip count by 3s eight times. So, the number of jumps is 8, and the size of each jump is 3. which is 8×3= 24.

1.3 Use Arrays to Multiply

Draw an array to multiply.

Question 5.
2 × 8 = ___

Answer:
2 × 8 = 16.

Explanation:
To draw an array of 2×8, we will take 2 rows and 8 columns to build an array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 6.
7 × 4 = ___
Answer:
7 × 4 = 28

Explanation:
To draw an array of 7×4, we will take 7 rows and 4 columns to build an array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton has 32 counters. He says that he can use all the counters to make an array with 6 rows. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 8
Answer: No, Newton is not correct.

Explanation:
No, as Newton has 32 counters which will not make an array with 6 rows. As 32 is not divisible 6, so he is not correct.

1.4 Multiply in Any Order

Question 8.
Draw an array to show the Commutative Property of Multiplication. Complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 9
____ × ____ = ____
____ × ____ = ____
So, ___ × ___ = ____ × ___

Answer:
9×5 = 45,
5×9 = 45,
So, 9×5 = 5×9.

Explanation:
In the above image, we can see 9 rows of 5,
which means 9×5 = 45,
so by the commutative property of multiplication,
9×5 = 5×9,
which is 45.

Complete the equation.

Question 9.
4 × 10 = 10 × ___
Answer: 4.

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
4 × 10 = 10 × 4.

Question 10.
3 × 9 = ____ × 3
Answer: 9

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
3 × 9 = 9 × 3.

Question 11.
8 × ___ = 4 × 8.
Answer: 4

Explanation:
By the commutative property of multiplication, which means changing the order of factors which does not change the product. So,
8 × 4= 4 × 8.

1.5 Divide: Size of Equal Groups

Question 12.
Divide 27 counters into 3 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 10
Use the tape diagram to model the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 11
27 ÷ 3 = ___
Answer: 9 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 27,
now, we will divide 27 counters into groups of 3,
which means
27÷3= 9.
On dividing 27 counters by 3,
we will get the result as 9 groups.

Question 13
Divide 32 counters into4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
32 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 8 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 32,
now, we will divide 32 counters into groups of 4,
which means
32÷4= 8.
On dividing 32 counters by 4,
we will get the result as 8 counters in each group.

Question 14.
Divide 12 counters into4 equal groups. How many counters are in each group?
12 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 3 counters in each group.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 12,
now, we will divide 12 counters into groups of 4,
which means
12÷4= 3.
On dividing 12 counters by 4,
we will get the result as 3 counters in each group.

1.6 Divide: Number of Equal Groups

Question 15.
Divide 15 counters into groups of 3. How many groups are there?
15 ÷ 3 = ___
Answer: 5 groups.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 15,
now, we will divide 15 counters into groups of 3
which means
15÷3= 5.
On dividing 15 counters by 3,
we will get the result in 5 groups.

Question 16.
Divide 20 counters into groups of 2. How many groups are there?
20 ÷ 2 = __
Answer: 10 groups.

Explanation:
Given Counters is 20,
now, we will divide 20 counters into groups of 2,
which means
20÷2= 10.
On dividing 20 counters by 2,
we will get the result as 10 groups.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
Newton and Descartes are trying a new music app. Newton uses 4 credits a day to hear songs without commercials. Descartes uses 2 credits a day to hear songs with commercials. Who runs out of credits first? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 13
Answer:
Newton will run out of credits first than Descartes. No, they will not run out of credits at the same time.

Explanation:
The total credits do Newton has in a new music app are 24 and he uses 4 credits a day to hear songs without commercials, so the remaining credits are 24-4= 20. And the total credits Descartes had are 14 and he uses 2 credits a day to hear songs with commercials, which is 14-2= 12. we will use repeated subtraction which starts from 24 as given and then we will subtract 4 until we get 0 which is
24-4= 20
20-4= 16
16-4= 12
12-4= 8
8-4= 4
4-4= 0
so, Newton will run out of credits by his 6 uses. And we will use repeated subtraction for Descartes’s credits, which is
14-2= 12
12-2= 10
10-2= 8
8-2= 6
6-2= 4
4-2= 2
2-2= 0
so, Descartes will run out of credits by his 7 uses. So Newton will run out of credits earlier than Descartes.

1.7 Use Number Lines to Divide

Complete the equations.

Question 18.
28 ÷ 7 = ___
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 2 Multiplication Facts and Strategies 14
Answer:
28 ÷ 7 = 4.

Explanation:
By using the number line, we will countback by 7s from 28 until we reach 0,
28÷7= 4, so there are 4 groups of 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division

Question 19.
18 – 9 = ___
___ – 9 = 0
___ ÷ ___ = ___
Answer:
18-9= 0,
9-9= 0
18÷9= 2

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts with 18 as given and then we will subtract 9 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 2 and the size of the jump is 9.

Question 20.
12 – 4 = ___
___ – 4 = ___
___ – 4 = 0
___ ÷ ___ = ___
Answer:
12-4= 8
8-4= 4
4-4= 0
12÷4= 3.

Explanation:
We will use repeated subtraction which starts with 12 as given and then we will subtract 4 until we get 0. So the number of jumps is 3 and the size of the jump is 4.

Final Words:

The solutions seen in this chapter are as per the latest edition. The Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division Answers are prepared by the math experts so you don’t worry about the solutions. I Hope the details prevailed in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 1 Understand Multiplication and Division made you happy. Please share the Big Ideas Math Answer Key 3rd Grade 1st Chapter Understand Multiplication and Division with your friends and help them to overcome their difficulties in this chapter. Bookmark our site to get the solutions of all grade 3 chapters.

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions PDF Formatted links are enlisted here for free of cost. So, students who are looking for solutions with detailed & step-wise explanations can refer to this Big Ideas math Book Algebra 2 Ch 5 Answer key and verify their answers while practicing sessions. Also, you can make use of this BIM Algebra 2 Solutions for solving homework and assignment questions of Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions. So, improve your math skills by accessing this ultimate guide of BigIdeasMath Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Answers Pdf.

Big Ideas Math Book Algebra 2 Answer Key Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions

Students can get detailed solutions for all questions included in BigIdeas Math Book Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Answer Key. The BIM Textbook Answers Algebra 2 Ch 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions covers various preparation resources like Topic-wise exercise questions, chapter tests, reviews, practices, quiz, cumulative assessment, etc. to understand the concepts and learn efficiently. Therefore, click on the links available below and quickly access the respective exercise questions of BIM Algebra 2 Ch 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions for better preparation.

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify the expression

Question 1.
y6 • y

Question 2.
\(\frac{n^{4}}{n^{3}}\)

Question 3.
\(\frac{x^{5}}{x^{6} \cdot x^{2}}\)

Question 4.
\(\frac{x^{-6}}{x^{5}}\) • 3x2/sup>

Question 5.
\(\left(\frac{4 w^{3}}{2 z^{2}}\right)^{3}\)

Question 6.
\(\left(\frac{m^{7} \cdot m}{z^{2} \cdot m^{3}}\right)^{2}\)

Solve the literal equation for y.

Question 7.
4x + y = 2

Question 8.
x − \(\frac{1}{3}\)y = −1

Question 9.
2y − 9 = 13x

Question 10.
2xy + 6y = 10

Question 11.
8x − 4xy = 3

Question 12.
6x + 7xy = 15

Question 13.
ABSTRACT REASONING Is the order in which you apply properties of exponents important? Explain your reasoning.

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Mathematical Practices

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the exact lengths of a, b, c, and d in the figure.

Question 2.
Use a calculator to approximate each length to the nearest tenth of an inch.

Question 3.
Use a ruler to check the reasonableness of your answers.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 1

Lesson 5.1 nth Roots and Rational Exponents

Essential Question

How can you use a rational exponent to represent a power involving a radical?
Previously, you learned that the nth root of a can be represented as
\(\sqrt[n]{a}\) = \(a^{1 / n}\) Definition of rational exponent
for any real number a and integer n greater than 1.

EXPLORATION 1
Exploring the Definition of a Rational Exponent
Work with a partner.
Use a calculator to show that each statement is true.
a. \(\sqrt{9}\) = \(9^{1 / 2}\)
b. \(\sqrt{2}\) = \(2^{1 / 2}\)
c. \(\sqrt[3]{8}\) = \(8^{1 / 3}\)
d. \(\sqrt[3]{3}\) = \(3^{1 / 3}\)
e. \(\sqrt[4]{16}\) = \(16^{1 / 4}\)
f. \(\sqrt[4]{12}\) = \(12^{1 / 4}\)

EXPLORATION 2
Writing Expressions in Rational Exponent Form

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 2
Work with a partner. Use the definition of a rational exponent and the properties of exponents to write each expression as a base with a single rational exponent. Then use a calculator to evaluate each expression. Round your answer to two decimal places.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 3
a. \((\sqrt{5})^{3}\)
b. \((\sqrt[4]{4})^{2}\)
c. \((\sqrt[3]{9})^{2}\)
d. \((\sqrt[5]{10})^{4}\)
e. \((\sqrt{15})^{3}\)
f. \((\sqrt[3]{27})^{4}\)

EXPLORATION 3
Writing Expressions in Radical Form
Work with a partner.
Use the properties of exponents and the definition of a rational exponent to write each expression as a radical raised to an exponent. Then use a calculator to evaluate each expression. Round your answer to two decimal places.
Sample \(5^{2 / 3}\) = (\left(5^{1 / 3}\right)\(\))2 = (\((\sqrt[3]{5})\))2 ≈ 2.92
a. \(8^{2 / 3}\)
b. \(6^{5 / 2}\)
c. \(12^{3 / 4}\)
d. \(10^{3 / 2}\)
e. \(16^{3 / 2}\)
f. \(20^{6 / 5}\)

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you use a rational exponent to represent a power involving a radical?

Question 5.
Evaluate each expression without using a calculator. Explain your reasoning.
a. \(4^{3 / 2}\)
b. \(32^{4 / 5}\)
c. \(625^{3 / 4}\)
d. \(49^{3 / 2}\)
e. \(125^{4 / 3}\)
f. \(100^{6 / 3}\)

5.1 Lesson

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
n = 4, a = 16

Question 2.
n = 2, a = −49

Question 3.
n = 3, a = −125

Question 4.
n = 5, a = 243

Evaluate the expression without using a calculator.

Question 5.
\(4^{5 / 2}\)

Question 6.
\(9^{-1 / 2}\)

Question 7.
\(81^{3 / 4}\)

Question 8.
\(1^{7 / 8}\)

Evaluate the expression using a calculator. Round your answer to two decimal places when appropriate.

Question 9.
\(6^{2 / 5}\)

Question 10.
\(64^{-2 / 3}\)

Question 11.
\((\sqrt[4]{16})^{5}\)

Question 12.
\((\sqrt[3]{-30})^{2}\)

Find the real solution(s) of the equation. Round your answer to two decimal places when appropriate.

Question 13.
8x3 = 64

Question 14.
\([\frac{1}{2}/latex]x5 = 512

Question 15.
(x + 5)4 = 16

Question 16.
(x − 2)3 = −14

Question 17.
WHAT IF? In Example 5, what is the annual depreciation rate when the salvage value is $6000?

nth Roots and Rational Exponents 5.1 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY Rewrite the expression [latex]a^{-s / t}\) in radical form. Then state the index of the radical.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 1

Question 2.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE For an integer n greater than 1, if bn = a, then bis a(n) ___________ of a.
Answer:

Question 3.
WRITING Explain how to use the sign of a to determine the number of real fourth roots of a and the number of real fifth roots of a.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 3

Question 4.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG? Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 4
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–10, find the indicated real nth root(s) of a.

Question 5.
n = 3, a = 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 5

Question 6.
n = 5, a = −1
Answer:

Question 7.
n = 2, a = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 7

Question 8.
n = 4, a = 256
Answer:

Question 9.
n = 5, a = −32
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 9

Question 10.
n = 6, a = −729
Answer:

In Exercises 11–18, evaluate the expression without using a calculator.

Question 11.
\(64^{1 / 6}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 11

Question 12.
\(8^{1 / 3}\)
Answer:

Question 13.
\(25^{3 / 2}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 13

Question 14.
\(81^{3 / 4}\)
Answer:

Question 15.
\((-243)^{1 / 5}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 15

Question 16.
\((-64)^{4 / 3}\)
Answer:

Question 17.
\(8^{-2 / 3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 17

Question 18.
\(16^{-7 / 4}\)
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 19 and 20, describe and correct the error in evaluating the expression.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 19

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 6
Answer:

USING STRUCTURE In Exercises 21–24, match the equivalent expressions. Explain your reasoning.

Question 21.
\((\sqrt[3]{5})^{4}\) A. \(5^{-1 / 4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 21

Question 22.
\((\sqrt[4]{5})^{3}\) B. \(5^{4 / 3}\)
Answer:

Question 23.
\(\frac{1}{\sqrt[4]{5}}\) C. \(-5^{1 / 4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 23

Question 24.
\(-\sqrt[4]{5}\) D. \(5^{3 / 4}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 25–32, evaluate the expression using a calculator. Round your answer to two decimal places when appropriate.

Question 25.
\(\sqrt[5]{32,768}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 25

Question 26.
\(\sqrt[7]{1695}\)
Answer:

Question 27.
\(25^{-1 / 3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 27

Question 28.
\(85^{1 / 6}\)
Answer:

Question 29.
\(20,736^{4 / 5}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 29

Question 30.
\(86^{-5 / 6}\)
Answer:

Question 31.
\((\sqrt[4]{187})^{3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 31

Question 32.
\((\sqrt[5]{-8})^{8}\)
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS In Exercises 33 and 34, find the radius of the figure with the given volume.

Question 33.
V = 216 ft3
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 33

Question 34.
V = 1332 cm3
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 8
Answer:

In Exercises 35–44, find the real solution(s) of the equation. Round your answer to two decimal places when appropriate.

Question 35.
x3 = 125
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 35

Question 36.
5x3 = 1080
Answer:

Question 37.
(x + 10)5 = 70
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 37

Question 38.
(x − 5)4 = 256
Answer:

Question 39.
x5 = −48
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 39

Question 40.
7x4 = 56
Answer:

Question 41.
x6 + 36 = 100
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 41

Question 42.
x3 + 40 = 25
Answer:

Question 43.
\(\frac{1}{3}\)x4 = 27
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 43

Question 44.
\(\frac{1}{6}\)x3 = −36
Answer:

Question 45.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS When the average price of an item increases from p1 to p2 over a period of n years, the annual rate of inflation r (in decimal form) is given by r = \(\left(\frac{p_{2}}{p_{1}}\right)^{1 / n}\) − 1. Find the rate of inflation for each item in the table.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 45.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 45.2

Question 46.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? The graph of y = xn is shown in red. What can you conclude about the value of n? Determine the number of real nth roots of a. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 10
Answer:

Question 47.
NUMBER SENSE Between which two consecutive integers does \(\sqrt[4]{125}\) lie? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 47

Question 48.
THOUGHT PROVOKING In 1619, Johannes Kepler published his third law, which can be given by d3 = t2, where d is the mean distance (in astronomical units) of a planet from the Sun and t is the time (in years) it takes the planet to orbit the Sun. It takes Mars 1.88 years to orbit the Sun. Graph a possible location of Mars. Justify your answer. (The diagram shows the Sun at the origin of the xy-plane and a possible location of Earth.)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 11
Answer:

Question 49.
PROBLEM SOLVING A weir is a dam that is built across a river to regulate the flow of water. The flow rate Q (in cubic feet per second) can be calculated using the formula Q= 3.367ℓ\(h^{3 / 2}\), where ℓ is the length (in feet) of the bottom of the spillway and his the depth (in feet) of the water on the spillway. Determine the flow rate of a weir with a spillway that is 20 feet long and has a water depth of 5 feet.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 49

Question 50.
REPEATED REASONING The mass of the particles that a river can transport is proportional to the sixth power of the speed of the river. A certain river normally flows at a speed of 1 meter per second. What must its speed be in order to transport particles that are twice as massive as usual? 10 times as massive? 100 times as massive?
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify the expression. Write your answer using only positive exponents. (Skills Review Handbook)

Question 51.
5 • 54

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 51

Question 52.
\(\frac{4^{2}}{4^{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 53.
\(\left(z^{2}\right)^{-3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 53

Question 54.
\(\left(\frac{3 x}{2}\right)^{4}\)
Answer:

Write the number in standard form. (Skills Review Handbook)

Question 55.
5 × 103

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 55

Question 56.
4 × 10−2

Answer:

Question 57.
8.2 × 10−1

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 Question 57

Question 58.
6.93 × 106

Answer:

Lesson 5.2 Properties of Rational Exponents and Radicals

Essential Question
How can you use properties of exponents to simplify products and quotients of radicals?

EXPLORATION 1
Reviewing Properties of Exponents
Work with a partner.
Let a and b be real numbers. Use the properties of exponents to complete each statement. Then match each completed statement with the property it illustrates.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 13

EXPLORATION 2
Simplifying Expressions with Rational Exponents
Work with a partner.
Show that you can apply the properties of integer exponents to rational exponents by simplifying each expression. Use a calculator to check your answers.
a. \(5^{2 / 3}\) • \(5^{4 / 3}\)
b. \(3^{1 / 5}\) • \(3^{4 / 5}\)
c. \(\left(4^{2 / 3}\right)^{3}\)
d. \(\frac{\sqrt{98}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
e. \(\frac{\sqrt[4]{4}}{\sqrt[4]{1024}}\)
f. \(\frac{\sqrt[3]{625}}{\sqrt[3]{5}}\)

EXPLORATION 3
Simplifying Products and Quotients of Radicals
Work with a partner.
Use the properties of exponents to write each expression as a single radical. Then evaluate each expression. Use a calculator to check your answers.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 14
a. \(\sqrt{3}\) • \(\sqrt{12}\)
b. \(\sqrt[3]{5}\) • \(\sqrt[3]{25}\)
c. \(\sqrt[4]{27}\) • \(\sqrt[4]{3}\)
d. \(\frac{\sqrt{98}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
e. \(\frac{\sqrt[4]{4}}{\sqrt[4]{1024}}\)
f. \(\frac{\sqrt[3]{625}}{\sqrt[3]{5}}\)

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you use properties of exponents to simplify products and quotients of radicals?

Question 5.
Simplify each expression.
a. \(\sqrt{27}\) • \(\sqrt{6}\)
b. \(\frac{\sqrt[3]{240}}{\sqrt[3]{15}}\)
c. (\(5^{1 / 2}\) \(16^{1 / 4}\))2

5.2 Lesson

Monitoring Progress

Simplify the expression.

Question 1.
\(2^{3 / 4}\) • \(2^{1 / 2}\)

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{3^{1 / 4}}\)

Question 3.
\(\left(\frac{20^{1 / 2}}{5^{1 / 2}}\right)^{3}\)

Question 4.
(\(5^{1 / 3}\) • \(7^{1 / 4}\))3

Simplify the expression

Question 5.
\(\sqrt[4]{27}\) • \(\sqrt[4]{3}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{250}}{\sqrt[3]{2}}\)

Question 7.
\(\sqrt[3]{104}\)

Question 8.
\(\sqrt[5]{\frac{3}{4}}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{3}{6-\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 10.
\(7 \sqrt[5]{12}\) – \(\sqrt[5]{12}\)

Question 11.
4(\(9^{2 / 3}\)) + (\(9^{2 / 3}\))

Question 12.
\(\sqrt[3]{5}\) + \(\sqrt[3]{40}\)

Simplify the expression. Assume all variables are positive.

Question 13.
\(\sqrt[3]{27 q^{9}}\)

Question 14.
\(\sqrt[5]{\frac{x^{10}}{y^{5}}}\)

Question 15.
\(\frac{6 x y^{3 / 4}}{3 x^{1 / 2} y^{1 / 2}}\)

Question 16.
\(\sqrt{9} w^{5}\) – \(w \sqrt{w^{3}}\)

Properties of Rational Exponents and Radicals 5.2 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING How do you know when a radical expression is in simplest form?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG? Which radical expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 15
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–12, use the properties of rational exponents to simplify the expression.

Question 3.
\(\left(9^{2}\right)^{1 / 3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 3

Question 4.
\(\left(12^{2}\right)^{1 / 4}\)
Answer:

Question 5.
\(\frac{6}{6^{1 / 4}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 5

Question 6.
\(\frac{7}{7^{1 / 3}}\)
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\left(\frac{8^{4}}{10^{4}}\right)^{-1 / 4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 7

Question 8.
\(\left(\frac{9^{3}}{6^{3}}\right)^{-1 / 3}\)
Answer:

Question 9.
(\(3^{-2 / 3}\) • \(3^{1 / 3}\))-1

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 9

Question 10.
(\(5^{1 / 2}\) • \(5^{-3 / 2}\))-1/4

Answer:

Question 11.
\(\frac{2^{2 / 3} \cdot 16^{2 / 3}}{4^{2 / 3}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 11

Question 12.
\(\frac{49^{3 / 8} \cdot 49^{7 / 8}}{7^{5 / 4}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 13–20, use the properties of radicals to simplify the expression.

Question 13.
\(\sqrt{2}\) • \(\sqrt{72}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 13

Question 14.
\(\sqrt[3]{16}\) • \(\sqrt[3]{32}\)
Answer:

Question 15.
\(\sqrt[4]{6}\) • \(\sqrt[4]{8}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 15

Question 16.
\(\sqrt[4]{8}\) • \(\sqrt[4]{8}\)
Answer:

Question 17.
\(\frac{\sqrt[5]{486}}{\sqrt[5]{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 17

Question 18.
\(\frac{\sqrt{2}}{\sqrt{32}}\)
Answer:

Question 19.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{6} \cdot \sqrt[3]{72}}{\sqrt[3]{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 19

Question 20.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{3} \cdot \sqrt[3]{18}}{\sqrt[6]{2} \cdot \sqrt[6]{2}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 21–28, write the expression in simplest form.

Question 21.
\(\sqrt[4]{567}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 21

Question 22.
\(\sqrt[5]{288}\)
Answer:

Question 23.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{5}}{\sqrt[3]{4}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 23

Question 24.
\(\frac{\sqrt[4]{4}}{\sqrt[4]{27}}\)
Answer:

Question 25.
\(\sqrt{\frac{3}{8}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 25

Question 26.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{7}{4}}\)
Answer:

Question 27.
\(\sqrt[3]{\frac{64}{49}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 27

Question 28.
\(\sqrt[4]{\frac{1296}{25}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 29–36, write the expression in simplest form.

Question 29.
\(\frac{1}{1+\sqrt{3}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 29

Question 30.
\(\frac{1}{2+\sqrt{5}}\)
Answer:

Question 31.
\(\frac{5}{3-\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 31

Question 32.
\(\frac{11}{9-\sqrt{6}}\)
Answer:

Question 33.
\(\frac{9}{\sqrt{3}+\sqrt{7}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 33

Question 34.
\(\frac{2}{\sqrt{8}+\sqrt{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 35.
\(\frac{\sqrt{6}}{\sqrt{3}-\sqrt{5}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 35

Question 36.
\(\frac{\sqrt{7}}{\sqrt{10}-\sqrt{2}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 37–46, simplify the expression.

Question 37.
\(9 \sqrt[3]{11}\) + \(3 \sqrt[3]{11}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 37

Question 38.
\(8 \sqrt[6]{5}\) – \(12 \sqrt[6]{5}\)
Answer:

Question 39.
\(3\left(11^{1 / 4}\right)\) + \(9\left(11^{1 / 4}\right)\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 39

Question 40.
\(13\left(8^{3 / 4}\right)\) – \(4\left(8^{3 / 4}\right)\)
Answer:

Question 41.
\(5 \sqrt{12}\) – \(19 \sqrt{3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 41

Question 42.
\(27 \sqrt{6}\) + \(7 \sqrt{150}\)
Answer:

Question 43.
\(\sqrt[5]{224}\) + \(3 \sqrt[5]{7}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 43

Question 44.
\(7 \sqrt[3]{2}\) – \(\sqrt[3]{128}\)
Answer:

Question 45.
\(5\left(24^{1 / 3}\right)\) – 4(\(\left(3^{1 / 3}\right)\))
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 45

Question 46.
\(5^{1 / 4}\) + 6(\([405^{1 / 4}/latex])
Answer:

Question 47.
ERROR ANALYSIS Describe and correct the error in simplifying the expression.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 47

Question 48.
MULTIPLE REPRESENTATIONS Which radical expressions are like radicals?
A. [latex]\left(5^{2 / 9}\right)^{3 / 2}\)
B. \(\frac{5^{3}}{(\sqrt[3]{5})^{8}}\)
C. \(\sqrt[3]{625}\)
D. \(\sqrt[3]{5} 145\) – \(\sqrt[3]{875}\)
E. \(\sqrt[3]{5}\) + \(3 \sqrt[3]{5}\)
F. \(7 \sqrt[4]{80}\) – \(2 \sqrt[4]{405}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 49–54, simplify the expression.

Question 49.
\(\sqrt[4]{81 y^{8}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 49

Question 50.
\(\sqrt[3]{64 r^{3} t^{6}}\)
Answer:

Question 51.
\(\sqrt[5]{\frac{m^{10}}{n^{5}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 51

Question 52.
\(\sqrt[4]{\frac{k^{16}}{16 z^{4}}}\)
Answer:

Question 53.
\(\sqrt[6]{\frac{g^{6} h}{h^{7}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 53

Question 54.
\(\sqrt[8]{n^{2} p^{-1}}\)
Answer:

Question 55.
ERROR ANALYSIS Describe and correct the error in simplifying the expression.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 55

Question 56.
OPEN-ENDED Write two variable expressions involving radicals, one that needs absolute value in simplifying and one that does not need absolute value. Justify your answers.
Answer:

In Exercises 57–64, write the expression in simplest form. Assume all variables are positive.

Question 57.
\(\sqrt{81 a^{7} b^{12} c^{9}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 57

Question 58.
\(\sqrt[3]{125 r^{4} s^{9} t^{7}}\)
Answer:

Question 59.
\(\sqrt[5]{\frac{160 m^{6}}{n^{7}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 59

Question 60.
\(\sqrt[4]{\frac{405 x^{3} y^{3}}{5 x^{-1} y}}\)
Answer:

Question 61.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{w} \cdot \sqrt{w^{5}}}{\sqrt{25 w^{16}}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 61

Question 62.
\(\frac{\sqrt[4]{v^{6}}}{\sqrt[7]{v^{5}}}\)
Answer:

Question 63.
\(\frac{18 w^{1 / 3} v^{5 / 4}}{27 w^{4 / 3} v^{1 / 2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 63

Question 64.
\(\frac{7 x^{-3 / 4} y^{5 / 2} z^{-2 / 3}}{56 x^{-1 / 2} y^{1 / 4}}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 65–70, perform the indicated operation. Assume all variables are positive.

Question 65.
\(12 \sqrt[3]{y}\) + \(9 \sqrt[3]{y}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 65

Question 66.
\(11 \sqrt{2 z}\) – \(5 \sqrt{2 z}\)
Answer:

Question 67.
\(3 x^{7 / 2}\) – 5\(x^{7 / 2}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 67

Question 68.
\(7 \sqrt[3]{m^{7}}\) + \(3 m^{7 / 3}\)
Answer:

Question 69.
\(\sqrt[4]{16 w^{10}}\) + \(2 w \sqrt[4]{w^{6}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 69

Question 70.
(p1/2 • p1/4) – \(\sqrt[4]{16 p^{3}}\)
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS In Exercises 71 and 72, find simplified expressions for the perimeter and area of the given figure.

Question 71.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 71

Question 72
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 19
Answer:

Question 73.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The optimum diameter d (in millimeters) of the pinhole in a pinhole camera can be modeled by d = 1.9[(5.5 × 10−4)ℓ]1/2, where ℓ is the length (in millimeters) of the camera box. Find the optimum pinhole diameter for a camera box with a length of 10 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 73

Question 74.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The surface area S(in square centimeters) of a mammal can be modeled by S = km2/3, where m is the mass (in grams) of the mammal and k is a constant. The table shows the values of k for different mammals.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 21
a. Find the surface area of a bat whose mass is 32 grams.
b. Find the surface area of a rabbit whose mass is 3.4 kilograms (3.4 × 103 grams).
c. Find the surface area of a human whose mass is 59 kilograms.
Answer:

Question 75.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT Your friend claims it is not possible to simplify the expression 7\(\sqrt{11}\) − 9 \(\sqrt{44}\) because it does not contain like radicals. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 75

Question 76.
PROBLEM SOLVING The apparent magnitude of a star is a number that indicates how faint the star is in relation to other stars. The expression f(x) = \(\frac{2.512^{m_{1}}}{2.512^{m_{2}}}\) tells how many times fainter a star with apparent magnitude m1 is than a star with apparent magnitude m2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 22
a. How many times fainter is Altair than Vega?
b. How many times fainter is Deneb than Altair?
c. How many times fainter is Deneb than Vega?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 23
Answer:

Question 77.
CRITICAL THINKING Find a radical expression for the perimeter of the triangle inscribed in the square shown. Simplify the expression.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 24
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 77

Question 78.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? Without finding points, match the functions f(x) = \(\sqrt{64 x^{2}}\) and g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{64 x^{6}}\) with their graphs. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 25
Answer:

Question 79.
REWRITING A FORMULA You have filled two round balloons with water. One balloon contains twice as much water as the other balloon.
a. Solve the formula for the volume of a sphere, V = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3, for r.
b. Substitute the expression for r from part (a) into the formula for the surface area of a sphere, S = 4πr2. Simplify to show that S = (4π)1/3(3V)2/3.
c. Compare the surface areas of the two water balloons using the formula in part (b).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 79.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 79.2

Question 80.
THOUGHT PROVOKING Determine whether the expressions (x2)1/6 and (x1/6)2 are equivalent for all values of x.
Answer:

Question 81.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS Substitute different combinations of odd and even positive integers for m and n in the expression \(\sqrt[n]{x^{m}}\). When you cannot assume x is positive, explain when absolute value is needed in simplifying the expression.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 81
Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Identify the focus, directrix, and axis of symmetry of the parabola. Then graph the equation. (Section 2.3)

Question 82.
y = 2x2
Answer:

Question 83.
y2 = −x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 83.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 83.2

Question 84.
y2 = 4x
Answer:

Write a rule for g. Describe the graph of g as a transformation of the graph of f. (Section 4.7)

Question 85.
f(x) = x4 − 3x2 − 2x, g(x) = −f(x)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 85

Question 86.
f(x) = x3 − x, g(x) = f(x) − 3
Answer:

Question 87.
f(x) = x3 − 4, g(x) = f(x − 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.2 Question 87

Question 88.
f(x) = x4 + 2x3 − 4x2, g(x) = f(2x)
Answer:

Lesson 5.3 Graphing Radical Functions

Essential Question

How can you identify the domain and range of a radical function?

EXPLORATION 1
Identifying Graphs of Radical Functions
Work with a partner.
Match each function with its graph. Explain your reasoning. Then identify the domain and range of each function.
a. f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\)
b. f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\)
c. f(x) = \(\sqrt[4]{x}\)
d. f(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{x}\)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 26

EXPLORATION 2
Identifying Graphs of Transformations
Work with a partner.
Match each transformation of f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) with its graph. Explain your reasoning. Then identify the domain and range of each function.
a. g(x) = \(\sqrt{x+2}\)
b. g(x) = \(\sqrt{x-2}\)
c. g(x) = \(\sqrt{x}+2-2\)
d. g(x) = −\(\sqrt{x+2}\)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 27

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you identify the domain and range of a radical function?

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 28
Question 4.
Use the results of Exploration 1 to describe how the domain and range of a radical function are related to the index of the radical.

5.3 Lesson

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
Graph g(x) = \(\sqrt{x+1}\). Identify the domain and range of the function.

Question 2.
Describe the transformation of f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\) represented by g(x) = −\(\sqrt[3]{x}\) − 2. Then graph each function.

Question 3.
WHAT IF? In Example 3, the function N(d ) = 2.4 • E(d) approximates the number of seconds it takes a dropped object to fall d feet on the Moon. Write a rule for N. How long does it take a dropped object to fall 25 feet on the Moon?

Question 4.
In Example 4, is the transformed function the same when you perform the translation followed by the horizontal shrink? Explain your reasoning.

Question 5.
Use a graphing calculator to graph −4y2 = x + 1. Identify the vertex and the direction that the parabola opens.

Question 6.
Use a graphing calculator to graph x2 + y2 = 25. Identify the radius and the intercepts.

Graphing Radical Functions 5.3 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE Square root functions and cube root functions are examples of __________ functions.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 1

Question 2.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE When graphing y = a\(\sqrt[3]{x-h}\) + k, translate the graph of y = a\(\sqrt[3]{x}\)h units __________ and k units __________.
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–8, match the function with its graph.

Question 3.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}+3\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 3

Question 4.
h(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) + 3
Answer:

Question 5.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 5

Question 6.
g(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) − 3
Answer:

Question 7.
h(x) = \(\sqrt{x+3}\) − 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 7

Question 8.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-3}\) + 3
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 28.1

In Exercises 9–18, graph the function. Identify the domain and range of the function.

Question 9.
h(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 9

Question 10.
g(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) − 5
Answer:

Question 11.
g(x) = − \(\sqrt[3]{2 x}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 11

Question 12.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{-5 x}\)
Answer:

Question 13.
g(x) = \(\frac{1}{5} \sqrt{x}-3\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 13

Question 14.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{2} \sqrt[3]{x}+6\)
Answer:

Question 15.
f(x) = \((6 x)^{1 / 2}\) + 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 15

Question 16.
g(x) = −3(x + 1)1/3

Answer:

Question 17.
h(x) = −\(\sqrt[4]{x}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 17

Question 18.
h(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{2 x}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 19–26, describe the transformation of f represented by g. Then graph each function.

Question 19.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\), g(x) = \(\sqrt{x+1}\) + 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 19

Question 20.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\), g(x) = 2\(\sqrt{x-1}\)
Answer:

Question 21.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\), g(x) = −\(\sqrt[3]{x}\) − 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 21

Question 22.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\), g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x+4}\) − 5
Answer:

Question 23.
f(x) = \(x^{1 / 2}\), g(x) = \(\frac{1}{4}(-x)^{1 / 2}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 23

Question 24.
f(x) = \(x^{1 / 3}\), g(x) = \(\frac{1}{3} x^{1 / 3}\) + 6
Answer:

Question 25.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[4]{x}\), g(x) = \(2 \sqrt[4]{x+5}\) − 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 25

Question 26.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{x}\), g(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{-32 x}\) + 3
Answer:

Question 27.
ERROR ANALYSIS Describe and correct the error in graphing f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-2}\) − 2.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 29
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 27

Question 28.
ERROR ANALYSIS Describe and correct the error in describing the transformation of the parent square root function represented by g(x) = \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{2} x}\) + 3.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 30
Answer:

USING TOOLS In Exercises 29–34, use a graphing calculator to graph the function. Then identify the domain and range of the function.

Question 29.
g(x) = \(\sqrt{x^{2}+x}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 29

Question 30.
h(x) = \(\sqrt{x^{2}-2 x}\)
Answer:

Question 31.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x^{2}+x}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 31

Question 32.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{3 x^{2}-x}\)
Answer:

Question 33.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{2 x^{2}+x+1}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 33

Question 34.
h(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{\frac{1}{2} x^{2}-3 x+4}\)
Answer:

ABSTRACT REASONING In Exercises 35–38, complete the statement with sometimes, always, or never.

Question 35.
The domain of the function y = a\(\sqrt{x}\) is ______ x ≥ 0.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 35

Question 36.
The range of the function y = a\(\sqrt{x}\) is ______ y ≥ 0.
Answer:

Question 37.
The domain and range of the function y = \(\sqrt[3]{x-h}\) + k are ________ all real numbers.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 37

Question 38.
The domain of the function y = a\(\sqrt{-x}\) + k is ________ x ≥ 0.
Answer:

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING The distance (in miles) a pilot can see to the horizon can be approximated by E(n) = 1.22\(\sqrt{n}\), where n is the plane’s altitude (in feet above sea level) on Earth. The function M(n) = 0.75E(n) approximates the distance a pilot can see to the horizon n feet above the surface of Mars. Write a rule for M. What is the distance a pilot can see to the horizon from an altitude of 10,000 feet above Mars?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 31
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 39

Question 40.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The speed (in knots) of sound waves in air can be modeled by
v(K) = 643.855\(\sqrt{\frac{K}{273.15}}\)
where K is the air temperature (in kelvin). The speed (in meters per second) of sound waves in air can be modeled by s(K) = \(\frac{v(K)}{1.944}\)
Write a rule for s. What is the speed (in meters per second) of sound waves when the air temperature is 305 kelvin?
Answer:

In Exercises 41–44, write a rule for g described by the transformations of the graph of f.

Question 41.
Let g be a vertical stretch by a factor of 2, followed by a translation 2 units up of the graph of f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\) + 3.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 41

Question 42.
Let g be a reflection in the y-axis, followed by a translation 1 unit right of the graph of f(x) = \(2 \sqrt[3]{x-1}\).
Answer:

Question 43.
Let g be a horizontal shrink by a factor of \(\frac{2}{3}\), followed by a translation 4 units left of the graph of f(x) = \(\sqrt{6 x}\).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 43

Question 44.
Let g be a translation 1 unit down and 5 units right, followed by a reflection in the x-axis of the graph of f(x) = −\(-\frac{1}{2} \sqrt[4]{x}+\frac{3}{2}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 45 and 46, write a rule for g.

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 32
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 45

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 33
Answer:

In Exercises 47–50, write a rule for g that represents the indicated transformation of the graph of f.

Question 47.
f(x) = 2\(\sqrt{x}\), g(x) = f(x + 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 47

Question 48.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{3} \sqrt{x-1}\), g(x) = −f(x) + 9
Answer:

Question 49.
f(x) = −\(\sqrt{x^{2}-2}\), g(x) = −2f(x + 5)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 49

Question 50.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x^{2}+10 x}\), g(x) =\(\frac{1}{4}\)f(−x) + 6
Answer:

In Exercises 51–56, use a graphing calculator to graph the equation of the parabola. Identify the vertex and the direction that the parabola opens.

Question 51.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)y2 = x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 51

Question 52.
3y2 = x
Answer:

Question 53.
−8y2 + 2 = x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 53

Question 54.
2y2 = x − 4
Answer:

Question 55.
x + 8 = \(\frac{1}{5}\)y2

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 55

Question 56.
\(\frac{1}{2}\)x = y2 − 4
Answer:

In Exercises 57–62, use a graphing calculator to graph the equation of the circle. Identify the radius and the intercepts.

Question 57.
x2 + y2 = 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 57

Question 58.
x2 + y2 = 4
Answer:

Question 59.
1 − y2 = x2

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 59

Question 60.
64 − x2 = y2

Answer:

Question 61.
−y2 = x2 − 36
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 61

Question 62.
x2 = 100 − y2

Answer:

Question 63.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The period of a pendulum is the time the pendulum takes to complete one back-and-forth swing. The period T (in seconds) can be modeled by the function T = 1.11\(\sqrt{\ell}\), where ℓ is the length (in feet) of the pendulum. Graph the function. Estimate the length of a pendulum with a period of 2 seconds. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 34
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 63

Question 64.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? Does the graph represent a square root function or a cube root function? Explain. What are the domain and range of the function?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 35
Answer:

Question 65.
PROBLEM SOLVING For a drag race car with a total weight of 3500 pounds, the speed s(in miles per hour) at the end of a race can be modeled by s = 14.8\(\sqrt[3]{p}\), where p is the power (in horsepower). Graph the function.
a. Determine the power of a 3500-pound car that reaches a speed of 200 miles per hour.
b. What is the average rate of change in speed as the power changes from 1000 horsepower to 1500 horsepower?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 65

Question 66.
THOUGHT PROVOKING The graph of a radical function f passes through the points (3, 1) and (4, 0). Write two different functions that could represent f(x + 2) + 1. Explain.
Answer:

Question 67.
MULTIPLE REPRESENTATIONS The terminal velocity vt(in feet per second) of a skydiver who weighs 140 pounds is given by vt = 33.7\(\sqrt{\frac{140}{\Lambda}}\)
where A is the cross-sectional surface area (in square feet) of the skydiver. The table shows the terminal velocities (in feet per second) for various surface areas (in square feet) of a skydiver who weighs 165 pounds.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 36
a. Which skydiver has a greater terminal velocity for each value of A given in the table?
b. Describe how the different values of A given in the table relate to the possible positions of the falling skydiver.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 67

Question 68.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS The surface area S of a right circular cone with a slant height of 1 unit is given by S = πr + πr2, where r is the radius of the cone.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 37
a. Use completing the square to show that r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\pi}} \sqrt{S+\frac{\pi}{4}}-\frac{1}{2}\).
b. Graph the equation in part (a) using a graphing calculator. Then find the radius of a right circular cone with a slant height of 1 unit and a surface area of \(\frac{3 \pi}{4}\) square units.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the equation. Check your solutions. (Skills Review Handbook)

Question 69.
| 3x + 2 | = 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 69

Question 70.
∣4x + 9 ∣ = −7
Answer:

Question 71.
| 2x − 6 ∣ = ∣ x ∣
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 71

Question 72.
| x + 8 | = | 2x + 2 |
Answer:

Solve the inequality. (Section 3.6)

Question 73.
x2 + 7x + 12 < 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 73

Question 74.
x2 − 10x + 25 ≥ 4
Answer:

Question 75.
2x2 + 6 > 13x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.3 Question 75

Question 76.
\(\frac{1}{8}\)x2 + x ≤ −2
Answer:

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Study Skills : Analyzing Your Errors

5.1–5.3 What Did You Learn?

Core Vocabulary
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 38

Core Concepts
Section 5.1
Real nth Roots of a, p. 238
Rational Exponents, p. 239

Section 5.2
Properties of Rational Exponents, p. 244
Properties of Radicals, p. 245

Section 5.3
Parent Functions for Square Root and Cube Root Functions, p. 252
Transformations of Radical Functions, p. 253

Mathematical Practices

Question 1.
How can you use definitions to explain your reasoning in Exercises 21–24 on page 241?

Question 2.
How did you use structure to solve Exercise 76 on page 250?

Question 3.
How can you check that your answer is reasonable in Exercise 39 on page 257?

Question 4.
How can you make sense of the terms of the surface area formula given in Exercise 68 on page 258?

Study Skills
Analyzing Your Errors
Application Errors
What Happens: You can do numerical problems, but you struggle with problems that have context.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 39
How to Avoid This Error: Do not just mimic the steps of solving an application problem. Explain out loud what the question is asking and why you are doing each step. After solving the problem, ask yourself, “Does my solution make sense?”

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.1 – 5.3 Quiz

5.1–5.3 Quiz

Find the indicated real nth root(s) of a. (Section 5.1)

Question 1.
n = 4, a = 81

Question 2.
n = 5, a = −1024

Question 3.
Evaluate (a) 163/4 and (b) 1252/3 without using a calculator. Explain your reasoning. (Section 5.1)

Find the real solution(s) of the equation. Round your answer to two decimal places.(Section 5.1)

Question 4.
2x6 = 1458

Question 5.
(x + 6)3 = 28

Simplify the expression.(Section 5.2)

Question 6.
\(\left(\frac{48^{1 / 4}}{6^{1 / 4}}\right)^{6}\)

Question 7.
\(\sqrt[4]{3}\) • \(\sqrt[4]{432}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{3+\sqrt{2}}\)

Question 9.
\(\sqrt[3]{16}\) – \(5 \sqrt[3]{2}\)

Question 10.
Simplify \(\sqrt[8]{x^{9} y^{8} z^{16}}\). (Section 5.2)

Write the expression in simplest form. Assume all variables are positive.(Section 5.2)

Question 11.
\(\sqrt[3]{216 p^{9}}\)

Question 12.
\(\frac{\sqrt[5]{32}}{\sqrt[5]{m^{3}}}\)

Question 13.
\(\sqrt[4]{n^{4} q}\) + \(7 n \sqrt[4]{q}\)

Question 14.
Graph f(x) = 2\(2 \sqrt[3]{x}\) + 1. Identify the domain and range of the function. (Section 5.3)

Describe the transformation of the parent function represented by the graph of g. Then write a rule for g.(Section 5.3)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 40

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 41

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 42

Question 18.
Use a graphing calculator to graph x = 3y2 − 6. Identify the vertex and direction the parabola opens. (Section 5.3)

Question 19.
A jeweler is setting a stone cut in the shape of a regular octahedron. A regular octahedron is a solid with eight equilateral triangles as faces, as shown. The formula for the volume of the stone is V= 0.47s3, where s is the side length (in millimeters) of an edge of the stone. The volume of the stone is 161 cubic millimeters. Find the length of an edge of the stone. (Section 5.1)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 43

Question 20.
An investigator can determine how fast a car was traveling just prior to an accident using the model s = 4\(\sqrt{d}\), where s is the speed (in miles per hour) of the car and d is the length (in feet) of the skid marks. Graph the model. The length of the skid marks of a car is 90 feet. Was the car traveling at the posted speed limit prior to the accident? Explain your reasoning. (Section 5.3)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 44

Lesson 5.4 Solving Radical Equations and Inequalities

Essential Question
How can you solve a radical equation?

EXPLORATION 1
Solving Radical Equations
Work with a partner.
Match each radical equation with the graph of its related radical function. Explain your reasoning. Then use the graph to solve the equation, if possible. Check your solutions.
a. \(\sqrt{x-1}\) – 1 = 0
b. \(\sqrt{2 x+2}\) – \(\sqrt{x+4}\) = 0
c. \(\sqrt{9-x^{2}}\) = 0
d. \(\sqrt{x+2}\) – x = 0
e. \(\sqrt{-x+2}\) – x = 0
f. \(\sqrt{3 x^{2}+1}\) = 0
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 45

EXPLORATION 2
Solving Radical Equations
Work with a partner.
Look back at the radical equations in Exploration 1. Suppose that you did not know how to solve the equations using a graphical approach.
a. Show how you could use a numerical approach to solve one of the equations. For instance, you might use a spreadsheet to create a table of values.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 46
b. Show how you could use an analytical approach to solve one of the equations. For instance, look at the similarities between the equations in Exploration 1. What first step may be necessary so you could square each side to eliminate the radical(s)? How would you proceed to find the solution?

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you solve a radical equation?

Question 4.
Would you prefer to use a graphical, numerical, or analytical approach to solve the given equation? Explain your reasoning. Then solve the equation.
\(\sqrt{x+3}\) – \(\sqrt{x-2}\) = 1

Monitoring Progress

Solve the equation. Check your solution.

Question 1.
\(\sqrt[3]{x}\) – 9 = -6

Question 2.
\(\sqrt{x+25}\) = 2

Question 3.
2\(\sqrt[3]{x-3}\) = 4

Question 4.
WHAT IF? Estimate the air pressure at the center of the hurricane when the mean sustained wind velocity is 48.3 meters per second.

Solve the equation. Check your solution(s).

Question 5.
\(\sqrt{10 x+9}\) = x + 3

Question 6.
\(\sqrt{2 x+5}\) = \(\sqrt{x+7}\)

Question 7.
\(\sqrt{x+6}\) – 2 = \(\sqrt{x-2}\)

Solve the equation. Check your solution(s).

Question 8.
(3x)1/3 = −3

Question 9.
(x + 6)1/2 = x

Question 10.
(x + 2)3/4 = 8

Question 11.
Solve
(a) 2\(\sqrt{x}\) − 3 ≥ 3 and
(b) 4\(\sqrt[3]{x+1}\) < 8

Solving Radical Equations and Inequalities 5.4 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY Is the equation 3x − \(\sqrt{2}\) = \(\sqrt{6}\) a radical equation? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 1

Question 2.
WRITING Explain the steps you should use to solve \(\sqrt{x}\) + 10 < 15
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–12, solve the equation. Check your solution.

Question 3.
\(\sqrt{5 x+1}\) = 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 3

Question 4.
\(\sqrt{3 x+10}\) = 8
Answer:

Question 5.
\(\sqrt[3]{x-16}\) = 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 5

Question 6.
\(\sqrt[3]{x}\) − 10 = −7
Answer:

Question 7.
−2\(\sqrt{24 x}\) + 13 = −1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 7

Question 8.
8\(\sqrt[3]{10 x}\) − 15 = 17
Answer:

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{5} \sqrt[3]{3 x}\) = 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 9

Question 10.
\(\sqrt{2 x}-\frac{2}{3}\) = 0
Answer:

Question 11.
\(2 \sqrt[5]{x}\) + 7 = 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 11

Question 12.
\(\sqrt[4]{4 x}\) − 13 = −15
Answer:

Question 13.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS Biologists have discovered that the shoulder height h (in centimeters) of a male Asian elephant can be modeled by h = 62.5\(\sqrt[3]{t}\) + 75.8, where t is the age (in years) of the elephant. Determine the age of an elephant with a shoulder height of 250 centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 47
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 13

Question 14.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS In an amusement park ride, a rider suspended by cables swings back and forth from a tower. The maximum speed v (in meters per second) of the rider can be approximated by v = \(\sqrt{2 g h}\), where h is the height (in meters) at the top of each swing and g is the acceleration due to gravity (g ≈ 9.8 m/sec2). Determine the height at the top of the swing of a rider whose maximum speed is 15 meters per second.
Answer:

In Exercises 15–26, solve the equation. Check your solution(s).

Question 15.
x− 6 = \(\sqrt{3 x}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 15

Question 16.
x − 10 = \(\sqrt{9 x}\)
Answer:

Question 17.
\(\sqrt{44-2 x}\) = x − 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 17

Question 18.
\(\sqrt{2 x+30}\) = x + 3
Answer:

Question 19.
\(\sqrt[3]{8 x^{3}-1}\) = 2x − 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 19

Question 20.
\(\sqrt[4]{3-8 x^{2}}\) = 2x
Answer:

Question 21.
\(\sqrt{4 x+1}\) = \(\sqrt{x+10}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 21

Question 22.
\(\sqrt{3 x-3}\) – \(\sqrt{x+12}\) = 0
Answer:

Question 23.
\(\sqrt[3]{2 x-5}\) – \(\sqrt[3]{8 x+1}\) = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 23

Question 24.
\(\sqrt[3]{x+5}\) = 2\(\sqrt[3]{2 x+6}\)
Answer:

Question 25.
\(\sqrt{3 x-8}\) + 1 = \(\sqrt{x+5}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 25.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 25.2

Question 26.
\(\sqrt{x+2}\) = 2 – \(\sqrt{x}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 27–34, solve the equation. Check your solution(s).

Question 27.
2x2/3 = 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 27

Question 28.
4x3/2 = 32
Answer:

Question 29.
x1/4 + 3 = 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 29

Question 30.
2x3/4 − 14 = 40
Answer:

Question 31.
(x + 6)1/2 = x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 31

Question 32.
(5 − x)1/2 − 2x = 0
Answer:

Question 33.
2(x + 11)1/2 = x + 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 33.1

Question 34.
(5x2 − 4)1/4 = x
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 35 and 36, describe and correct the error in solving the equation.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 48
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 35.1

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 49
Answer:

In Exercises 37–44, solve the inequality.

Question 37.
\(2 \sqrt[3]{x}\) − 5 ≥ 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 37

Question 38.
\(\sqrt[3]{x-4}\) ≤ 5
Answer:

Question 39.
\(4 \sqrt{x-2}\) > 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 39

Question 40.
7\(\sqrt{x}\) + 1 < 9
Answer:

Question 41.
2\(\sqrt{x}\) + 3 ≤ 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 41

Question 42.
\(\sqrt[3]{x+7}\) ≥ 3
Answer:

Question 43.
\(-2 \sqrt[3]{x+4}\) < 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 43

Question 44.
−0.25\(\sqrt{x}\) − 6 ≤ −3
Answer:

Question 45.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The length ℓ (in inches) of a standard nail can be modeled by ℓ = 54d3/2, where d is the diameter (in inches) of the nail. What is the diameter of a standard nail that is 3 inches long?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 45

Question 46.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS “Hang time” is the time you are suspended in the air during a jump. Your hang time t (in seconds) is given by the function t = 0.5\(\sqrt{h}\), where h is the height (in feet) of the jump. Suppose a kangaroo and a snowboarder jump with the hang times shown.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 50
a. Find the heights that the snowboarder and the kangaroo jump.
b. Double the hang times of the snowboarder and the kangaroo and calculate the corresponding heights of each jump.
c. When the hang time doubles, does the height of the jump double? Explain.
Answer:

USING TOOLS In Exercises 47–52, solve the nonlinear system. Justify your answer with a graph.

Question 47.
y2 = x − 3
y = x − 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 47

Question 48.
y2 = 4x + 17
y = x + 5
Answer:

Question 49.
x2 + y2 = 4
y = x – 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 49

Question 50.
x2 + y2 = 25
y = \(-\frac{3}{4}\)x + \(\frac{25}{4}\)
Answer:

Question 51.
x2 + y2 = 1
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x2 – 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 51

Question 52.
x2 + y2 = 4
y2 = x + 2
Answer:

Question 53.
PROBLEM SOLVING The speed s (in miles per hour) of a car can be given by s = \(\sqrt{30 f d}\), where f is the coefficient of friction and d is the stopping distance (in feet). The table shows the coefficient of friction for different surfaces.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 51
a. Compare the stopping distances of a car traveling 45 miles per hour on the surfaces given in the table.
b. You are driving 35 miles per hour on an icy road when a deer jumps in front of your car. How far away must you begin to brake to avoid hitting the deer? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 53.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 53.2

Question 54.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The Beaufort wind scale was devised to measure wind speed. The Beaufort numbers B, which range from 0 to 12, can be modeled by B = 1.69\(\sqrt{s+4.25}\) − 3.55, where s is the wind speed (in miles per hour).
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 52
a. What is the wind speed for B = 0? B = 3?
b. Write an inequality that describes the range of wind speeds represented by the Beaufort model.
Answer:

Question 55.
USING TOOLS Solve the equation x − 4 = \(\sqrt{2 x}\). Then solve the equation x − 4 = − \(\sqrt{2 x}\).
a. How does changing \(\sqrt{2 x}\) to −\(\sqrt{2 x}\) change the solution(s) of the equation?
b. Justify your answer in part (a) using graphs.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 55.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 55.2
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 55.3

Question 56.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT Your friend says it is impossible for a radical equation to have two extraneous solutions. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 57.
USING STRUCTURE Explain how you know the radical equation \(\sqrt{x+4}\) = −5 has no real solution without solving it.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 57

Question 58.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? Use the graph to find the solution of the equation 2\(\sqrt{x-4}\) = −\(\sqrt{x-1}\) + 4. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 53
Answer:

Question 59.
WRITING A company determines that the price p of a product can be modeled by p = 70 − \(\sqrt{0.02 x+1}\), where x is the number of units of the product demanded per day. Describe the effect that raising the price has on the number of units demanded.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 59

Question 60.
THOUGHT PROVOKING City officials rope off a circular area to prepare for a concert in the park. They estimate that each person occupies 6 square feet. Describe how you can use a radical inequality to determine the possible radius of the region when P people are expected to attend the concert.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 54
Answer:

Question 61.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS The Moeraki Boulders along the coast of New Zealand are stone spheres with radii of approximately 3 feet. A formula for the radius of a sphere is
r = \(\frac{1}{2} \sqrt{\frac{S}{\pi}}\)
where S is the surface area of the sphere. Find the surface area of a Moeraki Boulder.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 61

Question 62.
PROBLEM SOLVING You are trying to determine the height of a truncated pyramid, which cannot be measured directly. The height h and slant heightℓof the truncated pyramid are related by the formula below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 55
In the given formula, b1 and b2 are the side lengths of the upper and lower bases of the pyramid, respectively. When ℓ = 5, b1 = 2, and b2 = 4, what is the height of the pyramid?
Answer:

Question 63.
REWRITING A FORMULA A burning candle has a radius of r inches and was initially h0inches tall. After t minutes, the height of the candle has been reduced to h inches. These quantities are related by the formula
r = \(\sqrt{\frac{k t}{\pi\left(h_{0}-h\right)}}\)
where k is a constant. Suppose the radius of a candle is 0.875 inch, its initial height is 6.5 inches, and k = 0.04.
a. Rewrite the formula, solving for h in terms of t.
b. Use your formula in part (a) to determine the height of the candle after burning 45 minutes.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 63

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Perform the indicated operation. (Section 4.2 and Section 4.3)

Question 64.
(x3 − 2x2 + 3x + 1) + (x4 − 7x)
Answer:

Question 65.
(2x5 + x4 − 4x2) − (x5 − 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 65

Question 66.
(x3 + 2x2 + 1)(x2 + 5)
Answer:

Question 67.
(x4 + 2x3 + 11x2 + 14x − 16) ÷ (x + 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 67

Let f(x) = x3 – 4x2 + 6. Write a rule for g. Describe the graph of g as a transformation of the graph of f.(Section 4.7)

Question 68.
g(x) = f(−x) + 4
Answer:

Question 69.
g(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)f(x) − 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.4 Question 69

Question 70.
g(x) = −f(x − 1) + 6
Answer:

Lesson 5.5 Performing Function Operations

Essential Question
How can you use the graphs of two functions to sketch the graph of an arithmetic combination of the two functions?
Just as two real numbers can be combined by the operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division to form other real numbers, two functions can be combined to form other functions. For example, the functions f(x) = 2x − 3 and g(x) = x2 − 1 can be combined to form the sum, difference, product, or quotient of f and g.
f(x) + g(x) = (2x − 3) + (x2 − 1) = x2 + 2x − 4 sum
f(x) − g(x) = (2x − 3) − (x2 − 1) = −x2 + 2x − 2 difference
f(x) • g(x) = (2x − 3)(x2 − 1) = 2x3 − 3x2 − 2x + 3 product
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 56

EXPLORATION 1
Graphing the Sum of Two Functions
Work with a partner.
Use the graphs of f and g to sketch the graph of f + g. Explain your steps.
Sample Choose a point on the graph of g. Use a compass or a ruler to measure its distance above or below the x-axis. If above, add the distance to the y-coordinate of the point with the same x-coordinate on the graph of f. If below, subtract the distance. Plot the new point. Repeat this process for several points. Finally, draw a smooth curve through the new points to obtain the graph of f + g.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 57
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 58

Communicate Your Answer

Question 2.
How can you use the graphs of two functions to sketch the graph of an arithmetic combination of the two functions?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 59
Question 3.
Check your answers in Exploration 1 by writing equations for f and g, adding the functions, and graphing the sum.

5.5 Lesson

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
Let f(x) = −2x2/3 and g(x) = 7x2/3. Find (f + g)(x) and (f − g)(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate (f + g)(8) and (f − g)(8).

Question 2.
Let f(x) = 3x and g(x) = x1/5. Find (fg)(x) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate (fg)(32) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(32).

Question 3.
Let f(x) = 8x and g(x) = 2x5/6. Use a graphing calculator to evaluate (f + g)(x), (f − g)(x), (fg)(x), and (\(\frac{f}{g}\)) (x) when x = 5. Round your answers to two decimal places.

Question 4.
In Example 5, explain why you can evaluate (f + g)(3), (f − g)(3), and (fg)(3) but not (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(3).

Question 5.
Use the answer in Example 6(a) to find the total number of heartbeats over the lifetime of a white rhino when its body mass is 1.7 × 105 kilograms.

Performing Function Operations 5.5 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING Let f and g be any two functions. Describe how you can use f, g, and the four basic operations to create new functions.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 1

Question 2.
WRITING What x-values are not included in the domain of the quotient of two functions?
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3–6, find (f + g)(x) and (f – g)(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate f + g and f – g for the given value of x.

Question 3.
f(x) = \(-5 \sqrt[4]{x}\), g(x) = 19\(\sqrt[4]{x}\); x = 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 3

Question 4.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{2 x}\), g(x) = −11\(\sqrt[3]{2 x}\) ; x = −4
Answer:

Question 5.
f(x) = 6x − 4x2− 7x3, g(x) = 9x2− 5x; x = −1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 5

Question 6.
f(x) = 11x + 2x2, g(x) = −7x − 3x2 + 4; x = 2
Answer:

In Exercises 7–12, find (fg)(x) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate fg and \(\frac{f}{g}\) for the given value of x.

Question 7.
f(x) = 2x3, g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\) ; x = −27
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 7

Question 8.
f(x) = x4, g(x) = \(3 \sqrt{x}\) ; x = 4
Answer:

Question 9.
f(x) = 4x, g(x) = 9x1/2; x = 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 9

Question 10.
f(x) = 11x3, g(x) = 7x7/3; x = −8
Answer:

Question 11.
f(x) = 7x3/2, g(x) =−14x1/3; x = 64
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 11

Question 12.
f(x) = 4x5/4, g(x) = 2x1/2; x = 16
Answer:

USING TOOLS In Exercises 13–16, use a graphing calculator to evaluate (f + g)(x), (f − g)(x), (fg)(x), and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(x) when x = 5. Round your answers to two decimal places.

Question 13.
f(x) = 4x4; g(x) = 24x1/3

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 13

Question 14.
f(x) = 7x5/3; g(x) = 49x2/3

Answer:

Question 15.
f(x) =−2x1/3; g(x) = 5x1/2

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 15

Question 16.
f(x) = 4x1/2; g(x) = 6x3/4

Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 17 and 18, describe and correct the error in stating the domain.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 60
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 61
Answer:

Question 19.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS From 1990 to 2010, the numbers (in millions) of female F and male M employees from the ages of 16 to 19 in the United States can be modeled by F(t) =−0.007t2 + 0.10t + 3.7 and M(t) = 0.0001t3 − 0.009t2 + 0.11t + 3.7, where t is the number of years since 1990.
a. Find (F + M)(t).
b. Explain what (F + M)(t) represents.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 19

Question 20.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS From 2005 to 2009, the numbers of cruise ship departures (in thousands) from around the world W and Florida F can be modeled by the equations
W(t) = −5.8333t3 + 17.43t2 + 509.1t + 11496
F(t) = 12.5t3 − 60.29t2 + 136.6t + 4881
where t is the number of years since 2005.
a. Find (W − F )(t).
b. Explain what (W − F )(t) represents.
Answer:

Question 21.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT Your friend claims that the addition of functions and the multiplication of functions are commutative. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 21

Question 22.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? The graphs of the functions f(x) = 3x2 − 2x − 1 and g(x) = 3x + 4 are shown. Which graph represents the function f + g? the function f − g? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 62
Answer:

Question 23.
REASONING The table shows the outputs of the two functions f and g. Use the table to evaluate (f + g)(3), (f − g)(1), (fg)(2), and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(0).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 63
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 23

Question 24.
THOUGHT PROVOKING Is it possible to write two functions whose sum contains radicals, but whose product does not? Justify your answers.
Answer:

Question 25.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS A triangle is inscribed in a square, as shown. Write and simplify a function r in terms of x that represents the area of the shaded region.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 64
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 25

Question 26.
REWRITING A FORMULA For a mammal that weighs w grams, the volume b (in milliliters) of air breathed in and the volume d (in milliliters) of “dead space” (the portion of the lungs not filled with air) can be modeled by
b(w) = 0.007w and d(w) = 0.002w.
The breathing rate r (in breaths per minute) of a mammal that weighs w grams can be modeled by
r(w) = \(\frac{1.1 w^{0.734}}{b(w)-d(w)}\).
Answer:

Question 27.
PROBLEM SOLVING A mathematician at a lake throws a tennis ball from point A along the water’s edge to point B in the water, as shown. His dog, Elvis, first runs along the beach from point A to point D and then swims to fetch the ball at point B.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 65
a. Elvis runs at a speed of about 6.4 meters per second. Write a function r in terms of x that represents the time he spends running from point A to point D. Elvis swims at a speed of about 0.9 meter per second. Write a function s in terms of x that represents the time he spends swimming from point D to point B.
b. Write a function t in terms of x that represents the total time Elvis spends traveling from point A to point D to point B.
c. Use a graphing calculator to graph t. Find the value of x that minimizes t. Explain the meaning of this value.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 27

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the literal equation for n. (Skills Review Handbook)

Question 28.
3xn − 9 = 6y
Answer:

Question 29.
5z = 7n + 8nz
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 29

Question 30.
3nb = 5n − 6z
Answer:

Question 31.
\(\frac{3+4 n}{n}\) = 7b
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 31

Determine whether the relation is a function. Explain. (Skills Review Handbook)

Question 32.
(3, 4), (4, 6), (1, 4), (2, −1)
Answer:

Question 33.
(−1, 2), (3, 7), (0, 2), (−1, −1)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 33

Question 34.
(1, 6), (7, −3), (4, 0), (3, 0)
Answer:

Question 35.
(3, 8), (2, 5), (9, 5), (2, −3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.5 Question 35

Lesson 5.6 Inverse of a Function

Essential Question
How can you sketch the graph of the inverse of a function?

EXPLORATION 1
Graphing Functions and Their Inverses
Work with a partner.
Each pair of functions are inverses of each other. Use a graphing calculator to graph f and g in the same viewing window. What do you notice about the graphs?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 65.1
a. f(x) = 4x + 3
g(x) = \(\frac{x-3}{4}\)
b. f(x) = x3 + 1
g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x-1}\)
c. f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-3}[latex]
g(x) = x2 + 3, x ≥ 0
d. f(x) = [latex]\frac{4 x+4}{x+5}\)
g(x) = \(\frac{4-5 x}{x-4}\)

EXPLORATION 2
Sketching Graphs of Inverse Functions
Work with a partner.
Use the graph of f to sketch the graph of g, the inverse function of f, on the same set of coordinate axes. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 66

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you sketch the graph of the inverse of a function?

Question 4.
In Exploration 1, what do you notice about the relationship between the equations of f and g? Use your answer to find g, the inverse function of
f(x) = 2x − 3.
Use a graph to check your answer.

5.6 Lesson

Monitoring Progress

Solve y = f(x) for x. Then find the input(s) when the output is 2.

Question 1.
f(x) = x − 2

Question 2.
f(x) = 2x2

Question 3.
f(x) = −x3 + 3

Find the inverse of the function. Then graph the function and its inverse.

Question 4.
f(x) = 2x

Question 5.
f(x) = −x + 1

Question 6.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)x − 2

Find the inverse of the function. Then graph the function and its inverse.

Question 7.
f(x) = −x2, x ≤ 0

Question 8.
f(x) = −x3 + 4

Question 9.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x+2}\)

Determine whether the functions are inverse functions.

Question 10.
f(x) = x + 5, g(x) = x − 5

Question 11.
f(x) = 8x3, g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{2 x}\)

Question 12.
The distance d (in meters) that a dropped object falls in t seconds on Earth is represented by d = 4.9t2. Find the inverse of the function. How long does it take an object to fall 50 meters?

Inverse of a Function 5.6 Exercises

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY In your own words, state the definition of inverse functions.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 1

Question 2.
WRITING Explain how to determine whether the inverse of a function is also a function.
Answer:

Question 3.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE Functions f and g are inverses of each other provided that f(g(x)) = ____ and g(f(x)) = ____.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 3

Question 4.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 67
Answer:

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 5–12, solve y = f(x) for x. Then find the input(s) when the output is -3.

Question 5.
f(x) = 3x + 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 5

Question 6.
f(x) = −7x − 2
Answer:

Question 7.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x − 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 7

Question 8.
f(x) = −\(\frac{2}{3}\)x + 1
Answer:

Question 9.
f(x) = 3x3

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 9

Question 10.
f(x) = 2x4 − 5
Answer:

Question 11.
f(x) = (x − 2)2 − 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 11

Question 12.
f(x) = (x − 5)3 − 1
Answer:

In Exercises 13–20, find the inverse of the function. Then graph the function and its inverse.

Question 13.
f(x) = 6x
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 13.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 13.2

Question 14.
f(x) = −3x
Answer:

Question 15.
f(x) = −2x + 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 15.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 15.2

Question 16.
f(x) = 6x − 3
Answer:

Question 17.
f(x) = −\(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 17.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 17.2

Question 18.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)x − 1
Answer:

Question 19.
f(x) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x − \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 19.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 19.2

Question 20.
f(x) = −\(\frac{4}{5}\)x + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Answer:

Question 21.
COMPARING METHODS Find the inverse of the function f(x) = −3x + 4 by switching the roles of x and y and solving for y. Then find the inverse of the function f by using inverse operations in the reverse order. Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 21

Question 22.
REASONING Determine whether each pair of functions f and g are inverses. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 68
Answer:

In Exercises 23–28, find the inverse of the function. Then graph the function and its inverse.

Question 23.
f(x) = 4x2, x ≤ 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 23

Question 24.
f(x) = 9x2, x ≤ 0
Answer:

Question 25.
f(x) = (x − 3)3

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 25

Question 26.
f(x) = (x + 4)3

Answer:

Question 27.
f(x) = 2x4, x ≥ 0
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 27

Question 28.
f(x) = −x6, x ≥ 0
Answer:

ERROR ANALYSIS In Exercises 29 and 30, describe and correct the error in finding the inverse of the function.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 69
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 29

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 70
Answer:

USING TOOLS In Exercises 31–34, use the graph to determine whether the inverse of f is a function. Explain your reasoning.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 71
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 72
Answer:

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 73
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 33

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 74
Answer:

In Exercises 35–46, determine whether the inverse of f is a function. Then find the inverse.

Question 35.
f(x) = x3 − 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 35

Question 36.
f(x) = −x3 + 3
Answer:

Question 37.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x+4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 37

Question 38.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-6}\)
Answer:

Question 39.
f(x) = \(2 \sqrt[3]{x-5}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 39

Question 40.
f(x) = 2x2 − 5
Answer:

Question 41.
f(x) = x4 + 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 41

Question 42.
f(x) = 2x3 − 5
Answer:

Question 43.
f(x) = \(3 \sqrt[3]{x+1}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 43

Question 44.
f(x) = \(-\sqrt[3]{\frac{2 x+4}{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 45.
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x5

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 45

Question 46.
f(x) = \(-3 \sqrt{\frac{4 x-7}{3}}\)
Answer:

Question 47.
WRITING EQUATIONS What is the inverse of the function whose graph is shown?
A. g(x) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x − 6
B. g(x) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)x + 6
C. g(x) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x − 6
D. g(x) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)x + 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 75
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 47

Question 48.
WRITING EQUATIONS What is the inverse of f(x) = −\(-\frac{1}{64}\)x3?
A. g(x) = −4x3
B. g(x) = 4\(\sqrt[3]{x}\)
C. g(x) = −4\(\sqrt[3]{x}\)
D. g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{-4 x}\)
Answer:

In Exercises 49–52, determine whether the functions are inverses.

Question 49.
f(x) = 2x − 9, g(x) = x — 2 + 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 49

Question 50.
f(x) = \(\frac{x-3}{4}\), g(x) = 4x + 3
Answer:

Question 51.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{\frac{x+9}{5}}\), g(x) = 5x5 − 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 51.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 51.2

Question 52.
f(x) = 7x3/2 − 4, g(x) = (\(\frac{x+4}{7}\))3/2

Answer:

Question 53.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS The maximum hull speed v (in knots) of a boat with a displacement hull can be approximated by v = 1.34\(\sqrt{\ell}\), where ℓ is the waterline length (in feet) of the boat. Find the inverse function. What waterline length is needed to achieve a maximum speed of 7.5 knots?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 76
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 53.1

Question 54.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS Elastic bands can be used for exercising to provide a range of resistance. The resistance R (in pounds) of a band can be modeled by R = \(\frac{3}{8}\)L − 5, where L is the total length (in inches) of the stretched band. Find the inverse function. What length of the stretched band provides 19 pounds of resistance?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 77
Answer:

ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS In Exercises 55–58, match the graph of the function with the graph of its inverse.

Question 55.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 78
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 55

Question 56.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 79
Answer:

Question 57.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 80
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 57

Question 58.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 81
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 82

Question 59.
REASONING You and a friend are playing a number-guessing game. You ask your friend to think of a positive number, square the number, multiply the result by 2, and then add 3. Your friend’s final answer is 53. What was the original number chosen? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 59

Question 60.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT Your friend claims that every quadratic function whose domain is restricted to nonnegative values has an inverse function. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 61.
PROBLEM SOLVING When calibrating a spring scale, you need to know how far the spring stretches for various weights. Hooke’s Law states that the length a spring stretches is proportional to the weight attached to it. A model for one scale is ℓ = 0.5w + 3, whereℓ is the total length (in inches) of the stretched spring and w is the weight (in pounds) of the object.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 83
a. Find the inverse function. Describe what it represents.
b. You place a melon on the scale, and the spring stretches to a total length of 5.5 inches. Determine the weight of the melon.
c. Verify that the function ℓ = 0.5w + 3 and the inverse model in part (a) are inverse functions.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 61.1
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 61.2

Question 62.
THOUGHT PROVOKING Do functions of the form y = xm/n, where m and n are positive integers, have inverse functions? Justify your answer with examples.
Answer:

Question 63.
PROBLEM SOLVING At the start of a dog sled race in Anchorage, Alaska, the temperature was 5°C. By the end of the race, the temperature was −10°C. The formula for converting temperatures from degrees Fahrenheit F to degrees Celsius C is C = \(\frac{5}{9}\)(F − 32).
a. Find the inverse function. Describe what it represents.
b. Find the Fahrenheit temperatures at the start and end of the race.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 84
c. Use a graphing calculator to graph the original function and its inverse. Find the temperature that is the same on both temperature scales.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 63.1

Question 64.
PROBLEM SOLVING The surface area A (in square meters) of a person with a mass of 60 kilograms can be approximated by A = 0.2195h0.3964, where h is the height (in centimeters) of the person.
a. Find the inverse function. Then estimate the height of a 60-kilogram person who has a body surface area of 1.6 square meters.
b. Verify that function A and the inverse model in part (a) are inverse functions.
Answer:

USING STRUCTURE In Exercises 65–68, match the function with the graph of its inverse.

Question 65.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x-4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 65.1

Question 66.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x+4}\)
Answer:

Question 67.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x+1}\) – 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 67.1

Question 68.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x-1}\) + 3
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 85

Question 69.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS Determine whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.
a. If f(x) = xn and n is a positive even integer, then the inverse of f is a function.
b. If f(x) = xn and n is a positive odd integer, then the inverse of f is a function.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 69.1

Question 70.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT? The graph of the function f is shown. Name three points that lie on the graph of the inverse of f. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 86
Answer:

Question 71.
ABSTRACT REASONING Show that the inverse of any linear function f(x) = mx + b, where m ≠ 0, is also a linear function. Identify the slope and y-intercept of the graph of the inverse function in terms of m and b.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 71

Question 72.
CRITICAL THINKING Consider the function f(x) = −x.
a. Graph f(x) = −x and explain why it is its own inverse. Also, verify that f(x) = −x is its own inverse algebraically.
b. Graph other linear functions that are their own inverses. Write equations of the lines you graphed.
c. Use your results from part (b) to write a general equation describing the family of linear functions that are their own inverses.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify the expression. Write your answer using only positive exponents.(Skills Review Handbook)

Question 73.
(−3)−3

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 73

Question 74.
23 • 22

Answer:

Question 75.
\(\frac{4^{5}}{4^{3}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 75

Question 76.
(\(\frac{2}{3}\))4

Answer:

Describe the x-values for which the function is increasing, decreasing, positive, and negative.

Question 77.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 87
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 77

Question 78.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 88
Answer:

Question 79.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 89
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Answers Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 5.6 Question 79

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Performance Task: Turning the Tables

5.4–5.6 What Did You Learn?

Core Vocabulary
radical equation, p. 262
extraneous solutions, p. 263
inverse functions, p. 277

Core Concepts
Section 5.4

Solving Radical Equations, p. 262
Solving Radical Inequalities, p. 265

Section 5.5
Operations on Functions, p. 270

Section 5.6
Exploring Inverses of Functions, p. 276
Inverses of Nonlinear Functions, p. 278
Horizontal Line Test, p. 278

Mathematical Practices

Question 1.
How did you find the endpoints of the range in part (b) of Exercise 54 on page 267?

Question 2.
How did you use structure in Exercise 57 on page 268?

Question 3.
How can you evaluate the reasonableness of the results in Exercise 27 on page 274?

Question 4.
How can you use a graphing calculator to check your answers in Exercises 49–52 on page 282?

Performance Task

Turning the Tables

In this chapter, you have used properties of rational exponents and functions to find an answer to the problem. Using those same properties, can you find a problem to the answer? How many problems can you find?
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 90
To explore the answers to these questions and more, go to BigIdeasMath.com

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Chapter Review

Evaluate the expression without using a calculator.

Question 1.
87/3

Question 2.
95/2

Question 3.
(−27)−2/3

Find the real solution(s) of the equation. Round your answer to two decimal places when appropriate.

Question 4.
x5 + 17 = 35

Question 5.
7x3 = 189

Question 6.
(x + 8)4 = 16

Simplify the expression.

Question 7.
(\(\frac{6^{1 / 5}}{6^{2 / 5}}\))3

Question 8.
\(\sqrt[4]{32} \cdot \sqrt[4]{8}\)

Question 9.
\(\frac{1}{2-\sqrt[4]{9}}\)

Question 10.
\(4 \sqrt[5]{8}\) + \(3 \sqrt[5]{8}\)

Question 11.
\(2 \sqrt{48}\) – \(\sqrt{3}\)

Question 12.
(\(5^{2 / 3} \cdot 2^{3 / 2}\))1/2

Simplify the expression. Assume all variables are positive.

Question 13.
\(\sqrt[3]{125 z^{9}}\)

Question 14.
\(\frac{2^{1 / 4} z^{5 / 4}}{6 z}\)

Question 15.
\(\sqrt{10 z^{5}}-z^{2} \sqrt{40 z}\)

Describe the transformation of f represented by g. Then graph each function.

Question 16.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\), g(x) = −2\(\sqrt{x}\)

Question 17.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\), g(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{-x}\) − 6

Question 18.
Let the graph of g be a reflection in the y-axis, followed by a translation 7 units to the right of the graph of f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\). Write a rule for g.

Question 19.
Use a graphing calculator to graph 2y2 = x − 8. Identify the vertex and the direction that the parabola opens.

Question 20.
Use a graphing calculator to graph x2 + y2 = 81. Identify the radius and the intercepts.

Solve the equation. Check your solution.

Question 21.
\(4 \sqrt[3]{2 x+1}\) = 20

Question 22.
\(\sqrt{4 x-4}\) = \(\sqrt{5 x-1}\) – 1

Question 23.
(6x)2/3 = 36

Solve the inequality.

Question 24.
\(5 \sqrt{x}\) + 2 > 17

Question 25.
\(2 \sqrt{x-8}\) < 24

Question 26.
7\(\sqrt[3]{x-3}\) ≥ 21

Question 27.
In a tsunami, the wave speeds (in meters per second) can be modeled by s(d ) = \(\sqrt{9.8 d}\), where d is the depth (in meters) of the water. Estimate the depth of the water when the wave speed is 200 meters per second.

Question 28.
Let f(x) = 2\(\sqrt{3-x}\) and g(x) = 4\(\sqrt[3]{3-x}\). Find (fg)(x) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate(fg)(2) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(2).

Question 29.
Let f(x) = 3x2 + 1 and g(x) = x + 4. Find (f + g)(x) and (f − g)(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate (f + g)(−5) and (f − g)(−5).

Question 30.
f(x) = −\(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 10

Question 31.
f(x) = x2 + 8, x ≥ 0

Question 32.
f(x) = −x3 − 9

Question 33.
f(x) = 3\(\sqrt{x}\) + 5

Determine whether the functions are inverse functions.

Question 34.
f(x) = 4(x − 11)2, g(x) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)(x + 11)2

Question 35.
f(x) = −2x + 6, g(x) = −\(\frac{1}{2}\)x + 3

Question 36.
On a certain day, the function that gives U.S. dollars in terms of British pounds is d = 1.587p, where d represents U.S. dollars and p represents British pounds. Find the inverse function. Then find the number of British pounds equivalent to 100 U.S. dollars.

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Chapter Test

Question 1.
Solve the inequality \(\) − 2 ≤ 13 and the equation 5\(\) − 2 = 13. Describe the similarities and differences in solving radical equations and radical inequalities.

Describe the transformation of f represented by g. Then write a rule for g.

Question 2.
f(x) = \(\sqrt{x}\)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 92

Question 3.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[3]{x}\)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 93

Question 4.
f(x) = \(\sqrt[5]{x}\)
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 94

Simplify the expression. Explain your reasoning.

Question 5.
642/3

Question 6.
(−27)5/3

Question 7.
\(\sqrt[4]{48 x y^{11} z^{3}}\)

Question 8.
\(\frac{\sqrt[3]{256}}{\sqrt[3]{32}}\)

Question 9.
Write two functions whose graphs are translations of the graph of y = \(\sqrt{x}\). The first function should have a domain of x ≥ 4. The second function should have a range of y ≥ −2.

Question 10.
In bowling, a handicap is a change in score to adjust for differences in the abilities of players. You belong to a bowling league in which your handicap h is determined using the formula h = 0.9(200 − a), where a is your average score. Find the inverse of the model. Then find the average for a bowler whose handicap is 36.

Question 11.
The basal metabolic rate of an animal is a measure of the amount of calories burned at rest for basic functioning. Kleiber’s law states that an animal’s basal metabolic rate R (in kilocalories per day) can be modeled by R = 73.3w3/4, where w is the mass (in kilograms) of the animal. Find the basal metabolic rates of each animal in the table.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 95

Question 12.
Let f(x) = 6x3/5 and g(x) = −x3/5. Find (f + g)(x) and (f − g)(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate (f + g)(32) and (f − g)(32).

Question 13.
Let f(x) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x3/4 and g(x) = 8x. Find (fg)(x) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(x) and state the domain of each. Then evaluate (fg)(16) and (\(\frac{f}{g}\))(16).

Question 14.
A football player jumps to catch a pass. The maximum height h (in feet) of the player above the ground is given by the function h = \(\frac{1}{64}\)s2, where s is the initial speed (in feet per second) of the player. Find the inverse of the function. Use the inverse to find the initial speed of the player shown. Verify that the functions are inverse functions.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 96

Rational Exponents and Radical Functions Cumulative Assessment

Question 1.
Identify three pairs of equivalent expressions. Assume all variables are positive. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Algebra 2 Solutions Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 97

Question 2.
The graph represents the function Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 98. Choose the correct values to complete the function.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 98.1

Question 3.
In rowing, the boat speed s (in meters per second) can be modeled by s= 4.62\(\sqrt[9]{n}\), where n is the number of rowers.
a. Find the boat speeds for crews of 2 people, 4 people, and 8 people.
b. Does the boat speed double when the number of rowers doubles? Explain.
c. Find the time (in minutes) it takes each crew in part (a) to complete a 2000-meter race.

Question 4.
A polynomial function fits the data in the table. Use finite differences to find the degree of the function and complete the table. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 99

Question 5.
The area of the triangle is 42 square inches. Find the value of x.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 100

Question 6.
Which equations are represented by parabolas? Which equations are functions? Place check marks in the appropriate spaces. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 101

Question 7.
What is the solution of the inequality 2\(\sqrt{x+3}\) − 1 < 3?
A. x < 1
B. −3 < x < 1
C. −3 ≤ x < 1
D. x ≥ −3

Question 8.
Which function does the graph represent? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 102

Question 9.
Your friend releases a weather balloon 50 feet from you. The balloon rises vertically. When the balloon is at height h, the distance d between you and the balloon is given by d = \(\sqrt{2500+h^{2}}\), where h and d are measured in feet. Find the inverse of the function. What is the height of the balloon when the distance between you and the balloon is 100 feet?

Question 10.
The graphs of two functions f and g are shown. Are f and g inverse functions? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Algebra 2 Chapter 5 Rational Exponents and Radical Functions 103

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1

Looking across the web for a friendly site that caters to all your needs regarding the Big Ideas Math Geometry Concepts? Don’t worry we are with you in this and we will provide you the Complete Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry. All the Solutions covered in the BIM Geometry Ch 1 Basics of Geometry Answer Key are as per the latest Common Core State Standards guidelines. Practice using the BigIdeas Math Chapter 1 Solutions via quick links available and clear the exams with flying colors.

Big Ideas Math Book Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry

Access the Big Ideas Math Geometry Ch 1 Answers for all the topics and prepare accordingly. Find complete assistance on Geometry Chapter 1 including questions from Lessons 1.1-1.6, Performance Tests, Review Tests, Cumulative Practice, Assessment Tests, etc. All you have to do is simply tap on the quick links available and clear your ambiguities in no time. To make it easy for you we have compiled the BIM Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry Textbook Solutions aligned as per the BIM Textbooks.

Basics of Geometry Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify the expression.

Question 1.
|8 – 12|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 8 – 12|
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 8 – 12 |= | -4| = 4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 4

Question 2.
|- 6 – 5|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| -6 – 5|
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| -6 – 5| = | -11 | = 11
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 11

Question 3.
|4 + (-9)|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 4 + (-9) |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 4 + (-9) | = | 4 – 9 |
= | -5 | = 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 5

Question 4.
|13 + (-4)|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 13 + (-4) |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 13 + (-4) | = | 13 – 4 |
= | 9 | = 9
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 9

Question 5.
|6 – (- 2)|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 6 – (-2) |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 6 – (-2) | = | 6 + 2 |
= | 8 | = 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 8

Question 6.
|5 – (- 1)|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 5 – (-1) |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 5 – (-1) | = | 5 + 1 |
= | 6 | = 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 6

Question 7.
|- 8 – (- 7)|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| -8 – (-7) |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| -8 – (-7) | = | -8 + 7 |
= | -1 | = 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 1

Question 8.
|8 – 13|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 8 – 13 |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 8 – 13 | = | -5 | = 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 5

Question 9.
|- 14 – 3|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| -14 – 3 |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| -14 – 3 | = | -17 | = 17
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 17

Find the area of the triangle.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1
We know that,
The area of the triangle (A) is given as:
A = 1/2 ×Base × Height
So,
The area of the given triangle is:
A = 1/2 × 14m × 22m
= 11 × 14
= 154 m²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given triangle is: 154 m²

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 2
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 2
We know that,
The area of the triangle (A) is given as:
A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ×Base × Height
So,
The area of the given triangle is:
A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 7yd × 24yd
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{24}{1}\) × 7
= 12 × 7
= 84 yd²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given triangle is: 84 yd²

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 3
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 3
We know that,
The area of the triangle (A) is given as:
A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ×Base × Height
So,
The area of the given triangle is:
A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 16 in × 25 in
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{16}{1}\) × 25
= 8 × 25
= 200 in²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given triangle is: 200 in²

Question 13.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Describe the possible values for x and y when |x – y| > 0. What does it mean when |x – y| = 0 ? Can |x – y| < 0? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
The value of the absolute expression must be  greater than or equal to 0 but not less than 0
So,
The values for | x – y | do not exist
Now,
The possible values of | x – y | > 0 should be greater than 0 and maybe x > y and x < y
The possible values of | x – y | = 0 should be only one value i.e., 0 as x and y must be equal to make the difference value 0

Basics of Geometry Mathematical Practices

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
Find the area of the polygon using the specified units. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 4
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 4
We know that,
Area of the triangle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
So,
From the figure,
The value of the Base is: 2 cm
The value of Height is: 2 cm
We know that,
1 cm = \(\frac{25}{64}\) inch = 0.3937 inch
So,
2cm = \(\frac{25}{32}\) inch = 0.7874 inch
So,
The area of the given triangle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{25}{32}\) × \(\frac{25}{32}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{625}{1024}\)
= \(\frac{625}{2,048}\) inch²
= 0.3051 inch²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given triangle in square inches is: 0.3051 inch²

Question 2.
parallelogram (square centimeters)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 5
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 5
WE know hat,
The area of the parallelogram = Base × Height
So,
From the given figure,
The base of the parallelogram is: 2.5 in
The height of the parallelogram = 2 in
We know that,
1 inch = 2.54 cm
So,
2 inch = 2.08 cm
2.5 inch = 6.35 cm
So,
The area of the given parallelogram = 2.08 × 6.35
= 13.208 cm²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given parallelogram in square cm is: 13.208 cm²

Question 3.
The distance between the two cities is 120 miles. What is the distance in kilometers? Round your answer to the nearest whole number.
Answer:
It is given that the distance between the two cities is 120 miles.
Now,
We know that,
1 mile = 1.609 kilometer
So,
The distance between the two cities in kilometers = 120 × 1.609
= 193 kilometers
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between the two cities in kilometers is: 193 kilometers

1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes

Exploration 1

Using Dynamic Geometry Software

Work with a partner: Use dynamic geometry software to draw several points. Also draw some lines, line segments, and rays. What is the difference between a line, a line segment, and a ray?
Sample
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 6
Answer:

From the above,
The differences between a line, a ray, and a line segment are:
A Ray has no starting and ending points
A line has a starting point but no ending point
A line segment has both starting point and an ending point

Exploration 2

Intersections of Lines and Planes

Work with a partner:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 7
a. Describe and sketch the ways in which two lines can intersect or not intersect. Give examples of each using the lines formed by the walls. floor. and ceiling in your classroom.
Answer:

Examples of non-intersecting lines are: Floor and ceiling
Examples of intersecting lines are: Walls and floor

b. Describe and sketch the ways in which a line and a plane can intersect or not intersect. Give examples of each using the walls. floor, and ceiling in your classroom.
Answer:

Examples of the intersection of a plane and a line are: Walls and ceiling
Examples of the non-intersection of a plane and a line are:  Floor and a blackboard

c. Describe and sketch the ways in which two planes can intersect or not intersect. Give examples of each using the walls. floor, and ceiling in your classroom.
Answer:

Examples of the intersection of planes are: Floor and benches
Examples of the non-intersection of planes are: Floor and ceiling

Exploration 3

Exploring Dynamic Geometry Software

UNDERSTANDING MATHEMATICAL TERMS
To be proficient in math, you need to understand definitions and previously established results. An appropriate tool, such as a software package, can sometimes help.

Work with a partner. Use dynamic geometry software to explore geometry. Use the software to find a term or concept that is unfamiliar to you. Then use the capabilities of the software to determine the meaning of the term or concept.
Answer:
The dynamic geometry software used is “GeoGebra”
The URL for “GeoGebra – Geometry” is:
https://www.geogebra.org/calculator
So,
Using the above URL,
Check the term that you are unfamiliar  to you and find the meaning of that term using the above URL

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you use dynamic geometry software to visualize geometric concepts?
Answer:
Some of the uses dynamic geometry software to visualize geometric concepts are:
a. Request dispatching for cheap energy prices in cloud data centers
b. Springerlink training kit
c. Luminosity measurements at Hadron colliders
d. From word embeddings to document distances

Lesson 1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
Use the diagram in Example 1. Give two other names for Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 8. Name a point that is not coplanar with points Q. S, and T.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 9
Answer:
The given plane is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 9
The definition of a ray is:
A ray has no starting and ending points
So,
The other names for \(\overline{S T}\) are: Line m and \(\overline{T S}\)
We know that,
“Co-planar points” are the points if all of them lie in the same plane
Hence, among the points Q, S, and T,
S and T are co-planar since they lie in the same plane and Q is not co-planar

Question 2.
Give another name for \(\overline{K L}\).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 10
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 10
So,
The other name of \(\overline{K L}\) is: \(\overline{L K}\)

Question 3.
Are \(\vec{K}\)P and \(\vec{P}\)K the same ray? Are \(\vec{N}\)P and \(\vec{N}\)M the same ray? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 10
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 10
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that
\(\vec{K}\)P and \(\vec{P}\)K are not the same ray
Reason:
\(\overline{K L}\) is the ray and KP is the line segment
Now,
We can also observe that
\(\vec{N}\)P and \(\vec{N}\)M are in the same ray
Reason:
Since the points N, P, and M are collinear, the ray \(\vec{N}\)M and \(\vec{N}\)P are in the same plane

Question 4.
Sketch two different lines that intersect a plane at the same point.
Answer:
The representation of the two different lines that intersect a plane at the same point is:

Question 5.
Name the intersection of Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 11 and line k.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
From the above figure,
We can observe that the intersection of \(\overline{P Q}\) and line k is: M

Question 6.
Name the intersection of plane A and plane B.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
From the above figure,
We can observe that the intersection of plane A and plane B is: Line k

Question 7.
Name the intersection of line k and plane A.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 12
From the given figure,
We can observe that the intersection of line k and plane A is: Line k

Monitoring Progress

Use the diagram that shows a molecule of phosphorus pentachloride.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 13

Question 8.
Name two different planes that contain line s.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 13
We know that,
A ‘Plane” can be formed by using any three non-collinear points on the same plane
Now,
From the given figure,
We can observe that
The different planes that contain line s are: JHG and KLI

Question 9.
Name three different planes that contain point K.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 13
From the above figure,
The three different planes that contain pint K are: HGK, HKL, and KLI

Question 10.
Name two different planes that contain \(\vec{H}\)J.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 13
From the above figure,
We can say that
The 2 different planes that contain \(\vec{H}\)J are: HJI and HJL

Exercise 1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Compare collinear points and coplanar points.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOES DOESN’T BELONG?
Which term does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 14
Answer:
The given expressions are:
a. \(\overline{A B}\)
b. plane CDE
c. \(\vec{FG}\)
d. \(\vec{H}\)I
So,
From the above four expressions,
We can observe that the three expressions are 2-dimensional geometrical expressions whereas 1 figure is a 3-dimensional geometrical expression
The 2-dimensional geometrical expressions from the given expressions are: a), c), and d)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that expression c. does not belong with the other three

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6, use the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 15

Question 3.
Name four points.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 3

Question 4.
Name two lines.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 15
Hence,
From the above figure,
We can conclude that the two lines are: \(\vec{B}\)C and \(\vec{D}\)E

Question 5.
Name the plane that contains points A, B, and C.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 5

Question 6.
Name the plane that contains points A, D, and E.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 15
From the given figure,
We can observe that there are 2 planes. They are:
a. plane S b. plane T
Hence,
From the above figure,
We can conclude that points A, D, and E lie in Plane T

In Exercises 7 – 10. use the diagram. (See Example 1.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 16

Question 7.
Give two other names for Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 17.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 7

Question 8.
Give another name or plane V.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 16
We know that,
A plane is also named by a group of 3 or more co-planar points
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that another name for plane V is: plane QRT

Question 9.
Name three points that are collinear. Then name a fourth point that is not collinear with these three points.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 9

Question 10.
Name a point that is not coplanar with R, S, and T.
Answer:
The given  figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 16
We know that,
The points that are present in the same plane are called “Co-planar points”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the point that is co-planar with R, S, and T is: W

In Exercises 11 – 16, use the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 18

Question 11.
What is another name for \(\overline{B D}\)?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 11

Question 12.
What is another name for \(\overline{A C}\)?
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 18
We know that,
The line segment is the same from both sides if we can consider any point starting or ending point
Ex: \(\overline{A B}\) is the same as \(\overline{B A}\)
because we can consider here either starting point A or starting point B, then the ending points will be either B or A
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other name for \(\overline{A C}\) is: \(\overline{C A}\)

Question 13.
What is another name for ray \(\vec{A}\)E?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 13

Question 14.
Name all rays with endpoint E.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 18
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that the rays with endpoint E are: s and t

Question 15.
Name two pairs of opposite rays.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 15

Question 16.
Name one pair of rays that are not opposite rays.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 18
We know that “opposite” means “Opposite direction”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the pair of rays that are not opposite rays are:
\(\vec{E}\)B and\(\vec{E}\)C

In Exercises 17 – 24, sketch the figure described.

Question 17.
plane P and line l intersecting at one point
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 17

Question 18.
plane K and line m intersecting at all points on line m
Answer:
The given statement is:
plane K and line m intersecting at all points on line m
Hence,
The representation of the given statement is:

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 19
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 19

Question 20.
\(\vec{M}\)N and \(\vec{N}\)X
Answer:
The given vectors are:
\(\vec{M}\)N and \(\vec{N}\)X
Hence,
The representation of vectors along with their direction is:

Question 21.
plane M and \(\vec{N}\)B intersecting at B
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 21

Question 22.
plane M and \(\vec{N}\)B intersecting at A
Answer:
The given statement is:
plane M and \(\vec{N}\)B intersecting at A
Hence,
The representation of the given statement is:

Question 23.
plane A and plane B not intersecting
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 23

Question 24.
plane C and plane D intersecting at Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 20
Answer:
The given statement is:
plane C and plane D intersecting at Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 20
Hence,
The representation of the given statement is:

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 25 and 26, describe and correct the error in naming opposite rays in the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 21

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 22
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 23
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 21
From the above,
We can observe that \(\vec{Y}\)C and \(\vec{Y}\)E are the opposite rays because Y, C, and E are the collinear points and Y is in between C and E

In Exercises 27 – 34. use the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 24

Question 27.
Name a point that is collinear with points E and H.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 27

Question 28.
Name a point that is collinear with points B and I
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 24
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that C is collinear with B and I

Question 29.
Name a p0int that is not collinear with points E and H.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 29

Question 30.
Name a point that is not collinear with points B and I.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 24
We know that,
The points that are in the same line are called “Collinear points”
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that A, D, E, F, G, H, J are not collinear with points B and I

Question 31.
Name a point that is coplanar with points D, A, and B.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 31

Question 32.
Name a point that is coplanar with points C, G, and F.
Answer:
The given figure is;
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 24
We know that,
The points that are in the same plane are called “Co-planar points”
From the above figure,
We can observe that CGFB is a plane
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that B and I are co-planar with points C, G, and F

Question 33.
Name the intersection of plane AEH and plane FBE.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 33

Question 34.
Name the intersection of plane BGF and plane HDG.
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 24
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that the intersection of plane BGF and plane HDG is: \(\overline{C G}\)

In Exercises 35 – 38, name the geometric term modeled by the object.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 25
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 35

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 26
Answer:
The given object is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 26
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the geometric term modeled by the object is: Plane

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 27
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 37

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 28
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 28
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that the geometric term modeled from the given object is: Line

In Exercises 39 – 44. use the diagram to name all the points that are not coplanar with the given points.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 29
Question 39.
N, K, and L
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 39

Question 40.
P, Q, and N
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 29
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that R, S, L, and K are not co-planar  with P, Q, and N

Question 41.
P, Q, and R
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 41

Question 42.
R, K, and N
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 29
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that P, S, L, and M are not co-planar with R, K, and N

Question 43.
P, S, and K
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 43

Question 44.
Q, K, and L
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 29
Hence, from the above figure,
We can conclude that R, M, P, and S are not co-planar with Q, K, and L

Question 45.
CRITICAL THINKING
Given two points on a line and a third point not on the line. is it possible to draw
a plane that includes the line and the third point? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 45

Question 46.
CRITICAL THINKING
Is it possible for one point to be in two different planes? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Yes, it is possible for one point to be in two different planes. This can be explained in the following way:
The Intersection of two planes is a line.
Hence,
yes, one point or an Infinite number of points can be common between two different planes.

Question 47.
REASONING
Explain why a four-legged chair may rock from side to side even if the floor is level. Would a three-legged chair on the same level floor rock from side to side? Why or why not?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 47

Question 48.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
You are designing the living room of an apartment. Counting the floor, walls, and ceiling, you want the design to contain at least eight different planes. Draw a diagram of your design. Label each plane in your design.
Answer:
It is given that you are designing the living room of an apartment and you want the design to contain at least eight different planes which include the floor, walls, and ceiling
Hence,
The representation of the design that contain floor, walls, and ceiling is:

Question 49.
LOOKING FOR STRUCTURE
Two coplanar intersecting lines will always intersect at one point. What is the greatest number of intersection points that exist if you draw tour coplanar lines? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 49

Question 50.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
You and your friend walk in opposite directions, forming opposite rays. You were originally on the comer of Apple Avenue and Cherry Court.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 30
a. Name two possibilities of the road and direction you and your friend may have traveled.
Answer:
It is given that you are at the corner of Apple Avenue and Cherry court
Hence, from the above,
The 2 possibilities that you and your friend travel in the opposite directions are:
i)
If you traveled from the corner of Apple Avenue and Cherry court i.e., towards the east, then your friend will travel from the corner of Apple Avenue and Rose Rd. i.e., towards the west
ii).
If you traveled from the corner of Apple Avenue and Cherry court i.e., towards the west, then your friend will travel from the corner of Apple Avenue and Rose Rd. i.e., towards the east

b. Your friend claims he went north on Cherry Court. and you went east on Apple Avenue. Make an argument as to why you know this could not have happened.
Answer:
It is given that your friend claims he went north on Cherry Court. and you went east on Apple Avenue
But, from the above,
It is given that you and your friend have to travel in the opposite directions
But, according to the given statement,
You and your friend travels in the perpendicular directions
Hence,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is not possible

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Exercises 51 – 54. graph the inequality on a number line. Tell whether the graph is a segment a ray or rays. a point, or a line.

Question 51.
x ≤ 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 51

Question 52.
– 7 ≤ x ≤ 4
Answer:
The given inequality is:
-7 ≤ x ≤ 4
Hence,
The representation of the given inequality in the number line is:

Hence, from the above number line,
We can conclude that the given inequality represents a line segment in the number line

Question 53.
x ≥ 5 or x ≤ – 2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 53

Question 54.
|x| ≤ 0
Answer:
The given inequality is:
| x | ≤ 0
Hence,
The representation of the given inequality in the number line is:

Hence, from the above number line,
We can conclude that the given inequality represents the plane in the number line

Question 55.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Use the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 31
a. Name two points that arc collinear with P.
b. Name two planes that contain J.
c. Name all the points that are in more than One plane.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 55

CRITICAL THINKING
In Exercises 56 – 63. complete the
statement with always, sometimes, or never. Explain your reasoning.

Question 56.
A line ________________ has endpoints.
Answer:
The given statement is:
A line ________________ has endpoints.
Hence,
The completed statement is:
A line never has endpoints.

Question 57.
A line and a point _________________ intersect
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 57

Question 58.
A plane and a point ________________ intersect.
Answer:
The given statement is:
A plane and a point ________________ intersect.
Hence,
The completed statement is:
A plane and a point sometimes intersect.

Question 59.
Two planes _________________ intersect in a line.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 59

Question 60.
Two points ____________________ determine a line.
Answer:
The given statement is:
Two points ____________________ determine a line.
Hence,
The completed statement is:
Two points always determine a line.

Question 61.
Any three points ____________________ determine a plane.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 61

Question 62.
Any three points not on the same line ____________________ determine a plane.
Answer:
The given statement is:
Any three points not on the same line ____________________ determine a plane.
Hence,
The completed statement is:
Any three points not on the same line always determine a plane.

Question 63.
Two lines that are not parallel _________________ intersect.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 63

Question 64.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Is it possible for three planes to never intersect? intersect in one line? intersect in one point? Sketch the possible situations.
Answer:
case (1):
It is not possible for three planes to intersect when the three planes are parallel
So,
The representation of this case is:

case (2):
To intersect in 1 line, the two planes must be perpendicular and the third plane should pass through that line
So,
The representation of this case is:

case (3):
To intersect in 1 point, the two planes must be intersected with a line and the third plane passes through a point of that line
So,
The representation of this case is:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency
Find the absolute value.
Question 65.
|6 + 2|
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 65

Question 66.
|3 – 9|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 3 – 9 |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 3 – 9 | = | -6 | = 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 6

Question 67.
|- 8 – 2|
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 67

Question 68.
|7 – 11|
Answer:
The given absolute value expression is:
| 7 – 11 |
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
| 7 – 11 | = | -4 | = 4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given absolute value expression is: 4

Solve the equation

Question 69.
18 + x = 43
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 69

Question 70.
36 + x = 20
Answer:
The given equation is:
36 + x = 20
So,
x = 20 – 36
x = -16
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: -16

Question 71.
x – 15 = 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.1 a 71

Question 72.
x – 23 = 19
Answer:
The given equation is:
x – 23 = 19
So,
x = 19 + 23
x = 42
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 42

1.2 Measuring and Constructing Segments

Essential Question
How can you measure and construct a line segment?
Answer:
The steps used to measure a line segment are:
a. Pick up a scale to measure the length of a line segment.
b. Identify the line segment you want to measure
c. Place the tip of the ruler at the starting of the line segment

The steps used to construct a line segment are:
a. Place the compass at one end of the line
b. Adjust the compass to slightly longer than half of the line’s length
c. Draw arcs above and below the line
d. Keeping the same compass width, draw arcs from the other end of the line
e. Place ruler where the arcs cross and draw the line segment

Exploration 1

Measuring Line Segments Using Nonstandard Units

Work with a partner.

a. Draw a line segment that has a length of 6 inches.
Answer:
We will use a ruler to draw a line segment and the ruler we use generally is the “Centimeter ruler”
But,
It is given that we have to draw a line segment that has a length of 6 inches
But, it is not possible
So,
Convert inches into centimeters
We know that,
1 inch = 2.54 centimeters
So,
6 inches = 15.24 cm
Hence,
The representation of the line segment that has the length of 6 inches in terms of cm is:

b. Use a standard-sized paper clip to measure the length of the line segment. Explain how you measured the line segment in “paper clips.”
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 32
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 33
Answer:
Take a standard-sized paper clip and measure the length of the paper clip using a ruler
So,
Using a standard-sized paper clip, the length of the line segment is: 3.4925 cm or 3.5 cm
Hence,
The representation of the length of the line segment that is measured in the paper clip is:

c. Write conversion factors from paper clips to inches and vice versa.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 34
Answer:
From part (b),
We know that
The length of a paper clip is: 3.5 cm
We know that,
1 cm = 0.393 inches
So,
3.5 cm = 1.377 inches
Hence,
1 paper clip = 1.377 in
Now,
We know that,
1 inch = 2.54 cm
Hence,
1 inch = 2.54 paperclip
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the conversion of paper clips into inches and vice-versa is:
1 paperclip = 1.377 inch
1 inch = 2.54 paperclip

d. A straightedge is a tool that you can use to draw a straight line. An example of a straightedge is a ruler. Use only a pencil, straightedge, paper clip, and paper to draw another line segment that is 6 inches long. Explain your process.
Answer:
The process using a pencil, a straightedge, paperclip, and paper to draw a line segment of 6 inches is:
Step 1:
Attach a paper to the paperclip and verify that the paper sets correctly in the paperclip
Step 2:
Now, use a straightedge tool like a ruler to draw a line segment on the paper
Step 3:
The line segment must start from the starting of the ruler i.e, 0. Mark the point at 0 as A
Step 4:
Continue the line segment from 0 to 6 on the ruler and make the endpoint at 6 and label it as B
Hence, from the above steps,
We draw the lines segment AB of length 6 inches
But,
We know that,
A ruler consists of the only cm.
So, convert inches into cm
So,
1 inch = 2.54cm
So,
6 inches = 15.24 cm
Hence,
The representation of the line segment AB of 6 inches long is:

Exploration 2

Measuring Line Segments Using Nonstandard Units

Work with a partner.

a. Fold a 3-inch by 5-inch index card on one of its diagonals.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 35
Answer:
The given index card is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 35
When we fold the given index card,
We can only see the right-angled triangle
Hence,
The representation of the folded index card at its diagonal is:

b. Use the Pythagoras Theorem to algebraically determine the length of the diagonal in inches. Use a ruler to check your answer.
Answer:
From part (a),
The index card folded at its diagonal is:

We know that,
According to Pythagoras theorem,
Hypotenuse² = Side² + Side²
Where,
The hypotenuse is the longest side in a right-angled triangle
So,
In the given triangle,
AB and BC are the sides
AC is the hypotenuse
So,
AC² = 3² + 5²
AC² = 9 + 25
AC² = 34
AC = √34 ≅ 6 in
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the diagonal is approximately equal to 6 inches

c. Measure the length and width of the index card in paper clips.
Answer:
We know that,
The length of the index card in paper clips is: 4 cm (Approximately )
The width of the index card in the paper clips is: 1 cm

d. Use the Pythagoras Theorem to algebraically determine the length of the diagonal in paper clips. Then check your answer by measuring the length of the diagonal in paper clips. Does the Pythagorean Theorem work for any unit of measure? Justify your answer.
Answer:
The representation of the length and width of the paper clips is:

We know that,
According to Pythagoras theorem,
Hypotenuse² = Side² + Side²
Where,
The hypotenuse is the longest side in a right-angled triangle
So,
In the given triangle,
AB and BC are the sides
AC is the hypotenuse
So,
AC² = 4² + 1²
AC² = 16 + 1
AC² = 17
AC = √17 ≅ 4 cm
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of the diagonal in paper clips is: 4 cm
Yes, the Pythagoras work for any unit of measure but it is applicable only for the right-angled triangles

Exploration 3

Measuring Heights Using Nonstandard Units

Work with a partner.

Consider a unit of length that is equal to the length of the diagonal you found in Exploration 2. Call this length “1 diag.” How tall are you in diags? Explain how you obtained your answer.
Answer:
From Exploration 2,
The length of the diagonal we have found is approximately equal to 6 inches
So,
According to the given problem,
1 diag = 6 inches
We know that,
The height can be measured in the foot
So,
1 inch = 0.08 feet
So,
63.6 inch = 5.3 feet
So,
In terms of diags,
63.6inches = 60 + 3.6 inches
= 10 (6 inches) + 6 (0.6 inches)
= 10 diags + 0.6 diags
= 10.6 diags
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that you are 10.6 diags tall

Communicate Your Answer:

Question 4.
How can you measure and construct a line segment?
Answer:
The steps used to measure a line segment are:
a. Pick up a scale to measure the length of a line segment.
b. Identify the line segment you want to measure
c. Place the tip of the ruler at the starting of the line segment

The steps used to construct a line segment are:
a. Place the compass at one end of line
b. Adjust the compass to slightly longer than half of the line’s length
c. Draw arcs above and below the line
d. Keeping the same compass width, draw arcs from the other end of line
e. Place ruler where the arcs cross and draw the line segment

Lesson 1.2 Measuring and Constructing Segments

Monitoring Progress

Use a ruler to measure the length of the segment.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 36
Answer:
The length of the given segment in cm is:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 37
Answer:
The length of the given line segment in cm is:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 38
Answer:
The length of the given line segment in cm is:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 39
Answer:
The length of the given line segment in cm is:

Question 5.
Plot A(- 2, 4), B(3, 4), C(0, 2), and D(0, – 2) in a coordinate plane. Then
determine whether \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are congruent.
Answer:
The given points are:
A (-2, 4), B (3, 4), C (0, 2), and D (0, -2)
We know that,
The distance between 2 points is:
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
Now,
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

Now,
The distance between AB = √(4 – 4)² + (3 + 2)²
= √0 + 5²
= √5² = 5
The distance between CD = √(0 – 0)² + (-2 – 2)²
= √0 + 4²
= √4² = 4
Since the distance between \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are not same,
\(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent to \(\overline{C D}\)
Hence,
\(\overline{A B}\) ≠ \(\overline{C D}\)

Question 6.
Use the Segment Addition Postulate to find XZ.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 40
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 40
We know that,
“The Segment Addition Postulate” states that given 2 points A and C, a third point B lies on the line segment AC if and only if the distances between the points satisfy the equation
AB + BC = AC
So,
From the above figure,
XZ = XY + YZ
XZ = 23 + 50
XZ = 73
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of XZ is: 73

Question 7.
In the diagram. WY = 30. Can you use the Segment Addition Postulate to find the distance between points W and Z? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 40
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 40
We know that,
“The Segment Addition Postulate” states that given 2 points A and C, a third point B lies on the line segment AC if and only if the distances between the points satisfy the equation
AB + BC = AC
It is also given that
WY = 30
Now,
To find the distance between the points W and Z, we have to use the “Segment Addition Postulate”
So,
WZ = WY + YZ
WZ = 30 + 50
WZ = 80
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between points W and Z is: 80

Question 8.
Use the diagram at the left to find KL.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 41
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 41
We know that,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
If we have three points A, B, and C and we know the distance AB and AC, then the value of AC is given as:
The total distance (AC) = Segment distance 1 (AB) + Segment distance 2 (BC)
So,
JL = JK + KL
144 = 37 + KL
KL = 144 – 37
KL = 107
Hence, from the above,
WE can conclude that the value of KL is: 107

Question 9.
The cities shown on the map lie approximately in a straight line. Find the distance from Albuquerque. New Mexico. to Provo. Utah.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 42
Answer:
From the given map,
It is given that
The distance between Albuquerque and Carlsbad is: 231mi
The distance between Carlsbad and Provo is: 680mi
Now,
Let the distance between Albuquerque and Provo be x
So,
Now,
By using the “Segment Addition Postulate”,
The distance between Carlsbad and Provo = (The distance between Albuquerque and Carlsbad) + (The distance between Albuquerque and Provo)
680 = 231 + x
x = 680 – 231
x = 449
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between Albuquerque and Provo is: 449 mi

Exercise 1.2 Measuring and Constructing Segments

Question 1.
WRITING
Explain how \(\overline{X Y}\) and XY arc different.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 1

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS. SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 43
Find AC + CB
Find BC – AC
Find AB
Find CA + BC.
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 43
From the given line segment,
AC = 3 and CB = 7
Now,
a.
AC + CB =3 + 7 = 10
b.
BC – AC = 7 – 3 = 4
c.
AB = AC + CB (By using the Segment Addition Postulate)
So,
AB = 3 + 7 = 10
d.
CA + BC = 3 + 7 = 10
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the expressions a, c, and d are the same

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6, use a ruler to measure the length of the segment to the nearest tenth of a centimeter.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 44
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 45
Answer:
The length of the given line segment in cm is:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 46
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 47
Answer:
The length of the given line segment is:

CONSTRUCTION
In Exercises 7 and 8. use a compass and straightedge to construct a copy of the segment.
Question 7.
Copy the segment in Exercise 3.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 7

Question 8.
Copy the segment in Exercise 4.
Answer:
Using a straightedge, draw a ray where the left endpoint will be the beginning of the segment.
With a compass, measure the segment in Exercise 4 by placing the point of the compass on the segment endpoint on the left and the pencil point on the segment endpoint on the right
Without changing the compass setting, place the point of the compass on the endpoint on the left of the ray you drew and mark the ray with an arc
Where the arc and ray intersect is the right endpoint of the segment in Exercise 4.
Hence,
The segment in Exercise 4 is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 45

In Exercises 9 – 14, plot the points in a coordinate plane. Then determine whether \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are congruent.
Question 9.
A(- 4, 5), B(- 4, 8), C(2, – 3), D(2, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 9

Question 10.
A(6, – 1), B(1, – 1), C(2, – 3), D(4, – 3)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (6, -1), B (1, -1), C (2, -3), and D (4, -3)
Let the points be represented as:
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), C (x3, y3), and D (x4, y4)
We know that,
The distance between points A and B is:
D = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = √(1 – 6)² + (-1 + 1)²
= √(-5)²
= 5
The distance between points C and D is:
\(\overline{C D}\) = √(x4 – x3)² + (y4 – y3)²
= √(4 – 2)² + (-3 + 3)²
= √2²
= 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent with \(\overline{C D}\)
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

Question 11.
A(8, 3), B(- 1, 3), C(5, 10), D(5, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 11

Question 12.
A(6, – 8), B(6, 1), C(7, – 2), D(- 2, – 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (6, -8), B (6, 1), C (7, -2), and D (-2, -2)
Let the points be represented as:
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), C (x3, y3), and D (x4, y4)
We know that,
The distance between points A and B is:
D = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = √(6 – 6)² + (8 + 1)²
= √(9)²
= 9
The distance between points C and D is:
\(\overline{C D}\) = √(x4 – x3)² + (y4 – y3)²
= √(-7 – 2)² + (-2 + 2)²
= √(-9)²
= 9
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\overline{A B}\) is congruent with \(\overline{C D}\)
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

Question 13.
A(- 5, 6), B(- 5, – 1), C(- 4, 3), D(3, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 13

Question 14.
A(10, – 4), B(3, – 4), C(- 1, 2), D(- 1, 5)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (10, -4), B (3, -4), C (-1, 2), and D (-1, 5)
Let the points be represented as:
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), C (x3, y3), and D (x4, y4)
We know that,
The distance between points A and B is:
D = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = √(3 – 10)² + (-4 + 4)²
= √(-7)²
= 7
The distance between points C and D is:
\(\overline{C D}\) = √(x4 – x3)² + (y4 – y3)²
= √(1 – 1)² + (-2 + 5)²
= √3²
= 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent with \(\overline{C D}\)
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

In Exercises 15 – 22. find FH.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 48
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 49
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 49
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
FH = FG + GH
FH = 19 + 7
FH = 26
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of FH is: 26

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 50
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 17

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 51
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 51
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
FH = FG + GH
FH = 4 + 15
FH = 19
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of FH is: 19

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 52
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 19

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 53
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 53
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
FG = FH + HG
FG = FH + 15
22 = FH + 15
FH = 22 – 15
FH = 7
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of FH is: 7

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 54
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 21

Question 22.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 55
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 55
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
FG = FH + HG
53 = FH + 40
FH = 53 – 40
FH = 13
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of FH is: 13

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 23 and 24, describe and correct the error in finding the length of \(\overline{A B}\).

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 56

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 57
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 58
Answer:
We know that,
| x | = x for x > 0
| x | = -x for x < 0
| -x | = x for x > 0
So,
The distance between points A and B is:
| AB| = | 1 – 4.5| or | 4.5 – 1|
Hence,
| AB | = 3.5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between the points A and B is: 3.5

Question 25.
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
The diagram shows an insect called a walking stick. Use the ruler to estimate the length of the abdomen and the length of the thorax to the nearest \(\frac{1}{4}\) inch. How much longer is the walking stick’s abdomen than its thorax? How many times longer is its abdomen than its thorax?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 59
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 25

Question 26.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
In 2003, a remote-controlled model airplane became the first-ever to fly nonstop across the Atlantic Ocean. The map shows the airplane’s position at three different points during its flight. Point A represents Cape Spear. New foundland. point B represents the approximate position after 1 day, and point C represents Mannin Bay’ Ireland. The airplane left Cape Spear and landed in Mannin Bay.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 60
a. Find the total distance the model airplane flew.
Answer:
It is given that a remote-controlled airplane flies from Cape Spear to Mannin Bay that is located across the Atlantic Ocean
Now,
The total distance traveled by the model airplane is represented as the total distance from A to C on the map
Now,
From the map,
AC represents the total distance traveled by the model airplane
AB represents the distance traveled by model airplane from Cape Spear and it is in flight mode after 1 day and it represents as B
BC represents the distance traveled from the middle of the flight to Mannin Bay
So,
Now,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
AC = AB + BC
So,
AC = 1281 miles + 601 miles
AC = 1881 miles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the total distance traveled by the model airplane is: 1881 miles

b. The model airplane’s flight lasted nearly 38 hours. Estimate the airplane’s average speed in miles per hour.
Answer:
From part (a),
We observed that,
The total distance traveled by the model airplane is: 1881 miles
It is given that
The model airplane’s flight lasted nearly 38 hours
We know that,
Average speed = \(\frac{Total distance}{Total time}\)
So,
Average speed = \(\frac{1881}{38}\)
= 49.5 miles per hour
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the average speed of the airplane is: 49.5 miles per hour

Question 27.
USING STRUCTURE
Determine whether the statements are true or False. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 61
a. B is between A and C.
b. C is between B and E.
c. D is between A and H.
d. E is between C and F.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 27

Question 28.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
Write an expression for the length of the segment.
a. \(\overline{A C}\)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 62
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 62
So,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{A C}\) = \(\overline{A B}\) + \(\overline{B C}\)
\(\overline{A C}\) = (x + 2) + (7x – 3)
\(\overline{A C}\) = 8x – 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the expression of the given line segment is: (8x – 1)

b. \(\overline{Q R}\)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 63
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 63
So,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{P R}\) = \(\overline{P Q}\) + \(\overline{Q R}\)
13y + 25 = (8y + 5) + \(\overline{Q R}\)
\(\overline{Q R}\) = 13y + 25 – 8y – 5
\(\overline{Q R}\) = 5y + 20
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the expression of the given line segment is: (5y + 20)

Question 29.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
Point S is between points R and T on \(\overline{R T}\). Use the information to write an equation in term of x. Then Solve the equation and find RS, ST, and RT.
a. RS = 2x + 10
ST = x – 4
RT = 21

b. RS = 3x – 16
ST = 4x – 8
RT = 60

c. RS = 4x – 9
ST=11
RTx+IO

d. RS = 4x – 9
ST = 19
RT = 8x – 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 29.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 29.2

Question 30.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Is it possible to design a table where no two legs have the same length? Assume that the endpoints of the legs must all lie in the same plane. Include a diagram as part o! your answer.
Answer:
It is possible to design a table where no two legs have the same length and that the endpoints of the legs all lie in the same plane. They just have to be attached to the table at different angles as seen in the below figure:

Question 31.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You have w walk from Room 103 to Room 117.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 64
a. How many feet do you travel from Room 103 to Room 117?
b. You can walk 4.4 feet per second. How many minutes will it take you to get to Room 117?
c. Why might it take you longer than the time in Part (b)?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 31

Question 32.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend and your Cousin discuss measuring with a ruler. Your friend says that you must always line up objects at the zero on a ruler. Your cousin says it does not matter. Decide who is correct and explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Your cousin is correct

Explanation:
It is given that,
Your friend said that you must always line up objects at the zero on a ruler and your cousin said that it does not matter
Now,
We just have to deduce the endpoint length from the start point length on the ruler
Example:
If you measure a segment that is 5 cm long, it is the same if you put zero on the start point or 5 on the start point, then 10 is on the endpoint
Remember that the starting point will be any number on the ruler and the ending point will be n units away from that number
So,
5 – 0 = 5 is same as 10 – 5 = 5

Question 33.
REASONING
You travel twin City X to City Y. You know that the round-trip distance is 647 miles. City Z, a city you pass on the way, is 27 miles from City X. Find the distance from City Z to City Y. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 33

Question 34.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
The bar graph shows the win-loss record for a lacrosse team over a period of three years. Explain how you can apply the Ruler Postulate (Post. 1.1) and the Segment Addition Postulate (Post. 1.2) when interpreting a stacked bar graph like the one shown.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 65
Answer:
We know that,
Ruler Postulate:
The points on a line can be put into a one-to-one correspondence (paired) with the real numbers. The distance between any two points is represented by the absolute value of the difference between the numbers.
Segment Addition Postulate:
The Segment Addition Postulate states that given 2 points A and C, a third point B lies on the line segment AC if and only if the distances between the points satisfy the equation
AB + BC = AC
Hence,
By using the ruler and Segment Addition Postulates,
We can conclude that the number of games is equal to the number of wins and the number of losses

Question 35.
ABSTRACT REASONING
The points (a,b) and (c, b) from a segment, and the points (d, e) and (d, f ) from a segment. Create an equation assuming the segments are congruent. Are there any letters not used in the equation? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 35

Question 36.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In the diagram, \(\overline{A B}\) ≅ \(\overline{B C}\), \(\overline{A C}\) ≅ \(\overline{C D}\), and AD = 12. Find the lengths of all segments in the diagram. Suppose you choose one of the segments at random. What is the probability that the measure of the segment is greater than 3? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 66
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 66
It is given that,
\(\overline{A B}\) ≅ \(\overline{B C}\)
\(\overline{A C}\) ≅ \(\overline{C D}\)
\(\overline{A D}\) = 12
Now,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
AD = AB + BC + CD
12 = AB + BC + CD
Now,
AD = AC + CD
AD = 2CD
CD = \(\frac{12}{2}\)
CD = 6
So,
AC = 6
Now,
Fro the given line segment,
AC = AB + BC
AC = 2BC
BC = \(\frac{6}{2}\)
BC = 3
Henc,
AB = 3
Now,
We know that,
Probability = \(\frac{The number of favorable cases}{The total number of cases}\)
So,
The probability of getting the segment that the length is greater than 3 is:
P = \(\frac{The number of segments that the length is greater than 3}{The number of total segments}\)
P = 3 / 6
P = 0.5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the probability of getting the length of the line segments greater than 3 is: 0.5

Question 37.
CRITICAL THINKING
Is it possible to use the Segment Addition Postulate (Post. 1.2) to show FB > CB or that AC > DB? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 67
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 37

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify.

Question 38.
\(\frac{-4+6}{2}\)
Answer:
The given expression is: \(\frac{-6 + 4}{2}\)
So,
\(\frac{-4+6}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{1}\)
= 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given expression is: 1

Question 39.
\(\sqrt{20+5}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 39

Question 40.
\(\sqrt{25+9}\)
Answer:
The given expression is: \(\sqrt{25 + 9}\)
So,
\(\sqrt{25+9}\) = \(\sqrt{34}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of the given expression is: \(\sqrt{34}\)

Question 41.
\(\frac{7+6}{2}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 41

Solve the equation.

Question 42.
5x + 7 = 9x – 17
Answer:
The given equation is:
5x + 7 = 9x – 17
So,
5x – 9x = -17 – 7
-4x = -24
4x = 24
x = \(\frac{24}{4}[/larex]
x = 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x for the given equation is: 6

Question 43.
[latex]\frac{3+y}{2}=6\) = 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 43

Question 44.
\(\frac{-5+x}{2}\) = – 9
Answer:
The given equation is:
\(\frac{-5+x}{2}\) = – 9
So,
-5 + x = -9 (2)
-5 + x = -18
x = -18 + 5
x = -13
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x for the given equation is: -13

Question 45.
– 6x – 13 = – x = 23
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.2 a 45

1.3 Using Midpoint and Distance Formulas

EssentiaI Question
How can you find the midpoint and length of a line segment in a coordinate plane?
Answer:
Let the line segment is formed by the points A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The coordinates of the midpoint of the line segment are given as:
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
The length of the line segment in a coordinate plane is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)

Exploration 1

Finding the Midpoint of a Line Segment

Work with a partner.

Use centimeter graph paper.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 68
a.  Graph \(\overline{A B}\), where the points A and B are as shown.
Answer:
From the given graph,
The given points are:
A (3, 4), B (-5, -2)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points A and B is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-5 – 3)² + (-2 – 4)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-8)² + (-6)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{64 + 36}\)
D = \(\sqrt{100}\)
D = 10 cm
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{A B}\) is: 10cm
The representation of \(\overline{A B}\) is:

 

b. Explain how to bisect \(\overline{A B}\), that is, to divide AB into two congruent line segments. Then
bisects \(\overline{A B}\) and use the result to find the midpoint M of \(\overline{A B}\).
Answer:
The steps to find the bisector of \(\overline{A B}\) is:
a. Place the compass at one end of the line segment
b. Adjust the compass to slightly longer than half of the line segment length
c. Draw arcs above and below the line
d. Keeping the same compass width, draw arcs from the other end of line
e. Place ruler where the arcs cross and draw the line segment
Now,
From part (a),
The representation of \(\overline{A B}\) is:

Now,
The representation of the perpendicular bisector and the midpoint M of \(\overline{A B}\) is:

Hence, from the above figure,
The midpoint of \(\overline{A B}\) is: 5 cm

c. What are the coordinates of the midpoint M?
Answer:
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint of the line segment are given as:
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{3 – 5}{2}\),\(\frac{4 – 2}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{-2}{2}\),\(\frac{2}{2}\))
M = (-1, 1)
Hence,
The coordinates of the midpoint M is: (-1, 1)

d. Compare the x-coordinates of A, B, and M. Compare the y-coordinates of A, B, and M. How arc the coordinates of the 4 midpoints M related to the coordinates of A and B?
Answer:
The coordinates of A, B, and M are:
A (3, 4), B (-5, -2), and M (-1, 1)
Compare the given coordinates with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), C (x3, y3)
Hence,
The x-coordinates and y-coordinates of M are related to the coordinates of A and B are:
M= (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}[/latex}

Exploration 2

Finding the Length of a Line Segment work with a partner. Use centimeter graph paper.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 70
a. Add point C to your graph as shown.
Answer:
From the graph,
The given points are:
A (3, 4), B (-5, -2), and C (3, 2)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), and C (x3, y3)
So,
The coordinates of the length between points A and B is:
D = ( |x2 + x1|, |y2 + y1| )
So,
D = ( |-5 + 3|, |-2 + 4| )
D = ( |-2|, |2| )
D = (-2, 2)
Now,
The length between AB and C is:
D = ( |x2 + x1|, |y2 + y1| )
So,
D = ( |-2 + 3|, |2 + 3| )
D = ( |1|, |5| )
D = ( 1, 5)
Hence, frm the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the total length by adding point C is: (1, 5)

b. Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the length of AB.
Answer:
The given points are:
A (3, 4), B (-5, -2), and C (3, 2)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), and C (x3, y3)
We know that,
The length of a segment is:
D = [latex]\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
\(\overline{B C}\) = \(\sqrt{(-5 + 3)² + (-2 + 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(-2)² + (0)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 + 0}\)
=\(\sqrt{4}\) = 2
\(\overline{A C}\) = \(\sqrt{(-3 + 3)² + (-2 + 4)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{0² + 2²}\)
= \(\sqrt{2²}\) = 2
Now,
According to Pythagoras theorem,
Hypotenuse² = Side² + Side²
So,
From the graph,
AB represents the hypotenuse
AC represents the side
BC represents the side
So,
AB² = AC² + BC²
AB² = 2² + 2²
AB² = 4 + 4
AB² = 8
AB = \(\sqrt{8}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of AB is: \(\sqrt{8}\)

c. Use a centimeter ruler to verify the length you found in part (b).
MAKING SENSE OF PROBLEMS
To be proficient in math, you need to check your answers and continually ask yourself, “Does this make sense?’
Answer:
From part (b),
We found the length of \(\overline{A B}\) as: \(\sqrt{8}\)
Now,
To verify the length of \(\overline{A B}\), use the “Distance formula”
We know that,
The distance beween 2 points of a line segment is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = \(\sqrt{(-5 + 3)² + (-2 + 4)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(-2)² + (2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 + 4}\)
=\(\sqrt{8}\)

d. Use the Pythagorean Theorem and point M from Exploration 1 to find the lengths of \(\overline{A M}\) and \(\overline{M B}\). What can you conclude?
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you find the midpoint and length ola line segment in a coordinate plane?
Answer:
Let the line segment is formed by the points A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The coordinates of the midpoint of the line segment are given as:
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
The length of the line segment in a coordinate plane is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)

Question 4.
Find the coordinates of the midpoint M and the length of the line segment whose endpoints are given.
a. D(- 10, – 4), E(14, 6)
Answer:
The given points are:
D (-10, -4), E (14, 6)
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint of the line segment are given as:
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{14 – 10}{2}\), \(\frac{6 – 4}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{4}{2}\), \(\frac{2}{2}\))
M = (2, 1)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of the given points are: (2, 1)

b. F(- 4, 8), G(9, 0)
Answer:
The given points are:
F (-4, 8), G (9, 0)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{9 – 4}{2}\), \(\frac{8 + 0}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{5}{2}\), \(\frac{8}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{5}{2}\), 4)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of the given points are: (\(\frac{5}{2}\), 4)

Lesson 1.3 Using Midpoint and Distance Formulas

Monitoring Progress

Identify the segment, bisector of \(\overline{P Q}\). Then find PQ.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 71
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 71
We know that,
A segment has a starting point and an ending point
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that
\(\overline{P Q}\) is a “Segment”
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into two congruent (or) equal parts
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that
The bisector of \(\overline{P Q}\) is: MN
Now,
From the above figure,
The bisector divided the given line segment into 2 equal parts and given the length of 1 part
So,
It is given that,
\(\overline{P M}\) = 1\(\frac{7}{8}\)
Hence,
The length of \(\overline{P Q}\) = \(\overline{P M}\) + \(\overline{M Q}\)
= 2 × 1\(\frac{7}{8}\)
= 2 × \(\frac{15}{8}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{15}{8}\)
= \(\frac{15}{4}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{p Q} \) is: \(\frac{15}{4}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 72
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 72
We know that,
A segment has a starting point and an ending point
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that
\(\overline{P Q}\) is a “Segment”
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into two congruent (or) equal parts
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that
The bisector of \(\overline{P Q}\) is: M
Now,
From the above figure,
The bisector divided the given line segment into 2 equal parts and given the length of 1 part
So,
It is given that,
\(\overline{M Q}\) = 2\(\frac{2}{7}\)
Hence,
The length of \(\overline{P Q}\) = \(\overline{P M}\) + \(\overline{M Q}\)
= 2 × 2\(\frac{2}{7}\)
= 2 × \(\frac{16}{7}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{16}{7}\)
= \(\frac{32}{7}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{P Q} \) is: \(\frac{32}{7}\)

Question 3.
Identify the segment bisector of \(\overline{P Q}\). Then find MQ.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions 73
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions 73
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into 2 congruent (or) equal parts
So,
The bisector of \(\overline{P Q}\) is: line l
We know that,
Due to a Bisector,
In \(\overline{P Q}\),
\(\overline{P M}\) = \(\overline{M Q}\)
So,
5x – 3 = 11 – 2x
5x + 2x = 11 + 3
7x = 14
x = \(\frac{14}{7}\)
x = 2
So,
MQ = 11 – 2x
MQ = 11 – 2 (2)
MQ = 11 – 4
MQ = 7
Hence, from theabove,
We can conclude that the value of MQ is:7

Question 4.
Identify the segment bisector or \(\overline{R S}\). Then find RS.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 73
Answer:

Question 5.
The endpoints of \(\overline{A B}\) are A (1, 2) and B(7, 8). Find the coordinates of the midpoint M.
Answer:
The given endpoints of \(\overline{A B}\) are:
A (1, 2), B (7, 8)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{1 + 7}{2}\), \(\frac{8 + 2}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{8}{2}\), \(\frac{10}{2}\))
M = (4, 5)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of \(\overline{A B}\) are: (4, 5)

Question 6.
The endpoints of \(\overline{C D}\) are C( – 4, 3) and D(6, 5). Find the coordinates of the midpoint M.
Answer:
The given endpoints of \(\overline{C D}\) are:
C (-4, 3), D (6, 5)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{6 – 4}{2}\), \(\frac{5 + 3}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{2}{2}\), \(\frac{8}{2}\))
M = (1, 4)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of \(\overline{C D}\) are: (1, 4)

Question 7.
The midpoint of \(\overline{T U}\) is M(2, 4). One endpoint is T(1, 1). Find the coordinates of endpoint U.
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{T U}\) are:
M (2, 4), T (1, 1)
Let the one endpoint be T
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(2, 4) = (\(\frac{x1 + 1}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + 1}{2}\))
So,
\(\frac{x1 + 1}{2}\) = 2              \(\frac{y1 + 1}{2}\) = 4
x1 + 1 = 2 (2)                                            y1 + 1 = 4 (2)
x1 = 4 – 1                                                   y1 = 8 – 1
x1 = 3                                                         y1 = 7
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other endpoint of \(\overline{T U}\) is: (3, 7)

Question 8.
The midpoint of \(\overline{V W}\) is M (- 1, – 2). One endpoint is W(4, 4). Find the coordinates of endpoint V.
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{V W}\) are:
M (-1, -2), W (4, 4)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(-1, -2) = (\(\frac{x1 + 4}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + 4}{2}\))
So,
\(\frac{x1 + 4}{2}\) = -1              \(\frac{y1 + 4}{2}\) = -2
x1 + 4 = -1 (2)                                            y1 + 4 = -2 (2)
x1 = -2 – 4                                                  y1 = -4 – 4
x1 = -6                                                         y1 = -8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other endpoint V is: (-6, -8)

Question 9.
In Example 4, a park is 3 miles east and 4 miles south of your apartment. Find the distance between the park and your school.
Answer:

Exercise 1.3 Using Midpoint and Distance Formulas

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
If a point ray, line, line segment, or plane intersects a segment at its midpoint, then what does it do to the segment?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 1

Question 2.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
To find the length of \(\overline{A B}\), with endpoints A(- 7, 5) and B(4, – 6). you can use the _________ .
Answer:
We know that,
To find the length with two endpoints, we use the “Distance formula”
The distance between the 2 endpoints is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
To find the length of \(\overline{A B}\), with endpoints A(- 7, 5) and B(4, – 6). you can use the ” Distance formula ”

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6. identify the segment bisector of \(\overline{R S}\). Then find RS.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 75
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 76
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 76
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
So,
The bisector of \(\overline{R S}\) is: line A
From the given figure,
It is given that
\(\overline{M S}\) = 9
Hence,
\(\overline{R S}\) = 9 (2)
\(\overline{R S}\) = 18
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{R S}\) is: 18

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 77
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 78
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 78
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
So,
The bisector of \(\overline{R S}\) is: line s
From the given figure,
It is given that
\(\overline{R M}\) = 12
Hence,
\(\overline{R S}\) = 12 (2)
\(\overline{R S}\) = 24
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{R S}\) is: 24

In Exercises 7 and 8, identify the segment bisector of \(\overline{J K}\). Then find JM.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 79
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 80
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 80
From the above figure,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
So,
The bisector of \(\overline{J K}\) is: line l
Since the 2 parts are equal,
\(\overline{J M}\) = \(\overline{M K}\)
So,
3x + 15 = 8x + 25
3x – 8x = 25 – 15
-5x = 10
x = \(\frac{10}{-5}\)
x = -2
So,
JM = 3x + 15
JM = 3 (-2) + 15
JM = -6 + 15
JM = 9
Hence, from he above,
We can conclude that the length of JM is: 9

In Exercises 9 and 10. identify the segment bisector of \(\overline{X Y}\). Then find XY.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 81
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 82
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 82
From the above figure,
A “Bisector” is a line that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
So,
The bisector of \(\overline{X Y}\) is: line n
Since the 2 parts are equal,
\(\overline{X M}\) = \(\overline{M Y}\)
So,
5x + 8 = 9x + 12
5x – 9x = 12 – 8
-4x = 4
x = \(\frac{-4}{4}\)
x = -1
So,
XY = XM + MY
XY = 5x + 8 + 9x + 12
XY = 14x + 20
XY = 14 (-1) + 20
XY = 20 – 14
XY = 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of XY is: 6

CONSTRUCTION
In Exercises 11 – 14, copy the segment and construct a segment bisector by paper folding. Then label the midpoint M.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 83
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 84
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 84
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line or point that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
Hence,
The representation of the bisector along with midpoint M of the given segment is:

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 85
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 86
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 86
We know that,
A “Bisector” is a line or point that divides a line segment into 2 equal parts
Hence,
The representation of the bisector along with midpoint M of the given segment is:

In Exercises 15 – 18, the endpoints of \(\overline{C D}\) are given. Find the coordinates of the midpoint M.
Question 15.
C (3, – 5) and D (7, 9)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 15

Question 16.
C (4, 7) and D (0, – 3)
Answer:
The given endpoints of \(\overline{C D}\) are:
C (4, 7), D (0, -3)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{4 + 0}{2}\), \(\frac{7 – 3}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{4}{2}\), \(\frac{4}{2}\))
M = (2, 2)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of \(\overline{C D}\) are: (2, 2)

Question 17.
C (- 2, 0) and D (4, 9)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 17

Question 18.
C (- 8, – 6) and D (- 4, 10)
Answer:
The given endpoints of \(\overline{C D}\) are:
C (-8, -6), D (-4, 10)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{-8 – 4}{2}\), \(\frac{10 – 6}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{-12}{2}\), \(\frac{4}{2}\))
M = (-6, 2)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint of \(\overline{C D}\) are: (-6, 2)

In Exercises 19 – 22. the midpoint M and one endpoint of \(\overline{G H}\) are given. Find the coordinates of the other endpoint.

Question 19.
G (5, – 6) and M (4, 3)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 19

Question 20.
H (- 3, 7) and M (- 2, 5)
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{G H}\) are:
M (-2, 5), H (-3, 7)
Let the point G be: (x1, y1)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(-2, 5) = (\(\frac{x1 -3}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + 7}{2}\))
So,
\(\frac{x1 – 3}{2}\) = -2              \(\frac{y1 + 7}{2}\) = 5
x1 – 3 = -2 (2)                                            y1 + 7 = 5 (2)
x1 = -4 – 3                                                  y1 = 10 – 7
x1 = -7                                                         y1 = 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other endpoint G is: (-7, 3)

Question 21.
H ( – 2, 9) and M(8, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 21

Question 22.
G (- 4, 1) and M (- \(\frac{13}{2}\), – 6)
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{G H}\) are:
M (- \(\frac{13}{2}\), – 6), G (-4, 1)
Let the other endpoint be H (x2, y2)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(- \(\frac{13}{2}\), – 6) = (\(\frac{x2 – 4}{2}\), \(\frac{y2 + 1}{2}\))
So,
\(\frac{x2 – 4}{2}\) = – \(\frac{13}{2}\)           \(\frac{y2 + 1}{2}\) = -6
x2 – 4 = – \(\frac{13}{2}\) (2)                                         y2 + 1 = -6 (2)
x1 = -13 + 4                                                                                 y2 = -12 – 1
x1 = -9                                                                                          y1 = -13
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other endpoint H is: (-9, -13)

In Exercises 23 – 30, find the distance between the two points.

Question 23.
A (13, 2) and B (7, 10)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 23

Question 24.
C (- 6, 5) and D (- 3, 1)
Answer:
The given points are:
C (-6, 5), D (-3, 1)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points C and D is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(6 – 3)² + (1 – 5)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(3)² + (-4)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{9 + 16}\)
D = \(\sqrt{25}\)
D = 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between 2 given points is: 5

Question 25.
E (3, 7) and F (6, 5)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 25

Question 26.
G (- 5, 4) and H (2, 6)
Answer:
The given points are:
G (-5, 4), H (2, 6)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points A and B is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(2 + 5)² + (6 – 4)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(7)² + (2)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{49 + 4}\)
D = \(\sqrt{53}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between 2 given points is: \(\sqrt{53}\)

Question 27.
J (- 8, 0) and K (1, 4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 27

Question 28.
L (7, – 1) and M (- 2, 4)
Answer:
The given points are:
L (7, -1), M (-2, 4)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points A and B is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-2 – 7)² + (4 + 1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-9)² + (5)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{81 + 25}\)
D = \(\sqrt{106}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between 2 given points is: \(\sqrt{106}\)

Question 29.
R (0, 1) and S (6, 3.5)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 29

Question 30.
T (13, 1.6) and V (5.4, 3.7)
Answer:
The given points are:
T (13, 1.6), V (5.4, 3.7)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points A and B is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(13 – 5.4)² + (1.6 – 3.7)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(7.6)² + (2.1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{57.76 + 4.41}\)
D = \(\sqrt{62.17}\)
D = 7.884
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between 2 given points is: 7.884

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 31 and 32, describe and correct the error in finding the distance between A(6, 2) and 8(1, – 4).

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 87
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 88
Answer:
In the above figure,
The distance between A and B is given by using the formula:
D = \(\sqrt{(x1 – y1)² + (x2 – y2)²}\)
But,
The used formula is wrong
Now,
The given points are:
A (6, 2), B (1, -4)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points A and B is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(6 – 1)² + (2 + 4)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(5)² + (6)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{25 + 36}\)
D = \(\sqrt{61}\)
D = 7.8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between A and B is: 7.8

COMPARING SEGMENTS
In Exercises 33 and 34, the endpoints of two segments are given. Find each segment length. Tell whether the segments are congruent. If they are not congruent, a state which segment length is greater.

Question 33.
\(\overline{A B}\): A(0, 2), B(- 3, 8) and \(\overline{C D}\): C(- 2, 2), D(0, – 4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 33

Question 34.
\(\overline{E F}\): E(1, 4),F(5, 1) and \(\overline{G H}\): G(-3, 1), H(1, 6)
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{E F}\) are:
E (1, 4), F (5, 1)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points E and F is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(5 – 1)² + (1 – 4)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(4)² + (-3)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{16 + 9}\)
D = \(\sqrt{25}\)
D = 5
Now,
The given points are:
G (-3, 1), H (1, 6)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between points G and H is given as:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-1 – 3)² + (1 – 6)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{(-4)² + (-5)²}\)
D = \(\sqrt{16 + 25}\)
D = \(\sqrt{41}\)
D = 6.4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The lengths of \(\overline{E F}\) and \(\overline{G H}\) are not congruent
The comparison of the lengths is:
\(\overline{E F}\) < \(\overline{G H}\)

Question 35.
WRITING
Your friend is having trouble understanding the Midpoint Formula.
a. Explain how to find the midpoint when given the two endpoints in your own words.
b. Explain how to tind the other endpoint when given one endpoint and the midpoint in your own words.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 35

Question 36.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
In baseball, the strike zone is the region a baseball needs to pass through for the umpire to declare it a strike when the butler does not swing. The top of the strike zone is a horizontal plane passing through the midpoint in the top of the batter’s shoulders and the top of the uniform pants when the player is in a batting stance. Find the height of T. (Note: All heights are in inches.)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 89
Answer:
It is given that the strike zone is the region a baseball needs to pass through for the umpire to declare it a strike when the butler does not swing. The top of the strike zone is a horizontal plane passing through the midpoint in the top of the batter’s shoulders and the top of the uniform pants when the player is in a batting stance.
So,
From the figure,
we can observe that the height of T lies between 60 and 42
So,
When we find the mid value of 60 and 42, we will get the height of T
So,
T = \(\frac{60 + 42}{2}\)
T = \(\frac{102}{2}\)
T = 51
Hence, from he above,
We can conclude that the height of T is: 51 inches

Question 37.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
The figure shows the position of three players during part of a water polo match. Player A throws the ball to Player B. who then throws the ball to Player C.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 90
a. Ho far did Player A throw the hail? Player B?
b. How far would Player A have to throw the ball to throw it directly to Player C?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 37

Question 38.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Your school is 20 blocks east and 12 blocks south of your house. The mall is 10 blocks north and 7 blocks west of our house. You plan on going to the mall right after school. Find the distance between your school and the mall assuming there is a road directly connecting the school and the mall. One block is 0.1 mile.
Answer:
The representation of the coordinates of school and Mall in the coordinate plane is:

From the above graph,
The coordinates of the school and Mall are:
S (20, -12), M (-7, 10)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y), B (x2, y2)
So,
The distance between the schoola and Mall is given as:
SM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
SM = \(\sqrt{(-7 – 20)² + (10 + 12)²}\)
SM = \(\sqrt{(-27)² +(22)²}\)
SM = \(\sqrt{1213}\)
SM = 34.8 miles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance between the school and the Mall is: 34.8 miles

Question 39.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
A path goes around a triangular park, as shown.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 91
a. Find the distance around the park to the nearest yard.
b. A new path and a bridge are constructed from point Q to the midpoint M of \(\overline{P R}\). Find QM to the nearest yard.
c. A man jogs from P to Q to M Lo R to Q and back to P at an average speed of 150 yards per minute. About how many minutes does it take? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 39.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 39.2

Question 40.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend claims there is an easier way to find the length of a segment than the Distance Formula when the x-coordinates of the endpoints are equal. He claims all you have to do is subtract the y-coordinates. Do you agree with his statement? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Yes, your friend is correct

Explanation:
We know that,
Distance between 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
It is given that the x-coordinates are equal
So,
x1 = x2 = 0
So,
Distance between 2 points = y2 – y1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that your friend is correct

Question 41.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
Two points are located at (a, c) and (b, c). Find the midpoint and the distance between the two points.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 41

Question 42.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
\(\overline{A B}\) contains midpoint M and points C and D. as shown. Compare the lengths. If you cannot draw a conclusion. write impossible to tell. Explain your reasoning.
a. AM and MB
b. AC and MB
c. MC and MD
d. MB and DB
Answer:

Question 43.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Use the diagram in Exercise 42. The points on \(\overline{A B}\) represent locations you pass on your commute to work. You travel from your home at location A to location M before realizing that your left your lunch at home. You could turn around to get your lunch and then continue to work at location B. Or you could go to work and go to location D for lunch today. You want to choose the option that involves the least distance you must travel. which option should you choose? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 43

Question 44.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Describe three ways to divide a rectangle into two congruent regions. Do the regions have to he triangles? Use a diagram to support your answer.
Answer:
The division of triangles into 2 congruent regions don’t have to be a triangle
Now,
case (i):

In the above case,
The 2 regions are rectangles
case (ii):

In the above case,
The 2 regions are triangles
case (iii):

In the above case,
The 2 regions are squares

Question 45.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
The length of \(\overline{X Y}\) is 24 centimeters. The midpoint of \(\overline{X Y}\) is M. and C is on \(\overline{X M}\) so that XC is \(\frac{2}{3}\) of XM. Point D is on \(\overline{M Y}\) so that MD is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of MY. What is the length of \(\overline{C D}\)?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 45

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Find the perimeter and area of the figure.

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 92
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 92
The above figure is: Square
So,
We know that,
The perimeter of a square = 4 × Side
The area of a square = Side²
From the above figure,
The length of the side = 5 cm
So,
The perimeter of a square = 4 (5) = 20 cm
The area of a square = 5² = 25 cm²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of a square is: 20 cm
The area of a square is: 25 cm²

Question 47.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 93
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 47

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 94
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 94
From the above,
The given figure is: Triangle
We know that,
The perimeter of triangle = The sum of all the sides of the given triangle
The area of triangle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
So,
The perimeter of triangle = 3 + 4 + 5 = 12 m
The area of triangle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 3 × 4
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\) × 3
= 6 m²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of triangle is: 12 m
The area oftriangle is: 6 m²

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 95
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 49

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.

Question 50.
a + 18 < 7
Answer:
The given inequality is:
a + 18 < 7
So,
a < 7 – 18
a < -11
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the solution to the given inequality is: a < -11
The representation of the solution of the given inequality in the graph is:

Question 51.
y – 5 ≥ 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 51

Question 52.
– 3x > 24
Answer:
The given inequality is:
-3x > 24
x < –\(\frac{24}{3}\)
x < -8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the solution to the given inequality is: x < -8
The representation of the solution of the given inequality in the graph is:

Question 53.
\(\frac{z}{4}\) ≤ 12
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.3 a 53

Study Skills: Keeping Your Mind Focused

1.1 – 1.3 What did you learn

Mathematical Practices

Question 1.
Sketch an example of the situation described in Exercise 49 on page 10. Label your figure.
Answer:
The representation of the example of the situation described in Exercise 49 on page 10 is:

Question 2.
Explain how you arrived at your answer for Exercise 35 on page 18.
Answer:
we arrived at the answer for Exercise 35 on page 18 by using the distance formula between 2 points.
We know that,
The distance between the 2 points = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)

Question 3.
What assumptions did you make when solving Exercise 43 0n page 26?
Answer:
The assumptions we make when solving Exercise 43 on page 26 is:
All the lengths between the 2 points in the segment are equal

1.1 – 1.3 Quiz

Use the diagram

Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 96

Question 1.
Name four points.
Answer:
From the above figure,
The four points are: A, L, B, and K

Question 2.
Name three collinear points.
Answer:
We know that,
The points that lie in the same line are called  “Collinear points”
Hence, from the above figure,
The three collinear points are: A, L, and B

Question 3.
Name two lines.
Answer:
We know that,
A line has a starting point but no ending point
From the above figure,
The lines are GHF, ALB

Question 4.
Name three coplanar points.
Answer:
We know that,
The points that are present in the same plane are called “Co-planar points”
Hence, from the above figure,
The coplanar points are: G, H, and F

Question 5.
Name the plane that is shaded green.
Answer:
From the above figure,
The plane that is shaded green is named as Plane GHF

Question 6.
Give two names for the plane that is shaded blue.
Answer:
From the figure,
The two names for the plane that is shaded blue are: Plane AKL, Plane BCD

Question 7.
Name three line segments.
Answer:
From the figure,
The 3 line segments are: CD, HG, DE

Question 8.
Name three rays.
Answer:
From the figure,
The names of the 3 rays are: Ray GHF, ray CDE, Ray ALB

Sketch the figure described.

Question 9.
\(\vec{Q}\)R and Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 97
Answer:
The representation of \(\vec{Q}\)R and QS is:

Question 10.
plane P intersecting Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 98 at Z
Answer:
The representation of plane P intersecting YZ at z is:

Plot the points in a coordinate plane. Then determine whether \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are congruent.

Question 11.
A(- 3, 3), B( 1, 3), C(3, 2), D(3, – 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (-3, 3), B (1, 3), C (3, 2), D (3, -2)
Compare any 2 points with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
We know that,
The distance can be calculated by using:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)²}\) = 4
\(\overline{C D}\) = \(\sqrt{(3 – 3)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)²}\) = 4
So, from the above,
\(\overline{A B}\) is congruent to \(\overline{C D}\) since both the lengths are the same
Hence, from the above,
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

\(\overline{A B}\) is congruent to \(\overline{C D}\)

Question 12.
A(- 8, 7), B(1, 7), C(- 3, – 6), D(5, – 6)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (-8, 7), B (1, 7), C (-3, -6), D (5, -6)
Compare any 2 points with (x1, y1), (x2, y2)
We know that,
The distance can be calculated by using:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
\(\overline{A B}\) = \(\sqrt{(1 + 8)² + (7 – 7)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(9)²}\) = 9
\(\overline{C D}\) = \(\sqrt{(5 + 3)² + (6 – 6)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(8)²}\) = 8
So, from the above,
\(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent to \(\overline{C D}\) since both the lengths are not the same
Hence, from the above,
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

\(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent to \(\overline{C D}\)

Find AC. (Section 1.2)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 99
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 99
So,
From the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{A C}\) = \(\overline{A B}\) + \(\overline{B C}\)
\(\overline{A C}\) = 13 + 26
\(\overline{A C}\) = 39
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{A C}\) is: 39

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 100
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 100
So,
From the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{A B}\) = \(\overline{A C}\) + \(\overline{B C}\)
62 = \(\overline{A C}\) + 11
\(\overline{A C}\) = 62 – 11
\(\overline{A C}\) = 51
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{A C}\) is: 51

Find the coordinates of the midpoint M and the distance between the two points.

Question 15.
J(4, 3) and K(2, – 3)
Answer:
The given points are:
J (4, 3), K (2, -3)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{4 + 2}{2}\), \(\frac{3 – 3}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{6}{2}\), \(\frac{0}{2}\))
M = (3, 0)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint are: (3, 0)

Question 16.
L(- 4, 5) and N(5, – 3)
Answer:
The given points are:
L (-4, 5), N (5, -3)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{-4 + 5}{2}\), \(\frac{5 – 3}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{2}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 1)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint are: (\(\frac{1}{2}\), 1)

Question 17.
P(- 6, – 1) and Q(1, 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
P (-6, -1), Q (1, 2)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
M = (\(\frac{-6 + 1}{2}\), \(\frac{2 – 1}{2}\))
M = (\(\frac{-5}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\))
M = (-\(\frac{5}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\))
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint are: (-\(\frac{5}{2}\), \(\frac{1}{2}\))

Question 18.
Identify the segment bisector of \(\overline{R S}\). Then find RS.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 101
Answer:
The given line segment is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 101
We know that,
A bisector is a point or a line that divides a line segment into 2 congruent parts
So,
From the above figure,
M is the bisector of \(\overline{R S}\)
So,
6x – 2 = 3x + 7
6x – 3x = 7 + 2
3x = 9
x = \(\frac{9}{3}\)
x = 3
So,
\(\overline{R S}\) = 6x – 2 + 3x + 7
= 9x + 5
= 9 (3) + 5
= 27 + 5
= 32
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of [altex]\overline{R S}[/latex] is: 32

Question 19.
The midpoint of \(\overline{J K}\) is M(0, 1). One endpoint is J(- 6, 3). Find the coordinates of endpoint K.
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{J K}\) are:
M (0, 1), H (-6, 3)
Let the point G be: (x1, y1)
We know that,
M = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(0, 1) = (\(\frac{x1 -6}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + 3}{2}\))
So,
\(\frac{x1 – 6}{2}\) = 0              \(\frac{y1 + 3}{2}\) = 1
x1 – 12 = 0 (2)                                            y1 + 7 = 1 (2)
x1 = 0 + 12                                                 y1 = 2 – 7
x1 = 12                                                        y1 = -5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the other endpoint G is: (12, -5)

Question 20.
Your mom asks you to run some errands on your way home from school. She wants you to Stop at the post office and the grocery store, which is both on the same straight road between your school and your house. The distance from your school to the post office is 376 yards. the distance from the post office to your house is 929 yards. and the distance from the grocery store to your house is 513 yards.
a. Where should you stop first?
Answer:
It is given that your mom asks you to run some errands on your way home from school. She wants you to stop at the post office and the grocery store, which is both on the same straight road between your school and your house.
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that you should first stop at the post office

b. What is the distance from the post office to the grocery store?
Answer:
It is given that the distance from your school to the post office is 376 yards. the distance from the post office to your house is 929 yards. and the distance from the grocery store to your house is 513 yards.
So,
The distance from the post office to the grocery store = (The distance from the post office to your house) + (The distance from the grocery store to your house)
= 929 + 513
= 1442 yards
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance from the post office to the grocery store is: 1442 yards

c. What is the distance from your school to your house?
Answer:
It is given that the distance from your school to the post office is 376 yards. the distance from the post office to your house is 929 yards. and the distance from the grocery store to your house is 513 yards.
So,
The distance from your school to your house = (The distance from your school to the post office) + (The distance from the post office to the grocery store)
= 376 + 1442
= 1818 yards
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the distance from your school to your house is: 1818 yards

d. you walk at a speed of 75 yards per minute. How long does it take you to walk straight home from school? Explain your answer.
Answer:
We know that,
Time = \(\frac{Distance}{Speed}\)
From part (c),
The total distance is: 1818 yards
The given speed is: 75 yards per minute
So,
Time = \(\frac{1818}{75}\)
Time = 24.24 minutes
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the time taken for you to walk straight home from school is: 24.24 minutes

Question 21.
The figure shows a coordinate plane on a baseball held. The distance from home plate to first base is 90 feet. The pitching mound is the midpoint between home plate and second base. Find the distance from home plate to second base. Find the distance between the home plate and the pitching mound. Explain how you found our answers.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 102
Answer:
From the figure,
The coordinates to the home plate are: (0, 0), and (0, 6)
The coordinates to the second plate are: (6, 6), and (6, 0)
The coordinate of the pitching mound is: (3, 3)
Now,
The length of the home plate is:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 – 0)² + (6 – 6)²}\)
= (0, 6)
The length of the second plate is:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(6 – 6)² + (6 – 0)²}\)
= (0, 6)
Now,
The distance from the home plate to the second base is:
D = (0, 6) – (0, 6)
D = (0, 0)
The distance between the home plate and the pitching mound is:
D = (3, 3) – (0, 0)
D = (3, 3)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The distance from the home plate to the second base is: (0, 0)
The distance from the home plate to the pitching mound is: (3, 3)

1.4 Perimeter and Area in the Coordinate Plane

Essential Question

How can you find the perimeter and area of a polygon in a coordinate plane?
Answer:
When two-dimensional figures are shown on the coordinate plane, a mix of counting and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to determine the lengths of each side. Then add up the lengths to determine the perimeter or use the basic area formulas for triangles and rectangles to determine the area of the figure.

Exploration 1

Finding the Perimeter and Area of a Quadrilateral

Work with a partner

a. On a piece of centimeter graph paper. draw quadrilateral ABCD in a coordinate plane. Label the points A(1, 4), B(- 3, 1) C(0, – 3), and D(4, 0).
Answer:
The given points are:
A (1, 4), B (-3, 1), C (0, -3), and D (4, 0)
Hence,
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane are:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 103

b. Find the perimeter of quadrilateral ABCD.
Answer:
The given points are:
A (1, 4), B (-3, 1), C (0, -3), and D (4, 0)
We know that,
The perimeter is defined as the sum of all the sides of a polygon
So,
In a coordinate plane, the perimeter of the polygon can be found by finding the lengths of the given sides
We know that,
The length of the side of a polygon in a coordinate plane is:
D = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
So,
AB = \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{16 + 9}\)
= \(\sqrt{25}\)
= 5 cm
BC = \(\sqrt{(0 + 3)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (4)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{9 + 16}\)
= \(\sqrt{25}\)
= 5 cm
CD = \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (0 + 3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4)² + (3)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(16 + 9}\)
= \(\sqrt{25}\)
= 5 cm
DA = \(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² + (4 – 0)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3)² + (4)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{9 + 16}\)
= \(\sqrt{25}\)
= 5 cm
Hence,
The perimeter of the Quadrilateral ABCD = AB + BC + CD + DA
= 5 + 5 + 5 + 5
= 20 cm

c. Are adjacent sides of quadrilateral ABCD perpendicular to each other? How can you tell?
Answer:
From part (a),
The lengths of all the sides of a quadrilateral are: 5 cm
We know that,
For a square, the lengths of all the sides are equal and the angle between all the sides of the square is 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the adjacent sides of quadrilateral ABCD are perpendicular to each other

d. What is the definition of a square? Is quadrilateral ABCD a square? Justify your answer. Find the area of quadrilateral ABCD.
Answer:
Definition of the square:
A “Square” is a quadrilateral that has the length of all the sides equal and all the angles 90°
From part (b),
We found out the lengths of all the sides are equal and all the angles are 90°
So,
Quadrilateral ABCD is a square
So,
Area of a square = Side²
= 5²
= 25 cm²

Exploration 2

Finding the Area of a Polygon Work with a partner.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 104

a. Partition quadrilateral ABCD into four right triangles and one square, as shown. Find the coordinates of the vertices for the five smaller polygons.
Answer:
From the figure,
The five smaller polygons are:
ΔAQD, ΔBPA, ΔDRC, ΔCSB, and square PQRS
Now,
The coordinates for the given vertices polygons are:
The coordinates of ΔAQD are:
A (1, 4), Q (1, 0), and D (4, 0)
The coordinates of ΔBPA are:
B (-3, 1), P (1, 1), and A (1, 4)
The coordinates of ΔDRC are:
D (4, 0), R (0, 0), and C (0, -3)
The coordinates of ΔCSB are:
C (0, -3), S (0, 1), and B (-3, 1)
The coordinates of square PQRS are:
P (1, 1), Q (1, 0), R (0, 0), and S (0, 1)

b. Find the areas of the five smaller polygons.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 105
Answer:
From part (a),
The coordinates of ΔAQD are:
A (1, 4), Q (1, 0), and D (4, 0)
The coordinates of ΔBPA are:
B (-3, 1), P (1, 1), and A (1, 4)
The coordinates of ΔDRC are:
D (4, 0), R (0, 0), and C (0, -3)
The coordinates of ΔCSB are:
C (0, -3), S (0, 1), and B (-3, 1)
The coordinates of square PQRS are:
P (1, 1), Q (1, 0), R (0, 0), and S (0, 1)
Now,
The area of Δ AQD:
The length of AQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² +  (4 – 0)²}\)
= 4
The length of QD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² +  (0 – 0)²}\)
= 3
The length of DA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² +  (4 – 0)²}\)
= 5
So,
The area of ΔAQD = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4) (3)
= 6

The area of Δ BPA:
The length of BP = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² +  (1 – 1)²}\)
= 4
The length of PA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² +  (4 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of BA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² +  (1 + 3)²}\)
= 5
So,
The area of ΔBPA = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4) (3)
= 6

The area of Δ DRC:
The length of DR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 – 0)² +  (4 – 0)²}\)
= 4
The length of RC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 0)² +  (0 – 0)²}\)
= 3
The length of CD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 3)² +  (4 – 0)²}\)
= 5
So,
The area of ΔDRC = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4) (3)
= 6

The area of Δ CSB:
The length of CS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 – 0)² +  (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
The length of SB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² +  (0 + 3)²}\)
= 3
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² +  (0+ 3)²}\)
= 5
So,
The area of ΔCSB = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4) (3)
= 6

The area of square PQRS:
The length of PQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² +  (1 – 0)²}\)
= 1
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 0)² +  (0 – 0)²}\)
= 1
The length of RS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² +  (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 0)² +  (0 – 0)²}\)
= 1
The length of PS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 – 0)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 1
So,
The area of square PQRS = Side²
= 1

c. Is the sum of the areas of the five smaller polygons equal to the area of quadrilateral ABCD? Justify your answer.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The coordinates of the quadrilateral ABCD are:
A (1, 4), B(-3, 1), C (0, -3), and D (4, 0)
Now,
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 5
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(0 + 3)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 5
The length of CD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (0 + 3)²}\)
= 5
The length of DA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 5
So, from the above
We can observe that all the lengths of the sides are equal and the product of the slopes of the perpendicular sides is -1
Hence,
The area of quadrilateral ABCD = Side²
= 5² = 25
Now,
The sum of the areas of the five smaller polygons = 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + 1
= 25
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the sum of the areas of the five smaller polygons equal to the area of quadrilateral ABCD

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you find the perimeter and area of a polygon in a coordinate plane?
Answer:
When two-dimensional figures are shown on the coordinate plane, a mix of counting and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to determine the lengths of each side. Then add up the lengths to determine the perimeter or use the basic area formulas for triangles and rectangles to determine the area of the figure.

Question 4.
Repeat Exploration 1 for quadrilateral EFGH. where the coordinates of the vertices are E(- 3, 6), F(- 7, 3), G(- 1, – 5), and H(3, – 2).
Answer:
The coordinates of the vertices of quadrilateral EFGH are:
E (-3, 6), F (-7, 3), G (-1, -5), and H (3, -2)
Now,
The length of EF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(7 – 3)² + (6 – 3)²}\)
= 5
The length of FG = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(7 – 1)² + (3 + 5)²}\)
= 10
The length of GH = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 1)² + (5 – 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of HE = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (6 + 2)²}\)
= 10
Hence,
The perimeter of quadrilateral EFGH = EF + FG + GH + HE
= 5 + 5 + 10 +  10
= 30
From the lengths of the sides,
We can observe that the opposite sides have the same lengths and the product of the slopes of the perpendicular sides is -1
So,
The figure is: Rectangle
We know that,
The area of a rectangle = Length × Width
So,
The area of quadrilateral EFGH = 5 × 10 = 50
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of quadrilateral EFGH is: 30
The area of quadrilateral EFGH is: 50

Lesson 1.4 Perimeter and Area in the Coordinate Plane

Monitoring Progress

Classify the polygon the number of sides. Tell whether it is convex or concave.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 106
Answer:
The given polygon is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 106
From the given polygon,
The number of sides is: 5
So,
The given polygon is “Pentagon”
We know that,
The figure is concave if all the interior angles are greater than 180°
The figure is convex if all the interior angles are less than 180°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given polygon is “Pentagon” and it is convex

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 107
Answer:
The given polygon is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 107
From the above polygon,
We can observe that
The number of sides is: 6
So,
The given polygon is: Hexagon
We know that,
The figure is concave if all the interior angles are greater than 180°
The figure is convex if all the interior angles are less than 180°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given polygon is “Hexagon” and it is convex

Find the perimeter of the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 3.
D(- 3, 2), E(4, 2), F(4, – 3)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
D (-3, 2), E (4, 2), F (4, -3)
Now,
The length of DE = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 + 3)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 7
The length of EF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 – 4)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of FD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 + 3)² + (2 + 3)²}\)
= 8.60
So,
The perimeter of the given vertices = 7 + 5 + 8.60
= 20.60
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given vertices is: 20.60

Question 4.
G(- 3, 2), H(2, 2), J(- 1, – 3)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
G (-3, 2), H (2, 2), I (-1, -3)
Now,
The length of GH = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 3)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of HI = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5.8
The length of IG = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 – 1)² + (2 + 3)²}\)
= 5.3
So,
The perimeter of the given vertices = 5 + 5.8 + 5.3
= 16.1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given vertices is: 16.1

Question 5.
K( – 1, 1), L(4, 1), M(2, – 2), N(- 3, – 2)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
K (-1, 1), L (4, 1), M (2, -2), N (-3, -2)
Now,
The length of KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 + 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 5
The length of LM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 – 2)² + (1 + 2)²}\)
= 3.6
The length of MN = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 3)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of NK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3- 1)² + (1 + 2)²}\)
= 3.6
So,
The perimeter of the given vertices = 5 + 5 + 3.6 + 3.6
= 17.2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given vertices is: 17.2

Question 6.
Q(- 4, – 1), R(1, 4), S(4, 1), T(- 1, – 4)
Answer:
The given vertices are;
Q (-4, -1), R (1, 4), S (4, 1), T (-1, -4)
Now,
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 + 1)² + (4 + 1)²}\)
= 7.07
The length of RS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 4.2
The length of ST = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(4 + 1)² + (1 + 4)²}\)
= 7.07
The length of TQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4- 1)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 4.2
So,
The perimeter of the given vertices = 7.07 + 7.07 + 4.2 + 4.2
= 22.54
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given vertices is: 22.54

Find the area of the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 7.
G(2, 2), H(3, – 1), J(- 2, – 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
G (2, 2), H (3, -1), I (-2, -1)
Now,
The length of GH = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 3)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= 3.16
The length of HI = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of IG = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 2)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= 5
So,
The area of the given vertices = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 5 × 5
= 12.5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 12.5

Question 8.
N(- 1, 1), P(2, 1), Q(2, – 2), R(- 1, – 2)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
N (-1, 1), P (2, 1), Q (2, -2), R (-1, -2)
Now,
The length of NP = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of PQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (1 + 2)²}\)
= 3
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 3
The length of RN = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1- 1)² + (1 + 2)²}\)
= 3
So,
From the lengths of all of the sides,
We can say that the vertices belong to a square
So,
The area of a square = Side²
= 3² = 9
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 9

Question 9.
F(- 2, 3), G(1, 3), H(1, – 1), J(- 2, – 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
F (-2, 3), G (1, 3), H (1, -1), J (-2, -1)
Now,
The length of FG = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 3
The length of GH = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
The length of HJ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of JF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2- 2)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
So,
From the lengths of all of the sides,
We can say that the vertices belong to a rectangle since the lengths of the opposite sides are the same
So,
The area of a rectangle = Length × Width
= 3 × 4 = 12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 12

Question 10.
K(- 3, 3), L(3, 3), M(3, – 1), N(- 3, – 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
K (-3, 3), L (3, 3), M (3, -1), N (-3, -1)
Now,
The length of KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 6
The length of LM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 – 3)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
The length of MN = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 6
The length of NK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3- 3)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
So,
From the lengths of all of the sides,
We can say that the vertices belong to a rectangle
So,
The area of a rectangle = Length × Width
= 6 × 4 = 24
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 24

Question 11.
You are building a patio in your school’s courtyard. In the diagram at the left, the coordinates represent the four vertices of the patio. Each unit in the coordinate plane represents 1 foot. Find the area of the patio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 108
Answer:
From the given graph,
The coordinates of a patio is:
M (2, 2), N (6, 2), P (6, -3), R (2, -3)
Now,
The length of MN = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(6 – 2)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 4
The length of NP = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(6 – 6)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5
The length of PR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(6 – 2)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 4
The length of RM = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2- 2)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5
So,
From the lengths of all of the sides,
We can say that the vertices belong to a rectangle
So,
The area of a rectangle = Length × Width
= 5 × 4 = 20
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the patio is: 20

Exercise 1.4 Perimeter and Area in the Coordinate Plane

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
The perimeter of a square with side length s is P = _________ .
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 1

Question 2.
WRITING
What formulas can you use to find the area of a triangle in a coordinate plane?
Answer:
We know that,
The formula you can use to find the area of a triangle in a coordinate plane is:
Area of a triangle (A) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × Height

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6, classify the polygon by the number of sides. Tell whether it is convex or concave.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 109
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 110
Answer:
The given polygon is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 110
From the given polygon,
We can observe that
The number of sides is: 3
We know that,
The figure is concave if all the interior angles are greater than 180°
The figure is convex if all the interior angles are less than 180°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given polygon is a triangle and it is a concave polygon as it has interior angles greater than 180°

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 111
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 112
Answer:
The given polygon is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 112
From the given polygon,
We can observe that
The number of sides is: 6
We know that,
The figure is concave if all the interior angles are greater than 180°
The figure is convex if all the interior angles are less than 180°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given polygon is a hexagon and it is a concave polygon as it has interior angles greater than 180°

In Exercises 7 – 12. find the perimeter of the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 7.
G(2, 4), H(2, – 3), J(- 2, – 3), K(- 2, 4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 7

Question 8.
Q(- 3, 2), R(1, 2), s(1, – 2), T(- 3, – 2)
Answer:
The given vertices of a polygon are:
Q (-3, 2), R (1, 2), S (1, -2), T (-3, -2)
Now,
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 4
The length of RS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= 4
The length of ST = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
The length of TQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3- 3)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= 4
So,
From the lengths of all of the sides,
We can say that the vertices belong to a square
So,
The perimeter of a square = 4 × Side
= 4 × 4
= 16
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given polygon is: 16

Question 9.
U(- 2, 4), V(3, 4), W(3, – 4)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 9

Question 10.
X(- 1, 3), Y(3, 0), Z(- 1, – 2)
Answer:
The given vertices of a polygon are:
X (-1, 3), Y (3, 0), Z (-1, -2)
Now,
The length of XY = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 1)² + (3 – 0)²}\)
= 5
The length of YZ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(3 + 1)² + (0 + 2)²}\)
= 4.47
The length of ZX = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5
So,
The perimeter of the given polygon = 5 + 5 + 4.7
= 14.47
Hence, from the above,
WE can conclude that the perimeter of the given polygon is: 14.47

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 113
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 114
Answer:
From the given coordinate plane,
The given vertices of the hexagon are:
A (0, 4), B (2, 0), C (2, -2), D (0, -2), E (-2, 2), F (-2, 4)
Now,
Now,
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 0)² + (4 – 0)²}\)
= 4.47
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (0 + 2)²}\)
= 2
The length of CD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
=\(\sqrt{(2 – 0)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 2
The length of DE = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 2)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= 4.47
The length of EF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (4 – 2)²}\)
= 2
The length of FA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 2)² + (4 – 4)²}\)
= 2
So,
The perimeter of the hexagon = AB + BC + CD + DE + EF + FA
= 4.47 + 2 + 2 + 4.47 + 2 + 2
= 16.94
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the given hexagon is: 16.94

In Exercises 13 – 16. find the area of the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 13.
E(3, 1), F(3, – 2), G(- 2, – 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 13

Question 14.
J(- 3, 4), K(4, 4), L(3, – 3)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
J (-3, 4), K (4, 4), L (3, -3)
Now,
The length of JK = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 3)² + (4 – 4)²}\)
= 7
The length of KL = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 3)² + (4 + 3)²}\)
= 7.07
The length of LJ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (3 + 4)²}\)
= 9.21
So,
The area of the given vertices = \(\frac{1}{2}]/latex] × JK ×KL
= [latex/]frac{1}{2}\) × 7 × 7.07
= 24.74
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 24.74

Question 15.
W(0, 0), X(0, 3), Y(- 3, 3), Z(- 3, 0)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 15

Question 16.
N(- 2, 1), P(3, 1), Q(3, – 1), R(- 2, 1)
Answer:
The given vertices are:
N (-2, 1), P (3, 1), Q (3, -1), R (-2, 1)
Now,
The length of NP = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 2)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 5
The length of PQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 – 3)² + (1 + 1)²}\)
= 2
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 2)² + (1 + 1)²}\)
= 5.38
The length of RN = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 0
So,
The area of the given vertices = 5 × 2 × 5.38
= 28.97
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the given vertices is: 28.97

In Exercises 17 – 24, use the diagram.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 115

Question 17.
Find the perimeter of △CDE.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 17

Question 18.
Find the perimeter of the rectangle BCEF.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The coordinates of the rectangle BCEF are:
B (0, 3) C (4, -1), E (2, -3), F (-2, 1)
Now,
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (3 + 1)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of CE = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 2)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 2.82
The length of EF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of FB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 2)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 2.82
So,
The perimeter of the rectangle BCEF = BC + CE + EF + FB
= 5.65 + 2.82 + 5.65 + 2.82
= 16.94
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of the rectangle BCEF is: 16.94

Question 19.
Find the perimeter of △ABF.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 19

Question 20.
Find the perimeter of quadrilateral ABCD.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The given vertices of the quadrilateral ABCD are:
A (-5, 4), B (0, 3), C (4, -1), D (4, -5)
Now,
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 5)² + (4 – 3)²}\)
= 5.09
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of CD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 4)² + (5 – 1)²}\)
= 4
The length of DA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 5)² + (4 + 5)²}\)
= 12.72
So,
The perimeter of quadrilateral ABCD = AB + BC + CD + DA
= 5.09 + 5.65 + 4 + 12.72
= 31.37
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the perimeter of quadrilateral ABCD is: 31.37

Question 21.
Find the area of △CDE.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 21

Question 22.
Find the area of rectangle BCEF
Answer:
From the given figure,
The coordinates of the rectangle BCEF are:
B (0, 3) C (4, -1), E (2, -3), F (-2, 1)
Now,
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (3 + 1)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of CE = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 2)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 2.82
The length of EF = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (2 + 2)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of FB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 2)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 2.82
So,
The area of the rectangle BCEF = Length × Width
= 2.82 × 5.65
= 15.93
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the rectangle BCEF is: 15.93

Question 23.
Find the area of △ABF
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 23

Question 24.
Find the area of quadrilateral ABCD.
Answer:
The given vertices of the quadrilateral ABCD are:
A (-5, 4), B (0, 3), C (4, -1), D (4, -5)
Now,
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(0 + 5)² + (4 – 3)²}\)
= 5.09
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 5.65
The length of CD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 4)² + (5 – 1)²}\)
= 4
The length of DA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 5)² + (4 + 5)²}\)
= 12.72
The length of AC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 + 5)² + (4 + 1)²}\)
= 10.29
The length of BD = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 0)² + (3 + 5)²}\)
= 8.94
So,
The area of the quadrilateral ABCD = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ×AC × BD
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10.29 × 8.94
= 45.99
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area f the quadrilateral ABCD is: 45.99

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 25 and 26, describe and correct the error in finding the perimeter or area of the polygon.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 116
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 117
Answer:
From the given figure,
The coordinates of the vertices of ΔABC are:
A (4, 3), B (5, 1), C (1, 1)
Now,
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 4)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 2.23
The length of BC = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 4
The length of CA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 1)² + (3 – 1)²}\)
= 3.60
So,
The area of ΔABC = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ×AB × BC
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 2.23 × 4
= 4.46
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of ΔABC is: 4.46 sq. units

In Exercises 27 and 28, use the diagram.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 118

Question 27.
Determine which point is the remaining vertex of a triangle with an area of 4 square units.
A. R(2, 0)
B. S(- 2, – 1)
C. T(- 1, 0)
D. U(2, – 2)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 27

Question 28.
Determine which points are the remaining vertices of a rectangle with a perimeter of 14 units.
A. A(2, – 2) and B(2, – 1)
B. C(- 2, – 2) and D(- 2, 2)
C. E(- 2, – 2) and F(2, – 2)
D. G(2, 0) and H(2, 0)
Answer:
From the given figure,
The given vertices are:
P (-2, 1), Q (2, 1)
We know that,
The perimeter is defined as the sum of all the sides of a given polygon
Now,
Let,
A (x, y), and B(p, q) are the remaining 2 points of a rectangle
Now,
The length of PQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{2 + 2)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 4
The length of QA = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(x – 2)² + (y – 1)²}\)
The length of AB = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(x – p)² + (y – q)²}\)
The length of BP = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(p + 2)² + (q – 1)²}\)
So,
The perimeter of the rectangle = PQ + QA + AB + BP
= 4 + \(\sqrt{(x – 2)² + (y – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(x – p)² + (y – q)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(p + 2)² + (q – 1)²}\)
It is given that,
The perimeter of the rectangle = 14
So,
4 + \(\sqrt{(x – 2)² + (y – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(x – p)² + (y – q)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(p + 2)² + (q – 1)²}\) = 14
\(\sqrt{(x – 2)² + (y – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(x – p)² + (y – q)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(p + 2)² + (q – 1)²}\) = 14 – 4
\(\sqrt{(x – 2)² + (y – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(x – p)² + (y – q)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(p + 2)² + (q – 1)²}\) = 10
Now, from the given options,
a.
The given remaining vertices are:
A (2, -2), B (2, -1)
Compare the above vertices with
A (x, y), and B (p, q)
So,
\(\sqrt{(2- 2)² + (-2 – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (-2 + 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(2 + 2)² + (-1 – 1)²}\) = 10
3 + 1 + 4.47 = 10
8.47 ≠ 10
b.
The given remaining vertices are:
C (-2, -2), and D (-2, 2)
Compare the above vertices with
A (x, y), and B (p, q)
So,
\(\sqrt{(-2 – 2)² + (-2 – 1)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (-2 – 2)²}\) + \(\sqrt{(-2 + 2)² + (2 – 1)²}\) = 10
5 + 4 +1 = 10
10 = 10
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the remaining two vertices which gives the perimeter of 14 units are:
C (-2, -2), and D (-2, 2)

Question 29.
USING STRUCTURE
Use the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 119
a. Find the areas of square EFGH and square EJKL. What happens to the area when the perimeter of square EFGH is doubled?
b. Is this true for every square? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 29

Question 30.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You are growing zucchini plants in your garden. In the figure. the entire garden is rectangle QRST. Each unit in the coordinate plane represents 1 foot.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 120
a. Find the area of the garden.
Answer:
It is given that the rectangle QRST represents the garden
So,
From the figure,
The coordinates of the garden are:
Q (1, 13), R (7, 13), S (7, 1), and T (1, 1)
Now,
The length of QR = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{13 – 13)² + (7 – 1)²}\)
= 6
The length of RS = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{13 – 1)² + (7 – 7)²}\)
= 12
The length of ST = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{1 – 1)² + (7 – 1)²}\)
= 6
The length of TQ = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{13 – 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 12
So,
The area of the garden = (Length of the garden) × (Width of the garden)
= 12 × 6
= 72 square feet
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the area of the garden is: 72 square feet

b. Zucchini plants require 9 square feet around each plant. How many zucchini plants can you plant?
Answer:
From part (a),
The area of the entire garden is: 72 square feet
It is given that zucchini plants require 9 square feet around each plant
So,
The number of zucchini plants you can plant = \(\frac{The area of the entire garden}{The area required for each zucchini plant}\)
= \(\frac{72}{9}\)
= 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of zucchini plants you can plant is: 8 plants

c. You decide to use square TUVW to grow lettuce. you can plant lour heads of lettuce per square loot.  How many of each vegetable can you plant? Explain.
Answer:
From the figure,
The coordinates of the vertices of the rectangle TUVW are:
T (1, 1), U (1, 4), V (4, 4), W (4, 1)
Now,
The length of TU = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{1 – 1)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of UV = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 – 4)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of VW = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 – 4)² + (4 – 1)²}\)
= 3
The length of WT = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{4 – 1)² + (1 – 1)²}\)
= 3
So,
The area of square TUVW = Side²
= 3² = 9 square feet
It is given that,
1 square foot = 4 heads of lettuce
So,
9 square feet = 9 × 4 = 36 heads of lettuce
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that you can plant 36 vegetables of each type

Question 31.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You are going for a hike in the woods. You hike to a waterfall that is 4 miles east of where you left your car. You then hike to a lookout point that is 2 miles north of your car. From the lookout point. you return to our ear.

a. Map out your route in a coordinate plane with our car at the origin. Let each unit in the coordinate plane represent 1 mile. Assume you travel along straight paths.
b. How far do you travel during the entire hike?
c. When you leave the waterfall, you decide to hike to an old wishing well before going to the lookout point. The wishing well is 3 miles north and 2 miles west of the lookout point. How far do you travel during the entire hike?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 31.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 31.2

Question 32.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Without performing any calculations, determine whether the triangle or the rectangle has a greater area. Which one has a greater perimeter? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 121
Answer:
From the given graph,
We can observe that the size of the rectangle is greater than the size of the triangle
So,
We can say that
The area of the rectangle is greater than the area of the triangle
The perimeter of the rectangle is greater than the perimeter of the triangle
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The area and the perimeter of the rectangle is greater than the area and the perimeter of the triangle

Question 33.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
The lines y1 = 2x – 6, y2 = – 3x + 4, and y3 = – \(\frac{1}{2}\) + 4 are the sides of a right triangle.
a. Use slopes to determine which sides are perpendicular.
b. Find the vertices of the triangle.
c. Find the perimeter and area of the triangle.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 33.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 33.2

Question 34.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Your bedroom has an area of 350 square feet. You are remodeling to include an attached bathroom that has an area of 150 square feet. Draw a diagram of the remodeled bedroom and bathroom in a coordinate plane.
Answer:
It is given that your bedroom has an area of 350 square feet. You are remodeling to include an attached bathroom that has an area of 150 square feet.
So,
The dimensions of the bedroom that has an area of 350 square feet are:
Length: 20 feet and Width: 17.5 feet (Remember that any of the factor products of 350 will be the dimensions of the bedroom)
So,
The dimensions of the bedroom that has an area of 350 square feet in the coordinate plane are:
(0, 0), (0, 17.5), (20, 17.5), and (20, 0)
Now,
The dimensions of an attached bathroom that has an area of 150 square feet are:
Length: 10 feet and Width: 15 feet (Remember that any of the factor products of 350 will be the dimensions of the bedroom)
So,
The dimensions of the attached bathroom that has an area of 150 square feet in the coordinate plane are:
(0, 0), (0, 5), (10, 15), (5, 0)
Hence,
The representation of the attached bedroom and the bathroom in a coordinate plane is:

Question 35.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
Use the diagram
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 122
a. Find the perimeter and area of the square.
b. Connect the midpoints of the sides of the given square to make a quadrilateral. Is this quadrilateral a square? Explain our reasoning.
c. Find the perimeter and area of the quadrilateral you made in part (b). Compare this area to the area you found in part (a).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 35

Question 36.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend claims that a rectangle with the same perimeter as △QRS will have the same area as the triangle. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 123
Answer:
No, your friend is not correct

Explanation:
It is given that your friend claims that a rectangle with the same perimeter as △QRS will have the same area as the triangle.
But,
We know that,
The size of the rectangle is greater than the size of the triangle
So,
The area of the rectangle will be greater than the area of the triangle even though the perimeter of the rectangle and the triangle are the same
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that your friend is not correct

Question 37.
REASONING
Triangle ABC has a perimeter of 12 units. The vertices of the triangle are A(x, 2), B(2, – 2), and C(- 1, 2). Find the value of x.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 37

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the equation.

Question 38.
3x – 7 = 2
Answer:
The given equatio is:
3x – 7 = 2
So,
3x = 2 + 7
3x = 9
x = \(\frac{9}{3}\)
x = 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x to the given equation is: 3

Question 39.
5x + 9 = 4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 39

Question 40.
x + 4 = x – 12
Answer:
The given equation is:
x + 4 = x – 12
x – x + 4 = -12
4 = -12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given equation has no solution

Question 41.
4x- 9 = 3x + 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 41

Question 42.
11 – 2x = 5x – 3
Answer:
The given equation is:
11 – 2x = 5x – 3
11 + 3 = 5x + 2x
7x = 14
x = \(\frac{14}{7}\)
x = 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x to the given equation is: 2

Question 43.
\(\frac{x+1}{2}\) = 4x – 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.4 a 43

Question 44.
Use a compass and straightedge to construct a copy of the line segment.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 124
Answer:
The steps used to construct a line segment are:
Step 1:
You are given line segment AB to copy.
Step 2:
Draw a line segment that is longer than line segment AB. Label one of its endpoints C.
Step 3:
Open your compass so that the anchor is on one endpoint of line segment AB and the pencil point is on the other endpoint.

1.5 Measuring and Constructing Angles

Essential Question

How can you measure and classify an angle?
Answer:
An angle is formed when two rays have the same endpoint or vertex.
An “Angle” will be measured by using a protractor
Classification of angles:
An angle can be classified according to the size of the
opening between its rays.
An acute angle measures greater than 0° and less
than 90°.
A right-angle forms a square corner and measures 90°.
An obtuse angle measures greater than 90° and less than 180°

Exploration 1

Measuring and Classifying Angles

Work with a partner: Find the degree measure of each of the following angles. Classify each angle as acute, right, or obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 125
a. ∠AOB
b. ∠AOC
c. ∠BOC
d. ∠BOE
e. ∠COE
f. ∠COD
g. ∠BOD
h. ∠AOE
Answer:
The given figure is:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 125
a. ∠AOB
From the above figure,
∠AOB = 35°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠AOB is an acute angle

b. ∠AOC
From the above figure,
∠AOC = 65°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠AOC is an acute angle

c. ∠BOC
From the above figure,
∠BOC = |65° – 35°| = 30°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠BOC is an acute angle

d. ∠BOE
From the above figure,
∠BOE = |145° – 35°| = 110°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
Hence,
∠BOE is an acute angle

e. ∠COE
From the above figure,
∠COE = |145° – 65°| = 80°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠COE is an acute angle

f. ∠COD
From the above figure,
∠COD =|70° –  65°| = 5°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠COD is an acute angle

g. ∠BOD
From the above figure,
∠BOD = |70° –  35°| = 35°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠BOD is an acute angle

h. ∠AOE
From the above figure,
∠AOE = 145°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
Hence,
∠AOE is an obtuse angle

Exploration 2

Drawing a Regular Polygon

Work with a partner.

a. Use a ruler and protractor to draw the triangular pattern shown at the right.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 126
Answer:
The representation of the triangular pattern by using a ruler and a protractor is:

b. Cut out the pattern and use it to draw three regular hexagons
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 127

C. The sum of the angle measures of a polygon with n sides is equal to 180(n – 2)°. Do the angle measures at your hexagons agree with this rule? Explain.
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
To be proficient in math, you need to calculate and measure accurately and efficiently.
Answer:
It is given that the sum of the angle measures of a polygon with n sides is equal to 180 (n – 2)°
This rule will be applicable for all the angle measures of all polygons
Hence,
We can conclude that the above rule will be applicable for the angle measures of the hexagon

d. Partition your hexagons into smaller polygons. as shown below. For each hexagon. find the sum of the angle measures of the smaller polygons Does each sum equal the sum of the angle measures of a hexagon? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 128
Answer:
We know that,
If a polygon is divided into n partitions, then the angle measures of that polygon will also be divided into n partitions
So,
The sum of the angle measures of hexagon = 180(n – 2)°
= 180 ( 6 – 2 )°
= 720°
So,
In the first figure, the polygon is divided into 2 partitions
So,
The sum of the angle measures of each partition = 720 / 2
= 360°
In the second figure, the polygon is divided into 3 partitions
So,
The sum of the angle measures of each partition = 720 / 3
= 240°
In the third figure, the polygon is divided into 6 partitions
So,
The sum of the angle measures of each partition = 720 / 6
= 120°

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you measure and classify an angle?
Answer:
An angle is formed when two rays have the same endpoint or vertex.
An “Angle” will be measured by using a protractor
Classification of angles:
An angle can be classified according to the size of the
opening between its rays.
An acute angle measures greater than 0° and less
than 90°.
A right-angle forms a square corner and measures 90°.
An obtuse angle measures greater than 90° and less than 180°

Lesson 1.5 Measuring and Constructing Angles

Monitoring Progress

Write three names for the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 129
Answer:
An “Angle” is formed when two rays have the same endpoint or vertex.
So,
Here, the angle is Q
Hence,
The three names for the given angle are: ∠Q, ∠PQR, and ∠RQP

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 130
Answer:
An “Angle” is formed when two rays have the same endpoint or vertex.
So,
Here, the angle is Y
Hence,
The three names for the given angle are: ∠1, ∠XYZ, and ∠ZYX

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 131
Answer:
An “Angle” is formed when two rays have the same endpoint or vertex.
So,
Here, the angle is E
Hence,
The three names for the given angle are: ∠2, ∠FED, and ∠DEF

Use the diagram in Example 2 to find the angle measure. Then classify the angle.

Question 4.
∠JHM
Answer:
From the above figure,
∠JHM =|145° –  0°| = 145°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
Hence,
∠JHM is an obtuse angle

Question 5.
∠MHK
Answer:
From the above figure,
∠MHK =|145° –  55°| = 110°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
Hence,
∠MHK is an obtuse angle

Question 6.
∠MHL
Answer:
From the above figure,
∠MHL =|145° –  90°| = 55°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠MHL is an acute angle

Question 7.
Without measuring, is ∠DAB ≅ ∠FEH in Example 3? Explain your reasoning. Use a protractor to verify your answer.
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that,
∠DAB ≅ 90°
∠FEH > 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that ∠DAB is not congruent to ∠FEH

Find the indicated angle measures.

Question 8.
Given that ∠KLM is a straight angle. find in ∠KLN and, m∠NLM.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 132
Answer:
Angle Addition Postulate:
If point B lies in the interior of angle AOC, then. the postulate describes that putting two angles side by side with their vertices together creates a new angle whose measure equals the sum of the measures of the two original angles
It is given that ∠KLM is a straight angle
So,
∠KLM = 180°
So,
180° = (10x – 5)° + (4x + 3)°
180° = (14x -2)°
180 + 2 = 14x
14x = 182
x = \(\frac{182}{14}\)
x = 13°
So,
∠KLN = (10x – 5)°
= 10 (13) – 5
= 130 – 5
= 125°
∠NLM = (4x + 3)°
= 4 (13) + 3
= 52 + 3
= 55°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠KLN and ∠NLM are 125° and 55° respectively

Question 9.
Given that ∠EFG is a right angle. find, m∠EFH and m∠HFG.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 133
Answer:
Angle Addition Postulate:
If point B lies in the interior of angle AOC, then. the postulate describes that putting two angles side by side with their vertices together creates a new angle whose measure equals the sum of the measures of the two original angles
It is given that ∠EFG is a right angle
So,
∠EFG = 90°
So,
90° = (2x + 2)° + (x + 1)°
90° = (3x + 3)°
90 – 3 = 3x
3x = 87
x = \(\frac{87}{3}\)
x = 29°
So,
∠EFH = (2x + 2)°
= 2 (29) + 2
= 58 + 2
= 60°
∠HFG = (x + 1)°
= 29 + 1
= 30°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠EFH and ∠HFG are 60° and 30° respectively

Question 10.
Angle MNP is a straight angle, and \(\vec{N}\)Q bisects ∠MNP. Draw ∠MNP and \(\vec{N}\)Q. Use arcs to mark the congruent angles in your diagram. Find the angle measures of these congruent angles.
Answer:
It is given that angle MNP is a straight angle, and \(\vec{N}\)Q bisects ∠MNP. Draw ∠MNP and \(\vec{N}\)Q.
So,
The representation of the above statement is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle measure of each congruent angle is: 55.3°

Exercise 1.5 Measuring and Constructing Angles

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
Two angles are __________ angles when they have the same measure.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOES DOESN’T BELONG?
Which angle name does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 134
∠BCA
∠BAC
∠1
∠CAB
Answer:
We know that,
An angle can be defined as the figure formed by two rays meeting at a common endpoint
So,
From the given figure,
A, B, and C are the given angles
So,
In ∠BCA, C is the angle
In ∠BAC, A is the angle
In ∠1, A is the angle
In ∠CAB, A is the angle
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that ∠BCA doesn’t belong with the other three

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6. write three names for the angle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 135
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 136
Answer:
We know that,
An angle can be defined as the figure formed by two rays meeting at a common endpoint
Hence,
The names for the given angle are: ∠G, ∠FGH, and ∠HGF

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 137
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 138
Answer:
We know that,
An angle can be defined as the figure formed by two rays meeting at a common endpoint
Hence,
The names for the given angle are: ∠8, ∠R, ∠QRS, and ∠SRQ

In Exercises 7 and 8, name three different angles in the diagram.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 139
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 140
Answer:
We know that,
An angle can be defined as the figure formed by two rays meeting at a common endpoint
Hence,
The three different angles are: ∠GJF, ∠CJF, and ∠CJG

In Exercises 9 – 12 find the angle measure. Then classify the angle.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 141

Question 9.
m∠AOC
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 9

Question 10.
m∠BOD
Answer:
From the above figure,
∠BOD = |0° –  65°| = 65°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠BOD is an acute angle

Question 11.
m∠COD
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 11

Question 12.
m∠EOD
Answer:
From the above figure,
∠EOD = |40° –  65°| = 25°
We know that,
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
Hence,
∠EOD is an acute angle

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 13 and 14. describe and correct the error in finding the angle measure. Use the diagram from Exercises 9 – 12.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 142
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 143
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that
∠D is at 40° and ∠E is at 65°
So,
∠DOE = |40° –  65°| = 25°
Hence,
∠DOE = 25°

CONSTRUCTION
In Exercises 15 and 16. use a compass and straightedge to copy the angle.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 144
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 145
Answer:
The steps to copy the angle are:
Step 1:
Label the vertex of the original angle as A. Draw a segment and label a point D on the segment.
Step 2:
Draw an arc with the center at A. Label the two intersecting points as B and C.
Step 3:
Using the same radius, draw an arc with center D. Label the intersecting point as E.
Step 4:
Draw an arc with radius BC and center E. Label the intersection F.
Step 5:
Draw \(\overline{D F}\)

In Exercises 17 – 20, in m∠AED = 34° and m∠EAD = 112°.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 146

Question 17.
Identify the angles congruent to ∠IED.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 17

Question 18.
Identify the angles congruent to ∠EAD.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The angles congruent to ∠EAD are:
∠DBC, ∠ADB, and ∠DAE

Question 19.
Find m∠BDC.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 19

Question 20.
Find m∠ADB.
Answer:
From the given figure,
∠EAD = 112°
Hence,
By the property of Congruence,
∠EAD ≡ ∠ADB
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ADB = 112°

In Exercises 21 – 24, find the indicated angle measure.

Question 21.
Find m∠ABC.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 147
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 21

Question 22.
Find m∠LMN.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 148
Answer:
By using the Angle Addition postulate,
∠LMN = ∠LMP + ∠PMN
∠LMN = 85° + 23°
∠LMN = 108°

Question 23.
m∠RST = 114°. Find m∠RSV.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 149
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 23

Question 24.
∠GHK is a straight angle. Find m∠LHK.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 150
Answer:
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠GHK = ∠GHL + ∠LHK
It is given that ∠GHK is a straight line
So,
∠GHK = 180°
So,
180° = 79° + ∠LHK
∠LHK = 180° – 79°
∠LHK = 101°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠LHK = 101°

In Exercises 25 – 30. find the indicated angle measures.

Question 25.
m∠ABC = 95°. Find m∠ABD and m∠DBC.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 151
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 25

Question 26.
m∠XYZ = 117°. Find m∠XYW and m∠WYZ
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 152
Answer:
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠XYZ = ∠XYW + ∠WYZ
It is given that ∠XYZ = 117°
So,
117° = (6x + 44)° + (-10x + 65)°
117° = (-4x + 109)°
-4x = 117 – 109
-4x = 8
x = \(\frac{-8}{4}\)
x = -2
Hence,
∠XYW = (6x + 44)°
= 6 (-2) + 44
= 44 – 12
= 32°
∠WYZ = (-10x + 65)°
= -10 (-2) + 65
= 20 + 65
= 85°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠XYW = 32° and ∠WYZ = 85°

Question 27.
∠LMN is a straight angle. Find m∠LMP and m∠NMP
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 153
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 27

Question 28.
∠ABC is a straight angle. Find m∠ABX and m∠CBX.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 154
Answer:
From the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠ABC = ∠ABX + ∠CBX
It is given that ∠ABC is a straight angle
So,
∠ABC = 180°
So,
180° = (14x + 70)° + (20x + 8)°
180° = 34x + 78
180 – 78 = 34x
34x = 102°
x = \(\frac{102}{34}\)
x = 3°
So,
∠ABX = (14x + 70)°
= 14 (3) + 70
= 42 + 70
= 112°
∠CBX = (20x + 8)°
= 20 (3) + 8
= 60 + 8
= 68°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ABX =  112° and ∠CBX = 68°

Question 29.
Find m∠RSQ and M∠TSQ.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 155
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 29

Question 30.
Find m∠DEH and m∠FEH.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 156
Answer:
From the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠DEF = ∠DEH + ∠FEH
From the figure,
We can observe that ∠DEF is a right angle
So,
∠DEF = 90°
So,
90° = 13x° + (10x + 21)°
90° = 23x + 21
90 – 21 = 23x
23x = 69°
x = \(\frac{69}{23}\)
x = 3°
So,
∠DEH = 13x°
= 13 (3)
= 39°
∠FEH = (10x + 21)°
= 10 (3) + 21
= 30 + 21
= 51°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠DEH =  39° and ∠FEH = 51°

CONSTRUCTION
In Exercises 31 and 32. copy the angle. Then construct the angle bisector with a compass and straightedge.
Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 157
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 31

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 158
Answer:
The steps for the construction of the angle bisector and copying of the angle is:
Step 1:
Label the vertex of the angle as A. Place the compass at A.
Step 2:
Draw an arc that intersects both sides of the angle. Label the intersections B and C.
Step 3:
Place the compass at C and draw an arc, then place the compass point at B. Using the same radius, draw another arc. Label the intersection D.
Step 4:
Use a straightedge to draw a ray through A and D.
Step 5:
\(\overline{A D}\) bisects ∠A

In Exercises 33 – 36, \(\vec{Q}\)S bisects ∠PQR. Use the diagram and the given angle measure to find the indicated angle measures.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 159

Question 33.
m∠PQS = 63°. Find m∠RQS and m∠PQR.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 33

Question 34.
m∠RQS = 71°. Find m∠PQS and m∠PQR.
Answer:
We know that,
An “Angle Bisector” makes the two angles congruent i.e., equal
So,
From the above figure,
We can say that,
∠PQS = ∠RQS
Now,
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠PQR = ∠PQS + ∠RQS
It is given that,
∠RQS = 71°
So,
∠PQS = 71°
So,
∠PQR = 71 + 71 = 142°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠PQS = 71° and ∠PQR = 142°

Question 35.
m∠PQR = 124°. Find m∠PQS and m∠RQS.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 35

Question 36.
m∠PQR = 119°. Find m∠PQS and m∠RQS.
Answer:
We know that,
An “Angle Bisector” makes the two angles congruent i.e., equal
So,
From the above figure,
We can say that,
∠PQS = ∠RQS
Now,
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠PQR = ∠PQS + ∠RQS
It is given that,
∠PQR = 119°
So,
119° = 2 (∠PQS)
∠PQS = 59.5°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠PQS = 59.5° and ∠RQS = 59.5°

In Exercises 37 – 40, \(\overrightarrow{B D}\) bisects ∠ABC. Find m∠ABD, m∠CBD, and m∠ABC.

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 160
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 37

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 161
Answer:
It is given that \(\overrightarrow{B D}\) bisects ∠ABC
So,
By using the bisector property,
∠ABD = ∠DBC
So,
(3x + 6)° = (7x – 18)°
3x – 7x = -18 – 6
-4x = -24
4x = 24
x = \(\frac{24}{4}\)
x = 6°
So,
∠ABD = (3x + 6)°
= 3 (6) + 6
= 18 + 6
= 24°
∠DBC = (7x – 18)°
= 7 (6) – 18
= 42 – 18
= 24°
∠ABC = ∠ABD + ∠DBC
= 24 + 24 = 48°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ABC = 48°, ∠ABD = 24°, and ∠CBD = 24°

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 162
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 39

Question 4o.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 163
Answer:
It is given that \(\overrightarrow{B D}\) bisects ∠ABC
So,
By using the bisector property,
∠ABD = ∠DBC
So,
(8x + 35)° = (11x + 23)°
8x – 11x = 23  35
-3x = -12
3x = 12
x = \(\frac{12}{3}\)
x = 4°
So,
∠ABD = (8x + 35)°
= 8 (4) + 35
= 32 + 35
= 67°
∠DBC = (11x + 23)°
= 11 (4) + 23
= 44 + 23
= 67°
∠ABC = ∠ABD + ∠DBC
= 67 + 67 = 134°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ABC = 134°, ∠ABD = 67°, and ∠CBD = 67°

Question 41.
WRITING
Explain how to find m∠ABD when you are given m∠ABC and m∠CBD.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 164
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 41

Question 42.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
The map shows the intersections of three roads. Malcolm Way intersects Sydney Street at an angle of 162°. Park Road intersects Sydney Street at an anÌe of 87°. Find the angle at which Malcom Way intersects Park Road.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 165
Answer:
It is given that Malcolm Way intersects Sydney Street at an angle of 162°. Park Road intersects Sydney Street at an anÌe of 87°.
From the figure,
We can observe that
The angle between Malcolm Way and Sydney street = The angle between Sydney street and Park Road + The angle between Malcolm way and Park road
So,
162° = 87° + The angle between Malcolm way and Park Road
The angle between Malcolm Way and Park Road = 162 – 87
The angle between Malcolm Way and Park Road = 75°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle at which Malcolm Way intersects Park Road is: 75°

Question 43.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
In the sculpture shown in the photograph. the measure of ∠LMN is 76° and the measure of ∠PMN is 36°. What is the measure of ∠LMP?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 166
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 43

USING STRUCTURE
In Exercise 44 – 46. use the diagram of the roof truss.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 167

Question 44.
In the roof truss, \(\vec{B}\)G bisects ∠ABC and ∠DEF. m∠ABC = 112°. and ∠ABC ≅ ∠DEF Find the measure of each angle.
a. m∠DEF
Answer:
It is given that
\(\vec{B}\)G bisects ∠ABC and ∠DEF
It is also given that
∠ABC = ∠DEF
∠ABC = 112°
Hence,
∠DEF = 112°

b. m∠ABG
Answer:
It is given that \(\vec{B}\)G bisects ∠ABC and ∠DEF
So,
For ∠ABC,
By congruence property,
∠ABG = ∠CBG
Hence,
∠ABG = ∠ABC / 2
= 112 / 2
= 56°

c. m∠CBG
Answer:
It is given that \(\vec{B}\)G bisects ∠ABC and ∠DEF
So,
For ∠ABC,
By congruence property,
∠ABG = ∠CBG
Hence,
∠CBG = ∠ABC / 2
= 112 / 2
= 56°

d. m∠DEG
Answer:
It is given that \(\vec{B}\)G bisects ∠ABC and ∠DEF
So,
For ∠DEF,
By congruence property,
∠DEG = ∠EGF
Hence,
∠DEG = ∠DEF / 2
= 112 / 2
= 56°

Question 45.
In the roof truss, ∠DGF is a straight angle, and \(\vec{G}\)B bisects ∠DGF Find m∠DGE and m∠FGE.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 45

Question 46.
Name an example of each of the four types of angles according to their measures in the diagram.
Answer:
There are 4 types of angles. They are:
a. Acute angle:
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
b. Obtuse angle:
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
c. Straight angle:
The angle 180° is called a “Straight angle”
d. Right angle:
The angle 90° is called a “Right angle”

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
47. In ∠ABC. \(\vec{B}\)X is in the interior 0f the angle. m∠ABX is 12 more than 4 times m∠CBX. and in m∠ABC = 92°.
a. Draw a diagram to represent the situation.
b. Write and solve an equation to find m∠ABX and, m∠CBX.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 47

Question 48.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
The angle between the minute hand and the hour hand of a clock is 90° What time is it? Justify your answer.
Answer:
From the clock,
We can observe that the angle between the minute hand and the hour hand of a clock is 90° when the time will be 3:00 and 9:00

Question 49.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Classify the angles that result from bisecting each type of angle.
a. acute angle
b. right angle
c. obtuse angle
d. straight angle
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 49

Question 50.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Classify the angles that result from drawing a ray in the interior of each type of angle. Include all possibilities and explain your reasoning.
a. acute angle
b. right angle
c. obtuse angle
d. straight angle
Answer:
The classification of angles that result from drawing a ray in the interior of each type of angle is:
a. Acute angle:
The angle that is greater than 0° and less than 90° is an “Acute angle”
b. Obtuse angle:
The angle that is greater than 90° and less than 180° is an “Obtuse angle”
c. Straight angle:
The angle 180° is called a “Straight angle”
d. Right angle:
The angle 90° is called a “Right angle”

Question 51.
CRITICAL THINKING
The ray from the origin through (4, 0) forms one side of an angle. Use the numbers below as x- and y-coordinates to create each type of angle in a coordinate plane.
– 2 – 1 0 1 2
a. acute angle
b. right angle
c. obtuse angle
d. straight angle
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 51.1
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 51.2

Question 52.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend claims it is possible for a straight angle to Consist of two obtuse angles. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
No, your friend is not correct
We know that,
A straight angle consists of 2 Right angles or a Right angle and an obtuse angle
So,
The claim of your friend which is a straight angle consists of two obtuse angles is not correct
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is not correct

Question 53.
CRITICAL THINKING
Two acute angles are added together. What type(s) of angle(s) do they form? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 53

Question 54.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Use the diagram
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 168
a. Is it possible for ∠XYZ to be a straight angle? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
From the figure,
∠XYZ is a flat line i.e., there is no angle
So,
∠XYZ = 0° or 180°
We know that,
The line that has an angle of 0° or 180° is called a “Straight line”
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠XYZ is a straight angle

b. What can you change in the diagram so that ∠XYZ is a straight angle?
Answer:
From the given figure,
∠XYZ is already a straight angle
So,
There is no change to make ∠XYZ a straight line

Question 55.
WRITING
Explain the process of bisecting an angle in your own words. Compare it to bisecting a segment.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 55

Question 56.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
\(\vec{S}\)Q bisects ∠RST, \(\vec{S}\)P bisects ∠RSQ. and \(\vec{S}\)V bisects ∠RSP. The measure of ∠VSP is 17°. Find in m∠TSQ. Explain.
Answer:

Question 57.
ABSTRACT REASONING
A bubble level is a tool used
to determine whether a surface is horizontal. like the top of a picture frame. If the bubble is not exactly in the middle when the level is placed on the surface. then the surface is not horizontal. What is the most realistic type of angle Formed by the level and a horizontal line when the bubble is not in the middle? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 169
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 57

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the equation.

Question 58.
x + 67 = 180
Answer:
The given equation is:
x + 67 = 180
So,
x = 180 – 67
x = 113
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 113

Question 59.
x + 58 = 90
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 61

Question 60.
16 + x = 90
Answer:
The given equation is:
16 + x = 90
So,
x = 90 – 16
x = 74
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 74

Question 61.
109 + x = 180
Answer:
The given equation is:
109 + x = 180
So,
x = 180 – 109
x = 71
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 71

Question 62.
(6x + 7) + (13x + 21) = 180
Answer:
The given equation is:
(6x + 7) + (13x + 21) = 180
So,
19x + 28 = 180
19x = 180 – 28
19x = 152
x = \(\frac{152}{9}\)
x = 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 8

Question 63.
(3x + 15) + (4x – 9) = 90
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 63

Question 64.
(11x – 25) + (24x + 10) = 90
Answer:
The given equation is:
(11x – 25) + (24x + 10) = 90
So,
35x – 15 = 90
35x = 90 + 15
35x = 105
x = \(\frac{105}{35}\)
x = 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of x is: 3

Question 65.
(14x – 18) + (5x + 8) = 180
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.5 a 65

1.6 Describing Pairs of Angles

Essential Question

How can you describe angle pair relationships and use these descriptions to find angle measures?
Answer:
Two adjacent angles are a linear pair when their non-common sides are opposite rays. The angles in a linear pair are supplementary angles. common side L1+22=180°. Two angles are vertical angles when their sides form two pairs of opposite rays

Exploration 1

Work with a partner: The five-pointed star has a regular pentagon at its center.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 170

a. What do you notice about the following angle pairs?
x° and y°
Answer:
From the given figure,
x and y share a common line
We know that,
The angles that share a common side are called “Adjacent angles”
Hence,
x° and y° are called “Adjacent angles”

y° and z°
Answer:
From the given figure,
y and z share a common line
We know that,
The angles that share a common side are called “Adjacent angles”
Hence,
y° and z° are called “Adjacent angles”

x° and z°
Answer:
From the given figure,
x and z share a common vertex
We know that,
The angles that share a common vertex are called “Vertical angles”
Hence,
x° and z° are called “Vertical angles”

b. Find the values of the indicated variables. Do not use a protractor to measure the angles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 171
Explain how you obtained each answer.
Answer:
we know that,
Adjacent angles will always be 180° or 90°
Vertical angles are equal
So,
From the figure,
We can observe that
x + 108° = 180°
x° = 180° – 108°
x° = 72°
Now,
From the figure,
We can observe that x and y are the vertical angles
So,
y° = 72°
Now,
From the figure,
We can observe that y and z are the adjacent angles
So,
y° + z° = 180°
z° = 180° – 72°
z° = 108°
Now,
We know that,
The vertically opposite angles are equal
So,
y = v
So,
v° = 72°
Now,
We know that,
The vertically opposite angles are equal
So,
w = v
So,
w° = 72°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle measures are:
x° = 72°, y° = 72°, z° = 108°, v° = 72° and w° = 72°

Exploration 2

Finding Angle Measures

Work with a partner: A square is divided by its diagonals into four triangles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 172

a. What do you notice about the following angle pairs?
a° and b°
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can observe that a° and b° are adjacent angles
So,
We can say that
a° + b° = 90°

c° and d°
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can observe that c° and d° are adjacent angles
So,
We can say that
c° + d° = 90°

c° and e°
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can observe that c and e are the opposite angles
So,
We can say that,
c° = e°

b. Find the values of the indicated variables. Do not use a protractor to measure the angles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 173
Explain how you obtained each answer.
Answer:
The given figure is: Square
So,
We know that,
All the angles in the square are: 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
c° = 90°, d° = 90°, and e° = 90°

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you describe angle pair relationships and use these descriptions to find angle measures?
Answer:
Two adjacent angles are a linear pair when their non-common sides are opposite rays. The angles in a linear pair are supplementary angles. common side L1+22=180°. Two angles are vertical angles when their sides form two pairs of opposite rays

Question 4.
What do you notice about the angle measures of complementary angles, supplementary angles, and vertical angles?
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
To be proficient in math, you need to communicate precisely with others.
Answer:
The “Complementary angles” are the angles that the measure of angles is 90°
The “Supplementary angles” are the angles that the measure of angles is 180°
The opposite angles are the angles that have a common side and opposite to each other

Lesson 1.6 Describing Pairs of Angles

Monitoring Progress

In Exercises 1 and 2. use the figure.

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 174

Question 1.
Name a pair of complementary angles, a pair of supplementary angles, and a pair of adjacent angles.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 90° is called “Complementary angles”
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 180° is called “Supplementary angles”
The angle that is the same in more than 1 angle-pair is called “Adjacent Angle”
So,
From the given figure,
The pair of complementary angles is: ∠FGK and ∠LKG
The pair of supplementary angles is: ∠HGK and ∠GKL
The pair of adjacent angles is: ∠FGK and ∠HGK

Question 2.
Are ∠KGH and ∠LKG adjacent angles? Are ∠FGK and ∠FGH adjacent angles? Explain.
Answer:
We know that,
The angle that is the same in more than 1 angle-pair is called “Adjacent Angle”
But,
In ∠KGH and ∠LKG, the angle is not the same
So,
∠KGH and ∠LKG are not the adjacent angles
In ∠FGK and ∠FGH, the angle is the same
So,
∠FGK and ∠FGH are adjacent angles

Question 3.
∠1 is a complement of ∠2. arid m∠2 = 5°. Find m∠1.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 90° is called “Complementary angles”
It is given that
∠1 is a complement of ∠2
So,
∠1 + ∠2 = 90°
It is also given that
∠2 = 5°
So,
∠1 = 90° – ∠2
∠1 = 90° – 5°
∠1 = 85°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠1 = 85°

Question 4.
∠3 is a supplement of ∠4. and m∠3 = 148°. Find m∠4.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 180° is called “Supplementary angles”
It is given that
∠3 is a supplement of ∠4
So,
∠3 + ∠4 = 180°
It is also given that
∠3 = 148°
So,
∠4 = 180° – ∠3
∠4 = 180° – 148°
∠4 = 32°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠4 = 32°

Question 5.
∠LMN and ∠PQR are complementary angles. Find the measures of the angles when in m∠LMN = (4x – 2)° and m∠PQR = (9x + 1)°.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 90° is called “Complementary angles”
It is given that
∠LMN and ∠PQR are complementary angles
So,
∠LMN + ∠PQR = 90°
It is also given that
∠LMN = (4x – 2)° and ∠PQR = (9x + 1)°
So,
(4x – 2)° + (9x + 1)° = 90°
13x – 1 = 90°
13x = 90 + 1
x = \(\frac{91}{13}\)
x = 7°
So,
∠LMN = (4x – 2)°
= 4 (7) – 2
= 28 – 2
= 26°
∠PQR = (9x + 1)°
= 9 (7) + 1
= 63 + 1
= 64°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠LMN = 26° and ∠PQR = 64°

Question 6.
Do any of the numbered angles in the figure form a linear pair? Which angles are vertical angles? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 175
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can observe that 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are the angles
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
Hence,
The linear pair of angles in the given figure are: ∠1 and ∠2; ∠3 and ∠4; ∠5 and ∠6
The vertical angles from the given figure are: ∠1 and ∠2; ∠2 and ∠5; ∠3 and ∠6

Question 7.
The measure of an angle is twice the measure of its complement. Find the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 175
Answer:
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
So,
∠1 and ∠2 (or) ∠3 and ∠4 (or) ∠5 and ∠6 are the complementary angles
It is given that,
The measure of an angle is twice the measure of its component
Let the angle be x°
So,
x + 2x = 90°
3x = 90°
x = \(\frac{90}{3}\)
x = 30°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠1 = ∠3 = ∠5 = 30°
∠2 = ∠4 = ∠6 = 60°

Question 8.
Two angles form a linear pair. The measure of one angle is 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) times the measure of the other angle. Find the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 175
Answer:
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
So,
∠1 and ∠2 (or) ∠3 and ∠4 (or) ∠5 and ∠6 are the supplementary angles
It is given that,
The measure of one angle is 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) times the measure of the other angle
Let the angle be x°
So,
x + 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)x = 180°
x + \(\frac{3}{2}\)x = 180°
\(\frac{5x}{2}\) = 180°
5x = 180° (2)
5x = 360°
x = \(\frac{360}{5}\)
x = 72°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠1 = ∠3 = ∠5 = 72°
∠2 = ∠4 = ∠6 = 108°

Exercise 1.6 Describing Pairs of Angles

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Explain what is different between adjacent angles and vertical angles.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 1

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DID DOESN’T BELONG?
Which one does hot belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 176
Answer:
The angle that is the same in more than 1 angle-pair and has a common side is called “Adjacent Angle”
So,
From the above figure,
We can observe that only the first figure has an adjacent angle whereas all the three figures don’t have any adjacent angles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the first figure does not belong with the other three

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3-6, use the figure.

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 177

Question 3.
Name a pair of adjacent complementary angles.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 3

Question 4.
Name a pair of adjacent supplementary angles.
Answer:
We know that,
The angles that have the sum of the angle measures 180° are called “Supplementary angles
Hence, from the figure,
A pair of adjacent supplementary angles are: ∠LJN + ∠LJK

Question 5.
Name a pair of nonadjacent complementary angles.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 5

Question 6.
Name a pair of nonadjacent supplementary angles.
Answer:
We know that,
The angles that have the sum of the angle measures 180° are called “Supplementary angles
Hence, from the figure,
A pair of adjacent supplementary angles are: ∠LJN + ∠LJK and ∠NGP + ∠HGF

In Exercises 7 – 10. find the angle measure.

Question 7.
∠1 is a complement of ∠2, and m∠1 = 23°. Find, m∠2.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 7

Question 8.
∠3 is a complement of ∠4. and m∠3 = 46°. Find, m∠4.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 90° is called “Complementary angles”
It is given that
∠3 is a complement of ∠4
So,
∠3 + ∠4 = 90°
It is also given that
∠3 = 46°
So,
∠4 = 90° – ∠3
∠4 = 90° – 46°
∠4 = 44°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠4 = 44°

Question 9.
∠5 is a supplement of ∠6. and m∠5 = 78°. Find m∠6.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 9

Question 10.
∠7 is a supplement of ∠8. and m∠7 = 109°. Find m∠8.
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 180° is called “Supplementary angles”
It is given that
∠7 is a supplement of ∠8
So,
∠7 + ∠8 = 180°
It is also given that
∠7 = 109°
So,
∠8 = 180° – ∠7
∠8 = 180° – 109°
∠8 = 71°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠8 = 71°

In Exercises 11 – 14. find the measure of each angle.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 178
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 179
Answer:
We know that,
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠BAD = ∠CAB + ∠CAD
From the given figure,
We can observe that
∠BAD = 90°
So,
(15x – 2)° + (7x + 4)° = 90°
22x + 2 = 90°
22x = 88°
x = \(\frac{88}{22}\)
x = 4°
So,
∠CAB = (15x – 2)°
= 15 (4) – 2
= 60 – 2
= 58°
∠CAD = (7x + 4)°
= 7 (4) + 4
= 28 + 4
= 32°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠CAB = 58° and ∠CAD = 32°

Question 13.
∠UVW and ∠XYZ arc complementary angles, m∠UVW = (x – 10)°. and m∠XYZ = (4x – 10)°.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 13

Question 14.
∠EFG and ∠LMN are supplementary angles. m∠EFG = (3x + 17)°, and m∠LMN = (\(\frac{1}{2} x\) – 5)°
Answer:
We know that,
The pair of angles that the sum of the angle measures is 180° is called “Supplementary angles”
It is given that
∠EFG and ∠LMN are supplementary angles
So,
∠LMN + ∠EFG = 180°
It is also given that
∠LMN = (\(\frac{1}{2} x\) – 5)° and ∠EFG = (3x + 17)°
So,
(\(\frac{1}{2} x\) – 5)° + (3x + 17)° = 180°
\(\frac{7}{2} x\) + 12 = 180°
\(\frac{7}{2} x\) = 180 – 12
\(\frac{7}{2} x\) = 168°
7x = 168 (2)
7x = 336
x = \(\frac{336}{7}\)
x = 48°
So,
∠LMN = (\(\frac{1}{2} x\) – 5)°
= \(\frac{1}{2} \) × 48 – 5
= 24 – 5
= 19°
∠EFG = (3x + 17)°
= 3 (48) + 17
= 144 + 17
= 161°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠LMN = 19° and ∠EFG = 161°

In Exercises 15 – 18. use the figure.

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 180

Question 15.
Identify the linear pair(s) that include ∠1.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 15

Question 16.
Identify the linear pair(s) that include ∠7.
Answer:
We know that,
The angle that is the same in more than 1 angle-pair is called “Adjacent Angle”
Hence, from the figure,
We can conclude that
The linear pairs that include ∠7 are: ∠6 and ∠7 and ∠7 and ∠8

Question 17.
Are ∠6 and ∠8 vertical angles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 17

Question 18.
Are ∠2 and ∠5 vertical angles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
We know that,
The angles that have the same vertex are called “Vertical angles”
Hence, from the figure,
We can conclude that ∠2 and ∠5 are vertical angles

In Exercises 19 – 22, find the measure of each angle.

Question 19.
Two angles form a linear pair. The measure of one angle is twice the measure of the other angle.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 19

Question 20.
Two angles form a linear pair. The measure of one angle is \(\frac{1}{3}\) the measure of the other angle.
Answer:
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
So,
The given angles are the supplementary angles
It is given that,
The measure of one angle is \(\frac{1}{3}\) times the measure of the other angle
Let the angle be x°
So,
x + \(\frac{1}{3}\)x = 180°
\(\frac{4}{3}\)x = 180°
4x = 180° (3)
4x = 540°
x = \(\frac{540}{4}\)
x = 135°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of one angle is 135° and the measure of the other angle is 270°

Question 21.
The measure of an angle is nine times the measure of its complement.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 21

Question 22.
The measure of an angle is \(\frac{1}{4}\) the measure of its complement.
Answer:
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
So,
The given angles are the complementary angles
It is given that,
The measure of one angle is \(\frac{1}{4}\) times the measure of the other angle
Let the angle be x°
So,
x + \(\frac{1}{4}\)x = 90°
\(\frac{5}{4}\)x = 90°
5x = 90° (4)
5x = 360°
x = \(\frac{360}{5}\)
x = 72°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The measure of one angle is 72° and the measure of the other angle is 144°

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 23 and 24, describe and correct the error in identifying pairs of angles in the figure.

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 181

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 182
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 183
Answer:
We know that,
A linear pair of angles are formed when two lines intersect. Two angles are said to be linear if they are adjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines
Hence, from the figure,
We can conclude that ∠1 and ∠3 do not form a linear pair

In Exercises 25 and 26. the picture shows the Alamillo Bridge in Seville, Spain. In the picture, m∠1 = 58° and m∠2 = 24°.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 184

Question 25.
Find the measure of the supplement of ∠1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 25

Question 26.
Find the measure of the supplement of ∠2.
Answer:
Let the other angle with ∠2 be x°
We know that,
The sum of the angle measures of supplementary angles is: 180°
So,
∠2 + x° = 180°
Fro the above,
It is given that
∠2 = 24°
So,
24° + x° = 180°
x° = 180° – 24°
x° = 156°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the supplement of ∠2 is: 156°

Question 27.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
The arm of a crossing gate moves 42° from a vertical position. How many more degrees does the arm have to move so that it is horizontal?
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 185
A. 42°
B. 138°
C. 48°
D. 90°
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 27

Question 28.
REASONING
The foul lines of a baseball field intersect at home plate to form a right angle. A batter hits a fair ball such that the path of the baseball forms an angle of 27° with the third base foul line. What is the measure of the angle between the first base foul line and the path of the baseball?
Answer:
It is given that the foul lines of a baseball field intersect at home plate to form a right angle. A batter hits a fair ball such that the path of the baseball forms an angle of 27° with the third base foul line.
So,
We can say that
The angle between the path of the baseball and the third base foul line is complementary i.e., 90° with the angle between the path of the baseball and the base of the first foul line
So,
The angle between the first base foul line and the path of the baseball = 90° – (The angle between the path of the baseball and the third base foul line)
=90° – 27°
= 63°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle between the first base foul line and the path of the baseball is: 63°

Question 29.
CONSTRUCTION
Construct a linear pair where one angle measure is 115°.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 29

Question 30.
CONSTRUCTION
Construct a pair of adjacent angles that have angle measures of 45° and 97°.
Answer:
The representation of the pair of adjacent angles that has the angle measures of 45° and 97° is:

Question 31.
PROBLEM-SOLVING
m∠U = 2x°, and m∠V = 4m∠U. Which value of x makes ∠U and ∠V complements of each other?
A. 25
B. 9
C. 36
D. 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 31

MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
In Exercises 32 – 35, write and solve an algebraic equation to find the measure of each angle based on the given description.

Question 32.
The measure of an angle is 6° less than the measure of its complement.
Answer:
It is given that the measure of an angle is 6° less than the measure of its complement
Let the angle be x°
S0,
The complement of the angle is: (90 – x)°
So,
(90 – x)° = x – 6°
90 + 6 = x + x
2x = 96°
x = \(\frac{96}{2}\)
x = 48°
So,
The measures of the two angles are: 48°, 90° – 48° = 42°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measures of the angles are: 48°, 42°

Question 33.
The measure of an angle is 12° more than twice the measure of its complement.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 33

Question 34.
The measure of one angle is 3° more than \(\frac{2}{3}\) the measure of its supplement.
Answer:
It is given that the measure of an angle is 3° more than \(\frac{2}{3}\) the measure of its supplement
Now,
Let the measure of an angle be x°
So,
The measure of the other angle is (180 – x)°
So,
x° = 3° + \(\frac{2}{3}\) (180 – x)°
3x° = 9° + 360° – 2x°
5x° = 369°
x = \(\frac{369}{5}\)
x° = 73.4°
So,
The measures of the angles are: 73.4° and 180° – 73.4° = 106.6°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measures of the angles are: 73.4v and 106.6°

Question 35.
Two angles form a linear pair. The measure of one angle is 15° less than \(\frac{2}{3}\) the measure of the other angle.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 35

CRITICAL THINKING
In Exercises 36 – 41. tell whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.

Question 36.
Complementary angles are adjacent.
Answer:
The given statement is “Complementary angles are adjacent”
We know that,
The complementary angles sometimes will be vertical angles or sometimes adjacent angles or sometimes non-adjacent angles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the given statement is sometimes true

Question 37.
Angles in a linear pair are supplements of each other.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 37

Question 38.
Vertical angles are adjacent.
Answer:
The given statement is “Vertical angles are adjacent”
We know that,
The vertical angles are the angles formed by the intersection of two lines whereas adjacent angles share a common side and a common vertex
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that vertical angles are never adjacent

Question 39.
Vertical angles are supplements of each other.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 39

Question 40.
If an angle is acute. then its complement is greater than its supplement.
Answer:
The given statement is “If an angle is acute, then its complement is greater than its supplement”
we know that,
The sum of complementary angles is 90° i.e., the measures of the angles are always acute
The sum of the supplementary angles is 180° i.e., the measure of 1 angle is acute and the measure of the other angle is obtuse
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that if an angle is acute, then its complement will never be greater than its supplement

Question 41.
If two complementary angles are congruent, then the measure of each angle is 45°,
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 41

Question 42.
WRITING
Explain why the supplement of an acute angle must be obtuse.
Answer:
We know that,
The sum of the measures of the supplementary angles is: 180°
So,
If one angle is acute i.e., the angle less than 90°, then the other angle must be obtuse to make the sum 180°
Hence,
The supplement of an acute angle must be obtuse

Question 43.
WRITING
Explain why an obtuse angle does not have a complement.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 43

Question 44.
THOUGHT-PROVOKING
Sketch an intersection of roads. Identify any supplementary, complementary, or vertical angles.
Answer:
The representation of the intersection of roads is:

We know that,
The angles that have the sum of the angle measures 90° are “Complementary angles”
The angles that have the sum of the angle measures 180° are “Supplementary angles”
The angles that form with the intersection of 2 lines are “Vertical angles”
So,
From the figure,
The supplementary angles are:
∠1 and ∠2; ∠2 and ∠3; ∠3 and ∠4; ∠4 and ∠1
There are no complementary angles
The vertical angles are:
∠1 and ∠3; ∠2 and ∠4

Question 45.
ATTENDING TO PRECISION
Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 186

a. Find m∠UWV, m∠TWU, and m∠TWX.
b. YOU write the measures of ∠TWU, ∠TWX, ∠UWV and ∠VWX on separate pieces of paper and place the pieces of paper in a box. Then you pick two pieces of paper out of the box at random. What is the probability that the angle measures you choose are supplementary? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 45

Question 46.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Tell whether you can conclude that each statement is true based on the figure. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 187
a. \(\overline{C A}\) ≅ \(\overline{A F}\)
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that \(\overline{C A}\) has the same length as \(\overline{A F}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
\(\overline{C A}\) ≅ \(\overline{A F}\)

b. Points C, A, and F are collinear
Answer:
We know that,
The points that are present on the same line are called “Collinear points”
From the figure,
We can observe that C, A, and F lie on the same line
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that C, A, and F are collinear points

c. ∠CAD ≅ ∠EAF.
Answer:
From the figure,
We can observe that point A is the angle bisector of C and D
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠CAD ≅ ∠EAF

d. \(\overline{B A}\) ≅ \(\overline{A E}\)
Answer:
We know that,
C is the Bisector”
A “Bisector” divides anything into 2 congruent parts
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
\(\overline{B A}\) ≅ \(\overline{A E}\)

e. Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 188
Answer:
From the figure,
We can observe that there are 3 lines intersect at point A
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
\(\overline{C F}\), \(\overline{B E}\), and \(\overline{A D}\) intersect at point A

f. ∠BAC and ∠CAD are complementary angles.
Answer:
From the figure,
We can observe that ∠A has a complementary angle
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that ∠BAC and ∠CAD are complementary angles

g. ∠DAE is a right angle.
Answer:
From the figure,
We can observe that,
D is perpendicular to E and A has a complementary angle
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that ∠DAE is a right angle

Question 47.
REASONING
∠KJL and ∠LJM arc complements, and ∠MJN and ∠LJM are complements. Can you show that ∠KJL ≅ ∠MJN? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 189
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 47

Question 48.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Light from a flashlight strikes a mirror and is reflected so that the angle of reflection is congruent to the angle of incidence. Your classmate claims that ∠QPR is congruent to ∠TPU regardless of the measure of ∠RPS. Is your classmate correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 190
Answer:
Yes, your classmate is correct

Explanation:
It is given that the light from a flashlight strikes a mirror and is reflected so that the angle of reflection is congruent to the angle of incidence. Your classmate claims that ∠QPR is congruent to ∠TPU regardless of the measure of ∠RPS.
We know that,
The vertical angle is the intersection of two lines and \(\overline{S P}\) is the angle bisector
So,
∠QPR is congruent to ∠TPU regardless of the measure of ∠RPS.
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is correct

Question 49.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometr Chapter 1 Basics of Geometryy 191
a. Write expressions for the measures of ∠BAE, ∠DAE, and ∠CAB.
b. What do you notice about the measures of vertical angles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 49

Question 50.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
Let m∠1 = x°, m∠2 = y1°, and m∠3 = y2° ∠2 is the complement of ∠1, and ∠3 is the supplement of ∠1.

a. Write equations for y1 as a function of x and for y2 as a function of x. What is the domain of each function? Explain.
Answer:
It is given that
m∠1 = x°, m∠2 = y1°, and m∠3 = y2°
∠2 is the complement of ∠1, and ∠3 is the supplement of ∠1
So,
∠1 + ∠2 = 90° and ∠3 + ∠1 = 180°
x° + y1° = 90° and y2° + x° = 180°
So,
y1° = 90° – x° and y2° = 180° – x°
Hence, from the above,
The domain of y1 can be given as: 0° ≤ x ≤ 90°
The domain of y2 can be given as: 0° ≤ x ≤ 180°

b. Graph each function and describe its range.
Answer:
From part (a),
The 2 functions are:
y1° = 90° – x° and y2° = 180° – x°
Hence,
The representations of the 2 functions in the coordinate plane are:

Hence, from the above graph,
The range of y1 is: 90 ≤ y ≤ 200
The range of y2 is: 0 ≤ y ≤ 200

Question 51.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
The sum of the measures of two complementary angles is 74° greater than the difference of their measures. Find the measure of each angle. Explain how you found the angle measures.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 51
Maintaining MathematicaI Proficiency

Determine whether the statement is always, sometimes, or never true. Explain your reasoning.

Question 52.
An integer is a whole number.
Answer:
The given statement is “An integer is a whole number”
We know that,
All whole numbers must be integers but all integers are not whole numbers
Example:
–6 is an integer but not a whole number
3 is a whole number and also an integer
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that an integer is sometimes a whole number

Question 53.
An integer is an irrational number.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 53

Question 54.
An irrational number is a real number.
Answer:
The given statement is “An irrational number is a real number”
We know that,
“Real numbers” are the numbers that can be written in the form of \(\frac{p}{q}\) whereas “Irrational numbers” can’t be written in the form of \(\frac{p}{q}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that an irrational number is never a real number

Question 55.
A whole number is negative.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 55

Question 56.
A rational number is an integer.
Answer:
The given statement is “A rational number is an integer”
We know that,
Rational numbers are the numbers that can be written in the form of \(\frac{p}{q}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that a rational number is sometimes an integer

Question 57.
A natural number is an integer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 57

Question 58.
A whole number is a rational number.
Answer:
The given statement is “A whole number is a rational number”
We know that,
A whole number can be written in the form of \(\frac{p}{q}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that a whole number is always a rational number

Question 59.
An irrational number is negative.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 1.6 a 59

1.4 – 1.6 Performance Task: Comfortable Horse Stalls

Mathematical Practices

Question 1.
How could you explain your answers to Exercise 33 on page 36 to a friend who is unable to hear’?
Answer:
In Exercise 33 on page 36,
The given vertices of the triangle are in the form of the standard linear equation
So,
Compare the given vertices with the standard linear equation and find the slopes and x and y-intercepts for the coordinates of the vertices of the triangle

Question 2.
What tool(s) could you use to verify your answers to Exercises 25 – 30 on page 44?
Answer:
To verify the answers to Exercise 25 – 30 on page 44,
We can use “Angle Addition Postulate”

Question 3.
Your friend says that the angles in Exercise 28 on page 53 are supplementary angles. Explain why you agree or disagree.
Answer:
In Exercise 28 on page 53,
It is given that a right-angled triangle is formed
We know that,
The sum of the complementary angles is: 90°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that you disagree with your friend about supplementary angle

Basics of Geometry Chapter Review

1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes

Use the diagram.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 192

Question 1.
Give another name for plane M.
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can conclude that
Another name for plane M is: Plane XNZ or plane g

Question 2.
Name a line in the plane.
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can conclude that
The names of lines in the pane are: Line PY or Line XZ

Question 3.
Name a line intersecting the plane.
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can conclude that
The line intersecting the plane is: Line PY

Question 4.
Name two rays.
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can conclude that
The two rays are: Ray g and Ray h

Question 5.
Name a pair of opposite rays.
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can conclude that
The opposite rays are: Rays g and h

Question 6.
Name a point, not in plane M.
Answer:
From the above figure,
We can conclude that
The point that is not in plane M is: point p

1.2 Measuring and Constructing Segments

Find XZ.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 193
Answer:
From the given figure,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
XZ = XY + YZ
XZ = 17 + 24
XZ = 41
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of XZ is: 41

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 194
Answer:
From the given figure,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
AZ = AX + XZ
38 = 27 + XZ
XZ = 38 – 27
XZ = 11
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the value of XZ is: 11

Question 9.
Plot A(8, – 4), B(3, – 4), C(7, 1), and D(7, – 3) in a coordinate plane.
Then determine whether \(\overline{A B}\) and \(\overline{C D}\) are congruent.
Answer:
The given points are:
A (8, -4), B (3, -4), C (7, 1), and D (7, -3)
Compare the given points with
A (x1, y1), B (x2, y2), C (x3, y3), and D (x4, y4)
Now,
\(\overline{A B}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(8 – 3)² + (4 – 4)²}\)
= 5
\(\overline{C D}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(7 – 7)² + (1 + 3)²}\)
= 4
Hence,
The representation of the given points in the coordinate plane is:

\(\overline{A B}\) is not congruent to \(\overline{C D}\)

1.3 Using Midpoint and Distance Formulas

Find the coordinates of the midpoint M. Then find the distance between points S and T.

Question 10.
S(- 2, 4) and T(3, 9)
Answer:
The given points are:
S (-2, 4) and T (3, 9)
We know that,
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{3 – 2}{2}\), \(\frac{9 + 4}{2}\))
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{13}{2}\) )
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the Midpoint are: (\(\frac{1}{2}\), \(\frac{13}{2}\))

Question 11.
S(6, – 3) and T(7, – 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
S (6, -3) and T (7, -2)
We know that,
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{7 + 6}{2}\), \(\frac{-2 – 3}{2}\))
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{13}{2}\), \(\frac{-5}{2}\))
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the Midpoint are: (\(\frac{13}{2}\), \(\frac{-5}{2}\))

Question 12.
The midpoint of \(\overline{J K}\) is M(6, 3). One endpoint is J(14, 9). Find the coordinates of endpoint K.
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{J K}\) are:
M (6, 3) and J (14, 9)
Let H be (x. y)
We know that,
The coordinates of the Midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(6, 3) = (\(\frac{x + 14}{2}\), \(\frac{y + 9}{2}\))
\(\frac{x + 14}{2}\) = 6        \(\frac{y + 9}{2}\) = 3
x + 14 = 6 (2)                                       y + 9 = 3 (2)
x = 12 – 14                                           y = 6 – 9
x = -2                                                    y = -3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of H are: (-2, -3)

Question 13.
Point M is the midpoint of \(\overline{A B}\) here AM = 3x + 8 and MB = 6x – 4. Find AB.
Answer:
It is given that Point M is the midpoint of \(\overline{A B}\) here AM = 3x + 8 and MB = 6x – 4.
Now,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
AB = AM + MB
AB = (3x + 8) + (6x – 4)
AB = 9x – 4

1.4 Perimeter and Area in the Coordinate Plane

Find the perimeter and area of the polygon with the given vertices.

Question 14.
W(5, – 1), X(5, 6), Y(2, 1) Z(2, 6)
Answer:
The given points are:
W (5, -1), X (5, 6), Y (2, 1), Z (2, 6)
Now,
\(\overline{W X}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 5)² + (1 + 6)²}\)
= 7
\(\overline{X Y}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (6 – 1)²}\)
= 5.8
\(\overline{Y Z}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (6 – 1)²}\)
= 5
\(\overline{Z W}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (6 + 1)²}\)
= 7.6
\(\overline{W Y}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (1 + 1)²}\)
= 3.6
\(\overline{X Z}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 – 2)² + (6 – 6)²}\)
= 3
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = WX + XY + YZ + ZW
= 7 + 5.8 + 5 + 7.6
= 25.4
Since all the lengths of the sides are different,
The area of the given polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (d1) (d2)
Where,
d1 and d2 are the diagonals
So,
The area of the polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (WY) (XZ)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (3) (3.6)
= 5.4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the given polygon is: 25.4
The area of the given polygon is: 5.4

Question 15.
E(6, – 2) , F(6, 5), G(- 1, 5)
Answer:
The given points are:
E (6, -2), F (6, 5), G (-1, 5)
Now,
\(\overline{E F}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(6 – 6)² + (2 + 5)²}\)
= 7
\(\overline{F G}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(6 + 1)² + (5 – 5)²}\)
= 7
\(\overline{G E}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(6 + 1)² + (5 + 2)²}\)
= 9.8
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = EF + FG + GE
= 7 + 7 + 9.8
= 23.8
Now,
The area of the given polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Base) (Height)
So,
The area of the polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (EF) (FG)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (7) (7)
= 24.5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the given polygon is: 23.8
The area of the given polygon is: 24.5

1.5 Measuring and Constructing Angles

Find m∠ABD and m∠CBD.

Question 16.
m∠ABC = 77°
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 195
Answer:
From the above figure,
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠ABC = ∠ABD + ∠DBC
It is given that
∠ABC = 77°
So,
77° = (3x + 22)° + (5x – 17)°
8x + 5 = 77°
8x = 77° – 5°
8x = 72°
x = \(\frac{72}{8}\)
x = 9°
So,
∠ABD = (3x + 22)°
= 3 (9) + 22
= 27 + 22
= 49°
∠CBD = (5x – 17)°
= 5 (9) – 17
= 45 – 17
= 28°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ABD = 49° and ∠CBD = 28°

Question 17.
m∠ABC = 111°
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 196
Answer:
From the above figure,
By using the Angle Addition Postulate,
∠ABC = ∠ABD + ∠DBC
It is given that
∠ABC = 111°
So,
111° = (-10x + 58)° + (6x + 41)°
-4x + 99 = 111°
-4x = 111° – 99°
-4x = 12°
x = \(\frac{-12}{4}\)
x = -3°
So,
∠ABD = (-10x + 58)°
= -10 (-3) + 58
= 30 + 58
= 88°
∠CBD = (6x + 41)°
= 6 (-3) + 41
= 41 – 18
= 23°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠ABD = 88° and ∠CBD = 23°

Question 18.
Find the measure of the angle using a protractor.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 197
Answer:
The measure of the angle of the given figure using a protractor is:

Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the angle is: 127.3°

1.6 Describing Pairs of Angles

∠1 and ∠2 are complementary angles. Given m∠1, find m∠2.

Question 19.
m∠1 = 12°
Answer:
It is given that ∠1 and ∠2 are the complementary angles
∠1 = 12°
So,
∠1 + ∠2 = 90°
So,
∠2 = 90° – 12°
∠2 = 78°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠2 = 78°

Question 20.
m∠1 = 83°
Answer:
It is given that ∠1 and ∠2 are the complementary angles
∠1 = 83°
So,
∠1 + ∠2 = 90°
So,
∠2 = 90° – 83°
∠2 = 7°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠2 = 7°

∠3 and ∠4 are supplementary angles. Given m∠3, find m∠4.

Question 21.
m∠3 = 116°
Answer:
It is given that ∠3 and ∠4 are the supplementary angles
∠3 = 116°
So,
∠3 + ∠4 = 180°
So,
∠4 = 180° – 116°
∠4 = 64°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠4 = 64°

Question 22.
m∠3 = 56°
Answer:
It is given that ∠3 and ∠4 are the supplementary angles
∠3 = 56°
So,
∠3 + ∠4 = 180°
So,
∠4 = 180° – 56°
∠4 = 124°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
∠4 = 124°

Basics of Geometry Chapter Test

Find the length of \(\overline{Q S}\). Explain how you found your answer.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 198
Answer:
From the given figure,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{Q S}\) = \(\overline{Q R}\) + \(\overline{R S}\)
= 12 + 19
= 31
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{Q S}\) is: 31

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 199
Answer:
From the given figure,
By using the Segment Addition Postulate,
\(\overline{Q R}\) = \(\overline{Q S}\) + \(\overline{S R}\)
59 = \(\overline{Q S}\) + 47
\(\overline{Q S}\) = 59 – 47
\(\overline{Q S}\) = 12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of \(\overline{Q S}\) is: 12

Find the coordinates of tile midpoint M. Then find the distance between the two points.

Question 3.
A(- 4, – 8) and B(- 1, 4)
Answer:
The given points are:
A (-4, -8), and B (-1, 4)
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-1 – 4}{2}\), \(\frac{-8 + 4}{2}\))
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-5}{2}\), \(\frac{-4}{2}\))
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-5}{2}\), \(\frac{-2}\))
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint are: (\(\frac{-5}{2}\), -2)

Question 4.
C(- 1, 7) and D(- 8, – 3)
Answer:
The given points are:
C (-1, 7), and D (-8, -3)
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-1 – 8}{2}\), \(\frac{-3 + 7}{2}\))
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-9}{2}\), \(\frac{4}{2}\))
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{-9}{2}\), 2)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the midpoint are: (\(\frac{-9}{2}\), 2)

Question 5.
The midpoint of \(\overline{E F}\) is M(1, – 1). One endpoint is E(- 3, 2). Find the coordinates of
endpoint F.
Answer:
The given points of \(\overline{E F}\) are:
M (1, -1), and E (-3, 2)
Let the other endpoint be F (x, y)
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
So,
(1, -1) = (\(\frac{x – 3}{2}\), \(\frac{y + 2}{2}\))
\(\frac{x – 3}{2}\) = 1                   \(\frac{y + 2}{2}\) = -1
x – 3 = 2                                           y + 2 = -2
x = 5                                                y = -4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the coordinates of the other endpoint are: (5, -4)

Use the diagram to decide whether the statement is true or false.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 200

Question 6.
Points A, R, and B are collinear.
Answer:
We know that,
The points that lie in the same line are called “Collinear points”
From the figure,
We can observe that A, R, and B are in the same plane but not in the same line
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that A, R, and B are not collinear

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions 201
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe there are two lines in the plane
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that BW and AT are lines

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions 202
Answer:
From the given figure,
We can observe that BR and RT are perpendicular lines
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that BR and RT are opposite rays

Question 9.
Plane D could also be named plane ART.
Answer:
We know that,
The points that are coplanar in the given plane can also be named for the name of the plane
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that plane D can also be named plane ART

Find the perimeter and area of the polygon with the given vertices. Explain how you found your answer.

Question 10.
P(- 3, 4), Q(1, 4), R(- 3, – 2), S(3, – 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
P(- 3, 4), Q(1, 4), R(- 3, – 2), S(3, – 2)
Now,
\(\overline{P Q}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (4 – 4)²}\)
= 4
\(\overline{Q R}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 3)² + (4 + 2)²}\)
= 7.2
\(\overline{R S}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 – 2)² + (3 + 3)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{S P}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (4 + 2)²}\)
= 7.2
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = PQ + QR + RS + SP
= 4 + 6 + 7.2 + 7.2
= 24.4
The area of the given polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (a + b) (h)
Where,
a and b are the sides that are not equal
So,
The area of the polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4 + 6) (7.2)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (10) (7.2)
= 36
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the given polygon is: 24.4
The area of the given polygon is: 36

Question 11.
J(- 1, 3), K(5, 3), L(2, – 2)
Answer:
The given points are:
J(- 1, 3), K(5, 3), L(2, – 2)
Now,
\(\overline{J K}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 – 3)² + (1 + 5)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{K L}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 2)² + (5 – 2)²}\)
= 5.8
\(\overline{L J}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(2 + 1)² + (3 + 2)²}\)
= 5.8
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = JK + KL + LJ
= 6 + 5.8 + 5.8
= 17.8
Now,
The area of the given polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Base) (Height)
So,
The area of the polygon = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (JK) (KL)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) (6) (5.8)
= 17.4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the given polygon is: 17.8
The area of the given polygon is: 17.4

Question 12.
In the diagram. ∠AFE is a straight angle and ∠CFE is a right angle. Identify all supplementary and complementary angles. Explain. Then find, m∠DFE, m∠BFC, and m∠BFE.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 203
Answer:

Question 13.
Use the clock at the left.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 204
a. What is the measure of the acute angle created when the clock is at 10:00?
Answer:
We know that,
12 sectors = 360°
From the above clock,
We can observe that there are 2 sectors at 10:00
So,
The angle created when the clock is at 10:00 = 2 (30)
= 60°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the measure of the acute angle created when the clock is at 10:00 is: 60°

b. What is the measure of the obtuse angle created when the clock is at 5:00?
Answer:
From the figure,
We can observe that there are 4 sectors between 12 and  at 5:00
So,
The acute angle created when the clock is at 5:00 = 4 (30)
= 120°
So,
The obtuse angle created when the clock is at 5:00 = 360 – 120
= 240°
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the obtuse angle created when the clock is at 5:00 is: 240°

c. Find a time where the hour and minute hands create a straight angle.
Answer:
we know that,
A straight angle is an angle that is 180°
Now,
From the figure,
We can observe that the hour and minute hands create a straight angle is: 6:00, 2:45
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the time where the hour and minute hands create a straight angle is: 6:00 and 2:45

Question 14.
Sketch a figure that contains a plane and two lines that intersect the plane at one point.
Answer:
The representation of a plane and two planes intersection at a point is:

Question 15.
Your parents decide they would like to install a rectangular swimming pool in the backyard. There is a 15-foot by the 20-foot rectangular area available. Your parents request a 3-foot edge around each side of the pool. Draw a diagram of this situation in a coordinate plane. What is the perimeter and area of the largest swimming pool that will fit?
Answer:
It is given that your parents decide they would like to install a rectangular swimming pool in the backyard. There is a 15-foot by the 20-foot rectangular area available. Your parents request a 3-foot edge around each side of the pool.
Since the 3 ft edge is on both sides of the pool, each dimension of the pool is 6 ft shorter than the corresponding dimension of the space.
So,
The pool will be
15 ft -6 ft = 9 ft in one direction and 20 ft -6 ft = 14 ft in the other direction.
We know that,
The perimeter of the pool is the sum of its side lengths:
So,
P = 9 ft + 14 ft + 9 ft + 14 ft = 2(9 ft +14 ft)
= 2(23 ft)
= 46 ft
Now,
The area of the pool = 14 (9)
= 126 ft²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the pool is: 46 ft
The area of the pool is 126 ft²
The representation of the pool in the coordinate plane is:

Question 16.
The picture shows the arrangement of balls in a game of boccie. The object of the game is to throw your ball closest to the small. while ball, which is called the Pallino. The green ball is the midpoint between the red ball and the Pallino. The distance between the green hail and the red ball is 10 inches. The distance between the yellow ball and the Pallino is 8 inches. Which bail is closer to the Pallino. the green ball or the yellow ball? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 205
Answer:
It is given that the picture shows the arrangement of balls in a game of boccie. The object of the game is to throw your ball closest to the small. while ball, which is called the Pallino. The green ball is the midpoint between the red ball and the Pallino. The distance between the green hail and the red ball is 10 inches. The distance between the yellow ball and the Pallino is 8 inches.
Now,
When we compare the distances between the Pallino and the green ball and between the yellow ball and the Pallino,
We can observe that the distance between the yellow ball and Pallino is less
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the yellow ball is closer to the Pallino

Basics of Geometry Cumulative Assessment

Question 1.
Use the diagram to determine which segments, if any, are congruent. List all congruent segments.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 206
Answer:
We know that,
The “Congruency” means having the same size and the same length
But, from the above coordinate plane,
We can observe that there are no congruent lines
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are no congruent line segments in the coordinate plane

Question 2.
Order the terms so that each consecutive term builds off the previous term.
plane           segment      line     point    ray
Answer:
The given terms are:
a. Plane b. Segment c. Line d. Point e. Ray
Hence,
The order of the given terms are:
Point, Line, Ray, Segment, and Plane

Question 3.
The endpoints of a line segment are (- 6, 13) and (11, 5). Which choice shows the correct midpoint and distance between these two points?
(A) \(\left(\frac{5}{2}, 4\right)\); 18.8 units
(B) \(\left(\frac{5}{2}, 9\right)\); 18.8 units
(C) \(\left(\frac{5}{2}, 4\right)\); 9.4 units
(D) \(\left(\frac{5}{2}, 9\right)\); 9.4 units
Answer:
The given endpoints of a line segment are: (-6, 13) and (11, 5)
We know that,
The coordinates of the midpoint = (\(\frac{x1 + x2}{2}\), \(\frac{y1 + y2}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{11 – 6}{2}\), \(\frac{13 + 5}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{5}{2}\), \(\frac{18}{2}\))
= (\(\frac{5}{2}\), 9)
We know that,
The distance between the coordinates = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(11 + 6)² + (13 – 5)²}\)
= 18.78 ≈ 18.8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that option (B) shows the correct midpoint and distance

Question 4.
Find the perimeter and area of the figure shown
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 207
Answer:
From the coordinate plane,
The points are:
Q (-4, 3), R (2, 3), S (3, 3), and T (-3, 3)
Now,
\(\overline{Q R}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 – 3)² + (4 + 2)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{R S}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 – 2)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 1
\(\overline{S T}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(3 + 3)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{T Q}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(4 – 3)² + (3 – 3)²}\)
= 1
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = QR + RS + ST + TQ
= 6 + 1 + 6 + 1
= 14
The area of the given polygon = Length × Width
So,
The area of the polygon = 6 (1)
= 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The perimeter of the given polygon is: 14
The area of the given polygon is: 6

Question 5.
Plot the points W(- 1, 1), X(5, 1), Y(5, – 2), and Z(- 1, – 2) in a coordinate plane. What type of polygon do the points form? Your friend claims that you could use this figure to represent a basketball court with an area of 4050 square feet and a perimeter of 270 feet. Do you support your friend’s claim? Explain.
Answer:
The given points are:
W (-1, 1), X (5, 1), Y (5, -2), and Z (-1, -2)
Now,
\(\overline{W X}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (5 + 1)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{X Y}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 + 2)² + (5 – 5)²}\)
= 3
\(\overline{Y Z}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(5 + 1)² + (2 – 2)²}\)
= 6
\(\overline{Z W}\) = \(\sqrt{(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²}\)
= \(\sqrt{(1 – 1)² + (2 + 1)²}\)
= 3
Hence,
The perimeter of the given polygon = WX + XY + YZ + ZW
= 6 + 3 + 6 + 3
= 18
But,
It is given that the actual perimeter is: 270 ft
So,
The scale = 270 / 18 = 15
Now,
The area of the given polygon = Length × Width
So,
The area of the polygon = 6 (3)
= 18
The area of the basketball = 15 (15) (18)
= 4050 ft²
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the claim of your friend is correct
Question 6.
Use the steps in the construction to explain how you know that \(\vec{A}\)G is the angle bisector
of ∠CAB.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 208
Answer:
Step 1:
Draw an angle ∠CAB. Measure the length of AC and draw an arc by using the compass by taking the length more than half of the length of AC
Step 2:
From the arc, by using a compass, draw 2 arcs by taking more than half of the length of the arc on both sides of the arc
Step 3:
Use a straightedge to measure the length from the arcs to angle A and that line is called “Angle Bisector”

Question 7.
The picture shows an aerial view of a city. Use the streets highlighted in red to identify all congruent angles. Assume all streets are straight angles.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 209
Answer:
We know that,
The “Congruent angles” are the angles that have the same angle measure
Hence, from the above figure,
The congruent angles are: ∠E and ∠M; ∠O and ∠R

Question 8.
Three roads come to an intersection point that the People in your town call Five Corners. as shown in the figure.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 1 Basics of Geometry 210
a. Identify all vertical angÌes.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The vertical angles are ∠LJK, ∠MJP, ∠MJN

b. Identify all linear pairs.
Answer:
From the given figure,
The linear pairs are: ∠LJK, ∠MJP, ∠MJN

C. you are traveling east on Buffalo Road and decide to turn left onto Carter Hill.
Name the angle of the turn you made.
∠KJL     ∠KJM     ∠KJN      ∠KJP       ∠LJM
∠LJN     ∠LJP      ∠MJN     ∠MJP     ∠NJP
Answer:
From the above figure,
The angle made by you when you are traveling east n BuffaloRoad and decide to turn left onto Carter hill is: ∠KJL

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pdf is available here. The candidates who are searching for Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Solution Key can easily get it here. Stop your search for accurate and detailed information, you can find each and every detail of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pdf here. You can download the pdf for free of cost in the below sections. Free Solutions are available here as per your convenience and also you can get the chapter-wise material.

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates

There are various topics involved in 6th Grade Ratios and Rates Solution Key. The topics are Ratio tables, Graphing Ratio Relationships, Using Tape Diagrams, Ratios, and so on. All the topics important formulae, solved examples, videos, and free pdfs are given below which helps you for the best practice. You can solve all the problems any number of times and can score the highest marks in the exam. These pdfs or answer keys help you to complete the homework or assignment in the desired time.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Ratios

Lesson: 2 Using Tape Diagrams

Lesson: 3 Using Ratio Tables

Lesson: 4 Graphing Ratio Relationships

Lesson: 5 Rates and Unit Rates

Lesson: 6 Converting Measures

Performance Task

Ratios and Rates STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Human Circulatory System
Watch the STEAM Video “Human Circulatory System.” Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 1
1. Enid says the heart pumps about 5 liters of blood each minute. How can you find the amount of blood the heart pumps for any given number of minutes?

Answer:
Enid says the heart pumps about 5 liters of blood each minute.
5 × 1 = 5 liters
We have multiply the number of minutes with 5

2. Explain how you can estimate the amount of blood your heart pumps in one heart beat.

Answer: Multiply your body surface area by the cardiac index to determine the liters of blood pumped by your heart in one minute.

3. The table shows the amounts of blood contained in several different types of blood vessels. How can you make meaningful comparisons of the amounts?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 2

Answer:
1 liter = 1000 ml
The volume of Aorta and large arteries is 300 ml
300/1000 = 0.3 = 30%
Small arteries = 0.4L
0.4 × 1000 = 400ml = 40%
40% of blood contained in small arteries
Small veins = 2.43qt
2.43 qt = 2.299L
Large Veins = 0.24 gal
0.24 gal = 0.908L

Performance Task

Oops! Unit Conversion Mistakes
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be shown unit conversion mistakes in the following real-life situations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3
In each situation, you will analyze and correct the mistake in the unit conversion. How accurate must conversions be in real-life situations?

Ratios and Rates Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration

Work with a partner. What portion of the rectangle is red? How did you write your answer?
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 4
Answer: 4 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potions
when we count we get Four-twelfths of the portion of the rectangle is red

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 5
Answer: 6 : 18

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 18 potion
when we count we get Six out of eighteen of the portion of the rectangle is red

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 6
Answer: 5 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get Five out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 7
Answer: 4 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get four out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 8
Answer: 6 : 9

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 9 potion
when we count we get six out of nine of the portion of the Square is red

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 9
Answer: 16 : 24

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 24 potion
when we count we get sixteen out of twenty-four of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 10
Answer: 4 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potion
when we count we get four out of twelve of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 11
Answer: 5 : 12

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 12 potion
when we count we get five out of twelve of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 12
Answer: 6 : 6

Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 6 potion
when we count we get six out of six of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Question 10.
Work with a partner. In Exercises 1–9, which of the rectangles have the same portion of red tiles? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: 6 : 6 portion of the rectangles have the same portion of red tiles
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-12
Explanation:
Count the red portion shown in the image out of 6 potions
when we count we get six out of six of the portion of the Rectangle is red

Work with a partner. Use square color tiles to build two different-sized rectangles that represent the description.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 13
Question 11.
Five-sixths of the tiles are blue.
Answer: 5 : 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-11

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 6 of the tiles are blue.

Question 12.
Three-fourths of the tiles are yellow.
Answer: 3 : 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-12

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 3 : 4 of the tiles are yellow

Question 13.
Four-fifths of the tiles are green.
Answer: 4 : 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-13

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 4 : 5 of the tiles are green

Question 14.
Five-sevenths of the tiles are red.
Answer: 5 : 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-14

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 7 of the tiles are red

Question 15.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Work with a partner. The soccer committee has 8 girls and 6 boys. The tennis committee has 9 girls and 8 boys. A friend tells you that the tennis committee has a greater portion of girls than the soccer committee. Is your friend correct? Explain. If not, how many boys could you add to the soccer committee so that your friend is correct?
Answer:
Given,
The soccer committee has 8 girls and 6 boys. The tennis committee has 9 girls and 8 boys.
The ratio of soccer committee is 8:6
The ratio of tennis committee is 9:8
Compare both the ratios
8 < 9
Thus number of girls in tennis committee are more than soccer committee.
Thus we can say that your friend is correct.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
ratio
rate
equivalent rates
equivalent ratios
unit rate

Answer:
Ratio – a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
Rate – a measure, quantity, or frequency, typically one measured against another quantity or measure.
Equivalent rates – Equivalent rates are rates that are equal.
Equivalent ratio – Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
Unit Rate – A unit rate is a rate with 1 in the denominator.

Lesson 3.1 Ratios

A ratio is a comparison of two quantities. Consider two quantities a and b. The ratio a : b indicates that there are a units of the first quantity for every b units of the second quantity.

EXPLORATION 1

Writing Ratios
Work with a partner. A science class has two times as many girls as it has boys.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 1
a. Discuss possible numbers of boys and girls in the science class.

Answer: 24 girls and 12 boys in the science class
b. What comparisons can you make between your class and the science class? Can you determine which class has more girls? more boys? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Number of girls and boys in your class are 42.
Number of girls = 22
Number of boys = 20
Compare the number of girls in your class and science class
22: 24
Thus there are more girls in science class.
20:12
Thus there are more boys in your class.

c. Write three ratios that you observe in your classroom. Describe what each ratio represents.
Answer:
36:42 – This represents number of students in science class and your class
22:24 – This represents number of girls in science class and your class
20:12 – This represents number of boys in science class and your class

EXPLORATION 2

Using Ratios in a Recipe
Work with a partner. The ratio of iced tea to lemonade in a recipe is 3 : 1. You begin by combining 3 cups of iced tea with 1 cup of lemonade.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 2
a. You add 1 cup of iced tea and 1 cup of lemonade to the mixture. Does this change the taste of the mixture?

Answer:
3 + 1: 1 + 1
4:2
No it will not change the taste of the mixture.
b. Describe how you can make larger amounts without changing the taste.
Answer: If the number of portions and the size of each portion change, you will have to find a conversion factor using a similar approach.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 3

Try It

Write the indicated ratio using the coins in Example 1.
Question 1.
dimes to pennies
Answer:  1 : 10

Explanation:
we have to convert the coins from dimes to pennies.
we know that A dime is worth 10 pennies.
so the ratio is 1 : 10

Question 2.
quarters to the total number of coins.
Answer: 25 : 40

The number \(\frac{a}{b}\) associated with the ratio a : b is called the value of the ratio. It describes the multiplicative relationship between the quantities in a ratio.

Question 3.
An elephant sanctuary contains adult and baby elephants. The ratio of adult elephants to baby elephants is 5 : 1. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 4
Answer: five adult elephants and one baby elephant

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 4.
1 : 1 and 6 : 6
Answer:  The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 1 : 1 and 6 : 6 are Equivalent

Question 5.
1 : 2 and 3 : 4
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 1 : 2 and 3 : 4 The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Question 6.
8 : 3 and 6 : 16
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 8 : 3 and 6 : 16 ratios are Not Equivalent.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

WRITING AND INTERPRETING RATIOS Write the ratio. Then find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 5
Question 7.
sharks to dolphins
Answer: 4 : 5

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 4 : 5 of sharks to dolphins by observing the picture given

Question 8.
dolphins : animals
Answer: 5 : 0

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
so 5 : 0 of dolphins: animals by observing the picture given

IDENTIFYING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Determine whether the ratios are equivalent. Explain your reasoning.
Question 9.
2 : 3 and 24 : 36
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 24 : 36 are Equivalent

Question 10.
5 : 7 and 20 : 28
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 5 : 7 and 20 : 28 are Equivalent

Question 11.
3 : 10 and 9 : 25
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
hence the 3 : 10 and 9 : 25 ratios are Not Equivalent.

Question 12.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 6
Answer:
Option B and C has same question but different words.

Question 13.
The ratio of wolves to cougars in a forest is 5 : 3. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 7
Answer: 5 to 3

Explanation: A ratio takes one number and divides it into another number to determine a decimal that can later be converted to a percentage if desired The ratio of wolves to cougars in a forest is 5 : 3 so the interpret the value of the ratio is 5 to 3.

Question 14.
You are kayaking at a pace of 63 feet every 12 seconds. Your friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds. Are you and your friend kayaking at the same pace? If not, who is faster?
Answer: No, Me and my friend kayaking are not at the same pace. my friend is faster.

Explanation:
Given,
You are kayaking at a pace of 63 feet every 12 seconds
Your friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds
So if I am kayaking at apace of 63 feet for every 12 seconds. then dividing 63 feet by 12 seconds we get 5.25 feet per second.
In the same way friend’s pace is 21 feet every 3 seconds. the dividing 21 feet by 3 second we get 7 feet per second.
Hence me and my friend are not at the same pace.
7 feet per second my friend is faster than me

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
The ratio of Jet Ski rentals to boat rentals at a store is 7 : 2. If the number of boat rentals doubles and the number of Jet Ski rentals stays the same, then the number of boat rentals is how many times the number of Jet Ski rentals?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 8
Answer: 0.571 times less than jet Ski rental
Given,
he ratio of Jet Ski rentals to boat rentals at a store is 7 : 2
If the number of boat rentals doubles then we get 2 × 2 = 4 boats
the number of Jet Ski rentals stays the same that is 7
then the number of boat rentals is how many times the number of Jet Ski rental is divide 4 by 7 we get  0.571 times less than jet Ski rental

Ratios Homework & Practice 3.1

Review & Refresh

Divide. Check your answer.
Question 1.
15.4 ÷ 2.2
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given 15.4 ÷ 2.2
so divide 15.4 by 2.2 we get 7

Question 2.
56.07 ÷ 8.9
Answer: 6.9

Explanation:
Given 56.07 ÷ 8.9
so divide 56.07 by 8.9 we get 6.9

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 8.43 ]{ 12.645 } \)
Answer: 0.8164

Explanation:
Given \(\sqrt [ 8.43 ]{ 12.645 } \)
so divide square root of 8.43 by 12.645 we get 0.8164

Question 4.
\(\sqrt [ 11.6 ]{ 51.62 } \)
Answer: 0.474

Explanation:
Given \(\sqrt [ 11.6 ]{ 51.62 } \)
so divide square root of 11.6 by 51.62 we get 0.474

Find the value of the power.
Question 5.
82
Answer: 8 × 8 = 64

Explanation:
given 82
so by multiplying 8 × 8, we get 64

Question 6.
16
Answer: 1

Explanation:
given 1 power of 6
so by multiplying 1 × 1 × 1 ×1 × 1 × 1 we get 1

Question 7.
34
Answer: 81

Explanation:
given 3 power of 4
so by multiplying 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 we get 81

Question 8.
26
Answer: 64

Explanation:
given 2 power of 6
so by multiplying 2 × 2 × 2 ×2 × 2 × 2 we get 64

The Venn diagram shows the prime factors of two numbers. Identify the numbers. Then find the GCF and the LCM of the two numbers.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 9
Answer:
By using the venn diagram we can find the prime factors of the two numbers.
2 × 2 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 5 = 540
2 × 3 × 3 × 5 × 5 = 450
LCM of 540 and 450 are
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 450:
450, 900, 1350, 1800, 2250, 2700, 3150, 3600
Multiples of 540:
540, 1080, 1620, 2160, 2700, 3240, 3780
Therefore,
LCM(450, 540) = 2700
GCF of 540 and 450 are
The factors of 450 are: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 15, 18, 25, 30, 45, 50, 75, 90, 150, 225, 450
The factors of 540 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 27, 30, 36, 45, 54, 60, 90, 108, 135, 180, 270, 540
Then the greatest common factor is 90.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 10
Answer:
By using the venn diagram we can find the prime factors of the two numbers.
2 × 2 × 2 × 3 = 24
2 × 3 × 5 × 7 = 210
LCM of 24 and 210:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 24:
24, 48, 72, 96, 120, 144, 168, 192, 216, 240, 264, 288, 312, 336, 360, 384, 408, 432, 456, 480, 504, 528, 552, 576, 600, 624, 648, 672, 696, 720, 744, 768, 792, 816, 840, 864, 888
Multiples of 210:
210, 420, 630, 840, 1050, 1260
Therefore,
LCM(24, 210) = 840
GCF of 24 and 210:
The factors of 24 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24
The factors of 210 are: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 10, 14, 15, 21, 30, 35, 42, 70, 105, 210
Then the greatest common factor is 6.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING RATIOS You mix the amounts of iced tea and lemonade shown. Describe how you can make larger amounts without changing the taste. (See Exploration 2, p. 107.)
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 11
Answer:
There are 2 iced tea and 1 lemonade.
So, we can make 2:1 iced tea and lemonade without changing the taste.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 12
Answer: 2:3
There are 2 iced tea and 3 lemonade.
So, we can make 2:3 iced tea and lemonade without changing the taste.

WRITING RATIOS Write the ratio.
Question 13.
frogs to turtles
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 13
Answer: 2 : 5

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are two frogs and five turtles in the shown image.
hence frogs to turtles is 2 : 5

Question 14
basketballs to soccer balls
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 14
Answer: 6 : 4

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are six basketballs and four soccer balls in the shown image.
hence basketballs to soccer balls are 6 : 4

Question 15.
calculators : pencils
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 15
Answer: 2 : 6

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are two calculators and six pencils in the shown image.
hence calculators : pencils are 2 : 6

Question 16.
shirts : pants
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 16
Answer: 3 : 6

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
There are three shirts and six pants in the shown image.
hence shirts : pants are 3 : 6

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Twelve of the 28 students in a class own a dog. What is the ratio of students who own a dog to students who do not?
Answer: 12 : 28

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
Given Twelve of the 28 students in a class own a dog we get 12 students who have dogs out of 28 students
so in the students who do not have dogs are 28
hence the ratio of students who own a dog to students who do not is 12 : 28

Question 18.
LOGIC
Name two things that you would like to have in a ratio of 5 : 1 but not in a ratio of 1 : 5. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
5 students in 1 class gives the ratio 5:1
It is not possible to have 1 student in 5 classes.

OPEN-ENDED Describe a real-life relationship that can be represented by the ratio.
Question 19.
1 out of every 7
Answer: 1 : 7

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 1 out of every 7 is 1 : 7

Question 20.
5 to 26
Answer: 5 : 26

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 5 to 26 7 is   5 : 26

Question 21.
2 per 5
Answer: 2 : 5

Explanation: A ratio shows how much of one thing there is compared to another. Ratios are usually written in the form a:b.
hence 2 per 5 is 2 : 5

Question 22.
7 : 1
Answer:  7 out of  1

Explanation: a ratio indicates how many times one number contains another.
Hence 7 : 1 is 7 out of  1

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
During a given month, the ratio of sunny days to rainy days is 4 : 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 17
a. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.

Answer:
Let us consider the month be April
The number of days in April are 30.
4:1
4 × 6 = 24 days
1 × 6 = 6 days
24 + 6 = 30 days
b. In another month, the number of sunny days is 5 times the number of rainy days. Write the ratio of sunny days to rainy days.
Answer: 5:1

Explanation:
Given,
In another month, the number of sunny days is 5 times the number of rainy days.
The ratio of the sunny days to rainy days is 5 : 1

IDENTIFYING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 24.
2 : 3 and 4 : 9

Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 4 : 9 are Not Equivalent

Question 25.
3 : 8 and 9 : 24

Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 3 : 8 and 9 : 24 are Equivalent

Question 26.
1 : 4 and 2 : 6

Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 1 : 4 and 2 : 6 are Not Equivalent

Question 27.
5 : 3 and 15 : 12
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 5 : 3 and 15 : 12 are Not Equivalent

Question 28.
6 : 10 and 12 : 20
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 6 : 10 and 12 : 20 are Equivalent.

Question 29.
2 : 3 and 4 : 5
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 3 and 4 : 5 are not Equivalent.

Question 30.
28 : 32 and 7 : 8
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 28 : 32 and 7 : 8 are Equivalent.

Question 31.
24 : 100 and 6 : 25
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 28 : 32 and 7 : 8 are Not Equivalent.

Question 32.
85 : 210 and 340 : 735
Answer: The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 85 : 210 and 340 : 735  are Not Equivalent.

WRITING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Write a ratio that is equivalent to the given ratio. Justify your answer.
Question 33.
3 : 1
Answer: 6: 2

Explanation:
The equivalent ratio of 3:1 is 6:2
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
6:2 = 3:1

Question 34.
7 : 2
Answer: 14: 4

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 7 : 2 is 14:4
7 × 2 : 2 × 2 = 14:4

Question 35.
6 : 6
Answer: 12:12

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 6:6 is 12:12
6 × 2 : 6 × 2 = 12:12

Question 36.
0 : 8
Answer: 0:16

Explanation:
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios.
The equivalent ratio of 0:8 is 0:16
0 × 2: 8 × 2 = 0 : 16

WRITING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Fill in the blank so that the ratios are equivalent.
Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 18
Answer:  18
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-18

Explanation:
Since
3 : 9 = 6 : X
Then we know
9/3 = X/6
Multiplying both sides by 6 cancels on the right
6 × (9/3) = (X/6) × 6
6 × (9/3) = X
Then solving for X
X = 6 × (9/3)
X = 18
Therefore
3 : 9 = 6 : 18
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 19
Answer: 24
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-19
Explanation:
Since
2 : 6 = 8 : X
Then we know
6/2 = X/8
Multiplying both sides by 8 cancels on the right
8 × (6/2) = (X/8) × 8
8 × (6/2) = X
Then solving for X
X = 8 × (6/2)
X = 24
Therefore
2 : 6 = 8 : 24
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 20
Answer: 21
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.1-20

Explanation:
Since
X : 6 = 7 : 2
Then we know
X/6 = 7/2
Multiplying both sides by 6 cancels on the left
6 × (X/6) = (7/2) × 6
X = (7/2) × 6
Then solving for X
X = 6 × (7/2)
X = 21
Therefore
21 : 6 = 7 : 2
Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.

Question 40.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that the two ratios are equivalent. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 21
Answer: incorrect, The ratios are Not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 4 : 8 and 8 : 12  are Not Equivalent. after add 4 each to the ratios

Question 41.
OPEN-ENDED
A non-Newtonian liquid demonstrates properties of both a solid and a liquid. A recipe for a non-Newtonian liquid calls for 1 cup of water and 2 cups of cornstarch. Find two possible combinations of water and cornstarch that you can use to make a larger batch. Justify your answer.
Answer:
Given,
A non-Newtonian liquid demonstrates properties of both a solid and a liquid.
A recipe for a non-Newtonian liquid calls for 1 cup of water and 2 cups of cornstarch
The ratio of water and cornstarch is 1 : 2
The possible combinations of water and cornstarch are
You can multiply 3 to each number in the first ratio to obtain the numbers in the second ratio, the ratios are equivalent.
1 × 3 : 2 × 3 = 3 : 6
You can multiply 5 to each number in the first ratio to obtain the numbers in the second ratio, the ratios are equivalent.
1 × 5 : 2 × 5 = 5 : 10

Question 42.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are downloading songs to your tablet. The ratio of pop songs to rock songs is 5 : 4. You download 40 pop songs. How many rock songs do you download?
Answer: 32

Explanation:
Given,
. The ratio of pop songs to rock songs is 5 : 4. You download 40 pop songs.
Let number of rock songs be x
5 : 4 :: 40 :: x
5 × x = 4 × 40
5x = 160
x = 160/5
x = 32
Therefore, number of rock songs = 32.

Question 43.
PROBLEM SOLVING
In the contiguous United States, the ratio of states that border an ocean to states that do not border an ocean is 7 : 9. How many of the states border an ocean?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 22
Answer: 7

Explanation:
Given,
the ratio of states that border an ocean to states that do not border an ocean is 7 : 9.
So states that border an ocean is 7
and states that do not border an ocean is 9
hence the states border an ocean is 7

Question 44.
REASONING
The value of a ratio is \(\frac{4}{3}\). The second quantity in the ratio is how many times the first quantity in the ratio? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: The second quantity is 1.3333 times the first quantity in the ratio.

Explanation:
A ratio is given to us which is 4:3.
What we need to find out is, the second quantity in the ratio is how many times the first quantity in the ratio.
The definition of ratio is, the quantitative relation between two amounts showing the number of times one value contains or is contained within the other.
So according to the definition of ratio we get:
4/3 = 1.33
So we can say that 4 contains 3, 1.3333 times in it.
So the second quantity is 1.3333 times the first quantity in the ratio.

Question 45.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A train moving at a constant speed travels 3 miles every 5 minutes. A car moving at a constant speed travels 12 miles every 20 minutes. Are the vehicles traveling at the same speed? If not, which is faster?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 23
Answer:
Both vehicles traveling at the same speed 0.6 miles per minute

Explanation:
Given
A train moving at a constant speed travels 3 miles every 5 minutes.
by dividing 3 miles by 5 minutes we get 0.6 miles per minute
A car moving at a constant speed travels 12 miles every 20 minutes.
by dividing 12 miles by 20 minutes we get 0.6 miles per minute
Hence both vehicle have the same speed

Question 46.
CRITICAL THINKING
To win a relay race, you must swim 200 yards before your opponent swims 190 yards. You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds. Your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds. Who wins the race? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Explanation:
Given
You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds
By dividing 50 yards by 40 seconds we get 1.25 yards per second
Your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds.
By dividing 10 yards by 8.5 seconds we get 1.17 yards per second
You swim at a pace of 50 yards every 40 seconds  for completing 200 yards you take 160 seconds
your opponent swims at a pace of 10 yards every 8.5 seconds  for completing 190 yards you take 162.3  seconds
hence you won the race by completing 200 yards in 160 seconds before your opponent completes 190 yards at 162.3 seconds

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 3 boys for every 2 girls in a dance competition. Does it make sense for there to be a total of 9 people in the competition? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given,
There are 3 boys for every 2 girls in a dance competition.
3:2=5
so girls are 2:5
set up the proportion
2/5=x/9
5x=18
x=3.6 girls
another way you can look at it is because there are 3 boys for every 2 girls, add 2 more girls, you’ll get 3 more boys
that makes the total of 10 people so 9 is impossible

Question 48.
GEOMETRY
Use the blue and green rectangles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 24
a. Find the ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle. Repeat this for width, perimeter, and area.

Answer:
The ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle is 2 : 4
The ratio of the width of the blue rectangle to the width of the green rectangle is 3 : 6
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
Blue rectangle:
2(3) + 2(2) = 6 + 4 = 10
Green Rectangle:
2(6) + 2(4) = 12 + 8 = 20
Ratio of perimeter of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 10 : 20
Area of the rectangle = lb
Blue rectangle:
A = 2 × 3 = 6
Green Rectangle:
A = 4 × 6 = 24
Ratio of Area of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 6 : 24
b. Compare your ratios in part(a).
Answer:
The ratio of the length of the blue rectangle to the length of the green rectangle is 2 : 4 equivalent to 1 : 2
The ratio of the width of the blue rectangle to the width of the green rectangle is 3 : 6 equivalent to 1 : 2
Ratio of perimeter of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 10 : 20 equivalent to 1 : 2
Ratio of Area of blue rectangle to the green rectangle is 6 : 24 equivalent to 1 : 4

Question 49.
STRUCTURE
The ratio of the side lengths of a triangle is 2 : 3 : 4. The shortest side is 15 inches. What is the perimeter of the triangle? Explain.
Answer: 67.5 inches

Explanation:
Given that,
The ratio of the side lengths of a triangle is 2 : 3 : 4. The shortest side is 15 inches.
Let
x = the first side
y = the second side
z = the third side
We know that
x/y = 2/3
y = 1.5x
x/z = 2/4
z = 2x
x = 15 inches
Substitute the value of x in both the equations
y = 1.5(15) = 22.5 in
z = 2(15) = 30 in
Now find the perimeter of the triangle
P = x + y + z
P = 15 + 22.5 + 30 = 67.5 inches

Question 50.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A restaurant sells tokens that customers use to play games while waiting for their orders.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.1 25
a. Which option is the best deal? Justify your answer.
b. What suggestions, if any, would you give to the restaurant about how it could modify the prices of tokens?
Answer:
It would be 90 tokens
0.50 * 10 = $5
0.50 *25 = $12.5
0.50 * 50 = $25
0.50 * 90 = $45
on 90 tokens you save $5 which is the most.

Question 51.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 12 boys and 10 girls in your gym class. If 6 boys joined the class, how many girls would need to join for the ratio of boys to girls to remain the same? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Given,
There are 12 boys and 10 girls in your gym class.
12/10=6/5
6 boys joined: 18/(of girls)=6/5, #of girls=18×5/6=15
5 more girls will keep the same ratio 6/5

Lesson 3.2 Using Tape Diagrams

You can use a visual model, called a tape diagram, to represent the relationship between two quantities in a ratio.

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Tape Diagram
Work with a partner. The tape diagram models the lengths of two snowboarding trails.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 1
a. What can you determine from the tape diagram?

Answer:
We determine from the tape diagram that the beginner trail has one rectangle and the expert trial has four rectangles.

b. Choose a length for one of the trails. What conclusions can you make from the tape diagram? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
Let the length of one rectangle is 10.
The length of the beginner trail is 10.
Length of the expert trail is 4 × 10 = 40
1 : 4
c. Suppose you know the combined length of the trails or the difference in the lengths of the trails. Explain how you can use that information to find the lengths of the two trails. Provide an example with your explanation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 2
Answer:
Let the length of one rectangle is 10.
Now let us combine the length to find the length of the expert trail.
The expert trail contains 4 rectangles.
So, multiply 10 with 4.
4 × 10 = 40
Example:
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given. You received 4 gifts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 3

You can use tape diagrams to represent ratios and solve ratio problems.

Try It

Question 1.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given. You received 4 gifts. How many gifts did you give?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 3
Answer: 1 : 4

Explanation:
given
The tape diagram represents the ratio of gifts received to gifts given.
You received 4 gifts
the ratio by observing the given image is 1 : 4
hence you gave 1 gift

Question 2.
There are 8 bones in a large snake for every 3 bones in a small snake. The small snake has 150 bones. How many bones does the large snake have?
Answer: 400

Explanation:
Given,
There are 8 bones in a large snake for every 3 bones in a small snake.
The small snake has 150 bones.
150/3 = 50 bones
50 × 8 = 400 bones
Thus the large snake has 400 bones.

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 3 when the ratio of your monthly allowance to your friend’s monthly allowance is 2 to 3.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
STRUCTURE
What ratio is represented by the tape diagram? Can you use the tape diagram to model the ratio 6 : 9? Can you use the tape diagram to model the ratio 8 : 16? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 4
Answer:

Question 5.
REASONING
You are given a tape diagram and the total value of the parts. How can you find the value of 1 part?
Answer:

Question 6.
DRAWING A TAPE DIAGRAM
Describe two ways that you can represent the ratio 12 : 4 using a tape diagram.
Answer:

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM You are given the number of tickets in a bag and the ratio of winning tickets to losing tickets. How many of each kind of ticket are in the bag?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 5
Question 7.
35 tickets; 1 to 4
Answer: 7 : 28

Explanation:
Number of winning tickets = 7
Number of losing tickets = 28
The ratio of winning tickets and losing tickets are 7 : 28
We get 1 : 4
Thus the answer is 7 : 28

Question 8.
80 tickets; 2 : 8
Answer: 16 : 64

Explanation:
Total number of tickets = 80
The ratio of winning tickets to losing tickets is 2 : 8
Let 2x be the winning tickets and 8x be the losing tickets
2x + 8x = 80
10x = 80
x = 80/10 = 8
Number of winning tickets = 2x = 2(8) = 16
Number of losing tickets = 8x = 8(8) = 64
The ratio of winning tickets and losing tickets are 16 : 64

Question 9.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of the numbers of planets in two different solar systems. There are 8 planets in Solar System B. How many planets are in Solar System A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 6
Answer:
The ratio of the numbers of planets in two different solar systems is 3 : 4
Given that
There are 8 planets in Solar System B.
Solar System B contains 4 rectangles
4 × 2 = 8
Solar System A contains 3 rectangles
3 × 2 = 6
Therefore the solar system A contains 6 planets.

Question 10.
You and your friend play an arcade game. You score 5 points for every 9 points that your friend scores. You score 320 points less than your friend. How many points do you each score?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 7
Answer:
Given
You and your friend play an arcade game.
You score 5 points for every 9 points that your friend scores.
You score 320 points less than your friend.
Each time you score you gain 4 less points than your friend so, you can do this equation
9x – 320 = 5x
9x – 5x = 320
4x = 320
x = 320/4
x = 80
9x = 9(80) = 720
5x = 5(80) = 400
720 – 400 = 320

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Your team wins 18 medals at a track meet. The medals are gold, silver, and bronze in a ratio of 2 : 2 : 5. How many of each medal were won by your team?
Answer: The team won 4 gold medals, 4 silver medals and 10 bronze medals.

Explanation:
Given,
Total medals won = 18
Ratio of gold, silver and bronze = 2:2:5
Let,
x be the original number.
Therefore,
Gold medals = 2x
Silver medals = 2x
Bronze medals = 5x
According to given statement
2x + 2x + 5x = 18
9x = 18
x = 2
Gold medals = 2x = 2(2) = 4
Silver medals = 2x = 2(2) = 4
Bronze medals = 5x = 5(2) = 10

Using Tape Diagrams Homework & Practice 3.2

Review & Refresh

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 1.
11 : 4 and 22 : 8
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 11 : 4 and 22 : 8 are Equivalent.

Question 2.
12 : 18 and 2 : 3
Answer: The ratios are Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 12 : 18 and 2 : 3 are Equivalent.

Question 3.
56 : 81 and 7 : 9
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 56 : 81 and 7 : 9 are not Equivalent.

Question 4.
2 : 12 and 6 : 24
Answer: The ratios are not Equivalent.

Explanation: Two ratios that have the same value are called equivalent ratios. To find an equivalent ratio, multiply or divide both quantities by the same number. It is the same process as finding equivalent fractions. Multiply both the numerator and denominator by 2.
Hence the ratios 2 : 12 and 6 : 24 are not Equivalent.

Multiply. Write the answer in the simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\)
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 35 and 70 using
GCF(35,70) = 35
35÷35 divided by 70÷35= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Therefore:
\(\frac{7}{10}\) . \(\frac{5}{7}\) is 12

Question 6.
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) . \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
For fraction multiplication, multiply the numerators and then multiply the denominators to get
1×33×4=312
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 3 and 12 using
GCF(3,12) = 3
3÷3 divided by 12÷3= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Therefore:
as given in question 2\(\frac{1}{3}\) . \(\frac{3}{4}\) = 2 × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
we get \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 7.
5\(\frac{3}{8}\) . 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer: 13 \(\frac{7}{16}\)

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
5\(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{43}{8}\)
2\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{2}\)
\(\frac{43}{8}\) × \(\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{215}{16}\)
Now convert it into the mixed fractions
\(\frac{215}{16}\) = 13 \(\frac{7}{16}\)

Question 8.
Melissa earns $7.40 per hour working at a grocery store. She works 14.25 hours this week. How much does she earn?
A. $83.13
B. $105.45
C. $156.75
D. $1054.50
Answer: $105.45

Explanation:
Given,
Melissa earns $7.40 per hour working at a grocery store.
She works 14.25 hours this week.
14.25 × 7.40 = $105.45
Thus Melissa earns $105.45 this week

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM Use the tape diagram in Exploration 1 to answer the question. (See Exploration 1, p. 115.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 8
Question 9.
The beginner trail is 200 meters long. How long is the expert trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 200 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 200 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
200m/5 = 40m.
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 40 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×40m = 160m long.

Question 10.
The expert trail is 1200 meters long. How long is the beginner trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 1200 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 1200 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
1200m/5 = 240m
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 240 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×240m = 960m long.

Question 11.
The combined length of the trails is 2000 meters. How long is each trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 2000 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 2000 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
2000m/5 = 400m.
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 400 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×400m = 1600m long.

Question 12.
The expert trail is 750 meters longer than the beginner trail. How long is each trail?
Answer:
For the beginner’s trail, there is only one rectangle. For Expert Trail, there are 4 rectangles.
Then in total, we have 5 rectangles.
We know that the combined length is 750 meters, then the 5 rectangles are equivalent to 750 meters.
Then each rectangle will be equivalent to:
750m/5 = 150m
Now, we know that the beginner’s trail has one rectangle, then the length of the beginner’s trail is 150 meters long.
The expert’s trail has 4 rectangles, then it is:
4×150m = 600m long.

INTERPRETING A TAPE DIAGRAM The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend tutoring to the time your friend spends tutoring. You tutor for 3 hours. How many hours does your friend spend tutoring?
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 9
Answer:
So you have one block, and your friend has two.
We know that you work for 3 hours, this means that your only block must represent 3 hours.
And all the blocks represent the same amount of time, then each one of the two blocks of your friend also represents 3 hours.
Then in total, he tutored for 3 hours + 3 hours = 6 hours.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 10
Answer:
In this case, you still have only one block, but now your friend has 5.
Using the same reasoning as above, we can conclude that each block represents 3 hours, and your friend has 5 of them
this means that he tutored for:
5×3 hours = 15 hours

DRAWING A TAPE DIAGRAM A bag contains red marbles and blue marbles. You are given the number of red marbles in the bag and the ratio of red marbles to blue marbles. Find the number of blue marbles in the bag.
Question 15.
10 red marbles; 5 to 1
Answer:
red : blue=5:1
red/blue=5
red= 10
so blue= 2

Question 16.
3 red marbles; 3 : 7
Answer:
red : blue=3:7
red/blue=3/7
red= 3
so blue= 7

Question 17.
12 red marbles; 4 : 3
Answer:
red : blue=4:3
red/blue= 12/9
red= 12
so blue= 9

Question 18.
6 red marbles; 2 for every 5
Answer:
red : blue=2:5
red/blue= 2×3 : 5×3
red= 6
so blue= 15

Question 19.
18 red marbles; 6 to 9
Answer:
red : blue=6:9
red/blue=18/27
red= 18
so blue= 27

Question 20.
12 red marbles; 3 : 4
Answer:
red : blue=3:4
red/blue=12/16
red= 12
so blue= 16

USING A TAPE DIAGRAM A bowl contains blueberries and strawberries. You are given the total number of berries in the bowl and the ratio of blueberries to strawberries. How many of each berry are in the bowl?
Question 21.
16 berries; 3 : 1
Answer:
no of strawberries = 4
no of blueberries = 12

Explanation:
total berries :- 16
ration :- 3:1
no of strawberries :- 1x
no of blueberries :- 3x
3x + 1x = 16
4x = 16
x = 4

Question 22.
10 berries; 2 for every 3
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 3x
no of blueberries :- 2x
2x + 3x = 10
5x = 10
x = 2
no of strawberries :- 3x = 3(2) = 6
no of blueberries :- 2x = 2(2) = 4

Question 23.
12 berries; 1 to 2
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 2x
no of blueberries :- 1x
1x + 2x = 12
3x = 12
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 2x = 2(4) = 8
no of blueberries :- 1x = 1(4) = 4

Question 24.
20 berries; 4 : 1
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 1x
no of blueberries :- 4x
1x + 4x = 20
5x = 20
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 1x = 1(4) = 4
no of blueberries :- 4x = 4(4) = 16

Question 25.
48 berries; 9 to 3
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 3x
no of blueberries :- 9x
3x + 9x = 48
12x = 48
x = 4
no of strawberries :- 3x = 3(4) = 12
no of blueberries :- 9x = 9(4) = 36

Question 26.
46 berries; 11 for every 12
Answer:
no of strawberries :- 12x
no of blueberries :- 11x
12x + 11x = 46
23x = 46
x = 2
no of strawberries :- 12x = 12(2) = 24
no of blueberries :- 11x = 11(2) = 22

Question 27.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You separate bulbs of garlic into two groups: one for planting and one for cooking. The tape diagram represents the ratio of bulbs for planting to bulbs for cooking. You use 6 bulbs for cooking. Each bulb has 8 cloves. How many cloves of garlic will you plant?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 11
Answer:
Given,
You separate bulbs of garlic into two groups: one for planting and one for cooking.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of bulbs for planting to bulbs for cooking.
You use 6 bulbs for cooking. Each bulb has 8 cloves.
6 : 8
6 × 6 = 36
36 × 8 = 288
Thus you plant 288 cloves of garlic.

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Methane gas contains carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms in the ratio of 1 : 4. A sample of methane gas contains 92 hydrogen atoms. How many carbon atoms are in the sample? How many total atoms are in the sample?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 12
Answer:
Methane: 1 carbon and 4 hydrogens
A sample of methane gas contains 92 hydrogen atoms.
1 : 4 :: x : 92
x = number of carbons
x = 92/4
x = 23 carbons
Total atoms = hydrogen atoms + carbon atoms
= 92 + 23
= 115 atoms

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
There are 8 more girls than boys in a school play. The ratio of boys to girls is 5 : 7. How many boys and how many girls are in the play?
Answer:
Given,
There are 8 more girls than boys in a school play. The ratio of boys to girls is 5 : 7
5x = 5(4) = 20 boys
7x = 7(4) = 28 girls
To find how many more girls there are than boys in the play,
We have to subtract the number of girls and number of boys
28 – 20 = 8
Thus it means there are 8 more girls than boys in the school play.

Question 30.
DIG DEEPER!
A baseball team sells tickets for two games. The ratio of sold tickets to unsold tickets for the first game was 7 : 3. For the second game, the ratio was 13 : 2. There were 240 unsold tickets for the second game. How many tickets were sold for the first game?
Answer: 1260 tickets were sold on the first game

Explanation:
For the second game, the ratio was 13 : 2.
Total ratio = 13 + 2 = 15
There were 240 unsold tickets for the second game.
Let the total number of tickets for the second game be x.
240 = 2/15 × x
2x = 15 × 240 = 3600
x = 3600/2 = 1800
1800 tickets were sold for the second time.
Assuming total number of tickets for the first game is equal to total number of tickets for the second game.
Therefore total number of tickets sold for the first game is 1800
The ratio of sold tickets to unsold tickets for the first game was 7: 3
Total ratio 7 + 3 = 10
Number of tickets sold for the first game would be 7/10 × 1800 = 12600/10 = 1260 tickets

Question 31.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You have $150 in a savings account and you have some cash. The tape diagram represents the ratio of the amounts of money. You want to have twice the amount of money in your savings account as you have in cash. How much of your cash should you deposit into your savings account?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 13
Answer: $200

Explanation:
We know that:
You have $150 in a savings account.
This is represented with two tiles.
Then each tile represents:
$150/2 = $75
And in cash you have 5 tiles, then in cash you have:
5×$75 = $375.
Then the problem is:
You have $150 in the savings account
You have $375 in cash.
You want to deposit a quantity such that you have twice the amount of money in your savings account as you have in cash.
Suppose that you move a quantity X from cash to the savings account, then now we have the situation:
Sav. Acc. = $150 + X
Cash = $375 – X
And we want that:
Sav. Acc. = 2×Cash
($150 + X) = 2×($375 – X)
Let’s solve this for X.
$150 + X = $750 – 2×X
3×X = $750 – $150 = $600
X = $600/3 = $200
You should deposit $200 in the Savings account.

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
A fish tank contains tetras, guppies, and minnows. The ratio of tetras to guppies is 4 : 2. The ratio of minnows to guppies is 1 : 3. There are 60 fish in the tank. How many more tetras are there than minnows? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.2 14
Answer: 30

Explanation:
A fish tank contains tetras, guppies, and minnows.
The ratio of tetras to guppies is 4 : 2.
The ratio of minnows to guppies is 1 : 3. There are 60 fish in the tank.
Let number of tetras be t
number of guppies be g
number of minnows be m
Ratio of tetras to guppies is 4:2, or reducing, 2:1
m = g/3
Also, total there are 60 fish
t + g + m = 60
2g + g + g/3 = 60
Now finding t and m:
m = g/3 = 18/3 = 6
m = 6
t = 2g
t = 2(18)
t = 36
There are 36 tetras and 6 minnows. So, there are 36 – 6 = 30 more tetras than minnows

EXPLORATION 1

Making a Table of Equivalent Ratios
Work with a partner. You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
a. You measure 2 cups of the milk for a recipe and pour it into a pitcher. You repeat this four more times. Make a table to show the numbers of calories and cups in the pitcher as you add the milk.
b. Describe any relationships you see in your table.
c. Describe ways that you can find equivalent ratios using different operations.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Creating a Double Number Line
Work with a partner.
a. Represent the ratio in Exploration 1 by labeling the increments on the double number line below. Can you label the increments in more than one way?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 2
b. How can you use the double number line to find the number of calories in 3 cups of milk? 3.5 cups of milk?
Answer:

Lesson 3.3 Using Ratio Tables

You can find and organize equivalent ratios in a ratio table. You can generate a ratio table by using repeated addition or multiplication.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 3

Try It

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-4

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-5

You can also generate a ratio table by using subtraction or division. In summary, you can find equivalent ratios by:
• adding or subtracting quantities in equivalent ratios.
• multiplying or dividing each quantity in a ratio by the same number.

Try It

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-6
2:10 = 1:5
4:20 = 1:5
3:15 = 1:5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-7
The ratio is 12:1
The equivalent ratios are
24:2 = 12:1
48:4 = 12:1
36:3 = 12:1

Question 5.
WHAT IF?
You eat 21 crackers. How much sodium do you consume?
Answer:
BIg Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates
Add the middle two columns
120 + 20 = 140
18 + 3 = 21 crackers
Thus you consume 140 mg sodium.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

COMPLETING A RATIO TABLE Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-8
The missing values in the ratio are 4, 12, 18
The ratio is 2:6
The equivalent ratio of 2:6 are 4:12, 6:18

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-9
The missing values in the ratio are 56, 7, 20
The ratio is 2:8
The equivalent ratio of 2:8 are 14:56, 7:28, 5:20

Question 8.
WRITING
Explain how creating a ratio table using repeated addition is similar to creating a ratio table using multiplication.
Answer:
Ratio tables are constructed in a special way. Each pair of values in the table will be equivalent to the same ratio. You can use repeated addition or multiplication to create a ratio table. There is a constant value that we can multiply the values in the first column by to get the values in the second column.

Question 9.
You mix 7 tablespoons of vinegar for every 4 tablespoons of baking soda to produce a chemical reaction. You use 15 tablespoons of baking soda. How much vinegar do you use?
Answer:
Given,
You mix 7 tablespoons of vinegar for every 4 tablespoons of baking soda to produce a chemical reaction.
You use 15 tablespoons of baking soda.
Case 1:
Tablespoon of vinegar taken = 7
Tablespoon of baking soda taken = 4
The ratio between v and b = 7:4
Case 2:
Tablespoon of vinegar taken = x
Tablespoon of baking soda taken = 15
The ratio between v and b = x:15
7:4 : : x:15
7 × 15 = 4 × x
4x = 105
x = 105/4
x = 26.25
Thus you use 26.25 teaspoons.

Question 10.
You make a carbonated beverage by adding 7 ounces of soda water for every 3 ounces of regular water. Your friend uses 11 ounces of soda water for every 4 ounces of regular water. Whose beverage is more carbonated?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 10
Answer:
The proportion of soda in the drink will show us how carbonated a beverage is. The proportion of soda is the ounce of soda divided by the sum of the soda and water.
The proportion of soda in the first beverage
7/(7+3) = 7/10 = 0.7
The proportion of soda in the first beverage
11/(11+4) = 11/15 = 0.73
Therefore the second beverage is more carbonated.

Using Ratio Tables Homework & Practice 3.3

Review & Refresh

A bag contains green tokens and black tokens. You are given the number of green tokens in the bag and the ratio of green tokens to black tokens. Find the number of black tokens in the bag.
Question 1.
green tokens; 4 for every 1
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 4x
no of black tokens:- 1x
x = 1
no of green tokens:- 4x = 4(1) = 4
no of black tokens:- 1x = 1() = 1

Question 2.
6 green tokens; 2 : 7
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 2x
no of black tokens:- 7x
2x + 7x = 6
9x = 6
x = 6/9
x = 2/3
no of green tokens:- 2x = 2(2/3) = 4/3
no of black tokens:- 7x = 7(2/3) = 14/3

Question 3.
24 green tokens; 8 to 5
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 8x
no of black tokens:- 5x
8x + 5x = 24
13x = 24
x = 24/13
no of green tokens:- 8x = 8(24/13) = 14.7
no of black tokens:- 5x = 5(24/13) = 9.23

Question 4.
36 green tokens; 3 for every 4
Answer:
no of green tokens:- 3x
no of black tokens:- 4x
3x + 4x = 36
7x = 36
x = 36/7
no of green tokens:- 3x = 3(36/7) = 15.42
no of black tokens:- 4x = 4(36/7) = 20.57

Find the GCF of the numbers.
Question 5.
8, 16
Answer: 8

Explanation:
The factors of 8 are: 1, 2, 4, 8
The factors of 16 are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
Then the greatest common factor is 8.

Question 6.
48, 80
Answer: 16

Explanation:
The factors of 48 are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 48
The factors of 80 are: 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10, 16, 20, 40, 80
Then the greatest common factor is 16.

Question 7.
15, 45, 100
Answer: 5

Explanation:
The factors of 15 are: 1, 3, 5, 15
The factors of 45 are: 1, 3, 5, 9, 15, 45
The factors of 100 are: 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100
Then the greatest common factor is 5.

Evaluate the expression.
Question 8.
35 – 2 × 42
Answer:
35 – 2 × 42
35 – 2 × 16
35 – 32 = 3

Question 9.
12 ÷ (1 + 33 – 24)
Answer:
12 ÷ (1 + 33 – 24)
12 ÷ (1 + 27 – 16)
12 ÷ (28 – 16)
12 ÷ 12 = 1

Question 10.
82 ÷ [(11 – 3) . 2]
Answer:
82 ÷ [(11 – 3) . 2]
82 ÷ [8 . 2]
82 ÷ 16
64 ÷ 16 = 4

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 11
Answer:
Given Area = 48 sq. yd
Length = 8 yd
Width = x
Area of the rectangle = l × w
48 = 8 × x
x = 48/8 = 6
x = 6 yd
Thus the width of the rectangle = 6 yd
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(8) + 2(6)
P = 16 + 12
P = 28
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 28 yards

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 12
Answer:
Given Area = 132 sq. mm
Length = 12 mm
Width = x
Area of the rectangle = l × w
132 = 12 × x
x = 132/12 = 11
x = 11 mm
Thus the width of the rectangle = 11 mm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(12) + 2(11)
P = 24 + 22
P = 46
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle = 46 mm

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A RATIO TABLE Use a ratio table to find the number of calories in the indicated number of cups of milk from Exploration 1. Explain your method. (See Exploration 1, p. 121.)
Question 13.
16 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
16 cups = 16 × 90 = 1440 calories

Question 14.
18 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
18 cups = 18 × 90 = 1620 calories

Question 15.
5.5 cups
Answer:
You buy milk that contains 180 calories per 2 cups.
1 cup = 180/2 = 90 calories
5.5 cups = 5.5 × 90 = 495 calories

COMPLETING RATIO TABLES Find the missing value(s) in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-15
The ratio is 1 : 5
The equivalent ratio with 10 is 2 : 10

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-16
The ratio is 3 : 5
The equivalent ratio is 6 : 10, 9 : 15

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-17
The ratio is 6 : 3
The equivalent ratio is 24 : 12, 18 : 9

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-18
The ratio is 2 : 14
The equivalent ratio is 1 : 7, 3 : 21, 18 : 126

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-19

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-20

Question 22.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend creates a ratio table for the ratio 5 : 3. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 21
Answer: No your friend is incorrect. Because 125 : 27 is not the equivalent ratio of 5 : 3

COMPLETING RATIO TABLES Complete the ratio table to solve the problem.
Question 23.
For every 3 tickets you sell, your friend sells 4 tickets. You sell a total of 12 tickets. How many tickets does your friend sell?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 22
Answer:
The ratio is 3 : 4
So divide 12 by 3 = 4 and sells 16 tickets
Thus the ratio is 12 : 16 = 3 : 4

Question 24.
A store sells 2 printers for every 5 computers. The store sells 40 computers. How many printers does the store sell?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 23
Answer:
Let us think of 2 printers for every 5 computers as a set.
First let us determine hoe many sets were sold to get to 40 computers
5x = 40
x = 8
2x = 2(8) = 16
This means 16 printers were sold.

Question 25.
First and second place in a contest use a ratio to share a cash prize. When first place pays $100, second place pays $60. How much does first place pay when second place pays $36?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 24
Answer: $60

Explanation:
Given,
First and second place in a contest use a ratio to share a cash prize. When first place pays $100, second place pays $60.
Let x be the pay of the first place when the second place pays $36
100/60 = x/36
x = $60

Question 26.
A grade has 81 girls and 72 boys. The grade is split into groups that have the same ratio of girls to boys as the whole grade. How many girls are in a group that has 16 boys?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 25
Answer:
A grade has 81 girls and 72 boys. The grade is split into groups that have the same ratio of girls to boys as the whole grade.
We have to find how many girls are in a group that has 16 boys
81 : 72 = x : 16
16 × 81 = 1296
1296/72 = 18
Therefore the value of girls numbers is 18.
The new ratio will be 18 : 16

USING A DOUBLE NUMBER LINE Find the missing quantity in the double number line.
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 26
Answer:
The equivalent ratio of 460 : 4 is 1840 : 16
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-26

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 27
Answer:
The equivalent ratio of 700 : 14 is 1050 : 21
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.3-27

Question 29.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A company sets sales goals for employees each month.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 28
a. At her current pace, how many items will Kristina sell in 28 days? Is she on track to meet the goal? Explain.
b. At his current pace, how many dollars worth of product will Jim sell in 28 days? Is he on track to meet the goal? Explain.
Answer:

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A gold alloy contains 15 milligrams of gold for every 4 milligrams of copper. A jeweler uses 48 milligrams of copper to make the alloy. How much gold does the jeweler use to make the alloy?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 29
Answer:
There are 180 milligrams of gold in the alloy.

Explanation:
We know that for every 4 milligrams of copper, there are 15 milligrams of gold.
if 48 milligrams of copper are used, we can separate them in “sets” of 4 milligrams.
We have 48/4 = 12 sets.
And for each one of these 12 sets, there are 15 milligrams of gold, then the total amount of gold in the alloy is:
12×15mg = 180 mg

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You make candles by adding 2 fluid ounces of scented oil for every 22 fluid ounces of wax. Your friend makes candles by adding 3 fluid ounces of the same scented oil for every 37 fluid ounces of wax. Whose candles are more fragrant? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: Your candles are more fragrant

Explanation:
Given,
You make candles by adding 2 fluid ounces of scented oil for every 22 fluid ounces of wax.
Your friend makes candles by adding 3 fluid ounces of the same scented oil for every 37 fluid ounces of wax.
Compare 2/22 and 3/37
2/22 > 3/37
By this we can say that your candles are more fragrant.

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A mint milk shake contains 1.25 fluid ounces of milk for every 4 ounces of ice cream. A strawberry milk shake contains 1.75 fluid ounces of milk for every 5 ounces of ice cream. Which milk shake is thicker? Explain.
Answer:

CRITICAL THINKING Two whole numbers A and B satisfy the following conditions. Find A and B.
Question 33.
A + B = 30
A : B is equivalent to 2 : 3.
Answer:
Let A = 2x
Let B = 3x
2x + 3x = 30
5x = 30
x = 30/5 = 6
x = 6
A = 2x = 2(6) = 12
B = 3(6) = 18
A : B = 12 : 18

Question 34.
A + B = 44
A : B is equivalent to 4 : 7.
Answer:
Let A = 4x
Let B = 7x
4x + 7x = 44
11x = 44
x = 44/11
x = 4
A = 4x = 4(4) = 16
B = 7x = 7(4) = 28
A : B = 16 : 28

Question 35.
A – B = 18
A : B is equivalent to 11 : 5.
Answer:
Let A = 11x
Let B = 5x
11x – 5x = 18
6x = 18
x = 18/6
x = 3
A = 11x = 11(3) = 33
B = 5x = 5(3) = 15
33 – 15 = 18
A : B = 33 : 15

Question 36.
A – B = 25
A : B is equivalent to 13 : 8.
Answer:
Let A = 13x
Let B = 8x
13x – 8x = 25
5x = 25
x = 5
A = 13x = 13(5) = 65
B = 8(5) = 40
A : B = 65 : 40

Question 37.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A nutrition label shows that there are 161 calories in 28 grams of dry roasted cashews. You eat 9 cashews totaling 12 grams.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 30
a. Do you think it is possible to find the number of calories you consume? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
There are 161 calories in 28 grams. You eat 9 cashews totaling 12 grams.
We need to find out how many calories in 12 grams
For that we make a proportion
Calories/grams = calories/grams
161/28 = x/12
28x = 161 × 12
x = 1932/28
x = 69
There are 69 calories in 12 grams

b. How many cashews are in one serving?
Answer:
Divide 161 by 28 to get the calorie count for one gram
Multiply that by 12 to work out how many calories you have eaten in the 9 cashews 161/28 = 5.75
5.75 x 12 = 69

Question 38.
REASONING
The ratio of three numbers is 4 : 5 : 3. The sum of the numbers is 54. What are the three numbers?
Answer:
Let it be x.
4x + 5x + 3x = 54
12x = 54
x = 54/12
x = 4.5
Now 4x = 4× 4.5 = 18
3x = 3 × 4.5
=13.5
5x = 5× 4.5 = 22.5

Question 39.
CRITICAL THINKING
Seven out of every 8 students surveyed own a bike. The difference between the number of students who own a bike and those who do not is 72. How many students were surveyed?
Answer:
So if x people were surveyed, 7/8 people owned a bike and 1/8 did not.
The difference between them is 72
7/8 × x – 1/8 = 72
So, this means that,
6/8 x = 72
Let us simpify
3/4 × x = 72
1/4 × x = 24
and multiply by 4
x = 96
So 96 people were surveyed

Question 40.
LOGIC
You and a classmate have a bug collection for science class. You find 5 out of every 9 bugs in the collection. You find 4 more bugs than your classmate. How many bugs are in the collection?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.3 31
Answer:
Let b represent the total amount bugs.
5/9 × b = 4/9 × b + 4
1/9 × b = 4
b = 4 × 9
b = 36
There are 36 bugs in the collection.

Question 41.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You earn $72 for every 8 hours you spend shoveling snow. You earn $60 for every 5 hours you spend babysitting. For every 3 hours you spend babysitting, you spend 2 hours shoveling snow. You babysit for 15 hours in January. How much money do you earn in January?
Answer: $90

Explanation:
Earning for 8 hours shoveling snow = $72
Amount per hour = $72/8 = $9
3 hours of babysitting = 2 hours shoveling snow
Babysitting hours in January = 15 hours
Hours of shoveling snow in January = (15/3) x 2 = 10 hours
Amount earned in January = Hours shoveling snow x Hourly Rate
= 10 x $9 = $90
That is, you earn $90 in January.

Question 42.
DIG DEEPER!
You and a friend each have a collection of tokens. Initially, for every 8 tokens you had, your friend had 3. After you give half of your tokens to your friend, your friend now has 18 more tokens than you. Initially, how many more tokens did you have than your friend?
Answer: 30 token

Explanation:
Initially, for every 8 tokens I had, my friend had 3.
Therefore, ratio of tokens that me and my friend is 8 : 3
Let I have 8 x tokens and my friend has 3 x tokens, where x is any number.
Then again according to the question,
After I gave half of your friend, my friend now has 18 more tokens than you.
That is, (3x + 4x) – 4x = 18
7x – 4x = 18
3x = 18
x = 6
Therefore , Initially the difference between me and my friend’s token = 8 x – 3 x = 5 x = 5 × 6 = 30

Lesson 3.4 Graphing Ratio Relationships

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Coordinate Plane
Work with a partner. An airplane travels 300 miles per hour.
a. Represent the relationship between distance and time in a coordinate plane. Explain your choice for labeling and scaling the axes.
b. Write a question that can be answered using the graph. Exchange your question with another group. Answer their question and discuss the solution with the other group.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 1
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Identifying Relationships in Graphs
Work with a partner. Use the graphs to make a ratio table. Explain how the blue, red, and green arrows correspond to the ratio table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 2
Answer:

For a ratio of two quantities, you can use equivalent ratios to create ordered pairs of the form (first quantity, second quantity). You can plot these ordered pairs in a coordinate plane and draw a line, starting at(0, 0), through the points.

Try It

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 3
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 4
Answer:

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 2 when the cost of the dark chocolate cashews is $15 per pound.
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
GRAPHING A RATIO RELATIONSHIP
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 5
Answer:

Question 5.
CRITICAL THINKING
Use what you know about equivalent ratios to explain why the graph of a ratio relationship passes through (0, 0).
Answer:

Question 6.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which ordered pair does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 6
Answer: (24, 4) does not belong with the other three.
(4, 1) (8, 2) (12, 3) are the equivalent ordered pairs.

Question 7.
You are skateboarding at a pace of 30 meters every 5 seconds. Your friend is in-line skating at a pace of 9 meters every 2 seconds. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Who is faster?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 7
Answer:

Question 8.
You buy 2.5 pounds of pumpkin seeds and 2.5 pounds of sunflower seeds. Use a graph to find your total cost. Then use the graph to determine how much more you pay for pumpkin seeds than for sunflower seeds.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 8
Answer:

Graphing Ratio Relationships Homework & Practice 3.4

Review & Refresh

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.4-9
The pattern of chickens is multiple of 8.
So, the missing values in the ratio table is 16.
The pattern of Eggs is multiple of 6.
So, the missing values in the ratio table is 18.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-3.4-10
The missing values are 1, 12, 5
The equivalent ratios are 3 : 1, 12:4, 15:5

Write the name of the decimal number.
Question 3.
7.1
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
7.1 can be written as seven and one.

Question 4.
3.54
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
3.54 can be written as three and five four

Question 5.
13.6
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
13.6 can be written as thirteen and six

Question 6.
8.132
Answer:
We start by naming the number to the left of the decimal. We use the word “and” to indicate the decimal point. Then we name the number to the right of the decimal point as if it were a whole number.
8.132 can be written as eight and one thirty two

Write two equivalent ratios that describe the relationship.
Question 7.
baseballs to gloves
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 11
Answer: The ratio from baseballs to gloves is 8: 4
The equivalent ratios are 2 : 1, 16 : 8

Question 8.
ladybugs to bees
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 12
Answer: The ratio from ladybugs to bees is 12 : 4
The equivalent ratios are 3 : 1 and 24 : 8

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING A COORDINATE PLANE Represent the relationship between distance and time in a coordinate plane. (See Exploration 1, p. 129.)
Question 9.
A train travels 45 miles per hour.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Answer Key img_1

Question 10.
A motorcycle travels 70 kilometers per hour.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_1

Question 11
A snail travels 80 centimeters per minute.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_2

Question 12.
A whale travels 800 yards per minute.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_3

GRAPHING RATIO RELATIONSHIPS Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_4

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 14
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_5

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 15
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_6

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_7

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 17
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_8

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_9

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A radio station collects donations for a new broadcast tower. The cost to construct the tower is $25.50 per inch.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much does it cost to fund 4.5 inches of the construction?
Answer:

Question 20.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your school organizes a clothing drive as a fundraiser for a class trip. The school earns $100 for every 400 pounds of donated clothing.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much money does your school earn for donating 2200 pounds of clothing?
Answer:

Question 21.
NUMBER SENSE
Just by looking at the graph, determine who earns a greater hourly wage. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 19
Answer: By seeing the above graph we can say that you earns greater hourly wage.

Question 22.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An airplane traveling from Chicago to Los Angeles travels 15 miles every 2 minutes. On the return trip, the plane travels 25 miles every 3 minutes. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Does the plane fly faster when traveling to Los Angeles or to Chicago?
Answer:

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your freezer produces 8 ice cubes every 2 hours. Your friend’s freezer produces 24 ice cubes every 5 hours. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Whose freezer produces ice faster?
Answer:

Question 24.
CHOOSE TOOLS
A chemist prepares two acid solutions.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 20
a. Use a ratio table to determine which solution is more acidic.
b. Use a graph to determine which solution is more acidic.
c. Which method do you prefer? Explain.
Answer:

Question 25.
DIG DEEPER!
A company offers a nut mixture with 7 peanuts for every 3 almonds. The company changes the mixture to have 9 peanuts for every 5 almonds, but the number of nuts per container does not change.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.4 21
a. How many nuts are in the smallest possible container?
b. Graph each ratio relationship. What can you conclude?
c. Almonds cost more than peanuts. Should the company change the price of the mixture? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 26.
STRUCTURE
The point (p, q) is on the graph of values from a ratio table. What are two additional points on the graph?
Answer:

Lesson 3.5 Rates and Unit Rates

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Diagram
Work with a partner. The diagram shows a story problem.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 1
a. What information can you obtain from the diagram?
b. Assuming that the car travels at a constant speed, how far does the car travel in 3.25 hours? Explain your method.
c. Draw a speedometer that shows the speed of the car. How can you use the speedometer to answer part(b)?
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Using Equivalent Ratios
Work with a partner. Count the number of times you can clap your hands in 12 seconds. Have your partner record your results. Then switch roles with your partner and repeat the process.
a. Using your results and your partner’s results, write ratios that represent the numbers of claps for every 12 seconds.
b. Explain how you can use the ratios in part(a) to find the numbers of times you and your partner can clap your hands in 2 minutes, in 2.5 minutes, and in 3 minutes.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 2
Answer:

A rate is a ratio of two quantities using different units. You solved various ratio problems in the previous sections that involved rates. Now you will use unit rates to solve rate problems.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 3

Try It

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 1 when you add 4 pints of water for every 3 cups of concentrate.
Answer:

Question 2.
WHAT IF?
Repeat Example 2 when the space junk travels 3 miles every 5 seconds.
Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

FINDING UNIT RATES Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 3.
revolutions in 50 seconds
Answer:

Question 4.
1400 words for every 4 pages
Answer:
1400 – 4 pages
x – 1 page
4 × x = 1400
x = 1400/4
x = 350
Thus 350 words for every 1 page.

Question 5.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which rate does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 4
Answer: 20 pounds per 4 feet does not belong with the other three.

Explanation:
8 pounds for every 2 feet
8/2 = 4 feet
12 pounds per 3 feet
12/3 = 4 feet
20 pounds per 4 feet
20/4 = 5 feet
24 pounds for every 6 feet
24/6 = 4 feet

Question 6.
You buy 10 pounds of birdseed at Store A for $11.50. Your friend buys 15 pounds of birdseed at Store B for $19.50. How much less would you spend by buying 20 pounds of birdseed at the store with the better deal?
Answer: Store A

Explanation:
Given,
You buy 10 pounds of birdseed at Store A for $11.50.
10 pounds – $11.50
1 pound – $1.15
20 pounds = 20 × 1.15 = $23
Your friend buys 15 pounds of birdseed at Store B for $19.50.
15 pounds – $19.50
1 pound – $1.3
1.3 × 20 = $26
$23 < $26

Question 7.
A person hikes 4 miles in 2.5 hours. Find the unit rate in miles per hour. Then find the unit rate in hours per mile. How is each unit rate useful in a real-life situation?
Answer: 1.6 kilometer per hour

Explanation:
The unit rate is the number of miles in 1 hour.
Given,
Distance = 4 miles
Time = 2.5 hours
So if he hike 4 miles in 2.5 hours
then he will hike x mile in 1 hour
x = 4/2.5
x = 1.6 miles per hour

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You buy 11 bagels with a $20 bill. How much change do you receive? How many more bagels could you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 5
Answer:

Rates and Unit Rates Homework & Practice 3.5

Review & Refresh

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_11

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_12

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates Img_13

Divide. Write the answer in simplest form.
Question 5.
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Answer: \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{10}{3}\) = \(\frac{10}{15}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 6.
\(\frac{3}{8}\) ÷ 6
Answer: \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{3}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Question 7.
3\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2
Answer: 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
3\(\frac{1}{6}\) = \(\frac{19}{6}\)
\(\frac{19}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 1 \(\frac{7}{12}\)

Question 8.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 2\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer: 2

Explanation:
Convert any mixed numbers to fractions.
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\)
2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
\(\frac{16}{3}\) × \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{48}{24}\) = 2

Add or subtract.
Question 9.
6.94 + 12.301
Answer: 19.241

Question 10.
8.753 – 7.71
Answer: 1.043

Question 11.
14.532 – 6.613
Answer: 7.919

Question 12.
The winner in an election for class president received \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the 240 votes. How many votes did the winner receive?
A. 60
B. 150
C. 180
D. 320
Answer: 180

Explanation:
Given,
The winner in an election for class president received \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the 240 votes.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) × 240 = 180
The winner receive 180 votes.
Thus the correct answer is option C

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING EQUIVALENT RATIOS Use the ratio in Exploration 2 to estimate the number of times you can clap your hands in the given amount of time. (See Exploration 2, p. 135.)
Question 13.
0.5 minute
Answer:

Question 14.
1.75 minutes
Answer:

Question 15.
2.25 minutes
Answer:

FINDING UNIT RATES Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 16.
24 animals in 2 square miles
Answer: 12 animals

Explanation:
Given,
24 animals in 2 square miles
24/2 = 12
12 animals in 1 square mile

Question 17.
$100 for every 5 guests
Answer: $20

Explanation:
Given,
$100 for every 5 guests
100/5 = $20
$20 per guest.

Question 18.
$28 saved in 4 weeks
Answer: $7

Explanation:
Given,
$28 saved in 4 weeks
28/4 = $7
$7 per week

Question 19.
18 necklaces made in 3 hours
Answer: 6 necklaces

Explanation:
Given,
18 necklaces made in 3 hours
18/3 = 6
6 necklaces made in 1 hour

Question 20.
270 miles in 6 hours
Answer: 45 miles per hour

Explanation:
Given,
270 miles in 6 hours
270/6 = 45
45 miles in 1 hour

Question 21.
228 students in 12 classes
Answer: 24 students per class

Explanation:
Given,
228 students in 12 classes
228/12 = 24
24 students in 1 class

Question 22.
2520 kilobytes in 18 seconds
Answer: 140 kilobytes per second

Explanation:
Given,
2520 kilobytes in 18 seconds
2520/18 = 140 kilobytes
140 kilobytes per second

Question 23.
880 calories in 8 servings
Answer: 110 calories in 1 serving

Explanation:
Given,
880 calories in 8 servings
880/8 = 110
110 calories in 1 serving

Question 24.
1080 miles on 15 gallons
Answer: 72 miles in 1 gallon

Explanation:
Given,
1080 miles on 15 gallons
1080/15 = 72 miles
72 miles in 1 gallon

Question 25.
$12.50 for 5 ounces
Answer: 2.5

Explanation:
Given,
$12.50 for 5 ounces
12.50/5 = 2.5
$2.5 per ounce

USING UNIT RATES Find the missing values in the ratio table.
Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 10
Answer:

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 11
Answer:

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Lightning strikes Earth 1000 times in 10 seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 12
a. How many times does lightning strike in 12 seconds?
b. How many seconds does it take for lightning to strike 7250 times?
Answer:

Question 29.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You earn $35 for washing 7 cars.
a. How much do you earn for washing 4 cars?

Answer:
Given,
You earn $35 for washing 7 cars.
7 cars = $35
1 car = x
x × 7 = $35
x = 35/7 = 5
Thus you earn $5 per car
4 cars = 4 × 5 = $20
You earn $20 for washing 4 cars..

b. You earn $45. How many cars did you wash?
Answer:
you earn $5 per car
45/5 = 9
You wash 9 cars for $45

COMPARING RATES Decide whether the rates are equivalent.
Question 30.
24 laps in 6 minutes
72 laps in 18 minutes
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
24:6 = 4 : 1
72 : 18 = 4 : 1
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 31.
126 points for every 3 games
210 points for every 5 games
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given
126 points for every 3 games
210 points for every 5 games
126 : 3 = 42 : 1
210 : 5 = 42 : 1
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 32.
15 breaths for every 36 seconds
90 breaths for every 3 minutes
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given
15 breaths for every 36 seconds
90 breaths for every 3 minutes
15 : 36 = 0.41
90 : 180 = 0.5
Thus the rates are not equivalent.

Question 33.
$16 for 4 pounds
$1 for 4 ounces
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given
$16 for 4 pounds
$1 for 4 ounces
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 64 ounces
16 : 64 = 1 : 4
Thus the rates are equivalent.

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An office printer prints 25 photos in 12.5 minutes. A home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes. Which printer is faster? How many more photos can you print in 12 minutes using the faster printer?
Answer: The home printer is faster

Explanation:
Given,
An office printer prints 25 photos in 12.5 minutes. A home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes.
23 photos in 12.5 minutes
12.5 is half of 25 and therefore this is a two to one ratio
So 2 photos print in 1 minute with the office printer.
And 4 photos in 2 minutes.
The home printer prints 15 photos in 6 minutes.
Since 15 is not divisible by 6 without a remainder divide both by 3.
So 5 photos in 2 minutes. This is faster than the office printer.
This leaves you with an answer of 30 photos in 12 minutes.

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You jog 2 kilometers in 12 minutes. Your friend jogs 3 kilometers in 16.5 minutes. Who jogs faster? How much sooner will the faster jogger finish a five-kilometer race?
Answer:
First, we have to calculate the speed of person 1 and 2.
Speed = Distance/time
Speed of person 1 = 2/12 = 0.167 km/min
Speed of person 2 = 3/16.5 = 0.182 km/min
From this we conclude that, person 2 jogs faster as compared to person 1.
Now we have to calculate the time taken by the faster jogger to finish a 5 kilometer race.
Faster jogger speed = 0.182 km/min
Distance = 5 km
S = d/t
Time = 27.5 min
Thus, the time taken by the faster jogger finish a 5 kilometer race will be, 27.5 minutes.

Question 36.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A softball team has a budget of $200 for visors. The athletic director pays $90 for 12 sun visors. Is there enough money in the budget to purchase 15 more sun visors? Explain your reasoning.
Answer: $112.5

Explanation:
An athletic director pays $90 for 12 sun visors for the softball team.
The rate per sun visor is equal to $90/12 = $7.5
So the athletic director should pay
$7.5 × 15 = $112.5

Question 37.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the amounts of food collected by two homerooms. Homeroom A collects 21 additional items of food. How many more items does Homeroom B need to collect to have more items per student?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 13
Answer:

Question 38.
REASONING
A runner completed a 26.2-mile marathon in 210 minutes.
a. Estimate the unit rate, in miles per minute.
b. Estimate the unit rate, in minutes per mile.
c. Another runner says, “I averaged 10-minute miles in the marathon.” Is this runner talking about the unit rate described in part(a) or in part(b)? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.5 14
Answer:

Question 39.
DIG DEEPER!
You can complete one-half of a job in an hour. Your friend can complete one-third of the same job in an hour. How long will it take to complete the job if you work together?
Answer:
Given,
You can complete one-half of a job in an hour. Your friend can complete one-third of the same job in an hour
1 1/2 + 1 1/3 = 1/x
has to be between 1/4 min to 1/6 hours. first guess is about (1/2)(1/4+1/6) = 5/24= 0.21 hours
2 + 3 = 1/x
5 = 1/x
x = 1/5 = 0.20 hours

Lesson 3.6 Converting Measures

EXPLORATION 1

Estimating Unit Conversions
Work with a partner. You are given 4 one-liter containers and a one-gallon container.
a. A full one-gallon container can be used to fill the one-liter containers, as shown below. Write a unit rate that estimates the number of liters per gallon.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 1
b. A full one-liter container can be used to partially foll the one-gallon container, as shown below. Write a unit rate that estimates the number of gallons per liter.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 2
c. Estimate the number of liters in 5.5 gallons and the number of gallons in 12 liters. What method(s) did you use? What other methods could you have used?
Answer:

EXPLORATION 2

Converting Units in a Rate
Work with a partner. The rate that a caterpillar moves is given in inches per minute. Using the rulers below, how can you convert the rate to centimeters per second? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 3
Answer:

The U.S. customary system is a system of measurement that contains units for length, capacity, and weight. The metric system is a decimal system of measurement, based on powers of 10, that contains units for length, capacity, and mass. Key Vocabulary U.S. customary system, p. 142 metric system,p. 142 You can use unit rates and ratio tables to convert measures within the same system and between systems.

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 4

Try It

Question 1.
Convert 48 feet to yards.
Answer: 16 yards

Explanation:
Convert from feets to yards
We know that
1 yard = 3 feet
So, 48 feet = 48/3 = 16 yards

Question 2.
Convert 7 miles to kilometers. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from miles to kilometers.
1 mile = 1.6 km
7 miles = 7 × 1.6 = 11.2 kilometers

Question 3.
Convert 20 quarts to liters. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from quarts to liters.
1 quart = 0.94 liters
20 quarts = 20 × 0.94 = 18.92 liters

Question 4.
Convert 60 kilometers per hour to miles per hour. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Answer:
Convert from kilometers per hour to miles per hour.
1 kilometer per hour = 0.621 miles per hour
60 kilometer per hour = 37.28 miles per hour

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal

Question 5.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 5
Answer:
“Find the number of inches in 5 centimeters” has different words.

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 6
Answer:
Convert from meters per minute to feet per minute.
1 meter per minute = 3.2 feet per minute
12 meter per minute = 39.37 feet per minute

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 7
Answer:
Convert from feet per second to yard per minute
12 feet per second = 240 yard per minute

Question 8.
Will all of the water from a full two-liter bottle fit into a two-quart pitcher? Explain.
Answer:
1 liter = 1.05669 quarts
q/L = 1.05669/1
q/2 = 1.05669/1
q = 2 × 1.05669
q = 2.11338

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The speed of light is about 300,000 kilometers per second. The Sun is about 93 million miles from Earth. How many minutes does it take for sunlight to reach Earth?
Answer:

Question 10.
A race car driver’s goal is to complete a 1000-kilometer auto race in 4 hours or less. The driver’s average speed is 4200 meters per minute. Does the driver meet the goal? If not, how much faster (in meters per minute) must the driver be to meet the goal?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 8
Answer:

Converting Measures Homework & Practice 3.6

Review & Refresh

Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 1.
102 beats per 2 minutes
Answer: 51 per minute

Explanation:
102 beats per 2 minutes
102/2 = 51 beats per minute

Question 2.
60 shirts for every 5 clothing racks
Answer: 12 for 1 clothing racks

Explanation:
60 shirts for every 5 clothing racks
60/5 = 12
12 for 1 clothing racks

Question 3.
$100 donated for every 5 volunteers
Answer: 20 for 1 volunteer

Explanation:
$100 donated for every 5 volunteers
100/5 = 20
$20 donated for 1 volunteer

Question 4.
30 milliliters every 4 hours
Answer: 7.5 ml per hour

Explanation:
30 milliliters every 4 hours
30/4 = 7.5
So, 7.5 ml per hour

Question 5.
What is the LCM of 6, 12, and 18?
A. 6
B. 18
C. 36
D. 72
Answer: C

Explanation:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 6:
6, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48
Multiples of 12:
12, 24, 36, 48, 60
Multiples of 18:
18, 36, 54, 72
Therefore,
LCM(6, 12, 18) = 36
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Write the prime factorization of the number.
Question 6.
56
Answer: 2 x 2 x 2 x 7

Explanation:
56 = 2 × 28
= 2 × 2 × 14
= 2 × 2 × 2 × 7
Thus the prime factorization of the number 56 is 2 x 2 x 2 x 7

Question 7.
74
Answer: 2 × 37

Explanation:
74 = 2 × 37
Thus the prime factorization of the number 74 is 2 x 37

Question 8.
63
Answer: 3 × 3 × 7

Explanation:
63 = 3 × 21
= 3 × 3 × 7
Thus the prime factorization of the number 63 is 3 × 3 × 7

Question 9.
132
Answer: 2 x 2 x 3 x 11

Explanation:
132 = 2 × 66
= 2 × 2 × 33
= 2 × 2 × 3 × 11
Thus the prime factorization of the number 132 is 2 x 2 x 3 x 11

Write the product as a power.
Question 10.
6 × 6
Answer: The product of 6×6 is 6²

Question 11.
18 × 18 × 18 × 18
Answer: The product of 18×18×18×18 is 18⁴

Question 12.
12 × 12 × 12 × 12 × 12
Answer: The product of 12×12×12×12×12 is 12⁵

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING MEASURES Answer the question. Explain your answer. (See Explorations 1 & 2, p. 141.)
Question 13.
Which juice container is larger: 2 L or 1 gal?
Answer:
Convert from liters to gal
1 liter = 0.26 gal
2 liter = 0.52 gal
1 gal = 3.78 liter
Thus the juice container with 1 gal is larger

Question 14.
Which is longer:1 in. or 2 cm?
Answer: 1 inch is longer than 2 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to cm
1 inch = 2.54 cm
2.54 cm > 2 cm

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 9
Answer: 6 cups

Explanation:
Convert from pints to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
3 pints = 3 × 2 cups = 6 cups

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 10
Answer: 1.5 L

Explanation:
Convert from mL to L
1000 mL = 1 L
1500 mL = 1.5 L

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 11
Answer: 2.5 lb

Explanation:
Convert from ounces to lb
1 ounce = 0.0625
40 oz = 2.5 lb

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 12
Answer: 60 in.

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 = 60 inches
So, 5 ft = 60 in.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 13
Answer: 24 qt

Explanation:
Convert from gallons to quarts
1 gal = 4 qt
6 gal = 6 × 4 qt = 24 qt
So, 6 gal = 24 qt

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 14
Answer: 480 mm

Explanation:
Convert from cm to mm
1 cm = 10 mm
48 cm = 48 × 10 mm = 480 mm
So, 48 cm = 480 mm

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 15
Answer: 5 m

Explanation:
Convert from cm to m
1 cm = 0.01 m
500 cm = 500 × 0.01 m = 5 meters
So, 500 cm = 5 meters

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 16
Answer: 6

Explanation:
Convert from grams to kilograms
1 kg = 1000 g
6000g = 6 kg

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 17
Answer:

Explanation:
Convert from fl ounce to cups
1 fl oz = 0.125 cups
32 fl ouz = 4 cups

CONVERTING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 18
Answer: 13 qt

Explanation:
Convert from liters to quarts.
1 L = 1.05 qt
12 L = 12.608 qt
12 L ≈ 13 qt

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 19
Answer: 46 ft

Explanation:
Convert from meters to feet
1 meter = 3.28 feet
14 meter = 45.93 feet
14 m ≈ 46 feet

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 20
Answer: 1 m

Explanation:
Convert from feet to meter
1 feet = 0.3 m
4 feet = 1.21 m
4 ft ≈ 1 m

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 21
Answer: 29 kg

Explanation:
Convert from lb to kgs.
1 lb = 0.45 kg
64 lb = 29.02 kg
64 lb ≈ 29 kg

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 22
Answer: 0.186 mi

Explanation:
Convert from kg to miles
1 km = 0.621 miles
0.3 km = 0.186 miles

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 23
Answer: 191 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to centimeters.
1 inch = 2.54 centimeter
75.2 inch = 191.008 centimeter
75.2 in ≈ 191 cm

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 24
Answer: 34 lb

Explanation:
Convert from kg to lb
1 kg = 2.20 lb
17 kg = 37.47 lb
17 kg ≈ 34 lb

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 25
Answer: 6 inches

Explanation:
Convert from cm to inches.
1 cm = 0.39 in
15 cm = 5.90 in
15 cm ≈ 6 in

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 26
Answer: 14 km

Explanation:
Convert from miles to kilometers
1 mile = 1.609 km
9 miles = 14.48 km
9 miles ≈ 14 km

Question 33.
GRAPHING RELATIONSHIPS
Represent the relationship between each pair of units in a coordinate plane.
a. feet and yards
b. pounds and kilograms
Answer:

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Earth travels 30 kilometers each second as it revolves around the Sun. How many miles does Earth travel in 1 second?
Answer:

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The Mackinac Bridge in Michigan is the third-longest suspension bridge in the United States.
a. How high above the water is the roadway in meters?
b. The bridge has a length of 26,372 feet. What is the length in kilometers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 27
Answer:

USING CONVERSION FACTORS Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 28
Answer: 90 gal

Explanation:
Convert from cubic feet to the gallon
1 cu ft = 7.48 gal
12 cu ft = 12 × 7.48 gal = 89.76 gal
12 cu ft ≈ 90 gal

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 29
Answer: 6 L

Explanation:
Convert from quart to liter
1 qt = 0.94 L
6 qt = 5.67 L
6 qt ≈ 6 L

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 30
Answer: 1 gal

Explanation:
Convert from liters to gal
1 L = 0.264 gal
5 L = 5 × 0.264 gal = 1.32 gal
5 L ≈ 1 gal

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 31
Answer: 8 miles per hour

Explanation:
Convert from km per hour to miles per hour
1 km per hour = 0.621 miles per hour
13 km per hour = 8.07 miles per hour

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 32
Answer: 1320 liter per hour

Explanation:
Convert from liter per minute to liter per hour
1 liter per minute = 60 liter per hour
22 liter per minute = 1320 liter per hour

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 33
Answer: 0.175 miles per second

Explanation:
Convert from miles per hour to miles per second.
1 miles per hour = 0.0002 miles per second
63 miles per hour = 0.175 miles per second

Question 42.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend converts 8 liters to quarts. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 34
Answer:
Convert from liters to quarts
1 liter = 1.05 qt
8 liter = 8.45 qt (approx)
Yes, your friend is correct.

Question 43.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The diagram shows the number of quarts of blood the human heart pumps per minute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 35
a. How many quarts of blood does the human heart pump per hour?

Answer:
1 hour = 60 minutes
The heart pumps 5 quarts of blood per minute
1 min = 5 quarts
60 min = 60 × 5 quarts = 300 quarts
Thus the heart pumps 300 quarts of blood per hour.

b. How many liters of blood does the human heart pump per minute?
Answer:
Given,
The heart pumps 5 quarts of blood per minute
Convert from quarts to liters
1 quart = 0.94 L
5 quarts = 4.73 L
Thus it pumps 4.73 L of blood per minute.

Question 44.
PROBLEM SOLVING
After washing dishes, water drips from the faucet. The graph shows the number of cups of water that drip from the faucet over time. How many gallons of water drip from the faucet in 24 hours?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 36
Answer:

COMPARING MEASURES Copy and complete the statement using < or >.
Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 37
Answer: <

Explanation:
Convert from ounce to kg
1 oz = 0.02kg
30 oz = 0.85kg
Thus 30 oz < 8 kg

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 38
Answer: <

Explanation:
Convert from feet to centimeter
1 feet = 30.48 cm
6 feet = 182.88
Thus 6 feet < 300 cm

Question 47.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 39
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from gal to liter
1 gal = 3.78L
3 gal = 11.35L
Thus 3 gal > 6L

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 40
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from inches to mm.
1 in = 25.4mm
10 in = 254 mm
Thus 254mm > 200 mm

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 41
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from lb to grams
1 lb = 453.5g
5 lb = 2268g
2268g > 1200g
Thus 5 lb > 1200g

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 42
Answer: >

Explanation:
Convert from meters to feet
1 meter = 3.28 ft
1500 meter = 4921.26 ft
4921.26 ft > 3000 ft
Thus 1500 m > 3000 ft

USING DERIVED UNITS Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 43
Answer: 112 miles per hour

Explanation:
Convert from km per min to miles per hour
1 km per min = 37.28 miles per hour
3 km per min = 111.84 miles per hour
3 km per min ≈ 112 miles per hour

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 44
Answer: 1.13 qt per minute

Explanation:
Convert from gal per hour to qt per minute
1 gal per hour = 0.06 qt per minute
17 gal per hour = 1.13 qt per minute

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 45
Answer: 4 inches per second

Explanation:
Convert from cm per minute to inches per second
1 cm per minute = 0.006 inches per second
600 cm per minute = 3.93 inches per second
600 cm per minute ≈ 4 inches per second

Question 54.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You are riding on a zip line. Your speed is 15 miles per hour. What is your speed in feet per second?
Answer: 22 feet per second

Explanation:
Given,
You are riding on a zip line. Your speed is 15 miles per hour.
Convert from mile per hour to feet per second
1 mile per hour = 1.46 feet per second
15 miles per hour = 22 feet per second

Question 55.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Thunder is the sound caused by lightning. You hear thunder 5 seconds after a lightning strike. The speed of sound is about 1225 kilometers per hour. About how many miles away was the lightning?
Answer:

Question 56.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Boston, Massachusetts, and Buffalo, New York, are hit by snowstorms that last 3 days. Boston accumulates snow at a rate of 1.5 feet every 36 hours. Buffalo accumulates snow at a rate of 0.01 inch every minute. Which city accumulates more snow in 3 days? How much more snow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 46
Answer:

Question 57.
DIG DEEPER!
You travel 4000 feet every minute on a snowmobile.
a. The evening speed limit for snowmobiles in your state is 55 miles per hour. Is your speed less than or equal to the speed limit? Justify your answer.
b. What is your pace in minutes per mile?
c. You are 22 miles from your house at 6:00 P.M. If you continue to travel at this speed, do you reach your house in time for dinner at 6:30 P.M.?
Answer:

Question 58.
REASONING
The table shows the flying speeds of several birds.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates 3.6 47
a. Which bird is the fastest? Which is the slowest?
b. The peregrine falcon has a dive speed of 322 kilometers per hour. Is the dive speed of the peregrine falcon faster than the flying speed of any of the birds? Explain.
Answer:

Question 59.
STRUCTURE
Consider the conversion facts 1 inch = 2.54 centimeters and 1 centimeter ≈ 0.39 inch.
a. Write an expression for the exact number of inches in 1 centimeter.
b. Use a calculator to evaluate your expression in part(a). Explain why measurement conversions may be slightly different when converting between metric units and U.S. customary units using the conversion facts in the back of the book.
Answer:

Question 60.
DIG DEEPER!
One liter of paint covers 100 square feet. How many gallons of paint does it take to cover a room whose walls have an area of 800 square meters?
Answer:
Given,
One liter of paint covers 100 square feet.
First, convert 800 square meters to square feet. I calculated it to be 8611.13 sq ft
100 sq.ft/1 L x L = 8611.13.
Now convert L to gallons.
1gallon = 3.785 L

Ratios and Rates Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
You mix water, glue, and borax in the ratio of 3 : 1 : 2 to make slime. How many gallons of each ingredient should you use to make 0.75 gallon of slime?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 1
Understand the problem.
You know the ratio of the ingredients in the slime and that you are making 0.75 gallon of slime. You are asked to find the number of gallons of each ingredient needed to make 0.75 gallon of slime.

Make a plan.
Represent the ratio 3 : 1 : 2 using a tape diagram. Because there are 6 parts that represent 0.75 gallon, divide 0.75 by6 to find the value of one part of the tape diagram. Then use the value of one part to find the number of gallons of each ingredient you should use.

Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer:

Question 2.
You buy yogurt cups and frozen fruit bars for a party. Yogurt cups are sold in packages of six. The ratio of the number of yogurt cups in a package to the number of frozen fruit bars in a package is 3 : 2. What are the least numbers of packages you should buy in order to have the same numbers of yogurt cups and frozen fruit bars?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 2
Answer:

Question 3.
The greatest common factor of two whole numbers is 9. The ratio of the greater number to the lesser number is 6 : 5. What are the two numbers? Justify your answer.
Answer:

Performance Task

Oops! Unit Conversion Mistakes
At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Human Circulatory System.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cc 3

Ratios and Rates Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 1

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term ratio.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 2

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 3
1. value of a ratio
2. equivalent ratios
3. tape diagram
4. ratio table
5. rate
6. unit rate
7. conversion factor

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 4

3.1 Ratios (pp. 107–114)
Learning Target: Understand the concepts of ratios and equivalent ratios.

Write the ratio.
Question 1.
butterflies : caterpillars
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 5
Answer: 3 : 2

Explanation:
There are 3 butterflies and 2 caterpillars
Thus the ratio is 3 : 2

Question 2.
saxophones : trumpets
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 6
Answer: 6 : 3

Explanation:
There are 6 saxophones and 3 trumpets
Thus the ratio is 6: 3 and the equivalent ratio is 1 : 2

Question 3.
The ratio of hydrogen atoms to nitrogen atoms in a container is 2 : 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 7
a. Find and interpret the value of the ratio.
b. In another container, the number of hydrogen atoms is 3 times the number of nitrogen atoms. Write the ratio of hydrogen atoms to nitrogen atoms.
Answer:

Determine whether the ratios are equivalent.
Question 4.
5 : 2 and 30 : 12
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
30/12 = 5/2
5 : 2 = 5 : 2
Thus the ratios are equivalent

Question 5.
4 : 3 and 8 : 7
Answer: No

Explanation:
4/3 ≠ 8/7
Thus the ratios are not equivalent

Question 6.
6 : 4 and 18 : 6
Answer: No

Explanation:
6 : 4 and 18 : 6
6/4 = 3/2
18/6 = 3
3/2 ≠ 3
Thus the ratios are not equivalent

Question 7.
18 : 12 and 3 : 2
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
18 : 12 and 3 : 2
18/12 = 3/2
3 : 2 = 3 : 2
Thus the ratios are equivalent

Question 8.
Write two equivalent ratios that have values of \(\frac{5}{7}\)
Answer: \(\frac{10}{14}\) and \(\frac{15}{21}\)

Question 9.
During a chess match, there are 12 pieces left on the board. The ratio of white pieces to black pieces is 2 : 1. How many white pieces are on the board?
Answer:

Question 10.
You run at a pace of 2 miles every 17 minutes. Your friend runs at a pace of 3 miles every 24 minutes. Are you and your friend running at the same pace? If not, who is running faster?
Answer:

3.2 Using Tape Diagram (pp. 115-120)
Learning Target: Use tape diagrams to model and solve ratio problems.

The tape diagram represents the ratio of the time you spend reading to the time your friend spends reading. You read for 8 hours. How many hours does your friend spend reading?
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 11
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 12
Answer:

Question 13.
The tape diagram represents the ratio of customers to guides on a mountain climbing trip. There are 6 guides on the trip. How many customers are on the trip?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 13
Answer:

A container has peppermint gum and spearmint gum. You are given the number of pieces of peppermint gum in the container and the ratio of peppermint gum to spearmint gum. Find the number of pieces of spearmint gum in the container.
Question 14.
24 peppermint; 8 to 5
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 8 : 5
8 + 5 = 13
8/13 × x = 24
x = 24 × 13/8
x = 39
5/13 × 39 = 15

Question 15.
18 peppermint; 2 : 3
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 2 : 3
2 + 3 = 5
2/5 × x = 18
x = 18 × 5/2
x = 45
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
3/5 × 45 = 27
Thus the number of spearmint gum = 27

Question 16.
32 peppermint; 8 to 7
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 8 : 7
8 + 7 = 15
8/15 × x = 32
x = 32 × 15/8
x = 4 × 15
x = 60
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
7/15 × 60 = 28

Question 17.
40 peppermint; 5 : 2
Answer:
Let the total number of peppermint gum and spearmint gum in the container = x
The ratio is 5 : 2
5 + 2 = 7
5/7 × x = 40
x = 40 × 7/5
x = 8 × 7
x = 56
Number of spearmint gum will be now
Ratio of spearmint/total ratio × total number of gums = number of spearmint
2/7 × 56 = 16

A theater sells adult tickets and student tickets. You are given the total number of tickets sold and the ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold. How many of each type of ticket are sold?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 18
Question 18.
120 tickets; 6 to 4
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 6 : 4
6 + 4 = 10
6/10 = x/120
6 × 120 = x × 10
10x = 720
x = 720/10 = 72
x = 72
The number of student tickets would be 120 – 72 = 48 student tickets

Question 19.
165 tickets; 8 to 7
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 8 : 7
8 + 7 = 15
8/15 = x/165
8 × 165 = x × 15
1320 = 15x
x = 1320/15
x = 88
The number of student tickets would be 165 – 88 = 77 student tickets

Question 20.
210 tickets; 16 : 5
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 16 : 5
16 + 5 = 21
16/21 = x/210
16 × 210 = x × 21
3360 = 21x
x = 3360/21
x = 160
The number of student tickets would be 210 – 160 = 50 student tickets

Question 21.
248 tickets; 5 : 3
Answer:
The ratio of adult tickets sold to student tickets sold is 5 : 3
5 + 3 = 8
5/8 = x/248
5 × 248 = 8 × x
1240 = 8x
x = 1240/8
x = 155
The number of student tickets would be 248 – 155 = 93 student tickets

Question 22.
You perform 7 sit-ups for every 2 pull-ups as part of an exercise routine. You perform 25 more sit-ups than pull-ups. How many sit-ups and how many pull-ups do you perform?
Answer: 35 sit ups and 10 pullups

Explanation:
Given,
You perform 7 sit-ups for every 2 pull-ups as part of an exercise routine.
You perform 25 more sit-ups than pull-ups.
so we know that for 7 situps you do 2 pullups
so the possible values would be
7,2
14,4
21, 6
28, 8
35, 10, and so on
so now you just look at which two numbers have a difference of 25
when subtracting them, you’ll notice that 35 and 10 have a difference of 25.

3.3 Using Ratio Tables (pp. 121-128)
Learning Target: Use ratio tables to represent equivalent ratios and solve ratio problems.

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-23

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-24

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-25

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-26

Find the missing quantity in the double number line.
Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-27

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-28

Question 29.
Use all four operations to complete the ratio table. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 29
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cr-29

Question 30.
A song has 12 beats every 5 seconds. How many beats are there in 30 seconds?
Answer: 72 beats in 30 seconds

Explanation:
Given,
A song has 12 beats every 5 seconds.
5 seconds = 12 beats
1 second = 12/5 = 2.4 beats
30 seconds = 30 × 2.4 beats = 72 beats
Thus 72 beats are there in 30 seconds.

Question 31.
On New Year’sEve, the Times Square ball is lowered 47 feet every 20 seconds. How long does it take for the ball to be lowered 141 feet?
Answer: 60 seconds

Explanation:
On New Year’sEve, the Times Square ball is lowered 47 feet every 20 seconds.
All you have to do is cross multiply and isolate x.
47/20 × 141/x
47x = 2820
x = 60 seconds

Question 32.
Welder A charges $300 for every 4 hours of labor. Welder B charges $240 for every 3 hours of labor. Which welder offers a better deal?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 32
Answer:
Welder A has a better deal because for each hour welder A would charge $75 while welder B would charge $80
Welder A:
300/4 = $75
Welder B:
240/3 = $80

Question 33.
You make lemonade by adding 11 cups of water for every 3 cups of lemon juice. Your friend makes lemonade by adding 9 cups of water for every 2 cups of lemon juice. Whose lemonade is more watered down?
Answer:
Well first I did was I found out that both 3 and 2 go into 12.
2 goes into 12 6 times. 9 × 6 is 54.
3 goes into 12 four times.
11 × 4 is 44.
54 is greater than 44 therefore the answer would be your friend.

3.4 Graphing Ratio Relationships (pp. 129-134)
Learning Target: Represent ratio relationships in a coordinate plane.

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 34
Answer:

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 35
Answer:

Question 36.
You buy magnesium sulfate for $1.50 per pound.
a. Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
b. How much does 3.5 pounds of magnesium sulfate cost?
Answer:

Question 37.
A 5-ounce can of tuna costs $0.90. A 12-ounce can of tuna costs $2.40. Graph each ratio relationship in the same coordinate plane. Which is the better buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 37
Answer:

3.5 Rates and Unit Rates (pp. 135–140)
Learning Target: Understand the concept of a unit rate and solve rate problems.

Write a unit rate for the situation.
Question 38.
12 stunts in 4 movies
Answer: 3

Explanation:
12 stunts in 4 movies
12/4 = 3
3 stunts in 1 movie

Question 39.
3600 stitches in 3 minutes
Answer: 1200

Explanation:
3600 stitches in 3 minutes
3600/3 = 1200
1200 stiches in 1 minute

Question 40.
$18 for 6 pounds
Answer: 3

Explanation:
$18 for 6 pounds
18/6 = 3
$3 for 1 pound

Question 41.
240 people in 5 buses
Answer: 48

Explanation:
240 people in 5 buses
240/5 = 48
48 people in 1 bus

Question 42.
A train travels 120 miles in 3 hours. Write two unit rates that describe the relationship between the number of miles and the number of hours the train travels.
Answer:

Question 43.
Mercury orbits the Sun 3 times in 264 days.
a. How many times does Mercury orbit the Sun in 440 days?
b. How many days does it take Mercury to orbit the Sun 8 times?
Answer:

Question 44.
A cyclist travels 4 miles in 20 minutes. At this rate, how many miles does the cyclist travel in 30 minutes?
Answer:
Given,
A cyclist travels 4 miles in 20 minutes.
20/4 = 5 minutes
1 mile in 5 minutes
30 minutes divided by 5
30/5 = 6 minutes
So, 6 miles in 6 minutes

Decide whether the rates are equivalent.
Question 45.
18 keystrokes in 3 seconds
48 keystrokes in 16 seconds
Answer: No

Explanation:
18 keystrokes in 3 seconds
48 keystrokes in 16 seconds
18 : 3 :: 48 : 16
6 : 1 :: 3 : 1
The rates are not equivalent

Question 46.
210 miles in 3 hours
780 miles in 12 hours
Answer: No

Explanation:
210 miles in 3 hours
780 miles in 12 hours
210 : 3 = 70
780 : 12 = 65
The rates are not equivalent

Question 47.
You and a friend are picking up trash on a beach. You fill 2 bags with trash in 28 minutes. Your friend fills 3 bags with trash in 48 minutes. Who fills bags with trash faster? How much sooner will the faster person fill 7 bags with trash?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 47
Answer:
Divide 28 minutes by the 2 bags of trash.
You fill 1 bag of trash every 14 minutes.
28 ÷ 2 = 14
Your friend fills 1 bag of trash every 16 minutes.
48 ÷ 3 = 16
7 bags × 16 min = 105 min
7 bags × 14 min = 98 min
105 – 98 = 7 minutes

3.6 Converting Measures (pp. 141–148)
Learning Target: Use ratio reasoning to convert units of measure.

Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 48
Answer: 20 fl. oz

Explanation:
Convert from cups to fluid ounces
1 cup = 8 fluid ounce
2.5 cups = 20 fluid ounces

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 49
Answer: 4 yd

Explanation:
Convert from feet to yards
1 feet = 0.33 yard
12 feet = 4 yards

Question 50.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 50
Answer: 3.5

Explanation:
Convert from milligrams to grams
1 mg = 0.001 g
3500 mg = 3.5 grams

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 51
Answer:
Convert from liters to quarts
1 L = 1.05 qt
3 L = 3.17 qt
Thus 3 L ≈ 3 qt

Question 52.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 52
Answer: 23 cm

Explanation:
Convert from inches to centimeters
1 in = 2.54 cm
9.2 in = 23.36 cm
9.2 in ≈ 23 cm

Question 53.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 53
Answer: 7 kg

Explanation:
Convert from lb to kg
1 lb = 0.45 kg
15 lb = 6.80 kg
15 lb ≈ 7 kg

Question 54.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 54
Answer: $120

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
1 min = $2
60 min = x
x = 60 × 2
x = $120

Question 55.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 55
Answer: 52

Explanation:
Convert from gal to qt
1 gal = 4 qt
13 gal = 52 qt

Question 56.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 56
Answer: 0.040

Question 57.
Explain how to use conversion factors to find the number of fluid ounces in any given number of quarts of a liquid.
Answer:

Question 58.
Water flows through a pipe at a rate of 10 gallons per minute. How many gallons of water flow through the pipe in an hour?
Answer:
Given,
Water flows through a pipe at a rate of 10 gallons per minute.
1 hour = 60 minute
1 minute = 10 gallon
60 minutes = 60 × 10 gallon = 600 gallon
Thus 600 gallons of water flow through the pipe in an hour.

Question 59.
Germany suggests a speed limit of 130 kilometers per hour on highways. Is the speed shown greater than the suggested limit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cr 59
Answer:

Question 60.
The distance between two stars increases at a rate of 3 centimeters per month. What is the rate in inches per year?
Answer: 14.17 inches

Explanation:
Given,
The distance between two stars increases at a rate of 3 centimeters per month.
3 cm – 1 month
1 year = 12 months
3 × 12 = 36 centimeters
Convert from centimeters to inches
36 centimeters = 14.17 inches

Ratios and Rates Practice Test

Question 1.
Write the ratio of scooters to bikes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 1
Answer:
There are 3 scooter and 3 bikes
Thus the ratio of scooters to bikes is 3 : 3

Question 2.
Determine whether the ratios 8 : 7 and 15 : 14 are equivalent.
Answer: The ratios 8 : 7 and 15 : 14 are not equivalent.
The equivalent ratio of 8:7 is 16 : 14.

Find the missing values in the ratio table. Then write the equivalent ratios.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-3
The missing values are 12, 18
The ratio is 2:1
The equivalent ratio of 2 : 1 is 12 : 6 and 36 : 18

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-4
The missing values are 54, 10
The ratio is 2 : 9
The equivalent ratio of 2 : 9 is 12 : 54 and 10 : 45

Question 5.
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 5
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapter 3 Answers img_2

Question 6.
You travel 224 miles in 4 hours. Find the unit rate.
Answer: 56

Explanation:
Given,
You travel 224 miles in 4 hours.
1 hour = x
4 × x = 224
x = 224/4
x = 56 miles
The unit rate is 56 miles.

Copy and complete the statement. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-7

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to inches.
1 cm = 0.39
6 cm = 6 × 0.39
6 cm = 2.34 inches

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-8

Explanation:
Convert from liters to gal
1 liter = 0.26 gal
30 liter = 7.92 gal

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-9

Explanation:
Convert from hours to week
1 hour = 0.005 = 5/1000
10 gal/h = 2000/wk

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-pt-10

Explanation:
Convert from feet to meters
1 feet = 0.30m
4 feet = 1.21 m
4 ft ≈ 1m

Question 11.
During a baseball season, Team A scores 9 runs for every 7 runs that Team B scores. The total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440. How many runs does each team score?
Answer:
Team A scores 810
Team B scores 630

Explanation:
During a baseball season, Team A scores 9 runs for every 7 runs that Team B scores.
The total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440.
Let b scores x runs
Then a scores x + (2 × x/7)
Because every 7 runs of b, a is scores more 2 runs.
Total number of runs scored by both teams is 1440
a + b = 1440
x + (2 × x/7) + x = 1440
(16 × x)/7 = 1440
16 × x = 1440 × 7
16x = 10080
x = 10080/16
x = 630
Thus team b scores 630 runs
Team a scores is x + (2 × x/7) = 810 runs

Question 12.
At a movie theater, the ratio of filled seats to empty seats is 6 : 5. There are 120 empty seats. How many seats are filled?
Answer: 144

Explanation:
Given,
At a movie theater, the ratio of filled seats to empty seats is 6 : 5. There are 120 empty seats.
Number of filled = 6
Number of empty = 5
120/5 = 24 then multiply it by 6 to get 144.
Thus the number of filled seats = 144

Question 13.
You and your friend mix water and citric acid. You add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water. Your friend adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water. Whose mixture is more acidic?
Answer: A’s mixture is more acidic

Explanation:
Given,
You and your friend mix water and citric acid.
You add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water.
Your friend adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water.
A add 3 cups of citric acid for every 16 cups of water, the ratio = 3/16
B adds 2 cups of citric acid for every 12 cups of water = 2/12
LCM of 16 and 12 are 48
16 – 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96
12 – 12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72
A – 3/16 × 3/3 = 9/48
B – 2/12 × 4/4 = 8/48
We found that in terms of 48 cups of water, friend A mixes 9 cups of acid while friend B mixes 8 cups of acid, means A is adding more acid than B and hence friend A’s mixture is more acidic.

Question 14.
Determine which windsurfer is faster. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates pt 14
Answer: The second windsurfer is faster than the first windsurfer.
First convert from meter to feet
1 meter = 3.28
5 meter = 16.40
Convert from minute to second
1 min = 60 sec
16.40 × 60 = 984 feet
984 feet is greater than 720 feet

Question 15.
In a rectangle, the ratio of the length to the width is 5 : 2. The length of the rectangle is 13.875 feet greater than the width. What are the perimeter and the area of the rectangle?
Answer:
P = 64.75 feet
A = 213.91 feet

Explanation:
Given,
In a rectangle, the ratio of the length to the width is 5 : 2.
The length of the rectangle is 13.875 feet greater than the width.
13.875 ÷ 3 = 4.625 feet
4.625 × 5 = 23.125 feet
So, the length of the rectangle is 23.125 feet
4.625 × 2 = 9.25 feet
So, the width of the rectangle is 9.25 feet
We know that, Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w
P = 2(23.125) + 2(9.25)
P = 64.75 feet
Area of the rectangle = l × w
A = 23.125 × 9.25
Area = 213.91 sq. feet

Ratios and Rates Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 1
Question 1.
Which number is equivalent to \(\frac{2}{9}\) ÷ \(\frac{4}{5}\)?
A. \(\frac{8}{14}\)
B. \(\frac{5}{18}\)
C. \(\frac{7}{13}\)
D. 3\(\frac{3}{5}\)
Answer: \(\frac{5}{18}\)

Explanation:
Dividing two fractions is the same as multiplying the first fraction by the reciprocal (inverse) of the second fraction.
Take the reciprocal of the second fraction by flipping the numerator and denominator and changing the operation to multiplication. Then the equation becomes
\(\frac{2}{9}\) × \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{36}\)
This fraction can be reduced by dividing both the numerator and denominator by the Greatest Common Factor of 10 and 36 using
GCF is 2
\(\frac{10}{36}\) ÷ \(\frac{2}{2}\) = \(\frac{5}{18}\)
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Your speed while waterskiing is 22 miles per hour. How fast are you traveling in kilometers per hour? Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 2
Answer: 35 kilometers

Explanation:
Given,
Your speed while waterskiing is 22 miles per hour.
Convert from miles to kilometers
1 mile = 1.609 kilometer
22 miles = 22 × 1.609 = 35.40 kilometers

Question 3.
Which number is equivalent to the expression below?
2 . 42 + 3(6 ÷ 2)
F. 25
G. 41
H. 73
I. 105
Answer:
2 . 42 + 3(6 ÷ 2)
2 . 42 + 3(3)
2 . 42 + 9
2 × 16 + 9
32+9 = 41
Thus the correct answer is option G.

Question 4.
The tape diagram models the ratio of red beads to green beads in a bracelet. The bracelet uses 12 red beads. How many green beads are in the bracelet?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 4
A. 4 green beads
B. 8 green beads
C. 12 green beads
D. 20 green beads
Answer: 8 green beads

Explanation:
Given,
The tape diagram models the ratio of red beads to green beads in a bracelet. The bracelet uses 12 red beads.
From the above figure we observe that there are 3
3 × 4 = 12
1 box = 4 beads
There are 2 green boxes
2 × 4 = 8
Thus there 8 green beads in the bracelet.

Question 5.
What is the least common multiple of 8, 12, and 20?
F. 24
G. 40
H. 60
I. 120
Answer: 120

Explanation:
Find and list multiples of each number until the first common multiple is found. This is the lowest common multiple.
Multiples of 8:
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 112, 120, 128, 136
Multiples of 12:
12, 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 84, 96, 108, 120, 132, 144
Multiples of 20:
20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160
Therefore,
LCM(8, 12, 20) = 120
Thus the correct answer is option I.

Question 6.
Which number is equivalent to 2.34 × 1.08 × 5.6?
A. 12.787632
B. 14.15232
C. 23.5872
D. 14,152.32
Answer: 14.15232

Explanation:
Multiply the three numbers
2.34 × 1.08 × 5.6 we get 14.15232
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 7.
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.50. At this rate, what is the cost (in dollars) of 10 pencils?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 6
Answer: $1.25

Explanation:
Given,
The school store sells 4 pencils for $0.50.
Cost of 1 pencil is 0.50/4 = 0.125
0.125 × 10 = 1.25
Thus the cost of 10 pencils is $1.25

Question 8.
A factor tree for 14,700 is shown. Which factor of 14,700 is not a perfect square?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 7
F. 25
G. 49
H. 196
I. 588
Answer:
The given number is 14700
Now we prime factorize the number.
14700 = 147 × 100
= 7 × 21 × 10 × 10
= 7 × 7 × 3 × 5 × 2 × 5 × 2
= 2 × 2 × 3 × 5 × 5 × 7 × 7
We see that each of 2, 5 and 7 appears twice in the factorization. But 3 appears only once, for which the number 14700 is not a perfect square.
∴ we divide 14700 by 3 to get a perfect square.
∴ the perfect square number is
= 14700 ÷ 3
= 4900
= 70²
588 is not a perfect square
Thus the correct answer is option I.

Question 9.
Which of the following is a ratio of frogs to snakes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 8
A. 4 : 8
B. 8 : 12
C. 8 : 4
D. 4 : 12
Answer: 8:4

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can write the ratio from frogs to snakes.
There are 8 frogs
There are 4 snakes
8:4
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 10.
Which expression is equivalent to 36?
F. 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
G. 3 × 5
H. 5 × 5 × 5
I. 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3
Answer: 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
The expression equivalent to 36 is 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3
Thus the correct answer is option F.

Question 11.
Which is the correct order of operations when evaluating 5 + 4 × 23?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 11
A. k, t, u
B. n, s, q
C. m, k, r
D. m, p, l
Answer: k, t, u

Explanation:
The correct order of operations when evaluating 5 + 4 × 23 is Add 5 and 4, Multiply 9 and 2 and Evaluate 18³
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 12.
The ratio of scrambled eggs to hard-boiled eggs served at a restaurant is 6 : 2.
Part A Make a ratio table showing three possible combinations of
Part B Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates cp 12
Part C Use the graph to find the number of hard-boiled eggs served when the restaurant serves 15 scrambled eggs.
Answer:
Part A – The three possible combinations are
3 : 1
12 : 4
18 : 6
Part B –
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-6-Chapter-3-Ratios-and-Rates-cp-12
Part C-
The ratio is 3:1
The ratio for 15 scrambled eggs
15 :5

Conclusion:

From the above-given links, you can Download Middle School Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 3 Ratios and Rates. With the help of the direct links given above you can download various preparatory materials for free of cost. Therefore, make use of the links and practice well for the exams. Stay tuned to our site to get the trending updates on BIM 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter-wise along with the guide to score top marks in the exam. Clear all your doubts through the below comment section given.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 include questions on System of Linear Equations by Graphing, Substitution, Elimination, Connecting Concepts, etc. All the Problems in the Big Ideas Grade 8 Ch 5 System of Linear Equations are provided in a simple and easy-to-understand language. Learn the problem-solving methods used by referring to our Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Answers Chapter 5 System of Linear Equations and apply them to similar kinds of problems. Download the BIM Chapter 5 System of Linear Equations Answer Key and understand the related concepts in no time.

Big Ideas Math Book 8th Grade Answer Key Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Ch 5 is curated by subject experts adhering to the latest syllabus guidelines. Practice as many times as possible and attempt the exams with utmost confidence and score well. Enhance your subject knowledge and gain a deeper understanding of concepts at the surface level. Simply click on the direct links available and begin preparing the respective topics in no time.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Graphing

Lesson: 2 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Substitution

Lesson: 3 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Elimination

Lesson: 4 Solving Special Systems of Linear Equations

Chapter: 5 – Systems of Linear Equations

Systems of Linear Equations STEAM Video/Performance

STEAM Video

Gold Alloys

An alloy is a mixture of different metals melted together at high temperatures. A dental filling is created using a gold alloy. What are other uses of alloys?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 1.1

Watch the STEAM Video “Gold Alloys.” Then answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Enid says that the proportion of gold in an alloy can be measured in karats. For example, 24 karats represent 100% gold and 18 karats represent 75% gold.
a. A dental filling is 9 karats. What percent of the filling is gold?
b. A watch is 60% gold. How many karats is the watch?

Answer:
a. 37.5% of the filling is gold.
b. 14.4 karats are the watch

Explanation:
a. A dental filling is 9 karats.
24 karats represent 100% gold
So, 9 karats = (100 * 9)/24
= 900/24
= 37.5%
37.5% of the filling is gold.
b. A watch is 60% gold
24 karats represent 100% gold
So, watch = (60 * 24)/100
= 1440/100
= 14.4
14.4 karats are the watch

Question 2.
What percent gold is each described alloy?
a. A mixture of 2 grams 10-karat gold and 2 grams 14-karat gold
b. A mixture of 6 grams 24-karat gold and 4 grams 9-karat gold

Answer:
a. 200%
b. 750%

Explanation:
a. 24 karats represents 100% gold
10 karat gold is 125/3 %
14 -karat gold gold is 175/3 %
2 grams 10-karat gold = 2(125/3) = 250/3
2 grams 14-karat gold = 2(175/3) = 350/3
The alloy mixture = (250 + 350)/3
= 600/3 = 200
b. 6 grams 24-karat gold
6 grams = 600%
9-karat gold = 75/2
4 grams 9-karat gold = 4(75)/2 = 150%
The alloy mixture = 600% + 150% = 750%

Performance Task

Mixing Alloys

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given a list of gold alloys available at a jewelry store.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 2
You will use a system of equations to determine the amounts of the given alloys that a jeweler needs to create a new alloy. Why might a jeweler need to create a mixture with a specific proportion of gold?

Systems of Linear Equations Getting Ready for Chapter 5

Getting Ready for Chapter 5

Chapter Exploration

Question 1.
Work with a partner. Your family starts a bed-and-breakfast. You spend $500 fixing up a bedroom to rent. The cost for food and utilities is $10 per night. Your family charges $60 per night to rent the bedroom.
a. Write an equation that represents the costs.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 3
b. Write an equation that represents the revenue (income).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 4
c. A set of two (or more) linear equations is called a system of linear equations. Write the system of linear equations for this problem.

Answer:
a. C = 10x + 500
b. R = 60x
c. The system of linear equations are
C = 10x + 500
R = 60x

Explanation:
a. Cost, C = $10 per night . Number of nights, x + $500
C = 10x + 500
b.
Revenue, R = $60 per night . Number of nights x
R = 60x
c. The system of linear equations are
C = 10x + 500
R = 60x

Question 2.
Work with a partner. Use a graphing calculator to solve the system.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 5
a. Enter the equations into your calculator. Then graph the equations. What is an appropriate window?
b. On your graph, how can you determine which line is the graph of which equation? Label the equations on the graph shown.
c. Visually estimate the point of intersection of the graphs.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 6
d. To find the solution, use the intersect feature to find the point of intersection. The solution is Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 7

Answer:
The solution is (10, 600)

Explanation:
 Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations
The solution is (10, 600)

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 7.1

Lesson 5.1 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Graphing

EXPLORATION 1
Work with a partner. You charge your headphones and your phone. The equations below represent the battery powers p% of the devices after x minutes of charging.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 8
a. You check the battery power of each device every 10 minutes. Copy and complete the table. How do the devices’ battery powers compare?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 8.1
b. After how much time do the devices have the same battery power? What is the battery power at that time? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 9
c. The solutions of a linear equation are all the points on its graph. How many solutions can two linear equations share? Explain your reasoning.
d. Graph the battery power equations in the same coordinate plane. What do you notice?
e. Use a graphing calculator to check your answers in part(b). Explain your method.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 10

Answer:
a. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 30
d. The solution is (75/2, 125/2)

Explanation:
a. Headphones equation is p = 5/3 x
p1 = 5/3 (10) = 50/3, p2 = 5/3 (20) = 100/3, p3 = 5/3 (30) = 50, p4 = 5/3 (40) = 200/3, p5 = 5/3 (50) = 250/3
p6 = 5/3 (60) = 100
Phone equation is p = x + 25
p1 = 10 + 25 = 35, p2 = 20 + 25 = 45, p3 = 30 + 25 = 55, p4 = 40 + 25 = 65
p5 = 50 + 25 = 75, p6 = 60 + 25 = 85
b. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 31
The solution is (75/2, 125/2)
p = 5/3 x, p = x + 25
Put x = 75/2
p = 5/3 (75/2)
= 125/2
p = 75/2 + 25
= 125/2

5.1 Lesson

Try It

Solve the system by graphing.

Question 1.
y = x – 1
y  = -x + 3

Answer:
The solution is (1, 2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = x – 1, y  = -x + 3
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 1
The graphs appear to intersect at (1, 2)
So, the solution is (1, 2)

Question 2.
y = -5x + 14
y = x – 10

Answer:
The solution is (4, -6)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -5x + 14, y = x – 10
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 2
The lines intersect at (4, -6)
So, the solution is (4, -6)

Question 3.
y = x
y = 2x + 1

Answer:
The solution is (-1, -1)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = x, y = 2x + 1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 3
The lines intersect at (-1, -1)
So, the solution is (-1, -1)

Question 4.
y = -4x – 7
x + y = 2

Answer:
The solution is (-3, 5)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -4x – 7, x + y = 2
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 4
The lines intersect at (-3, 5)
So, the solution is (-3, 5)

Question 5.
x – y = 5
-3x +  y = -1

Answer:
The solution is (-2, -7)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x – y = 5, -3x +  y = -1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 5
The lines intersect at (-2, -7)
So, the solution is (-2, -7)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 16

Answer:
The solution is (4, -8)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 1/2 x + y = -6, 6x + 2y = 8
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 7
The lines intersect at (4, -8)
So, the solution is (4, -8)

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by graphing.

Question 7.
y = x + 1
y = 4x +1

Answer:
The solution is (0, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = x + 1, y = 4x +1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 8
The lines intersect at (0, 1)
So, the solution is (0, 1)

Question 8.
3x – y = -1
y = -x + 5

Answer:
The solution is (1, 4).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 3x – y = -1, y = -x + 5
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 9
The lines intersect at (1, 4)
So, the solution is (1, 4).

Question 9.
x + 2y = 3
-x + 3y = 7

Answer:
The solution is (-1, 2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x + 2y = 3, -x + 3y = 7
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 10
The lines intersect at (-1, 2)
So, the solution is (-1, 2).

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain why the solution of a system of linear equations is the point of intersection of their graphs.

Answer:
The solution of a system of linear equations in two variables is an ordered pair that is a solution of each equation in the system. The ordered pair is obtained by drawing a graph for two equations and the point of intersection.

Question 11.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 20

Answer:
The solution of the system is (1, 6)
The graphs of the equations intersect at (1, 6)
Ordered pair (1, 6) makes both equations true

Explanation:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 32
The point of intersection is the solution.
The solution is (1, 6).

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
Your family attends a comic convention. Each autograph costs $20 and each photograph costs $50. Your family buys a total of 5 autographs and photographs for $160. How many photographs does your family buy?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 21

Answer:
The number of photographs the family buys will be 2.

Explanation:
Each autograph costs $20 and photograph costs $50
According to the question, the family buys a total of 5 items including both autographs and photographs for $160.
Let’s assume the number of autographs bought be x, while the number of photographs is 5 – x
Thus, cost to buy autographs will be 20* x = 20x and photographs will be 50(5 – x) = 250 – 50x
now, total cost becomes 20x + 250 – 50x, which will be equal to 160. lets find number of each items x
20x + 250 – 50x = 160
-30x = 160 – 250
-30x = -90
x = 3
Hence, the cost of buying autographs will be $20 * 3 = $60 and the cost to buy photographs will be (250 – 50) * 3 = 250 – 150 = $100
The number of photographs the family buys will be 5 – 3 = 2

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Two apps on your phone take away points for using your phone at school. You have 140 points on the first app and 80 points on the second app when a school day begins. Each time you check your phone, you lose 10 points on your first app and p points on your second app. After you check your phone ten times, you have the same number of points on each app. Find the value of p.

Answer:
p = 4

Explanation:
App one has 140 points and 80 points on the second app
As per the question, app one loses 10 points for each check while app second loses p points. We check the phone 10 times
So, total points lost by app 1 will be 10 * 10 = 100, and points lost by app 2 will be p * 10 = 10p
After 10 times both apps are left with the same points.
So let’s find the value of p
Thus, points left in the first app will be 140 – 100 = 40 while in the second app will be 80 – 10p
40 = 80 – 10p
10p = 80 – 40
10p = 40
p = 40/10
p = 4

Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Graphing Homework & Practice 5.1

Review & Refresh

Write an equation in point-slope form of the line that passes through the given point and has the given slope.

Question 1.
(3, -4); m = 1

Answer:
y = x – 7

Explanation:
Given that,
(3, -4); m = 1
x₁ = 3, y₁ = -4
Slope intercept form of a line is (y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
Therefore, (y – (-4)) = 1(x – 3)
(y + 4) = (x – 3)
y = x – 3 – 4
y = x – 7

Question 2.
(5, 6); m = \(\frac{3}{5}\)

Answer:
5y = 3x + 15

Explanation:
Given that,
(5, 6); m = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
x₁ = 5, y₁ = 6
Slope intercept form of a line is (y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
Therefore, (y – 6) = 3/5(x – 5)
5(y – 6) = 3(x – 5)
5y – 30 = 3x – 15
5y = 3x – 15 + 30
5y = 3x + 15

Question 3.
(1, 10); m = –\(\frac{1}{4}\)

Answer:
4y = 41 – x

Explanation:
Given that,
(1, 10); m = –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
x₁ = 1, y₁ = 10
Slope intercept form of a line is (y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
Therefore, (y – 10) = -1/4(x – 1)
4(y – 10) = -1(x – 1)
4y – 40 = -x + 1
4y = -x + 1 + 40
4y = 41 – x

Solve the equation. Check your solution

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 21.1

Answer:
c = 8

Explanation:
Given equation is 3/4 c – 1/4 c + 3 = 7
2/4 c + 3 = 7
1/2 c = 7 – 3
1/2 c = 4
c = 4 * 2
c = 8
Substituting c = 8 in 3/4 c – 1/4 c + 3 = 7
3/4 (8) – 1/4 (8) + 3 = 6 – 2 + 3
= 9 – 2 = 7

Question 5.
5(2 – y) + y = -6

Answer:
y = 4

Explanation:
Given equation is 5(2 – y) + y = -6
10 – 5y + y = -6
10 – 4y = -6
10 + 6 = 4y
4y = 16
y = 16/4
y = 4
Substituting y = 4 in 5(2 – y) + y = -6
5(2 – 4) + 4 = 5(-2) + 4
= -10 + 4 = -6

Question 6.
6x – 3(x + 8) = 9

Answer:
x = 11

Explanation:
Given equation is 6x – 3(x + 8) = 9
6x – 3x – 24 = 9
3x – 24 = 9
3x = 9 + 24
3x = 33
x = 33/3
x = 11
Substituting x = 11 in 6x – 3(x + 8) = 9
6(11) – 3(11 + 8) = 66 – 3(19)
= 66 – 57 = 9

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
USING A GRAPH TO SOLVE A PROBLEM
The equations below represent the numbers y of tickets sold after x weeks for two different local music festivals. (See Exploration 1, p. 199.)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 22

Question 7.
You check the ticket sales for both festivals each week for 10 weeks. Create a table for the ticket sales each week. How do the festivals’ ticket sales compare?

Answer:
We can say that tickets for the country Music Festival sold more by mid the 4th week. After the mid of 4th-week tickets for the Pop Music Festival sold more than the country music festival.

Explanation:
Ticket sales for a country music festival and pop music festival are calculated in the tables below for 10 weeks
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 33
From the above tables, we can say that tickets for the country Music Festival sold more by mid of the 4th week. After the mid of 4th-week tickets for the Pop Music Festival sold more than the country music festival.

Question 8.
After how much time have the same number of tickets been sold for both festivals? What is the number of tickets sold at that time?

Answer:
The number of tickets sold for both festivals each is 185.

Explanation:
Country music festival y = 10x + 150
Pop musuic festival y = 20x + 115
As per the question, we will equate both the equation to get x value
10x + 150 = 20x + 115
10x – 20x = 115 – 150
-10x = -35
x = 35/10
x = 3.5
Thus, we get 3.5 weeks after which both festivals would sold equal number of tickets.
Let us find the number of tickets at that time
Put x = 3.5 in y = 10x + 150
y = 10(3.5) + 150
= 35 + 150 = 185
Hence, the number of tickets sold for both festivals each are 185.

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by graphing.

Question 9.
y = 2x + 9
y = 6 – x

Answer:
The solution is (-1, 7)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 2x + 9, y = 6 – x
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 11
The lines intersect at (-1, 7)
So, the solution is (-1, 7)

Question 10.
y = -x – 4
y = \(\frac{3}{5}\)x + 4

Answer:
The solution is (-5, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -x – 4, y = \(\frac{3}{5}\)x + 4
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 12
The lines intersect at
So, the solution is (-5, 1)

Question 11.
y = 2x + 5
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 1

Answer:
The solution is (-4, -3).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 2x + 5, y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 13
The lines intersect at (-4, -3)
So, the solution is (-4, -3).

Question 12.
x + y = 27
y = x + 3

Answer:
The solution is (12, 15).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x + y = 27, y = x + 3
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 14
The lines intersect at (12, 15)
So, the solution is (12, 15).

Question 13.
y – x = 17
y = 4x + 2

Answer:
The solution is (5, 22)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y – x = 17, y = 4x + 2
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 15
The lines intersect at (5, 22)
So, the solution is (5, 22)

Question 14.
x – y = 7
0.5x + y =5

Answer:
The solution is (8, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x – y = 7, 0.5x + y =5
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 16
The lines intersect at (8, 1)
So, the solution is (8, 1)

USING A GRAPHING CALCULATOR
Use a graphing calculator to solve the system.

Question 15.
2.2x + y = 12.5
1.4x – 4y =1

Answer:
The solution is (5, 1.5).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 2.2x + y = 12.5, 1.4x – 4y = 1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 17
The lines intersect at (5, 1.5)
So, the solution is (5, 1.5)

Question 16.
2.1x + 4.2y = 14.7
-5.7x – 1.9y = -11.4

Answer:
The solution is (1, 3)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 2.1x + 4.2y = 14.7, -5.7x – 1.9y = -11.4
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 18
The lines intersect at (1, 3)
So, the solution is (1, 3)

Question 17.
-1.1x – 5.5y = -4.4
0.8x – 3.2y = -11.2

Answer:
The solution is (-6, 2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are -1.1x – 5.5y = -4.4, 0.8x – 3.2y = -11.2
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 19
The lines intersect at (-6, 2)
So, the solution is (-6, 2)

Question 18.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the system of linear equations below. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 23
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 24

Answer:
Correct.

Explanation:
The given system of equations are y = 0.5x + 1, y = – + 7
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 34
The point of intersection is (4, 3)
So, the solution is (4, 3)

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You have a total of 42 math and science problems for homework. You have 10 more math problems than science problems. How many problems do you have in each subject? Use a system of linear equations to justify your answer.

Answer:
26 math and 16 science problems.

Explanation:
Write the system of equations where m and s are the number of math and science problems
m + s = 42 —- (1)
m = 10 + s —- (2)
Substitute equation (2) in equation (1)
10 + s + s = 42
10 + 2s = 42
2s = 42 – 10
2s = 32
s = 32/2
s = 16
Put s = 16 in equation (2)
m = 10 + 16
m = 26
So, 26 math and 16 science problems.

Question 20.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A generator contains 60 gallons of fuel and uses 2.5 gallons per hour. A more efficient power generator contains 40 gallons of fuel and uses 1.5 gallons per hour. After how many hours do the generators have the same amount of fuel? Which generator runs longer? Justify your answers.

Answer:
After 20 hours both generators will be having an equal amount of fuel. The generator has 40 gallons of fuel that will run for a longer time.

Explanation:
A generator contains 60 gallons of fuel and uses 2.5 gallons per hour. A more efficient power generator contains 40 gallons of fuel and uses 1.5 gallons per hour
Let’s assume that after x hours, both generate will have an equal amount of fuel
Thus, fuel consumed by the first generator will be 2.5x gallons and for the more efficient generator will be 1.5x gallons
Fuel left in the less efficient generator will be (60 – 2.5x) gallons. Fuel left in a more efficient generator will be (40 – 1.5x) gallons.
60 – 2.5x = 40 – 1.5x
-2.5x + 1.5x = 40 – 60
-x = -20
x = 20
Thus, fuel left in each generator will be 60 – 2.5 * 20 = 10 gallons
Now lets find which generator will run longer.
The number of hours less efficient generator would run is equal to 60/2.5 = 24 hours
The number of hours more efficient generator would run is equal to 40/1.5 = 26.66 hours
Hence, After 20 hours both generators will be having an equal amount of fuel.
The generator has 40 gallons of fuel that will run for a longer time.

Question 21.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and your friend are in a canoe race. Your friend is a half-mile in front of you and paddling 3 miles per hour. You are paddling 3.4 miles per hour.
a. You are 8.5 miles from the finish line. How long will it take you to catch up with your friend? your friend
b. You both maintain your paddling rates for the remainder of the race. How far ahead of your friend will you be when you cross the finish line?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 25

Answer:
a. It takes 1 hour 25 minutes for you to catch up to your friend.
b. You 0.5 miles ahead of your friend when you finish the race.

Explanation:
a. Let d be the distance traveled by your friend, h=then you have to travel d + 0.5 to catch up since you are currently 0.5 miles behind your friends.
distance = rate * time
you is d + 0.5 = 3.4t
a friend is d = 3t
Substitute the equation for your friend into the equation for y to solve d
3t + 0.5 = 3.4t
0.5 = 3.4t – 3t
0.4t = 0.5
t = 0.5/0.4
t = 1.25
b. Time it takes you to complete the race
8.5 = 3.4t
t = 8.5/3.4
t = 2.5
Distance traveled by a friend in that time 3(2.5) = 7.5
Your friend started 8 miles from the finishing line so you will be 8 – 7.5 = 0.5 miles ahead of your friend when you finish the race.

OPEN-ENDED
Write a system of linear equations that fits the description. Use a graph to justify your answer.

Question 22.
The solution of the system is a point on the line y = -9x + 1.

Answer:
The equations have infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given equation is y = -9x + 1
Multiply both sides by 2
2y = 2(-9x + 1)
2y = -18x + 2
Draw a graph for the system of equations y = -9x + 1, 2y = -18x + 2
The equations have infinitely many solutions.

Question 23.
The solution of the system is (3, -1).

Answer:
m = -1/3

Explanation:
The slope intercept form is y = mx + c
-1 = 3m
m = -1/3

Question 24.
DIG DEEPER!
A graph of a system of two linear equations is shown. Write the system of linear equations represented by the graph. What is the solution to the system?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 25.1

Answer:
The systems of linear equations are y = -x + 2, y = 2x – 1
The solution is (1, 1)

Explanation:
for line 1,
x₁ = 0, y₁ = 2, x₂ = 2, y₂ = 0
Slope m = (y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)
= (0 – 2)/(2 – 0)
= -2/2 = -1
Slope intercept form of a line is y = mx + b
The line passes through (0, 2)
2 = 0(x) + b
b = 2
y = -1(x) + 2
y = -x + 2
For line 2
x₁ = 2, y₁ = 3, x₂ = 0, y₂ = -1
Slope m = (-1 – 3)/(0 – 2)
= -4/-2
= 2
y = 2x + b
The line passes through (0, -1)
-1 = 2(0) + b
n = -1
The slope intercept form of a line is y = 2x – 1
So, the systems of linear equations are y = -x + 2, y = 2x – 1
The point of intersection in the graph is (1, 1)

Question 25.
CRITICAL THINKING
Your friend is trying to grow her hair as long as her cousin’s hair. The table shows their hair lengths (in inches) in different months.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 26
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation. Let x = 1 represent January.
b. Will your friend’s hair ever be as long as her cousin’s hair? If so, in what month?

Answer:
a. The equation of the line for a friend’s hair is y = 1/2 x + 5/2, the equation of the line for a friend’s cousin hair is y =2/5x + 29/5
b. After 33 months length of hair of both girls would be the same.

Explanation:
a. The length of hair is represented by y coordinate and month is represented as x coordinate
The slope formula when we know two points is m = (y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)
x₁ = 3, y₁ = 4, x₂ = 8, y₂ = 6.5
m = (6.5 – 4)/(8 -3)
= 2.5/5
m = 1/2
The slope form of a line is (y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
y – 4 = 1/2 (x – 3)
2(y – 4) = (x – 3)
2y – 8 = x – 3
2y = x – 3 + 8
2y = x + 5
y = 1/2 x + 5/2
Hence, the equation of line for friend’s hair is y = 1/2 x + 5/2
Equations of line for friend’s cousin hair
x₁ = 3, y₁ = 7, x₂ = 8, y₂ = 9
m = (y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)
= (9 – 7)/(8 – 3)
= 2/5
Now to find the equation of line for friends cousin hair
(y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
(y – 7) = 2/5 (x – 3)
5(y – 7) = 2(x – 3)
5y – 35 = 2x – 6
5y = 2x – 6 + 35
5y = 2x + 29
y = 2/5x + 29/5
Hence, the equation of line for friend’s cousin hair is y =2/5x + 29/5
b.
2/5x x + 29/5 = 1/2 x + 5/2
2/5 x – 1/2x =5/1 – 29/5
(4x – 5x)/10 = (25 – 58)/10
-x/10 = -33/10
x = 33
Hence, after 33 months length of hair of both girls would be same.

Question 26.
REASONING
Is it possible for a system of two linear equations to have multiple solutions? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
No, it is not possible for a system of two linear equations to have multiple solutions. Because the system of linear equations is the straight lines and those lines intersect at only one point.

Question 27.
GEOMETRY
The length of a rectangle is 8 feet more than its width. The perimeter of the rectangle is 72 feet. Find the width of the rectangle.

Answer:
The width of the rectangle is 14 ft.

Explanation:
Let us say rectangle length is l, its width is l – 8
Rectangle perimeter = 2(l + b)
72 = 2(l + l – 8)
72/2 = 2l – 8
36 = 2l – 8
2l = 36 + 8
2l = 44
l = 44/2
l = 22
rectangle width is 22 – 8 = 14 ft

Lesson 5.2 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Substitution

EXPLORATION 1
Work with a partner.
a. Find the value of each symbol in the systems below. Compare your solution methods with other pairs of students.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 26.1
b. Use a method similar to your method in part(a) to solve the system below. Then explain how to solve a system of linear equations in two variables algebraically.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 27
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 28

EXPLORATION 2
Writing and Solving Systems of Equations
Work with a partner. Roll two number cubes that are different colors. Then write the ordered pair shown by the number cubes.
a. Write a system of linear equations that has your ordered pair as its solution. Explain how you found your system.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 29
b. Exchange systems with another pair of students. Use a method from Exploration 1 to solve the system.

5.2 Lesson

Try It

Solve the system by substitution. Check your solution.

Question 1.
y = 2x + 3
y = 5x

Answer:
The solution is (1, 1)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 2x + 3 —- (i)
y = 5x —– (ii)
Substitute equation (ii) in equation (i)
5x = 2x + 3
5x – 2x = 3
3x = 3
x = 3/3
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in equation (ii)
y = 5(1)
y = 1
So, the solution is (1, 1)

Question 2.
4x + 2y = 0
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 5

Answer:
The solution is (0, -5)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
4x + 2y = 0 —– (i)
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 5 —– (ii)
Substitute equation (ii) in equation (i)
4x + 2(1/2 x) = 0
4x + x = 0
5x = 0
x = 0
putting x = 0 in equation (ii)
y = 1/2 (0) – 5
y = -5
So, the solution is (0, -5)

Question 3.
x = 5y + 3
2x + 4y = -1

Answer:
The solution is (1/2, -1/2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x = 5y + 3 —- (i)
2x + 4y = -1 —- (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in equation (ii)
2(5y + 3) + 4y = -1
10y + 6 + 4y = -1
14y = -1 – 6
14y = -7
y = -7/14
y = -1/2
Put y = -1/2 in equation (i)
x = 5(-1/2) + 3
= -5/2 + 3
= 1/2
So, the solution is (1/2, -1/2)

Try It

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 4.
y = -3x + 2
y = 2

Answer:
The solution set is (0, 2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = -3x + 2 —- (1)
y = 2 —- (2)
substitute equation (2) in (1)
2 = -3x + 2
2 – 2 = -3x
-3x = 0
x = 0
So, the solution set is (0, 2)

Question 5.
4y = x
x + 4y = -8

Answer:
T4y = x
x + 4y = -8

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
4y = x —– (i)
x + 4y = -8 —– (ii)
Substitute x = 4y in equation (ii)
4y + 4y = 8
8y = 8
y = 1
Put y = 1 in equation (i)
4(1) = x
x = 4
So, the solution set is (4, 1)

Question 6.
2x + 2y = 1
-x + 2y = -3

Answer:
The solution set is (4/3, -5/6)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x + 2y = 1 —- (i)
-x + 2y = -3
2y + 3 = x —- (ii)
Substitute equation (ii) in equation (i)
2(2y + 3) + 2y = 1
4y + 6 + 2y = 1
6y + 6 = 1
6y = 1 – 6
6y = -5
y = -5/6
Put y = -5/6 in equation (ii)
2(-5/6) + 3 = x
x = -5/3 +3
x = 4/3
So, the solution set is (4/3, -5/6)

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
REASONING
Does solving a system of linear equations by graphing give the same solution as solving by substitution? Explain.

Answer:
Yes.

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by substitution. Check your solution.

Question 8.
y = x – 8
y = 2x – 14

Answer:
The solution set is (6, -2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = x – 8 —- (i)
y = 2x – 14 —- (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
x – 8 = 2x – 14
-8 + 14 = 2x – x
x = 6
Putting x = 6 in equation (i)
y = 6 – 8
y = -2
Substitute x = 6, y = -2 in equation (i)
-2 = 6 – 8
So, the solution set is (6, -2)

Question 9.
x = 2y + 2
2x – 5y = 1

Answer:
The solution set is (8, 3)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x = 2y + 2 —- (i)
2x – 5y = 1 —- (ii)
Substituting equation (i) in (ii)
2(2y + 2) – 5y = 1
4y + 4 – 5y = 1
4 – 1 = y
y = 3
Put y = 3 in equation (i)
x = 2(3) + 2
x = 8
Substitute x = 8, y = 3 in 2x – 5y = 1
2(8) – 5(3) = 16 – 15 = 1
So, the solution set is (8, 3)

Question 10.
x – 5y = 1
-2x + 9y = -1

Answer:
The solution is (-4, -1)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x – 5y = 1
x = 1 + 5y —– (i)
-2x + 9y = -1 —- (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
-2(1 + 5y) + 9y = -1
-2 – 10y + 9y = -1
-2 – y = -1
y = -2 + 1
y = -1
Put y = -1 in (i)
x = 1 + 5(-1)
x = 1 – 5
x = -4
Put x = -4, y = -1 in (ii)
-2(-4) + 9(-1) = 8 – 9 = -1
So, the solution is (-4, -1)

CHOOSING A SOLUTION METHOD

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 11.
y = -x + 3
y = 2x

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = -x + 3
y = 2x
Equating both equations
-x + 3 = 2x
3 = 2x + x
3x = 3
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in y = 2x
y = 2(1)
y = 2
So, the solution set is (1, 2).

Question 12.
0.5x + y = 2
0.5x = 1 + y

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 1/2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
0.5x + y = 2 —— (i)
0.5x = 1 + y
x = 1/0.5 + y/0.5
x = 2 + 2y —- (ii)
Substitute equation (ii) in (i)
0.5(2 + 2y) + y = 2
1 + y + y = 2
2y + 1 = 2
2y = 2 – 1
2y = 1
y = 1/2
Put y = 1/2 in equation (i)
0.5x + 1/2 = 2
0.5x = 2 – 0.5
0.5x = 1.5
x = 1.5/0.5
x = 3
So the solution set is (3, 1/2).

Question 13.
x = 5y
y = 22 – 2x

Answer:
The solution set is (10, 2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x = 5y —- (i)
y = 22 – 2x —– (ii)
Substitute x = 5y in equation (ii)
y = 22 – 2(5y)
y = 22 – 10y
y + 10y = 22
11y = 22
y = 2
Put y = 2 in x = 5y
x = 5(2)
x = 10
So, the solution set is (10, 2)

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 14.
To stock your school store, you buy a total of 25 sweatshirts and hats for $172.50. You pay $8.00 per sweatshirt and $2.50 per hat. How many of each item do you buy?

Answer:
The number of sweatshirts you buy would be 20 and the hat you buy would be 5.

Explanation:
Let’s assume the number of sweatshirts bought be x, while the number of hats will be 25 – x
Thus, cost to buy sweatshirts is 8 * x = 8x, and for hats will be 2.5 * (25 – x) = 62.50 – 2.50x
Therefore, total cost is 8x + 62.50 – 2.5x which is equal to 172.50
8x + 62.50 – 2.5x = 172.50
5.5x = 172.50 – 62.50
5.5x = 110
x = 110/5.5
x = 20
Hence, the cost of buying sweatshirts will be $20 * 8 = $160 and the cost to buy hats will be (25 – 20)2.50 = 12.5
The number of sweatshirts you buy would be 20 and the hat you buy would be (25 – 20) = 5

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
The length of a volleyball court is twice its width. The perimeter of the court is 180 feet. Find the area of the volleyball court. Justify your answer.

Answer:
The area of the rectangle will be 1800 sq ft.

Explanation:
The perimeter of the volleyball court is 180 feet. The length of the court is twice its width
Let us take the length and width of the court be 2x, x
Perimeter = 2(l + b)
As per the question
2(l + b) = 180
2x + x = 90
3x = 90
x = 90/3
x = 30
Thus, the length of court is 2 . 30 = 60 and width is 30 ft
Area = length * width
= 60 * 30
= 1800
Hence, the area of the rectangle will be 1800 sq ft.

Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Substitution Homework & Practice 5.2

Review & Refresh

Solve the system by graphing.

Question 1.
y = 2x – 3
y = -x + 9

Answer:
The solution is (4, 5)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 2x – 3, y = -x + 9
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 20
The lines intersect at (4, 5)
So, the solution is (4, 5)

Question 2.
6x + y = -2
y = -3x + 1

Answer:
The solution is (-1, 4)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 6x + y = -2, y = -3x + 1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 21
The lines intersect at (-1, 4)
So, the solution is (-1, 4)

Question 3.
4x + 2y = 2
3x = 4 – y

Answer:
The solution is (3, -5).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 4x + 2y = 2, 3x = 4 – y
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 22
The lines intersect at (3, -5)
So, the solution is (3, -5)

Question 4.
Use the figure to find the measure of ∠2
A. 17°
B. 73°
C. 83°
D. 107°

Answer:
B. 73°

Explanation:
Given that,
∠1 = 107 degrees
∠1 + ∠2 = 180
107 + ∠2 = 180
∠2 = 180 – 107
= 73 degrees

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
SOLVING A SYSTEM ALGEBRAICALLY
Find the value of each symbol in the system. (See Exploration 1, p. 205.)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 30

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 31

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by substitution. Check your solution.

Question 7.
y = x – 4
y = 4x – 10

Answer:
The solution set is (2, -2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = x – 4 —- (i)
y = 4x – 10 —– (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
4x – 10 = x – 4
4x – x = -4 + 10
3x = 6
x = 2
Put x = 2 in (i)
y = 2 – 4
y = -2
Substitute x = 2, y = -2 in equation (ii)
-2 = 4(2) – 10
= 8 – 10
So, the solution set is (2, -2).

Question 8.
y = 2x + 5
y = 3x – 1

Answer:
The solution set is (6, 17).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 2x + 5 —– (i)
y = 3x – 1 —— (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
3x – 1 = 2x + 5
3x – 2x = 5 + 1
x = 6
Substitute x = 6 in (i)
y = 2(6) + 5
y = 12 + 5
y = 17
Put x = 6, y = 17 in (ii)
17 = 3(6) – 1
= 18 – 1
So, the solution set is (6, 17)

Question 9.
x = 2y + 7
3x – 2y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (-2, -9/2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x = 2y + 7 —– (i)
3x – 2y = 3  —– (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
3(2y + 7) – 2y = 3
6y + 21 – 2y = 3
4y = 3 – 21
4y = -18
y = -9/2
Substitute y = -9/2 in (i)
x = 2(-9/2) + 7
x = -9 + 7
x = -2
Put x = -2, y = -9/2 in (ii)
3(-2) – 2(-9/2) = -6 + 9 = 3
So, the solution set is (-2, -9/2)

Question 10.
4x – 2y =14
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 1

Answer:
The solution set is (4, 1)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
4x – 2y =14 —– (i)
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)x – 1 —– (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
4x – 2(0.5x – 1) = 14
4x – x + 2 = 14
3x = 14 – 2
3x = 12
x = 4
Substitute x = 4 in (i)
4(4) – 2y = 14
16 – 14 = 2y
2 = 2y
y = 1
Put x = 4, y = 1 in (ii)
1 = 1/2 (4) – 1
= 2 – 1
So, the solution set is (4, 1)

Question 11.
2x = y – 10
2x + 7 = 2y

Answer:
The solution set is (-13/2, -3)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x = y – 10
y = 2x + 10 —- (i)
2x + 7 = 2y —— (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
2x + 7 = 2(2x + 10)
2x + 7 = 4x + 20
4x – 2x = 7 – 20
2x = -13
x = -13/2
Substitute x = -13/2 in (i)
y = 2(-13/2) + 10
= -13 + 10
= -3
Put x = -13/2, y = -3 in (ii)
2(-13/2) + 7 = 2(-3)
-13 + 7 = -6
So, the solution set is (-13/2, -3)

Question 12.
8x – \(\frac{1}{3}\)y = 0
12x + 3 =y

Answer:
The solution set is (1/4, 6).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
8x – \(\frac{1}{3}\)y = 0 —– (i)
12x + 3 =y —— (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
8x – 1/3(12x + 3) = 0
8x – 4x – 1 = 0
4x – 1 = 0
4x = 1
x = 1/4
Substitute x = 1/4 in (ii)
12(1/4) + 3 = y
3 + 3 = y
y = 6
Put x = 1/4, y = 6 in (ii)
12(1/4) + 3 = 3 + 3 = 6
So, the solution set is (1/4, 6).

Question 16.
MODELING REAL LIFE
There are a total of 64 students in a film making club and a yearbook club. The filmmaking club has 14 more students than the yearbook club.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
b. How many students are in the film making club? the yearbook club?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 32

Answer:
a. x + y = 64, x = y + 14
b. The number of students in the filmmaking club and yearbook club are 39 and 25 respectively.

Explanation:
a. Let us take the number of students in film making club to be x and the number of students in the yearbook club be y
x + y = 64 —- (i)
It is given that the number of students in the filmmaking club is greater than students in the yearbook club by 14
So, x = y + 14 —- (ii)
b. Put equation (ii) in (i)
y + 14 + y = 64
2y + 14 = 64
2y = 64 – 14
2y = 50
y = 25
Substitute y = 25 in (i)
x + 25 = 64
x = 64 – 25
x = 39
Hence, the number of students in filmmaking club and yearbook club are 39 and 25 respectively.

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A drama club earns $1040 from production by selling 64 adult tickets and 132 student tickets. An adult ticket costs twice as much as a student ticket.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
b. What is the cost of each ticket?

Answer:
a. 64a + 132s = 1040, a = 2s
b. The price of a student ticket is $4, adult ticket is $8.

Explanation:
Write the system of equations that models the problem where a is the price of an adult ticket and s is the price of a student ticket
64a + 132s = 1040
a = 2s
b. Substitute a = 2s in 64a + 132s = 1040
64(2s) + 132s = 1040
128s + 132s = 1040
260s = 1040
s = 1040/260
s = $4 per student ticket
a = 2(4) = $8 per adult ticket.

Question 18.
OPEN-ENDED
Write a system of linear equations that has the ordered pair (1, 6) as its solution.

Answer:
The system of linear equations that pass through (1, 6) is y – 6 = m(x – 1)

Explanation:
We know that the equation of a line that passes through a point is (y – y₁) = m(x – x₁)
The line pass through (1,6 )
So, y – 6 = m(x – 1)
We can get system of linear equations by inserting different values of m in above equation
If we put m = 1, then equation is y – 6 = 1(x – 1)
y – 6 = x – 1
y = x – 1 + 6
y = x + 5
Hence, the system of linear equation is y – 6 = m(x – 1) that pass through (1, 6).

CHOOSING A SOLUTION METHOD
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 19.
y – x = 4
x + y = 6

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 5)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y – x = 4
y = 4 + x —– (i)
x + y = 6 —– (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
x + 4 + x = 6
2x + 4 = 6
2x = 6 – 4
2x = 2
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (i)
y = 4 + 1
y = 5
So, the solution set is (1, 5)

Question 20.
0.5x + y = 4
0.5x – y =-1

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 2.5)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
0.5x + y = 4 —- (i)
0.5x – y =-1
0.5x + 1 = y —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
0.5x + 0.5x + 1 = 4
x + 1 = 4
x = 4 – 1
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (ii)
y = 0.5(3) + 1
= 2.5
So, the solution set is (3, 2.5)

Question 21.
y = 2x + 5
y = -3x

Answer:
The solution set is (-1, 3)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = 2x + 5 —- (i)
y = -3x —– (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-3x = 2x + 5
-3x – 2x = 5
-5x = 5
x = -1
Substitute x = -1 in (i)
y = 2(-1) + 5
y = -2 + 5
y = 3
So, the solution set is (-1, 3)

Question 22.
CRITICAL THINKING
A system consists of two different proportional relationships. What is the solution to the system? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The solution is (0, 0).

Explanation:
The proportional relationships in the system of linear equations mean that there is no constant available in the equation.
Therefore, the lines will always pass through the origin (0, 0)
Hence, the solution is (0, 0).

Question 23.
GEOMETRY
The measure of the obtuse angle in the isosceles triangle is two and a half times the measure of one of the acute angles. Write and solve a system of linear equations to find the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 33

Answer:
The systems of linear equations are x + 2y = 180°, x = 2.5y
x = 100°, y = 40°

Explanation:
In an isosceles triangle, there are two angles that are the same and one that is different. We know there is one angle that is more than 90° because that is the definition of an obtuse angle. We also know that the sum of all the angles of a triangle equals 180°.
Let’s put all this together and find the measures of the angles.
x + 2y = 180°
x = 2.5y
Put x = 2.5 y in x + 2y = 180°
2.5y + 2y = 180°
4.5y = 180
y = 180/4.5
y = 40
Put y = 40 in x = 2.5y
x = 2.5(40)
x = 100

Question 24.
NUMBER SENSE
The sum of the digits of a two-digit number is 8. When the digits are reversed, the number increases by 36. Find the original number.

Answer:
The original number is 26.

Explanation:
Let the two-digit number be xy
The sum of the digits of a two-digit number is 8
x + y = 8
y = 8 – x —- (i)
So, the number is 10x + y
When the digits are reversed, the number increases by 36
10y + x = 36 + 10x + y
10y – y = 36 + 10x – x
9y = 36 + 9x
Put y = 8 – x
9(8 – x) = 36 + 9x
72 – 9x = 36 + 9x
72 – 36 = 18x
18x = 36
x = 36/18
x = 2
Put x = 2 in equation (i)
y = 8 – 2
y = 6
So, the original number is 26.

Question 25.
DIG DEEPER!
A hospital employs a total of 77 nurses and doctors. The ratio of nurses to doctors is 9 : 2. How many nurses are employed at the hospital? How many doctors are employed at the hospital?

Answer:
There are 63 nurses, 14 doctors are employed at the hospital.

Explanation:
Let x be the number of nurses and y be the number of doctors
A hospital employs a total of 77 nurses and doctors
x + y = 77 —- (i)
The ratio of nurses to doctors is 9:2.
x/y = 9/2
x = 9/2y
Put x = 9/2y in (i)
9/2 y + y = 77
11/2 y = 77
11y = 77 * 2
y = 14
x = 9/2 (14)
y = 63
So, there are 63 nurses, 14 doctors are employed at the hospital.

Question 26.
REPEATED REASONING
A DJ has a total of 1075 dance, rock, and country songs on her system. The dance selection is three times the rock selection. The country selection has 105 more songs than the rock selection. How many songs on the system is dance? rock? country?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 34

Answer:
582 dance, 299 countries, and 194 ock songs on the system.

Explanation:
Let d, r, c be the number of dance, rock and country songs
A DJ has a total of 1075 dance, rock, and country songs on her system
d + r + c = 1075 —- (i)
The dance selection is three times the size of the rock selection
d = 3r —- (ii)
The country selection has 105 more songs than the rock selection
c = 105 + r —– (iii)
Put (ii), (iii) in (i)
3r + r + 105 + r = 1075
5r = 1075 – 105
5r = 970
r = 194
d = 3(194) = 582
c = 105 + 194 = 299
So, 582 dance, 299 country, and 194 ock songs on the system.

Lesson 5.3 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Elimination

EXPLORATION 1
Work with a partner. A student found the value of in the system using substitution as shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 35
a. Find another way to obtain the equation 4x = -4 from the original system. Does your method produce an equation in one variable for any system? Explain.
b. Can you use your method in part(a) to solve each system below? If so, solve the system. If not, replace one of the equations with an equivalent equation that allows you to use your method in part(a). Then solve the system.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 36
c. Compare your solution methods in part(b) with other pairs of students.

5.3 Lesson

Try It

Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 1.
2x – y = 9
4x + y =21

Answer:
The solution set is (5, 1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x – y = 9 —- (i)
4x + y =21 —– (ii)
Add both equations
2x – y + 4x + y = 9 + 21
6x = 30
x = 30/6
x = 5
Put x = 5 in (i)
2(5) – y = 9
10 – y = 9
10 – 9 = y
y = 1
Substitute x = 5, y = 1 in (ii)
4(5) + 1 = 20 + 1 = 21
So, the solution set is (5, 1).

Question 2.
-5x + 2y = 13
5x + y = -1

Answer:
The solution set is (-1, 4).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-5x + 2y = 13 —– (i)
5x + y = -1 —— (ii)
Add both equations
-5x + 2y + 5x + y = 13 – 1
3y = 12
y = 4
Substitute y = 4 in (ii)
5x + 4 = -1
5x = -1 – 4
5x = -5
x = -1
Substitute x = -1, y = 4 in (i)
-5(-1) + 2(4) = 5 + 8 = 13
So, the solution set is (-1, 4).

Question 3.
3x + 4y = -6
7x + 4y = -14

Answer:
The solution set is (-2, 0).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x + 4y = -6 —- (i)
7x + 4y = -14 —– (ii)
Subtract (ii) from (i)
3x + 4y – (7x + 4y) = -6 + 14
3x + 4y – 7x – 4y = 8
-4x = 8
x = -8/4
x = -2
Substitute x = -2 in (i)
3(-2) + 4y = -6
-6 + 4y = -6
4y = -6 + 6
y = 0
Substitute x = -2, y = 0 in (ii)
7(-2) + 4(0) = -14
So, the solution set is (-2, 0).

Try It

Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 4.
3x + y = 11
6x + 3y = 24

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 2)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x + y = 11 —— (i)
6x + 3y = 24 ——- (ii)
Divide equation (ii) by 1/3
1/3(6x + 3y = 24)
2x + y = 8 —- (iii)
Subtract (iii) from (i)
3x + y – (2x + y) = 11 – 8
3x + y – 2x – y = 3
x = 3
Put x = 3 in (i)
3(3) + y = 11
9 + y = 11
y = 11 – 9
y = 2
Substitute x = 3, y = 2 in (iii)
2(3) + 2 = 6 + 2 = 8
So, the solution set is (3, 2)

Question 5.
4x – 5y = -19
-x – 2y = 8

Answer:
The solution set is (-6, -1)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
4x – 5y = -19 —– (i)
-x – 2y = 8 —— (ii)
Multiply both sides of equation (ii) by 4
4(-x – 2y = 8)
-4x – 8y = 32 —- (iii)
Add (i) & (iii)
4x – 5y – 4x – 8y = -19 + 32
-13y = 13
y = -1
Substitute y = -1 in (ii)
-x – 2(-1) = 8
-x + 2 = 8
-x = 8 – 2
x = -6
Substitute x = -6, y = -1 in (ii)
-(-6) – 2(-1) = 6 + 2 = 8
So, the solution set is (-6, -1)

Question 6.
5y = 15 – 5x
y = -2x + 3

Answer:
The solution set is (0, 3)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
5y = 15 – 5x —– (i)
y = -2x + 3 —– (ii)
Divide equation (i) by 1/5
1/5(5y = 15 – 5x)
y = 3 – x —– (iii)
Subtract (iii) from (ii)
y – y = -2x + 3 – (3 – x)
0 = -2x + 3 – 3 + x
-x = 0
x = 0
Substitute x = 0 in (iii)
y = 3 – 0
y = 3
Substitute x = 0, y = 3 in (ii)
3 = -2(0) + 3
So, the solution set is (0, 3)

Try It

Question 7.
Change one word in Choice B so that it represents an efficient approach to solving the system.

Answer:
Multiply equation (i) by -1 and subtract the equations.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x – 2y = 6 —- (i)
-x + 4y = 6 —- (ii)
multiply equation (i) by -1 and subtract the equations.
-1(x – 2y = 6)
-x + 2y = -6
-x + 2y – (-x + 4y) = -6 – 6
-x + 2y + x – 4y = -12
-2y = -12
y = 6
Put y = 6 in (i)
x – 2(6) = 6
x – 12 = 6
x = 6 + 12
x = 18

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 8.
2x + y = 4
-2x + 2y = 5

Answer:
The solution set is (1/2, 3)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x + y = 4 —— (i)
-2x + 2y = 5 —– (ii)
Add equations
2x + y – 2x + 2y = 4 + 5
3y = 9
y = 3
Substitute y = 3 in (i)
2x + 3 = 4
2x = 4 – 3
2x = 1
x = 1/2
Substitute x = 1/2, y = 3 in (ii)
-2(1/2) + 2(3) = -1 + 6 = 5
So, the solution set is (1/2, 3)

Question 9.
-x + y = 1
-3x + y =7

Answer:
The solution set is (-3, -2).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-x + y = 1 —- (i)
-3x + y =7 —– (ii)
Subtract equations
-x + y – (-3x + y) = 1 – 7
-x + y + 3x – y = -6
2x = -6
x = -3
Substitute x = -3 in (ii)
-3(-3) + y = 7
9 + y = 7
y = 7 – 9
y = -2
Substitute x = -3, y = -2 in (i)
-(-3) – 2 = 3 – 2 = 1
So, the solution set is (-3, -2).

Question 10.
y = -2x + 3
4x – 5y = 13

Answer:
The solution set is (2, -1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = -2x + 3
2x + y = 3 —– (i)
4x – 5y = 13 —– (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 2 and subtract
2(2x + y = 3)
4x + 2y = 6
4x + 2y – (4x – 5y) = 6 – 13
4x + 2y – 4x + 5y = -7
7y = -7
y = -1
Substitute y = -1 in (i)
2x – 1 = 3
2x = 4
x = 2
Substitute x = 2, y = -1 in (ii)
4(2) – 5(-1) = 8 + 5 = 13
So, the solution set is (2, -1).

CHOOSING A SOLUTION METHOD
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 11.
y = 6x – 1
y = 3x – 4

Answer:
The solution set is (-1, -7)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = 6x – 1 —- (i)
y = 3x – 4 —– (ii)
Equating both the equations
6x – 1 = 3x – 4
6x – 3x = -4 + 1
3x = -3
x = -3/3
x = -1
Substitute x = -1 in equation (i)
y = 6(-1) – 1
y = -7
So, the solution set is (-1, -7)

Question 12.
3x = y + 2
3x + 2y = 5

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x = y + 2 —- (i)
3x + 2y = 5 —– (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
y + 2 + 2y = 5
3y = 5 – 2
3y = 3
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (i)
3x = 1 + 2
3x = 3
x = 1
So, the solution set is (1, 1).

Question 13.
2x – y = 7
x + y = 5

Answer:
The solution set is (4, 1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x – y = 7 —- (i)
x + y = 5 —- (ii)
Add equations
2x – y + x + y = 7 + 5
3x = 12
x = 4
Substitute x = 4 in (ii)
4 + y = 5
y = 5 – 4
y = 1
So, the solution set is (4, 1).

Question 14.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which system does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 37

Answer:
2x + 3y = 11, 3x – 2y = 10 is does not belong to other three.

Explanation:
1. 3x + 3y = 3 —- (i)
2x – 3y = 7 —- (ii)
Add equations
3x + 3y + 2x – 3y = 3 + 7
5x = 10
x = 2
Substitute x = 2 in (ii)
2(2) – 3y = 7
4 – 3y = 7
-3y = 7 – 4
-3y = 3
y = -1
The solution set is (2, -1).
2. -2x + y = 6 — (i)
2x – 3y = -10 — (ii)
Add equations
-2x + y + 2x – 3y = 6 – 10
-2y = -4
y = 2
Substitute y = 2 in (i)
-2x + 2 = 6
-2x = 4
x = -2
The solution set is (-2, 2)
3. 2x + 3y = 11 —- (i)
3x – 2y = 10
3x = 10 + 2y
x = (10 + 2y)/3
Substitute x = (10 + 2y)/3 in (i)
2(10 + 2y)/3 + 3y = 11
20 + 4y + 9y = 33
20 + 13y = 33
13y = 33 – 20
y = 1
Put y = 1 in (i)
2x + 3 = 11
2x = 11 – 3
2x = 8
x = 4

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 15.
A fitness instructor purchases exercise bikes and treadmills for two gyms. For the first gym, 2 exercise bikes and 3 treadmills cost $2200. For the second gym, 3 exercise bikes and 4 treadmills cost $3000. How much does a treadmill cost?

Answer:
The cost of a treadmill is $600.

Explanation:
Let x and y be the price of exercise bikes and treadmills, respectively
Using the fact that
Total cost = cost of exercise bike . Number of bikes in a gym + Cost of treadmill . Number of treadmills in a gym
2x + 3y = 2200 —- (i)
3x + 4y = 3000 —– (ii)
Multiply (i) by 3 and (ii) by 2
3(2x + 3y = 2200)
6x + 9y = 6600 —- (iii)
2(3x + 4y = 3000)
6x + 8y = 6000 —– (iv)
Subtract equations
6x + 9y – 6x – 8y = 6600 – 6000
y = 600
The cost of treadmill is $600.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
At your school, cooking club members raise $5 per member for a charity, and woodshop club members raise $10 per member for a different charity. The cooking club has three times as many members as the woodshop club. The difference in the number of members in the two clubs is 12 members. How much does each club raise?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 38

Answer:
Money raised for charity by the cooking club is $90, Money raised for charity by the woodshop club $60.

Explanation:
Let x and y be the number of members of the cooking club and woodshop club
The cooking club has three times as many members as the woodshop club.
x = 3y
The difference in the number of members in the two clubs is 12 members.
x – y = 12
3y – y = 12
2y = 12
y = 6
So, x = 3(6) = 18
Money raised for charity by cooking club = Number of members in a cooking club. Charity per member of cooking club
= x . 5
= 18 . 5
= $90
Money raised for charity by woodshop club = Number of members in woodshop club. Charity per member of woodshop club
= y . 10
= 6 . 10
= $60

Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Elimination Homework & Practice 5.3

Review & Refresh

Solve the system by substitution. Check your solution.

Question 1.
x = 5 – y
x – y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (4, 1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x = 5 – y —- (i)
x – y = 3 —- (ii)
Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
5 – y – y = 3
5 – 2y = 3
5 – 3 = 2y
2 = 2y
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (i)
x = 5 – 1
x = 4
Substitute x = 4, y = 1 in (ii)
4 – 1 = 3
So, the solution set is (4, 1).

Question 2.
x – 5y = 1
-x + y = 7

Answer:
The solution set is (-9, -2)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x – 5y = 1
x = 1 + 5y —- (i)
-x + y = 7 —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-1 – 5y + y = 7
-1 – 4y = 7
-4y = 7 + 1
-4y = 8
y = -2
Substitute y = -2 in (i)
x = 1 + 5(-2)
x = 1 – 10
x = -9
Substitute x = -9, y = -2
-(-9) – 2 = 9 – 2 = 7
So, the solution set is (-9, -2)

Question 3.
x + 6y = -2
-x = 3y – 10

Answer:
The solution set is (22, -4).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x + 6y = -2 —- (i)
-x = 3y – 10 —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
-3y + 10 + 6y = -2
3y + 10 = -2
3y = -2 – 10
3y = -12
y = -4
Substitute y = -4 in (ii)
-x = 3(-4) – 10
-x = -12 – 10
-x = -22
x = 22
Substitute x = 22, y = -4 in (i)
22 + 6(-4) = 22 – 24 = -2
So, the solution set is (22, -4).

The vertices of a triangle are given. Draw the triangle and its image after a dilation with the given scale factor. Identify the type of dilation.

Question 4.
A(1, 1), B(1, 3), C(3, 1); k = 2

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 35
The new triangle is larger than the original triangle so it’s an increase.

Explanation:
The vertices of a triangle are A(1, 1), B(1, 3), C(3, 1)
Multiply the coordinates by 2 and then graph the original and new coordinates.
New coordinates are D(2, 2), E(2, 6), F(6, 2)
The new triangle is larger than the original triangle so it’s an increase.

Question 5.
D(-8, -4), E(-4, 8), F(0, 0); k = 0.5

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 36
The new triangle is smaller than the original triangle so it’s a reduction.

Explanation:
The vertices of a triangle are D(-8, -4), E(-4, 8), F(0, 0)
Multiply the coordinates by 0.5 and then graph the original and new coordinates
The new coordinates are A(-4, -2), B(-2, 4), C(0, 0)
The new triangle is smaller than the original triangle so it’s a reduction.

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
SOLVING A SYSTEM ALGEBRAICALLY
Explain how to obtain the equation 3x = 6 from the given system. (See Exploration 1, p. 211.)

Question 6.
2x + y = 5
x – y = 1

Answer:
Add both equations

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x + y = 5 —– (i)
x – y = 1 —– (ii)
Add both equations
2x + y + x – y = 5 + 1
3x = 6

Question 7.
5x + 2y = 2
x + y = -2

Answer:
Multiply the equation 2 by 2 and Subtract equation obtained equation from (i)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
5x + 2y = 2 —– (i)
x + y = -2 —— (ii)
Multiply the equation 2 by 2
2(x + y) = 2(-2)
2x + 2y = -4
Subtract equation obtained equation from (i)
5x + 2y – 2x – 2y = 2 + 4
3x = 6

Question 8.
-x + y = -3
6x – 3y =15

Answer:
Multiply the equation (i) by 3, Add equations (i) & (iii)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-x + y = -3 —- (i)
6x – 3y =15 —- (ii)
Multiply the equation (i) by 3
3(-x + y = -3)
-3x + 3y = -9 —- (ii)
Add equation (i) & (iii)
6x – 3y – 3x + 3y = 15 – 9
3x = 6

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 9.
x + 3y = 5
-x – y = -3

Answer:
The solution set is (2, 1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x + 3y = 5 —- (i)
-x – y = -3 —– (ii)
Add equations (i) & (ii)
x + 3y – x – y = 5 – 3
2y = 2
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (ii)
-x – 1 = -3
-x = -3 + 1
-x = -2
x = 2
Substitute x = 2, y = 1 in (i)
2 + 3(1) = 2 + 3 = 5
So, the solution set is (2, 1).

Question 10.
x – 2y = -7
3x + 2y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (-1, 3).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x – 2y = -7 —- (i)
3x + 2y = 3 —- (ii)
Add equations (i), (ii)
x – 2y + 3x + 2y = -7 + 3
4x = -4
x = -1
Substitute x = -1 in (i)
-1 – 2y = -7
-2y = -7 + 1
-2y = -6
y = 3
Substitute x = -1, y = 3 in (i)
-1 – 2(3) = -1 – 6 = -7
So, the solution set is (-1, 3).

Question 11.
4x + 3y = -5
-x + 3y = -10

Answer:
The solution set is(1, -3).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
4x + 3y = -5 —- (i)
-x + 3y = -10 —- (ii)
Subtract equations (i), (ii)
4x + 3y – (-x + 3y) = -5 – (-10)
4x + 3y + x – 3y = -5 + 10
5x = 5
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (ii)
-1 + 3y = -10
3y = -10 + 1
3y = -9
y = -3
Substitute x = 1, y = -3 in (i)
4(1) + 3(-3) = 4 – 9 = -5
So, the solution set is(1, -3).

Question 12.
2x + 7y = 1
2x – 4y = 12

Answer:
The solution set is (4, -1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x + 7y = 1 —- (i)
2x – 4y = 12 —– (ii)
Subtract equations (i), (ii)
2x – 4y – (2x + 7y) = 12 – 1
2x – 4y – 2x – 7y = 11
-11y = 11
y = -1
Substitute y = -1 in (ii)
2x – 4(-1) = 12
2x + 4 = 12
2x = 12 – 4
2x = 8
x = 4
Substitute x = 4, y = -1 in (i)
2(4) + 7(-1) = 8 – 7 = 1
So, the solution set is (4, -1).

Question 13.
2x + 5y = 16
3x – 5y = -1

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 2).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x + 5y = 16 —- (i)
3x – 5y = -1 —– (ii)
Add both equations
2x + 5y + 3x – 5y = 16 – 1
5x = 15
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (i)
2(3) + 5y = 16
5y = 16 – 6
5y = 10
y = 2
Substitute x = 3, y = 2 in (ii)
3(3) – 5(2) = 9 – 10 = -1
So, the solution set is (3, 2).

Question 14.
3x – 2y = 4
6x – 2y = -2

Answer:
The solution set is (-2, -5).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x – 2y = 4 —– (i)
6x – 2y = -2 —– (ii)
Subtract equations
3x – 2y – (6x – 2y) = 4 – (-2)
3x – 2y – 6x + 2y = 4 + 2
-3x = 6
x = -2
Substitute x = -2 in (i)
3(-2) – 2y = 4
-6 – 2y = 4
-2y = 4 + 6
-2y = 10
y = -5
Substitute x = -2, y = -5 in (ii)
6(-2) – 2(-5) = -12 + 10 = -2
So, the solution set is (-2, -5).

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the system. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 39

Answer:
Wrong.

Explanation:
The given equations are 5x + 2y = 9 —- (i)
3x – 2y = -1 —- (ii)
Add both equations
5x + 2y + 3x – 2y = 9 – 1
8x = 8
x = 1
Put x = 1 in (ii)
3(1) – 2y = -1
3 – 2y = -1
-2y = -1 – 3
-2y = -4
y = 2
So, the solution set is (1, 2).

Question 16.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You and your friend are selling raffle tickets for a new laptop. You sell 14 more tickets than your friend sells. Together, you and your friend sell 58 tickets.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
b. How many tickets do each of you sell?

Answer:
a. x = 14 + y, x + y = 58
b. The number of tickers you sell is 36, the number of tickets your friend sells is 22.

Explanation:
a. Let x be the number of tickets you sell and let y be the number of tickets your friend sells.
You sell 14 more tickets than your friend sells
x = 14 + y —- (i)
Together, you and your friend sell 58 tickets.
x + y = 58 —- (ii)
b. Substitute equation (i) in (ii)
14 + y + y = 58
14 + 2y = 58
2y = 58 – 14
2y = 44
y = 44/2
y = 22
Substitute y = 22 in (i)
x = 14 + 22
x = 36
So, The number of tickers you sell is 36, the number of tickets your friend sells is 22.

Question 17.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You can jog around your block twice and the park once in 10 minutes. You can jog around your block twice and the park 3 times in 22 minutes. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation. How long does it take you to jog around the park?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 40

Answer:
The system of linear equations are 2x + y = 10, 2x + 3y = 22
It takes 6 minutes to jog around the park.

Explanation:
Let x be the number of minutes it takes to jog around the block and y be the number of minutes it takes to jog around the park
You can jog around your block twice and the park once in 10 minutes
2x + y = 10 —- (i)
You can jog around your block twice and the park 3 times in 22 minutes
2x + 3y = 22 —- (ii)
Subtract equations
2x + y – 2x – 3y = 10 – 22
-2y = -12
y = 6
Substitute y = 6 in (i)
2x + 6 = 10
2x = 10 – 6
2x = 4
x = 2
So, it takes 6 minutes to jog around the park.

SOLVING A SYSTEM OF LINEAR EQUATIONS
Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 18.
2x – y = 0
3x – 2y = -3

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 6).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
2x – y = 0 —- (i)
3x – 2y = -3 —– (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 2
2(2x – y = 0)
4x – 2y = 0 —- (iii)
Subtract equation (ii) from (iii)
4x – 2y – (3x – 2y) = 0 – (-3)
4x – 2y – 3x + 2y = 3
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (i)
2(3) – y = 0
6 – y = 0
y = 6
Substitute x = 3, y = 6 in (i)
2(3) – 6 = 6 – 6 = 0
So, the solution set is (3, 6).

Question 19.
x + 4y = 1
3x + 5y = 10

Answer:
The solution set is (5, -1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
x + 4y = 1 —- (i)
3x + 5y = 10 —- (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 3
3(x + 4y = 1)
3x + 12y = 3 —- (iii)
Subtract equation (iii) from (ii)
3x + 5y – (3x + 12y) = 10 – 3
3x + 5y – 3x – 12y = 7
-7y = 7
y = -1
Substitute y = -1 in (i)
x + 4(-1) = 1
x – 4 = 1
x = 1 + 4
x = 5
Substitute x = 5, y = -1 in (i)
5 + 4(-1) = 5 – 4 = 1
So, the solution set is (5, -1).

Question 20.
-2x + 3y = 7
5x + 8y = -2

Answer:
The solution set is (-2, 1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
-2x + 3y = 7 —- (i)
5x + 8y = -2 —– (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 5 and equation (ii) by 2
5(-2x + 3y = 7)
-10x + 15y = 35 —- (iii)
2(5x + 8y = -2)
10x + 16y = -4 —- (iv)
Add equations (iii) & (iv)
-10x + 15y + 10x + 16y = 35 – 4
31y = 31
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (i)
-2x + 3(1) = 7
-2x = 7 – 3
-2x = 4
x = -2
Substitute x = -2, y = 1 in (ii)
5(-2) + 8(1) = -10 + 8 = -2
So, the solution set is (-2, 1).

Question 21.
3x + 3 = 3y
2x – 6y = 2

Answer:
The solution set is (-2, -1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
3x + 3 = 3y —- (i)
2x – 6y = 2 —- (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 2
2(3x + 3 = 3y)
6x + 6 = 6y
6x – 6y = -6 —- (iii)
Subtract equations (ii) & (iii)
2x – 6y – 6x + 6y = 2 + 6
-4x = 8
x = -2
Substitute x = -2 in (i)
3(-2) + 3 = 3y
-6 + 3 = 3y
-3 = 3y
y = -1
Substitute x = -2, y = -1 in (i)
3(-2) + 3 = 3(-1)
-6 + 3 = -3
So, the solution set is (-2, -1).

Question 22.
2x – 6 = 4y
7y =-3x + 9

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 0).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
2x – 6 = 4y
2x – 4y = 6 —- (i)
7y = -3x + 9
3x + 7y = 9 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 7 and (ii) by 4
7(2x – 4y = 6)
14x – 28y = 42 —- (iii)
4(3x + 7y = 9)
12x + 28y = 36 —- (iv)
Add equations (iii) & (iv)
14x – 28y + 12x + 28y = 42 + 36
26x = 78
x = 78/26
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (i)
2(3) – 4y = 6
6 – 4y = 6
6 – 6 = 4y
y = 0
Substitute x = 3, y = 0 in (i)
2(3) – 4(0) = 6 – 0 = 6
So, the solution set is (3, 0).

Question 23.
5x = 4y + 8
3y = 3x – 3

Answer:
The solution set is (4, 3).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
5x = 4y + 8
5x – 4y = 8 — (i)
3y = 3x – 3
3x – 3y = 3 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 3 and (ii) by 4
3(5x – 4y = 8)
15x – 12y = 24 — (iii)
4(3x – 3y = 3)
12x – 12y = 12 —- (iv)
Subtract obtained equations
15x – 12y – 12x + 12y = 24 – 12
3x = 12
x = 4
Substitute x = 4 in (ii)
3(4) – 3y = 3
12 – 3y = 3
-3y = 3 – 12
-3y = -9
y = 3
Substitute x = 4, y = 3 in (ii)
3(4) – 3(3) = 12 – 9 = 3
So, the solution set is (4, 3).

Question 24.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend solves the system. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 41

Answer:
Wrong.

Explanation:
Given equations are
x + y = 1 — (i)
5x + 3y = -3 (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by -5
-5(x + y = 1)
-5x – 5y = -5 — (iii)
Add equations (iii) & (ii)
-5x – 5y + 5x + 3y = -3 – 5
-2y = -8
y = 4
Put y = 4 in (i)
x + 4 = 1
x = 1 – 4 = -3
So, the solution set is (-3, 4).

CHOOSING A SOLUTION METHOD
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 25.
x + y = 4
x – y = 4

Answer:
The solution set is (4, 0).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
x + y = 4 — (i)
x – y = 4 — (ii)
Add equations
x + y + x – y = 4 + 4
2x = 8
x = 4
Substitute x = 4 in (i)
4 + y = 4
y = 4 – 4
y = 0
So, the solution set is (4, 0).

Question 26.
y = x – 3
y = -2x + 3

Answer:
The solution set is (2, -1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
y = x – 3 — (i)
y = -2x + 3 — (ii)
Equate both equations
x – 3 = -2x + 3
x + 2x = 3 + 3
3x = 6
x = 2
Substitute x = 2 in (i)
y = 2 – 3
y = -1
So, the solution set is (2, -1).

Question 27.
x + 2y = 0
2x – y = 4

Answer:
The solution set is (8/5, -4/5)

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
x + 2y = 0 —- (i)
2x – y = 4 —- (ii)
y = 2x – 4
Substitute y = 2x – 4 in (i)
x + 2(2x – 4) = 0
x + 4x – 8 = 0
5x = 8
x = 8/5
Substitute x = 8/5 in (i)
8/5 + 2y = 0
2y = -8/5
y = -4/5
So, the solution set is (8/5, -4/5)

Question 28.
y + 5x = 1
5y – x = 5

Answer:
The solution set is (0, 1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
y + 5x = 1 —- (i)
5y – x = 5 —- (ii)
5y – 5 = x
Substitute x = 5y – 5 in (i)
y + 5(5y – 5) = 1
y + 25y – 25= 1
26y = 1 + 25
26y = 26
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (i)
1 + 5x = 1
5x = 0
x = 0
So, the solution set is (0, 1).

Question 29.
2 = x – 3y
-2x + y = 4

Answer:
The solution set is (-14/5, -8/5)

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
2 = x – 3y
x = 2 + 3y — (i)
-2x + y = 4 —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-2(2 + 3y) + y = 4
-4 – 6y + y = 4
-5y = 4 + 4
y = -8/5
Substitute y = -8/5 in (i)
x = 2 + 3(-8/5)
x = 2 – 24/5
x = -14/5
So, the solution set is (-14/5, -8/5)

Question 30.
8x + 5y = 6
8x = 3 – 2y

Answer:
The solution set is (1/8, 1).

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
8x + 5y = 6 —- (i)
8x = 3 – 2y —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
3 – 2y + 5y = 6
3y = 6 – 3
3y = 3
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (ii)
8x = 3 – 2(1)
8x = 1
x = 1/8
So, the solution set is (1/8, 1).

NUMBER SENSE
For what value of a might you choose to solve the system by elimination? Explain.

Question 31.
4x – y = 3
ax + 10y = 6

Answer:
If a is 4 or -4 it is easy to solve the systems of linear equations using the elimination method as by just subtracting or adding the equations, we can eliminate x.

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
4x – y = 3
ax + 10y = 6
If a is 4 or -4 it is easy to solve the systems of linear equations using the elimination method as by just subtracting or adding the equations, we can eliminate x.

Question 32.
x – 7y = 6
-6x + ay = 9

Answer:
If a is 7 or -7 it is easy to solve the systems of linear equations using the elimination method as by just adding or subtracting the equations, we can eliminate x.

Explanation:
The systems of linear equations are
x – 7y = 6
-6x + ay = 9
If a is 7 or -7 it is easy to solve the systems of linear equations using the elimination method as by just adding or subtracting the equations, we can eliminate x.

CRITICAL THINKING
Determine whether the line through the first pair of points intersects the line through the second pair of points. Explain.

Question 33.
Line 1: (-2, 1), (2, 7)
Line 2: (-4, -1), (0, 5)

Answer:
No

Explanation:
Equation of a line passing through points (x₁, y₁) and (x₂, y₂) is y – y₁ = (y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁) (x – x₁)
So, equation of line 1 is
y – 1 = (7 – 1)/(2 + 2)(x + 2)
y – 1 = 6/4 (x + 2)
y – 1 = 3/2 (x + 2)
2(y – 1) = 3(x + 2)
2y – 2 = 3x + 6
3x – 2y = -2 – 6
3x – 2y = -8
Equation of line 2 is
y + 1 = (5 + 1)/(0 + 4) (x + 4)
y + 1 = 6/4 (x + 4)
y + 1 = 3/2 (x + 4)
2(y + 1) = 3(x + 4)
2y + 2 = 3x + 12
3x – 2y = 2 – 12
3x – 2y = -10
As the slope of the lines are same, but the consant is different, the lines are parallek to each other and there is no point of intersection.

Question 34.
Line 1: (-2, 8), (0, 2)
Line 2: (3, -2), (6, 4)

Answer:
Yes

Explanation:
Equation of a line passing through points (x₁, y₁) and (x₂, y₂) is y – y₁ = (y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁) (x – x₁)
So, line 1 is
y – 8 = (2 – 8)/(0 + 2) (x + 2)
y – 8 = -6/2 (x + 2)
y – 8 = -3(x + 2)
y – 8 = -3x – 6
3x + y = -6 + 8
3x + y = 2
Line 2 is
y + 2 = (4 + 2)/(6 – 3) (x – 3)
y + 2 = 6/3 (x – 3)
y + 2 = 2(x – 3)
y + 2 = 2x – 6
2x – y = 8
As the slopes are different, so the lines intesect each other.

Question 35.
REASONING
Two airplanes are flying to the same airport. Their positions are shown in the graph. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation. Solve the system by elimination to justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 42

Answer:
x = 6, y = 12.

Explanation:
To write the system we need the slope of each line and at least one point on the line. The two lines to consider will be the lines connecting the location of each plane to the airport they are flying to. It is also worth noting that the coordinates of the airport represent the point of intersection of the two lines and thus the solution to the system.
Airport (6, 12), Airplane 1 (2, 4), Airplane 2 (15, 9)
the slope of the line connecting airplane 1 and the airport = (4 – 12)/(2- 6)
= -8/-4 = 2
The line equation is y – 4 = 2(x -4)
2x – y = 0
slope of the line connecting airplane 2 and the airport = (4 – 9)/(2 – 15)
= -5/-13 = 5/13
The line equation is y – 9 = 5/13 (x – 15)
x + 3y = 42
So, the system of linear equations are
2x – y = 0 —- (i)
x + 3y = 42 —– (ii)
Multiply (ii) by 2
2(x + 3y = 42)
2x + 6y = 84 — (iii)
Subtract (iii) & (i)
2x – y – 2x – 6y = 0 – 84
-7y = -84
y = 12
Put y = 12 in (i)
2x – 12 = 0
x = 6
We have proven that the location of the airport is in fact the solution to our system.

Question 36.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A laboratory uses liquid nitrogen tanks of two different sizes. The combined volume of 3 large tanks and 2 small tanks is 24 liters. The combined volume of 2 large tanks and 3 small tanks is 21 liters. What is the volume of each size of tank? Justify your answer.

Answer:
The volume of the large tank is 6 lit, the volume of the small tank is 3 lit.

Explanation:
Let x and y be the volume of the large and small tank
The combined volume of 3 large tanks and 2 small tanks is 24 liters. The combined volume of 2 large tanks and 3 small tanks is 21 liters
Combined volume = No of large tanks x volume of large tank + No of small tanks x volume of small tank
3x + 2y = 24 — (i)
2x + 3y = 21 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by -2 and (ii) by 3
-2(3x + 2y = 24)
-6x – 4y = -48
3(2x + 3y = 21)
6x + 9y = 63
Add obtained equations
-6x – 4y + 6x + 9y = -48 + 63
5y = 15
y = 3
Put y = 3 in (i)
3x + 6 = 24
3x = 24 – 6
3x = 18
x = 6
So, the volume of the large tank is 6 lit, volume of the small tank is 3 lit.

Question 37.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows the numbers of correct answers on a practice standardized test. You score 86 points on the test and your friend scores 76 points. How many points is each type of question worth?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 43

Answer:
The marks for correct multiple choice questions, short response questions are 2 and 4.

Explanation:
Let x, y be the marks of multiple choice & short response questions
Total marks = no of correct MCQs x marks for correct MCQs + no of short response questions x marks for short response questions
23x + 10y = 86 — (i)
28x + 5y = 76 —- (ii)
Multiply (ii) by 2
2(28x + 5y = 76)
56x + 10y = 152 —- (iii)
Subtract (i) & (iii)
23x + 10y – 56x – 10y = 86 – 152
-33x = -66
x = 2
Put x = 2 in (i)
23(2) + 10y = 86
10y = 86 – 46
10y = 40
y = 4
So, the marks for correct multiple choice questions, short response questions are 2 and 4.

Question 38.
LOGIC
You solve a system of equations in which x represents the number of adult memberships sold and y represents the number of student memberships sold. Can (-6, 24) be the solution to the system? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
If x represents the number of adult tickets sold, then x must be a non-negative number since there can’t be a negative number of tickets sold.
Therefore (-6, 24) can’t be a solution since that would give x = 6.

Explanation:
If x represents the number of adult tickets sold, then x must be a non-negative number since there can’t be a negative number of tickets sold.
Therefore (-6, 24) can’t be a solution since that would give x = 6.

Question 39.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows the activities of two tourists at a vacation resort. You want to go parasailing for 1 hour and horseback riding for 2 hours. How much do you expect to pay?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 44
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 44.1

Answer:
The cost of parasailing for 1 hour and horseback riding for hours is $90.

Explanation:
Let x and y represent per hour price for parasailing and horseback riding
Total cost = no of hours of parasailing x per hour price for parasailing + no of hours of horseback riding x per hour price for horseback riding
2x + 5y = 205 —- (i)
3x + 3y = 240 — (ii)
Multiply (i) by 3 and (ii) by 2
3(2x + 5y = 205)
6x + 15y = 615 — (iii)
2(3x + 3y = 240)
6x + 6y = 480 —- (iv)
Subtract (iii) & (iv)
6x + 15y – 6x – 6y = 615 – 480
9y = 135
y = 15
Put y = 15 in (i)
2x + 15(5) = 205
2x = 205 – 75
2x = 130
x = 65
So, the Cost of parasailing for 1 hour and harseback riding for hours is x + 2y
= 65 + 2(15)
= $95.

Question 40.
REASONING
Write a system of linear equations containing 2x + y = 0 and that has the solution (2, -4).

Answer:
The system of linear equations are 2x + y = 0, x – y = 6.

Explanation:
The equation of a line that passes through (2, -4) is y = mx + b
-4 = 2m + b
Let us take m slope as 1
-4 = 2 + b
b = -4 – 2
b = -6
So, line is y = x – 6
So, the system of linear equations are 2x + y = 0, x – y = 6.

Question 41.
REASONING
A metal alloy is a mixture of two or more metals. A jeweler wants to make 8 grams of 18-karat gold, which is 75% gold. The jeweler has an alloy that is 90% gold and an alloy that is 50% gold. old. How much of each alloy should the jeweler use?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 45

Answer:
The jeweler should use 5, 3 grams of first and second alloy.

Explanation:
Let x, y be the amount of first & second alloy
Amount of gold = percentage of gold in first alloy x amount of first alloy + percentage of gold in second alloy x amount of the second alloy
x + y = 8
0.9x + 0.5y = 6
y = 8 – x
0.9x + 0.5(8 – x) = 6
0.4x + 4 = 6
0.4x = 2
x = 5
y = 8 – 5
y = 3
The jeweler should use 5, 3 grams of first and second alloy.

Question 42.
PROBLEM SOLVING
It takes a powerboat traveling with the current 30 minutes to go 10 miles. The return trip takes 50 minutes traveling against the current. What is the speed of the current?

Answer:
The current speed is 4 miles per hour.

Explanation:
Let r be the speed of the boat and w be the speed of water current
downstream 10 = (r + w)30
1 = 3(r + w)
3r + 3w = 1 — (i)
Upstream 10 = (r – w)50
1 = 5(r – w)
5r – 5w = 1 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 5 and (ii) by 3 and add them
15r + 15w + 15r – 15w = 5 + 3
30r = 8
r = 4/15
substitute r = 4/15 in (ii)
5(4/15) – 5w = 1
4/3 – 5w = 1
-5w = -1/3
w = 1/15 miles per inute
= 1/15 (60) = 4 miles per hour
The current speed is 4 miles per hour.

Question 43.
DIG DEEPER!
Solve the system of equations by elimination.
2x – y + 3z = -1
x + 2y – 4z = -1
y – 2z = 0

Answer:
The solution set is (-1, 2, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x – y + 3z = -1 —– (i)
x + 2y – 4z = -1 —- (ii)
y – 2z = 0 —– (iii)
Substitute y = 2z in (i) & (ii)
2x – 2z + 3z = -1
2x+ z = -1 —- (iv)
x + 4z – 4z = -1
x = -1
Substitute x = -1 in (iv)
2(-1) + z = -1
z = -1 + 2
z = 1
Substitute z = 1 in (iii)
y – 2 = 0
y = 2
So, the solution set is (-1, 2, 1).

Lesson 5.4 Solving Special Systems of Linear Equations

EXPLORATION 1
Exploring Solutions of Systems
Work with a partner. You spend $50 on a sewing machine to makedog backpacks. Each backpack costs you $15 for materials.
a. Represent the cost (in dollars) to make backpacks in the coordinate plane.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 46
b. You charge $25 per backpack. How many backpacks do you have to break even sell to ? Use a graph to justify your answer.
c. Can you break even when you sell each backpack for $20? $15? Use graphs to justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 47
d. Explain whether it is possible for a system of linear equations to have the numbers of solutions below.

  • no solution
  • exactly one solution
  • exactly two solutions
  • infinitely many solutions

Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 48

5.4 Lesson

Try It

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 1.
y = -x + 3
y = -x + 5

Answer:
There is no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = -x + 3
y = -x + 5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 37
The two lines are parallel to each other.
So, there is no solution.

Question 2.
y = -5x – 2
5x + y = 0

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -5x – 2, 5x + y = 0
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 38
The two lines are parallel to each other.
So, the system has no solution.

Question 3.
x = 2y + 10
2x + 3y = -1

Answer:
The solution set is (4, -3)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x = 2y + 10, 2x + 3y = -1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 39
The point of intersection of two lines is (4, -3)
So, the solution set is (4, -3)

Try It

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 4
x + y = 3
x = y – 3

Answer:
The solution set is (0, 3).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x + y = 3 — (i)
x = y – 3 —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
y – 3 + y = 3
2y = 6
y = 3
Substitute y = 3 in (ii)
x = 3 – 3
x = 0
So, the solution set is (0, 3).

Question 5.
2x + y = 5
4x + 2y = 0

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x + y = 5 —- (i)
4x + 2y = 0 —- (ii)
Solve by graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 40
The lines are parallel so the system has no solution.

Question 6.
2x – 4y = 10
-12x + 24y = -60

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x – 4y = 10 —- (i)
-12x + 24y = -60 — (ii)
Multiply (i) by 6
6(2x – 4y = 10)
12x – 24y = 60 — (iii)
Add (ii) & (iii)
-12x + 24y + 12x – 24y = -60 + 60
0 = 0
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

STRUCTURE
Without graphing or solving, determine the number of solutions of the system. Explain your reasoning.

Question 7.
y = 5x – 9
y = 5x + 9

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 5x – 9
y = 5x + 9
the slope of the two lines are the same i.e 5
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 8.
y = 6x + 2
y = 3x + 1

Answer:
The system has one solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 6x + 2
slope1 = 6
y = 3x + 1
slope2 = 3
Slopes are different
So, the system has one solution.

Question 9.
y = 8x – 2
y – 8x = -2

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 8x – 2
slope 1 = 8
y – 8x = -2
y = -2 + 8x
slope 2 = 8
the slope of the two lines are the same i.e 8
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

CHOOSING A METHOD
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 10.
2x + y = 6
x – y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 0).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x + y = 6 —- (i)
x – y = 3 — (ii)
Add equations
2x + y + x – y = 3 + 6
3x = 9
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (ii)
3 – y = 3
y = 0
So, the solution set is (3, 0).

Question 11.
4y – 4x = 8
y = x + 2

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
4y – 4x = 8 — (i)
y = x + 2 —- (ii)
Substitute 2 in 1
4(x + 2) – 4x = 8
4x + 8 – 4x = 8
8 = 8
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 12.
5x – 4y = 12
7.5x = 6(y – 1)

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
5x – 4y = 12
7.5x = 6(y – 1)
By graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 41
The lines are parrel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 13.
-6x = 9
6x – y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (-3/2, -12)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
-6x = 9
6x – y = 3
-6x = 9
x = -9/6
x = -3/2
Substitute x = -3/2 in 6x – y = 3
6(-3/2) – y = 3
-18/2 – 3 = y
y = -24/2
y = -12
So, the solution set is (-3/2, -12)

Question 14.
0.5x + 4y = -11
-1.5x – 12y = 33

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
0.5x + 4y = -11
-1.5x – 12y = 33
By graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 42
Two equations are on the same line.
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 15.
x = y + 2
3x = 6(y + 2)

Answer:
The solution set is (0, -2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x = y + 2
3x = 6(y + 2)
By graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 43
The point of intersection of two equations is (0, -2)
so, the solution set is (0, -2).

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
Your friend wants to sell painted rocks. He spends $10.00 on startup costs, and each painted rock costs him $0.75 to make. A store offers to pay your friend’s startup costs and buy his painted rocks for $0.75 each. How many painted rocks does your friend need to sell to make a profit?

Answer:
No profit.

Explanation:
The cost on startup is $10 and each painted rock costs around $0.75 to make
A store pays startup cost and buys his painted rocks for $0.75 each
There will be no profit because the cost price and selling price is the same. He buys for $0.75 and sells the same for $0.75.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
The difference in age of two orangutans is 6 years. In 4 years, is it possible for the older orangutan to be twice as old as the younger orangutan? three times as old? Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 49

Answer:
Both are possible

Explanation:
Let us take the age of two orangutans as x and y
The difference in age of two orangutans is 6 years
x – y = 6
So, x is the older one
x = 6 + y
If the older orangutan to be twice as old as the younger orangutan
x = 2y
2y – y = 6
y = 6
If the older orangutan to be three times as old as the younger orangutan
x = 3y
3y – y = 6
2y = 6
y = 3
Both are possible, the older orangutan to be twice as old as the younger orangutan when younger age is 6 years and the older orangutan to be three times as old as the younger orangutan when the younger age is 3 years.

Solving Special Systems of Linear Equations Homework & Practice 5.4

Review & Refresh

Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 1.
x + 2y = 4
-x – y = 2

Answer:
The solution set is (-8, 6)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
x + 2y = 4 — 1
-x – y = 2 — 2
Add both equations
x + 2y – x – y = 4 + 2
y = 6
Substitute y = 6 in 2
-x – 6 = 2
-x = 2 + 6
x = -8
Substitute x = -8, y = 6 in 2
8 – 6 = 2
So, the solution set is (-8, 6)

Question 2.
2x – y = 1
x + 3y – 4 = 0

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
2x – y = 1 —- (i)
x + 3y – 4 = 0 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 3
3(2x – y = 1)
6x – 3y = 3 —- (iii)
Add (iii) & (ii)
6x – 3y + x + 3y – 4 = 3
7x = 3 + 4
7x = 7
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (i)
2(1) – y = 1
2 – y = 1
2 – 1 = y
y = 1
Substitute x = 1, y = 1 in (i)
2(1) – 1 = 2 – 1 = 1
So, the solution set is (1, 1).

Question 3.
3x = -4y + 10
4x + 3y = 11

Answer:
The solution set is (2, 1).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
3x = -4y + 10
3x + 4y = 10 —- (i)
4x + 3y = 11—- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 4 and (ii) by 3
4(3x + 4y = 10)
12x + 16y = 40 —- (iii)
3(4x + 3y = 11)
12x + 9y = 33 —- (iv)
Subtract (iii) from (iv)
12x + 16y – 12x – 9y = 40 – 33
7y = 7
y = 1
Substitute y = 1 in (i)
3x + 4 = 10
3x = 6
x = 2
Substitute x = 2, y = 1 in (i)
3(2) + 4 = 6 + 4 = 10
So, the solution set is (2, 1).

Write an equation of the line that passes through the given points.

Question 4.
(0, 0), (2, 6)

Answer:
y = 3x

Explanation:
The equation of a line when two points given is
(y – y₁) = [(y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)](x – x₁)
x₁ = 0, y₁ = 0, x₂ = 2, y₂ = 6
So, (y – 0) = [(6 – 0)/(2 – 0)] (x – 0)
y = 3x

Question 5.
(0, -3), (3, 3)

Answer:
y = 2x – 3

Explanation:
The equation of a line when two points given is
(y – y₁) = [(y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)](x – x₁)
x₁ = 0, y₁ = -3, x₂ = 3, y₂ = 3
So, (y + 3) = [(3 + 3)/(3 – 0)](x – 0)
(y + 3)  = 2x
y = 2x – 3

Question 6.
(-6, 5), (0, 2)

Answer:
x + 2y = 6

Explanation:
The equation of a line when two points are given is
(y – y₁) = [(y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)](x – x₁)
x₁ = -6, y₁ = 5, x₂ = 0, y₂ = 2
So, (y – 5) = [(2 – 5)/(0 + 6)](x + 6)
y – 6 = -3/6 (x + 6)
y – 6 = -1/2 (x + 6)
2(y – 6) = -1(x + 6)
2y – 12 = -x – 6
2y = -x – 6 + 12
x + 2y = 6

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
EXPLORING SOLUTIONS OF SYSTEMS
Use a graph to determine the number of solutions of the system. (See Exploration 1, p. 219.)

Question 7.
y = 2x + 1
y = 2x + 5

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 2x + 1, y = 2x + 5
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 44
The lines are parallel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 8.
y + 8 = 0
y = 8

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y + 8 = 0, y = 8
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 45
The lines are parallel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 9.
x + y = 2
5x + y = 9

Answer:
The solution is (7/4, 1/4)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x + y = 2, 5x + y = 9
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 46
The lines intersect at (7/4, 1/4)
So, the solution is (7/4, 1/4)

SOLVING A SYSTEM
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 10.
y = 2x – 2
y = 2x + 9

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = 2x – 2 — (i)
y = 2x + 9 — (ii)
Equate equations
2x – 2 = 2x + 9
So, the system has no solution.

Question 11.
y = 3x + 1
-x + 2y = -3

Answer:
The solution is (-1, -2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 3x + 1, -x + 2y = -3
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 47
The lines intersect at (-1, -2)
So, the solution is (-1, -2).

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 50

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = π/3 x + π —- (i)
-πx + 3y = -6π —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-πx + 3(π/3 x + π) = -6π
-πx + πx + 3π = -6π
So, the system has no solution.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 51

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = -1/6 x + 5 —-(i)
x + 6y = 30 —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
x + 6(-1/6 x + 5) = 30
x – x + 30 = 30
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 52

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
1/3 x + y = 1 —- (i)
2x + 6y = 6 —- (ii)
Divide (ii) by 1/6
1/6(2x + 6y = 6)
1/3 x + y = 1 —- (iii)
equation (i) & (iii) are same
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 15.
-2x + y = 1.3
2(0.5x – y) = 4.6

Answer:
The solution is (-2.4, -3.5)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are -2x + y = 1.3, 2(0.5x – y) = 4.6
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 48
The lines intersect at (-2.4, -3.5)
So, the solution is (-2.4, -3.5)

Question 16.
2(x + y) = 9
1 = -4(x + y)

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 2(x + y) = 9, 1 = -4(x + y)
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 49
The lines are parallel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 17.
y = 9x
x + y = 1

Answer:
The solution is (1/10, 9/10)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 9x, x + y = 1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 50
The lines intersect at (1/10, 9/10)
So, the solution is (1/10, 9/10)

Question 18.
0.2y = 4.6x + 1.2
-2.3x = -0.1y + 0.6

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 0.2y = 4.6x + 1.2, -2.3x = -0.1y + 0.6
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 51
Two equations lies on the same line
So, the system has infinitely many solutions

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the number of solutions of the system. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 53

Answer:
Correct.

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are
y = -2x + 4
y = -2x + 6
Two equations have the same slope
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 20.
REASONING
In a pig race, your pig has a head start of 3 feet and runs at a rate of 2 feet per second. Your friend’s pig also runs at a rate of 2 feet per second. A system of linear equations that represents this situation is y = 2x + 3 and y = 2x. Does your friend’s pig catch up to your pig? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 54

Answer:
No.

Explanation:
y = 2x + 3 and y = 2x
Substitute y = 2x in y = 2x + 3
2x = 2x + 3
2x – 2x = 3
0 = 3
The system has no solution
Your friend’s pig never catch up to your pig

Question 21.
REASONING
One equation in a system of linear equations has a slope of 3. The other equation has a slope of 4. How many solutions does the system have? Explain.

Answer:
The system has one solution.

Explanation:
One equation in a system of linear equations has a slope of 3. The other equation has a slope of 4
As the slopes are different. The system has one solution.

Question 22.
LOGIC
How can you use the slopes and the y-intercepts of equations in a system one solution, infinitely many solutions, or no solution?

Answer:
The slope-intercept form of a line is y = mx + c
If the slope is the same, different y-intercept for the two equations, then the system has no solution.
If the slope is different for two equations, then the system has one solution.
If the slope is the same, the same y-intercept for two equations, then the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 23.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and a friend both work two different jobs. The system of linear equations represents the total earnings (in dollars) for x hours worked at the first job and y hours worked at the second job. Your friend earns twice as much as you.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 55
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 56
a. One week, both of you work 4 hours at the first job. How many hours do you and your friend work at the second job?
b. Both of you work the same number of hours at the second job. Compare the number of hours you and your friend work at the first job.

Answer:
a. 16 hours you and your friend work at the second job
b. If both work the same y hours at a second job, then both will same x hours at the first job.

Explanation:
Let x represent the first job and y represents the second job
The system of linear equations for the total number of hours for the first job & second job for you & your friend is
4x + 8y = 64
8x + 16y = 128
a. If x = 4
8(4) + 16y = 128
32 + 16y = 128
16y = 128 – 32
16y = 96
y = 16 hours
b. If both work the same y hours at the second job, then both will same x hours at the first job.

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You download a digital album for $10.00. Then you and your friend each download the same number of individual songs for $0.99 each. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation. Will you and your friend spend the same amount of money? Explain.

Answer:
No

Explanation:
Write the equations for you and your friends’ total cost y where x is the number of songs
you y = 10 + 0.99x
your friend y = 0.99x
The two equations have the same slope but different y-intercepts so the system has no solution.

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the research activities of two students at an observatory. How much does a student pay to use the telescope for one hour?
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 57

Answer:
A student must pay $7.5 for using a telephone per hour and $11 for using a supercomputer per hour.

Explanation:
Let the cost of telephonic use be x, supercomputer use be y. The system of equations are
5x + 3y = 70.50 — (i)
6x + 2y = 67 —- (ii)
Multiply (i) by 2 and (ii) by 3 and subtract them
10x + 6y = 141
18x + 6y = 201
10x + 6y – 18x – 6y = 141 – 201
-8x = -60
x = 7.5
Substitute x = 7.5 in (ii)
6(7.5) + 2y = 67
45 + 2y = 67
2y = 67 – 45
2y = 22
y = 11
So, a student must pay $7.5 for using telephone per hour and $11 for using supercomputer per hour.

Question 26.
REASONING
Does the system shown always, sometimes, or never have a solution when a = b? a ≥ b? a < b? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 58

Answer:
If a = b, the system will always have no solution
If a ≥ b, the system will sometimes have no solution.
If a < b, the system will never have no solution.

Explanation:
If a = b, then two linear equations will have the same slope but different y-intercepts. So, they will always have no solution
If a ≥ b, then the slopes may be different or the same so they may intersect once or not at all. Therefore, they will sometimes have no solution.
If a < b, then the equations have a different slope so they will intersect once. so, they will never have no solution.

Question 27.
LOGIC
The table shows the numbers of lift tickets and ski rentals sold to different groups. Is it possible to determine how much each lift ticket costs using the information for Groups 1 and 2? Groups 1 and 3? Justify your answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 89

Answer:
a. It is not possible to find out the cost of lift tickets using the given information.
b. The cost of a lift ticket is $14, cost of ski rental is $10.

Explanation:
Let the cost for lift tickets and cost for sky rentals be y. The system of equations are
36x + 18y = 684 — (i)
24x + 12y = 456 —- (ii)
18x + 18y = 432 —-(iii)
3(12x + 6y) = 684
12x + 6y = 228
2(12x + 6y) = 456
12x + 6y = 228
Both the equations are same. So, they have infinately many solutions.
Hence, it is not possible to find out the cost of lift tickets using the given information.
b. Subtract 1 from 2
36x + 18y – 18x – 18y = 684 – 432
18x = 252
x = 14
Put x = 14
36(14) + 18y = 684
504 + 18y = 684
18y = 180
y = 10
The cost of lift ticket is $14, cost of ski rentaks is $10.

Question 28.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the values of a and b so the system is shown has the solution (2, 3). Does the system have any other solutions for these values of a and b? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 90

Answer:
(a, b) = (2, 2)

Explanation:
Given that,
12x – 2by = 12
3ax – by = 6
The value of a, b if (x, y) = (2, 3)
12(2) – 2b(3) = 12
24 – 6b = 12
6b = 24 – 12
6b = 12
b = 2
3a(2) – 3b = 6
6a – 3(2) = 6
6a – 6 = 6
6a = 12
a = 2
The system of equations are
12x – 4y = 12
2(6x – 2y) = 12
6x – 2y = 6 — (i)
6x – 2y = 6 — (ii)
As both the equations are same, they have infinately many solutions
(a, b) = (2, 2)

Systems of Linear Equations Connecting Concepts

Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
An animal shelter has a total of 65 cats and dogs. The ratio of cats to dogs is 6:7. Find the number of cats and the number of dogs in the shelter.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 91
Understand the problem.
You know the total number of cats and dogs in an animal shelter, and the ratio of cats to dogs. You are asked to find the number of cats and the number of dogs in the shelter.
Make a plan.
Write a system of equations. Use the total number of cats and dogs to write an equation relating the number of cats and the number of dogs. Use the ratio of cats to dogs to write a second equation. Then solve the system.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Answer:
The number of cats in the shelter is 30, the number of dogs are 35.

Explanation:
Let us take the number of dogs as x, cats as y
An animal shelter has a total of 65 cats and dogs.
x + y = 65 — (i)
The ratio of cats to dogs is 6:7
x : y = 6 : 7
6x = 7y
x = 7y/6
Substitute x = 7y/6 in (i)
7y/6 + y = 65
7y + 6y = 65(6)
13y = 390
y = 30
Substitute y = 30 in (i)
x + 30 = 65
x = 65 – 30
x = 35
So, the number of cats in the shelter are 30, number of dogs are 35.

Question 2.
The measure of ∠1 is 15 degrees less than two times the measure of ∠2. Find the measure of each of the four angles formed by the intersecting lines. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 92

Answer:
The angles are ∠1 = 125, ∠2 = 55, ∠3 = 125, ∠4 = 55.

Explanation:
The measure of ∠1 is 15 degrees less than two times the measure of ∠2.
∠1 – 15 = 2(∠2) — (i)
∠1 + ∠2 = 180 degrees — (ii)
∠1 = 180 – ∠2
180 – ∠2 – 15 = 2(∠2)
165 = 2∠2 + ∠2
165 = 3∠2
∠2 = 55 degrees
Substitute ∠2 = 55 in (i)
∠1 – 15 = 2(55)
∠1 = 110 + 15
∠1 = 125 degrees
So, the angles are ∠1 = 125, ∠2 = 55, ∠3 = 125, ∠4 = 55.

Question 3.
A landscaper plants grass seed over the entire area of two parks that are similar in shape. The ratio of the perimeter of Park A to the perimeter of Park B is 2 : 1. The parks have a combined area of 9000 square feet. How many square feet does the landscaper cover with grass seed at ParkA? Park B? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 93

Answer:
The landscaper cover with grass seed at ParkA is 60√2 at park B is 30√2.

Explanation:
let the side of park A is x, park b is y.
The ratio of the perimeter of Park A to the perimeter of Park B is 2 : 1
x : y = 2 : 1
x = 2y — (i)
The parks have a combined area of 9000 square feet
x² + y² = 9000 —- (ii)
Substitute x = 2y in (ii)
(2y)² + y² = 9000
4y² + y² = 9000
5y² = 9000
y² = 1800
y = 30√2
Substitute y = 30√2 in (i)
x = 2(30√2)
= 60√2
The landscaper cover with grass seed at ParkA is 60√2 at park B is 30√2.

Performance Task

Mixing Alloys

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Gold Alloys.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 94

Systems of Linear Equations Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 95

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Four Square to organize information about a concept. Each of the four squares can be a category, such as definition, vocabulary, example, non-example, words, algebra, table, numbers, visual, graph, or equation. Here is an example of a Four Square for solving systems of linear equations by graphing.
Big Ideas Math Answers 8th Grade Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 96

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. solving systems of linear equations by substitution
  2. solving systems of linear equations by elimination
  3. systems of linear equations with no solution
  4. systems of linear equations with infinitely many solutions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 97

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 98

5.1 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Graphing (pp. 199-204)

Solve the system by graphing.

Question 1.
y = 2x – 3
y = x + 2

Answer:
The solution is (5, 7)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 2x – 3, y = x + 2
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 24
The lines intersect at (5, 7)
So, the solution is (5, 7)

Question 2.
y = -x + 4
x + 2y = 0

Answer:
The solution is (8, -4)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -x + 4, x + 2y = 0
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 25
The lines intersect at (8, -4)
So, the solution is (8, -4)

Question 3.
x – y = -2
2x – 3y = -2

Answer:
The solution is (-4, -2).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are x – y = -2, 2x – 3y = -2
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 26
The lines intersect at (-4, -2)
So, the solution is (-4, -2)

Use a graphing calculator to solve the system.

Question 4.
y = -0.5x
y = 0.75x + 1.25

Answer:
The solution is (-1, 0.5)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = -0.5x, y = 0.75x + 1.25
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 27
The lines intersect at (-1, 0.5)
So, the solution is (-1, 0.5)

Question 5.
y = 0.2x – 3
10x + 3y = 5

Answer:
The solution is (1.3, -2.7)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 0.2x – 3, 10x + 3y = 5
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 28
The lines intersect at (1.3, -2.7)
So, the solution is (1.3, -2.7)

Question 6.
2.6x + 1.3y = 7.8
1.2x – 3.6y = 12

Answer:
The solution is (4, -2)

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are 2.6x + 1.3y = 7.8, 1.2x – 3.6y = 12
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 29
The lines intersect at (4, -2)
So, the solution is (4, -2)

Question 7.
The sum of the two numbers is 38. Find each number when one number is 8 more than the other number. Use a system of linear equations to justify your answer.

Answer:
The numbers are 15, 28.

Explanation:
Let the two numbers be x, y
The sum of two numbers is 38
x + y = 38 — (i)
One number is 8 more than the other number
x + 8 = y — (ii)
Substitute y = x + 8 in (i)
x + x + 8  = 38
2x + 8 = 38
2x = 38 – 8
2x = 30
x = 15
Substitute x = 15 in (ii)
y = 15 + 8
y = 23
So, the numbers are 15, 28.

Question 8.
You observe the heights of two plants for an experiment. Plant A has a height of 8 centimeters and grows 1 centimeter each week. Plant B has a height of 4 centimeters and grows 2 centimeters each week.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 99
b. Will the plants ever have the same height? If so, what is the height?

Answer:
a. y = x + 8, y = 2x + 4
b. The same height will be 12 cm after4 weeks.

Explanation:
Let the total height be y, growth of the plant each week be x.
Plant A has a height of 8 centimeters and grows 1 centimeter each week. Plant B has a height of 4 centimeters and grows 2 centimeters each week.
a. y = x + 8 — (i)
y = 2x + 4 —- (ii)
b. If plants ever have the same height
x + 8 = 2x + 4
2x – x = 8 – 4
x = 4
y = 4 + 8
y = 12
The same height will be 12 cm after4 weeks.

Question 9.
Write a system of linear equations containing the equation y = -3x + 2 and that has a solution of (-1, 5). Use a graph to justify your answer.

Answer:
The equation is y = x + 6

Explanation:
Equation is y = -3x + 2
The point is (-1, 5)
The slope intercept form is y = mx + c
5 = -m + c
If m = 1
then c = 5 = -1 + c
c = 6
Then the equation is y = x + 6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 52

5.2 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Substitution (pp. 205–210)

Solve the system by substitution. Check your solution.

Question 10.
y = -3x – 7
y = x + 9

Answer:
The solution set is (-4, 5).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = -3x – 7 —- (i)
y = x + 9 —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-3x – 7 = x + 9
-3x – x = 9 + 7
-4x = 16
x = -4
Substitute x = -4 in (i)
y = -3(-4) – 7
y = 12 – 7
y = 5
Substitute x = -4, y = 5 in (i)
5 = -3(-4) – 7 = 12 – 7
So, the solution set is (-4, 5).

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 100

Answer:
The solution set is (-8, 0)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
1/2 x + y = -4 —- (i)
y = 2x + 16 —-(ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
1/2 x + 2x + 16 = -4
2.5x = -4 – 16
2.5x = -20
x = -8
Substitute x = -8 in (ii)
y = 2(-8) + 16
y = -16 + 16
y = 0
Substitute x = -8, y = 0 in (ii)
0 = 2(-8) + 16 = -16 + 16
So, the solution set is (-8, 0)

Question 12.
-x + 5y = 28
x + 3y = 20

Answer:
The solution set is (2, 6)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-x + 5y = 28
x + 3y = 20 —- (ii)
x = 5y – 28 —- (i)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
5y – 28 + 3y = 20
8y – 28 = 20
8y = 48
y = 6
Substitute y = 6 in (i)
x = 5(6) – 28
= 30 – 28
x = 2
Substitute y = 6, x = 2 in (ii)
2 + 3(6) = 2 + 18 = 20
So, the solution set is (2, 6)

Question 13.
Zoo admission costs $6 for children and $9 for adults. On Monday, 2200 people visit the zoo and the zoo collects $14,850 in admissions.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
b. How many zoo visitors are children? adults?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 101

Answer:
a. 6x + 9y = 14850, x + y = 2200
b. There are 1650 child visitors and 550 adult visitors.

Explanation:
The cost for the zoo is $6 for children & $9 for adults. On Monday, 2200 people visit the zoo and the zoo collects $14,850 in admissions.
a. The system of equations are
6x + 9y = 14850 — (i)
x + y = 2200 — (ii)
b. Multiply (ii) by 6
6x + 6y = 13200
6x + 6y – 6x – 9y = 13200 – 14850
-3y = -1650
y = 550
Substitute y = 550 in (ii)
x + 550 = 2200
x = 2200 – 550
x = 1650
There are 1650 child visitors and 550 adult visitors.

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 14.
y = x – 2
y = -2x + 1

Answer:
The solution set is (1, -1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = x – 2 — (i)
y = -2x + 1 — (ii)
x – 2 = -2x + 1
x + 2x = 1 + 2
3x = 3
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (i)
y = 1 – 2
y = -1
So, the solution set is (1, -1).

Question 15.
3y + 9 = 3x
y = –\(\frac{1}{3}\)x + 1

Answer:
The solution set is (3, 0).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3y + 9 = 3x — (i)
y = –\(\frac{1}{3}\)x + 1 —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
3(-1/3 x + 1) + 9 = 3x
-x + 3 + 9 = 3x
4x = 12
x = 3
Substitute x = 3 in (i)
9 = 9 + 3y
y = 0
So, the solution set is (3, 0).

Question 16.
-x + 2y = -4
4y = x

Answer:
The solution set is (8, 2).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-x + 2y = -4 —- (i)
4y = x —- (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
-4y + 2y = -4
-2y = -4
y = 2
Substitute y = 2 in (ii)
x = 4(2)
x = 8
So, the solution set is (8, 2).

Question 17.
The measure of an acute angle in a right triangle is one-fourth the measure of the other acute angle. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation and use it to find the measures of the acute angles of the triangle.

Answer:
x = 72 degrees, y = 18 degrees

Explanation:
Let two acute angles be x, y
The measure of an acute angle in a right triangle is one-fourth the measure of the other acute angle
x + y = 90 — (i)
y = 1/4 x — (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
x + 1/4 = 90
5/4 x = 90
x = 90 . (4/5)
x = 72 degrees
So, y = 1/4 (72)
y = 18 degrees

5.3 Solving Systems of Linear Equations by Elimination (pp. 211–218)

Solve the system by elimination. Check your solution.

Question 18.
2x + 5y = 60
2x – 5y = -20

Answer:
The solution set is (10, 8).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2x + 5y = 60 — (i)
2x – 5y = -20 — (ii)
Add both equations
2x + 5y + 2x – 5y = 60 – 20
4x = 40
x = 10
Substitute x = 10 in (i)
2(10) + 5y = 60
20 + 5y = 60
5y = 60 – 20
5y = 40
y = 8
Substitute x = 10, y = 8 in (i)
2(10) + 5(8) = 20 + 40 = 60
So, the solution set is (10, 8).

Question 19.
4x – 3y = 15
2x + y = -5

Answer:
The solution set is (3/2, -3).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
4x – 3y = 15 —- (i)
2x + y = -5 —- (ii)
Multiply (ii) by 3
6x + 3y = -15 —- (iii)
Add (ii) & (i)
4x – 3y + 6 + 3y = 15 – 15
4x – 6 = 0
4x = 6
x = 3/2
Substitute x = 3/2 in (i)
4(3/2) – 3y = 15
6 – 3y = 15
-3y = 15 – 6
-3y = 9
y = -3
Substitute x = 3/2, y = -3 in (i)
4(3/2) – 3(-3) = 6 + 9 = 15
So, the solution set is (3/2, -3).

Question 20.
A gift basket that contains jars of jam and packages of bread mix costs $45. There are 8 items in the basket. Jars of jam cost $6 each, and packages of bread mix cost $5 each. Write and solve a system of linear equations to find the number of each item in the gift basket.

Answer:
5 jars of jam and 3 packages of bread mix.

Explanation:
Let j be the no of jars of jam, b bethe no of packages of bread mix
j + b = 8
6j + 5b = 45
5j + 5b = 40
6j + 5b – 5j – 5b = 45 – 40
j = 5
5 + b = 8
b = 3
So, 5 jars of jam and 3 packages of bread mix.

Question 21.
When might it be easier to solve a system by elimination instead of graphing?

Answer:
Substitution is easier to solve a system by elimination instead of graphing.

Question 22.
You have a total of 10 coins consisting of nickels and dimes in your pocket. The value of the coins is $0.70. Write and solve a system of linear equations to find the numbers of nickels and dimes in your pocket.

Answer:
There are 6 nickels and 4 dimes.

Explanation:
The no of coins of nickles and dimes 10.
x + y = 10 — (i)
0.05x + 0.1y = 0.70 — (ii)
Multiply (i) by 0.05
0.05x + 0.05y = 0.5
0.05x + 0.1y – 0.05x – 0.05y = 0.70 – 0.50
0.05y = 0.2
y = 4
x + 4 = 10
x = 6
There are 6 nickles and 4 dimes.

5.4 Solving Special Systems of Linear Equations (pp. 219–224)

Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.

Question 23.
x + 2y = -5
x – 2y = -5

Answer:
The solution set is (-5, 0)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x + 2y = -5
x – 2y = -5
add both equations
x + 2y + x – 2y = -5 – 5
2x = -10
x = -5
Substitute x = -5 in x – 2y = -5
-5 – 2y = -5
-2y = 0
y = 0
So, the solution set is (-5, 0)

Question 24.
3x – 2y = 1
9x – 6y = 3

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x – 2y = 1 —- (i)
9x – 6y = 3 —- (ii)
Multiply (ii) by 1/3
3x – 2y = 1 —- (iii)
Both (iii) & (ii) are samem so the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 25.
8x – 2y = 16
-4x + y = 8

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
8x – 2y = 16 — (i)
-4x + y = 8 — (ii)
Multiply (i) by 1/2
4x – y = 8 — (iii)
Add (iii) & (ii)
-4x + y – 4x + y = 8 + 8
So, the system has no solution.

Question 26.
4y = x – 8
–\(\frac{1}{4}\)x + y = -1

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
4y = x – 8
–\(\frac{1}{4}\)x + y = -1
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 53
Lines are parallel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 27.
-2x + y = -2
3x + y = 3

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 0).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-2x + y = -2 —(i)
3x + y = 3 — (ii)
Subtract equations
-2x + y – 3x – y = -2 – 3
-5x = -5
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (i)
-2(1) + y = -2
-2 + y = -2
y = 0
Substitute x = 1, y = 0 in (i)
-2(1) + 0 = -2
So, the solution set is (1, 0).

Question 28.
3x = \(\frac{1}{3}\)y + 2
9x – y =-6

Answer:
The system has no solution.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
3x = \(\frac{1}{3}\)y + 2
9x – y =-6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 54
The lines are parallel
So, the system has no solution.

Question 29.
You have $50 in your savings account and plan to deposit $10 each week. Your friend has $25 in her savings account and plans to also deposit $10 each week.
a. Write a system of linear equations that represents this situation.
b. Will your friend’s account ever have the same amount of money as your account? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 102

Answer:
a. y = 10x + 50, y = 10x + 25
b. No, the amount will never be equal.

Explanation:
Let the total amount be y and the number of weeks is x
a. You have $50 in your savings account and plan to deposit $10 each week.
y = 10x + 50
Your friend has $25 in her savings account and plans to also deposit $10 each week.
y = 10x + 25
b. No, the account will never have the same amounts. By inspection, the lines are parallel and have the same slopes but different y-intercepts. So, the amount will always be $25 greater than the friend account but will not be the same.

Write a system of linear equations that fits the description. Use a graph to justify your answer.

Question 30.
The system has no solution.

Answer:
The possible systems of linear equations can be y = -5x – 2, 5x + y = 0.

Explanation:
The conditions where two equations have no solution are The lines should be parallel having the same slopes but different y-intercepts.
So, let us consider the slope as -5 and different y-intercepts.
Then, the possible systems of linear equations can be y = -5x – 2, 5x + y = 0.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 38

Question 31.
The system has infinitely many solutions.

Answer:
The system of linear equations can be 0.5x + 4y = -11, -1.5x – 12y = 33.

Explanation:
The condition is lines are the same and have the same slope, y-intercepts.
So, the system of linear equations can be 0.5x + 4y = -11, -1.5x – 12y = 33
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 42

Question 32.
The system has one solution.

Answer:
The system of linear equations can be -2x + y = 1.3, 2(0.5x – y) = 4.6

Explanation:
The system has only one solution means the lines intersect and have different slopes.
So, the system of linear equations can be -2x + y = 1.3, 2(0.5x – y) = 4.6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 48

Question 33.
Solve the system by graphing, by substitution, and by elimination. Which method do you prefer? Explain your reasoning.
5x + y = 8
2y = -10x + 8

Answer:
The system has no solution.
Out of all methods, I feel graphing is easier.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
5x + y = 8 —- (i)
2y = -10x + 8 —- (ii)
Graph the above equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 55
The lines are parallel. So, the system has no solution.
Using substitution method
Multiply equation (ii) by 1/2
2y = -10x + 8
y = -5x + 4
Substitute y = -5x + 4 in (i)
5x + -5x + 4 = 8
4 = 8
So, the system has no solution
Using elimination method
y = -5x + 4
5x + y = 4 — (iii)
Subtract (i) & (iii)
5x + y – -5x – y = 8 – 4
0 = 4
So, the system has no solution.

Question 34.
Your friend chooses to solve the system of equations by graphing. Would you choose the same method? Why or why not?
5x + 2y = 12
y = x – 8

Answer:
The solution set is (4, -4).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
5x + 2y = 12, y = x – 8
Yes, I will also choose graphing to solve the equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 56
The solution set is (4, -4).

Systems of Linear Equations Practice Test

5 Practice Test

Question 1.
Solve the system by graphing.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 103

Answer:
The solution is (4, 12).

Explanation:
The given systems of linear equations are y = 1/2 x + 10, y = 4x – 4
Graph the equations
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 23
The lines intersect at (4, 12)
So, the solution is (4, 12)

Question 2.
Solve the system by substitution.
-3x + y = 2
-x + y – 4 = 0

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 5)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-3x + y = 2
y = 2 + 3x —- (i)
-x + y – 4 = 0 —- (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
-x + 2 + 3x – 4 = 0
2x – 2 = 0
2x = 2
x = 1
Substitute x = 1 in (i)
y = 2 + 3(1)
y = 2 + 3
y = 5
So, the solution set is (1, 5)

Question 3.
Solve the system by elimination. Solve the system. Check your solution.
x + y = 12
3x = 2y + 6

Answer:
The solution set is (-18, 30)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x + y = 12 —- (i)
3x = 2y + 6
3x – 2y = 6 —- (ii)
Multiply equation (i) by 2
2(x + y = 12)
2x + 2y = 24 —- (iii)
Subtract (ii) from (iii)
3x – 2y – 2x – 2y = 6 – 24
x = -18
Substitute x = -18 in (i)
-18 + y = 12
y = 12 + 18
y = 30
So, the solution set is (-18, 30)

Question 4.
Solve the system. Explain your choice of method.
-2x + y + 3 = 0
3x + 4y = -1

Answer:
The solution set is (1, -1).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
-2x + y + 3 = 0
3x + 4y = -1
By graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 57
The solution set is (1, -1).

Without graphing or solving, determine whether the system of linear equations has one solution, infinitely many solutions, or no solution. Explain your reasoning.

Question 5.
y = 4x + 8
y = 5x + 1

Answer:
The system has one solution.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = 4x + 8 — (i)
y = 5x + 1 —- (ii)
Equate both equations
4x + 8 = 5x + 1
5x – 4x = 8 – 1
x = 7
Substitute x = 7 in (i)
y = 4(7) + 8
y = 28 + 8
y = 36
So, the system has one solution.

Question 6.
2y = 16x – 2
y = 8x – 1

Answer:
The system has infinitely many solutions

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
2y = 16x – 2 — (i)
y = 8x – 1 — (ii)
Substitute (ii) in (i)
2(8x – 1) = 16x – 2
16x – 2 = 16x – 2
So, the system has infinitely many solutions.

Question 7.
y = -3x + 2
6x + 2y = 10

Answer:
The system has  no solution.

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = -3x + 2 — (i)
6x + 2y = 10 — (ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
6x + 2(-3x + 2) = 10
6x – 6x + 4 = 10
4 = 10
So, the system has  no solution.

Question 8.
In the diagram, the measure of ∠1 is three times the measure of ∠2. Find the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 104

Answer:
∠1 = 3(∠2) = ∠6
∠3 = 180 – ∠2 = ∠5 = ∠7
∠4 = ∠2

Explanation:
The measure of ∠1 is three times the measure of ∠2
∠1 = 3(∠2)
∠5 + ∠2 = 180
∠5 = 180 – ∠2
∠6 + ∠1 = 180
∠6 + 3(∠2) = 180
∠6 = 180 – 3(∠2)
∠2 + ∠3 = 180
∠3 = 180 – ∠2 = ∠5
So, ∠4 = ∠2

Question 9.
The price of 2 pears and 6 apples is $14. The price of 3 pears and 9 apples is $21. Can you determine the unit prices for pears and apples? Explain.

Answer:
They have infinitely many solutions.

Explanation:
Let the price of 1 pears be x, price of 1 apple be y
The price of 2 pears and 6 apples is $14
2x + 6y = 14 — (i)
x + 3y = 7
The price of 3 pears and 9 apples is $21
3x + 9y = 21 —- (ii)
x + 3y = 7
Both the equations are the same. So they have infinitely many solutions.

Question 10.
A bouquet of lilies and tulips has 12 flowers. Lilies cost $3 each, and tulips cost $2 each. The bouquet costs $32. Write and solve a system of linear equations to find the numbers of lilies and tulips in the bouquet.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 105

Answer:
8 lilies and 4 tulips.

Explanation:
Let l be the no of lilies, t be the no of tulips
A bouquet of lilies and tulips has 12 flowers
l + t = 12 —- (i)
Lilies cost $3 each, and tulips cost $2 each. The bouquet costs $32.
3l + 2t = 32 — (ii)
Multiply (i) by 3
3(l + t = 12)
3l + 3t = 36 — (iii)
Subtract (iii) from (ii)
3l + 3t – (3l + 2t) = 36 – 32
3l + 3t – 3l – 2t = 4
t = 4
Substitute t = 4 in (i)
l + 4 = 12
l = 12 – 4
l = 8
8 lilies and 4 tulips.

Question 11.
How much does it cost for 2 specials and 2 glasses of milk?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 106

Answer:
The cost of 2 specials & 2 glasses of milk is $16.1.

Explanation:
Let specials be x and glasses of milk be y
4x + 2y = 28 — (i)
3x + 4y = 26.25 — (ii)
2(4x + 2y = 28)
8x + 4y = 56
subtract equations
8x + 4y – (3x + 4y) = 56 – 26.25
8x + 4y – 3x – 4y = 29.75
5x = 29.75
x = 5.95
Substitute x = 5.95 in (i)
4(5.95) + 2y = 28
23.8 + 2y = 28
2y = 28 – 23.8
2y = 4.2
y = 2.1
The cost of 2 specials & 2 glasses of milk is 2x + 2y
= 2(5.95) + 2(2.1)
= 11.9 + 4.2
= 16.1
The cost of 2 specials & 2 glasses of milk is $16.1.

Systems of Linear Equations Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
What is the solution of the system of equations?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 107
B. (0, -1)
C. no solution
D. infinitely many solutions

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 108

Answer:
B. (0, -1)

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
y = 2/3 x – 1
4x + 6y = -6
By graphing
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 58
so, the solution set is (-1, 0)

Question 2.
What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 109

Answer:
x = 40 degrees

Explanation:
x + 140 = 180
x = 180 – 140
x = 40 degrees

Question 3.
Which of the following shows Rectangle E’F’G’H’, the image of Rectangle EFGH after it is translated 4 units down?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 110
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 111

Answer:
F.

Explanation:
By observing all the images we can say that F is the answer.

Question 4.
Which point is a solution of the system of equations?
x + 3y = 10
x = 2y – 5
A. (1, 3)
B. (3, 1)
C. (55, -15)
D. (-35, -15)

Answer:
The solution set is (1, 3).

Explanation:
The given system of linear equations are
x + 3y = 10
x = 2y – 5
Substitute x = 2y – 5 in x + 3y = 10
2y – 5 + 3y = 10
5y = 10 + 5
5y = 15
y = 3
Substitute y = 3 in x = 2y – 5
x = 2(3) – 5
x = 6 – 5
x = 1
So, the solution set is (1, 3).

Question 5.
The graph of a system of two linear equations is shown. Which point is the solution of the system?
F. (-1, 2)
G. (0, 4)
H. (2, -1)
I. (0, 0)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 112

Answer:
F. (-1, 2)

Explanation:
From the graph, the point of intersection of two equations is (-1, 2)
So, the solution set is (-1, 2).

Question 6.
A scenic train ride has one price for adults and one price for children. One family of two adults and two children pays $62 for the train ride. Another family of one adult and four children pays $70. Which system of linear equations can you use to find the price x for an adult and the price y for a child?
A. 2x + 2y = 70
x + 4y = 62
B. x + y = 62
x + y = 70
C. 2x + 2y = 62
4x + y = 70
D. 2x + 2y = 62
x + 4y = 70

Answer:
D. 2x + 2y = 62
x + 4y = 70

Explanation:
If x is the cost of an adult ticket, y is the cost of a child ticket, then
One family of two adults and two children pays $62 for the train ride.
2x + 2y = 62
Another family of one adult and four children pays $70.
x + 4y = 70.

Question 7.
Which of the following is true about the graph of the linear equation y =-7x + 5?
F. The slope is 5, and the y-intercept is -7.
G. The slope is -5, and the y-intercept is -7.
H. The slope is -7, and the y-intercept is -5.
I. The slope is -7, and the y-intercept is 5.

Answer:
H. The slope is -7, and the y-intercept is -5.

Explanation:
The given equation is y =-7x + 5
The equation in the form of y = mx + c
So, slope m = -7, y-intercept c = 5

Question 8.
What is the measure (in degrees) of the exterior angle of the triangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 113

Answer:
The exterior angle of the triangle is 127 degrees

Explanation:
The Sum of angles of a triangle is 180
x + 64 + y = 180
x + y = 180 – 64
x + y = 116
y = 116 – x — (i)
Sum of unknown angle and exterior angle is 180
y + 2x + 1 = 180
y + 2x = 180 – 1
2x + y = 179 —(ii)
Substitute (i) in (ii)
2x + 116 – x = 179
x + 116 = 179
x = 179 – 116
x = 63
So, the exterior angle is (2x + 1) = 2(63) + 1
= 126 + 1 = 127 degrees

Question 9.
The graph of which equation is parallel to the line that passes through the points (-1, 5) and (4, 7)?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 114

Answer:
c.

Explanation:
The equation of a line pass through two points is (y – y₁) = [ =(y₂ – y₁)/(x₂ – x₁)](x – x₁)
x₁ = -1, y₁ = 5, x₂ = 4, y₂ = 7
So, (y – 5) = (7 – 5)/(4 + 1)(x + 1)
y – 5 = 2/5(x + 1)
5(y – 5) = 2(x + 1)
5y – 25 = 2x + 2
5y = 2x + 2 + 25
5y = 2x + 27
y = 2/5 x + 27/5

Question 10.
You buy 3 T-shirts and 2 pairs of shorts for $42.50. Your friend buys 5 T-shirts and 3 pairs of shorts for $67.50. Use a system of linear equations to find the cost of each T-shirt. Show your work and explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 115

Answer:
The cost of each T-shirt is $7.5.

Explanation:
Let t be the price of a t-shirt, s be the price of a pair of shorts
You buy 3 T-shirts and 2 pairs of shorts for $42.50.
3t + 2s = 42.50
Your friend buys 5 T-shirts and 3 pairs of shorts for $67.50
5t + 3s = 67.50
Multiply the first equation by 3 and second by 2 and then subtract two equations
3(3t + 2s = 42.50) ➝ 9t + 6s = 127.50
2(5t + 3s = 67.50) ➝ 10t + 6s = 135
10t + 6s – 9t – 6s = 135 – 127.50
t = 7.5
The cost of each T-shirt is $7.5.

Question 11.
The red figure is congruent to the blue figure. Which of the following is a sequence of rigid motions between the figures?
F.Translate the red triangle 6 units left and then 4 units down.
G. Reflect the red triangle in the x-axis, and then translate 4 units down.
H. Reflect the red triangle in the y-axis, and then translate 4 units down.
I. Rotate the red triangle 180° clockwise about the origin.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 116

Answer:
I. Rotate the red triangle 180° clockwise about the origin.

Explanation:
The vertices of the red triangle is (1, 1), (4, 1), (3, 4)
The vertices of the blue triangle are (-1, -3), (-4, -3), (-3, 0)

Question 12.
Which of the following is true about the graph of the linear equation y = 2?
A. The graph is a vertical line that passes through (2, 0).
B. The graph is a vertical line that passes through (0, 2).
C. The graph is a horizontal line that passes through (2, 0).
D. The graph is a horizontal line that passes through (0, 2).

Answer:
C. The graph is a horizontal line that passes through (2, 0).

Explanation:
The graph for the linear equation y = 2 is
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 8 Chapter 5 Systems of Linear Equations 59

Question 13.
The sum of one-third of a number and 10 is equal to 13. What is the number?
F. \(\frac{8}{3}\)
G. 9
H. 29
I. 69

Answer:
G. 9

Explanation:
Let the number be n
The sum of one-third of a number and 10 is equal to 13
1/3 n + 10 = 13
1/3 n = 13 – 10
1/3 n = 3
n = 3 x 3
n = 9

Question 14.
Solve the equation 4x + 7y = 16 for x.
A. x = 4 + \(\frac{7}{4}\)y
B. x = 4 – \(\frac{7}{4}\)y
C. x = 4 + \(\frac{4}{7}\)y
D. x = 16 – 7y

Answer:
B. x = 4 – \(\frac{7}{4}\)y

Explanation:
The given equation is 4x + 7y = 16
4x = 16 – 7y
x = (16 – 7y)/4
x = 4 – 7y/4

Conclusion:

The solutions given in this Big Ideas Math Grade 8 Chapter 5 are prepared by the subject experts. So, don’t worry about the answers just go through the answers and try to solve the problems. Test your knowledge by practicing the questions in the practice test section. After solving them cross check the answers. Follow our ccssmathanswers.com to get the latest updates regarding all Grade 8 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals

Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals PDF for free. Learn every topic of BIM Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals Answers. Make use of our material and check out the step-by-step explanation to learn all the concepts easily. Enjoy the learning of maths with the help of our BIM Grade 5 Answer Key for Chapter 7 Divide Decimals. Our complete guide will help you to score the best marks in the exam and also in your preparation. Therefore, without any second thought prepare with Big Ideas Math Book 5th class Answer Key Chapter 7 Divide Decimals and get a good score in the exam.

Big Ideas Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 5th Grade Math Book Answer Key

Find the best tips that make your students love to practice maths and encourage them to use them for easy practicing. We have also provided different tricks to solve all the math problems. Big Ideas math 5th grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals textbook Answer Key is the best source for the students. All the relevant links of Divide Decimals are given below. Check the links and begin your practice now.

Lesson: 1 Division Pattern with Decimals

Lesson: 2 Estimate Decimals Quotients

Lesson: 3 Use Models to Divide Decimals by Whole Numbers

Lesson: 4 Divide Decimals by One-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 5 Divide Decimals by Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 6 Use Models to Divide Decimals

Lesson: 7 Divide Decimals

Lesson: 8 Insert Zeros in the Dividend

Lesson: 9 Problem Solving: Decimal Operations

Chapter: 7 – Divide Decimals

Lesson 7.1 Division Pattern with Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use the relationship between positions in a place value chart to find each quotient.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 1
What patterns do you notice?
Answer:

Structure

Describe the placement of the decimal point when dividing a decimal by 10, 100, 0.1, and 0.01.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Division Pattern with Decimals

Example
Find 74 ÷ 103.
Use place value concepts. Every time you multiply a number by \(\frac{1}{10}\) or divide a number by 10, each digit in the number shifts one position to the right in a place value chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 2
Notice the pattern: In each quotient, the number of places the decimal point moves to the left is the same as the exponent.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 3
Example
Find 5.8 ÷ 0.01.
Use place value concepts. Every time you multiply a number by 10 or divide a number by 0.1, each digit in the number shifts one position to the left in a place value chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 4
Notice the pattern: When you divide by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the right. When you divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the right.

Show and Grow

Find the quotient.
Question 1.
62.5 ÷ 102 = ______
Answer: 0.625
Explanation:  First Simplify the 102 which means  10X10 =100 then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator(62.5) by the denominator (100): 62.5 ÷ 100 =0.625 so,  62.5/100 =0.625
Question 2.
1.84 ÷ 0.1 = ______
Answer: 18.4
Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (1.84) by the denominator (0.1): 1.84 ÷ 0.1 = 18.4 so, 1.84/0.1 = 18.4

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the quotient.
Question 3.
76 ÷ 10 = ______
Answer:  7.6
Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (76) by the denominator (10): 76 ÷ 10 = 7.6 so, 76/10 = 7.6
Question 4.
3.65 ÷ 0.1 = _______
Answer: 36.5
Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (3.65) by the denominator (0.1): 3.65 ÷ 0.1 = 36.5. so, 3.65/0.1 = 36.5
Question 5.
2.9 ÷ 0.01 = ______
Answer: 290
Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (2.9) by the denominator (0.01): 2.9 ÷ 0.01 = 290. so, 2.9/0.01 = 290
Question 6.
18.7 ÷ 102 = ______
Answer: 0.187
Explanation: First Simplify the 102 which means  10X10 =100 then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator(18.7) by the denominator (100): 18.7 ÷ 100 =0.187 so,  18.7/100 =0.187

Find the value of k.
Question 7.
95.8 ÷ k = 958
Answer: K = 0.1
Explanation: Lets solve your equation step by step 95.8/k = 958
Multiply both side by side K.
95.8 = 958K
958k = 95.8 (Flip the equation)
958k/958 = 95.8/958(Divide both sides by 958)
K=0.1
Question 8.
k ÷ 103 = 0.35
Answer: K =350
Explanation: K÷103 =0.35
Step 1: calculate the value of the power which means 103 = 10x10x10=1000
k/1000=0.35
step 2: multiply both side by 1000
1000X K/1000 = 1000X0.35
Step 3: simplify
1000 X K/1000 = 1000X0.35
K = 350
Question 9.
245 ÷ k = 24,500
Answer: K =0.01
Explanation: variable K cannot be equal to 0 since division by zero is not defined. Multiply both side of equation by K
245 = 24500K
swap sides so that all variables terms are on the left hand side
24500K = 245
Divide both sides by 24500.
K =245/24500
Reduces the fraction 245/24500 to lowest terms by extracting and cancelling out 245
K = 1/100 ,Therefore K = 0.01
Question 10.
Newton goes on a 10-day road trip. He takes $435 with him. He spends all of his money and spends the same amount each day. How much money does he spend each day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 5
Answer: $43.5/per day
Explanation: Newton takes $435 for 10 days road trip.
435/10 = 43.5
Newton Spend the money per day is = $43.5/day
Question 11.
Number Sense
For which equations does b = 100?
49 ÷ b = 0.49
247 ÷ b = 0.247
1.3 ÷ b = 0.013
0.5 ÷ b = 0.05
Answer:

49 ÷ b = 0.49

1.3 ÷ b = 0.013

For these two equations b value should be 100.

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says 8,705 ÷ 103 is equivalent 8,705 × 0.001. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:

First simplify the 103 which means  10 \small \times 10 \small \times 10 = 1000

8,705 ÷ 103

= 8,705 ÷ 1000
= 8,705 \small \times \small \frac{1}{1000}
= 8,705 \small \times 0.001
8,705 ÷ 103 is equivalent 8,705 × 0.001
So, my friend answer is correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A contractor buys 2 adjacent lots of land. One lot is 0.55 acre and the other is 1.65 acres. The contractor divides the land equally for 10 new homes. How much land does each home have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 6
To find how much land each home has, divide the sum of the lot sizes by 10.
Add the sizes of the lots.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 7
Divide the total number of acres by 10. Dividing 2.20 by 10, or 101, shifts the digits ______ position to the right in a place value chart. So, the decimal point moves ______ place to the left.
2.20 ÷ 10 = 2.20 ÷ 101 = ______
Each home has ________ acre.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
An art teacher has 68.5 pounds of clay and orders 56.5 more pounds. The teacher equally divides the clay among 100 students. How much clay does each student get?
Answer:
To find how much clay each student get, divide the sum of the clay by 100.
Add the quantities of the clay.
68.5 + 56.5 = 125
Divide the total clay by 100. Dividing 125 by 100, or 102
125 ÷ 100 = 125 ÷ 102 = 1.25
Each student gets 1.25 pounds clay.

Question 14.
A museum has a replica of the Space Needle that is 6.05 feet tall. It is one-hundredth of the height of the actual Space Needle. How tall is the actual Space Needle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 8
Answer:
Replica of the Space Needle height = 6.05 feet
Let actual Space Needle height = h
\small \frac{1}{100} (h) = 6.05
h = 6.05 \small \times 100 = 605
So actual Space Needle height is 605 feet.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
A pile of 102 loonies weighs 627 grams and a pile of 102 toonies weighs 730 grams. How much more does a toonie weigh than a loonie? Is there more than one way to solve the problem? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 9
Answer:
A pile of 102 loonies weight = 627 grams
A pile of 102 toonies weight = 730 grams
730 – 627 = 103
Toonie weighs 103 grams more than a loonie.
Method – 2
1 loonie weight = \small \frac{627}{10^{2}} = 6.27
1 toonie weight = \small \frac{730}{10^{2}} = 7.30
7.30 – 6.27 = 1.03
For 102 toonies and loonies = 1.03 x 102 = 103
Toonie weighs 103 grams more than a loonie.

Division Pattern with Decimals Homework & Practice 7.1

Find the quotient.
Question 1.
810 ÷ 10 = ______
Answer: 81

Explanation:
To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (810) by the denominator (10):
When we divide by 10, the decimal point moves one place to the left.
810 ÷ 10 = 81.

Question 2.
7.4 ÷ 0.01 = ______
Answer: 740

Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (7.4) by the denominator (0.01). When we divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the right. : 7.4 ÷ 0.01 = 740.

Question 3.
903 ÷ 103 = ______
Answer: 0.903

First Simplify the 103 which means  10 x 10 x 10 =1000, then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (903) by the denominator (1000).
When we divide by 1000, the decimal point moves three places to the left.

Question 4.
267.1 ÷ 0.01 = ______
Answer: 26710

Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (267.1) by the denominator (0.01).
When we divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the right :
267.1 ÷ 0.01 = 26710

Question 5.
5.6 ÷ 0.1 = ______
Answer: 56

Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (5.6) by the denominator (0.1).
When we divide by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the right :
5.6 ÷ 0.1 = 56

Question 6.
0.4 ÷ 102 = ______
Answer: 0.004

First Simplify the 102 which means  10 x 10 = 100, then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (0.4) by the denominator (100).
When we divide by 100, the decimal point moves two places to the left :
0.4 ÷ 100 = 0.004

Find the value of k.
Question 7.
89 ÷ k = 8.9
Answer: k = 10

Explanation: Lets solve your equation step by step 89 ÷ k = 8.9
Multiply both sides by K.
89 = 8.9 K
8.9 K = 89 (Flip the equation)

\small \frac{8.9 k}{8.9}  = \small \frac{89}{8.9}  (Divide both sides by 8.9)
k = 10

Question 8.
k ÷ 0.01 = 36
Answer: k = 0.36

\small \frac{k}{0.01} = 36
Multiply both sides by 0.01
\small \frac{k}{0.01} x 0.01 = 36 x 0.01
k = 0.36

Question 9.
72.4 ÷ 0.724
Answer: 100

To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (72.4) by the denominator (0.724).

Question 10.
A box of 100 sanitizing wipes costs $12. How much does one wipe cost?
Answer:
100 sanitizing wipes = $12
one wipe cost = \small \frac{12}{100} = $0.12
When we divide by 100, the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Question 11.
Patterns
How does the value of a number change when you divide by 10? 100? 1,000?
Answer:
When we divide by 10, the decimal point moves one place to the left.
When we divide by 100, the decimal point moves two places to the left.
When we divide by 1000, the decimal point moves three places to the left.

Question 12.
Writing
How can you determine where to place the decimal point when dividing 61 by 1,000?
Answer:

\small \frac{61}{1000}
When we divide by 1000, the decimal point moves three places to the left.
so, \small \frac{61}{1000} = 0.061

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
What is Newton’s number?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.1 10
Answer:
3.4 is the number.
57 – 23 = 34
34 x 0.1 = 3.4

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
A family buys 2 personal watercrafts for $3,495 each. The family makes 10 equal payments for the watercrafts. What is the amount of each payment?
Answer:
To find amount of each payment, divide the sum of the personal watercrafts by 10.
Add 2 personal watercrafts.
3,495 + 3,495 = 6990
Divide the total sum by 10. Dividing 6990 by 10, or 101
6990 ÷ 10 = 6990 ÷ 101 = 699
So, the amount of each payment = $699.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A group of people attempts to bake the largest vegan cake. They use 17 kilograms of cocoa powder, which is one-tenth the amount of kilograms of dates they use. How many kilograms of cocoa power and dates do they use altogether?
Answer:
Cocoa powder = 17 kilograms
Let dates amount = d
(1/10)d = 17
dates(d) = 17 x 10 = 170 kilograms
Sum of cocoa power and dates = 17 + 170 = 187 kilograms

Review & Refresh

Find the sum or difference.
Question 16.
0.75 – 0.23 = ______
Answer: 0.52

Question 17.
1.46 + 1.97 = ______
Answer: 3.43

Lesson 7.2 Estimate Decimals Quotients

Explore and Grow

Choose an expression to estimate each quotient. Write the expression. You may use an expression more than once.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 1
Compare your answers with a partner. Did you choose the same expressions?
Answer:

Construct Arguments
Which estimated quotient do you think will be closer to the quotient 8.3 ÷ 2.1? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 2
Answer:

Think and Grow: Estimate Decimals Quotients

Key Idea
You can use compatible numbers to estimate quotients involving decimals. When the divisor is greater than the dividend, rename the dividend as tenths or hundredths, then divide.
Example
Estimate 146.26 ÷ 41.2.
Round the divisor 41.2 to 40.
Think: What numbers close to 146.26 are easily divided by 40?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 3
Choose 160 because 146.26 is closer to 160. So, 146.26 ÷ 41.2 is about _____.

Example
Estimate 4.2 ÷ 8.
Rename 4.2 as tenths.
4.2 is 42 tenths. 42 tenths is close to40 tenths. 40 and 8 are compatible numbers.
40 tenths ÷ 8 = _______ tenths, or ______
So, 4.2 ÷ 8 is about ______.

Show and Grow

Estimate the quotient.
Question 1.
17.4 ÷ 3.1
Answer:
Round the divisor 3.1 to 3.
Think: What numbers close to 17.4 are easily divided by 3?
Use 18.
18 ÷ 3 = 6
So, 17.4 ÷ 3.1 is about 6.

Question 2.
57.5 ÷ 6.89
Answer:
Round the divisor 6.89 to 7.
Think: What numbers close to 57.5 are easily divided by 7?
Use 56.
56 ÷ 7 = 8
So, 57.5 ÷ 6.89 is about 8.

Question 3.
3.7 ÷ 5
Answer:
Rename 3.7 as tenths
3.7 is 37 tenths. 37 is close to 35.
35 tenths ÷ 5 = 7 tenths or 0.7
So, 3.7 ÷ 5 is about 0.7

Question 4.
25.8 ÷ 30
Answer:
Rename 25.8 as tenths
25.8 is 258 tenths. 258 is close to 270.
270 tenths ÷ 30 = 9 tenths or 0.9
So, 25.8 ÷ 30 is about 0.9

Apply and Grow: Practice

Estimate the quotient.
Question 5.
3.5 ÷ 6
Answer:
Rename 3.5 as tenths
3.5 is 35 tenths. 35 is close to 36.
36 tenths ÷ 6 = 6 tenths or 0.6
So, 3.5 ÷ 6 is about 0.6

Question 6.
1.87 ÷ 9
Answer:
Rename 1.87 as tenths
1.87 is 18.7 tenths. 18.7 is close to 18.
18 tenths ÷ 9 = 2 tenths or 0.2
So, 1.87 ÷ 9 is about 0.2

Question 7.
46 ÷ 2.3
Answer:
Round the divisor 2.3 to 2.
46 ÷ 2 = 23

Question 8.
31.1 ÷ 6.5
Answer:
Round the divisor 6.5 to 6.
31.1 is closer to 30.
30 ÷ 6 = 5
So, 31.1 ÷ 6.5 is about 5.

Question 9.
91.08 ÷ 5.2
Answer:
Round the divisor 5.2 to 5.
91.08 is closer to 90.
90 ÷ 5 = 18
So, 91.08 ÷ 5.2 is about 18.

Question 10.
137.14 ÷ 12.2
Answer:
Round the divisor 12.2 to 12.
137.14 is closer to 144.
12 and 144 are compatible numbers.
144 ÷ 12 = 12
So, 137.14 ÷ 12.2 is about 12.

Question 11.
A group of 6 friends goes ice skating. They pay $43.50 altogether for admission and skate rental. The friends share the cost equally. How much does each friend pay?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 4
Answer:
Total amount paid = $43.50
6 friends goes ice skating.
43.5 is closer to 42.
42 ÷ 6 = 7
So, each friend pay about $7.

Question 12.
Reasoning
Descartes estimates 43.2 ÷ 7.3 using mental math. Do you think he uses 43 ÷ 7 or 42 ÷ 7? Explain.
Answer:
Round the divisor 7.3 to 7
Think: What numbers close to 43.2 are easily divided by 7?
Use 42.
42 and 7 are compatible numbers.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
So, 42 ÷ 7 is correct.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Describe a division situation in which an estimate of two decimals is appropriate.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Your friend types 25 words each minute. About how many more words can your friend type each minute than you?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 5
To find how many words you can type each minute, divide the number of words you type in 15 minutes by 15.
Think: What numbers close to 307.5 are easily divided by 15?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 6
Choose 300 because 307.5 is closer to 300. So, 307.5 ÷ 15 is about _______.
So, you type about _______ words each minute.
Subtract the words you type each minute from the words your friend types each minute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 7
Your friend can type about ______ more words each minute than you.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
Newton subscribes to a television streaming service and buys a gym membership. He spends $143.99 on the streaming service for 12 months. About how much more does it cost each month for the gym membership than the streaming service?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 8
Answer:
To find much more does it cost each month, divide how much he spends for 12 months by 12.
Think: What numbers close to $143.99 are easily divided by 12?
Use 144
144 ÷ 12 = 12
Gym Membership each month = $19.99 = $20
20 – 12 = $8
The gym membership costs $8 more than the streaming service.

Question 15.
A fish tank pump filters 158.5 gallons of water each hour. About how many gallons of water does the pump filter each minute?
Answer:
Fish tank pump filters 158.5 gallons of water
1 hour = 60 minutes
Think: What numbers close to 158.5 are easily divided by 60?
Use 180
180 ÷ 60 = 3
Pump filters about 3 gallons of water each minute.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
A group of 32 students goes to a museum and a play. The total cost for the museum is $358.98 and the total cost for the play is $256.48. About how much does it cost for each student to go to the museum and the play?
Answer:
Cost for museum = $358.98
Cost for the play = $256.48
358.98 + 256.48 = $615.46
Think: What numbers close to 615.46 are easily divided by 32?
Use 608. It is closer to 615.46
608 ÷ 32 = $19
Each student go to the museum and the play costs about $19.

Estimate Decimals Quotients Homework & Practice 7.2

Estimate the quotient.
Question 1.
2.3 ÷ 6
Answer:
Rename 2.3 as tenths
2.3 is 23 tenths. 23 is close to 24.
24 tenths ÷ 6 = 4 tenths or 0.4
So, 2.3 ÷ 6 is about 0.4

Question 2.
1.67 ÷ 8
Answer:
Rename 1.67 as hundredths
1.67 is 167 hundredths. 167 is close to 168.
168 hundredths ÷ 8 = 21 hundredths or 0.21
So, 1.67 ÷ 8 is about 0.21

Question 3.
28 ÷ 4.7
Answer:
Round the divisor 4.7 to 5
28 is closer to 30
30 ÷ 5 = 6
So, 28 ÷ 4.7 is about 6.

Question 4.
13.8 ÷ 4.9
Answer:
Round the divisor 4.9 to 5
Think: What numbers close to 13.8 are easily divided by 5?
Use 15.
15 ÷ 5 = 3
So, 13.8 ÷ 4.9 is about 3.

Question 5.
42.1 ÷ 7.3
Answer:
Round the divisor 7.3 to 7
Think: What numbers close to 42.1 are easily divided by 7?
Use 42.
42 ÷ 7 = 6
So, 42.1 ÷ 7.3 is about 6.

Question 6.
201.94 ÷ 18.1
Answer:
Round the divisor 18.1 to 18
Think: What numbers close to 201.94 are easily divided by 18?
Use 198.
198 ÷ 18 = 11
So, 201.94 ÷ 18.1 is about 11.

Question 7.
A carpenter has a plank of wood that is 121.92 centimeters long. He cuts the plank into 4 equal pieces. About how long is each piece?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 9
Answer:
Given that,
Plank of wood = 121.92 cm long
121.92 is closer to 120.
120 ÷ 4 = 30
So, each piece is 30 cm long.

Question 8.
Reasoning
A family used 9.8 gallons of gasoline to drive 275.5 miles. To determine how far they drove using one gallon of gasoline, can they use an estimate, or is an exact answer required? Explain.
Answer:
Given that,
9.8 gallons of gasoline drives = 275.5 miles
1 gallon = 275.5 ÷ 9.8
Divisor 9.8 is rounded to 10.
275.5 is closer to 276.
276 ÷ 10 is about 27.6

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says 9 ÷ 2.5 is about 3. Is your friend’s estimate reasonable? Explain.
Answer:
Round the divisor 2.5 to 3.
9 ÷ 3 =3
So, my friend’s estimate is reasonable.

Number Sense
Without calculating, tell whether the quotient is greater than or less than 1. Explain.
Question 10.
4.58 ÷ 0.3
Answer:
When the dividend is greater than the divisor, the quotient is greater than 1.

Question 11.
0.6 ÷ 12
Answer:
When the divisor is greater than the dividend, the quotient is less than 1.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
The maximum allowed flow rate for a shower head in California is 42.5 gallons of water in 17 minutes. About how much greater is this than the maximum allowed flow rate for a kitchen faucet in California?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 10
Answer:
To find much much greater it is, divide how much gallons of water in 17 minutes by 17.
Think: What numbers close to 42.5 are easily divided by 17?
Use 34. 34 is closer to 42.5.
34 ÷ 17 =2
Kitchen faucet = 2.2 gallons
2.2 – 2 = 0.2
Shower head in California is about 0.2 gallons greater than the maximum allowed flow rate for a kitchen faucet in California.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
To compare the amounts in the table, you assume the same amount of snow fell each hour for 24 hours. About how many more inches of snow fell in Colorado each hour than in Utah?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.2 11
Answer:
Time t = 24 hours
Colorado snowfall = 75.8 is closer to 72
Illinois snowfall = 37.8
Utah snowfall = 55.5 is closer to 48
(72 – 48)/24 = 1
Snow fall in Colorado each hour is about 1 inch more than in Utah.

Review & Refresh

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 14.
56 × 78 = _____
Answer: 4368

Question 15.
902 × 27 = ______
Answer: 24,354

Question 16.
4,602 × 35 = _______
Answer: 1,61,070

Lesson 7.3 Use Models to Divide Decimals by Whole Numbers

Explore and Grow

Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 1
Answer:

Reasoning
When you divide a decimal by a whole number, what does the quotient represent?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Use Models to Divide Decimals

Example
Use a model to find 2.16 ÷ 3.
Think: 2.16 is 2 ones, 1 tenth, and 6 hundredths.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 2
• 21 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of _______ tenths.
• 6 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of _______ hundredths.
So, 216 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of _______ hundredths.
So, 2.16 ÷ 3 = _______

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Use the model to find 3.25 ÷ 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 3
3.25 ÷ 5 = ______
Answer:
Think: 3.25 is 3 ones, 2 tenths and 5 hundredths.
32 tenths can be divided equally as 5 groups
So, 325 hundredths can be divided equally as 5 groups
So, 3.25 ÷ 5 = 0.65

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 2.
2.4 ÷ 4
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 4
Answer:
Think: 2.4 is 2 ones and 4 tenths
24 tenths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 6 tenths.
So, 2.4 ÷ 4 = 6 tenths = 0.6

Question 3.
1.36 ÷ 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 5
Answer:
Think: 1.36 is 1 ones, 3 tenth and 6 hundredths.
13 tenths can be divided equally as 2 groups
So, 136 hundredths can be divided equally as 2 groups
So, 1.36 ÷ 2 = 0.68

Use a model to find the quotient.
Question 4.
1.5 ÷ 3
Answer:
Think: 1.5 is 1 ones and 5 tenths
15 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 5 tenths.
So, 1.5 ÷ 3 = 5 tenths = 0.5

Question 5.
2.7 ÷ 9
Answer:
Think: 2.7 is 2 ones and 7 tenths
27 tenths can be divided equally as 9 groups of 3 tenths.
So, 2.7 ÷ 9 = 3 tenths = 0.3

Question 6.
1.44 ÷ 8
Answer:
Think: 1.44 is 1 ones, 4 tenth and 4 hundredths.
14 tenths can be divided equally as 8 groups
So, 144 hundredths can be divided equally as 8 groups
So, 1.44 ÷ 8 = 0.18

Question 7.
3.12 ÷ 6
Answer:
Think: 3.12 is 3 ones, 1 tenth and 2 hundredths.
31 tenths can be divided equally as 6 groups
So, 312 hundredths can be divided equally as 6 groups
So, 3.12 ÷ 6 = 0.52

Question 8.
Reasoning
Do you start dividing the ones first when finding 5.95 ÷ 7? Explain.
Answer:
Think: 5.95 is 5 ones, 9 tenth and 5 hundredths.
We have to start dividing the tenths first because 5 ones is less than 7.
59 tenths can be divided equally as 7 groups
So, 595 hundredths can be divided equally as 7 groups
So, 5.95 ÷ 7 = 0.85

Question 9.
Number Sense
Without dividing, determine whether the quotient of 9.85 and 5 is greater than or less than 2. Explain.
Answer: Quotient of 9.85 and 5 is less than 2, because 5 x 2 =10 and 9.85 is less than 10.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A bag of 3 racquetballs weighs 4.2 ounces. What is the weight of each racquetball?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 6
Divide the weight of the bag by 3 to find the weight of each racquetball.
Think: 4.2 is 4 ones and 2 tenths.
Shade 42 tenths to represent 4.2. Divide the model to show 3 equal groups.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 7
42 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of ______ tenths.
4.2 ÷ 3 = ______
So, each racquetball weighs ______ ounces.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You cut a 3.75-foot-long string into 5 pieces of equal length to make a beaded wind chime. What is the length of each piece of string?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 8
Answer:
Divide the length of the string by 5 to find the length of each piece of string.
Think: 3.75 is 3 ones, 7 tenths and 5 hundredths.
37 tenths can be divided equally as 5 groups of 7 tenths with remainder 2. Remainder has to place before 5 hundredths.
25 hundredths can be divided equally as 5 groups of 5 hundredths.
So, 375 hundredths can be divided equally as 5 groups of 75 hundredths.
3.75 ÷ 5 = 0.75

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You pay $5.49 for 3 pounds of plums and $6.36 for 4 pounds of peaches. Which fruit costs more per pound? How much more?
Answer:
Think: 5.49 is 5 ones, 4 tenths and 9 hundredths.
5 ones can be divided equally as 3 groups of 1 ones with remainder 2. Remainder has to place before 4 tenths.
24 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 8 tenths
9 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 3 hundredths
So, 549 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 183 hundredths.
Plums = 5.49 ÷ 3 = 1.83
Think: 6.36 is 6 ones, 3 tenths and 6 hundredths.
6 ones can be divided equally as 4 groups of 1 ones with remainder 2. Remainder has to place before 3 tenths.
23 tenths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 5 tenths with remainder 3. Remainder has to place before 6 hundredths.
36 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 9 hundredths
So, 636 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 159 hundredths.
Peaches = 6.36 ÷ 4 = 1.59
1.83 – 1.59 = 0.24
So, plums costs 0.24 more per pound than peaches.

Use Models to Divide Decimals by Whole Numbers Homework & Practice 7.3

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 1.
1.5 ÷ 5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 9
Answer:
Think: 1.5 is 1 ones and 5 tenths
15 tenths can be divided equally as 5 groups of 3 tenths.
So, 1.5 ÷ 5 = 3 tenths = 0.3

Question 2.
2.55 ÷ 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 10
Answer:
Think: 2.55 is 2 ones, 5 tenths and 5 hundredths.
25 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 8 tenths with remainder 1. Remainder has to place before 5 hundredths.
15 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 5 hundredths.
So, 255 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 85 hundredths.
2.55 ÷ 3 = 0.85

Use a model to find the quotient.
Question 3.
1.6 ÷ 8
Answer:
Think: 1.6 is 1 ones and 6 tenths
16 tenths can be divided equally as 8 groups of 2 tenths.
So, 1.6 ÷ 8 = 2 tenths = 0.2

Question 4.
2.1 ÷ 7
Answer:
Think: 2.1 is 2 ones and 1 tenths
21 tenths can be divided equally as 7 groups of 3 tenths.
So, 2.1 ÷ 7 = 3tenths = 0.3

Question 5.
1.56 ÷ 2
Answer:
Think: 1.56 is 1 ones, 5 tenths and 6 hundredths.
15 tenths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 7 tenths with remainder 1. Remainder has to place before 6 hundredths.
16 hundredths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 8 hundredths.
So, 156 hundredths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 78 hundredths.
1.56 ÷ 2 = 0.78

Question 6.
2.84 ÷ 4
Answer:
Think: 2.84 is 2 ones, 8 tenths and 4 hundredths.
28 tenths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 7 tenths.
4 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 1 hundredths.
So, 284 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 71 hundredths.
2.84 ÷ 4 = 0.71

Question 7.
Structure
Write a decimal division equation represented by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.3 11
Answer:
1.8 ÷  3

Question 8.
Writing
Explain how dividing a decimal by a whole number is similar to dividing a whole number by a whole number.
Answer:
When dividing a decimal by a whole number, first we will divide the decimal by the whole number ignoring decimal point. Now put the decimal point in the quotient same as the decimal places in the dividend.
So , dividing a decimal by a whole number is similar to dividing a whole number by a whole number.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A designer learns there are 5.08 centimeters in 2 inches. How many centimeters are in 1 inch?
Answer:
5.08 ÷ 2
Think: 5.08 is 5 ones, 0 tenths and 8 hundredths.
50 tenths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 25 tenths.
8 hundredths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 4 hundredths.
So, 508 hundredths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 254 hundredths.
So, 2.54 cm are in 1 inch.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Newton buys 4 gallons of gasoline. He pays $8.64. How much does 1 gallon of gasoline cost?
Answer:
8.64 ÷ 4
Think: 8.64 is 8 ones, 6 tenths and 4 hundredths.
8 ones can be divided equally as 4 groups of 2 ones.
6 tenths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 1 tenths with remainder 2. Remainder has to place before 4 hundredths.
24 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 6 hundredths.
So, 864 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 216 hundredths.
1 gallon of gasoline cost is 216 hundredths = $2.16

Review & Refresh

Find the product. Explain the strategy you used.
Question 11.
0.9 × 1.1 = ______
Answer:
First multiply 9 x 11 = 99, then put the decimal point in the answer as sum of the decimal places in the both numbers.
decimal places = 1 + 1 = 2
99 after putting decimal places = 0.99

Question 12.
1.2 × 2.7 = ______
Answer:
First multiply 12 x 27 = 324 then put the decimal point in the answer as sum of the decimal places in the both numbers.
decimal places = 1 + 1 = 2
324 after putting decimal places = 3.24

Question 13.
1.4 × 0.8 = ______
Answer: 1.12

Lesson 7.4 Divide Decimals by One-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 1
What pattern do you notice in the placement of the decimal point?
Answer:

Reasoning
How is dividing decimals by one-digit whole numbers similar to dividing whole numbers?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Divide Decimals by One-Digit Numbers

Example
Find
Find 7.38 ÷ 6. Estimate ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 2

Show and Grow

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt [ 2 ]{ 9.16 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
9 ÷ 2
4 ones x 2 = 8
9 ones – 8 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
116 ÷ 2
58 tenths x 2
116 – 116 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 9.16 ÷ 2 = 4.58

Question 2.
\(\sqrt [ 5 ]{ 23.5 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
23 ÷ 5
4 ones x 5 = 20
23 ones – 20 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
35 ÷ 5
7 tenths x 5
35 – 35 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 23.5 ÷ 5 = 4.7

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 6.27 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
6 ÷ 3
2 ones x 3 = 6
6 ones – 6 ones
There are 0 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
27 ÷ 3
9 tenths x 3
27 – 27 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 6.27 ÷ 3 = 2.09

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 4.
\(\sqrt [ 4 ]{ 16.8 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
16 ÷ 4
4 ones x 4 = 16
16 ones – 16 ones
There are 0 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
8 ÷ 4
2 tenths x 4
8 – 8 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 16.8 ÷ 4 = 4.2

Question 5.
\(\sqrt [ 9 ]{ 1.53 } \)
Answer:
Divide the tenths
15 ÷ 9
1 tenths x 9
15 – 9 = 6
There are 6 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
63 ÷ 9 = 7 hundredths
So, 1.53 ÷ 9 = 0.17

Question 6.
\(\sqrt [ 5 ]{ 82.5 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
82 ÷ 5
16 ones x 5 = 80
82 ones – 80 ones
There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
25 ÷ 5
5 tenths x 5
25 – 25 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 82.5 ÷ 5 = 16.5

Question 7.
77.4 ÷ 3 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
77 ÷ 3
25 ones x 3 = 75
77 ones – 75 ones
There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
24 ÷ 3
8 tenths x 3
24 – 24 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 77.4 ÷ 3 = 25.8

Question 8.
113.6 ÷ 8 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
113 ÷ 8
14 ones x 8 = 112
113 ones – 112 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
16 ÷ 8
2 tenths x 8
16 – 16 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 113.6 ÷ 8 = 14.2

Question 9.
129.43 ÷ 7 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
129 ÷ 7
18 ones x 7 = 126
129 ones – 126 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
34 ÷ 7
4 tenths x 7
34 – 28 = 6
There are 6 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
63 ÷ 7 = 9 hundredths
So, 129.43 ÷ 7 = 18.49

Find the value of y.
Question 10.
y ÷ 2 = 4.8
Answer:
y = 4.8 x 2
y = 9.6

Question 11.
6.05 ÷ 5 = y
Answer:
6.05 ÷ 5
Divide the ones
1 ones x 5 = 5
6 ones – 5 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
105 ÷ 5
21 tenths x 5
105 – 105 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 6.05 ÷ 5 = 1.21
y = 1.21

Question 12.
y ÷ 8 = 4.29
Answer:
y = 4.29 x 8
y = 34.32

Question 13.
Reasoning
Newton finds 75.15 ÷ 9. In what place is the first digit of the quotient? Explain.
Answer:
75.15 ÷ 9
Divide the ones
75 ÷ 9
8 ones x 9 = 72
75 ones – 72 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
31 ÷ 9
3 tenths x 9
31 – 27= 4
There are 4 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
45 ÷ 9 = 5 hundredths
75.15 ÷ 9 = 8.35, here quotient is in ones place.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 3
Answer:
Divide the ones
47 ÷ 6
7 ones x 6 = 42
47 ones – 42 ones = 3 ones
So, first digit of the quotient is 7.
We know that divisor x quotient = dividend
6 x 7.89 = 47.34
So, missing digits are 7 and 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A group of 5 gold miners finds the amounts of gold shown. They divide the gold equally. How many ounces does each miner get?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 4
To find how many ounces each miner gets, divide the total amount of gold by 5.
Add the amounts of gold.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 5
Each miner gets _______ ounces of gold.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
A pharmacist combines the medicine from both vials and divides it equally into 7 doses. How much medicine is in each dose?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 6
Answer:
To find how much medicine is in each dose, divide the total amount of medicine by 7.
Add the amounts of medicine.
4.5 + 20 = 24.5
24.5 ÷ 7
Divide the ones
24 ÷ 7
3 ones x 7 = 21
24 ones – 21 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
35 ÷ 7
5 tenths x 7
35 – 35 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
24.5 ÷ 7 = 3.5
So, 3.5 milliliters medicine is in each dose.

Question 16.
Identical rectangular stepping stones form a path in a garden. What are the dimensions of each stone?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 7
Answer:

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
A customer saves $9.24 by buying the set rather than buying them individually. What is one flying disc priced individually?
Answer:

Divide Decimals by One-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 7.4

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 9.6 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
9 ÷ 3
3 ones x 3 = 9
9 ones – 9 ones
There are 0 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
6 ÷ 3
2 tenths x 3
6 – 6 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 9.6 ÷ 3 = 3.2.

Question 2.
\(\sqrt [ 6 ]{ 7.56 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
7 ÷ 6
1 ones x 6 = 6
7 ones – 6 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
15 ÷ 6
2 tenths x 6
15 – 12 = 3
There are 3 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
36 ÷ 6 = 6 hundredths.
So, 7.56 ÷ 6 = 1.26.

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 8 ]{ 42.4 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
42 ÷ 8
5 ones x 8 = 40
42 ones – 40 ones
There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
24 ÷ 8
3 tenths x 8
24 – 24 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 42.4 ÷ 8 = 5.3.

Question 4.
63.6 ÷ 4 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
63 ÷ 4
15 ones x 4 = 60
63 ones – 60 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
36 ÷ 4
9 tenths x 4
36 – 36 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
63.6 ÷ 4 = 15.9

Question 5.
15.68 ÷ 7 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
15 ÷ 7
2 ones x 7 = 14
15 ones – 14 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
16 ÷ 7
2 tenths x 7
16 – 14 = 2
There are 2 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
28 ÷ 7 = 4 hundredths
15.68 ÷ 7 = 2.24

Question 6.
143.82 ÷ 9 = _______
Answer:
Divide the ones
143 ÷ 9
15 ones x 9 = 135
143 ones – 135 ones
There are 8 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
88 ÷ 9
9 tenths x 9
88 – 81 = 7
There are 7 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
72 ÷ 9 = 8 hundredths
143.82 ÷ 9 = 15.98

Find the value of y.
Question 7.
y ÷ 6 = 7.8
Answer:
y = 7.8 x 6
y= 46.8

Question 8.
14.9 ÷ 5 = y
Answer:
Divide the ones
14 ÷ 5
2 ones x 5 = 10
14 ones – 10 ones
There are 4 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
49 ÷ 5
9 tenths x 5
49 – 45 = 4
There are 4 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
40 ÷ 5 = 8 hundredths
14.9 ÷ 5 = 2.98
y = 2.98

Question 9.
y ÷ 2 = 4.7
Answer:
y = 4.7 x 2
y = 9.4

Question 10.
Number Sense
Evaluate the expression.
(213.3 – 95.7) ÷ 8
Answer:
(213.3 – 95.7) ÷ 8 = 117.6 ÷ 8
Divide the ones
117 ÷ 8
14 ones x 8 = 112
117 ones – 112 ones
There are 5 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
56 ÷ 8
7 tenths x 8
56 – 56 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
(213.3 – 95.7) ÷ 8 = 117.6 ÷ 8 = 14.7

Question 11.
Writing
Write and solve a real-life problem that involves dividing a decimal by a whole number.
Answer:
In 5 minutes John eats 7.5 chocolates.  how many chocolates can he eat in one minute?
7.5 ÷ 5
Divide the ones
7 ÷ 5
1 ones x 5 = 5
7 ones – 5 ones
There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
25 ÷ 5 = 5 tenths
7.5 ÷ 5 = 1.5
In 1 minute, he can eat 1.5 chocolates.

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 197.2 ÷ 4. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 8
Answer:
Divide the ones
197 ÷ 4
49 ones x 4 = 196
197 ones – 196 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
12 ÷ 4
3 tenths x 4 = 12
12 – 12 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
197.2 ÷ 4 = 49.3
So, my friend answer is not correct.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
You buy 2 packages of ground beef. One package contains 4.5 pounds and the other contains 2.25 pounds. You put equal amounts of meat into 9 freezer bags. How many pounds of meat are in each bag?
Answer:
To find many pounds of meat are in each bag, divide the total meat by 9.
Add the two packages of meat.
4.5 + 2.25 = 6.75
6.75 ÷ 9
Divide the tenths
67 ÷ 9
7 tenths x 9 = 63
67 tenths – 63 tenths
There are 4 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
45 ÷ 9 = 5 hundredths
6.75 ÷ 9 = 0.75

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A homeowner hangs wallpaper on the walls of her bathroom. What is the width of the bathroom?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.4 9
Answer:
We know that perimeter of a rectangle = 2(l + w)
8.52 = 2(2.74 + w)
2.74 + w = 8.52 ÷ 2
8.52 ÷ 2
Divide the ones
8 ÷ 2 = 4 ones
Divide the tenths
52 ÷ 2 = 26 tenths
8.52 ÷ 2 = 4.26
2.74 + w = 4.26
Width w = 4.26 – 2.74 = 1.52
So, width of the bathroom = 1.52 m

Review & Refresh

Use partial quotients to divide.
Question 15.
607 ÷ 15 = ______
Answer:
15 x 40 = 600 with remainder 7.

Question 16.
4,591 ÷ 33 = ______
Answer:

Question 17.
6,699 ÷ 87 = ______
Answer:
87 x 50 = 4350
6,699 – 4350 = 2349
87 x 20 = 1740
2349 – 1740 = 609
87 x 5 = 435
609 – 435 = 174
87 x 2 = 174
6,699 ÷ 87 = 50 + 20 + 5 + 2 = 77.

Lesson 7.5 Divide Decimals by Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Write a division problem you can use to find the width of each rectangle. Then find the width of each rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 1
Answer:

Precision
Explain how you can use estimation to check your answers.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Divide Decimals by Two-Digit Numbers

Example
Find 79.8 ÷ 14. Estimate _________
Regroup 7 tens as 70 ones and combine with 9 ones.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 2

Example
Find 20.54 ÷ 26.
Step 1: Estimate the quotient.
2,000 hundredths ÷ 25 = _______ hundredths
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 3
Step 2: Divide as you do with whole numbers.
Step 3: Use the estimate to place the decimal point.
So, 20.54 ÷ 26 = _______.

Show and Grow

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt [ 12 ]{ 51.6 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
51 ÷ 12
4 ones x 12 = 48
51 ones – 48 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
36 ÷ 12
3 tenths x 12 = 36
36 – 36 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 51.6 ÷ 12 = 4.3

Question 2.
\(\sqrt [ 17 ]{ 140.25 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
140 ÷ 17
8 ones x 17 = 136
140 ones – 136 ones
There are 4 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
42 ÷ 17
2 tenths x 17 = 34
42 – 34 = 8
There are 8 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
85 ÷ 17 = 5 hundredths.
So, 140.25 ÷ 17 = 8.25

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 61 ]{ 32.33 } \)
Answer:
Divide the tenths
323 ÷ 61
5 ones x 61 = 305
323 tenths – 305 tenths
There are 18 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
183 ÷ 61 = 3 hundredths
So, 32.33 ÷ 61 = 0.53

Apply and Grow: Practice

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 4.
251.75 ÷ 19 = 1 3 . 2 5
Answer:
When dividing a decimal by a whole number, first we will divide the decimal by the whole number ignoring decimal point. Now put the decimal point in the quotient same as the decimal places in the dividend.

Question 5.
88.04 ÷ 62 = 1 . 4 2
Answer:

Question 6.
3.22 ÷ 23 = 0 .1 4
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 7.
\(\sqrt [ 54 ]{ 97.2 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
97 ÷ 54
1 ones x 54 = 54
97 ones – 54 ones
There are 43 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
432 ÷ 54 = 8 tenths
So, 97.2 ÷ 54 = 1.8

Question 8.
\(\sqrt [ 91 ]{ 200.2 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
200 ÷ 91
2 ones x 91 = 182
200 ones – 182 ones
There are 18 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
182 ÷ 91 = 2 tenths
So, 200.2 ÷ 91 = 2.2

Question 9.
\(\sqrt [ 2 ]{ 56.2 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
56 ÷ 2
28 ones x 2 = 56
56 ones – 56 ones
There are 0 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
2 ÷ 2 = 1 tenths
So, 56.2 ÷ 2 = 28.1

Question 10.
6.08 ÷ 16 = _____
Answer:
Divide the tenths
60 ÷ 16
3 tenths x 16 = 48
60 tenths – 48 tenths
There are 12 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
128 ÷ 16
8 hundredths x 16
128 – 128 = 0
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 6.08 ÷ 16 = 0.38

Question 11.
7.45 ÷ 5 = _______
Answer:
Divide the tenths
74 ÷ 5
14 tenths x 5 = 70
74 tenths – 70 tenths
There are 4 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
45 ÷ 5
9 hundredths x 5 = 45
45 – 45 = 0
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 7.45 ÷ 5 = 1.49

Question 12.
147.63 ÷ 37 = _______
Answer:
Divide the ones
147 ÷ 37
3 ones x 37 = 111
147 ones – 111 ones
There are 36 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
366 ÷ 37
9 tenths x 37 = 333
366 – 333 = 33
Divide the hundredths
333 ÷ 37 = 9 hundredths
So, 147.63 ÷ 37 = 3.99

Find the value of y.

Question 13.
y ÷ 44 = 1.82
Answer:
y = 44 x 1.82
y = 80.08

Question 14.
106.6 ÷ 82 = y
Answer:
Divide the ones
106 ÷ 82
1 ones x 82 = 82
106 ones – 82 ones
There are 24 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
246 ÷ 82
3 tenths x 82 = 246
246 – 246 = 0
106.6 ÷ 82 = 1.3, y = 1.3

Question 15.
y ÷ 13 = 2.6
Answer:
y = 13 x 2.6
y = 33.8

Question 16.
Logic
Newton and Descartes find 44.82 ÷ 18. Only one of them is correct. Without solving, who is correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 4
Answer:
Descartes answer is correct, 44.82 ÷ 18 = 2.49
When dividing a decimal by a whole number, first we will divide the decimal by the whole number ignoring decimal point. Now put the decimal point in the quotient same as the decimal places in the dividend.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
Find a decimal that you can divide by a two-digit whole number to get the quotient shown. Fill in the boxes with your dividend and divisor.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 5

Dividend is 20 and divisor is 12.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You practice paddle boarding for 3 weeks. You paddle the same amount each day for 5 days each week. You paddle 22.5 miles altogether. How many miles do you paddle each day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 6
To find the total number of days you paddle in 3 weeks, multiply the days you paddle each week by 3.
5 × 3 = 15 So, you paddle board _______ days in 3 weeks.
To find the number of miles you paddle each day, divide the total number of miles by the number of days you paddle in 3 weeks.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 7
You paddle _______ miles each day.

Show and Grow

Question 18.
Descartes borrows $6,314.76 for an all-terrain vehicle. He pays back the money in equal amounts each month for 3 years. What is his monthly payment?
Answer:
Time t = 3 years = 3 x 12 = 36 months
Descartes borrowed amount = $6,314.76
6,314.76 ÷ 36
63 ÷ 36 = 1 and 27 is left over
271 ÷ 36 = 7 and 19 is left over
194 ÷ 36 = 5 and 14 is left over
147 ÷ 36 = 4 and 3 is left over
36 ÷ 36 = 1 and 0 left over.
6,314.76 ÷ 36 = 175.41
Descartes monthly payment is $175.41

Question 19.
A blue car travels 297.6 miles using 12 gallons of gasoline and a red car travels 358.8 miles using 13 gallons of gasoline. Which car travels farther using 1 gallon of gasoline? How much farther?
Answer:
297 ones ÷ 12 = 24 ones x 12 = 288
297 ones – 288 ones
There are 9 ones left over.
96 ÷ 12 = 8 tenths x 12 = 96
96 – 96 = 0
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 297.6 ÷ 12 = 24.8
358 ones ÷ 13 = 27 ones x 13 = 351
358 ones – 351 ones
There are 7 ones left over.
78 ÷ 13 = 6 tenths x 13 = 78
78 – 78 = 0
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 358.8 ÷ 13 = 27.6
Red car – blue car = 27.6 – 24.8 = 2.8
Red car travels 2.8 miles farther than blue car using 1 gallon of gasoline.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
The rectangular dog park has an area of 2,616.25 square feet. How much fencing does an employee need to enclose the dog park?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 8
Answer:

Divide Decimals by Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 7.5

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 1.
127.2 ÷ 24 = 5 . 3
Answer:

Question 2.
48.64 ÷ 32 = 1 . 5 2
Answer:

Question 3.
514.18 ÷ 47 = 1 0 . 9 4
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 4.
\(\sqrt [ 72 ]{ 93.6 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
93 ÷ 72
1 ones x 72 = 72
93 ones – 72 ones
There are 21 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
216 ÷ 72 = 3 tenths.
So, 93.6 ÷ 72 = 1.3

Question 5.
\(\sqrt [ 7 ]{ 3.92 } \)
Answer:
Divide the tenths
39 ÷ 7
5 ones x 7 = 35
39 ones – 35 ones
There are 4 ones left over.
Divide the hundredths
42 ÷ 7 = 6 tenths.
So, 3.92 ÷ 7 = 0.56

Question 6.
\(\sqrt [ 29 ]{ 1.74 } \)
Answer:
Divide the hundredths
174 ÷ 29
6 ones x 29 = 174
174 hundredths – 174 hundredths
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 1.74 ÷ 29 = 0.06

Question 7.
24.3 ÷ 9 = _______
Answer:
Divide the ones
24 ÷ 9
2 ones x 9 = 18
24 ones – 18 ones
There are 6 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
63 ÷ 9
7 tenths x 9 = 63
63 – 63 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 24.3 ÷ 9 = 2.7

Question 8.
244.9 ÷ 31 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
244 ÷ 31
7 ones x 31 = 217
244 ones – 217 ones
There are 27 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
279 ÷ 31
9 tenths x 31
279 – 279 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 244.9 ÷ 31 = 7.9

Question 9.
55.62 ÷ 27 = ______
Answer:
Divide the ones
55 ÷ 27
2 ones x 27 = 54
55 ones – 54 ones
There is 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
162 ÷ 27
6 tenths x 27
162 – 162 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 55.62 ÷ 27 = 2.06

Find the value of y.
Question 10.
y ÷ 16 = 0.23
Answer:
y = 16 x 0.23
y = 3.68

Question 11.
44.1 ÷ 21 = y
Answer:
Divide the ones
44 ÷ 21
2 ones x 21 = 42
44 ones – 42 ones

There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
21 ÷ 21
1 tenths x 21
21 – 21 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 44.1 ÷ 21 = 2.1

Question 12.
y ÷ 28 = 11.04
Answer:
y = 28 x 11.04
y = 309.12

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 21.44 ÷ 16. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 9
Answer:
My friend answer is not correct.
When dividing a decimal by a whole number, first we will divide the decimal by the whole number ignoring decimal point. Now put the decimal point in the quotient same as the decimal places in the dividend.
Divide the ones
21 ÷ 16
1 ones x 16 = 16
21 ones – 16 ones
There are 5 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
54 ÷ 16
3 tenths x 16
54 tenths – 48 tenths
There are 6 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
64 ÷ 16
4 hundredths x 16
64 hundredths- 64 hundredths
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 21.44 ÷ 16 = 1.34

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A banker divides the amount shown among 12 people. How can she regroup the money? How much money does each person get?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 10
Answer:

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
You have hip-hop dance practice for 5 weeks. You attend practice 5 days each week. Each practice is the same length of time. You practice for 37.5 hours altogether. How many hours do you practice each day?
Answer:
To find the total number of days you practice in 5 weeks, multiply the days you practice each week by 5.
5 × 5 = 25 So, you practice 25 days in 5 weeks.
To find the number of hours you practice each day, divide the total number of hours by the number of days you practice in 5 weeks.
37.5 ÷ 25
Divide the ones
37 ÷ 25
1 ones x 25 = 25
37 ones – 25 ones
There are 12 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
125 ÷ 25
5 tenths x 25
125 tenths – 125 tenths
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 37.5 ÷ 25 = 1.5
So, I practice dance 1.5 hours each day.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Your rectangular classroom rug has an area of 110.5 square feet. What is the perimeter of the rug?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.5 11
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the product.
Question 17.
0.52 × 0.4 = _______
Answer: 0.208

Question 18.
0.7 × 21.3 = _______
Answer: 14.91

Question 19.
1.52 × 8.6 = ______
Answer: 13.072

Lesson 7.6 Use Models to Divide Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use the model to find each quotient.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 1
Answer:

Structure
When using a model to divide decimals, how do you determine the number of rows and columns to shade? How do you divide the shaded region?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Use Models to Divide Decimals

Example
Use a model to find 1.2 ÷ 0.3.
Shade 12 columns to represent 1.2.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 2
There are ______ groups of ______ tenths.
So, 1.2 ÷ 0.3 = ________.

Example
Use a model to find 0.7 ÷ 0.14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 3
Shade 7 columns to represent 0.7.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.14.
There are ______ groups of _______ hundredths.
So, 0.7 ÷ 0.14 = ______.

Show and Grow

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 1.
1.5 ÷ 0.5 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 4
Answer:
Shade 15 columns to represent 1.5.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.5.
There are 3 groups of 5 tenths.
So, 1.5 ÷ 0.5 = 3

Question 2.
1.72 ÷ 0.86 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 5
Answer:
Shade 17.2 columns to represent 1.72.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.86.
There are 2 groups of 86 hundredths.
So, 1.72 ÷ 0.86 = 2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 3.
0.32 ÷ 0.04 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 6
Answer:
Shade 3.2 columns to represent 0.32.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.04.
There are 8 groups of 4 hundredths.
So, 0.32 ÷ 0.04 = 8

Question 4.
0.9 ÷ 0.15 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 7
Answer:
Shade 9 columns to represent 0.9.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.15.
There are 6 groups of 15 hundredths.
So, 0.9 ÷ 0.15 = 6

Question 5.
1.4 ÷ 0.07 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 8
Answer:
Shade 14 columns to represent 1.4.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.07.
There are 20 groups of 7 hundredths.
So, 1.4 ÷ 0.07 = 20

Question 6.
1.08 ÷ 0.09 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 9
Answer:
Shade 10.8 columns to represent 1.08.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.09.
There are 12 groups of 9 hundredths.
So, 1.08 ÷ 0.09 = 12

Question 7.
You have$1.50 in dimes. You exchange all of your dimes for quarters. How many quarters do you get?
Answer:
Quarter = 0.25
1.50 ÷ 0.25
Shade 15 columns to represent 1.50.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.25.
There are 6 groups of 25 hundredths.
So, 1.50 ÷ 0.25 = 6 quarters.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the model below and says 1.6 ÷ 0.08 = 2. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 10
Answer:
1.6 ÷ 0.08
Shade 16 columns to represent 1.6.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.08.
There are 20 groups of 8 hundredths.
So, 1.6 ÷ 0.08 = 20
So, my friend answer is wrong.

Question 9.
Structure
Use the model to find the missing number.
0.72 ÷ ____ = 8
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 11
Answer:
Shade 7.2 columns to represent 0.72.
Divide the model to show groups of 8.
There are 0.09 groups of 800 hundredths.
So, 0.72 ÷ 0.09 = 8
Missing number is 0.09.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Is aluminum more than 5 times as dense as neon?
Divide the density of aluminum by the density of neon to find how many times as dense it is.
Use a model. Shade 27 columns to represent 2.7.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 12
There are ______ groups of ______ tenths.
So, 2.7 ÷ 0.9 = _______.
Compare the quotient to 5.
So, aluminum ________ more than 5 times as dense as neon.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Use the table above. Is neon more than 9 times as dense as hydrogen?
Answer:
Divide the density of neon by the density of hydrogen to find how many times as dense it is.
Use a model. Shade 9 columns to represent 0.9.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.09.
There are 10 groups of 9 hundredths.
So, 0.9 ÷ 0.09 = 10
Compare the quotient to 9.
So, neon is more than 9 times as dense as hydrogen.

Question 11.
You fill a bag with peanuts, give the cashier $5, and receive $3.16 in change. How many pounds of peanuts do you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 13
Answer:
Amount to buy peanuts = 5 – 3.16 = 1.84
peanuts per pound = $0.23
1.84 ÷ 0.23
Shade 18.4 columns to represent 1.84.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.23.
There are 8 groups of 23 hundredths.
So, 1.84 ÷ 0.23 = 8
I can buy 8 pounds of peanuts.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 2.88 meters of copper wire and 5.85 meters of aluminum wire. You need 0.24 meter of copper wire to make one bracelet and 0.65 meter of aluminum wire to make one necklace. Can you make more bracelets or more necklaces? Explain.
Answer:
Copper wire = 2.88 ÷ 0.24
Shade 28.8 columns to represent 2.88.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.24.
There are 12 groups of 24 hundredths.
So, 2.88 ÷ 0.24 = 12
Aluminum wire = 5.85 ÷ 0.65
Shade 58.5 columns to represent 5.85.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.65.
There are 9 groups of 65 hundredths.
So, 5.85 ÷ 0.65 = 9
So, we can make more bracelets.

Use Models to Divide Decimals Homework & Practice 7.6

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 1.
0.08 ÷ 0.02 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 14
Answer:
Shade 8 columns to represent 0.08.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.02.
There are 4 groups of 2 hundredths.
So, 0.08 ÷ 0.02 = 4

Question 2.
0.4 ÷ 0.05 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 15
Answer:
Shade 5 columns to represent 0.4.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.05.
There are 8 groups of 5 hundredths.
So, 0.4 ÷ 0.05 = 8

Question 3.
1.7 ÷ 0.85 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 16
Answer:
Shade 17 columns to represent 1.7.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.85.
There are 2 groups of 85 hundredths.
So, 1.7 ÷ 0.85 = 2

Question 4.
1.5 ÷ 0.3 = _______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 17
Answer:
Shade 15 columns to represent 1.5.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.3.
There are 5 groups of 3 tenths.
So, 1.5 ÷ 0.3 = 5

Question 5.
You have a piece of scrapbook paper that is 1.5 feet long. You cut it into pieces that are each 0.5 foot long. How many pieces of scrap book paper do you have now?
Answer:
1.5 ÷ 0.5
Shade 15 columns to represent 1.5.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.5.
There are 3 groups of 5 tenths.
So, 1.5 ÷ 0.5 = 3
So, I have 3 pieces of scrap book paper.

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend uses the model below and says 0.12 ÷ 0.04 = 0.03. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 18
Answer:
0.12 ÷ 0.04
Shade 1.2 columns to represent 0.12.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.04.
There are 3 groups of 4 hundredths.
So, 0.12 ÷ 0.04 = 3
My friend is not correct.

Question 7.
Writing
Write a real-life problem that involves dividing a decimal by another decimal.
Answer:

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Does the watercolor paint cost more than 3 times as much as the paintbrush? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 19
Answer:
Divide the price of watercolor paint by the price of paintbrush to find how many times as cost it is.
Use a model. Shade 29.6 columns to represent 2.96.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.74.
There are 4 groups of 74 hundredths.
So, 2.96 ÷ 0.74
Compare the quotient to 3.
So, watercolor paint costs more than 3 times as much as the paintbrush.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 3.75 cups of popcorn kernels. You fill a machine with 0.25 cup of kernels 3 times each hour. How many hours pass before you run out of kernels?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.6 20
Answer:
Filling kernels each hour = 0.25 x 3 = 0.75
Total cups of popcorn kernels = 3.75
3.75 ÷ 0.75
Shade 37.5 columns to represent 3.75.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.75.
There are 5 groups of 75 hundredths.
So, 3.75 ÷ 0.75 = 5 hours

Review & Refresh

Complete the equation. Identify the property shown.
Question 10.
3 × 14 = 14 × 3
Answer: Commutative Property of Multiplication

Question 11.
8 × (3 + 10) = (8 × 3) + (8 × 10)
Answer: Distributive Property

Lesson 7.7 Divide Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use the model to find 0.96 ÷ 0.32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 1
Find 96 ÷ 32.
Answer:

Structure
How can multiplying by a power of 10 help you divide decimals?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Divide Decimals by Decimals

Key Idea
To divide by a decimal, multiply the divisor by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Multiply the dividend by the same power of 10. Then divide as you would with whole numbers.

Example
Find 6.12 ÷ 1.8. Estimate _______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 2

Example
Find 2.43 ÷ 0.09.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 3
So, 2.43 ÷ 0.09 = ______.

Show and Grow

Multiply the divisor by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then write the equivalent expression.
Question 1.
3.5 ÷ 0.5
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3.5 by the same power of 10.
0.5 x 10 = 5
3.5 x 10 = 35
35 ÷ 5 = 7
So, 3.5 ÷ 0.5 = 7

Question 2.
9.84 ÷ 2.4
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 2.4 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 9.84 by the same power of 10.
2.4 x 10 = 24
9.84 x 10 = 98.4
Step 2: Divide 98.4 ÷ 24
98 ÷ 24 = 4 with remainder 2.
24 ÷ 24 = 1 with remainder 0.
So, 9.84 ÷ 2.4 = 4.1

Question 3.
4.68 ÷ 0.78
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.78 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 4.68 by the same power of 10.
0.78 x 100 = 78
4.68 x 100 = 468
Step 2: Divide 468 ÷ 78 = 6
So, 4.68 ÷ 0.78 = 6

Apply and Grow: Practice

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 4.
28.47 ÷ 0.39 = 7 3 . 0
Answer:

Question 5.
75.85 ÷ 3.7 = 2 0 . 5
Answer:

Question 6.
4.51 ÷ 4.1 = 1 . 1
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 7.
\(\sqrt [ 1.5 ]{ 7.5 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 7.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 1.5 by the same power of 10.
7.5 x 10 = 75
1.5 x 10 = 15
75 ÷ 15 = 5
So, 7.5 ÷ 1.5 = 5

Question 8.
\(\sqrt [ 0.13 ]{ 0.91 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.91 by a power of 100 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.13 by the same power of 100.
0.91 x 100 = 91
0.13 x 100 = 13
91 ÷ 13 = 7
So, 0.91 ÷ 0.13 = 7

Question 9.
\(\sqrt [ 2.4 ]{ 2.88 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 2.88 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 2.4 by the same power of 10.
2.88 x 10 = 28.8
2.4 x 10 = 24
Step 2: Divide 28.8 ÷ 24
28 ÷ 24 = 1 with remainder 4.
48 ÷ 24 = 2 with remainder 0.
So, 2.88 ÷ 2.4 = 1.2

Question 10.
\(\sqrt [ 0.6 ]{ 7.8 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 7.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.6 by the same power of 10.
7.8 x 10 = 78
0.6 x 10 = 6
78 ÷ 6 = 13
So, 7.8 ÷ 0.6 = 13

Question 11.
\(\sqrt [ 3.6 ]{ 4.32 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 4.32 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3.6 by the same power of 10.
4.32 x 10 = 43.2
3.6 x 10 = 36
Step 2: Divide 43.2 ÷ 36
43 ÷ 36 = 1 with remainder 7.
72 ÷ 36 = 2 with remainder 0.
So, 4.32 ÷ 3.6 = 1.2

Question 12.
\(\sqrt [ 0.1 ]{ 11.2 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 11.2 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.1 by the same power of 10.
11.2 x 10 = 112
0.1 x 10 = 1
112 ÷ 1 = 112
So, 11.2 ÷ 0.1 = 112

Question 13.
40.42 ÷ 8.6 = ______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 8.6 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 40.42 by the same power of 10.
8.6 x 10 = 86
40.42 x 10 = 404.2
Step 2: Divide 404.2 ÷ 86
404 ÷ 86 = 4 with remainder 60.
602 ÷ 86 = 7 with remainder 0.
So, 40.42 ÷ 8.6 = 4.7

Question 14.
7.2 ÷ 2.4 = _______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 2.4 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 7.2 by the same power of 10.
2.4 x 10 = 24
7.2 x 10 = 72
Step 2: Divide 72 ÷ 24 = 3
So, 7.2 ÷ 2.4 = 3

Question 15.
5.76 ÷ 1.8 = _______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 1.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5.76 by the same power of 10.
1.8 x 10 = 18
5.76 x 10 = 57.6
Step 2: Divide 57.6 ÷ 18
57 ÷ 18 = 3 with remainder 3.
36 ÷ 18 = 2 with remainder 0.
So, 5.76 ÷ 1.8 = 3.2

Question 16.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says 4.14 ÷ 2.3 = 1.8. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 2.3 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 4.14 by the same power of 10.
2.3 x 10 = 23
4.14 x 10 = 41.4
Step 2: Divide 41.4 ÷ 23
41 ÷ 23 = 1 with remainder 18.
184 ÷ 23 = 8 with remainder 0.
So, 4.14 ÷ 2.3 = 1.8.
Descartes answer is correct.

Question 17.
Logic
What can you conclude about Newton’s quotient?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 4
Answer:
The quotient will be above 5.72.
Because if the divisor is less than 1 then the quotient must be greater than the dividend.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A farmer sells a bag of papayas for $5.46. How much does the bag of papayas weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 5
Divide the price of the papayas by the price per pound to find how much the bag of papayas weighs.
5.46 ÷ 1.3 = ? Estimate _______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 6
So, the bag of papayas weighs _______ pounds.

Show and Grow

Use the table above.
Question 18.
You buy a honeydew for $6.08. What is the weight of the honeydew?
Answer:
Honeydew price = $0.8
6.08 ÷ 0.8
Step 1: Multiply 0.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 6.08 by the same power of 10.
0.8 x 10 = 8
6.08 x 10 = 60.8
Step 2: Divide 60.8 ÷ 8
60 ÷ 8 = 7 with remainder 4.
48 ÷ 8 = 6 with remainder 0.
So, 6.08 ÷ 0.8 = 7.6
Weight of the honeydew = 7.6 pounds

Question 19.
You buy a pumpkin for $7.20 and a watermelon for $5.94. Does the watermelon or the pumpkin weigh more? How much more?
Answer:
Pumpkin = 7.20 ÷ 0.45
Watermelon = 5.94 ÷ 0.33
7.20 ÷ 0.45
Step 1: Multiply 0.45 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 7.20 by the same power of 10.
0.45 x 100 = 45
7.20 x 100 = 720
Step 2: Divide 720 ÷ 45 = 16
Pumpkin weight = 16 pounds
5.94 ÷ 0.33
Step 1: Multiply 0.33 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5.94 by the same power of 10.
0.33 x 100 = 33
5.94 x 100 = 594
Step 2: Divide 594 ÷ 33 = 18
Watermelon weight = 18 pounds
Watermelon weighs 2 pounds more than the pumpkin.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
You pay $5 for a pineapple and receive $2.48 in change. The inedible parts of the pineapple weigh 1.75 pounds. How many pounds of edible pineapple do you have? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 7
Answer:
Amount paid = 5 – 2.48 = $2.52
pineapple price per pound = $0.63
2.52 ÷ 0.63
Step 1: Multiply 0.63 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 2.52 by the same power of 10.
0.63 x 100 = 63
2.52 x 100 = 252
Step 2: Divide 252 ÷ 63 = 4
Total weight = 4 pounds
Edible pineapple = total weight – inedible pineapple weight
= 4 – 1.75
= 2.25
Edible pineapple weight = 2.25 pounds.

Divide Decimals Homework & Practice 7.7

Multiply the divisor by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then write the equivalent expression.
Question 1.
16.15 ÷ 1.9
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 1.9 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 16.15 by the same power of 10.
1.9 x 10 = 19
16.15 x 10 = 161.5
Step 2: Divide 161.5 ÷ 19
161 ÷ 19 = 8 with remainder 9.
95 ÷ 19 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 16.15 ÷ 1.9 = 8.5

Question 2.
0.36 ÷ 0.09
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.09 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.36 by the same power of 10.
0.09 x 100 = 9
0.36 x 100 = 36
Step 2: Divide 36 ÷ 9 = 4
So, 0.36 ÷ 0.09 = 4

Question 3.
2.04 ÷ 1.7
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 1.7 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 2.04 by the same power of 10.
1.7 x 10 = 17
2.04 x 10 = 20.4
Step 2: Divide 20.4 ÷ 17
20 ÷ 17 = 1 with remainder 3.
34 ÷ 17 = 2 with remainder 0.
So, 2.04 ÷ 1.7 = 1.2

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 4.
81.27 ÷ 13.5 = 6 . 0 2
Answer:

Question 5.
5.76 ÷ 3.2 = 1 . 8
Answer:

Question 6.
47.15 ÷ 2.3 = 2 0 . 5
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 7.
\(\sqrt [ 5.3 ]{ 21.2 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 5.3 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 21.2 by the same power of 10.
5.3 x 10 = 53
21.2 x 10 = 212
212 ÷ 53 = 4
So, 21.2 ÷ 5.3 = 4

Question 8.
\(\sqrt [ 0.03 ]{ 76.38 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.03 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 76.38 by the same power of 10.
0.03 x 100 = 3
76.38 x 100 = 7,638
Step 2: Divide 7638 ÷ 3
76 ÷ 3 = 25 with remainder 1.
138 ÷ 3 = 46 with remainder 0.
So, 76.38 ÷ 0.03 = 25.46

Question 9.

\(\sqrt [ 6.2 ]{ 33.48 } \)
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 6.2 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 33.48 by the same power of 10.
6.2 x 10 = 62
33.48 x 10 = 334.8
Step 2: Divide 334.8 ÷ 62
334 ÷ 62 = 5 with remainder 24.
248 ÷ 62 = 4 with remainder 0.
So, 33.48 ÷ 6.2 = 5.4

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 10.
0.63 ÷ 0.09 = ______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 0.09 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.63 by the same power of 10.
0.09 x 100 = 9
0.63 x 100 = 63
Step 2: Divide 63 ÷ 9 = 7
So, 0.63 ÷ 0.09 = 7

Question 11.
10.53 ÷ 3.9 = ______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 3.9 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 10.53 by the same power of 10.
3.9 x 10 = 39
10.53 x 10 = 105.3
Step 2: Divide 105.3 ÷ 39
105 ÷ 39 = 2 with remainder 27.
273 ÷ 39 = 7 with remainder 0.
So, 10.53 ÷ 3.9 = 2.7

Question 12.
33.8 ÷ 2.6 = ______
Answer:
Step 1: Multiply 2.6 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 33.8 by the same power of 10.
2.6 x 10 = 26
33.8 x 10 = 338
Step 2: Divide 338 ÷ 26 = 13
So, 33.8 ÷ 2.6 = 13

Question 13.
Logic
Without calculating, determine whether 5.4 ÷ 0.9 is greater than or less than 5.4. Explain.
Answer:
5.4 ÷ 0.9 is greater than 5.4
If the divisor is less than 1 then the quotient must be greater than the dividend.

Question 14.
Structure
Explain how 35.64 ÷ 2.97 compares to 3,564 ÷ 297.
Answer:
Both 35.64 ÷ 2.97 and 3,564 ÷ 297 are same.
Both dividend and divisor are multiplied by same power of 10.
35.64 x 100 = 3564
2.97 x 100 = 297.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A farmer sells a bag of grapes for $5.88. How much do the grapes weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 8
Answer:
Bag of grapes price = $5.88
Grapes price per pound = $2.80
5.88 ÷ 2.8
Step 1: Multiply 2.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5.88 by the same power of 10.
2.8 x 10 = 28
5.88 x 10 = 58.8
Step 2: Divide 58.8 ÷ 28
58 ÷ 28 = 2 with remainder 2.
28 ÷ 28 = 1 with remainder 0.
So, 5.88 ÷ 2.8 = 2.1
Grapes weight = 2.1 pounds

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Descartes makes 2.5 times as many ounces of applesauce as Newton. Newton eats 8 ounces of his applesauce, and then divides the rest equally into 3 containers. How much applesauce is in each of Newton’s containers?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.7 9
Answer:
From the given information, Newton makes applesauce = 72.5 ÷ 2.5
Step 1: Multiply 2.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 72.5 by the same power of 10.
2.5 x 10 = 25
72.5 x 10 = 725
Step 2: Divide 725 ÷ 25 = 29
So, newton makes 29 ounces of applesauce
He eats 8 ounces = 29 – 8 = 21
21 ÷ 3 = 7 ounces.
7 ounces of applesauce is in each of Newton’s containers.

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
Write the number in two other forms.
Standard form:
Word form: two hundred thirty thousand, eighty-two
Expanded form:
Answer:
Standard form is 230,082
Expanded form is 200000 + 30000 + 80 + 2.

Lesson 7.8 Insert Zeros in the Dividend

Explore and Grow

Use the model to find each quotient.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 1
Answer:

Reasoning
Why is the number of digits in the quotients you found above different than the number of digits in the dividends?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Inserting Zeros in the Dividend

Example
Find 52.6 ÷ 4. Estimate ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 2

Example
Find 1 ÷ 0.08.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 3

Show and Grow

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 1.
\(\sqrt [ 0.5 ]{ 85 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 0.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 85 by the same power of 10.
0.5 x 10 = 5
85 x 10 = 850
850 ÷ 5 = 170
So, 85 ÷ 0.5 = 170.

Question 2.
\(\sqrt [ 15 ]{ 9.6 } \)
Answer:
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
96 ÷ 15 = 6 with remainder 6.
60 ÷ 15 = 4 with remainder 0.
So, 9.6 ÷ 15 = 0.64

Question 3.
\(\sqrt [ 0.24 ]{ 2.52 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 0.24 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 2.52 by the same power of 10.
0.24 x 100 = 24
2.52 x 100 = 252
252 ÷ 24
252 ÷ 24 = 10 with remainder 12.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
120 ÷ 24 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 2.52 ÷ 0.24 = 10.5.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 4.
3.24 ÷ 0.48 = 6 . 7 5
Answer:

Question 5.
35 ÷ 0.5 = 7 0.
Answer:

Question 6.
12.8 ÷ 2.5 = 5 .1 2
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 7.
\(\sqrt [ 2.4 ]{ 0.84 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 2.4 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 0.84 by the same power of 10.
2.4 x 10 = 24
0.84 x 10 = 8.4
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
84 ÷ 24 = 3 with remainder 12.
120 ÷ 24 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 0.84 ÷ 2.4 = 0.35

Question 8.
\(\sqrt [ 0.32 ]{ 2.08 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 0.32 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 2.08 by the same power of 10.
0.32 x 100 = 32
2.08 x 100 = 208
208 ÷ 32 = 6 with remainder 16.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
160 ÷ 32 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 2.08 ÷ 0.32 = 6.5

Question 9.
\(\sqrt [ 4 ]{ 45.8 } \)
Answer:
45.8 ÷ 4
45 ÷ 4 = 11 with remainder 1.
18 ÷ 4 = 4 with remainder 2.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
20 ÷ 4 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 45.8 ÷ 4 = 11.45.

Question 10.
9 ÷ 1.2 = ______
Answer:
Multiply 1.2 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 9 by the same power of 10.
1.2 x 10 = 12
9 x 10 = 90
90 ÷ 12
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

12 ) 90 ( 7.5

84

——-

60

– 60

——-

0
So, 9 ÷ 1.2 = 7.5

Question 11.
3.5 ÷ 2.5 = ______
Answer:
Multiply 2.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3.5 by the same power of 10.
2.5 x 10 = 25
3.5 x 10 = 35
35 ÷ 25
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
25 ) 35 ( 1.4

25

——-

100

-100

——-

0
So, 3.5 ÷ 2.5 = 1.4

Question 12.
1.8 ÷ 12 = ______
Answer:
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
12 ) 18 ( 1.5

12

——-

60

– 60

——-

0
So, 1.8 ÷ 12 = 0.15

Question 13.
You read 2.5 chapters of the book each night. How many nights does it take you to finish the book?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 4

Answer:
Total chapters in the book = 15
15 ÷ 2.5
Multiply 2.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 15 by the same power of 10.
2.5 x 10 = 25
15 x 10 = 150
150 ÷ 25 = 6 nights to finish the book.

Question 14.
Precision
Why does Newton place zeros to the right of the dividend but Descartes does not?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 5
Answer:
Newton’s dividend does not have enough digits to divide completely, so he placed zeros to the right of the dividend.
Descartes dividend is a multiple of divisor and it is divided completely, so no need of placing zeros.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The John Muir Trail in Yosemite National Park is 210 miles long. A hiker completes the trail in 20 days by hiking the same distance each day. How many miles does the hiker travel each day?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 6
Divide 210 miles by 20 to find how many miles the hiker travels each day.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 7
So, the hiker travels _______ miles each day.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
A box of 15 tablets weighs 288 ounces. Each tablet weighs the same number of ounces. What is the weight of each tablet?
Answer:
Divide 288 ounces by 15 to find the weight of each tablet.
288 ÷ 15

15 ) 288 ( 19.2

15

——-

138

-135

——-

30

– 30

——-

0
288 ÷ 15 = 19.2
The weight of each tablet = 19.2 ounces.

Question 16.
Which bag of dog food costs less per pound? Explain why it makes sense to write each quotient as a decimal in this situation.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 8
Answer:

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
A farmer sells a pound of rice for $0.12 and a pound of oats for $0.08. Can you buy more pounds of rice or oats with $3? How much more? Explain.
Answer:
Rice = 3 ÷ 0.12
Multiply 0.12 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3 by the same power of 10.
0.12 x 100 = 12
3 x 100 = 300
300 ÷ 12 = 25
Oats = 3 ÷ 0.08
Multiply 0.08 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3 by the same power of 10.
0.08 x 100 = 8
3 x 100 = 300
300 ÷ 8 = 37.5
I can buy 12.5 pounds oats more than the rice.

Insert Zeros in the Dividend Homework & Practice 7.8

Place a decimal point where it belongs in the quotient.
Question 1.
9.3 ÷ 0.31 = 3 0.
Answer:

Question 2.
10 ÷ 0.8 = 1 2 . 5
Answer:

Question 3.
0.76 ÷ 0.25 = 3 . 0 4
Answer:

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 4.
\(\sqrt [ 0.8 ]{ 30 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 0.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 30 by the same power of 10.
0.8 x 10 = 8
30 x 10 = 300
300 ÷ 8
30 ÷ 8 = 3 with remainder 6.
60 ÷ 8 = 7 with remainder 4.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
40 ÷ 8 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 30 ÷ 0.8 = 37.5.

Question 5.
\(\sqrt [ 15 ]{ 91.2 } \)
Answer:
91.2 ÷ 15
91 ÷ 15 = 6 with remainder 1.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
120 ÷ 15 = 8 with remainder 0.
So, 91.2 ÷ 15 = 6.08

Question 6.
\(\sqrt [ 35 ]{ 97.3 } \)
Answer:
97.3 ÷ 35
97 ÷ 35 = 2 with remainder 27.
273 ÷ 35 = 7 with remainder 28.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
280 ÷ 35 = 8 with remainder 0.
So, 97.3 ÷ 35 = 2.78.

Question 7.
3.57 ÷ 0.84 = ______
Answer:
Multiply 0.84 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 3.57 by the same power of 10.
0.84 x 100 = 84
3.57 x 100 = 357
357 ÷ 84
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

84 ) 357 ( 4.25

336

——-

210

-168

——-

420

– 420

——-

0
3.57 ÷ 0.84 = 4.25

Question 8.
20.2 ÷ 4 = _____
Answer:
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

4 ) 20.2 ( 5.05

20

——

20

20

——

0
20.2 ÷ 4 = 5.05

Question 9.
1.74 ÷ 0.25 = _______
Answer:
Multiply 0.25 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 1.74 by the same power of 10.
0.25 x 100 = 25
1.74 x 100 = 174
174 ÷ 25
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

25 ) 174 ( 6.96

150

——-

240

-225

——-

150

-150

——-

0
1.74 ÷ 0.25 = 6.96

Question 10.
A painter has 5 gallons of paint to use in a room. He uses 2.5 gallons of paint for 1 coat. How many coats can he paint?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 9
Answer:
Multiply 2.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5 by the same power of 10.
2.5 x 10 = 25
5 x 10 = 50
50 ÷ 25 = 2
He can paint 2 coats.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend say she can find 5.44 ÷ 0.64 by dividing both the divisor and dividend by 0.01 to make an equivalent problem with a whole-number divisor. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
To divide this 5.44 ÷ 0.64, multiply 0.64 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5.44 by the same power of 10.
Multiplying by 100 and dividing by 0.01 both are same.
So, my friend is correct.

Question 12.
Writing
Explain when you need to insert a zero in the dividend when dividing.
Answer:
When dividend does not have enough digits to divide completely, then we need to insert a zero in the dividend.
For example, 35 ÷ 25
Here 35 is not a multiple of 25, so we have to add a zero to 35.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
You cut a 12-foot-long streamer into 8 pieces of equal length. How long is each piece?
Answer:
Length of each piece = 12 ÷ 8

8 ) 12 ( 1.5

8

—–

40

40

—–

0
So, length of each piece = 1.5

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
How many days longer does the bag of dog food last for the 20-pound dog than the 40-pound dog? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.8 10
Answer:
Total cups of dog food = 200
20-pound dog eats per day = 1.25 cups
40-pound dog eats per day = 1.25 x 2 = 2.5 cups
200 ÷ 1.25
Multiply 1.25 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 200 by the same power of 10.
1.25 x 100 = 125
200 x 100 = 20,000
20,000 ÷ 125
200 ÷ 125 = 1 with remainder 75
7500 ÷ 125 = 60 with remainder 0.
So, 200 ÷ 1.25 = 160
Food lasts for the 20-pound dog = 160 days
40-pound dog = 200 ÷ 2.5
Multiply 2.5 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 200 by the same power of 10.
2.5 x 10 = 25
200 x 10 = 2000
2000 ÷ 25 = 80
Food lasts for the 40-pound dog = 80 days

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 15.
1.7 + 6.8 = ________
Answer: 8.5

Question 16.
150.23 + 401.79 = _______
Answer: 552.02

Lesson 7.9 Problem Solving: Decimal Operations

Explore and Grow

Make a plan to solve the problem.
Three friends take a taxi ride that costs $4.75 per mile. They travel 10.2 miles and tip the driver $8. They share the total cost equally. How much does each friend pay?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 1
Answer:

Reasoning
Explain how you can work backward to check your answer.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Decimal Operations

Example
You spend $67.45 on the video game controller, the gaming headset, and 3 video games. The video games each cos the same amount. How much does each video game cost?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 2
Understand the Problem
What do you know?
• You spend a total of $67.45.
• The controller costs $15.49 and the headset costs $21.99.
• You buy 3 video games that each cost the same amount.

What do you need to find?
• You need to find the cost of each video game.

Make a Plan
How will you solve?
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each video game.

Solve
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 3
So, each video game costs ______.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Explain how you can check whether your answer above is reasonable.
Answer:
v = (67.45 – 15.49 – 21.99) ÷ 3
= 29.97 ÷ 3
v = 9.99
So, each video game costs $9.99.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 2.
Your friend pays $84.29 for a sewing machine and 6 yards of fabric. The sewing machine costs $59.99. How much does each yard of fabric cost?
Answer:

What do you know?
• You spend a total of $84.29 for a sewing machine and 6 yards of fabric.
• The sewing machine costs $59.99 and the 6 yards of fabric costs $24.3.

What do you need to find?

We have to find each yard of fabric cost.
1 yard of fabric cost = 24.3 ÷ 6
So, each yard of fabric costs = $4.05

Question 3.
There are 25.8 grams of fiber in 3 cups of cooked peas. There are 52.5 grams of fiber in 5 cups of avocados. Which contains more fiber in 1 cup, cooked peas or avocados?
Answer:
Cooked peas = 25.8 ÷ 3 = 8.6 grams
Avocados = 52.5 ÷ 3 = 10.5 grams
So, avocados contains more fiber in 1 cup.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 4.
Your friend makes a hexagonal frame with a perimeter of 7.5 feet. You make a triangular frame with a perimeter of 5.25 feet. Whose frame has longer side lengths? How much longer?
Answer:
Hexagonal perimeter = 6a = 7.5 feet
Triangular perimeter = 3sides(3a) = 5.25 feet
So, 6a ÷ 2 = 3a
7.5 ÷ 2 = 3.75 feet
5.25 – 3.75 = 1.5 feet
So, triangular frame has 1.5 feet longer side lengths.

Question 5.
You spend $119.92 on the wet suit, the snorkeling equipment, and 2 research books. The books each cost the same amount. How much does each book cost?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 4
Answer:
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each book.
cost of each book = (Amount spend – wet suit cost – snorkeling equipment cost) ÷ 2
= (119.92 – 64.95 – 14.99) ÷ 2
= 39.98 ÷ 2
= 19.99
So, each book costs $19.99.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You pour goop into molds and bake them to make plastic lizards. You run out of goop and go shopping for more. Which package costs less per ounce of goop? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 5.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 5
Answer:
Fluorescent package = 40.5 ÷ 2.25 = $18
Color-Changing package = 16.2 ÷ 1.8 = $9
So, Color-Changing package costs less per ounce of goop.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Descartes spends $16.40 on the game app, an e-book, and 5 songs. The e-book costs 4 times as much as the game app. The songs each cost the same amount. How much does each song cost?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 6
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Step 1: Multiply the cost of the app by4 to find the cost of the e-book.
1.99 × 4 = 7.96 The e-book costs _______.
Step 2: Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each song.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 7
Let c represent the cost of each song.
c = (16.40 – 1.99 – 7.96) ÷ 5c
= _____ ÷ 5
= _____
So, each song costs $ ______.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You spend $2.24 on a key chain, a bookmark, and 2 pencils. The key chain costs 3 times as much as the bookmark. The pencils each cost the same amount. How much does each pencil cost?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 8
Answer:
Given that,
Bookmark cost = $0.45
Key chain cost = 3 x 0.45 = $1.35
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each pencil.
cost of each pencil = (Amount spend – keychain cost – bookmark cost) ÷ 2
= (2.24 – 1.35 – 0.45) ÷ 2
= 0.44 ÷ 2
= $0.22
So, cost of each pencil = $0.22.

Question 8.
Newton buys an instant-print camera, a camera bag, and 2 packs of film. He pays $113.96 after using a $5 coupon. The camera costs $69.40, which is 5 times as much as the camera case. How much does each pack of film cost?
Answer:
Total cost = 113.96 + 5 = $118.96
Camera cost = $69.40
Camera case cost = 69.40 ÷ 5 = $13.88
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each pack of film cost.
cost of each pack of film = (amount spend – camera cost – camera case cost) ÷ 2
= (118.96 – 69.40 – 13.88) ÷ 2
= 35.68 ÷ 2
= 17.84
So, cost of each pack of film = $17.84

Problem Solving: Decimal Operations Homework & Practice 7.9

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 1.
A 20-ounce bottle of ketchup costs $2.80. A 14-ounce bottle of mustard costs $2.38. Which item costs less per ounce? How much less?
Answer:
20-ounce bottle of ketchup costs = $2.80
14-ounce bottle of mustard costs = $2.38
1 ounce ketchup = 2.8 ÷ 20 = $0.14
1 ounce mustard = 2.38 ÷ 14 = $0.17
Ketchup costs $0.03 less per ounce than mustard.

Question 2.
Gymnast A scores the same amount in each of his 4 events. Gymnast B scores the same amount in each of his 3 events. Which gymnast scores more in each of his events? How much more?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 9
Answer:
Gymnast A in each of his events = 33.56 ÷ 4 = 8.39 points
Gymnast B in each of his events = 25.05 ÷ 3 = 8.35 points
Gymnast A scores 0.04 points more in each of his events than gymnast B.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 3.
Three children’s tickets to the circus cost $53.85. Two adult tickets to the circus cost $63.90. How much more does 1 adult ticket cost than 1 children’s ticket? Which item costs more per ounce? How much more?
Answer:
3 children’s tickets cost = $53.85
2 adult tickets cost = $63.90
1 adult ticket cost = 63.90 ÷ 2 = $31.95
1 children’s ticket cost = 53.85 ÷ 3 = $17.95
One adult ticket cost is $14 more than 1 children’s ticket.

Question 4.
A chef at a restaurant buys 50 pounds of red potatoes for $27.50 and 30 pounds of sweet potatoes for $22.50. Which kind of potato costs more per pound? How much more?
Answer:
Red potatoes per pound = 27.5 ÷ 50 = $0.55
Sweet potatoes per pound = 22.5 ÷ 30 = $0.75
Sweet potatoes costs $0.2 more per pound than red potatoes.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You download 2 music videos, a TV series, and a movie for $42.95 total. The TV series costs 2 times as much as the movie. How much does each music video cost?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 10
Answer:
Total cost = $42.95
Movie cost = $12.99
TV series cost = $25.98
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each music video cost.
cost of each music video = (total cost – movie cost – TV series cost) ÷ 2
= (42.95 – 12.99 – 25.98) ÷ 2
= 3.98 ÷ 2
= 1.99
So, cost of each music video = $1.99.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
Which item costs more per ounce? How much more?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 7.9 11
Answer:
Glue cost = 23.04 ÷ 1 = 23.04
Paste cost = 4.00 ÷ 2 = 2
Glue costs $21.04 more than paste.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient.
Question 7.
4,000 ÷ 20 = ______
Answer: 200

Question 8.
900 ÷ 300 = _______
Answer: 3

Question 9.
5,600 ÷ 800 = _______
Answer: 7

Divide Decimals Performance Task

Question 1.
Multiple teams adopt different sections of a state highway to clean. The teams must clean both sides of their adopted section of the highway.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 1
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 2
a. The teams clean their section of the highway over 4 days. They clean the same distance each day.How many miles of the highway does each team clean each day?
b. Each team divides their daily distance equally among each team member. Which team’s members clean the greatest distance each day?
c. The team that collects the greatest amount of litter per team member wins a prize.Which team wins the prize?
Answer:

Question 2.
In a community, 25 people volunteer to clean the rectangular park shown. The park is divided into sections of equal area. One section is assigned to each volunteer. What is the area of the section that each volunteer cleans? What is one possible set of dimensions for 24.5 m each section?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 3
Answer:

Divide Decimals Activity

Race Around the World: Division
Directions:
1. Players take turns.
2. On your turn, flip a Race Around the World: Division Card and find the quotient.
3. Move your piece to the next number on the board that is highlighted in the quotient.
4. The first player to make it back to North America wins!
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals 4
Answer:

Divide Decimals Chapter Practice

7.1 Division Patterns with Decimals

Find the quotient.
Question 1.
25 ÷ 102 = ______
Answer:
First Simplify the 102 which means  10 x 10  =100, then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (25) by the denominator (100).
When we divide by 100, the decimal point moves two places to the left.
25 ÷ 102 = 0.25.

Question 2.
1.69 ÷ 0.01 = ______
Answer: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (1.69) by the denominator (0.01). When we divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the right.

1.69 ÷ 0.01 = 169.

Question 3.
681 ÷ 103 = ______
Answer:
First Simplify the 103 which means  10 x 10 x 10 =1000, then we need to calculate the fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (681) by the denominator (1000).
When we divide by 1000, the decimal point moves three places to the left.
681 ÷ 103 = 0.681.

Question 4.
5.7 ÷ 0.1 = _____
Answer:
To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (5.7) by the denominator (0.1). When we divide by 0.1, the decimal point moves one places to the right.
5.7 ÷ 0.1 = 57

Question 5.
200 ÷ 0.01 = _____
Answer:
To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator 200 by the denominator (0.01). When we divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves one places to the right.

Question 6.
41.3 ÷ 10 = _____
Answer: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (41.3) by the denominator (10). When we divide by 10, the decimal point moves one places to the left.
41.3 ÷ 10 = 4.13

Find the value of k.
Question 7.
74 ÷ k = 7,400
Answer:
74 ÷ 7400 = k

Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (74) by the denominator (7400). When we divide by 100, the decimal point moves two places to the left.
74 ÷ 7400 = 0.01
k = 0.01.

Question 8.
k ÷ 0.1 = 8.1
Answer:
k = 8.1 x 0.1
k = 0.81.

Question 9.
0.35 ÷ k = 0.035
Answer:
0.35 ÷ 0.035 = k
Explanation: To convert this simple fraction to a decimal just divide the numerator (0.35) by the denominator (0.035). When we divide by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the right.
0.35 ÷ 0.035 = 10
k = 10.

7.2 Estimate Decimal Quotients

Estimate the quotient.
Question 10.
9.6 ÷ 2
Answer:
9.6 is closer to 10.
10 ÷ 2 = 5
9.6 ÷ 2 is about 5.

Question 11.
37.2 ÷ 6.4
Answer:
Round the divisor 6.4 to 6.
Think: What numbers close to 37.2 are easily divided by 6?
Use 36.
36 ÷ 6 = 6
So, 37.2 ÷ 6.4 is about 6.

Question 12.
44.8 ÷ 4.7
Answer:
Round the divisor 4.7 to 5.
Think: What numbers close to 44.8 are easily divided by 5?
Use 45.
45 ÷ 5 = 9
So, 44.8 ÷ 4.7 is about 9.

Question 13.
78.2 ÷ 10.8
Answer:
Round the divisor 10.8 to 11.
Think: What numbers close to 78.2 are easily divided by 11?
Use 77.
77 ÷ 11 = 7
So, 78.2 ÷ 10.8 is about 7.

7.3 Use Models to Divide Decimals by Whole Numbers

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 14.
1.4 ÷ 2
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 14
Answer:
Think: 1.4 is 1 ones and 4 tenths.
14 tenths can be divided equally as 2 groups of 7 tenths.
1.4 ÷ 2 = 0.7

Question 15.
2.85 ÷ 3
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 15
Answer:
Think: 2.85 is 2 ones, 8 tenths and 5 hundredths.
28 tenths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 9 tenths with remainder 1. Remainder has to place before 5 hundredths.
15 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 5 hundredths.
So, 285 hundredths can be divided equally as 3 groups of 95 hundredths.
2.85 ÷ 3 = 0.95

Use a model to find the quotient.
Question 16.
1.28 ÷ 4
Answer:
Think: 1.28 is 1 ones, 2 tenths and 8 hundredths.
12 tenths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 3 tenths
8 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 2 hundredths.
So, 128 hundredths can be divided equally as 4 groups of 32 hundredths.
1.28 ÷ 4 = 0.32

Question 17.
3.5 ÷ 5
Answer:
Think: 3.5 is 3 ones and 5 tenths.
35 tenths can be divided equally as 5 groups of 7 tenths.
3.5 ÷ 5 = 0.7

7.4 Divide Decimals by One-Digit Numbers

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 18.
\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 14.1 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
14 ÷ 3
4 ones x 3 = 12
14 ones – 12 ones
There are 2 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
21 ÷ 3 = 7 tenths.
So, 14.1 ÷ 3 = 4.7

Question 19.
\(\sqrt [ 6 ]{ 67.68 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
67 ÷ 6
11 ones x 6 = 66
67 ones – 66 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
16 ÷ 6
2 tenths x 6 = 12
16 – 12 = 4
There are 4 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
48 ÷ 6 = 8 hundredths.
So, 67.68 ÷ 6 = 11.28

Question 20.
\(\sqrt [ 8 ]{ 105.6 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
105 ÷ 8
13 ones x 8 = 104
105 ones – 104 ones
There are 1 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
16 ÷ 8 = 2 tenths.
So, 105.6 ÷ 8 = 13.2

Question 21.
Number Sense
Evaluate (84.7 + 79.8) ÷ 7.
Answer:
(84.7 + 79.8) ÷ 7 = 164.5 ÷ 7
Divide the ones
164 ÷ 7
23 ones x 7 = 161
164 ones – 161 ones
There are 3 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
35 ÷ 7
5 tenths x 7
35 – 35 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
So, 164.5 ÷ 7 = 23.5

7.5 Divide Decimals by Two-Digit Numbers

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 22.
\(\sqrt [ 32 ]{ 45.12 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
45 ÷ 32
1 ones x 32 = 32
45 ones – 32 ones
There are 13 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
131 ÷ 32
4 tenths x 32 = 128
131 – 128 = 3
There are 3 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
32 ÷ 32 = 1 hundredths.
So, 45.12 ÷ 32 = 1.41

Question 23.
\(\sqrt [ 15 ]{ 9.15 } \)
Answer:
Divide the tenths
91 ÷ 15
6 tenths x 15 = 90
91 – 90 = 1
There are 1 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
15 ÷ 15 = 1 hundredths.
So, 9.15 ÷ 15 = 0.61

Question 24.
\(\sqrt [ 73 ]{ 102.2 } \)
Answer:
Divide the ones
102 ÷ 73
1 ones x 73 = 73
102 ones – 73 ones
There are 29 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
292 ÷ 73 = 4 tenths.
So, 102.2 ÷ 73 = 1.4

Question 25.
17.4 ÷ 87 = ______
Answer:
Divide the tenths
174 ÷ 87
2 tenths x 87
174 – 174 = 0
There are 0 tenths left over.
17.4 ÷ 87 = 0.2

Question 26.
245.82 ÷ 51 = _______
Answer:
Divide the ones
245 ÷ 51
4 ones x 51 = 204
245 ones – 204 ones
There are 41 ones left over.
Divide the tenths
418 ÷ 51
8 tenths x 51
418 – 408 = 10
There are 10 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
102 ÷ 51 = 2 hundredths
So, 245.82 ÷ 51 = 4.82

Question 27.
5.88 ÷ 42 = ______
Answer:
Divide the tenths
58 ÷ 42
1 tenths  x 42 = 42
58 tenths – 42 tenths
There are 16 tenths left over.
Divide the hundredths
168 ÷ 42
4 hundredths x 42
168 – 168 = 0
There are 0 hundredths left over.
So, 5.88 ÷ 42 = 0.14

7.6 Use Models to Divide Decimals

Use the model to find the quotient.
Question 28.
0.9 ÷ 0.45 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 28
Answer:
Shade 9 columns to represent 0.9.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.45.
There are 2 groups of 45 hundredths.
So, 0.9 ÷ 0.45 = 2

Question 29.
0.1 ÷ 0.05 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 29
Answer:
Shade 1 column to represent 0.1.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.05.
There are 2 groups of 5 hundredths.
So, 0.1 ÷ 0.05 = 2

Question 30.
1.6 ÷ 0.4 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 30
Answer:
Shade 16 columns to represent 1.6.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.4.
There are 4 groups of 4 tenths.
So, 1.6 ÷ 0.4 = 4

Question 31.
1.9 ÷ 0.38 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 31
Answer:
Shade 19 columns to represent 1.9.
Divide the model to show groups of 0.38.
There are 5 groups of 38 hundredths.
So, 1.9 ÷ 0.38 = 5

7.7 Divide Decimals

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.
Question 32.
\(\sqrt [ 2.57 ]{ 20.56 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 2.57 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 20.56 by the same power of 10.
2.57 x 100 = 257
20.56 x 100 = 2056
2056 ÷ 257 = 8
So, 20.56 ÷ 2.57 = 8.

Question 33.
\(\sqrt [ 4.7 ]{ 16.92 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 4.7 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 16.92 by the same power of 10.
4.7 x 10 = 47
16.92 x 10 = 169.2
Step 2 : Divide 169.2 ÷ 47
169 ÷ 47 = 3 with remainder 28.
282 ÷ 47 = 6 with remainder 0.
So, 16.92 ÷ 4.7 = 3.6.

Question 34.
\(\sqrt [ 5.3 ]{ 63.6 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 5.3 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 63.6 by the same power of 10.
5.3 x 10 = 53
63.6 x 10 = 636
636 ÷ 53 = 12
So, 63.6 ÷ 5.3 = 12.

7.8 Insert Zeros in the Dividend

Question 35.
\(\sqrt [ 4 ]{ 36.2 } \)
Answer:
36.2 ÷ 4
36 ÷ 4 = 9
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
20 ÷ 4 = 5
So, 36.2 ÷ 4 = 9.05.

Question 36.
\(\sqrt [ 4.8 ]{ 85.2 } \)
Answer:
Multiply 4.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 85.2 by the same power of 10.
4.8 x 10 = 48
85.2 x 10 = 852
852 ÷ 48
85 ÷ 48 = 1 with remainder 37.
372 ÷ 48 = 7 with remainder 36.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
360 ÷ 48 = 7 with remainder 24.
240 ÷ 48 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 85.2 ÷ 4.8 = 17.75.

Question 37.
\(\sqrt [ 12 ]{ 52.2 } \)
Answer:
52.2 ÷ 12
52 ÷ 12 = 4 with remainder 4.
42 ÷ 12 = 3 with remainder 6.
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
60 ÷ 12 = 5 with remainder 0.
So, 52.2 ÷ 12 = 4.35.

Question 38.
5 ÷ 0.8 = ______
Answer:
Multiply 0.8 by a power of 10 to make it a whole number. Then multiply 5 by the same power of 10.
0.8 x 10 = 8
5 x 10 = 50
50 ÷ 8
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

8 ) 50 ( 6.25

48

——-

20

-16

——-

40

40

——–

0
So, 5 ÷ 0.8 = 6.25

Question 39.
23.7 ÷ 6 = ______
Answer:
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.

6 ) 23.7 ( 3.95

18

——-

57

– 54

——-

30

30

——–

0
23.7 ÷ 6 = 3.95

Question 40.
138.4 ÷ 16 = ______
Answer:
Insert a zero in the dividend and continue to divide.
16 ) 138.4 ( 8.65

128

——-

104

– 96

——–

80

80


7.9 Problem Solving: Decimal Operations

Question 41.
You spend $28.08 on the fabric scissors, buttons, and two craft kits. The kits each cost the same amount. How much does ASSORTED $6.13 each kit cost?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 7 Divide Decimals chp 41
Answer:
Given that,
Total amount spent = $28.08
Fabric scissors cost = $6.13
Buttons cost = $3.97
Write and solve an equation to find the cost of each kit.
cost of each kit = (amount spend – fabric scissors cost – buttons cost) ÷ 2
= (28.08 – 6.13 – 3.97) ÷ 2
= 17.98 ÷ 2
= 8.99
So, cost of each craft kit = $8.99

Divide Decimals Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Which statement is true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 1
Answer:
According to BODMAS rule,
Statement c is correct.

Question 2.
You round 23 × 84 and get an underestimate. How did you estimate?
A. 20 × 80
B. 30 × 90
C. 25 × 90
D. 25 × 90
Answer:
23 × 84 round to 20 × 80 because it is closer to given equation.
84 is close to 80 and all the others options having number 90.
Difference between the numbers in remaining options is greater than the option A numbers.

Question 3.
Which expressions have a product that is shown?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 3
Answer:
Except option 1, remaining all the other options have the product(0.4) shown in the image.

Question 4.
What number is \(\frac{1}{10}\) of 800?
A. 0.8
B. 8
C. 80
D. 8,000
Answer:
\small \frac{1}{10} (800) = 80

Question 5.
Which number divided by 0.01 is 14 more than 37?
A. 0.51
B. 5.1
C. 51
D. 5,100
Answer:
14 more than 37 = 37 + 14 = 51
51 x 0.01 = 0.51
So, the answer is 0.51.

Question 6.
Which expressions have a quotient of 40?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 6
Answer:
2800 ÷ 70, 160 ÷ 4, 3600 ÷ 900 and 8000 ÷ 200 have a quotient of 40.

Question 7.
Which equation is shown by the quick sketch?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 7
Answer:

Question 8.
What is the value of k?
0.036 × k = 36
A. 10
B. 103
C. 100
D. 36
Answer:
k = 36 ÷ 0.036
k = 1000 = 103(option B).

Question 9.
What is the quotient of 11.76 and 8?
A. 1.47
B. 1.97
C. 14.7
D. 94.08
Answer:
11.76 ÷ 8
11 ÷ 8 = 1 with remainder 3.
37 ÷ 8 = 4 with remainder 5.
56 ÷ 8 = 7 with remainder 0.
So, quotient of 11.76 and 8 = 1.47(option A).

Question 10.
Newton wins a race by seven thousandths of a second. What is this number in standard form?
A. 0.007
B. 0.07
C. 0.7
D. 7,00
Answer:
0.007 is in standard form.

Question 11.
Evaluate 30 – (9 + 6) ÷ 3.
A. 5
B. 19
C. 9
D. 25
Answer:
According to BODMAS rule.
30 – (9 + 6) ÷ 3
= 30 – (15 ÷ 3)
= 30 – 5
= 25

Question 12.
A food truck owner sells 237 gyros in 1 day. Each gyro costs $7.How much money does the owner collect in 1 day?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 12
A. $659
B. $1,419
C. $1,659
D. $11,249
Answer:
Each gyro costs $7
237 gyros in 1 day cost = 237 x 7 = $1659
So, the owner collects $1659 in 1 day.

Question 13.
What is the quotient of 4,521 and 3?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 13
Answer:
4521 ÷ 3 = 1507
So, quotient of 4,521 and 3 is 1507.

Question 14.
What is the value of b?
104 = 10b × 10
A. 3
B. 4
C. 5
D. 10
Answer:
104 = 10b × 10
If b= 3,
10b × 10 = 103 × 10
= 103+1
= 104
So, b= 3.

Question 15.
Part A What is the area of the sandbox?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 15
Part B The playground committee wants to make the area of the sandbox 2 times the original area. What is the new area? Explain.
Answer:

Question 16.
Which expressions have a product of 1,200?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 16
Answer:
30 x 40, 12 x 102 and 120 x 10 have a product of 1,200.

Question 17.
A 5-day pass to a theme park costs $72.50. A 2-day pass to the same park costs $99.50. How much more does the 2-day pass cost each day than the 5-day pass each day?
A. $14.50
B. $35.25
C. $49.75
D. $64.25
Answer:
5-day pass costs each day = 72.5 ÷ 5 = $14.5
2-day pass costs each day = 99.5 ÷ 2 = $49.75
2-day pass cost each day $35.25 more than the 5-day pass each day.

Question 18.
Which expressions have a quotient with the first digit in the tens place?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals cp 18
Answer:
4,536 ÷ 56 = 81
6,750 ÷ 45 = 150
2,403 ÷ 89 = 27
1,496 ÷ 17 = 88
Except option 2, all the other options have a quotient with the first digit in the tens place.

Divide Decimals STEAM Performance Task

You experiment with levers for your school’s science fair.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 1
Question 1.
You balance the seesaw lever by placing different weights on either side at different distances from the middle. You find the formula for balancing the seesaw lever is (left weight) × (left distance) = (right weight) × (right distance). You test the formula using various combinations of weights.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 2
a. Use the formula to complete the table for the 2nd and 3rd attempts.
b. For your 4th attempt, you have up to 25 pounds in weights to place on each side of the lever. Choose a whole pound weight for the left side and balance the lever to complete the table.
c. The total length of your seesaw lever is 40 inches. Can you balance a 50-pound weight with a 1-pound weight? Explain.
d. For your science fair display, you balance the lever by placing another gram weight on the right side. Which gram weight should you use?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 3
e. How can you apply what you learn from the science fair project to a playground?
Answer:

You help set up tables for the science fair. There are 93 science fair displays. You use the display boards to determine how many tables to use.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 4
Question 2.
Each display board opens up to form three sides of a trapezoid as shown.
a. How much room do you think each display board needs to open up? Explain.
b. You place the display boards next to each other on 12-foot long tables. How many display boards can you fit on one table?
c. You use one table for snacks and one table for award ribbons. What is the least number of tables you can use? Explain.
d. The diagram shows the room where the science fair is held. Each table for the science fair is 3 feet wide. Your teacher says the ends of the tables can touch to save space. Complete the diagram to arrange the tables so that visitors and judges can see each display board.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 5
Answer:

Question 3.
Use the Internet or some other resource to learn about other types of science fair projects. Describe one interesting science fair project you want to complete.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 7 Divide Decimals spt 6
Answer:  One of the interesting science fair project is :-
                                                          How To Make A Bottle Rocket
-> Did you know you can make and launch a water bottle rocket using a plastic bottle, water, cork,           needle adaptor and pump ?
How do water bottle rockets work?
As you pump air into the bottle the pressure inside the bottle builds up until the force of the air pushing on the water is enough to  force the cork out of the end of the bottle. The water rushes out of the bottle in one direction whilst the bottle pushes back in the other. This results in the bottle shooting upwards.
 What you need to make a bottle rocket
 ->  An empty plastic bottle
->  Cardboard made into a cone and 4 fins
->  A cork
->  A pump with a needle adaptor
->  Water
You can buy a kit with the parts apart from the pump and the bottle-please check the contents before buying.
Instructions – How to make a bottle rocket
Push the needle adaptor of the pump through the cork, it needs to go all the way through so you might have to trim the cork a little bit.
-> Decorate the bottle with the cone and fins.
-> Fill the bottle one quarter full of water and push the cork in tightly.
-> Take the bottle outside and connect the pump to the needle adaptor. Ours wouldn’t stand up on the fins so we rested it on a box, but if you make some strong fins it should stand up by itself.
-> Pump air into the bottle, making sure all spectators stand back, the bottle will lift off with force after a few seconds.
Why does the water bottle rocket launch?
As you pump air into the bottle pressure builds up inside. If you keep pumping, the force of the air pushing on the water eventually becomes strong enough to force the cork out of the bottle allowing water to rush out in one direction while the bottle pushes back in the other direction. This forces the rocket upwards.
Space

Conclusion:

I wish the information provided in the above article regarding Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Divide Decimals is helpful for you. For any queries, you can post the comments in the below section.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12

Big Ideas Math Book Geometry Answer Key Ch 12 Probability is aligned as per the BIM Geometry Textbooks. Refer to the BIM Geometry Solutions for quick guidance on the Topicwise Concepts of Probability. Big Ideas Math Geometry Solution Key can be downloaded for free of cost. Access the Big Ideas Math Geometry Chapter 12 Probability Answers created by subject experts adhering to the latest Common Core State Standards guidelines. Download the handy resources for Big Ideas Math Geometry Chapter 12 Probability Solutions and begin your preparation.

Big Ideas Math Book Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability

Make the most out of the Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key for Cha 12 Probability and score better grades in the exams. Simply tap on the quick links available and prepare the respective topics available as and when you need them. Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability available here covers questions from the Topics Sample Spaces, Independent and Dependent Events, Disjoint and Overlapping Events, Binomial Distributions, Probability Test, etc.

Lesson: 1 Sample Spaces and Probability

Lesson: 2 Independent and Dependent Events

Lesson: 3 Two-Way Tables and Probability

Quiz

Lesson: 4 Probability of Disjoint and Overlapping Events

Lesson: 5 Permutations and Combinations

Lesson: 6 Binomial Distributions

Chapter: 12 – Probability 

Probability Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.

Question 1.
What percent of 30 is 6?
Answer: 20

Explanation:
100% = 30
x% = 6
100% = 30(1)
x% = 6(2)
100%/x% = 30/6
Taking the inverse of both sides
x%/100% = 6/30
x = 20%
Thus 6 is 20% of 30.

Question 2.
What number is 68% of 25?
Answer: 17

Explanation:
68% × 25
(68 ÷ 100) × 25
(68 × 25) ÷ 100
1700 ÷ 100 = 17

Question 3.
34.4 is what percent of 86?
Answer: 40

Explanation:
100% = 86
x% = 34.4
100% = 86(1)
x% = 34.4(2)
100%/x% = 86/34.4
Taking the inverse of both sides
x%/100% = 34.4/86
x = 40%
Therefore, 34.4 is 40% of 86.

Display the data in a histogram.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_1

Question 5.
ABSTRACT REASONING
You want to purchase either a sofa or an arm chair at a furniture store. Each item has the same retail price. The sofa is 20% off. The arm chair is 10% off. and you have a coupon to get an additional 10% off the discounted price of the chair. Are the items equally priced after the discounts arc applied? Explain.
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
You want to purchase either a sofa or an armchair at a furniture store.
Each item has the same retail price. The sofa is 20% off. The armchair is 10% off. and you have a coupon to get an additional 10% off the discounted price of the chair.
The price of armchair and sofa are the same.
If you add 10% to chair the discount for the chair and sofa will be the same.
10% + 10% = 20%

Probability Monitoring Progress

In Exercises 1 and 2, describe the event as unlikely, equally likely to happen or not happen, or likely. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
The oldest child in a family is a girl.
Answer:

Question 2.
The two oldest children in a family with three children are girls.
Answer:

Question 3.
Give an example of an event that is certain to occur.
Answer:
If A and B are independent event
P(A) = 1/2
P(B) = 1/5
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B)
= 1/2 × 1/5
= 1/10

12.1 Sample Spaces and Probability

Exploration 1

Finding the Sample Space of an Experiment

Work with a partner: In an experiment, three coins are flipped. List the possible outcomes in the sample space of the experiment.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 2
Answer:
The number of different outcomes when three coins are tossed is 2 × 2 × 2 = 8.
All 8 possible outcomes are HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH and TTT.

Exploration 2

Finding the Sample Space of an Experiment

Work with a partner: List the possible outcomes in the sample space of the experiment.

a. One six-sided die is rolled.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 3
Answer: 6 possible outcomes

b. Two six-sided die is rolled.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 4
Answer:
Rolling two six-sided dice: Each die has 6 equally likely outcomes, so the sample space is 6 . 6 or 36 equally likely outcomes.

Exploration 3

Finding the Sample Space of an Experiment

Work with a partner: In an experiment, a spinner is spun.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 5

a. How many ways can you spin a 1? 2? 3? 4? 5?
Answer: 1, 2, 3, 2, 4

b. List the sample space.
Answer: 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5, 5

c. What is the total number of outcomes?
Answer: 12

Exploration 4

Finding the Sample Space of an Experiment

Work with a partner: In an experiment, a bag contains 2 blue marbles and 5 red marbles. Two marbles arc drawn from the bag.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 6

a. How many ways can you choose two blue? a red then blue? a blue then red? two red?
Answer: BB – 2, RB – 10, BR – 10, RR – 20

b. List the sample space.
Answer:

c. What is the total number of outcomes?
Answer: 42

Communicate Your Answer

Question 5.
How can you list the possible outcomes in the sample space of an experiment?
Answer:
There are four possible outcomes for each spin: red, blue, yellow, green. Then, multiply the number of outcomes by the number of spins. June flipped the coin three times. The answer is there are 12 outcomes in the sample space.

Question 6.
For Exploration 3, find the ratio of the number of each possible outcome to the total number of outcomes. Then find the sum of these ratios. Repeat for Exploration 4. What do you observe?
LOOKING FOR A PATTERN
To be proficient in math, you need to look closely to discern a pattern or structure.
Answer:

Lesson 12.1 Sample Spaces and Probability

Monitoring Progress

Find the number of possible outcomes in the sample space. Then list the possible outcomes.

Question 1.
You flip two coins.
Answer: 4

Explanation:
When we flip two coins simultaneoulsy then the possible outcomes will be (H, H), (T, T), (T, H), (H, T)
where H represents heads
T represents tails.
Thus the possible outcomes are 2² = 4

Question 2.
You flip two Coins and roll a six-sided die.
Answer: 6 × 2² = 24

Explanation:
We roll a die and flip two coins. We have to find the number of possible outcomes in this space. Also we have to list the possible outcomes.
1 = {When rolling the dice, the number 1 fell};
2 = {When rolling the dice, the number 2 fell};
3 = {When rolling the dice, the number 3 fell};
4 = {When rolling the dice, the number 4 fell};
5 = {When rolling the dice, the number 5 fell};
6 = {When rolling the dice, the number 6 fell};
On the other hand, using H for Heads and T for Tails we can list the outcomes.
(1, H, H), (2, H, H), (3, H, H), (4, H, H), (5, H, H), (6, H, H)
(1, T, H), (2, T, H), (3, T, H), (4, T, H), (5, T, H), (6, T, H)
(1, H, T), (2, H, T), (3, H, T), (4, H, T), (5, H, T), (6, H, T)
(1, T, T), (2, T, T), (3, T, T), (4, T, T), (5, T, T), (6, T, T)
Therefore, we can conclude that the number of all possible outcomes is
6 × 2² = 24

Question 3.
You flip a coin and roll a six-sided die. What is the probability that the coin shows tails and the die shows 4?
Answer:
The sample space has 12 possible outcomes.
Heads, 1
Heads, 2
Heads, 3
Heads, 4
Heads, 5
Heads, 6
Tails, 1
Tails, 2
Tails, 3
Tails, 4
Tails, 5
Tails, 6
Probability that the coin shows tails and the die shows 4 is 4/12 = 1/3

Find P(\(\bar{A}\)).

Question 4.
P(A) = 0.45
Answer:
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – P(A)
P(A) = 0.45
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – 0.45
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 0.55

Question 5.
P(A) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – P(A)
P(A) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – \(\frac{1}{4}\)
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 6.
P(A) = 1
Answer:
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – P(A)
P(A) = 1
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – 1
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 0

Question 7.
P(A) = 0.03
Answer:
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – P(A)
P(A) = 0.03
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – 0.03
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 0.97

Question 8.
In Example 4, are you more likely to get 10 points or 5 points?
Answer:
10: 0.09
5: (5 – 10)/324
= (36π – 9π)/324
= 27π/324
= 0.26

Question 9.
In Example 4, are you more likely to score points (10, 5, or 2) or get 0 points?
Answer:
2: (2 – 5)/324
= (81π – 36π)/324
= 45π/324
= 0.43
0.09 + 0.26 + 0.43 = 0.78
More likely to get 2 points.

Question 10.
In Example 5, for which color is the experimental probability of stopping on the color greater than the theoretical probability?
Answer:
9/20 = 0.45

Question 11.
In Example 6, what is the probability that a pet-owning adult chosen at random owns a fish?
Answer:
146/1328 = 73/664 = 0.11

Exercise 12.1 Sample Spaces and Probability

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
A number that describes the likelihood of an event is the ___________ of the event.
Answer:
A number that describes the likelihood of an event is the Probability of the event.

Question 2.
WRITING
Describe the difference between theoretical probability and experimental probability.
Answer: Experimental probability is the result of an experiment. Theoretical probability is what is expected to happen.

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6. find the number of possible outcomes in the sample space. Then list the possible outcomes.

Question 3.
You roll a die and flip three coins.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 3.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 3.2
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 3.3

Question 4.
You flip a coin and draw a marble at random from a hag containing two purple marbles and one while marble.
Answer:
Given data,
You flip a coin and draw a marble at random from a hag containing two purple marbles and one while marble.
the probability of getting a purple marble = 2/3
the probability of getting a white marble = 1/3

Question 5.
A bag contains four red cards numbered 1 through 4, four white cards numbered 1 through 4, and four black cards numbered 1 through 4. You choose a card at random.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 5

Question 6.
You draw two marbles without replacement from a bag containing three green marbles and four black marbles.
Answer:
In all there are 7 marbles when you first grab a marble, after that you take one marble away then you have 6 marbles to choose.
7 × 6 = 42
42 possible outcomes: GG, GG, GB, GB, GB, GB, GG, GG, GB, GB, GB, GB, GG, GG, GB, GB, GB, GB, BG, BG, BG, BB, BB, BB, BG, BG, BG, BB, BB, BB, BG, BG, BG, BB, BB, BB, BG, BG, BG, BB, BB, BB, BB.

Question 7.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A game show airs on television five days per week. Each day, a prize is randomly placed behind one of two doors. The contestant wins the prize by selecting the correct door. What is the probability that exactly two of the five contestants win a prize during a week?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 7
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 7.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 7.2

Question 8.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Your friend has two standard decks of 52 playing cards and asks you to randomly draw one card from each deck. What is the probability that you will draw two spades?
Answer:
You have two decks of 52 cards and in a normal deck, there are 13 cards of each suit.
So there are 13 spades in the deck.
Therefore the probability of you drawing a spade is 13 out of all the 52 cards or \(\frac{13}{52}\), which can be reduced to \(\frac{1}{4}\). You do this two times with different decks that are exactly the same so you multiply \(\frac{1}{4}\) times \(\frac{1}{4}\). 1 times 1 is 1 and 4 times 4 is 16, so it is \(\frac{1}{16}\).
You can turn this into a percentage by dividing 1 by 16 and moving the decimal place to places to the right.
6.25% is the probability that you will draw two spades.

Question 9.
PROBLEM SOLVING
When two six-sided dice are rolled, there are 36 possible outcomes. Find the probability that
(a) the sum is not 4 and
(b) the sum is greater than 5.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 9.1

Question 10.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The age distribution of a population is shown. Find the probability of each event.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 8
a. A person chosen at random is at least 15 years old.
Answer: 80%

b. A person chosen at random is from 25 to 44 years old.
Answer: 13% + 13% = 26%

Question 11.
ERROR ANALYSIS
A student randomly, guesses the answers to two true-false questions. Describe and correct the error in finding the probability of the student guessing both answers correctly.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 11

Question 12.
ERROR ANALYSIS
A student randomly draws a number between 1 and 30. Describe and correct the error in finding the probability that the number drawn is greater than 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 10
Answer:
The error is that the probability of the complement of the event is 4/30, not 3/30, because if you are looking for a sum greater than 4, than you subtract 1 by numbers less than or equal to 4 by the total amount of numbers, which is 30.
P(Sum is greater than 4)=1-P(Sum is less than or equal to 4)
1 – 2/15
= 13/15

Question 13.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
You throw a dart at the board shown. Your dart is equally likely to hit any point inside the square board. What is the probability your dart lands in the yellow region?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 11
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 13

Question 14.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
The map shows the length (in miles) of shoreline along the Gulf of Mexico for each state that borders the body of water. What is the probability that a ship coming ashore at a random point in the Gulf of Mexico lands in the given state?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12
a. Texas
Answer:
By using the above map we can solve the problem
Total length of the shoreline: 367 + 397 + 44 + 53 + 770 = 1631 miles
The probability of the ship landing in Texas: 367/1631 = 0.23

b. Alabama
Answer:
The probability of the ship landing in Alabama: 53/1631 = 0.03

c. Florida
Answer:
The probability of the ship landing in Florida: 770/1631 = 0.47

d. Louisiana
Answer:
The probability of the ship landing in Louisiana: 397/1631 = 0.24

Question 15.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
You roll a six-sided die 60 times. The table shows the results. For which number is the experimental probability of rolling the number the same as the theoretical probability?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 13
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 15

Question 16.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A bag contains 5 marbles that are each a different color. A marble is drawn, its color is recorded, and then the marble is placed back in the hag. This process is repeated until 30 marbles have been drawn. The table shows the results. For which marble is the experimental probability of drawing the marble the same as the theoretical probability?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 14
Answer:
Total number of marbles = 30
6/30 = 1/5
For black marble the experimental probability of drawing the marble the same as the theoretical probability.

Question 17.
REASONING
Refer to the spinner shown. The spinner is divided into sections with the same area.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 15
a. What is the theoretical probability that the spinner stops on a multiple of 3?
b. You spin the spinner 30 times. If stops on a multiple of 3 twenty times. What is the experimental probability of Stopping on a multiple of 3?
c. Explain why the probability you found in part (b) is different than the probability you found in part (a).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 17

Question 18.
OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life event that has a probability of 0. Then describe a real-life event that has a probability of 1.
Answer:
The probability of rolling a 7 with a standard 6-sided die = 0
The probability of rolling a natural number with a standard 6-sided die = 1

Question 19.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A survey of 2237 adults ages 18 and over asked which Sport 15 their favorite. The results are shown in the figure. What is the probability that an adult chosen at random prefers auto racing?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 16
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 19

Question 20.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A survey of 2392 adults ages 18 and over asked what type of food they Would be most likely to choose at a restaurant. The results are shown in the figure. What is the probability that an adult chosen at random prefers Italian food?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 17
Answer:
P(Italian) = 526/1196
= 263/1196
P(Italian) ≈ 22%

Question 21.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
Refer to the board in Exercise 13. Order the likelihoods that the dart lands in the given region from least likely to most likely.
A. green
B. not blue
C. red
D. not yellow
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 21.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 21.2

Question 22.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
Refer to the chart below. Order the following events from least likely to most likely.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 18
A. It rains on Sunday.
Answer:
80%
= 80/20 = 4/1
The ratio is 4:1

B. It does not rain on Saturday.
Answer:
100 – 30 = 70%
= 30/70 = 3 : 7

C. It rains on Monday.
Answer: 90%
= 90/10 = 9/1
= 9 : 1

D. It does not rain on Friday.
Answer:
100 – 5 = 95%
= 5/95 = 1/19
= 1 : 19

Question 23.
USING TOOLS
Use the figure in Example 3 to answer each question.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 19
a. List the possible sums that result from rolling two six-sided dice.
b. Find the theoretical probability of rolling each sum.
c. The table below shows a simulation of rolling two six-sided dice three times. Use a random number generator to simulate rolling two six-sided dice 50 times. Compare the experimental probabilities of rolling each sum with the theoretical probabilities.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 23.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 23.2

Question 24.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
You flip a coin three times. It lands on heads twice and on tails once. Your friend concludes that the theoretical probability of the coin landing heads up is P(heads up) = \(\frac{2}{3}\). Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
The friend is incorrect because the probability of heads here is \(\frac{2}{3}\), is the experimental probabiility of heads for this particular case, while its theoretical probability will always be \(\frac{1}{2}\).

Question 25.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
A sphere fits inside a cube so that it touches each side, as shown. What is the probability a point chosen at random inside the cube is also inside the sphere ?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 20
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 25.1

Question 26.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Consider the graph of f shown. What is the probability that the graph of y = f(x) + c intersects the x-axis when c is a randomly chosen integer from 1 to 6? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 21
Answer:

Question 27.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A manufacturer tests 1200 computers and finds that 9 of them have defects. Find the probability that a computer chosen at random has a defect. Predict the number of computers with defects in a shipment of 15,000 computers. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 27

Question 28.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
The tree diagram shows a sample space. Write a probability problem that can be represented by the sample space. Then write the answer(s) to the problem.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 22
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Simplify the expression. Write your answer using only positive exponents.

Question 29.
\(\frac{2 x^{3}}{x^{2}}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 29

Question 30.
\(\frac{2 x y}{8 y^{2}}\)
Answer:
\(\frac{2y}{8 y^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{2}{8y}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4y}\)

Question 31.
\(\frac{4 x^{9} y}{3 x^{3} y}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 31

Question 32.
\(\frac{6 y^{0}}{3 x^{-6}}\)
Answer:
Given,
\(\frac{6 y^{0}}{3 x^{-6}}\)
= 6 . 1/3x-6
= 2 . x6

Question 33.
(3Pq)4
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.1 Qu 33

Question 34.
\(\left(\frac{y^{2}}{x}\right)^{-2}\)
Answer: (\(\frac{y}{x}\))²

12.2 Independent and Dependent Events

Exploration 1

Identifying Independent and Dependent Events

Work with a partner: Determine whether the events are independent or dependent. Explain your reasoning.
REASONING ABSTRACTLY
To be proficient in math, you need to make sense of quantities and their relationships in problem situations.
a. Two six-sided dice are rolled.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 23
Answer:
P = Number of outcomes that satisfy the requirements/Total number of possible outcomes
Probability for rolling two dice with the six sided dots such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 dots in each die.
When two dice are thrown simultaneously, thus the number of event can be 62 = 36 because each die has 1 to 6 number on its faces.
This is independent event

b. Six pieces of paper, numbered 1 through 6, are in a bag, Two pieces of paper are selected one at a time without replacement.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 24
Answer:
P = Number of outcomes that satisfy the requirements/Total number of possible outcomes
When we pick up any paper the probability result is equal of 1/6
This is dependent event

Exploration 2

Work with a partner:

a. In Exploration 1(a), experimentally estimate the probability that the sum of the two numbers rolled is 7. Describe your experiment.
Answer:

(b). In Exploration 1 (b), experimentally estimate the probability that the sum of the two numbers selected is 7. Describe your experiment.
Answer:

Exploration 3

Finding Theoretical Probabilities

Work with a partner:
a. In Exploration 1(a), find the theoretical probability that the sum of the two numbers rolled is 7. Then compare your answer with the experimental probability you found in Exploration 2(a).
Answer:
For each of the possible outcomes add the numbers on the two dice and count how many times this sum is 7. If you do so you will find that the sum is 7 for 6 of the possible outcomes. Thus the sum is a 7 in 6 of the 36 outcomes and hence the probability of rolling a 7 is 6/36 = 1/6.

b. In Exploration 1(b). find the theoretical probability that the sum of the two numbers selected is 7. Then compare your answer with the experimental probability you found in Exploration 2(b).
Answer:

C. Compare the probabilities you obtained in parts (a) and (b).
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you determine whether two events are independent or dependent?
Answer:
Two events A and B are said to be independent if the fact that one event has occurred does not affect the probability that the other event will occur.
If whether or not one event occurs does affect the probability that the other event will occur, then the two events are said to be dependent.

Question 5.
Determine whether the events are independent or dependent. Explain your reasoning.
a. You roil a 4 on a six-sided die and spin red on a spinner.
Answer: Independent

b. Your teacher chooses a student to lead a group. chooses another student to lead a second group. and chooses a third student to lead a third group.
Answer: Dependent

Lesson 12.2 Independent and Dependent Events

Monitoring progress

Question 1.
In Example 1, determine whether guessing Question 1 incorrectly and guessing Question 2 correctly are independent events.
Answer:

Question 2.
In Example 2, determine whether randomly selecting a girl first and randomly selecting a boy second are independent events.
Answer:

Question 3.
In Example 3, what is the probability that you spin an even number and then an odd number?
Answer:

Question 4.
In Example 4, what is the probability that both hills are $1 hills?
Answer:

Question 5.
In Example 5, what is the probability that none of the cards drawn are hearts when (a) you replace each card, and (b) you do not replace each card? Compare the probabilities.
Answer:
(a) you replace each card,
P(A and B and C) = P(A) P(B) P(C)
= 13/52 . 13/52 . 13/52 = 1/4 . 1/4 . 1/4 = 1/64 = 0.016

Question 6.
In Example 6, find (a) the probability that a non-defective part “passes” and (b) the probability that a defective part “fails.”
Answer:
(a) the probability that a non-defective part “passes”
P(P/D) = 3/39 = 1/13 = 0.077
(b) the probability that a defective part “fails.”
P(F/N) = 11/461 = 0.024

Question 7.
At a coffee shop. 80% of customers order coffee. Only 15% of customers order coffee and a bagel. What is the probability that a customer who orders coffee also orders a bagel?
Answer:
A: Customer order coffee
B: Customer order a bagel
P(B/A) = P(A and B)/P(A)
80% of customers order coffee and Only 15% of customers order coffee and a bagel.
P(A) = 80/100 = 0.8
P(A and B) = 15/100 = 0.15
P(B/A) = P(A and B)/P(A) = 0.15/0.8 = 0.1875 = 18.75%

Exercise 12.2 Independent and Dependent Events

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Explain the difference between dependent events and independent events, and give an example of each.
Answer:
When two events are dependent, the occurrence of one event affects the other. When two events are independent, the occurence of one event does not affect the other.

Question 2.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
The probability that event B will occur given that event A has occurred is called the _____________ of B given A and is written as _____________ .
Answer:
The probability that event B will occur given that event A has occurred is called the conditional probability of B given A and is written as P(B/A).

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6, tell whether the events are independent or dependent. Explain your reasoning.

Question 3.
A box of granola bars contains an assortment of flavors. You randomly choose a granola bar and eat it. Then you randomly choose another bar.
Event A: You choose a coconut almond bar first.
Event B: You choose a cranberry almond bar second.
Answer:
The two events, which considered in this experiment are an example of dependent events.

Question 4.
You roll a six-sided die and flip a coin.
Event A: You get a 4 when rolling the die.
Event B: You get tails when flipping the coin
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 25
Answer: Independent, the events do not influence each other.

Question 5.
Your MP3 player contains hip-hop and rock songs. You randomly choose a song. Then you randomly choose another song without repeating song choices.
Event A: You choose a hip-hop song first.
Event B: You choose a rock song second.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 26
Answer:
The events are dependent because the occurrence of event A affects the occurrence of event B.

Question 6.
There are 22 novels of various genres on a shell. You randomly choose a novel and put it back. Then you randomly choose another novel.
Event A: You choose a mystery novel.
Event B: You choose a science fiction novel.
Answer:
The 1st book chosen is put back so the second book picked has the same probability of being chosen a if the 1st book was never chosen to begin with the events are independent.

In Exercises 7 – 10. determine whether the events are independent.

Question 7.
You play a game that involves spinning a wheel. Each section of the wheel shown has the same area. Use a sample space to determine whether randomly spinning blue and then green are independent events.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 28
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 7

Question 8.
You have one red apple and three green apples in a bowl. You randomly select one apple to eat now and another apple for your lunch. Use a sample space to determine whether randomly selecting a green apple first and randomly selecting a green apple second are independent events.
Answer:
Let R represent the red apple.
Let G1, G2, G3 represent the 3 green apples.
P(G first) = P(green apple first) = 9/12 = 3/4 = 0.75
P(G second) = P(green apple second) = 9/12 = 3/4 = 0.75
P(green apple first and second) = 6/12 = 1/2 = 0.5
Events are not independent.

Question 9.
A student is taking a multiple-choice test where each question has four choices. The student randomly guesses the answers to the five-question test. Use a sample space to determine whether guessing Question 1 correctly and Question 2 correctly are independent events.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 9

Question 10.
A vase contains four white roses and one red rose. You randomly select two roses to take home. Use a sample space to determine whether randomly selecting a white rose first and randomly selecting a white rose second are independent events.
Answer:
P(A and B) = P(A) and P(B)
A = {First randomly selected roses is white}
B = {Second randomly selected roses is white}
P(A) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes = 4/5
P(B) = 4/5
P(A) . P(B) = 4/5 . 4/5 = 16/25

Question 11.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You play a game that involves spinning the money wheel shown. You spin the wheel twice. Find the probability that you get more than $500 on your first spin and then go bankrupt on your second spin.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 28
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 11

Question 12.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You play a game that involves drawing two numbers from a hat. There are 25 pieces of paper numbered from 1 to 25 in the hat. Each number is replaced after it is drawn. Find the probability that you will draw the 3 on your first draw and a number greater than 10 on your second draw.
Answer:
P(A) = 1/25
P(B) = 15/25
P(A and B) = P(A) . P(B)
= 1/25 . 15/25 = 3/125
Thus P(A and B) = 3/125

Question 13.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A drawer contains 12 white socks and 8 black socks. You randomly choose 1 sock and do not replace it. Then you randomly choose another sock. Find the probability that both events A and B will occur.
Event A: The first sock is white.
Event B: The second sock is white.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 13

Question 14.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A word game has 100 tiles. 98 of which are letters and 2 of which are blank. The numbers of tiles of each letter are shown. You randomly draw 1 tile, set it aside, and then randomly draw another tile. Find the probability that both events A and B will occur.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 29
Answer:
P(A) = 56/100 = 0.56
P(B) = 42/(100 – 1) = 0.424
P(A) . P(B) = 0.56 × 0.424 = 0.2376

Question 15.
ERROR ANALYSIS
Events A and B are independent. Describe and correct the error in finding P(A and B).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 30
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 15

Question 16.
ERROR ANALYSIS
A shelf contains 3 fashion magazines and 4 health magazines. You randomly choose one to read, set it aside, and randomly choose another for your friend to read. Describe and correct the error in finding the probability that both events A and B occur.
Event A: The first magazine is fashion.
Event B: The second magazine is health.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 31
Answer:
P(A) = 3/7
P(B/A) = 4/(7 – 1) = 4/6
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B/A)
P(A and B) = 3/7 × 4/6 = 2/7

Question 17.
NUMBER SENSE
Events A and B are independent. Suppose P(B) = 0.4 and P(A and B) = 0.13. Find P(A).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 17

Question 18.
NUMBER SENSE
Events A and B are dependent. Suppose P(B/A) = 0.6 and P(A and B) = 0.15. Find P(A).
Answer:
P(A) = x
P(B/A) = 0.6
P(A and B) = 0.15
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B/A)
0.15 = x × 0.6
x = 0.15/0.6
x = 0.25

Question 19.
ANALYZING RELATIONSHIPS
You randomly select three cards from a standard deck of 52 playing cards. What is the probability that all three cards are face cards when (a) you replace each card before selecting the next card, and (b) you do not replace each card before selecting the next card? Compare the probabilities.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 19

Question 20.
A bag contains 9 red marbles. 4 blue marbles, and 7 yellow marbles. You randomly select three marbles from the hag. what is the probability that all three marbles are red when (a) you replace each marble before selecting the next marble, and (b) you do not replace each marble before selecting the next marble? Compare the probabilities.
Answer:
a. There are a total of 9 + 4 + 7= 20 marbles.
Therefore, the probability of selecting a red marble in each attempt is 9/20 when the marble is replaced.
Therefore the probability of selecting a red marble in each of 3 of the attempt is
9/20 × 9/20 × 9/20 = 0.09125
The replacement makes these independent events.
b. There are total of 9 + 4 + 7 = 20 marbles.
The probability of selecting a red marble in the first attempt is 9/20, second attempt is 8/19 and the third attempt is 7/18 when the marbles are not replaced.
Therefore the probability of selecting a red marble in each of 3 of the attempts is 9/20 × 8/19 × 7/18 = 0.0737

Question 21.
ATTEND TO PRECISION
The table shows the number of species in the United States listed as endangered and threatened. Find (a) the probability that a randomly selected endangered species is a bird, and (b) the probability that a randomly selected mammal is endangered.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 32
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 21

Question 22.
ATTEND TO PRECISION
The table shows the number of tropical cyclones that formed during the hurricane seasons over a 12-year period. Find (a) the probability to predict whether a Future tropical cyclone in the Northern Hemisphere is a hurricane, and (b) the probability to predict whether a hurricane is in the Southern Hemisphere.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 33
Answer:

Question 23.
PROBLEM SOLVING
At a school, 43% of students attend the homecoming football game. Only 23% of students go to the game and the homecoming dance. What is the probability that a student who attends the football game also attends the dance?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 23

Question 24.
PROBLEM SOLVING
At a gas station. 84% of customers buy gasoline. Only 5% of customers buy gasoline and a beverage. What is the probability that a customer who buys gasoline also buys a beverage?
Answer:
Given,
P(A) = 84% = 0.84
P(A and B) = 5% = 0.05
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B/A)
P(B/A) = 0.05/0.84
P(B/A) = 0.0595

Question 25.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and 19 other students volunteer to present the “Best Teacher” award at a school banquet. One student volunteer will be chosen to present the award. Each student worked at least 1 hour in preparation for the banquet. You worked for 4 hours, and the group worked a combined total of 45 hours. For each situation, describe a process that gives you a “fair” chance to be chosen. and find the probability that you are chosen.
a. “Fair” means equally likely.
b. “Fair” means proportional to the number of hours each student worked in preparation.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 25

Question 26.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
A bag contains one red marble and one blue marble. The diagrams show the possible outcomes of randomly choosing two marbles using different methods. For each method. determine whether the marbles were selected with or without replacement.
a.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 34
Answer:

b.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 35
Answer:

Question 27.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
A meteorologist claims that there is a 70% chance of rain. When it rains. there is a 75% chance that your softball game will be rescheduled. Your friend believes the game is more likely to be rescheduled than played. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
The chance that the game will be rescheduled is (0.7)(0.75) = 0.525
which is 52.5 percent
making it greater than 50 percent.

Question 28.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Two six-sided dice are rolled once. Events A and B are represented by the diagram. Describe each event. Are the two events dependent or independent? Justify your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 36
Answer:

Question 29.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A football team is losing by 14 points near the end of a game. The team scores two touchdowns (worth 6 points each) before the end of the game. After each touchdown, the coach must decide whether to go for 1 point with a kick (which is successful 99% of the time) or 2 points with a run or pass (which is successful 45% of the time).
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 37
a. If the team goes for 1 point after each touchdown, what is the probability that the team wins? loses? ties?
b. If the team goes for 2 points after each touchdown. what is the probability that the team wins? loses? ties?
c. Can you develop a strategy so that the coach’s team has a probability of winning the game that is greater than the probability of losing? If so, explain your strategy and calculate the probabilities of winning and losing the game.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 29

Question 30.
ABSTRACT REASONING
Assume that A and B are independent events.
a. Explain why P(B) = P(B/A) and P(A) = P(A/B).
Answer:
P(B) = P(B/A)
P(B) = P(A) . P(B/A)
P(A) = P(A/B).
P(A) = P(B) . P(A/B)

b. Can P(A and B) also be defined as P(B) • P(A/B)? Justify your reasoning.
Answer:

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Solve the equation. Check your solution.

Question 31.
\(\frac{9}{10}\) x = 0.18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 31

Question 32.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)x + 0.5x = 1.5
Answer:
Given,
\(\frac{1}{4}\)x + 0.5x = 1.5
0.25x + 0.50x = 1.5
0.75x = 1.5
x = 1.5/0.75
x = 2

Question 33.
0.3x – \(\frac{3}{5}\)x + 1.6 = 1.555
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.2 Qu 33

12.3 Two-Way Tables and Probability

Exploration 1

Completing and Using a Two-Way Table

Work with a partner: A two-way table displays the same information as a Venn diagram. In a two-way table, one category is represented by the rows and the other category is represented by the columns.

The Venn diagram shows the results of a survey in which 80 students were asked whether they play a musical instrument and whether they speak a foreign language. Use the Venn diagram to complete the two-way table. Then use the two-way table to answer each question.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 38
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 39
a. How many students play an instrument?
Answer: 41

b. How many students speak a foreign language?
Answer: 46

c. How many students play an instrument and speak a foreign language?
Answer: 16

d. How many students do not play an instrument and do not speak a foreign language?
Answer: 9

e. How many students play an instrument and do not speak a foreign language?
Answer: 25

Exploration 2

Two – Way Tables and Probability

Work with a partner. In Exploration 1, one student is selected at random from the 80 students who took the survey. Find the probability that the student
a. plays an instrument.
Answer: 41/80

b. speaks a foreign language.
Answer: 46/80

c. plays an instrument and speaks a foreign language.
Answer: 16/80

d. does not play an instrument and does not speak a foreign language.
Answer: 9/80

e. plays an instrument and does not speak a foreign language.
Answer:

Exploration 3

Conducting a Survey

Work with your class. Conduct a survey of the students in your class. Choose two categories that are different from those given in Explorations 1 and 2. Then summarize the results in both a Venn diagram and a two-way table. Discuss the results.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
To be proficient in math, you need to identify important quantities in a practical situation and map their relationships using such tools as diagrams and two-way tables.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you construct and interpret a two-way table?
Answer:
Identify the variables. There are two variables of interest here: the commercial viewed and opinion.
Determine the possible values of each variable. For the two variables, we can identify the following possible values
Set up the table
Fill in the frequencies

Question 5.
How can you use a two-way table to determine probabilities?
Answer:

Lesson 12.3 Two-Way Tables and Probability

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
You randomly survey students about whether they are in favor of planting a community garden at school. of 96 boys surveyed, 61 are in favor. 0f 88 girls surveyed, 17 are against. Organize the results in a two-way table. Then find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Answer:
In order to find out how many boys are against you do 96 – 61. In order to find out how many girls are in favor you do 88 – 17.
In order to find the probability you make a proportion. It will be:
P/100 = number of girls against/total number of students
17/184 = p/100
17 × 100 = 184p
1700 = 184p
p = 9.23

Question 2.
Use the survey results in Monitoring Progress Question 1 to make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Answer:

Question 3.
Use the survey results in Example 1 to make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the column totals. Interpret the conditional relative frequencies in the context of the problem.
Answer:

Question 4.
Use the survey results in Monitoring Progress Question 1 to make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the row totals. Interpret the conditional relative frequencies in the context of the problem.
Answer:

Question 5.
In Example 4, what is the probability that a randomly selected customer who is located in Santa Monica will not recommend the provider to a friend?
Answer:

Question 6.
In Example 4, determine whether recommending the provider to a friend and living in Santa Monica are independent events. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

Question 7.
A manager is assessing three employees in order to offer one of them a promotion. Over a period of time, the manager records whether the employees meet or exceed expectations on their assigned tasks. The table shows the managers results. Which employee should be offered the promotion? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 40
Answer:

Exercise 12.3 Two-Way Tables and Probability

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
A(n) ______________ displays data collected from the same source that belongs to two different categories.
Answer:
A two-way table displays data collected from the same source that belongs to two different categories.

Question 2.
WRITING
Compare the definitions of joint relative frequency, marginal relative frequency, and conditional relative frequency.
Answer:
Joint relative frequency: joint relative frequency is the ratio of a frequency that is not in the total row or the total column to the total number of values.
Marginal relative frequency: marginal relative frequency is the sum of the joint relative frequencies in a given row or column.
Conditional relative frequency: It is the ratio of joint relative frequency to the marginal relative frequency.

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 and 4, complete the two-way table.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 41
Answer:
Number of students who have passed the exam is 50 – 10 = 40
Of those 40 students, 6 did not study for the exam,
Number of the students who studied and have passed the exam is 40 – 6 = 34
Number of the students who did not study and did not pass the exam is 10 – 4 = 6
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 42
Answer:
Number of students who said no is 49 – 7 = 42
Total number of students is 56 + 42 = 98
Total number of people is 98 + 10 = 108
Out of the total number of people, 49 of them said no,
Total number of people who said yes is 108 – 49 = 59
Number of teachers who said yes is 59 – 56 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Geometry-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Probability-42 (1)

Question 5.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
You survey 171 males and 180 females at Grand Central Station in New York City. Of those, 132 males and 151 females wash their hands after using the public rest rooms. Organize these results in a two-way table. Then find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 43
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 5.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 5.2

Question 6.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A survey asks 60 teachers and 48 parents whether school uniforms reduce distractions in school. Of those, 49 teachers and 18 parents say uniforms reduce distractions in school, Organize these results in a two-way table. Then find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Answer:
Given,
A survey asks 60 teachers and 48 parents whether school uniforms reduce distractions in school. Of those, 49 teachers and 18 parents say uniforms reduce distractions in school
Number of teacher who said no is 60 – 49 = 11
Number of parents who said no = 48 – 18 = 30
Total number of people who said yes = 49 + 18 = 67
Total number of people who said no = 11 + 30 = 41
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_15

USING STRUCTURE
In Exercises 7 and 8, use the two-way table to create a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 44
Answer:
P1,1 = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= 11/231 = 0.0476
P2,1 = 24/231 = 0.1039
P1,2 = 104/231 = 0.4502
P2,2 = 92/231 = 0.3983
The marginal relative frequencies we find as the sum of each row and each column.
P(A randomly chosen person is male) = 115/231 = 0.4978
P(A randomly chosen person is female) = 116/231 = 0.5022
P(A randomly chosen person have left dominant hand) = 35/231 = 0.1515
P(A randomly chosen person have left dominant hand) = 196/231 = 0.8484
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 45
Answer:
P1,1 = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= 62/410 = 0.1513
The marginal relative frequencies we find as the sum of each row and each column.
P(A randomly chosen person is male) = 377/410 = 0.9195
P(A randomly chosen person is female) = 33/410 = 0.0805

Question 9.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Use the survey results from Exercise 5 to make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 9

Question 10.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
In a survey, 49 people received a flu vaccine before the flu season and 63 people did not receive the vaccine. Of those who receive the flu vaccine, 16 people got the flu. Of those who did not receive the vaccine, 17 got the flu. Make a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 46
Answer:
We see that the total no. of people who received the vaccine is 49, of which 16 got a fly.
Number of people who received the vaccine and did not get a fly is 49 – 16 = 33
Number of people who did not received the vaccine and did not get a fly is 63 – 17 = 46
Total number of people who got a fly is 16 + 17 = 33
Total Number of people who did not get a fly is 33 + 46 = 79
We also know that the total number of people who were surveyed is 49 + 63 = 112
P1,1 = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= 16/112 = 0.1428
The marginal relative frequencies we find as the sum of each row and each column.
P(A randomly chosen person got a fly) = 33/112 = 0.2946
P(A randomly chosen person did not get a fly) = 79/112 = 0.7053

Question 11.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A survey finds that 110 people ate breakfast and 30 people skipped breakfast. Of those who ate breakfast. 10 people felt tired. Of those who skipped breakfast. 10 people felt tired. Make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the breakfast totals.
Answer:
Given,
A survey finds that 110 people ate breakfast and 30 people skipped breakfast.
Of those who ate breakfast. 10 people felt tired. Of those who skipped breakfast. 10 people felt tired.
Number of people who ate breakfast and not tired is 110 – 10 = 100
Number of people who did not eat breakfast and not tired is 30 – 10 = 20
Total number of people who felt tired is 10 + 10 = 20
Total number of people who did not get tired is 100 + 20 = 120
120 +20 = 140
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 11

Question 12.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Use the survey results from Exercise 10 to make a two-way table that shows the conditional relative frequencies based on the flu vaccine totals.
Answer:

Question 13.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Three different local hospitals in New York surveyed their patients. The survey asked whether the patients physician communicated efficiently. The results, given as joint relative frequencies. are shown in the two-way table.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 47
a. What is the probability that a randomly selected patient located in Saratoga was satisfied with the communication of the physician?
b. What is the probability that a randomly selected patient who was not satisfied with the physician’s communication is located in Glens Falls?
c. Determine whether being satisfied with the Communication of the physician and living in Saratoga are independent events.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 13

Question 14.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A researcher surveys a random sample of high school students in seven states. The survey asks whether students plan to stay in their home state after graduation. The results, given as joint relative frequencies, are shown in the two-way table.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 48
a. What is the probability that a randomly selected student who lives in Nebraska plans to stay in his or her home state after graduation?
Answer:
In this case we consider a event A = {arandomly chosen student lives in Nebraska}
B = {a randomly chosen student plans to stay in his or her home state after graduation}
P(A) = 0.044 + 0.4 = 0.444
P(B/A) = P(A and B)/P(A) = 0.044/0.444 = 0.099
About 1% students who lives Nebraska plans to stay in his or her home state after graduation.

b. What is the probability that a randomly selected student who does not plan to stay in his or her home state after graduation lives in North Carolina?
Answer:
C = {a randomly chosen student does not plan to stay in his or her home state after graduation}
D = {a randomly chosen student lives in North Carolina}
P(C) = 0.4 + 0.193 + 0.256 = 0.849
P(D/C) = P(C and D)/P(C)
= 0.193/0.849 = 0.227
Therefore about 22.7% students who does not plan to stay in his or her home state after graduation lives in North Carolina.

c. Determine whether planning to stay in their home state and living in Nebraska are independent events.
Answer:
P(B/A) = 0.099
P(B) = 0.044 + 0.05
1 + 0.056 = 0.151
P(B/A) ≠ P(B)
This events are independent.

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 15 and 16, describe and correct the error in finding the given conditional probability.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 49

Question 15.
P(yes|Tokyo)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 50
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 15

Question 16.
P(London|No)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 51
Answer:
P(A and B) = P(A)P(B/A)
P(A) = 0.341 + 0.112+ 0.191 = 0.644
P(B/A) = P(A and B)/P(A) = 0.112/0.644 = 0.1739
In the denominator the probability P(B) = 0.248 is used instead of P(A), where P(B) is probability that a randomly chosen person live in London.

Question 17.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You want to find the quickest route to school. You map out three routes. Before school, you randomly select a route and record whether you are late or on time. The table shows your findings. Assuming you leave at the same time each morning, which route should you use? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 52
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 17.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 17.2

Question 18.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A teacher is assessing three groups of students in order to offer one group a prize. Over a period of time, the teacher records whether the groups meet or exceed expectations on their assigned tasks. The table shows the teacher’s results. Which group should be awarded the prize? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 53
Answer: Group 1 exceeded expectations 12 out of 16 times or 75% of the time.

Question 19.
OPEN-ENDED
Create and conduct a survey in your class. Organize the results in a two-way table. Then create a two-way table that shows the joint and marginal frequencies.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 19

Question 20.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
A research group surveys parents and Coaches of high school students about whether competitive sports are important in school. The two-way table shows the results of the survey.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 54
a. What does 120 represent?
Answer: 120 parents said that competitive sports are not important in school.

b. What does 1336 represent?
Answer: 1336 is the sum of parents and coaches who agree that competitive sports are important in school.

c. What does 1501 represent?
Answer: 1501 is the total number of people surveyed. Here this is the sum of the parents and the coaches who participated in the survey.

Question 21.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
Your friend uses the table below to determine which workout routine is the best. Your friend decides that Routine B is the best option because it has the fewest tally marks in the “Docs Not Reach Goal” column. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 55
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 21

Question 22.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
A survey asks students whether they prefer math class or science class. Of the 150 male students surveyed, 62% prefer math class over science class. Of the female students surveyed, 74% prefer math. Construct a two-way table to show the number of students in each category if 350 students were surveyed.
Answer:
survey asks students whether they prefer math class or science class. Of the 150 male students surveyed, 62% prefer math class over science class.
62% = 0.62
0.62 = P(Math/Male)
= P(Math and Male)/P(Male)
= Number of male students who prefer math/150
Number of male students who prefer math = 0.62 × 150 = 93
0.74 = P(Math/Female)
= P(Math and Female)/P(Female)
= Number of female students who prefer math/200
Number of female students who prefer math = 0.74 × 200 = 148
So, the total number of students who prefer math class is 148 + 93 = 241
Number of male students who prefer science class = 150 -93 = 57
Number of female students who prefer science class = 200 – 148 = 52
Number of students who prefer science class = 57 + 52 = 109
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 probability img_16

Question 23.
MULTIPLE REPRESENTATIONS
Use the Venn diagram to construct a two-way table. Then use your table to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 56
a. What is the probability that a randomly selected person does not own either pet?
b. What is the probability that a randomly selected person who owns a dog also owns a cat?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 23

Question 24.
WRITING
Compare two-way tables and Venn diagrams. Then describe the advantages and disadvantages of each.
Answer:

Question 25.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A company creates a new snack, N, and tests it against its current leader, L. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 57
The company is deciding whether it should try to improve the snack before marketing it, and to whom the snack should be marketed. Use probability to explain the decisions the company should make when the total size of the snack’s market is expected to (a) change very little, and (b) expand very rapidly.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 25

Question 26.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Baye’s Theorem is given by
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 102
Use a two-way table to write an example of Baye’s Theorem.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 probability img_17
P(Cat owner) = 61/210 = 0.29
P(Dog owner) = 93/210 = 0.442
P(Cat Owner/Dog owner) = P(Dog owner and cat owner)/P(Dog owner) = 0.387
P(Dog owner/Cat owner) = P(Cat owner/Dog owner)P(Dog owner)/P(Cat owner)
= 0.387 × 0.442/0.29
= 0.5898

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Draw a Venn diagram of the sets described.

Question 27.
Of the positive integers less than 15, set A consists of the factors of 15 and set B consists of all odd numbers.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 27

Question 28.
Of the positive integers less than 14, set A consists of all prime numbers and set B consists of all even numbers.
Answer:
Set A = {2. 3, 5, 7, 11, 13}
Set B = {2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12}
It can be seen that here A and B are overlapping sets.
BIM Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_17

Question 29.
Of the positive integers less than 24, set A consists of the multiples of 2 and set B consists of all the multiples of 3.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.3 Qu 29

12.1 – 12.3 Quiz

Question 1.
You randomly draw a marble out of a bag containing 8 green marbles, 4 blue marbles 12 yellow marbles, and 10 red marbles. Find the probability of drawing a marble that is not yellow.
Answer:
Given,
You randomly draw a marble out of a bag containing 8 green marbles, 4 blue marbles 12 yellow marbles, and 10 red marbles.
Total number of outcomes here are 8 + 4 + 12 + 10 = 34
Thus the probability of obtaining a marble that is not yellow is (8 + 4 + 10)/34
= 22/34
= 11/17
= 0.647
= 64.7%
Thus the probability of obtaining a marble that is not yellow is 64.7%

Find P(\(\)(\bar{A}))

Question 2.
P(A) = 0.32
Answer:
P(\(\)(\bar{A}) = 1 – P(A)
1 – 0.32
= 0.68
P(\(\)(\bar{A}) = 0.68

Question 3.
P(A) = \(\frac{8}{9}\)
Answer:
P(\(\)(\bar{A}) = 1 – P(A)
1 – \(\frac{8}{9}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9}\)
P(\(\)(\bar{A}) = \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Question 4.
P(A) = 0.01
Answer:
P(\(\)(\bar{A}) = 1 – P(A)
1 – 0.01 = 0.99

Question 5.
You roll a six-sided die 30 times. A 5 is rolled 8 times. What is the theoretical probability of rolling a 5? What is the experimental probability of rolling a 5?
Answer:
Given,
You roll a six-sided die 30 times. A 5 is rolled 8 times.
The theoretical probability of rolling a 5 on a number cube is \(\frac{1}{6}\) while the experimental probability of rolling a 5 on a number cube is \(\frac{8}{30}\) = \(\frac{4}{15}\)

Question 6.
Events A and B are independent. Find the missing probability.
P(A) = 0.25
P(B) = ____
P(A and B) = 0.05
Answer:
Given,
P(A) = 0.25
P(A and B) = 0.05
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B)
P(B) = P(A and B)/P(A)
P(B) = 0.05/0.25 = 0.2
P(B) = 0.2

Question 7.
Events A and B are dependent. Find the missing probability.
P(A) = 0.6
P(B/A) = 0.2
P(A and B) = ____
Answer:
Given,
P(A) = 0.6
P(B/A) = 0.2
P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B/A)
P(A and B) = 0.6 × 0.2
= 0.12
P(A and B) = 0.12

Question 8.
Find the probability that a dart thrown at the circular target Shown will hit the given region.
Assume the dart is equally likely to hit any point inside the target.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 58
a. the center circle
Answer:
Total area of the given region is π × r² = π × 6² = 36π = 113.112 sq. units
Area of the center circle is π × r² = π × 2² = 4π sq. units.
Therefore the probability of hitting the center circle is 4π/36π = 1/9 = 0.11…

b. outside the square
Answer:
Area of the square is 6² = 36
So the region outside of it is equal to 36π – 36 = 77.112 sq. units
Thus the probability of hitting the region outside the square is 77.112/113.112 = 0.682

c. inside the square but outside the center circle
Answer:
Area of the center circle is π × r² = π × 2² = 4π sq. units.
Area of the square is 6² = 36
Thus the probability of hitting the region outside the center circle but inside the square is 36 – 4π = 23.432 sq. units
Thus the probability of hitting the region is 23.432/113.112 = 0.207

Question 9.
A survey asks 13-year-old and 15-year-old students about their eating habits. Four hundred students are surveyed, 100 male students and 100 female students from each age group. The bar graph shows the number of students who said they eat fruit every day.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answer Key Chapter 12 Probability 59

a. Find the probability that a female student, chosen at random from the students surveyed, eats fruit every day.
Answer:
Total number of females who eat a fruit everyday are 61 + 58 = 119
Therefore the probability of randomly choosing a female who eats a fruit everyday is 119/400= 0.2975

b. Find the probability that a 15 – year – old student. chosen at random from the students surveyed, eats fruit every day.
Answer:
Total number of 15 year old student who eat a fruit everyday are 53 + 58 = 111
Therefore the probability of randomly choosing a 15 year old student who eats a fruit everyday is 111/200 = 0.555

Question 10.
There are 14 boys and 18 girls in a class. The teacher allows the students to vote whether they want to take a test on Friday or on Monday. A total of 6 boys and 10 girls vote to take the test on Friday. Organize the information in a two-way table. Then find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Answer:
Given,
There are 14 boys and 18 girls in a class. The teacher allows the students to vote whether they want to take a test on Friday or on Monday.
14 + 18 = 32
Number of boys who vote to take the test on Monday is 14 – 6 = 8
Number of girls who vote to take the test on monday is 18 – 10 = 8
A total of 6 boys and 10 girls vote to take the test on Friday.
The total number of students who take the test on Friday is 10 + 6 = 16
The total number of students who vote to take the test on Friday is 8 + 8 = 16
BIM Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_14

Question 11.
Three schools compete in a cross country invitational. Of the 15 athletes on your team. 9 achieve their goal times. Of the 20 athletes on the home team. 6 achieve their goal times. On your rival’s team, 8 of the 13 athletes achieve their goal times. Organize the information in a two-way table. Then determine the probability that a randomly elected runner who achieves his or her goal time is from your school.
Answer:
Three schools compete in a cross country invitational. Of the 15 athletes on your team. 9 achieve their goal times.
Number of runners in your team who do not achieve their goal team is 15 – 9 = 6
Number of runners in home team who do not achieve their goal team is 20 – 6 = 14
Number of runners in rival’s team who do not achieve their goal team is 13 – 8 = 5
Total number of runners who achieve their goal team is 9 + 6 + 8 = 23
Total number of runners who do not achieve their goal team is 6 + 14 + 5 = 25
The total number of rubbers who was surveyed is 23 + 25 = 48
P = Your team ans achieve their goal team/P(Archive their goal team)
P = 9/23
P = 0.39

12.4 Probability of Disjoint and Overlapping Events

Exploration 1

Work with a partner: A six-sided die is rolled. Draw a Venn diagram that relates the two events. Then decide whether the cents are disjoint or overlapping.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
To be proficient in math, you need to map the relationships between important quantities in a practical situation using such tools as diagrams.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 60
a. Event A: The result is an even number.
Event B: The result is a prime number.
Answer:
Bigideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability img_13

b. Event A: The result is 2 or 4.
Event B: The result is an odd number
Answer:
Bigideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability img_14

Exploration 2

Finding the Probability that Two Events Occur

Work with a partner: A six-sided die is roiled. For each pair of events. find (a) P(A), (b) P(B). (C) P(A) and (B). and (d) P(A or B).
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 61
a. Event A: The result is an even number.
Event B: The result is a Prime number.
Answer:
P(A) = \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
P(B) = \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
P(A and B) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
P(A or B) = \(\frac{5}{6}\)

b. Event A: The result is 2 or 4.
Event B: The result is an odd number.
Answer:
P(A) = \(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
P(B) = \(\frac{3}{6}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
P(A and B) = 0
P(A or B) = \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Exploration 3

Discovering Probability Formulas

Work with a partner:
a. In general, if event A and event B arc disjoint, then what is the probability that event A or event B will occur? Use a Venn diagram to justify your conclusion.
Answer:
If event A and B are disjoint, there are no common outcomes.
So we add the probabilities that each event occurs:
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Chapter 12 Probability Answer Key img_11

b. In general, if event A and event B are overlapping, then what is the probability that event A or event B will occur? Use a Venn diagram to justify your conclusion.
Answer:
If event A and event B are overlapping, there are common outcomes.
So, we add the probabilities that each event occurs then subtract the probability of the common outcomes.
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Chapter 12 Probability Answer Key img_12

c. Conduct an experiment using a six-sided die. Roll the die 50 times and record the results. Then use the results to find the probabilities described in Exploration 2. How closely do your experimental probabilities compare to the theoretical probabilities you found in Exploration 2?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Chapter 12 Probability Answer Key img_12.1
a. P(A) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 50%
P(A) = \(\frac{21}{50}\) = 42%
P(B) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 50%
P(B) = \(\frac{32}{50}\) = 64%
P(A and B) = \(\frac{1}{6}\) ≈ 16.7%
P(A and B) = \(\frac{9}{50}\) ≈ 18%
P(A or B) = \(\frac{5}{6}\) ≈ 83.3%
P(A or B) = \(\frac{44}{50}\) ≈ 88%
P(A) = \(\frac{1}{3}\) ≈ 33.3%
P(A) = \(\frac{17}{50}\) = 34%
P(B) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 50%
P(B) = \(\frac{29}{50}\) = 58%
P(A and B) = 0 = 0%
P(A and B) = \(\frac{0}{50}\) = 0%
P(A or B) = \(\frac{5}{6}\) ≈ 83.3%
P(A or B) = \(\frac{46}{50}\) = 92%

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can you find probabilities of disjoint and overlapping events?
Answer:
If A and B are disjoint events, then the probability of A or B is P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B). If two events A and B are overlapping, then the outcomes in the intersection of A and B are counted twice when P(A) and P(B) are added.
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)

Question 5.
Give examples of disjoint events and overlapping events that do not involve dice.
Answer:

a. Event A: The result is an even number.
Event B: The result is a prime number.
Answer:
Bigideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability img_13

b. Event A: The result is 2 or 4.
Event B: The result is an odd number
Answer:
Bigideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability img_14

Lesson 12.4 Probability of Disjoint and Overlapping Events

Monitoring Progress

A card is randomly selected from a standard deck of 52 playing cards. Find the probability of the event.

Question 1.
selecting an ace or an 8
Answer:
A: Selecting an ace
B: You select 8
We know that A has 4 outcomes and B also has 4 outcomes.
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
= 4/52 + 4/52
= 8/52
= 2/13 ≈ 0.15

Question 2.
selecting a 10 or a diamond
Answer:
A: Selecting a 10
B: You select diamond
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
= 4/52 + 13/52 – 1/52
= 16/52
= 4/13

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
In Example 3, suppose 32 seniors are in the band and 64 seniors are in the band or on the honor roll. What is the Probability that a randomly selected senior is both in the band and on the honor roll?
Answer:

Question 4.
In Example 4, what is the probability that the diagnosis is incorrect?
Answer:

Question 5.
A high school basketball team leads at halftime in 60% of the games in a season. The team wins 80% of the time when the have the halftime lead, but only 10% of the time when the do not. What is the probability that the team wins a particular game during the season?
Answer:
Given,
A high school basketball team leads at halftime in 60% of the games in a season. The team wins 80% of the time when the have the halftime lead, but only 10% of the time when the do not.
Let event A be team leads on the halftime and event B be win.
When A occurs, P(B) = 0.8
When A does not occur, P(B) = 0.1
P(B) = P(A and B) + P(\(\bar{A}\) and B)
P(A) . P(B | A) + P(\(\bar{A}\)) . P(B | \(\bar{A}\))
= 0.6 × 0.8 + 0.4 × 0.1
= 0.52

Exercise 12.4 Probability of Disjoint and Overlapping Events

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
WRITING
Are the events A and \(\bar{A}\) disjoint? Explain. Then give an example of a real-life event and its complement.
Answer:
Yes A and \(\bar{A}\) are disjoint events because they are the complement of one another and so can not occur together and hence the name disjoint.
Example:
We flip a coin.
So, A = (the head fell)
\(\bar{A}\) = {the tail falls} are disjoint events.

Question 2.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 62
How many outcomes are in the intersection of A and B?
Answer: There are 2 outcomes in the intersection of A and B.

How many outcomes are shared by both A and B?
Answer: 2 outcomes are shared by both A and B.

How many outcomes are in the union of A and B?
Answer: There are 4 + 2 + 3 = 9 outcomes in the union of A and B.

How many outcomes in B are also in A?
Answer: There are 2 outcomes in B that are also in A.

Monitoring progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6, events A and B are disjoint. Find P(A or B)

Question 3.
p(A) = 0.3, P(B) = 0.1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 3

Question 4.
p(A) = 0.55, P(B) = 0.2
Answer:
Given,
p(A) = 0.55, P(B) = 0.2
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
P(A or B) = 0.55 + 0.2 = 0.75

Question 5.
P(A) = \(\frac{1}{3}\), P(B) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 5

Question 6.
p(A) = \(\frac{2}{3}\), P(B) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Answer:
Given,
p(A) = \(\frac{2}{3}\), P(B) = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
P(A or B) = \(\frac{2}{3}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
P(A or B) = \(\frac{13}{15}\)

Question 7.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Your dart is equally likely to hit any point inside the board Shown. You throw a dart and pop a balloon. What is the probability that the balloon is red or blue?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 63
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 7

Question 8.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and your friend are among several candidates running for class president. You estimate that there is a 45% chance you will win and a 25% chance your friend will win. What is the probability that you or your friend win the election?
Answer:
Let A be the event of you winning the election and B be of your friend winning the election
P(A) = 45% = 0.45
P(B) = 25% = 0.25
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B)
P(A or B) = 0.45 + 0.25 = 0.70
Therefore the probability of you or your friend winning the election is 0.7

Question 9.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are performing an experiment to determine how well plants grow under different light sources. 0f the 30 Plants in the experiment, 12 receive visible light, 15 receive ultraviolet light, and 6 receive both visible and ultraviolet light. What is the probability that a plant in the experiment receives visible or ultraviolet light?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 9

Question 10.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Of 162 students honored at an academic awards banquet, 48 won awards for mathematics and 78 won awards for English. There are 14 students who won awards for both mathematics and English. A newspaper chooses a student at random for an interview. What is the probability that the student interviewed won an award for English or mathematics?
Answer:
Given,
There are 162 students honored at an academic awards banquet, 48 won awards for mathematics and 78 won awards for English.
There are 14 students who won awards for both mathematics and English. A newspaper chooses a student at random for an interview.
P(A) = 48/162
P(B) = 78/162
P(A and B) = 14/162
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
P(A or B) = 48/162 + 78/162 – 14/162
P(A or B) = 112/162 = 56/81 = 0.691

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 11 and 12, describe and correct the error in finding the probability of randomly drawing the given card from a standard deck of 52 playing cards.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 64
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 65
Answer:
These 2 events are overlapping events as there is 1 card that is both a club and 9, therefore write equation of P(A or B) for overlapping events
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
= 13/52 + 4/52 – 1/52
= 4/13

In Exercises 13 and 14, you roll a six-sided die. Find P(A or B).

Question 13.
Event A: Roll a 6.
Event B: Roll a prime number.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 13

Question 14.
Event A: Roll an odd number.
Event B: Roll a number less than 5.
Answer:
P(A) = 3/6
1, 3, 5 out of 6 possible outcomes
P(B) = 4/6
1, 2, 3, 4 out of 6 possible outcomes
P(A and B) = 2/6
3/4 + 4/6 – 2/6 = 5/6

Question 15.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A group of 40 trees in a forest are not growing properly. A botanist determines that 34 of the trees have a disease or are being damaged by insects, with 18 trees having a disease and 20 being damaged by insects. What is the probability that a randomly selected tree has both a disease and is being damaged by insects?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 66
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 15

Question 16.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A company paid overtime wages or hired temporary help during 9 months of the year. Overtime wages were paid during 7 months. and temporary help was hired during 4 months. At the end of the year, an auditor examines the accounting records and randomly selects one month to check the payroll. What is the probability that the auditor will select a month in which the company paid overtime wages and hired temporary help?
Answer:
P(A) = 7/12
P(B) = 4/12
P(A or B) = 9/12
P(A and B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A or B)
P(A and B) = 7/12 + 4/12 – 9/12
P(A and B) = 2/12 = 1/6
The probability of randomly selecting a month in which overtime was paid and temporary help was hired is 1/6 = 0.166…

Question 17.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
A company is focus testing a new type of fruit drink. The focus group is 47% male. 0f the responses, 40% of the males and 54% of the females said they would buy the fruit drink. What is the probability that a randomly selected person would buy the fruit drink?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 17

Question 18.
DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
The Redbirds trail the Bluebirds by one goal with 1 minute left in the hockey game. The Redbirds coach must decide whether to remove the goalie and add a frontline player. The probabilities of each team scoring are shown in the table.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 67
a. Find the probability that the Redbirds score and the Bluebirds do not score when the coach leaves the goalie in.
Answer:
Redbirds 10% x Bluebirds 90% = 9%

b. Find the probability that the Redbirds score and the Bluebirds do not score when the coach takes the goalie out.
Answer:
Redbirds 30% x Bluebirds 40% = 12%

c. Based on parts (a) and (b), what should the coach do?
Answer: Looks to be a 3% better chance to tie it up in B – pull the goalie

Question 19.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You can win concert tickets from a radio station if you are the first person to call when the song of the day is played. or if you are the first person to correctly answer the trivia question. The song of the day is announced at a random time between 7:00 and 7:30 A.M. The trivia question is asked at a random Lime between 7:15 and 7:45 A.M. You begin listening to the radio station at 7:20. Find the probability that you miss the announcement of the song of the day or the trivia question.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 19

Question 20.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Are events A and B disjoint events? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 68
Answer:
A and B are not disjoint events and in fact they are overlapping events with 1 overlapping outcome.
Disjoint events do not have any overlap and they are mutually exclusive from one another.

Question 21.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You take a bus from sour neighborhood to your school. The express bus arrives at your neighborhood at a random time between 7:30 and 7:36 AM. The local bus arrives at your neighborhood at a random time between 7:30 and 7:40 A.M. You arrive at the bus stop at 7:33 A.M. Find the probability that you missed both the express bus and the local bus.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Solutions Chapter 12 Probability 69
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 21

Question 22.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
Write a general rule for finding P(A or B or C) for (a) disjoint and (b) overlapping events A, B, and C.
Answer:
For 2 disjoint events, the equation becomes:
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B), based on this it can be said that the equation of P(A or B or C) will be
P(A or B or C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(C)
For 2 overlapping events, the equation becomes:
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
P(A or B or C) = P(A) + P(B) + P(C) – P(A and B) – P(A and C) – P(B and C) + P(A and B and C)

Question 23.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
A bag contains 40 cards numbered 1 through 40 that are either red or blue. A card is drawn at random and placed back in the bag. This is done four times. Two red cards are drawn. numbered 31 and 19, and two blue cards are drawn. numbered 22 and 7. Your friend concludes that red cards and even numbers must be mutually exclusive. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:
Your friend is incorrect because we do not know all the number of cards. Also, from the given data we do not know all colors for cards. Therefore we can not conclude that red cards and even numbers be mutually exclusive.

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Find the Product.

Question 24.
(n – 12)2
Answer:
We can solve the product by using the formula
(a – b)² = a² – 2ab + b²
(n – 12)2 = (n)² – 2(n)(12) + (12)²
n² – 24n + 144

Question 25.
(2x + 9)2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.4 Qu 25

Question 26.
(- 5z + 6)2
Answer:
(- 5z + 6)2 = (6 – 5z)2
We can solve the product by using the formula
(a – b)² = a² + 2ab + b²
(6 – 5z)2 = (6)² – 2(6)(5z) + (5z)²
36 – 24n + 25z²

Question 27.
(3a – 7b)2
Answer:
We can solve the product by using the formula
(a – b)² = a² + 2ab + b²
(3a – 7b)2 = (3a)² – 2(3a)(7b) + (7b)²
9a² – 42ab + 49b²

12.5 Permutations and Combinations

Exploration 1

Reading a Tree Diagram

Work with a partner. Two coins are flipped and the spinner is spun. The tree diagram shows the possible outcomes.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 71
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 72
a. How many outcomes are possible?
Answer:

b. List the possible outcomes.
Answer:

Exploration 2

Reading a Tree Diagram

Work with a partner: Consider the tree diagram below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 82
a. How many events are shown?
Answer:

b. What outcomes are possible for each event?
Answer:

c. How many outcomes are possible?
Answer:

d. List the possible outcomes.
Answer:

Exploration 3

Writing a Conjecture

Work with a partner:

a. Consider the following general problem: Event 1 can occur in in ways and event 2 can occur in n ways. Write a conjecture about the number of ways the two events can occur. Explain your reasoning.
CONSTRUCTING VIABLE ARGUMENTS
To be proficient in math,
you need to make conjectures and build a logical progression of statements to explore the truth of your conjectures.
Answer:

b. Use the conjecture you wrote in part (a) to write a conjecture about the number of ways more than two events can occur. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:

c. Use the results of Explorations 1(a) and 2(c) to verify your conjectures.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 4.
How can a tree diagram help you visualize the number of ways in which two or more events can occur?
Answer:

Question 5.
In Exploration 1, the spinner is spun a second time. How many outcomes are possible?
Answer:

Lesson 12.5 Permutations and Combinations

Monitoring Progress

Question 1.
In how many ways can you arrange the letters in the word HOUSE?
Answer:

Question 2.
In how many ways can you arrange 3 of the letters in the word MARCH?
Answer:

Question 3.
WHAT IF
In Example 2, suppose there are 8 horses in the race. In how many different ways can the horses finish first, second, and third? (Assume there are no ties.)
Answer:

Question 4.
WHAT IF?
In Example 3, suppose there are 14 floats in the parade. Find the probability that the soccer team is first and the chorus is second.
Answer:

Question 5.
Count the possible combinations of 3 letters chosen from the list A, B, C, D, E.
Answer:

Question 6.
WHAT IF?
In Example 5, suppose you can choose 3 side dishes out of the list of 8 side dishes. How many combinations are possible?
Answer:

Question 7.
WHAT IF?
In Example 6, suppose there are 20 photos in the collage. Find the probability that your photo and your friend’s photo are the 2 placed at the top of the page.
Answer:

Exercise 12.5 Permutations and Combinations

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
COMPLETE THE SENTENCE
An arrangement of objects in which order is important is called a(n) _________ .
Answer:
An arrangement of objects in which order is important is called a Permutation.

Question 2.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
\(\frac{7 !}{2 ! \cdot 5 !}\) 7C5 7C2 \(\frac{7 !}{(7-2) !}\)
Answer:
7C2 \(\frac{7 !}{(7-2) !}\) = \(\frac{7 !}{5!}\)
= 7C2
The expression \(\frac{7 !}{(7-2) !}\) does not belong with other three.

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 8, find the number of ways you can arrange (a) all of the letters and (b) 2 of the letters in the given word.

Question 3.
AT
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 3

Question 4.
TRY
Answer:
a. In this case, we have to find the number of permutations all of the letters in a given word that will consist of 3 letters.
Number of permutations = (1st place can be one of three letters) × (2nd can be one of two letters that is left) × (3rd can be one letter that is left)
= 3 . 2 . 1 = 6
Therefore we have 6 ways for arrange all of the letters in given word, that is TRY, TYR, YTR, YRT, RTY and RYT.
Now, we have to find the number of permutation 2 of the letters in a given word that will consists of 3 letters
Number of permutations = (1st place can be one of three letters) × (2nd can be one of two letters that is left)
= 3 . 2 = 6
We have 6 ways for arrange 2 of the letters in given word, tthat is TR, TY, YT, YR, RT and RY.

Question 5.
ROCK
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 5

Question 6.
WATER
Answer:
In this case, we have to find the number of permutation all of the letters in a given word that will consist of 5 letters.
Number of permutations = (1st can be one of 5 letters) × (2nd place can be one of 4 letters that is left) × (3rd can be one of 3 letters that is left) × (4th can be two letters that is left) × (5th can be one letter that is left)
= 5 .4 . 3 . 2 . 1 = 120
Thus we have 120 ways to arrange all of the letters in given word, that WATER, WATRE, WARTE,…, RETAW.
Number of permutations = (1st can be one of 5 letters) × (2nd place can be one of 4 letters that is left)
= 5 . 4
= 20
Thus we have 20 ways to arrange 2 of the letters in given word, that WA, WT, WR, WE …, ER, RE.

Question 7.
FAMILY
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 7

Question 8.
FLOWERS
Answer:
We have to find the number of permutation all of the letters in a given word that will consist of 7 letters.
Number of permutations = (1st place can be one of 7 letters) × (2nd place can be one of 6 letters that is left) × (3rd place can be one of 5 letters that is left) × (4th place can be one of 4 letters that is left) × (5th place can be one of 3 letters that is left) × (6th place can be one of 2 letters that is left) × (7th place can be one of 1 letters that is left)
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1 = 5040
Thus we have 5040 ways to arrange all of the letters in given word, that is FLOWERS, FLOWERS, FLOWSER… SREWOLF
Now we have to find the number of permutation 2 of the letters in a given word that will consist of 7 letters.
Number of permutations = (1st place can be one of 7 letters) × (2nd place can be one of 6 letters that is left)
= 7 . 6
= 42
Thus we have 42 ways to arrange all of the letters in given word, that is FL, FO, FW, FE…RS, RE.

In Exercises 9 – 16, evaluate the expression.

Question 9.
5P2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 9

Question 10.
7P3
Answer:
7P3 = \(\frac{7 !}{(7-3) !}\) = \(\frac{7 !}{4!}\)
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/4 . 3 . 2 . 1
= 7 . 6 . 5
= 210
7P3 = 210

Question 11.
9P1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 11

Question 12.
6P5
Answer:
6P5 = \(\frac{6 !}{(6-5) !}\) = \(\frac{6 !}{1!}\)
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/1
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2
= 720
6P5 = 720

Question 13.
8P6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 13

Question 14.
12P0
Answer:
12P0 = \(\frac{12 !}{(12-0) !}\)
= \(\frac{12 !}{12!}\)
= 1
12P0 = 1

Question 15.
30P2
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 15

Question 16.
25P5
Answer:
25P5 = \(\frac{25 !}{(25-5) !}\) = \(\frac{25 !}{20!}\)
= 25 . 24 . 23 . 22 . 21 . 20 . 19 . 18 . …. 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/20 . 19 . 18 . … 3 . 2 . 1
= 25 . 24 . 23 . 22 . 21
= 720
25P5 = 6375600

Question 17.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Eleven students are competing in an art contest. In how many different ways can the students finish first, second, and third?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 17

Question 18.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Six Friends go to a movie theater. In how many different ways can they sit together in a row of 6 empty seats?
Answer:
Given,
Six Friends go to a movie theater.
6P6 = \(\frac{6!}{(6-6) !}\)
= \(\frac{6!}{0!}\)
= 6!
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1
6P6 = 720

Question 19.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and your friend are 2 of 8 servers working a shill in a restaurant. At the beginning of the shill. the manager randomly assigns 0ne section to each server. Find the probability that you are assigned Section 1 and your friend is assigned Section 2.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 19

Question 20.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You make 6 posters to hold up at a basketball game. Each poster has a letter of the word TIGERS. You and 5 friends sit next to each other in a row. The posters are distributed at random. Find the probability that TIGERS is spelled correctly when you hold up the posters.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 73
Answer:
Number of favorable outcomes = 1 (TIGERS)
Total number of outcomes = 6!
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1
= 720
Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes = 1/720

In Exercises 21 – 24, count the possible combinations of r letters chosen from the given list.

Question 21.
A, B, C, D; r = 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 21

Question 22.
L, M, N, O; r = 2
Answer:
4P2 = \(\frac{4!}{(4-2) !}\)
= \(\frac{4!}{2!}\)
= 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/2 . 1
= 12
4P2 = 12
So, the possible permutations of two letters in the given list L, M, N, O is
LM, ML
LN, NL
LO, OL
MN, NM
MO, MO
NO, ON
Thus the number of possible combination of a = 2 letters chosen from the list L, M, N, O
4P2 = 12/2 = 6

Question 23.
U , V, W, X, Y, Z; r = 3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 23.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 23.2

Question 24.
D, E, F, G, H; R = 4
Answer:
5P4 = \(\frac{5!}{(5-4) !}\)
= \(\frac{5!}{1!}\)
=5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1
= 120
5P4 = 120
Thus the possible permutations of four letters in the given list D, E, F, G, H is
DEFG, DEGF, DGEF, DGFE, DFGD…HEFG, EHFG, EHGF, FGEH.
Thus we conclude that the number of possible combination of a = 4 letters chosen from the list D, E, F, G, H is
5C4 = \(\frac{120}{(24) !}\) = 5

In Exercise 25 – 32, evaluate the expression

Question 25.
5C1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 25

Question 26.
8C5
Answer:
8C5 = \(\frac{8!}{(8-5) !}\)
= \(\frac{8!}{3!}\) . \(\frac{1}{5!}\)
= 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1) (3 . 2 . 1)
= 8 . 7
8C5 = 56

Question 27.
9C9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 27

Question 28.
8C6
Answer:
8C6 = \(\frac{8!}{(8-6) !}\)
= \(\frac{8!}{2!}\) . \(\frac{1}{6!}\)
= 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(6. 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1) (3 . 2 . 1)
= 8 . 7
8C5 = 56

Question 29.
12C3
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 29

Question 30.
11C4
Answer:
11C4 = \(\frac{11!}{(11-4) !}\)
= \(\frac{11!}{7!}\) . \(\frac{1}{4!}\)
= 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(7 . 6. 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1) (4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 11 . 10 . 3
11C4 = 330

Question 31.
15C8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 31

Question 32.
20C5
Answer:
20C5 = \(\frac{20!}{(20-5) !}\)
= \(\frac{20!}{5!}\) . \(\frac{1}{5!}\)
= 20 . 19 . 18 . 17 . 16 . 15 . … 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1) (5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 19 . 3 . 17 . 16
20C5 = 15504

Question 33.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Each year, 64 golfers participate in a golf tournament. The golfers play in groups of 4. How many groups of 4 golfers are possible?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 33

Question 34.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You want to purchase vegetable dip for a party. A grocery store sells 7 different flavors of vegetable dip. You have enough money to purchase 2 flavors. How many combinations of 2 flavors of vegetable dip are possible?
Answer:
given that,
You want to purchase vegetable dip for a party. A grocery store sells 7 different flavors of vegetable dip. You have enough money to purchase 2 flavors.
7C2 = \(\frac{7!}{(7-2) !}\)
= \(\frac{7!}{5!}\) . \(\frac{1}{2!}\)
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1) (2 . 1)
= 7 . 3
7C2 = 21

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 35 and 36, describe and correct the error in evaluating the expression.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 74
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 35

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 75
Answer:
The permutation formula was used instead of the combination formula.

REASONING
In Exercises 37 – 40, tell whether the question can be answered using permutations or combinations. Explain your reasoning. Then answer the question.

Question 37.
To complete an exam. u must answer 8 questions from a list of 10 questions. In how many ways can you complete the exam?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 37

Question 38.
Ten students are auditioning for 3 different roles in a play. In how many ways can the 3 roles be filled?

Answer:
As 10 students are auditioning for 3 roles, which are different from each other, the order in which the roles are assigned to the students is important and should be taken into account.
As the Permutations formula takes into account the order of distribution. Hence the number of ways to fill the 3 roles can be found by using the permutations formula in the chapter.
So, the number of permutations of assigning the 3 roles to 3 students chosen from 10, using the permutations formula
10P3 = \(\frac{10!}{(10-3) !}\)
= \(\frac{10!}{7!}\)
= 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
=10 . 9 . 8
10P3 = 720

Question 39.
Fifty-two athletes arc competing in a bicycle race. In how many orders can the bicyclists finish first, second, and third? (Assume there are no ties.)
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 39

Question 40.
An employee at a pet store needs to catch 5 tetras in an aquarium containing 27 tetras. In how many groupings can the employee capture 5 tetras?

Answer:
Given,
An employee at a pet store needs to catch 5 tetras in an aquarium containing 27 tetras.
27C5 = \(\frac{27!}{(27-5) !}\)
= \(\frac{27!}{22!}\) . \(\frac{1}{5!}\)
= 27. 26 . 25 . 24 . … 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(22 . 21. … 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 27 . 26 . 5 . 23
27C5 = 80730
Thus the number of combinations of 27 tetras taken 5 at the time is 80730.

Question 41.
CRITICAL THINKING
Compare the quantities 50C9 and 50C41 without performing an calculations. Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 41

Question 42.
CRITICAL THINKING
Show that each identity is true for any whole numbers r and n, where 0 ≤ r ≤ n.
a. nCn = 1
Answer:
nCn = n!/n!(n – n)!
nCn = n!/n!0!
= 1/0!
We know that,
0! = 1
= 1/1 = 1
Thus nCn = 1

b. nCr = nCn – r
Answer:
nCn-a= n!/a!(n – a)!
nCn-a = n!/a!(n-a)! = nCn-a

c. n + 1Cr = nCr + nCr – 1
Answer:
n+1Ca = n+1!/a!(n+1-a)!
nCr + nCa-1 = n!/a!(n – a)! + n!/(n – (a – 1))! (a – 1)!
= \(\frac{(n+1)!}{(n-a+1) !}\) . \(\frac{1}{a!}\)
Thus n + 1Ca = nCa + nCa – 1

Question 43.

REASONING
Complete the table for each given value of r. Then write an inequality relating nPr and nCr. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 76
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 43

Question 44.
REASONING
Write an equation that relates nPr and nCr. Then use your equation to find and interpret the Value of \(\frac{182 P_{4}}{182 C_{4}}\).
Answer:
\(\frac{n P_{a}}{n C_{a}}\) = n!/(n – a)!/n!/a!(n – a)! = a!
\(\frac{182 P_{4}}{182 C_{4}}\) = 4! = 24

Question 45.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You and your friend are in the studio audience on a television game show. From an audience of 300 people, 2 people are randomly selected as contestants. What is the probability that you and your friend are chosen?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 45

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You work 5 evenings each week at a bookstore. Your supervisor assigns you 5 evenings at random from the 7 possibilities. What is the probability that your schedule does not include working on the weekend?
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
7C5 = \(\frac{7!}{(7-5) !}\)
= \(\frac{7!}{2!}\) . \(\frac{1}{5!}\)
=7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(2 . 1)(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 7 . 3
7C5 = 21
Thus we see that there are 21 possible combinations of five days formed from 7 days.
Hence we see that one of 21 possible combination of 5 days does not contain saturday and sunday.
P = P(Are chosen one combination of 21 possible)
= Number of favorable outcomes/Number of possible outcomes
= 1/21

REASONING
In Exercises 47 and 48, find the probability of winning a lottery using the given rules. Assume that lottery numbers are selected at random.

Question 47.
You must correctly select 6 numbers, each an integer from 0 to 49. The order is not important.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 47

Question 48.
You must correctly select 4 numbers, each an integer from 0 to 9. The order is important.
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
10C4 = \(\frac{10!}{(10-4) !}\)
= \(\frac{10!}{6!}\) . \(\frac{1}{4!}\)
=10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 10 . 3 . 7
10C4 = 210
There are 210 possible combination of 10 numbers taken 4 at a time.
P (You winning a lottery) = P(Are chosen one combination 210 possible)
= Number of favorable outcomes/Number of possible outcomes
= 1/210

Question 49.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
A polygon is convex when no line that contains a side of the polygon contains a point in the interior of the polygon. Consider a convex polygon with n sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 77
a. Use the combinations formula to write an expression for the number of diagonals in an n-sided polygon.
b. Use your result from part (a) to write a formula for the number of diagonals of an n-sided convex polygon.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 49

Question 50.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are ordering a burrito with 2 main ingredients and 3 toppings. The menu below shows the possible choices. How many different burritos are possible
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 78
Answer:
You are ordering a burrito with 2 main ingredients and 3 toppings.
Total number of main ingredients = 6
As the order in which the ingredients are chosen is not important, the total number of ways to select 2 main ingredients out of 6 can be found by using the combinations formula.
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
6C2 = \(\frac{6!}{(6-2) !}\)
= \(\frac{6!}{4!}\) . \(\frac{1}{2!}\)
=6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(2 . 1)
= 3 . 5
6C2 = 15
Total number of toppings = 8
Number of toppings to be chosen = 3
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
8C3 = \(\frac{8!}{(8-3) !}\)
= \(\frac{8!}{5!}\) . \(\frac{1}{3!}\)
=8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(3 . 2 . 1)
= 8 . 7
8C3 = 56
Total possible selections = ways to select main ingredients × Ways to select toppings
= 15 × 56
= 840

Question 51.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You want to purchase 2 different types of contemporary music CDs and 1 classical music CD from the music collection shown. How many different sets of music types can you choose for your purchase?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 79
a. How many combinations of three marbles can be drawn from the bag? Explain.
b. How many permutations of three marbles can be drawn from the bag? Explain.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 51

Question 52.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
A bag contains one green marble, one red marble, and one blue marble. The diagram shows the possible outcomes of randomly drawing three marbles from the hag without replacement.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 80
a. How many combinations of three marbles can be drawn from the bag? Explain.
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
3C3 = \(\frac{3!}{(3-3) !}\)
= \(\frac{3!}{0!}\) . \(\frac{1}{3!}\)
=3 . 2 . 1/(1)(3 . 2 . 1)
= 1
3C3 = 1

b. How many permutations of three marbles can be drawn from the bag? Explain.
Answer:
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
3P3 = \(\frac{3!}{(3-3) !}\)
= \(\frac{3!}{0!}\)
=3 . 2 . 1/1
= 6
3P3 = 3
There are 6 possible combinations.

Question 53.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Every student in your history class is required to present a project in front of the class. Each day, 4 students make their presentations in an order chosen at random by the teacher. you make your presentation on the first day.
a. What is the probability that you are chosen to be the first or second presenter on the first day ?
b. What is the probability that you are chosen to be the second or third presenter on the first day? Compare your answer with that in part (a).
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 53

Question 54.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The organizer of a cast party for a drama club asks each of the 6 cast members to bring 1 food item From a list of 10 items. Assuming each member randomly chooses a food item to bring. what is the probability that at least 2 of the 6 cast members bring the same item?
Answer:
Given,
The organizer of a cast party for a drama club asks each of the 6 cast members to bring 1 food item From a list of 10 items.
Assuming each member randomly chooses a food item to bring.
A = {At least 2 of the 6 cast members bring the same item}
\(\bar{A}\) = {All members bring different items}
First member can choose one of the 10 different products, the second can choose one of the 9 possible ways, and so on until the 6th member can choose one of the remaining 5 items.
10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 = 151200
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
10P6 = \(\frac{10!}{(10-6) !}\)
= \(\frac{10!}{4!}\)
=10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/4 . 3 . 2 . 1
= 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 = 151200
10P6 = 151200
10 . 10 . 10 . 10 . 10 . 10 = 1000000
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = Number of favorable outcomes/Number of possible outcomes
= 151200/1000000
= 0.1512
P(A) = 1 – P(\(\bar{A}\))
P(A) = 1 – 0.1512 = 0.8488
The probability that at least 2 of the 6 members bring the same items is about 85%

Question 55.
PROBLEM SOLVING
You are one of 10 students performing in a school talent show. The order of the performances is determined at random. The first 5 performers go on stage before the intermission.
a. What is the probability that you are the last performer before the intermission and your rival performs immediately before you?
b. What is the probability that you are not the first performer?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 55

Question 56.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
How many integers, greater than 999 but not greater than 4000, can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4? Repetition of digits is allowed.
Answer:
Let fixed number 1 on the first place and in the second place can be one of 5 digits 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. Because repetition of digits is allowed. In third and fourth place it can also be one of five digits.
Therefore we see that 5 . 5 . 5 = 125 integers which begin with 1, can be formed.
Second, If we fixed 2 on the first place, by the same logic as in the first part, we get that 5³ = 125 integers which begin with 2.
Next, if we fixed number 3 on the first place, we obtain 5³ = 125 integers which begin with 2.
5³ + 5³ + 5³ = 375
375 integers greater than 999 but not greater than 4000, can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.

Question 57.
PROBLEM SOLVING
There are 30 students in your class. Your science teacher chooses 5 students at random to complete a group project. Find the probability that you and your 2 best friends in the science class are chosen to work in the group. Explain how you found your answer.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 57

Question 58.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Follow the steps below to explore a famous probability problem called the birthday problem. (Assume there are 365 equally likely birthdays possible.)

a. What is the probability that at least 2 people share the same birthday in a group of 6 randomly chosen people? in a group of 10 randomly chosen people?
Answer:
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
A = {At least  people share the same birthday in a group of 6 people}
So, we see that complement of event A is
\(\bar{A}\) = {All 6 people were born on different days}
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
365P6 = \(\frac{365!}{(365-6)!}\)
= \(\frac{365!}{(359)!}\)
= 365. 364 . 363 . 362 . 361 . 360 . 359 . 358 . ……. 2 . 1/(359 . 358. …. 2 . 1)
= 365. 364 . 363 . 362 . 361 . 360
For the first day we can also choose one of 365 possible for the second dat we can also choose one of 365 ways and so on.
For each of the 6 days we have the option to choose one day from 365 possible ways.
So, the number of possible outcomes is
365 . 365 . 365 . 365 . 365 . 365
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = Number of favorable outcomes/Number of possible outcomes
= 365. 364 . 363 . 362 . 361 . 360/365 . 365 . 365 . 365 . 365 . 365
= 0.959
P(A) = 1 – P(\(\bar{A}\))
P(A) = 1 – 0.959 = 0.04
P = 1 – 365P10/36510
1 – 0.883 = 0.117

b. Generalize the results from part (a) by writing a formula for the probability P(n) that at least 2 people in a group of n people share the same birthday. (Hint: Use nPr notation in your formula.)
Answer:
Based on the explanation in the part under a) we can conclude that the probability that at least two people share the same birthday in a group of n people is
P = 1 – 365Pn/365n

c. Enter the formula from part (b) into a graphing calculator. Use the table feature to make a table of values. For what group size does the probability that at least 2 people share the same birthday first exceed 50%?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_11
Based on the above table we see that for a group of 23 people and more, the probability that at least tweople share the same birthday exceed 50%

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

Question 59.
A bag contains 12 white marbles and 3 black marbles. You pick 1 marble at random. What is the probability that you pick a black marble?
Answer:
Given,
A bag contains 12 white marbles and 3 black marbles. You pick 1 marble at random
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.5 Qu 59

Question 60.
The table shows the result of flipping two coins 12 times. For what outcome is the experimental probability the same as the theoretical probability?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Geometry Chapter 12 Probability 81
Answer:
The table shows the result of flipping two coins 12 times
P(HH) = P(HT) = P(TH) = P(TT) = 1/2 . 1/2 = 1/4
P(HH) = Number of favorable outcomes/Number of possible outcomes
= 2/12 = 1/6
P(HT) = 6/12 = 1/2
P(TH) = 3/12 = 1/4
P(TT) = 1/12
The most likely fell first heads, and second tails. Also, with the least probability fell twice tails.

12.6 Binomial Distributions

Exploration 1

Analyzing Histograms

Work with a partner: The histograms show the results when n coins are flipped.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 83
STUDY TIP
When 4 coins are flipped (n = 4), the possible outcomes are
TTTT TTTH TTHT TTHH
THTT THTH THHT THHH
HTTT HTTH HTHT HTHH
HHTT HHTH HHHT HHHH.
The histogram shows the numbers of outcomes having 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 heads.
a. In how many ways can 3 heads occur when 5 coins are flipped?
Answer:

b. Draw a histogram that shows the numbers of heads that can occur when 6 coins are flipped.
Answer:

c. In how many ways can 3 heads occur when 6 coins are flipped?
Answer:

Exploration 2 

Determining the Number of Occurrences

Work with a partner:

a. Complete the table showing the numbers of ways in which 2 heads can occur when n coins are flipped.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 84
Answer:

b. Determine the pattern shown in the table. Use your result to find the number of ways in which 2 heads can occur when 8 coins are flipped.
LOOKING FOR A PATTERN
To be proficient in math, you need to look closely to discern a pattern or structure.
Answer:

Communicate Your Answer

Question 3.
How can you determine the frequency of each outcome of an event?
Answer:

Question 4.
How can you use a histogram to find the probability of an event?
Answer:

Lesson 12.6 Binomial Distributions

Monitoring Progress

An octahedral die has eight sides numbered 1 through 8. Let x be a random variable that represents the sum when two such dice are rolled.

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 85

Question 1.
Make a table and draw a histogram showing the probability distribution tor x.
Answer:

Question 2.
What is the most likely sum when rolling the two dice?
Answer:

Question 3.
What is the probability that the sum of the two dice is at most 3?
Answer:

According to a survey, about 85% of people ages 18 and older in the U.S. use the Internet or e-mail. You ask 4 randomly chosen people (ages 18 and older) whether they use the Internet or email.

Question 4.
Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution for your survey.
Answer:

Question 5.
What is the most likely outcome of your survey?
Answer:

Question 6.
What is the probability that at most 2 people you survey use the Internet or e-mail?
Answer:

Exercise 12.6 Binomial Distributions

Vocabulary and Core Concept Check

Question 1.
VOCABULARY
What is a random variable?
Answer:
A random variable is a variable whose value is determined by the outcomes of a probability experiment.

Question 2.
WRITING
Give an example of a binomial experiment and describe how it meets the conditions of a binomial experiment.
Answer:
We flipping a coin 10 times and register what fell.
We know that events, coin toss are independent.
Each trial has only two possible outcomes: H and T
The probabilities are P(H) = P(T) = 1/2 and are the same for each trial.
We can conclude that this experiment is a binomial experiment.

Monitoring Progress and Modeling with Mathematics

In Exercises 3 – 6. make a table and draw a histogram showing the probability distribution for the random variable.

Question 3.
x = the number on a table tennis ball randomly chosen from a bag that contains 5 balls labeled “1,” 3 halls labeled “2,” and 2 balls labeled “3.”
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 3

Question 4.
c = 1 when a randomly chosen card out of a standard deck of 52 playing cards is a heart and c = 2 otherwise.
Answer:
Let C be a random variable that represents the randomly chosen card.
Standard desk have 52 playing cards.
P(C = 1) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= A randomly chosen card is a hard/Total number of cards
= 13/52
On the other hand,
P(C = 2) = A randomly chosen card is not a hard/Total number of cards
= 39/52

Question 5.
w = 1 when a randomly chosen letter from the English alphabet is a vowel and w = 2 otherwise.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 5

Question 6.
n = the number of digits in a random integer from O through 999.
Answer:
There are 10 outcomes for value 1, 90 outcomes for value 2, and 900 values for value 3.
P(N = 1) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= A randomly chosen integers in a one-digit number/Total number of integers
= 10/1000
= 1/100
P(N = 2) = 90/1000 = 9/100
P(N = 3) = 900/1000 = 9/10

In Exercises 7 and 8, use the probability distribution to determine (a) the number that is most likely to be spun on a spinner, and (b) the probability of spinning an even number.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 86
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 87
Answer:
The most likely number to be spun on the spinner is the value of random variable X(Number of spinner) of which P(X) is greatest.
From given histogram we see that this probability is greatest for X = 5.
Hence the most likely number to be spun on the spinner is 5.
P(Spinning an even number) = P(X = 10) + P(X = 20) = 1/6 + 1/12 = 1/4

USING EQUATIONS
In Exercises 9 – 12, calculate the probability of flipping a coin 20 times and getting the given number of heads.
Question 9.
1
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 9

Question 10.
4
Answer:
P(Four success) = 20C4(1/2)4(1/2)20-4
= 20!/4!(20 – 4)!(1/2)20
= 20!/4!(16)!(1/2)20
= 0.0046
We see that the obtained probability is small, which is logical.

Question 11.
18
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 11

Question 12.
20
Answer:
P(Four success) = 20C20(1/2)20(1/2)20-20
= 20!/20!(20 – 20)!(1/2)20
=(1/2)20
= 0.00000095

Question 13.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
According to a survey, 27% of high school students in the United States buy a class ring. You ask 6 randomly chosen high school students whether they own a class ring.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 88
a. Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution for your survey.
b. What is the most likely outcome of your survey?
c. What is the probability that at most 2 people have a class ring?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 13.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 13.2

Question 14.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
According to a survey, 48% of adults in the United States believe that Unidentified Flying Objects (UFOs) are observing our planet. You ask 8 randomly chosen adults whether they believe UFOs are watching Earth.
a. Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution for your survey.
Answer:
p = P(the American is a sports fan) = 48% = 0.48
1 – p = P(the American is not a sports fan) = 1 – 0.48= 0.52
P (0 success) = 0C8 p0(1 – p)8-0
= 8!/0!(8 – 0)! 1 . 0.528
= 0.528
= 0.1513
P (One person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C1 p¹(1 – p)8-1
=0.03948
P (Two person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C2 p2(1 – p)8-2
=0.1275
P (Three person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C3 p3(1 – p)8-3
=0.2355
P (Four person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C4 p4(1 – p)8-4
=0.2717
P (Five person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C5 p5(1 – p)8-5
=0.2006
P (Six person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C6 p6(1 – p)8-6
=0.0926
P (Seven person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C7 p7(1 – p)8-7
=0.0244
P (Eight person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) =8C8 p8(1 – p)8-8
=0.0028
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 probability img_10

b. What is the most likely outcome of your survey?
Answer:
P (Four person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) = 0.2717
This probability has the highest, so we conclude that the most likely outcome is that four of the eight adults believe that UFOs are watching Earth.

c. What is the probability that at most 3 people believe UFOs are watching Earth?
Answer:
P (At most 3 persons believe that UFOs are watching Earth) = P (One person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) + P (Two person believe that UFOs are watching Earth) + P (Three person believe that UFOs are watching Earth)
= 0.0053 + 0.0395 + 0.1275 + 0.2355
= 0.4078

ERROR ANALYSIS
In Exercises 15 and 16, describe and correct the error in calculating the probability of rolling a 1 exactly 3 times in 5 rolls of a six-sided die.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 89
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 15

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 90
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 15

Question 17.
MATHEMATICAL CONNECTIONS
At most 7 gopher holes appear each week on the farm shown. Let x represent how many of the gopher holes appear in the carrot patch. Assume that a gopher hole has an equal chance of appearing at any point on the farm.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 91
a. Find P(x) for x = 0, 1, 2 ….., 7.

Answer:
p = P(the gopher holes appear in the carrot patch)
= Area marked for carrot/Area of the whole farm
= Area of a square + Area of a triangle/Area of the whole farm
= 0.28125
1 – p = P(The gopher holes do not appear in the carrot patch)
= 1 – 0.28125
= 0.71875
P (0 success) = 0C7 p0(1 – p)7-0
= 7!/0!(7 – 0)! 1 . 0.727
= 0.727
= 0.099
P (There is one gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C1 p¹(1 – p)7-1
=0.27143
P (There is two gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C2 p¹(1 – p)7-2
=0.31863
P (There is three gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C3 p¹(1 – p)7-3
=0.20781
P (There is four gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C4 p¹(1 – p)7-4
=0.08131
P (There is five gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C5 p¹(1 – p)7-5
=0.01909
P (There is six gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C6 p¹(1 – p)7-6
=0.00249
P (There is seven gopher hole in the carrot patch) =7C7 p¹(1 – p)7-7
=0.00012

b. Make a table showing the probability distribution for x.
c. Make a histogram showing the probability distribution for x.
Answer:

Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 17.2

Question 18.
HOW DO YOU SEE IT?
Complete the probability distribution for the random variable x. What is the probability the value of x is greater than 2?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 92
Answer:
P(X = 1) + P(X = 2) + … + P(X = n) = 1
P(X = 1) + P(X = 2) + P(X = 3) + P(X = 4) = 0.1 + 0.3 + 0.4 + P(X = 4)
= 1
P(X = 4) = 1 – 0.8 = 0.2
Now lets find a probability that value of X is greater then two, as
P(X ≥ 2) = P(X = 2) + P(X = 3) + P(X = 4)
= 0.3 + 0.4 + 0.2
= 0.9
It is very likely that the random variable k will take a value greater than 2.

Question 19.
MAKING AN ARGUMENT
The binomial distribution Shows the results of a binomial experiment. Your friend claims that the probability p of a success must be greater than the probability 1 – p of a failure. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 93
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 19

Question 20.
THOUGHT PROVOKING
There are 100 coins in a bag. Only one of them has a date of 2010. You choose a coin at random, check the date, and then put the coin back in the bag. You repeat this 100 times. Are you certain of choosing the 2010 coin at least once? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
Given,
There are 100 coins in a bag. Only one of them has a date of 2010. You choose a coin at random, check the date, and then put the coin back in the bag. You repeat this 100 times
p = P(Selected coin has a date of 2010)
= Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
= 1/100
1 – p = 1 – 1/100  = 99/100
P (0 success) = 100C0 p0(1 – p)100-0
= 100!/0!(100 – 0)! 1 . (99/100)100
= (99/100)100
= 0.366
P(1 or more success) = 1 – P(0 success) = 1 – 0.366 = 0.634
Hence with a probability of 0.634, we will choose a coin which has a date of 2010.
We are not certain of choosing the 2010 coin at least once.

Question 21.
MODELING WITH MATHEMATICS
Assume that having a male and having a female child are independent events, and that the probability of each is 0.5.
a. A couple has 4 male children. Evaluate the validity of this statement: “The first 4 kids were all boys, so the next one will probably be a girl.”
b. What is the probability of having 4 male children and then a female child?
c. Let x be a random variable that represents the number of children a couple already has when they have their first female child. Draw a histogram of the distribution of P(x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 10. Describe the shape of the histogram.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 21.1
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 21.2

Question 22.
CRITICAL THINKING
An entertainment system has n speakers. Each speaker will function properly with probability p. independent of whether the other speakers are functioning. The system will operate effectively when at least 50% of its speakers are functioning. For what values of p is a 5-speaker system more likely to operate than a 3-speaker system?
Answer:
Given,
An entertainment system has n speakers. Each speaker will function properly with probability p. independent of whether the other speakers are functioning.
The system will operate effectively when at least 50% of its speakers are functioning.
p = P(Speaker will function properly)
1 – 9 = P(Speaker will not function properly)
P(5-speaker system operate) = P(X = 3) + P(X = 4) + P(X = 5)
P(5-Speaker system operate) = P (0 success) = 5C3 p3(1 – p)5-3 + 5C4 p4(1 – p)5-4 + 5C5 p5(1 – p)5-5 = 10p3(1 – p)5-4 + 5p4(1 – p)5
P = P(X = 2) + P(X = 3)
= 5C2 p2(1 – p)5-2 + 5C3 p3(1 – p)5-3
= 10p2(1 – p)5-3 + 10p3(1 – p)2

10p3(1 – p)5-4 + 5p4(1 – p)5 + p5 > 10p2(1 – p)3 + 10p3(1 – p)2
5p2 – 4p3 – 10 + 30p – 30p2 + 10p3 > 0
A 5-speaker system operate more likely to operate than 3-speaker system when p ∈ (0.558, 1]

Maintaining Mathematical Proficiency

List the possible outcomes for the situation.

Question 23.
guessing the gender of three children
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 12.6 Qu 23

Question 24.
picking one of two doors and one of three curtains
Answer:
If we denote by D1 and D2 first and second door and with C1, C2, C3 first, second and third curtain, then the possible outcomes are
D1C1, D1C2, D1C3, D2C1, D2C2, D2C3
Thus there are six possible outcomes.

Probability Review

12.1 Sample Spaces and Probability

Question 1.
A bag contains 9 tiles. one for each letter in the word HAPPINESS. You choose a tile at random. What is the probability that you choose a tile with the letter S? What is the probability that you choose a tile with a letter other than P?

Answer:
Let X be a random variable that represent the letter on tile.
We know that a bag contains tiles labeled with “H”, “A”, “P”, “I”, “N”, “E” and “S”
So we can conclude that the possible values for X are letters “H”, “A”, “P”, “I”, “N”, “E” and “S” and total number of outcomes is 9.

Question 2.
You throw a dart at the board shown. Your dart is equally likely to hit any point inside the square board. Are you most likely to get 5 points, 10 points, or 20 points?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 94
Answer: It is the most likely to get 20 points.

Explanation:
From given board, we can conclude that the probability that we get 5 points is
P(5 points) = Surface of red area/Surface of board = 4/36 = 1/9
On the other hand, we see that the probability we get 10 points is
P(10 points) = Surface of yellow area/Surface of board = (16 – 4)/36 = 1/3
and the probability that we get 20 points is
P(20 points) = Surface of blue area/Surface of board = (36 – 16)/36 = 5/9
From the obtained results we get that it is the most likely to get 20 points, which is logical because the surface of the blue area is the largest.

12.2 Independent and Dependent Events

Find the probability of randomly selecting the given marbles from a bag of 5 red, 8 green, and 3 blue marbles when (a) you replace the first marble before drawing the second, and (b) you do not replace the first marble. Compare the probabilities.

Question 3.
red, then green
Answer:
We selected two marbles from a bag of 5 red, 8 green and 3 blue. With R denote the event that the red marble is drawn, with P blue, and with G green. The draws are independent because we replace the first marble before drawing the second. Therefore, the probability that we selected first red marble and then green is
P(RG) = P(R)P(G) = 5/16 . 8/16 = k5/36 = 0.15625
b. In this case, we do not replace the first marble before drawing the second. So, the draws are not independent.
P(RG) = P(R)P(G|R) = 5/16 . 8/15 = 1/6 = 0.16667
It is more likely that we selected first red marble and then green when we not replace the first marble before drawing the second.

Question 4.
blue, then red
Answer:
We selected two marbles from a bag of 5 red, 8 green and 3 blue. With R denote the event that the red marble is drawn, with P blue, and with G green. The draws are independent because we replace the first marble before drawing the second. Therefore, the probability that we selected first red marble and then green is
P(BR) = P(B)P(R) = 3/16 . 5/16 = 15/256 = 0.05859
b. In this case, we do not replace the first marble before drawing the second. So, the draws are not independent.
P(BR) = P(B)P(R|B) = 3/16 . 5/15 = 1/16 = 0.0625
It is more likely that we selected first blue marble and then red when we not replace the first marble before drawing the second.

Question 5.
green, then green
Answer:
We selected two marbles from a bag of 5 red, 8 green and 3 blue. With R denote the event that the red marble is drawn, with P blue, and with G green. The draws are independent because we replace the first marble before drawing the second. Therefore, the probability that we selected first red marble and then green is
P(GG) = P(G)P(G) = 8/16 . 8/16 = 1/4 = 0.25
b. In this case, we do not replace the first marble before drawing the second. So, the draws are not independent.
P(GG) = P(G)P(G|G) = 8/16 . 7/15 = 0.23333
It is more likely that we selected first blue marble and then red when we not replace the first marble before drawing the second.

12.3 Two-Way Tables and Probability

Question 6.
What is the probability that a randomly selected resident who does not support the project in the example above is from the west side?
Answer:
P(West side|Does not support the project) = P(West side and Does not support the project)/P(Does not support the project)
= 0.09/(0.08 + 0.09)
= 0.529
The probability that random selected resident who does not support the project is from the west side is about 0.529

Question 7.
After a conference, 220 men and 270 women respond to a survey. Of those, 200 men and 230 women say the conference was impactful. Organize these results in a two-way table. Then find and interpret the marginal frequencies.
Answer:
After a conference, 220 men and 270 women respond to a survey. Of those, 200 men and 230 women say the conference was impactful.
Number of men who say the conference had not impact = 220 – 200 = 20
By the same method we come to the conclusion
Number of women who say the conference had not impact = 270 – 230 = 40
Now, we will find the marginal frequencies.
Total number of people who say the conference was impact is 200 + 230 = 430
Total Number of people who say the conference had not impact = 20 + 40 = 60
Also from given information we know that total number of people who was surveyed is 220 + 270 = 490
BIM Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_2

12.4 Probability of Disjoint and Overlapping Events

Question 8.
Let A and B be events such that P(A) = 0.32, P(B) = 0.48, and P(A and B) = 0.12. Find P(A or B).
Answer:
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
Given,
P(A) = 0.32, P(B) = 0.48, and P(A and B) = 0.12
P(A or B) = 0.32 + 0.48 – 0.12 = 0.68

Question 9.
Out of 100 employees at a company, 92 employees either work part time or work 5 days each week. There are 14 employees who work part time and 80 employees who work 5 days each week. What is the probability that a randomly selected employee works both part time and 5 days each week?
Answer:
A = {Employees either work part time},
B = {Employees either work 5 days}
Based on the given information we see that
P(A) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total Number of outcomes
= Number of Employees either work part time/Total number of employees
= 14/100
= 0.14
P(B) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total Number of outcomes
= Number of Employees either work 5 days/Total number of employees
= 80/100
= 0.8
Also, we know that 92 employees either work part time or 5 days each week
P(A or B) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total Number of outcomes
= 92/100 = 0.92
For given events A and B the probability of A or B is
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
P(A or B) = 0.14 + 0.8 – 0.92 = 0.02
Hence the probability that a randomly selected employee works part time and 5 days each week is 0.02

12.5 Permutations and Combinations

Evaluate the expression.

Question 10.
7P6
Answer:
We know that number of permutations of n objects taken at a time (a ≤ n)
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
=  7!/(7 – 6)!
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1
= 5040
7P6 = 7! = 5040

Question 11.
13P10
Answer:
We know that number of permutations of n objects taken at a time (a ≤ n)
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
=  13!/(13 – 10)!
= 13!/3!
= 13. 12 . 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 = 94348800
13P10 = 94348800

Question 12.
6C2
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
6C2 = 6!/2!(6 – 2)!
= 6!/2!(4)!
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(2 . 1)(4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
15
6C2 = 15
nC2 = n(n – 1)/2
6C2 = 15

Question 13.
8C4
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
8C4 = 8!/4!(8 – 4)!
= 68!/4!(4)!
= 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 2 . 7 . 5
6C2 = 70

Question 14.
Eight sprinters are competing in a race. How many different ways can they finish the race? (Assume there are no ties.)
Answer:
nPn = n!
We know thata 8 sprinters are participating in a race. It is important to us in what order each of them will reach the goal. This tells us that it is necessary to calculate the number of permutations of 8 sprinters.
8P8 = 8! = 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1 = 40320
Eight sprinters can finish a race in 40320 ways.

Question 15.
A random drawing will determine which 3 people in a group of 9 will win concert tickets. What is the probability that you and your 2 friends will win the tickets?
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
9C3 = 9!/3!(9 – 3)!
= 9!/3!(6)!
= 9 . 8 . 7 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(3 . 2 . 1)(6 . 5 .  4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 84
9C3 = 84
The probability that you and your 2 friends will win the tickets is equal to the probability that out of 84 possibilities, the trio in which you and your friend are in will be chosen.
P = Number of favorable outcomes/ Total number of outcomes = 1/84

12.6 Binomial Distributions

Question 16.
Find the Probability of flipping a coin 12 times and getting exactly 4 heads.
Answer:
The probabilities are P(H) = P(T) = 1/2, that is p = p – 1 = 1/2 and are the same for each trial.
n = 12
P = 12!/4!(12 – 4)! . (1/2)12

= 0.1208
Therefore the probability of flipping a coin 12 times and getting exactly 4 heads is about 0.12

Question 17.
A basketball player makes a free throw 82.6% of the time. The player attempts 5 free throws. Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution of the number of successful free throws. What is the most likely outcome?
Answer:
Given,
A basketball player makes a free throw 82.6% of the time. The player attempts 5 free throws.
p = P(Successful free throw) = 82.6% = 0.826
1 – p = P(Unsuccessful free throw) = 1 – 0.826 = 0.174
P (Out of 5 free throws one was successful) = 5C1 p¹(1 – p)5-1
P (Out of 5 free throws two was successful) =5C2 p²(1 – p)5-2
P(Out of 5 free throws three was successful) = 5C3p³(1 – p)5-3
P (Out of 5 free throws four was successful) =5C4 p4(1 – p)5-4
P (All 5 throws one was successful) = 5C5(1 – p)5-5
Bigideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability img_3

Probability Test

You roll a six-sided die. Find the probability of the event described. Explain your reasoning.

Question 1.
You roll a number less than 5.
Answer:
The die has 6 sides, thus the total number of possible outcomes is 6.
The favorable outcomes are
P(n<5) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
Thus there are 4 favorable outcomes.
The probability to roll a number less than 5 is
= 4/6
= 2/3

Question 2.
You roll a multiple of 3.
Answer:
The die has 6 sides, thus the total number of possible outcomes is 6.
The favorable outcomes are
P(n = 3k) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes
Thus there are 2 favorable outcomes.
The probability to roll a number less than 3 is
= 2/6
= 1/3

Evaluate the expression.

Question 3.
7P2
Answer:
We know that number of permutations of n objects taken at a time (a ≤ n)
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
7P2 = 7!/(7 – 2)!
=  7!/5!
= (7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)/(5 . 4 . 3 .  2 . 1)
= 7 . 6
= 42
7P2 = 42

Question 4.
8P3
Answer:
We know that number of permutations of n objects taken at a time (a ≤ n)
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
8P3 = 8!/(8 – 3)!
=  8!/5!
= (8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)/(5 . 4 . 3 .  2 . 1)
= 8 . 7 . 6
= 336
8P3 = 336

Question 5.
6C3
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
6C3 = 6!/3!(6 – 3)!
= 6!/3!(3)!
= 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(3 . 2 . 1)(3 . 2 . 1)
= 2 . 5 . 2
= 20
6C3 = 20

Question 6.
12C7
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
12C7 = 12!/7!(12 – 7)!
= 12!/7!(5)!
= 12 . 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)(5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 11 . 2 . 9 . 4 = 792
12C7 = 792

Question 7.
In the word PYRAMID, how many ways can you arrange
(a) all of the letters and
Answer:
We have to find the number of permutation all of the letters in a given word that will consist of 7 letters. We see that it matters that order of letters are important.
Number of permutations = (In the 1st place can be one of 7 letters) × (In the 2nd place can be one of 6 letters that is left)
(In the 3rd can be one of 5 letters that is left) × (In the 4th can be 4 letters that is left)
(In the 5th can be three letter that is left) × (In the 6th can be two letters that is left)
(In the 7th can be one letter that is left)
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1 = 5040
Therefore, we have 5040 ways for arrange all of the letters in given word, that is PYRAMID, PYRAMDI, PYRADMI, ……., DIMARYP.

(b) 5 of the letters?
Answer:
We have to find the number of permutation all of the letters in a given word that will consist of 3 letters. We see that it matters that order of letters are important.
Number of permutations = (In the 1st place can be one of 7 letters) × (In the 2nd place can be one of 6 letters that is left)
(In the 3rd can be one of 5 letters that is left) × (In the 4th can be 4 letters that is left)
(In the 5th can be three letter that is left)
= 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3
= 2520
Therefore, we have 2520 ways for arrange 5 of the letters in given word, that is PYRAM, PYRAI, PYRAD….

Question 8.
You find the probability P(A or B) by using hie equation P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B). Describe why it is necessary to subtract P(A and B) when the events A and B are overlapping. Then describe why it is not necessary to subtract P(A and B) when the events A and B are disjoint.
Answer:
When the events are overlapping then P(A and B) ≠ 0. This means that the expression P(A) + P(B) already contains the probability P(A and B) and so P(A and B) is subtracted from their sum to evaluate P(A or B)
When the events are overlapping then P(A and B) = 0 and so the equation of P(A or B reduces to P(A) + P(B))

Question 9.
Is it possible to use the formula P(A and B) = P(A) • P(B/A) when events A and B are independent? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
If events A and B are independent events, then
P(A and B) = P(A) . P(B)
Also, because event B is independent of event A then P(B|A) = P(A)
P(A and B) = P(A) . P(B) = P(A) . P(B|A)
where A and B are the independent events.

Question 10.
According to a survey, about 58% of families sit down tor a family dinner at least four times per week. You ask 5 randomly chosen families whether the have a family dinner at least four times per week.
a. Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution for the survey.
Answer:
p = P(Family have dinner four times per week) = 58% = 0.58
1 – p = P(Family have no dinner dour times per week) = 1 – 0.58 = 0.42
P (One Family have dinner four times per week) = 5C1 p¹(1 – p)5-1
= 0.09024
P (Two Family have dinner four times per week) =5C2 p²(1 – p)5-2
= 0.24923
P(Three Family have dinner four times per week) = 5C3p³(1 – p)5-3
= 0.34418
P (Four Family have dinner four times per week) =5C4 p4(1 – p)5-4
= 0.23765
P (Family have dinner four times per week) = 5C5(1 – p)5-5 = 0.06563

Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_4

b. What is the most likely outcome of the survey?
Answer:
P(Three families have dinner four times per week) = 0.34418
This probability is the highest, so we can conclude that the most likely outcome is that three of the five families have dinner four times per week.

c. What is the probability that at least 3 families have a family dinner four times per week?
Answer:
In this part we have to find the probability that,
P(At least 3 families have dinner four times per week)
= P(Three families have dinner four times per week) + P(Four families have dinner four times per week) + P(Five families have dinner four times per week)
= 0.34418 + 0.23765 + 0.06563
= 0.64746

Question 11.
You are choosing a cell phone company to sign with for the next 2 years. The three plans you consider are equally priced. You ask several of your neighbors whether they are satisfied with their current cell phone company. The table shows the results. According to this survey, which company should you choose?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 95
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_5
To find the joint relative frequencies we divide each frequency by the total number of people in the survey. Also the marginal relative frequencies we find as the sum of each row and each column.
So, we can present a two way table that shows the joint and marginal relative frequencies.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_6
Finally, to get conditional relative frequencies we use the previous the marginal relative frequency of each row.
Big Ideas Math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_7

Therefore we should choose company A.

Question 12.
The surface area of Earth is about 196.9 million square miles. The land area is about 57.5 million square miles, and the rest is water. What is the probability that a meteorite that reaches the surface of Earth will hit land? What is the probability that it will hit water?
Answer:
From the formula for geometric probability we get the probability that a meteorite that reaches the surface of Earth will hit lend is
P = The lend area/ The surface area of Earth = 57.5/196.9 = 0.292
Alos we know that the probability for complement of event A is
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – P(A)
In this case, complement of event {A meteorite will hit lend} is {A meteorite will hit water}.
P = 1 – 0.292 = 0.708

Question 13.
Consider a bag that contains all the chess pieces in a set, as shown in the diagram.
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 96
a. You choose one piece at random. Find the probability that you choose a black piece or a queen.
Answer:
The total number of pieces is 2 + 2 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 16 = 32.
Also we see that the number of black and white pieces are the same, 16 and there are one black queen.
A = {We choose a black piece}
B = {We choose a queen}
P(A) = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes = Number of black pieces/Total number of pieces = 16/32 = 1/2
P(B) = Number of queens/Total number of pieces = 2/32 = 1/16
P(A and B) = Number of black queens/Total number of pieces = 1/32
P(A or B) = P(A) + P(B) – P(A and B)
= 1/2 + 1/16 – 1/32 = 17/32

b. You choose one piece at random, do not replace it, then choose a second piece at random. Find the probability that you choose a king, then a pawn.
Answer:
C = {We choose a king} and D = {We choose a pawn}
P(C) = Number of pawns/Total number of pieces = 16/32 = 1/2
P(C and D) = Number of pawns and king/Total number of pieces = (16 + 2)/32 = 9/16
We know that for two dependent events A and B probability that both occur is
P(A and B) = P(A)P(B|A)
P(D|C) = P(C and D)/P(C) = 1/2 × 16/9 = 8/9

Question 14.
Three volunteers are chosen at random from a group of 12 to help at a summer camp.
a. What is the probability that you, your brother, and your friend are chosen?
Answer:
nCa = n!/a!(n – a)!
12C3 = 12!/3!(12 – 3)!
= 12!/3!(9)!
= 12 . 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1/(3 . 2 . 1)(9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)
= 12 . 11 . 10/3 . 2 . 1
= 2 . 11 . 10
12C3 = 220
P = Number of favorable outcomes/Total number of outcomes = 1/220

b. The first person chosen will be a counselor, the second will be a lifeguard, and the third will be a cook. What is the probability that you are the cook, your brother is the lifeguard, and your friend is the counselor?
Answer:
We know that number of permutations of n objects taken at a time (a ≤ n)
nPa = n!/(n – a)!
12P3 = 12!/(12 – 3)!
=  12!/9!
= (12 . 11 . 10 . 9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1)/(9 . 8 . 7 . 6 . 5 . 4 . 3 .  2 . 1)
= 12 . 11 . 10
= 1320
12P3 = 1320
P = 1/1320

Probability Cumulative Assessment

Question 1.
According to a survey, 63% of Americans consider themselves sports fans. You randomly select 14 Americans to survey.
a. Draw a histogram of the binomial distribution of your survey.
Answer:
p = P(the American is a sports fan) = 63% = 0.63
1 – p = P(the American is not a sports fan) = 1 – 0.63= 0.37
P (0 success) = 12C0 p0(1 – p)12-0
= 12!/0!(12 – 0)! 1 . 0.3712
= 0.3712
P (One American is a sports fans) =12C1 p¹(1 – p)12-1
=0.000134506
P (Two Americans are sports fans) =12C2 p2(1 – p)12-2
=0.001259628
P (Three Americans are sports fans) =12C3 p3(1 – p)12-3
=0.007149239
P (Four American is a sports fans) =12C4 p4(1 – p)12-4
=0.027389316
P (Five American is a sports fans) =12C5 p5(1 – p)12-5
=0.07461738
P (Six American is a sports fans) =12C6 p6(1 – p)12-6
=0.148226418
P (Seven American is a sports fans) =12C7 p7(1 – p)12-7
=0.216330447
P (Eight American is a sports fans) =12C8 p8(1 – p)12-8
=0.230216523
P (Nine American is a sports fans) =12C9 p9(1 – p)12-9
=0.174217909
P (Ten American is a sports fans) =12C10p10(1 – p)12-10
=0.088992392
P (Eleven American is a sports fans) =12C11 p11(1 – p)12-11
=0.023755047
P (Twelve American is a sports fans) =12C1 p12(1 – p)12-12
=0.003909188
Big Ideas math Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_8

b. What is the most likely number of Americans who consider themselves Sports fans?
Answer:
From histogram in part a and based on the calculations in the first part
We know that,
P(Eight Americans are sports fans) = 0.23
This probability is highest, so we can conclude that the most likley outcome is that eight of the 12 selected Americans consider themselves sports fans.

c. What is the probability at least 7 Americans consider themselves sports fans?
Answer:
In this part we have to find dthe probability that
P(At least 7 Americans consider themselves sports fans)
= P(Seven American is a sports fans) + P(Eight American is a sports fans) + P(Nine American is a sports fans) + P(Ten American is a sports fans) + P(Eleven American is a sports fans) + P(Twelve American is a sports fans)
= 0.2163 + 0.2302 + 0.1742 + 0.08899 + 0.0275 + 0.0039
= 0.7412
Therefore, we can conclude that the probability that at least 7 Americans consider themselves sports fans is 0.7412

Question 2.
What is the arc length of \(\widehat{A B}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 97
(A) 3.5 π cm
(B) 7 π cm
(C) 21 π cm
(D) 42 π cm
Answer:
Arc length of \(\widehat{A B}\) = 105/360 × 2π × 12 = 7π cm

Question 3.
you order a fruit smoothie made with 2 liquid ingredients and 3 fruit ingredients from the menu shown. How many different fruit smoothies can you order?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 98
Answer:

Question 4.
The point (4, 3) is on a circle with center (- 2, – 5), What is the standard equation of the circle?
Answer:
Given,
The point (4, 3) is on a circle with center (- 2, – 5)
(x – h)² + (y – k)² = r²
Substitute the values in the given equation
(4 – (-2))² + (3 – (-5))² = r²
100 = r²
r = √100 = 10
General equation of circle
(x – h)² + (y – k)² = r²
Substitute the values in the given equation
(x – (-2))² + (y – (-5))² = 10²
(x + 2)² + (y + 5)² = 100

Question 5.
Find the length of each line segment with the given endpoints. Then order the line segments from shortest to longest.
a. A(1, – 5), B(4, 0)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dAB = √(4 – 1)² + (0 – (-5))²
= √34
= 5.83

b. C(- 4, 2), D(1, 4)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dCD = √(1 – (-4))² + (4 – 2)²
= √29
= 5.39

c. E(- 1, 1), F(- 2, 7)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dEF = √(-2 – (-1))² + (7 – 1)²
= √37
= 6.083

d. G(- 1.5, 0), H(4.5, 0)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dGH = √(4.5 – (-1.5))² + (0 – 0)²
= √36
= 6

e. J(- 7, – 8), K(- 3, – 5)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dJK = √(-3 – (-7))² + (-5 – (-8))²
= √25
= 5

f. L(10, – 2), M(9, 6)
Answer:
The general equation of distance between 2 points is
d = √(x2 – x1)² + (y2 – y1)²
dLM = √(9 – 10)² + (6 – (-2))²
= √65
= 8.06
Therefore, the line segments in ascending order are JK < CD < AB < GH < EF < LM

Question 6.
Use the diagram to explain why the equation is true.
P(A) + P(B) = P(A or B) + P(A and B)
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 99
Answer:
Given,
P(A) = 8/12
P(B) = 7/12
P(A or B) = 12/12
P(A and B) = 3/12
P(A) + P(B) = P(A or B) + P(A and B)
8/12 + 7/12 = 12/12 + 3/12
5/4 = 5/4

Question 7.
A plane intersects a cylinder. Which of the following cross sections cannot be formed by this intersection?
(A) line
(B) triangle
(C) rectangle
(D) circle
Answer:
If the plane is tangent to the curved surface of the cylinder, then the intersection is a line.
If the plane is cuts the cylinder parallel to its circular base, then the intersection is a circle.
If the plane cuts the cylinder perpendicular to its circular base and parallel to its curved surface, then the intersection is a rectangle.
The correct answer is option B.

Question 8.
A survey asked male and female students about whether the prefer to take gym class or choir. The table shows the results of the survey,
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 100
a. Complete the two-way table.
Answer:
From the given table we first find the joint frequencies.
Number of people who prefer gym class = 106 – 49 = 57
On the other hand, we know that 57 people prefer gym class, of which 23 was female.
Number of male who prefer the gym class = 57 – 23 = 34
Number of male who prefer the choir class = 50 – 34 = 16
Number of female who prefer the choir class = 49 – 16 = 33
Now, we will find the remaining marginal frequencies. Hence we know that 23 female prefer gym class and 33 female prefer choir class.
Total number of female is 23 + 33 = 56
BIM Answers Geometry Chapter 12 Probability img_9

b. What is the probability that a randomly selected student is female and prefers choir?
Answer:
P = Number of female who prefer choir class/Total number of students
= 33/106
= 0.31

c. What is the probability that a randomly selected male student prefers gym class?
Answer:
P(Prefer gym class|Male) = P(Male and prefer gym class)/P(Male)
= Number of male who prefer gym class/Number of male students
= 34/50
= 0.68

Question 9.
The owner of a lawn-mowing business has three mowers. As long as one of the mowers is working. the owner can stay productive. One of the mowers is unusable 10% of the time, one is unusable 8% of the time, and one is unusable 18% of the time.
a. Find the probability that all three mowers are unusable on a given day.
Answer:
P(A) = 10% = 0.1
P(B) = 8% = 0.08
P(C) = 18% = 0.18
\(\bar{A}\) = {The first mower is usable}
\(\bar{B}\) = {The second mower is usable}
\(\bar{C}\) = {The third mower is usable}
P(\(\bar{A}\)) = 1 – 0.1 = 0.9
P(\(\bar{B}\)) = 1 – 0.08 = 0.92
P(\(\bar{C}\)) = 1 – 0.18 = 0.82
Event that all three mowers are unusable on a given day is A and B and C. If we assume that the operation of the mowers are independent, then we get the probability that all three mowers are unusable on a given day as
P(A and B and C) = P(A) . P(B) . P(C) = 0.1 × 0.08 × 0.18 = 0.00144

b. Find the probability that at least one of the mowers is unusable on a given day.
Answer:
Event at least one of mowers is unusable on a given day is equivalent to event one of mowers is unusable on a given day or two of mowers is unusable on a given day.
A and \(\bar{B}\) and \(\bar{C}\) or \(\bar{A}\) and B and \(\bar{C}\) or \(\bar{A}\) and \(\bar{B}\) and C
On the other hand, event two of mowers is unusable on a given day is
A and B and \(\bar{C}\) or \(\bar{A}\) and B and C or A and \(\bar{B}\) and C
P(A and \(\bar{B}\) and \(\bar{C}\)) + P(\(\bar{A}\) and B and \(\bar{C}\)) + P(\(\bar{A}\) and \(\bar{B}\) and C)
= 0.1 × 0.92 × 0.82 + 0.9 × 0.08 × 0.82 + 0.9 × 0.92 × 0.18
= 0.28352
P(A and \(\bar{B}\) and \(\bar{C}\)) + P(\(\bar{A}\) and B and \(\bar{C}\)) + P(\(\bar{A}\) and \(\bar{B}\) and C)
= 0.1 × 0.08 × 0.82 + 0.9 × 0.08 × 0.18  + 0.1 × 0.92 × 0.18
= 0.03608
P(At least one of mowers is unusable) = P(One of mowers is unusable) + P(two of mowers is unusable)
= 0.28352 + 0.03608
= 0.3196

c. Suppose the least-reliable mower stops working completely. How does this affect the probability that the lawn-moving business can be productive on a given day?
Answer:
If the least-reliable mower stops working completely, this will not affect the probability that the lawn mowing business can be productive on a given day, because we know that as long as one of the mowers is working, the owner can stay productive.

Question 10.
You throw a dart at the board shown. Your dart is equally likely to hit any point inside the square board. What is the probability your dart lands in the yellow region?
Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability 101
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{36}\)
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{12}\)
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{9}\)
(D) \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)
Answer:
The total area of the given figure is (6(2))² = 144 sq. units
Area of the red circle = π × 2² = 4π
The area of the yellow ring is π × (4² – 2²) = 12π
The area of the blue ring is π × (6² – 4²) = 20π
Therefore, the probability of hitting the blue region is 12π/144 = π/12
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Conclusion:

Hope you are all satisfied with the given solutions. You can get free access to Download Big Ideas Math Geometry Answers Chapter 12 Probability pdf from here. Bookmark our Big Ideas Math Answers to get detailed solutions for all Geometry Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume

Wanna get the best preparatory material of Big Ideas Math 6th Grade Chapters? If yes, then you have hit the exact page. Here, in this article, we are providing in-depth concepts of area, surface area, and volume. You can understand all the concepts with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Solutions. We are providing the step-by-step procedure and its explanations for all the problems using the tips and figures. Follow Big Ideas Math Book  6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 and know shortcuts, time management, etc. Understand all the concepts of area, surface area, and volume in Big Ideas Math Book Solution Key. Click on the below-given pdf links of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 and get the solutions here.

Big Ideas Math Book 6th Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume

To excel in the exam, candidates of 6th standard have to refer to the important preparatory material of Big Ideas Math Book Answer Key Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume. If you facing difficulty in solving or calculating the problems, you can easily understand them with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Answer Key Chapter 7. Check the below sections to know the performance, various chapters involved in this concept. You can find the various chapters like area of parallelograms, area of triangles, areas of trapezoids, three-dimensional figures, and so on.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Areas of Parallelograms

Lesson: 2 Areas of Triangles

Lesson: 3 Areas of Trapezoids and Kites

Lesson: 4 Three-Dimensional Figures

Lesson: 5 Surface Areas of Prisms

Lesson: 6 Surface Areas of Pyramids

Lesson: 7 Volumes of Rectangular Prisms

Chapter 7 – Area, Surface Area, and Volume

Area, Surface Area, and Volume STEAM Video/Performance

Packaging Design

Surface area can be used to determine amounts of materials needed to create objects. Describe another situation in which you need to find the surface area of an object.

Watch the STEAM Video “Packaging Design.” Then answer the following questions. Alex is cutting a design out of paper and folding it to form a box.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 1

Question 1.
Tory says that the length of the design is 47 inches and the width is 16 inches. Show several ways that you can arrange three of the designs on a roll of paper that is 48 inches wide. You can make the length of the paper as long as is needed.

Answer:
We can make the length of the paper = 15.6666 inches

Explanation:
Given that the length of the design = 47 inches
that the width of the design = 16 inches
area of the design = 752 inches
They can arrange the three of the design on a roll of paper that = 48 inches
(752/48)
15.6666 inches
Question 2.
Tory says that the cut-out design has an area of 619 square inches. What is the least possible amount of paper that is wasted when you cut out three of the designs?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 2

Answer:
The least amount of paper that is wasted when you cut out three of the designs = 12.89

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle = breadth x height
619 square inches = 48 in x length
619 = 48l
l = 619/48
l = 12.89

Performance Task

Maximizing the Volumes of Boxes

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given the dimensions of a small box and two larger boxes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 3
You will be asked to determine how many small boxes can be placed in each larger box. When a company is deciding on packaging for a product, why should the surface area of the packaging also be considered?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 4

Area, Surface Area, and Volume Gettig Ready for chapter 7

Chapter Exploration

The formulas for the areas of polygons can be derived from one area formula, the area of a rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 5

Work with a partner. Find (a) the dimensions of the figures and (b) the areas of the figures. What do you notice?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 6

Answer:
The area of the rectangle = The product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the width and the product of the height

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle is equal to the area of the parallelogram
The area of the rectangle = the product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the rectangle = length x width
area = l x w
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the width
area = base x height
area = b x h

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 7

Answer:
The  area of the rectangle = the product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the parallelogram = (1/2) x the product of the base and the product of the height

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle is equal to the area of the parallelogram
The area of the rectangle = the product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the rectangle = length x width
area = l x w
The area of the triangle =(1/2) x  the product of the base and the product of the width
area =(1/2) base x height
area =(1/2) b x h

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 8

Answer:
The  area of the rectangle = the product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x height x (base 1 + base 2)

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle is equal to the area of the parallelogram
The area of the rectangle = the product of the length and the product of the width
The area of the rectangle = length x width
area = l x w
The area of the trapezoid =(1/2) x product of the height  and the product of the bases
area =(1/2) x height x bases
area =(1/2) x height (b1 + b2)

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 9

Lesson 7.1 Areas of Parallelograms

A polygon is a closed figure in a plane that is made up of three or more line segments that intersect only at their endpoints. Several examples of polygons are parallelograms, rhombuses, triangles, trapezoids, and kites.
The formula for the area of a parallelogram can be derived from the definition of the area of a rectangle. Recall that the area of a rectangle is the product of its length ℓ and its width w. The process you use to derive this and other area formulas in this chapter is called deductive reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 10

EXPLORATION 1
Deriving the Area Formula of a Parallelogram
Work with a partner.
a. Draw any rectangle on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Cut the rectangle into two pieces that can be arranged to form a parallelogram. What do you notice about the areas of the rectangle and the parallelogram?
b. Copy the parallelogram below on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Cut the parallelogram and rearrange the pieces to find its area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 11
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 12
c. Draw any parallelogram on a piece of centimeter grid paper and find its area. Does the area change when you use a different side as the base? Explain your reasoning.
d. Use your results to write a formula for the area A of a parallelogram.

Answer:
c : The area of the parallelogram = the product of the width and the product of the height
area = width x height
area = w x h
Yes the area changes.
We use the bases as equal length and width as equal length
d : the area of the parallelogram = the product of the width and the product of the height

c : The area of the parallelogram = the product of the width and the product of the height
area = width x height
area = w x h
Yes the area changes.
We use the bases as equal length and width as equal length
d : the area of the parallelogram = the product of the width and the product of the height

7.1 Lesson

The area of a polygon is the amount of surface it covers. You can find the area of a parallelogram in much the same way as you can find the area of a rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 13

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 13.1

Try It

Find the area of the parallelogram.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 14

Answer:
Area = 500 m

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base b and its height h.
area = b x h
b = 20 m, h = 25 m
So the Area of the parallelogram = 500 m

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 15

Answer;
Area = 126 in

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of base b and its height h
area = b x h
b = 7 in , h = 18 in
So area = 126 in

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 16

Answer:
615 yd

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of base b and its height h
area = b x h
b = 30 yd, h = 20.5 yd
So area = 615 yd

When finding areas, you may need to convert square units. The diagrams at the left show that there are 9 square feet per square yard.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 17
1 yd2 = (1 yd)(1 yd) = (3 ft)(3 ft) = 9 ft2
You can use a similar procedure to convert other square units.

Try It

Question 4.
Find the area of the parallelogram in square centimeters.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 18

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
Area = 400 cms

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 4 m x 10 m
area = 40 m
1 meter = 100 centimeters
40 meter = 400 centimeters
area = 400 cm

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
WRITING
Explain how to use the area of a rectangle to find the area of a parallelogram

Answer:
Area of the rectangle = length x breadth
Area of the parallelogram =   base x height

Explanation:
Area of the rectangle = length x breadth
area = l x b
Area of the parallelogram =   base x height
area =  b x h
area =  bh

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the parallelogram.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 19

Answer:
area = 80 ft

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = b x h
b = 16 ft and h = 5 ft given
area = 16 x 5
area = 80 ft

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 20

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 14 . 4 km

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = b x h
b = 3 km and h = 4.8 km given
area = 3 x 4.8
area = 14.4 km

Question 8.
REASONING
Draw a parallelogram that has an area of 24 square inches.

Answer:
We have to assume that the base = 4 square inches and the height = 6 square inches

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
The side of an office building in Hamburg, Germany, is in the shape of a parallelogram. The area of the side of the building is about 2150 square meters. What is the length x of the portion of the building that extends over the river?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 21

Answer:
The length of the portion of the building that extends over the river = 45 m

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the bases and the product of the bases
area = 2150 square meters given
area = 25 m x (39 +47) given that height = 25 and base = 39
area = 25 x (86)
area = 2150
Thus the length of the portion of the building that extends over the river = 45 m

Question 10.
You make a photo prop for a school fair. You cut a 10-inch square out of a parallelogram-shaped piece of wood. What is the area of the photo prop?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 22

Answer:
The area of the photo prop = 32

Explanation:
the area of the photo prop = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = h x b
area = 8 x 4
area = 32 ft

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A galaxy contains a parallelogram-shaped dust field. The dust field has a base of 150 miles. The height is 14% of the base. What is the area of the dust field?

Answer:
The area of the dust field =3,150

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the height and the product of the base
area = h x b given that height = 14% = (14/100) x 150 = 21, base = 150 miles
area = 3150

Areas of Parallelograms Homework & Practice 7.1

Review & Refresh

Graph the equation.

Question 1.
y = 4x

Answer:
:

Explanation:
The given equation = y = 4x
for suppose x = 0, then y = 0
x = 1 , then y = 4 that means (1,4) y = 4 x 1 = 4
x = 2 , then y = 8 that means (2,8) y = 4 x 2 = 8
x = 3 , then y = 12 that means (3,12) y = 4 x 3 = 12

Question 2.
y = x + 3

Answer:

Explanation:
The given equation = y = x + 3
for suppose x = 0, then y = 3
x = 1 , then y = 4 that means (1,4) y = 1 + 3 = 4
x = 2 , then y = 5 that means (2, 5) y = 2 + 3  = 5
x = 3 , then y = 6 that means (3,16) y = 3 + 3 = 6
x = 4 , then y = 7 that means (4, 7) y = 4 + 3 = 7

Question 3.
y = 2x + 5

Answer:

Explanation:
The given equation = y = 2x + 5
for suppose x = 0, then y = 5
x = 1 , then y = 7 that means (1,7) y = 2 + 5 = 7
x = 2 , then y = 9 that means (2, 9) y = 4 + 5  = 9
x = 3 , then y = 11 that means (3,11) y = 6 + 5 = 11
x = 4 , then y = 13 that means (4, 13) y = 8 + 5 = 13

Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 23

Answer:
1: 2 ratio

Explanation:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 24

Answer:
1 : 2 ratio

Explanation:

Write the prime factorization of the number.

Question 6.
55

Answer:
5 . 11

Explanation:
5 x 11 = 55
S0 5,11

Question 7.
60

Answer:
2 x 2 x 3 x 5

Explanation:
2 x 30 = 60
2 x 15 = 30
5 x 3 = 15
3 x 1 = 3

Question 8.
150

Answer:
3 . 5 . 5 . 2

Explanation:
3 x 50 = 150
5 x 10 = 50
5 x 2 = 10
2 x 1 = 2

Question 9.
126

Answer:
2 . 3 . 3 . 7

Explanation:
2 x 63 = 126
3 x 21 = 63
3 x 7 = 21
7 x 1 = 7

Add or subtract.

Question 10.
2.36 + 15.71

Answer:
2.36 + 15.71 = 18.07

Explanation:


Question 11.
9.035 – 6.144

Answer:
9.035 – 6.144 = 2.891

Explanation:

Question 12.
28.351 – 19.3518

Answer:
28.351 = 19.3518 = 8.9992

Explanation:

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Rearrange the parallelogram as a rectangle. Then find the area. (See Exploration 1, p. 285.)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 25

Answer:

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 26

Answer:

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 27

Answer:

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the parallelogram.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 28

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 18 ft

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 6 ft height = 3 ft
area = 18 ft
Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 29

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 840 mm

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 20 mm height = 42 ft
area = 840 mm

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 30

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 187 km

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 17 km height = 11km
area = 187 km

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 31

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 3750 cm

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 75 cm  height = 50 cm
area = 3750 cm

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 32

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 243 in

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 13.5 in  height = 18 in
area = 243 in

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 33

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 894 mi

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the height
area = b x h given that base = 24 in, height = 37 x (1/4)
area = 24 x 37.25
area = 894 mi

Question 22.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the area of the parallelogram. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 34

Answer:
Yes my friend is correct

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = 8 m x 15 m
Given that base = 8m and height = 15 m
area = base x height
area = 8 m x 15 m
area = 120 m

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A ceramic tile in the shape of a parallelogram has a base of 4 inches and a height of 1.5 inches. What is the area of the tile?

Answer:
The area of the tile =  6 inches

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 4 x 1.5
area = 6 inches

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the parallelogram. Round to the nearest hundredth if necessary.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 35

Answer:
4800 cm

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 6 x 8
area = 48 m
1 meter = 100 centimeter
48 m = 4800 cm

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 36

Answer:
1,121.64096

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 1320 yd x 1496 yd
area = 1974720yd
1 yard = 0.000568 mile
1974720 yd = 1,121.64096 miles

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 37

Answer:
67.4 ft

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 5 m x 4 m
area = 20 m
1 meter = 3 feet 3.37 inches
20 m = 67 . 4 ft

Question 27.
OPEN-ENDED
Your deck has an area of 128 square feet. After adding a section, the area will be (s2 + 128) square feet. Draw a diagram of how this can happen.

Answer:

Question 28.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You use the parallelogram-shaped sponge to create the T-shirt design. The area of the design is 66 square inches. How many times do you use the sponge to create the design? Draw a diagram to support your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 37.1

Answer:
33 times is used to the sponge to create the design = 33
Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = base x height
area = 3 x 1
area = 3  inches
The area of the design = 66 inches
66/3 = 33

FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
Find the missing dimension of the parallelogram described.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 38

Answer:
height = 9 ft
Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 6 ft  x 9 ft
area = 54 ft
So height = 54

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 39

Answer:
base = 6.5 cm

Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = base x height
area = 6 . 5 cm  x 2.5 cm
area = 16 .25
So height = 2.5 cm

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 40

Answer:
height = 4 yd

Explanation:
5(x + 4) = 5x + 20

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
The staircase has three identical parallelogram-shaped panels. The horizontal distance between each panel is 4.25 inches. The area of each panel is 287 square inches. What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 41

Answer:
The value of x = 14

Explanation:
(1/2)bx = 287
(1/2) x 14 x x = 287
7x = 287
x = 287/7
x = 41
50.5 -8
42.5 x 2 = 8.50

Question 33.
LOGIC
Each dimension of a parallelogram is multiplied by a positive number n. Write an expression for the area of the new parallelogram.

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2)bn x hn
(1/2) bhn

Question 34.
CRITICAL THINKING
Rearrange the rhombus shown to write a formula for the area of a rhombus in terms of its diagonals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 42

Answer:
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) ab
area = (1/2) x ab

Explanation:
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) ab
area = (1/2) x ab

Lesson 7.2 Areas of Triangles

EXPLORATION 1

Deriving the Area Formula of a Triangle
Work with a partner.
a. Draw any parallelogram on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Cut the parallelogram into two identical triangles. How can you use the area of the parallelogram to find the area of each triangle?
b. Copy the triangle below on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Find the area of the triangle. Explain how you found the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 43
c. Draw any acute triangle on a piece of centimeter grid paper and find its area. Repeat this process for a right triangle and an obtuse triangle.
d. Do the areas change in part(c) when you use different sides as the base? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a : The area of the parallelogram = (1/2) x b x h
The area of the triangle = base x height
b : The area of the triangle = base x height
area = b x h
c : The area of the acute-angled triangle = (1/2) x b x h
The area of the right-angled triangle = (1/2) x base x perpendicular
The area of the obtuse-angled triangle =(1/2) x b x h

Explanation:
a :
b :
c :



Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 44
e. Use your results to write a formula for the area A of a triangle. Use the formula to find the area of the triangle shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 45

Answer:
15 m

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h given that b= 6 m ,h = 5 m
area = (1/2) x 30
area = 15 m

7.2 Lesson

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 46

Try It

Find the area of the triangle

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 47

Answer:
22 ft

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x bh
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of base and the product of the height
b = 11 ft , h = 4 ft
area = (1/2) x bh
area = (1/2) x 11 x 4
area = (1/2) x 44
area = 22 ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 48

Answer:
Area = 60 cm

Explanation:
The area  of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
b = 15 cm, h = 8cm
area = (1/2) x 15 x 8
area = (1/2) x 120
area = 60

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 49

Answer:
area = 110 m

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
So the b = 22m ,h= 10 m
area= (1/2) x 10 x 22
area = (1/2) x 220
area = 110 m

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 50

Answer:
6.5 yd

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of base b and the product of the height h
So the b = (13/2) yd h = 2 yd
area = (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 6.5 x 2
area = (1/2) x 13
area = 6.5

Try It

Find the missing dimension of the triangle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 51

Answer:
Base = 8 cm

Explanation:
The area of the triangle =(1/2) x  the product of the base b and the product of height h
area of the triangle = 24 cm given
So the height = 6cm given
area =  (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 8 x 6
area = (1/2) x 48
area = 24
So base = 8 cm

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 52

Answer:
height = 17.5ft

Explanation:
The area of the triangle =(1/2) x  the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area of the triangle = 175 ft given,
So we have to find the height?
area = (1/2) x 20 x 17.5
area = (1/2) x 350
area = 175
So the height = 17.5 ft

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
FINDING AREA
Find the area of the triangle at the left.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 53

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 12

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of base and the product of the height
b = 8 , h = 3
area = (1/2) x bh
area = (1/2) x 8 x 3
area = (1/2) x 24
area = 12

Question 8.
WRITING
Explain how to use the area of a parallelogram to find the area of a triangle.

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
The area of the triangle = half x  the product of the base b and the product of the height h

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = b x h
The area of the triangle = half x the product of the base and the height
area = (1/2) x b x h
FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
Find the missing dimension of the triangle.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 54

Answer:
base = 10 mm

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2) x base x height
area = (1/2) x 10 mm x 6 mm
area = (1/2) x 60 mm
area = 30 mm
So base = 10 mm
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 55

A composite figure is made up of triangles, squares, rectangles, and other two-dimensional figures. To find the area of a composite figure, separate it into figures with areas you know how to find. This is called decomposition.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 11.
A wildlife conservation group buys the 9 square miles of land shown. What is the distance from Point A to Point B?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 56

Answer:
The distance from point A to point B = 3 miles

Explanation:
The  area of the triangle = (1/2) ab
Given that  the land shown = 9 square miles
(1/2)bh = triangle ABC + triangle BCD
(3/2)b + (3/2)b = 9
(6/2)b = 9
3 b = 9
b = 3 miles
Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the area of the side of the chimney. Explain how you found the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 57

Answer:
The area of the chimney = 31.5 sq. ft

Explanation:
The area of the chimney = (1/2) x base x height
area = (1/2)  x 3 x 21
area = 31.5 sq. ft

Areas of Triangles Homework & Practice 7.2

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the parallelogram.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 58

Answer:  
The area of the parallelogram = 72 in

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = product of the height h and the product of the base b
b = 12 in, h = 6 in given
area =  12 x 6
area = 72 in

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 59

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 10.5 km

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base b and the product of the height h
b = 3.5 km, h = 3km given
area = 3.5 x 3
area = 10.5 km

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 60

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 255 mi

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base b and the product of the height h
b = 17 mi, h = 15 mi given
area = 17 x 15
area = 255 mi

Tell which property the statement illustrates.

Question 4.
n . 1 = n

Answer:
The product of x = the product of y

Explanation:
The product of x = n x 1 = n
the product of y = n
n = n

Question 5.
4 . m = m . 4

Answer:
The product of x = the product of y

Explanation:
The product of x = m x 4 = 4 m
the product of y = m x 4 = 4 m
4 . m = m . 4

Question 6.
(x + 2) + 5 = x + (2 + 5)

Answer:
The product of x = the product of y

Explanation:
The product of x = (x + 2) + 5
the product of y =  x + (2 +5)
(x +2) +5 = x + (2 +5)

Question 7.
What is the first step when using order of operations?
A. Multiply and divide from left to right.
B. Add and subtract from left to right.
C. Perform operations in grouping symbols.
D. Evaluate numbers with exponents.

Answer:
Evaluate numbers with exponents

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS
Find the area of the triangle by forming a parallelogram. (See Exploration 1, p. 291.)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 61

Answer:
The area of the right angled triangle = (1/2) x ab

Explanation:

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 62

Answer:
obtused angled triangle = (1/2) x b xh

Explanation:

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 63

Answer:
acute angled triangle

Explanation:

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the triangle.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 64

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 6 cm

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b = 3 cm , h = 4 cm
area = (1/2) x 3 x 4
area = (1/2) x 12
area = 6 cm

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 65

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 90 mi

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b = 20 mi  , h = 9 mi
area = (1/2) x 20 x 9
area = (1/2) x 180
area = 90 sq. miles

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 66

Answer:
The area of the triangle =1620 in

Explanation:

Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b =60 in , h = 54 in
area = (1/2) x 3240
area = 1620 in

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 67

Answer:

The area of the triangle = 189 mm

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b =21 mm , h = 18 mm
area = (1/2) x 378
area = 189 mm

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 68

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 1125 cm

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b =75 cm , h = 30 cm
area = (1/2) x 2250
area = 1125 cm

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 69

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 132 m

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
So b =8 m , h = 33 m
area = (1/2) x 264
area = 132 m

Question 17.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the area of the triangle. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 70

Answer:
Yes my friend is correct

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
Sob =10 m , h = 12 m
area = (1/2) x 120
area = 60 m

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Estimate the area of the cottonwood leaf.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 71

Answer:
The area of the cottonwood leaf = 10 in

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
Sob = 5 in , h =  4 in
area = (1/2) x 20
area = 10 in

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A shelf has the shape of a triangle. The base of the shelf is 36 centimeters, and the height is 18 centimeters. Find the area of the shelf in square inches.

Answer:
The shape of the triangle = 324

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x b x h
Sob = 36 cm , h =  18 cm
area = (1/2) x 648
area = 324 sq. cm

Question 19.

FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
Find the missing dimension of the triangle.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 72

So base = 7 m

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 73

Answer:
Base of the triangle = 4.66 ft

Explanation:
The area of the triangle =(1/2) x  the product of the base b and the product of height h
area of the triangle = 14 ft given
So the height = 6 ft given
area =  (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 4.66 x 6
area = (1/2) x 27.96
area = 14
soo base = 4.66 ft

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 74

Answer:
Height = 2.66 in

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) x the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2) x 1.5 x h given that area = 2 in
2 = (1/2) x 1.5h
1.5 h = 4
h = (4/1.5)
h = 2.66 in
COMPOSITE FIGURES
Find the area of the figure.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 75

Answer:
The area of the figure = 44 ft

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle = 2 x(length + breadth)
area = 2 x (12 +10)
area = 2 x (22)
area = 44 sq. ft

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 76

Answer:
The area of the figure = 52 cm

Explanation:
The area of the rectangle = 2 x(length + breadth)
area = 2 x (11 +15)
area = 2 x (26)
area = 52 cm

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 77

Answer:
The area of the perimeter = 5/2 x a x b

Explanation:
The area of the perimeter = (5/2) x a x b
where a = middle point
b = sides

Question 26.
WRITING
You know the height and the perimeter of an equilateral triangle. Explain how to find the area of the triangle. Draw a diagram to support your reasoning.

Answer:
The perimeter of the equilateral triangle = a  x a x a = 3a

Explanation:
The perimeter of the equilateral triangle = 3a
height of the equilateral triangle = h
the area of the triangle = (1/2) x product of base b and the product of the height h
area = (1/2) x bh

Question 27.
CRITICAL THINKING
The total area of the polygon is 176 square feet. What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 78

Answer:
The value of x = 6

Explanation:
The area of the polygon = 176 square feet given
area = 16 x 8 = 128
area = 176 – 128 = 48
The area of the right angle triangle = (a x b )/2
area = (8 x X)/2
48 = 4x + 4x
8x = 48
x = (48/8)
x = 6 ft

Question 28.
REASONING
The base and the height of Triangle A are one-half the base and the height of Triangle B. How many times greater is the area of Triangle B?

Answer:
2 times

Explanation:
The triangle B is 2 times greater than the triangle A

Question 29.
STRUCTURE
Use what you know about finding areas of triangles to write a formula for the area of a rhombus in terms of its diagonals. Compare the formula with your answer to Section 7.1 Exercise 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 79

Answer:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) ab
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) ab

Explanation:
The area of the triangle is equal to the area of the rhombus
area of the triangle = (1/2) ab
area of the rhombus = (1/2) ab

Lesson 7.3 Areas of Trapezoids and Kites

EXPLORATION 1
Deriving the Area Formula of a Trapezoid
Work with a partner.
a. Draw any parallelogram on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Cut the parallelogram into two identical trapezoids. How can you use the area of the parallelogram to find the area of each trapezoid?
b. Copy the trapezoid below on a piece of centimeter grid paper. Find the area of the trapezoid. Explain how you found the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 80
c. Draw any trapezoid on a piece of centimeter grid paper and find its area.
d. Use your results to write a formula for the area A of a trapezoid. Use the formula to find the area of the trapezoid shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 81
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 82

7.3 Lesson

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 83
You can use decomposition to find areas of trapezoids and kites. A kite is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of adjacent sides with the same length and opposite sides with different lengths.

Try It
Find the area of the figure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 87

Answer:
76.5 in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (5 + 12). Given that b1 = 5 and b2 = 12
area = (1/2) x 9(17) given that h = 9
area = (1/2) x 153
area = 76.5 sq. in

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 88

Answer:
65.45 sq. mi

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (3 + 3). Given that b1 = 3 and b2 = 3
area = (1/2) x 7.7(17) given that h = 7.7
area = (1/2) x 130.9
area = 65.45 sq. mi

In Example 1(a), you could have used a copy of the trapezoid to form a parallelogram. As you may have discovered in the exploration, this leads to the following formula for the area of a trapezoid.

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 89

Try It
Find the area of the trapezoid.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 90

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 22.5 sq. mm

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (5 + 4). Given that b1 = 5 and b2 = 4
area = (1/2) x 8(9) given that h = 8
area = (1/2) x 45
area = 22.5 sq. mm

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 91

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 30 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (7.7 + 2.3). Given that b1 = 7.7 and b2 = 2.3
area = (1/2) x 6(10) given that h = 6 in
area = (1/2) x 60
area = 30 sq. in

Try It
Find the area of the figure.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 92

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid1 = 60 sq. m
The area of the trapezoid2= 88 sq. m

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid1 = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (5 + 5). Given that b1 = 5  and b2 = 5
area = (1/2) x 12(10) given that h = 6 m
area = (1/2) x  120
area = 60 sq. m
The area of the trapezoid2 = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (8 + 8). Given that b1 = 8  and b2 = 8
area = (1/2) x 11(16) given that h = 6 m
area = 88 sq. m
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 93

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 112 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (6+ 10). Given that b1 = 6 and b2 = 10
area = (1/2) x 14(16) given that h = 14 in
area = (1/2) x 224
area = 112 sq. in

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
WRITING
Explain how to use the area of a parallelogram to find the area of a trapezoid.

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = product of the height h and the product of the base b
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.

Question 8.
REASONING
What measures do you need to find the area of a kite?

Answer:
Rhombus is used to find the area of the kite

Explanation:
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) x side x height
area = (1/2) x s x h
area = (1/2) sh
kite is also same as the rhombus

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the figure.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 94

Answer:
Area = 52.5 sq. yd

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x height x the product of the base 1 and the base 2
area = (1/2) x height x (b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 5 x (9 + 12)
area = (1/2) x 5 x 21
area = (1/2) x 105
area = 52.5 sq. yd

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 95

Answer:
Area = 55 sq. m

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x height x the product of the base 1 and the base 2
area = (1/2) x height x (b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 10 x (7 + 4)
area = (1/2) x 10x 11
area = (1/2) x 110
area = 55 sq. m

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
An archaeologist estimates that the manuscript shown was originally a rectangle with a length of 20 inches. Estimate the area of the fragment that is missing.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 96

Answer:
144 square inches

Explanation:
The area of the right angle triangle = a x b where a = height b = base
area = a x b a=12 b = 18 – 6 = 12
area = 12 x 12
area = 144 sq. in

Question 12.
The stained-glass window is made of identical kite-shaped glass panes. The approximate dimensions of one pane are shown. The glass used to make the window costs $12.50 per square foot. Find the total cost of the glass used to make the window.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 97

Answer:
The total cost of the glass used to make the window is 14.4375 $
Explanation:
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) x the product of the side s and the product of height h
area  = (1/2) x2 ft x 2.31ft
area = ( 4.62/2)
Area = 2.31 x 12.50$
area = 14.4375$

Areas of Trapezoids and Kites Homework & Practice 7.3

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the triangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 98

Answer:
Area =63 in

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2)bh
area = (1/2) x 18 x 7
area = (126/2)
area = 63 in

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 99

Answer:
Area =26 sq. km

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2)bh
area = (1/2) x 8 x 6.5
area = (52/2)
area = 26 sq. km

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 100

Answer:
Area =25 sq. ft

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2)bh
area = (1/2) x 4 x 12.5
area = (50/2)
area = 25 sq. ft

Classify the quadrilateral./

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 101

Answer:
The above quadrilateral look similar to the rectangle

Explanation:
Rectangle
the area of the rectangle = length x width
area = l x w

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 102

Answer:
The above diagram is  similar to the trapezoid

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2) x b x h
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 103

Answer:
The above figure is similar to the parallelogram

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the height and the product of the base b
area = b x h

Question 7.
On a normal day, 12 airplanes arrive at an airport every 15 minutes. Which rate does not represent this situation?
A. 24 airplanes every 30 minutes
B. 4 airplanes every 5 minutes
C. 6 airplanes every 5 minutes
D. 48 airplanes each hour

Answer:
B

Explanation:
4 airplanes every 5 minutes
Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Find the area of the trapezoid by forming a parallelogram. (See Exploration 1, p. 297.)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 104

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h
area = (1/2) x b x h x l
area = (lxb/2)x h

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 105

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h
area = (1/2) x b x h x l
area = (lxb/2)x h

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 106

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x b x l x h
area = (1/2) x b x h x l
area = (lxb/2)x h

FINDING AREA
Use decomposition to find the area of the figure.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 107

Answer:
25 cm

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 2, height = 5 given
area = (1/2) x 5 x 2
area = 5
the area of another triangle = 5
the remaining = rectangle
area of rectangle = length x breadth
area = 15 + 5 + 5 = 25 cm

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 108

Answer:
92 sq. yd

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 2, height = 5 given
area = (1/2) x 8 x 2=3
area = 12
the remaining = rectangle
area of rectangle = length x breadth
area = 80 + 12 yd
area = 92 yd

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 109

Answer:
125 m

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 2, height = 5 given
area = (1/2) x 8 x 5= 20
area = 20
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 17, height = 5 given
area = (1/2) x 17 x 5= 20
area = 42.5
area  = 20 + 20+ 42.5 + 42.5
area = 125 m

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 110

Answer:
The area of the figure = 44 inches

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 9, height = 4 given
area = (1/2) x 9 x 4= 18
area = 18
the remaining = rectangle
area of rectangle = length x breadth
area = 18 + 18 + 4 +
area = 44 inches
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 111

Answer:
The area of the figure = 55  miles

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 10, height = 7 given
area = (1/2) x 10 x 7= 35
area = 35 mi
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 10, height = 4 given
area = (1/2) x 10 x 4= 20
area = 20 mi
area =  20 + 35 = 55
area = 55 mi

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 112

Answer:
The area of the figure = 17.68 miles

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 3.2, height = 3.8 given
area = (1/2) x 3.2 x 3.8= 35
area = 6.08
The area of the triangle = (1/2) b x h
base value = 3.2, height = 1.6given
area = (1/2) x 3.2 x 1.6= 20
area = 2.56
area =  2.56 + 2.56 + 6.08 + 6.08 = 17.68 kms
area = 17.68 miles

FINDING AREA
Find the area of the trapezoid.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 113

Answer:
28 in

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (b1 +b2)
area = (1/2) x 4 x  (6 + 8)/
area = (1/2) x 4 x 14
area = 28 sq. in

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 114

Answer:
10 sq. cm

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (b1 +b2)
area = (1/2) x 4 x  (3.5 + 1.5)
area = (1/2) x 4 x 5
area = 10 sq. cm

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 115

Answer:
105 sq. ft

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (b1 +b2)
area = (1/2) x 10 x  (13.5 + 7.5)
area = (1/2) x 10 x 21
area = 105 sq. ft

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the area of the trapezoid. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 116

Answer:
No my friend is not correct

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (b1 +b2)
area = (1/2) x 8 x  (6 +14)
area = (1/2) x 160
area = 80 sq. m

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Light shines through a window. What is the area of the trapezoid-shaped region created by the light?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 117

Answer:
16 sq. ft
Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (b1 +b2) given that b1 = 3 and b2 = 5
area = (1/2) x 4 x  (5 +3)
area = (1/2) x 32
area = 16 sq. ft

COMPOSITE FIGURES
Find the area of the figure.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 118

Answer:
178.5 sq. ft
Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (14 +7) given that b1 = 14 and b2 = 7
area = (1/2) x 17 x  (14 +7)
area = (1/2) x 357
area = 178.5 sq. ft

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 119

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 120

FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
Find the height of the trapezoid.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 121

Answer:
The height of the trapezoid = square root of height and bases

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 122

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 123

FINDING AREA
Find the area (in square feet) of a trapezoid with height hand bases b1 and b2.

Question 28.
h = 6 in.
b1 = 9 in.
b2 = 12 in.

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 0.43722 square feet

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (9 +12) given that b1 = 9 and b2 = 12
area = (1/2) x 6 x  (9 + 12)
area = (1/2) x 126
area = 63 in
1 inch = 0.00694 sq feet
so 0.43722sq ft

Question 29.
h = 12 yd
b1 = 5 yd
b2 = 7 yd

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 648 square feet

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (5 +7) given that b1 = 5 and b2 = 7
area = (1/2) x 12 x  (5 + 7)
area = (1/2) x 144
area =72 yd
1 yard = 9 sq feet
so 72 yd = 72 x 9 sq ft
area = 648 sq ft

Question 30.
h = 6 m
b1 = 3 m
b2 = 8 m

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 355.212 square feet

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (3 +8) given that b1 = 3 and b2 = 8
area = (1/2) x 6 x  (3 + 8)
area = (1/2) x 66
area =33 m
1 m  = 10.764 sq feet
so 33 m = 33 x 10.764sq ft
area = 355.212 sq ft

Question 31.
OPEN-ENDED
The area of the trapezoidal student election sign is 5 square feet. Find two possible values for each base length.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 123.1

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 4 ft

Explanation:
Area of trapezoid = half the product of the height and the product  of the bases
area = (1/2) x h x (4 +4) given that b1 = 4 and b2 = 4
area = (1/2) x 2 x  (4 + 4)
area = (1/2) x 8
area = 4 sq. ft

Question 32.
REASONING
How many times greater is the area of the floor covered by the larger speaker than by the smaller speaker?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 124

Answer:
2 times

Explanation:
The larger speaker is 2 times greater than that of the smaller speaker

Question 33.
REASONING
The rectangle and the trapezoid have the same area. What is the length ℓ of the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 125

Question 34.

Answer:
The area of the triangle =36
Explanation:
In the above given trapezoid the bases b1 = 12 and b2 = 24 height = 9 ft
So the area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x h x(b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 9 x (12 +24)
area = (1/2) x 324
area = 162
The length of the triangle = length X w
162 = 9l
length = 36 ft

CRITICAL THINKING
In the figureshown, the area of the trapezoid is less than twice the area of the triangle. Find the possible values of x. Can the trapezoid have the same area as the triangle? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 126

Answer:
The possible value of x = 15 in

Explanation:
In the above statement they said that the area of the trapezoid is less than twice the area of the triangle
area of the triangle = (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2)  x 15 x 10
area = (150/2) =75
Area of trapezoid = (1/2) x h x (b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 10 x (15 +15)
area = (300/2)
area = 150
So the area of the trapezoid is 2 times less than the area of the triangle.

Question 35.
STRUCTURE
In Section 7.1 Exercise 34 and Section 7.2 Exercise 29, you wrote a formula for the area of a rhombus in terms of its diagonals.
a. Use what you know about finding areas of figures to write a formula for the area of a kite in terms of its diagonals.
b. Are there any similarities between your formula in part(a) and the formula you found in Sections 7.1 and 7.2? Explain why or why not.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 127

Answer:
The area of the rhombus = (1/2) x side x height

Explanation:
The kite is looking the same as the rhombus
area of the rhombus = (1/2) x side x height

Lesson 7.4 Three-Dimensional Figures

EXPLORATION 1
Exploring Faces, Edges and Vertices

Work with a partner. Use the rectangular prism shown.
a. Prisms have faces, edges, and vertices. What does each of these terms mean?
b. What does it mean for lines or planes to be parallel or perpendicular in three dimensions? Use drawings to identify one pair of each of the following.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 128

  • parallel faces
  • parallel edges
  • edge parallel to a face
  • perpendicular faces
  • perpendicular edges
  • edge perpendicular to a face

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 128.1

EXPLORATION 2

Drawing Views of a Solid
Work with a partner. Draw the front, side, and top views of each stack of cubes. Then find the number of cubes in the stack. An example is shown at the left.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 129
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 129.1

Answer:
a: the number of cubes = 4
b: the number of cubes = 4
c: the number of cubes = 5
d: the number of cubes = 6

Explanation:
a:
b::
c:
d:

7.4 Lesson

A solid is a three-dimensional figure that encloses a space. A polyhedron is a solid whose faces are all polygons.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 130

Try It

Question 1.
Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the solid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 131

Answer:
faces = 5
edges = 12
vertices = 6

Explanation:
The number of faces = 5
the number of edges = 12
the number of vertices = 6

Key Ideas

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 132

Try It

Draw the solid.

Question 2.
square prism

Answer:

Question 3.
pentagonal pyramid

Answer:

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 132.1

Question 4.
FACES, EDGES, AND VERTICES
Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the solid at the left.

Answer:
faces : 3
edges : 6
vertices : 3

Explanation:
The number of faces of solid at the left = 3
edges = 6
vertices = 3

Question 5.
DRAWING A SOLID
Draw an octagonal prism.

Answer:

Question 6.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which figuredoes not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 133

Answer:
The 3rd figure is different from the other 3 figures

Explanation:
The 3rd figure is the same as the square prism
the other 3 figures are triangular prisms

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
The Flatiron Building in New York City is in the shape of a triangular prism. Draw a sketch of the building.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 134

Answer:

Question 8.
The Pyramid of the Niches is in El Tajín, an archaeological site in Veracruz, Mexico. Draw the front, side, and top views of the pyramid. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 135

Answer:
Front = 2
side = 1
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 9.
Use the point-cut diamond shown.
a. Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the diamond.
b. Draw the front, side, and top views of the diamond.
c. How can a jeweler transform the point-cut diamond into a table-cut diamond as in Example 3?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 136

Answer:
a : the number of faces = 8,edges = 16,vertices = 6
b : front = 2 , side = 2,top = 1

Explanation:
a : faces = 8
edges = 16
vertices = 6
b :

Three-Dimensional Figures Homework & Practice 7.4

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the figure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 137

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 15 ft
Explanation:
In the above given trapezoid the bases b1 = 12 and b2 = 24 height = 9 ft
So the area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x h x(b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 3 x (4 +6)
area = (1/2) x 30
area = 15
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 138

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 18 km
Explanation:
In the above given trapezoid the bases b1 = 12 and b2 = 24 height = 9 ft
So the area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x h x(b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 3 x (5 +7)
area = (1/2) x 36
area = 18 km

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 139

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 18 km
Explanation:
In the above given trapezoid the bases b1 = 12 and b2 = 24 height = 9 ft
So the area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x h x(b1 + b2)
area = (1/2) x 18 x (6 +6)
area = (1/2) x 216
area = 18 k

Find the LCM of the numbers.

Question 4.
8, 12

Answer:
24

Explanation:
Factors of 8 = 2 x 2 x2
factors of 12 = 2 x 2x 3
l.c.m. = 2 x 2 x 2x 3
l.c.m = 24

Question 5.
15, 25

Answer:
75

Explanation:
Factors of 15 = 5 x 3
factors of 25 = 5 x 5
l.c.m. = 5 x 3 x5
l.c.m = 75

Question 6.
32, 44

Answer:
352

Explanation:
Factors of 32 = 8 x 4
factors of 44 = 11 x 4
l.c.m. = 4 x 11 x 8
l.c.m = 352

Question 7.
3, 7, 10

Answer:
210

Explanation:
Factors of 3 = 3 x 1
factors of 7 = 7 x 1
factors of 10 =5 x 2
l.c.m. = 3 x 7 x 5 x 2
l.c.m = 210

A bucket contains stones and seashells. You are given the number of seashells in the bucket and the ratio of stones to seashells. Find the number of stones in the bucket.

Question 8.
18 seashells; 2 to 1

Answer:
No of stones = 12
No of seashells = 6

Explanation:
(18/3) = 6
2 : 1 = 12 : 6

Question 9.
30 seashells; 4 : 3

Answer:
No of stones = 17.14
No of seashells = 12.6

Explanation:
(30/7) = 4.2
4 : 3 = 17.4 : 12.6

Question 10.
40 seashells; 7 : 4

Answer:
No of stones = 25.45
No of seashells = 14.54

Explanation:
(40/11) = 3.63
7 : 4 = 25.45 : 14.54

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

DRAWING VIEWS OF A SOLID
Draw the front, side, and top views of the stack of cubes. Then find the number of cubes in the stack. (See Exploration 2, p. 305.)

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 140

Answer:
front = 10
side = 3
top = 4

Explanation:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 141

Answer:
front = 9
side = 3
top = 5

Explanation:

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 142

Answer:
front = 5
side = 5
top = 8

Explanation:

FACES, EDGES, AND VERTICES
Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the solid.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 143

Answer:
faces = 10
edges = 24
vertices = 9

Explanation:
The number of faces = 10
the number of edges = 24
the number of vertices =9

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 144

Answer:
faces = 17
edges = 34
vertices = 13

Explanation:
The number of faces = 17
the number of edges = 34
the number of vertices =13

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 145

Answer:
faces = 10
edges = 20
vertices = 7

Explanation:
The number of faces = 10
the number of edges = 20
the number of vertices =7

DRAWING SOLIDS
Draw the solid.

Question 17.
triangular prism

Answer:

Question 18.
pentagonal prism

Answer:

Question 19.
rectangular pyramid

Question 20.
hexagonal pyramid

Answer:

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The Pyramid of Cestius in Rome, Italy, is in the shape of a square pyramid. Draw a sketch of the pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 146

Answer:

Question 22.
RESEARCH
Use the Internet to find a picture of the Washington Monument. Describe its shape.

DRAWING VIEWS OF A SOLID
Draw the front, side, and top views of the solid.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 147

Answer:
front = 1
side = 2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 148

Answer:
front =2
side = 2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 149

Answer:
front =2
side = 2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 150

Answer:
front =2
side = 2
top = 2

Explanation:

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 151

Answer:
front = 1
side = 2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 152

Answer:
front = 1
side = 1
top = 1

Explanation:

DRAWING SOLIDS
Draw a solid with the following front, side, and top views.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 153

Answer:

Explanation:
front = 2 top = 1 side = 2

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 154

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Design and draw a house. Name the different solids that you can use to make a model of the house.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 155

Question 32.
DIG DEEPER!
Two of the three views of a solid are shown.
a. What is the greatest number of cubes in the solid?
b. What is the least number of cubes in the solid?
c. Draw the front views of both solids in parts (a) and (b).
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 156

Answer:
a: The greatest number of cubes in the solid = 3
b : The least number of cubes in the solid = 2
c :

Question 33.
OPEN-ENDED
Draw two different solids with five faces.
a. Write the numbers of vertices and edges for each solid.
b. Explain how knowing the numbers of edges and vertices helps you draw a three-dimensional figure.

Question 34.
CRITICAL THINKING
The base of a pyramid has n sides. Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the pyramid. Explain your reasoning.

Lesson 7.5 Surface Areas of Prisms

EXPLORATION 1
Using Grid Paper to Construct a Solid
Work with a partner. Copy the figure shown below onto grid paper.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 157
a. Cut out and fold the figure to form a solid. What type of solid does the figure form?
b. What is the area of the entire surface of the solid?

EXPLORATION 2
Finding the Area of the Entire Surface
Work with a partner. Find the area of the entire surface of each solid. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 158

Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 159

7.5 Lesson

The surface area of a solid is the sum of the areas of all of its faces. You can use a two-dimensional representation of a solid, called a net, to find the surface area of the solid. Surface area is measured in square units.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 160

Key Idea
Net of a Rectangular Prism
A rectangular prism is a prism with rectangular bases.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 161

Try It

Find the surface area of the rectangular prism.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 162

Answer:
258 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 9 x 5 + 9 x 5 + 6 x 9+ 6 x 9  + 6 x 5 +6 x 5
surface area = 45 + 45 + 54 + 54 + 30 +30
surface area = 258 sq. mm

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 163

Answer:
286 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 10 x 3.5 + 10 x 3.5 + 10 x 8+ 10 x 8  + 8 x 3.5 + 8 x 3.5
surface area = 35 +35+ 80 + 80 +28 +28
surface area = 286 sq. ft

Key Idea
Net of a Triangular Prism
A triangular prism is a prism with triangular bases.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 164

Try It

Find the surface area of the triangular prism.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 165

Answer:
67 sq. yd

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 3 x 5 = 15+ (1/2) x 3 x 4 = 6 + (1/2) x 3 x 4 = 6 + 4 x 5 = 20 + 5 x 4 = 20
bottom = 3 x 5 , front = (1/2) x 3 x 4, back = (1/2) x 3 x 4, side = 4 x 5 , side = 5 x 4
surface  area = 15 +6 +6 +20 + 20
area = 67 sq. yd

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 166

Answer:
510 sq. m

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 10 x 10 = 100+ (1/2) x 10 x 16=80 + (1/2) x 10 x 16 = 80+ 9 x 10 =90 + 10 x 16=160
bottom = 10 x 10 , front = (1/2) x 10 x 16, back = (1/2) x 10 x 16, side = 9 x 10 , side = 10 x 16
surface  area = 100 +80 +80+90 +160
area = 510 sq. m

When all the edges of a rectangular prism have the same length s, the rectangular prism is a cube. The net of a cube shows that each of the 6 identical square faces has an area of s2. So, a formula for the surface area of a cube is
S = 6s2. Formula for surface area of a cube
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 167
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 168

Try It
Find the surface area of the cube.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 169

Answer:
96 sq. cm

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s2
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x 4  x 4
area = 96 sq. cm

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 170

Answer:
1.5 sq. in

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s2
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x 0.5  x 0.5
area = 1.5 sq. in

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
FINDING SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of a cube with edge lengths of 9 centimeters.

Answer:
486 sq. cm

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s2
area = 6 x side x side given that s = 9 cm
area = 6 x 9  x 9
area = 486 sq. cm

Question 8.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 171
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 172

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
Light shines through a glass prism and forms a rainbow. What is the surface area of the prism?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 173

Answer:
93 sq. cm

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 6 x 3 = 18+ (1/2) x 5 x 6=30 + (1/2) x 5 x 6 = 30+ 3 x 5 =15+ 5 x 6= 30
bottom = 6  x 3 , front = (1/2) x 5 x 6, back = (1/2) x 5 x 6, side = 3 x 5 , side = 5 x 6
surface  area = 18 +15 +15 +15 +30
area = 93 sq. cm

Question 10.
One pint of chalkboard paint covers 60 square feet. What is the least number of pints of paint needed to paint the walls of a room in the shape of a rectangular prism with a length of 15 feet, a width of 13 feet, and a height of 10 feet? Explain.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A flexible metamaterial is developed for use in robotics and prosthetics. A block of metamaterial is in the shape of a cube with a surface area of 600 square centimeters. What is the edge length of the block of metamaterial?

Answer:
The edge length of the block of metamaterial = 25 square centimeters

Explanation:
The surface area of the cube = 6 s square
area = 6 x 25 x4
area = 6 x100
area = 600 square centimeters

Surface Areas of Prisms Homework & Practice 7.5

Review & Refresh

Draw the front, side, and top views of the solid.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 174

Answer:
front = 1
side = 2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 174.1

Answer:
front = 1
side = 1
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 174.2

Answer:
front = 1
side = 2
top = 2

Explanation:

Find the GCF of the numbers.

Question 4.
18, 72

Answer:
18

Explanation:
The factors of 18 are = 3 x 3 x 2
The factors of 72 are = 3 x 3 x 2 x 2 x 2
From the above the greatest common factors are = 3 x 3 x 2 =18

Question 5.
44, 110

Answer:
22

Explanation:
The factors of 44 are = 2 x 2 x 11
The factors of 110 are = 2  x  5 x 11
From the above the greatest common factors are = 2 x 11 = 22

Question 6.
78, 93

Answer:
3

Explanation:
The factors of 78 are = 2 x 3 x 13
The factors of 93 are = 3 x 31
From the above the greatest common factors are = 3

Question 7.
60, 96, 156

Answer :
12

Explanation:
The factors of 60 are = 2 x 2 x 3 x5
The factors of 96 are = 2 x 2 x 2x 2 x 2 x 3
The factors of 156 are =2 x 2 x 3 x 13
From the above the greatest common factors are = 2 x 2 x 3 = 12

Solve the equation.

Question 8.
s – 5 = 12

Answer:
17

Explanation:
s = 12 + 5
s = 17

Question 9.
x + 9 = 20

Answer:
11

Explanation:
x = 20  -9
x = 11

Question 10.
48 = 6r

Answer:
r = 8

Explanation:
48 = 6r
r = (48/6)
r = 8

Question 11.
\(\frac{m}{5}\) = 13

Answer:
65

Explanation:
(m/5) = 13
m = 13 x 5
m = 65

Divide.

Question 12.
496 ÷ 16

Answer:
31

Explanation:
(496/16) = 31

Question 13.
765 ÷ 45

Answer:
17

Explanation:
(765/45) = 17

Question 14.
1173 ÷ 23

Answer:
51

Explanation:
(1173/23) = 51

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Use a net to find the area of the entire surface of the solid. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 2, p. 311.)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 175

Answer:
The surface area of the rectangle = length x breadth
area = l x b

Explanation:
The above figure is same as the rectangle
The surface area of the rectangle = length x breadth
area = l x b

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 176

Answer:
The surface area of the triangle =  (/2) x  length x breadth
area =(1/2) x l x b

Explanation:
The above figure is the same as the triangle
The surface area of the rectangle =(1/2) x length x breadth
area =(1/2) l x b

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 177

Answer:
The surface area of the square =  (/2) x  length x breadth
area =(1/2) x l x b

Explanation:
The above figure is the same as the triangle
The surface area of the rectangle =(1/2) x length x breadth
area =(1/2) l x b

FINDING SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of the rectangular prism.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 178

Answer:
130 ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 5 x 1 + 5 x 1 + 10 x 5 + 10 x 5 + 10 x 1 +10 x 1
surface area = 5 + 5 + 50 + 50 +10 +10
surface area = 130

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 179

Answer:
198

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 6 x 9 + 6 x 9 + 9 x 3 + 9 x 3 + 6 x 3 +6 x 3
surface area = 54 + 54 + 27 + 27 +18 +18
surface area = 198 sq. cm

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 180

Answer:
76

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 2 x 4+ 2 x 4 + 4 x 5 + 4 x 5 + 2 x 5 +2 x 5
surface area = 8 + 8 + 20 + 20+10+10
surface area = 76

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 181

Answer:
52in

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 2 x 4+ 2 x 4 + 3 x 2 + 3 x 2 + 4 x 3 +4 x 3
surface area = 8 + 8 + 6 + 6 +12 +12
surface area = 52

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 182

Answer:
116.375 m

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 5.5 x 3 + 5.5 x 3 + 3 x 7.25 + 3 x 7.25 + 5.5 x 7.25 + 5.5 x 7.25
surface area = 16.5+ 16.5 + 21.75 + 21.75 +39.875 +39.875
surface area = 116.375 m

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 183

Answer:
48.785 mi

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 6 x2 .33 + 6 x 2.33 + 2.33 x 1.25 + 2.33 x 1.25 + 6 x 1.25 + 6 x 1.25
surface area = 13.98+ 13.98 + 2.9125 + 2.9125 +7.5 +7.5
surface area = 48.785 mi

FINDING SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of the triangular prism.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 184

Answer:
102 cm

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 3 x 4 = 12 + (1/2) x 3 x 10 = 15 + (1/2) x 3 x 10  = 15 + 4 x 5 = 20 + 4 x 10 = 40
bottom = 3 x 4 , front = (1/2) x 3 x 10, back = (1/2) x 3 x 10, side = 4 x 5 , side = 4 x 10
surface  area = 12 +15 +15+20 +40
area = 102  cm

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 185

Answer:
822 m

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 16 x 10 = 160+ (1/2) x 16 x 17 = 136 + (1/2) x 16 x 17 = 136+ 15 x 10=150 + 15 x 16 = 240
bottom = 16 x 10 , front = (1/2) x16 x 17, back = (1/2) x 16 x 17, side = 15 x 10 , side =15 x 16
surface  = 160 +136+ 136 + 150 + 240
area = 822 m

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 186

Answer:
543 in

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 12 x 9 = 108+ (1/2) x 12 x 10 = 60 + (1/2) x 12 x 10 = 60 + 15 x 9 = 135 + 9 x 20 = 180
bottom = 12 x 9 , front = (1/2) x12 x 10, back = (1/2) x 12 x 10, side = 115 x 9 , side = 9 x 20
surface  area =108 +60 +60+ 135 +180
area = 543 in

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 187

Answer:
17.8 ft

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 1 x 3 = 3+ (1/2) x 1 x 2.2 = 1.1 + (1/2) x 1 x 2.2 = 1.1 + 2 x 3 = 6+ 3 x 2.2 = 6.6
bottom = 1 x 3 , front = (1/2) x1 x 2.2, back = (1/2) x 1 x 2.2, side = 2 x 3 , side = 3 x 2.2
surface  area =3 + 1.1 + 1.1+ 6 + 6.6
area = 17. 8 ft

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 188

Answer:
62 . 8 mm

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 4 x 4 = 16+ (1/2) x 4 x 3 = 6 + (1/2) x  4 x 3 = 6 + 5.7 x 4=22.8+ 3 x 4 = 12
bottom = 4 x 4 , front = (1/2) x 4 x 3, back = (1/2) x 4 x 3, side = 5.7 x 4 , side = 3 x 4
surface  area = 16 + 6 + 6 +22.8 + 12
area = 62. 8 mm

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 189

Answer:
3228 . 26 m

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 10 x (17/3) = 56.6+ (1/2) x 10 x 13 = 65 + (1/2) x  10 x 13 = 65 + 12 x (17/3) = 68+ (17/3) x 13 = 73.6
bottom = 10 x (17/3) , front = (1/2) x 10 x 13, back = (1/2) x 10 x 13, side = 12 x (17/3) , side = (17/3) x 13
surface  area = 56.6 + 65 + 65 + 68 + 73.6
area = 3228. 26 m

Question 30.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A gift box in the shape of a rectangular prism measures 8 inches by 8 inches by 10 inches. What is the least amount of wrapping paper needed to wrap the gift box? Explain

Answer:
440 inches

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 8 x 8 + 8 x 8 + 10 x 8 + 10 x 8+ 8 x 10 + 8 x 10
surface area = 64 + 64+ 80 + 80 + 80 + 80
surface area = 440 in
The least amount of wrapping paper needed to wrap the gift box = 440 in

Question 31.
MODELING REAL LIFE
What is the least amount of fabric needed to make the tent?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 190

Answer:
102 sq. ft

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 6 x 4 = 24+ (1/2) x 6 x 5 = 15 + (1/2) x  6 x 5 = 15+ 7 x 4 = 28+ 5 x 4 = 20
bottom = 6 x 4 , front = (1/2) x 6 x 5, back = (1/2) x 6 x 5, side = 7 x 4 , side = 5 x 4
surface  area = 24 + 15 + 15 + 28 + 20
area = 20 sq. ft

FINDING SURFACE AREA

Find the surface area of the cube.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 191

Answer:
216 sq. km

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s2
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x 6  x 6
area = 216 sq. km

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 192

Answer:
0.66666 sq. ft

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s²
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x (1/2)  x (1/2)
area = 6 x 0.11111
area = 0.6666 sq. ft

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 193

Answer:
181.5 sq. yd

Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s²
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x 5.5 x 5.5
area = 6 x 30.25
area = 181 .5 sq. yd

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A piece of dry ice is in the shape of a cube with edge lengths of 7 centimeters. Find the surface area of the dry ice.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 194

Answer:
294 centimeters
Explanation:
area of the cube = 6 s2
area = 6 x side x side
area = 6 x 7 x 7
area = 6 x 49
area = 294 sq. cm

Question 36.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the surface area of the prism. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 195

Answer:
No, my friend is not correct because my friend did the surface area of the cube

Explanation:
My friend did the surface area of the cube
cube = 6s²

Question 37.
CRITICAL THINKING
A public library has the aquarium shown. The front piece of glass has an area of 24 square feet. How many square feet of glass were used to build the aquarium?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 196

Answer:
The square feet of glass were used to build the aquarium = 12 ft

Explanation:
The square feet of glass were  used to build the aquarium = l x b
square = 6 x 2.5
square = 12

Question 38.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A cereal box has the dimensions shown.
a. Find the surface area of the cereal box.
b. The manufacturer decides to decrease the size of the box by reducing each of the dimensions by 1 inch. Find the decrease in surface area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 197

Answer:
a : 216 in
b : 144 in

Explanation:
Surface area  of a = 6 x s x s
area = 6 x 36
area = 216
surface area of b = 6 x s x s
area = 6 x 24
area = 144 because they said that cereal box is decreased by 1 inch

Question 39.
REASONING
The material used to make a storage box costs $1.25 per square foot. The boxes have the same volume. Which box might a company prefer to make? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 198

Question 40.
LOGIC
Which of the following are nets of a cube? Select all that apply.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 199

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A quart of stain covers 100 square feet. How many quarts should you buy to stain the wheelchair ramp? (Assume you do not have to stain the bottom of the ramp.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 200

Answer:

Question 42.
DIG DEEPER!
A cube is removed from a rectangular prism. Find the surface area of the figure after removing the cube.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 201

Answer:
341 sq. ft

Explanation:
Surface area of the rectangular prism = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area =  9 x 8= 72 + (1/2) x 9 x 5=94.5 + (1/2) x 9 x 5 = 94.5 + 5 x 8 = 40+ 8 x 5 =40
bottom = 9 x 8 , front = (1/2) x 9 x 5, back = (1/2) x 9 x 5, side = 5 x 8 , side = 8 x 5
surface  area = 72 + 94.5 + 94.5 +40 +40
area = 341 sq. ft

Lesson 7.6 Surface Areas of Pyramids

EXPLORATION 1
Using a Net to Construct a Solid
Work with a partner. Copy the net shown below onto grid paper.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 202
a. Cut out and fold the net to form a solid. What type of solid does the net form?
b. What is the surface area of the solid?

EXPLORATION 2
Finding Surface Areas of Solids
Work with a partner. Find the surface area of each solid. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 203
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 204

7.6 Lesson

Key Idea
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 205
In this book, the base of every pyramid is either a square or an equilateral triangle. So, the lateral faces are identical triangles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 206

Try It
Find the surface area of the square pyramid.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 207

Answer:
16 sq. ft

Explanation:
surface area of the square pyramid = bottom + side + side + side + side
area = 4 + 3 + 3 + 3
bottom = 2 x 2= 4, side = (1/2) x 2 x 3 = 3,
area = 16 sq. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 208

Answer:
62.5 sq. cm
Explanation:
surface area of the square pyramid = bottom + side + side + side + side
area = 25 + 12.5 + 12.5 + 12.5
bottom = 5 x 5 = 25, side = (1/2) x 5 x 5 = 12.5,
area = 62.5 sq. cm

Try It
Find the surface area of the triangular pyramid.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 209

Answer:
area = 26 sq. cm

Explanation:
surface area of the triangular pyramid = bottom + side + side + side
area = 17 + 3 + 3 + 3
bottom = (1/2 ) x 3 x 4 = 17 , side =(1/2) x 3 x 2 = 3
area = 26 sq. cm

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 210

Answer:
area = 26 sq. cm

Explanation:
surface area of the triangular pyramid = bottom + side + side + side
area = 17 + 3 + 3 + 3
bottom = (1/2 ) x 3 x 4 = 17 , side =(1/2) x 3 x 2 = 3
area = 26 sq. cm

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
PRECISION
Explain how to find the surface area of a pyramid.

Answer:
Surface area of the pyramid = area +(1/2) x p x s

Explanation:,
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height

FINDING SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of the pyramid.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 211

Answer:
Area = 21 sq. yd

Explanation:,
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
area = 7 +(1/2) x 4 x 7
area = 7 + 14
area = 21 sq. yd

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 212

Answer:
Area = 31.15 sq. m

Explanation:,
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
area = 8 +(1/2) x 7 x  6.9
area = 7 + (48.3/2)
area = 7 + 24.15
area = 31.15 sq. m

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 8.
A salt lamp is shaped like a triangular pyramid. Find the surface area of each triangular face.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 213

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = 115.5 sq. in

Explanation:

The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 3 in
area of the face2 = 3 in
area of the face3  = 3 in
area of the face4 = 3in
area of the base = 3.5
surface area = 12 + 3.5 = 15.5 sq. in

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Originally, each triangular face of the Great Pyramid of Giza had a height of 612 feet and a base of 756 feet. Today, the height of each triangular face of the square pyramid is 592 feet. Find the change in the total surface area of the four triangular faces of the Great Pyramid of Giza.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 214

Answer:
The surface area of the  four triangular faces = 612 sq. ft

Explanation:

The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 612 sq. ft
area of the face2 = 612 sq. ftft
area of the face3  =612 sq. ft
area of the face4 = 612 sq. ft
area of the base = 756 sq. ft
surface area = 3204 sq. ft

Surface Areas of Pyramids Homework & Practice 7.6

Review & Refresh

Find the surface area of the prism.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 215

Answer:
82 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 7 x 2 + 7 x 2 + 7 x 3+ 7 x 3 + 3 x 2 + 3 x 2
surface area = 14 +14+ 21 + 21 +6+6
surface area = 82 sq. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 216

Answer:
82 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area =  + 7 x 2 + 7 x 3+ 7 x 3 + 3 x 2 + 3 x 2
surface area = 14 +14+ 21 + 21 +6+6
surface area = 82 sq. ft

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 217

Answer:
384 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area =8 x 8  + 8 x 8 + 8 x 8+ 8 x 8 + 8 x 8 + 8 x 8
surface area = 64 +64 + 64 + 64+ 64+64
surface area = 384 sq. in

Match the expression with an equivalent expression.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 218

Answer:
12n + 6
A. 12n + 12

Explanation:
3 x (4n + 2 )
12n + 6
A. 2 x (6n + 6)
12n + 12

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 219

Answer:
12n + 18
B. 6(2n + 3)

Explanation:
6 x (2n + 3 )
12n + 18
A. 6 x (2n + 3)
12n + 18

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 220

Answer:
12n + 16
C. 12n + 6

Explanation:
4 x (3n + 4 )
12n + 16
C.  2 x (6n + 3)
12n + 6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 221

Answer:
12n + 12
D. 2 x (6n +8)

Explanation:
4 x (3n + 3)
12n + 12
C.  2 x (6n + 8)
12n + 16

Write the fraction or mixed number as a percent.

Question 8.
\(\frac{17}{25}\)

Answer:
68%

Explanation:
(17/25) = (17/25 x 100)
(17 x 4)/(25 x 4)
(68/100)
(34/50)
68%

Question 9.
\(\frac{19}{20}\)

Answer:
95%

Explanation:
(19/20) = (19/20 x 100)
(19 x 5)/(20 x 5)
(95/100)
95%
Question 10.
6\(\frac{7}{8}\)

Answer:
6.875%

Explanation:
(7/8) = (7/8 x 100)
6 x (7/8) = 6 x (7/8 x 100)
(55/8)

Question 11.
\(\frac{3}{400}\)

Answer:
0.75%

Explanation:
(3/400) = (3/400 x 100)
(3/4) = 0.75%

Concepts, Skills, &Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Use a net to find the surface area of the solid. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 2, p. 319.)

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 222

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = a+(1/2) x p x s

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 223

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = a+(1/2) x p x s

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 224

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = a+(1/2) x p x s

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height

FINDING SURFACE AREA
Find the surface area of the pyramid.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 225

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 27 in

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 5 sq. in
area of the face2 = 5 sq. in
area of the face3  = 5 sq. in
area of the face4 = 5 sq. in
area of the base = 7 sq. in
surface area = 27 sq. in

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 226

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 51 .6 sq. yd

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 11.4 sq. yd
area of the face2 = 11.4 sq. yd
area of the face3  = 11.4 sq. yd
area of the face4 = 11.4 sq. yd
area of the base = 6 sq. yd
surface area = 51.6 sq. yd

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 227

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 80 sq. cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 17 sq. cm
area of the face2 = 17 sq. cm
area of the face3  = 17 sq. cm
area of the face4 = 17 sq. cm
area of the base = 12 sq. cm
surface area = 80 sq. cm

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 228

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 50.8 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 10.4 sq. ft
area of the face2 = 10.4 sq. ft
area of the face3  = 9 sq. ft
area of the face4 = 9 sq. ft
area of the base = 12 sq. ft
surface area = 50.8 sq. ft

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 229

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 49.8 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 6.9 sq. in
area of the face2 = 6.9 sq. in
area of the face3  = 14 sq. in
area of the face4 = 14 sq. in
area of the base = 8 sq. in
surface area = 49.8 sq. in

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 230

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 27 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 8 sq. m
area of the face2 = 8 sq. m
area of the face3  = 3.5 sq. m
area of the face4 = 3.5 sq. m
area of the base = 4 sq. m
surface area = 27 sq. m

Question 21.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A paperweight is shaped like a triangular pyramid. Find the surface area of the paperweight.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 231

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 9.8 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 2.2 sq. in
area of the face2 = 2.2 sq. in
area of the face3  = 1.7 sq. in
area of the face4 = 1.7 sq. in
area of the base = 2 sq. in
surface area = 9.8 sq. in

Question 22.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The entrance to the Louvre Museum in Paris, France, is a square pyramid. The side length of the base is 116 feet, and the height of one of the triangular faces is 91.7 feet. Find the surface area of the four triangular faces of the entrance to the LouvreMuseum.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 232

Answer:
The surface area of the  pyramid = 48.2 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular pyramid = area of the faces + area of the base
area of the face1 = 91.7 sq. ft
area of the face2 = 91.7 sq. ft
area of the face3  = 91.7 sq. ft
area of the face4 = 91.7 sq. ft
area of the base = 116 sq. ft
surface area = 482.8 sq. ft

Question 23.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A silicon wafer is textured to minimize light reflection. This results in a surface made up of square pyramids. Each triangular face of one of the pyramids has a base of 5 micrometers and a height of 5.6 micrometers.Find the surface area of the pyramid, including the base.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 233

Answer:
Area = 42 sq. micrometers

Explanation:,
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
area = 28 +(1/2) x 5 x 5.6
area = 28+ (28/2)
area = 28+ 14
area = 42 sq. micrometers

Question 24.
REASONING
A hanging light cover made of glass is shaped like a square pyramid. The cover does not have a bottom. One square foot of the glass weighs 2.45 pounds. The chain can support 35 pounds. Will the chain support the light cover? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 234

Answer:
Yes the chain support the light cover

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s where p = perimeter of the base, s = slant height
area = 4+(1/2) x 2  x 2
area = 4+ 4
area = 8
area = 8 sq. ft

Question 25.
GEOMETRY
The surface area of the square pyramid shown is 84 square inches. What is the value of x?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 235

Answer:
The value of x = 14 in

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = length x breadth
area = l x b
84 =6x
x =(84/6)
x =14 in

Question 26.
STRUCTURE
In the diagram of the base of the hexagonal pyramid, all the triangles are the same. Find the surface area of the hexagonal pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 236

Answer:
The surface area of the hexagonal pyramid = 478.32 cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the hexagonal pyramid = 3ab +3bs
area = 3 x 8 x 6.93 +3 x 8 x 13 where a = 8,b =8, s = 13
area = 166.32+312
area = 478.32 sq. cm

Question 27.
CRITICAL THINKING
Can you form a square pyramid using a square with side lengths of 14 inches and four of the triangles shown? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 237

Answer:
yes
Explanation:
given that square has side lengths of 14 inches and four of the triangles.
so we can form the square pyramid

Lesson 7.7 Volumes of Rectangular Prisms

Recall that the volume of a three-dimensional figureis a measure of the amount of space that it occupies. Volume is measured in cubic units.

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Unit Cube
Work with a partner. A unit cube is a cube with an edge length of 1 unit. The parallel edges of the unit cube have been divided into 2, 3, and 4 equal parts to create smaller rectangular prisms that are identical.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 238
a. The volumes of the identical prisms are equal. What else can you determine about the volumes of the prisms? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 239

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 1 unit

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh
where b = area of the base
volume = 1 x 1
volume = 1
b. Use the identical prisms in part(a) to find the volume of the prism below. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 240

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 4.3125 cu. unit

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh
where b = area of the base
volume = (3/4) x (2/3)
volume = 0.75 x 5.75
volume = 4.3125 cu. units

c. How can you use a unit cube to find the volume of the prism below? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 241

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.375 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh
where b = area of the base
volume = (1/2) x (3/4)
volume = 0.5x 0.75
volume = 0.375 cu. m

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 242
d. Do the formulas V = Bh and V = ℓwh work for rectangular prisms with fractional edge lengths? Give examples to support your answer.

7.7 Lesson

Key Idea
Volume of a Rectangular Prism
Words
The volume V of a rectangular prism is the product of the area of the base and the height of the prism.
Algebra
V = Bh or V = lwh
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 243
When a rectangular prism is a cube with an edge length of s, you can also use the formula V = s3 to find the volume V of the cube.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 243.1

Try It
Find the volume of the prism.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 244

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.6665 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (1.333) x (0.5)
volume = 1.33 x 0.5
volume = 0.6665 cu. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 245

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.6665 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (1.333) x (0.5)
volume = 1.33 x 0.5
volume = 0.6665 cu. ft

Try It
Find the missing dimension of the prism.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 246

Answer:
The missing dimension of the prism = 6 in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = b x l x h
volume = 6x 6 x  2
volume = 72 in
so length = 6 in

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 247

Answer:
The width of the prism = 12.5 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = 5 x(1/2) x 12.5 x20
volume = (11/2)x 12.5 x  20
volume = 1375 cm
so width = 12.5 cm

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
CRITICAL THINKING
Explain how volume and surface area are different.

Answer:
Volume grows exponentially and the surface area grows  with the volume
the surface area grows with the rate of volume

Question 6.
FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
The base of a rectangular prism has an area of 24 square millimeters. The volume of the prism is 144 cubic millimeters. Make a sketch of the prism. Then find the height of the prism.

Answer:
The height of the prism = 6 millimeters

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = Bh
where b = base area and h= height
so volume = 144 cubic millimeters given
B = 24
volume = Bh
144 = 24h
h = (144/24)
h = 6 mm

FINDING VOLUME
Find the volume of the prism.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 278

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.2343 cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (3/4) x(1/2) x (5/8)
volume = 0.75 x 0.5x 0.625
volume = 0.2343 cu. m

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 279

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.343 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (7/10) x(7/10) x (7/10)
volume = 0.7 x 0.7 x 0.7
volume = 0.343 cu. in

When finding volumes, you may need to convert cubic units. The diagrams at the left show that there are 27 cubic feet per cubic yard.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 280
1 yd3 = (1 yd)(1 yd)(1 yd) = (3 ft)(3 ft)(3 ft) = 27 ft3
You can use a similar procedure to convert other cubic units.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The shark cage is in the shape of a rectangular prism and has a volume of 315 cubic feet. Find a set of reasonable dimensions for the base of the cage. Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 281

Answer:
The base  of the prism = 4.906 ft

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
314 = (8) x(8 ) x h
314 = 64h
h = (314/64)
h = 4.906 ft

Question 10.
The hot tub is in the shape of a rectangular prism. How many pounds of water can the hot tub hold? One cubic foot of water weighs about 62.4 pounds.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 282

Answer:
The hot tub can hold = 312 pounds

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
hot tub = (2) x(2) x 1.25
hot tub = 4 x 1.25
hottub = 5
hot tub = 5
5 x 62.4 = 312 pounds

Volumes of Rectangular Prisms Homework & Practice 7.7

Review & Refresh

Find the surface area of the pyramid.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 283

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 220.5 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s
where area = l x w
surface area =21 x (1/2) x 7 x3
surface area = 21x 10.5
surface area = 220.5 sq. ft

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 284

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 364.5 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s
where area = l x w
surface area =27 x (1/2) x 4.5 x6
surface area = 27 x (27/2)=13.5
surface area = 364.5 sq. m

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 285

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 20,760 sq. yd

Explanation:
The surface area of the pyramid = area + (1/2) x p x s
where area = l x w
surface area =346 x (1/2) x 12 x 20
surface area = 346 x (120/2)=60
surface area = 20,760 sq. yd

Write the phrase as an expression. Then evaluate the expression when x = 2 and y = 12.

Question 4.
8 more than a number x

Answer:
Yes
Explanation:
8 is more than 2
where x = 2 given

Question 5.
the difference of a number y and 9

Answer:
The difference of a number y and 9 = 3

Explanation:
difference = 12 – 9
diff = 3
where y = 12 given

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
STRUCTURE
The unit cube is divided into identical rectangular prisms. What is the volume of one of the identical prisms? (See Exploration 1, p. 325.)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 286

Answer:
(2/2),(2/4),(4/2)

Explanation:
In the above figure the base = (2/2) units
base = (2/2) units
height = (4/2) units

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 287

Answer:
(3/3),(3/2),(2/3)

Explanation:
In the above figure the base = (3/3) units
base = (3/2) units
height = (2/3) units

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 288

Answer:
(5/5),(5/3),(3/5)

Explanation:
In the above figure the base = (5/5) units
base = (5/3) units
height = (3/5) units

FINDING VOLUME
Find the volume of the prism.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 289

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.297 Cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (0.66) x(0.6) x (0.75)
volume = 0.297 Cu. in

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 290

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 1.3125 Cu. cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (7/4) x(3/2) x (1/2)
volume = 1.75 x 1.5 x 0.5
volume = 1.3125 Cu. cm

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 291

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.064 Cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (2/5) x(2/5) x (2/5)
volume = 0.4 x 0.4 x 0.4
volume = 0.064 Cu. ft

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 292

Answer:
The volume of the prism =0.75 Cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (5/8) x(3/4) x (2)
volume = 0.625 x 0.6 x 2
volume = 0.75 Cu. m

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 293

Answer:
The volume of the prism =3.111255 Cu. cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (5/3) x(5/6) x (9/4)
volume = 1.66 x 0.833 x 2.25
volume = 3.111255 Cu. cm

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 294

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 12.425 Cu. m

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (14/5) x(10/7) x (25/8)
volume = 2.8 x 1.42 x 3.125
volume = 12.425 Cu. m

FINDING A MISSING DIMENSION
Find the missing dimension of the prism.

Question 15.
Volume = 1620 cm3
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 295

Answer:
The missing dimension of the prism = 20 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
1620 = (9) x(9) x h
1620 = 81 h
h = (1620/8)
h = 8
Question 16.
Volume = 220.5 cm3
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 296

Answer:
The missing dimension of the prism = 4.5 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
220.5 = (7) x(7) x w
220.5 = 49 w
w = (220.5/49)
w = 4.5 cm

Question 17.
Volume = 532 in3
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 297

Answer:
The missing dimension of the prism = 16 in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
532 = (7/4) x(19) x w
532 = 33.25
h = (532/33.25)
h = 16 in

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
An FBI agent orders a block of ballistics gel. The gel weighs 54 pounds per cubic foot. What is the weight of the block of gel?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 298

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 720 in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (6) x(20) x 6
volume = 720 in
Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
a. Estimate the amount of casserole left in the dish.
b. Will the casserole fit in the storage container? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 299

Answer:
a : The amount of casserole left in the dish = 396 in

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (2.75) x(12) x 12
volume = 396

b : The casserole will not fit in the container

Explanation:
The length of the container is less than the casserole

Question 20.
GEOMETRY
How many \(\frac{3}{4}\)-centimeter cubes do you need to create a cube with an edge length of 12 centimeters?

Answer:
16 cubes

Explanation:
16 cubes are used to create a cube with an edge length of 12 centimeters
in the above-given question (3/4) = 0.75
0.75 x 16 = 12

Question 21.
REASONING
How many one-millimeter cubes do you need to fill a cube that has an edge length of 1 centimeter? How can this result help you convert a volume from cubic millimeters to cubic centimeters? from cubic centimeters to cubic millimeters?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 300

Answer:
10 mm cubes are needed to fill a cube that has an edge length of 1 cm

Explanation:
1 mm =0.1 cm
0.1 x 10 = 1 cm
1 cubic mm = 0.001 cubic cm
1 cubic cm = 1000 cubic mm

Question 22.
LOGIC
The container is partially filled with unit cubes. How many unit cubes fit in the container? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 301

Answer:
6 cubes fit in the container

Explanation:
In the above diagram,6 units are filled with color
so 6 unit cubes fit in the container.

Question 23.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The area of the shaded face is 96 square centimeters. What is the volume of the rectangular prism?

Answer:
The volume of the rectangular prism = 4 x 3 x 8

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = length x width x height
volume = 4 x 3 x 8

Question 24.
DIG DEEPER!
Is the combined volume of a 4-foot cube and a 6-foot cube equal to the volume of a 10-foot cube? Use a diagram to justify your answer.

Question 25.
PROJECT
You have 1400 square feet of boards to use for a new tree house.
a. Design a tree house that has a volume of at least 250 cubic feet. Include sketches of your tree house.
b. Are your dimensions reasonable? Explain your reasoning.

Area, Surface Area, and Volume Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
A sports complex has two swimming pools that are shaped like rectangular prisms. The amount of water in the smaller pool is what percent of the amount of water in the larger pool?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 302
Understand the problem.
You know the shape and the dimensions of the two swimming pools. You are asked to find the amount of water in the smaller pool as a percent of the amount of water in the larger pool.
Make a plan.
First, find the volume of each pool. Then represent the amount of water in the smaller pool as a fraction of the amount of water in the larger pool. Find an equivalent fraction whose denominator is 100 to find the percent.

Answer:
28% of water in the 1st pool is greater than that of the smaller pool

Explanation:
volume of the first pool = 25 x 3 x 50=3750
volume of the second pool = 25 x 21 x 2= 1050
1050 : 3750 = 0.28
0.28 = 28 %
Solve and Check
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.

Question 2.
Use a graph to represent the relationship between the surface area S(in square meters) and the height h(in meters) of the triangular prism. Then find the height when the surface area is 260 square meters.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 303

Answer:
The height of the triangular prism = 43.33 meters

Explanation:
The surface area  of the triangular prism = (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 12h
260 = 6h
h =(260/6)
h = 43.33 m

Question 3.
A toy company sells two different toy chests. The toy chests have different dimensions, but the same volume. What is the width w of Toy Chest 2?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 304

Answer:
The width of the toy chest2 = 384 in

Explanation:
In the above figure the toy chest 2 has length = 24 in and volume = 16 in
width = 24 x 16
width = 384 in

Performance Task
Maximizing the Volumes of Boxes

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Packaging Design.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 305

Area, Surface Area, and Volume Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 306

Answer:
polygon = a polygon is a closed figure in a plane that is made up of 3 or more line segments that intersect only at their endpoints.
composite figure = composite figure is made up of triangles, squares, rectangles and other two-dimensional figures.
kite = kite is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of adjacent sides with the same length and opposite sides with different lengths.

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Four Square to organize information about a concept. Each of the four squares can be a category, such as definition, vocabulary, example, non-example, words, algebra, table, numbers, visual, graph, or equation. Here is an example of a Four Square for the area of a parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 307
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. area of a triangle
  2. area of a trapezoid
  3. area of a composite figure
  4. polyhedron
  5. surface area of a prism
  6. surface area of a pyramid
  7. volume of a rectangular prism

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 308

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 309

7.1 Areas of Parallelograms (pp. 285–290)

Find the area of the parallelogram.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 310

Answer:
area = 500 yd

Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 25 x 20
area = 500 yd

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 311

Answer:
area = 242 mm

Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 22 x 11
area = 242 mm

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 312

Answer:
area = 45 cm

Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 9 x 5
area = 45 cm

Question 4.
Find the area (in square inches) of the parallelogram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 313

Answer:
area = 72 square in

Explanation:
area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 2 x 3
area = 6 ft
1 feet = 12 inches
area = 72 square inches

Question 5.
The billboard shown is in the shape of a parallelogram with a base of 48 feet. What is the height of the billboard?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 314

Answer:
The height of the billboard = 14 ft

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = b x h
672 = 48 h
h = (672/48)
h = 14 ft

Question 6.
The freeway noise barrier shown is made of identical parallelogram-shaped sections. The area of each section is 7.5 square meters, and the height of the barrier is 5 meters. How many meters wide is each section of the noise barrier?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 315

Answer:
Each section of the noise barrier is 1.5 m

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 1.5 x5
area = 7.5
so b = 1.5 m

Question 7.
Draw a parallelogram that has an area between 58 and 60 square centimeters.

Answer:
59 square centimeters

Explanation:

7.2 Areas of Triangles (pp. 291–296)

Find the area of the triangle.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 316

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 80 sq. km

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2) x 16 x 10
area = (1/2) x 160
area = 80 sq. km

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 317

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 175 sq. cm

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = half the product of the base and the product of the height
area = (1/2) x 14 x 25
area = (1/2) x 350
area = 175 sq. cm

Find the missing dimension of the triangle.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 318

Answer:
base = 5 mi

Explanation:
The area of the tringle = b x h
given that h = 7 mi and area = 35 mi
base = 5 mi

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 319

Answer:
height = 5 cm

Explanation:
The area of the tringle = b x h
given that b = 4 cm and area = 5 mi
height = 5 cm

Find the area of the figure.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 320

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 112.5 sq. yd

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (12 + 3). Given that b1 = 12 and b2 = 3
area = (1/2) x 15(15) given that h = 15 yd
area = (1/2) x 225
area = 112.5 sq. yd

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 321

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 4 sq. mm

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (8 + 8). Given that b1 = 8 and b2 = 8
area = (1/2) x 2(16) given that h = 2 yd
area = (1/2) x 8
area = 4 sq. mm

Question 14.
Draw a composite figure that has an area of less than 35 square inches.

Answer:
The area of the triangle = b x h
area = 6 x 4
area = 24 square inches

Explanation:

Question 15.
Te triangle-shaped entrance to the cavern is 2\([\frac{1}{2}/latex] feet tall and 4 feet wide. What is the area of the entrance?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 322

Answer:
The area of the entrance = 10

Explanation:
2 x(1/2) = 5/2 = 2.5
2.5 x 4 = 10
7.3 Areas of Trapezoids and Kites (pp. 297 – 304)

Question 16.
Use decomposition to find the area of the kite.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 323

Answer:
The area of the kite = 255 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = (1/2) x 10 x 9 + 10 x 21
area = (1/2) x 90 +210
area = 45 + 210
255 sq. in
Find the area of the trapezoid.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 324

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 105 sq. m

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (15 + 6). Given that b1 = 15 and b2 = 6
area = (1/2) x 10(21) given that h = 10 in
area = (1/2) x 210
area = 105 sq. m

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 325

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 6 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (1.5 + 2.5). Given that b1 = 1(1/2) = 1.5 and b2 = 2(1/2) = 2.5
area = (1/2) x 3(4) given that h = 10 in
area = (1/2) x 12
area = 6 sq. in

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 326

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid =49 sq. mi

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (6 + 8). Given that b1 = 6 and b2 = 8
area = (1/2) x 7(14) given that h = 7 mi
area = (1/2) x 98
area = 49 sq. mi

Find the area of the figure.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 327

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 56 sq. ft

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (6 + 7). Given that b1 = 6 and b2 = 7
area = (1/2) x 8(14) given that h = 8 ft
area = (1/2) x 112
area = 56 sq ft

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 328

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 48 sq. cm

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (4 + 8). Given that b1 = 4 and b2 = 8
area = (1/2) x 8(12) given that h = 8 ft
area = (1/2) x 96
area = 48 sq. cm

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 329

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid = 40 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (6 +10). Given that b1 = 6 and b2 = 10
area = (1/2) x 5(16) given that h = 80
area = (1/2) x 80
area = 40 sq. in

Question 23.
You are creating a design for the side of the soapbox car. How much area do you have for the design?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 330

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid =240 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (6 +14). Given that b1 = 6 and b2 = 14
area = (1/2) x 24(20) given that h = 24
area = (1/2) x 480
area = 240 sq. in

Question 24.
Find the area (in square centimeters) of a trapezoid with a height of 2 meters and base lengths of 3 meters and 5 meters.

Answer:
The area of the trapezoid =240 sq. in

Explanation:
The area of the trapezoid = one half the product of its height h and the sum of its bases b1 and b2.
area = (1/2) x h x( b1 + b2)
area =(1/2) x h (3 +5). Given that b1 = 3 and b2 = 5
area = (1/2) x 2(8) given that h = 2
area = (1/2) x 16
area = 8 sq. m
1 meter = 100 cm
area = 8 x 100 = 800 sq. cm

7.4 Three-Dimensional Figures (pp. 305–310)

Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the solid.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 331

Answer:
faces = 6
edges = 12
vertices =7

Explanation:
The number of faces = 6
The number of edges = 12
The number of vertices =7

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 332

Answer:
faces = 5
edges = 10
vertices =6

Explanation:
The number of faces = 5
The number of edges = 10
The number of vertices =6

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 333

Answer:
faces = 9
edges = 20
vertices = 12

Explanation:
The number of faces = 9
The number of edges = 20
The number of vertices =12

Draw the solid.

Question 28.
square pyramid

Answer:

Question 29.
hexagonal prism

Draw the front, side, and top views of the solid.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 334

Answer:
front = 1
side =2
top = 1

Explanation:

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 335

Answer:
front = 4
side =2
top = 2

Explanation:

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 336

Answer:
front = 1
side = 1
top = 1

7.5 Surface Areas of Prisms (pp. 311–318)

Find the surface area of the prism.

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 337

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 100 sq. in

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 7 x 2 + 7 x 2 + 4x 7+ 4 x 7 + 4 x 2 + 4 x 2
surface area = 14 +14+ 28 + 28 +8+8
surface area = 100 sq. in

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 338

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 243 sq. m

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 6 x 9 + 6 x 9 + 9 x 4.5+ 9 x 4.5 + 6 x 4.5 + 6 x 4.5
surface area = 54 +54+ 40.5 + 40.5 +27+ 27
surface area = 243 sq. m

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 339

Answer:
The surface area of the prism = 590 cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 8 x 7 + 8 x 7 + 15 x 8+ 15 x 8 + 17 x 7 + 17 x 7
surface area = 56 +56+ 120 + 120 +119+ 119
surface area = 590 sq. cm

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 340

Answer:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 49 sq. ft

Explanation:
The surface area of the triangular prism = 2 b + p s
surface area = 2 x 5 +6 x 6.5
surface area = 10 + 39
surface area = 49 sq. ft

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 341

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 1,17,649 cu. yd

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (7) x(7) x (7)
volume = 49 x 49 x 49
volume = 1,17,649 cu. yd

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 342

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 614.125 cu. mi

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh
where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (17/2) x(17/2) x (17/2)
volume = 8.5 x 8.5 x 8.5
volume = 614.125 cu. mi

Question 39.
One quart of water-resistant paint covers 75 square feet. A swimming pool is in the shape of a rectangular prism with a length of 20 feet, a width of 10 feet, and a height of 5 feet. How many quarts should you buy to paint the swimming pool with two coats of paint?

Answer:
The volume of rectangular prism = 1000 cu. ft

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = b ase x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = 20 x 10 x 5
volume = 1000 cu. ft
7.6 Surface Areas of Pyramids (pp. 319–324)

Find the surface area of the pyramid.

Question 40.
An

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 344

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 95.2 m

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pymarid = area + (1/2) x ps
surface area = 55.2 + (1/2) x 10 x 8
surface area = 55.2 + 40
surface area = 95.2 m

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 345

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 88.1 cm

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pymarid = area + (1/2) x ps
surface area = 65.8 + (1/2) x 7 x 9.4
surface area = 55.2 + 32.9
surface area = 88.1 cm

Question 43.
You make a square pyramid for a school project. Find the surface area of the pyramid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 346

Answer:
The surface area of the pyramid = 41.25

Explanation:
The surface area of the square pyramid = area + (1/2) x ps
surface area = 27.5 + (1/2) x 5.5 x 5
surface area = 27.5 + 13.75
surface area = 41.25 in

7.7 Volumes of Rectangular Prisms (pp. 325–330)

Find volumes and missing dimensions of rectangular prisms.

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 347

Answer:
The volume of rectangular prism = 4.875 ft

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = b ase x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = (5/2) x (3/2) x (4/3)
volume = 2.5 x 1.5 x 1.33
volume = 4.875 ft

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 348

Answer:
The volume of rectangular prism = 0.605 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = b ase x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = (1/2) x (2/3) x (11/6)
volume = 0.5 x 0.66 x 1.83
volume = 0.605 cm

Question 46.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 349

Answer:
The volume of rectangular prism = 0.05272 cu. in

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = b ase x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = (3/8) x (3/8) x (3/8)
volume = 0.375 x 0.375 x 0.375
volume = 0.05273 cu. in

Question 47.
The prism has a volume of 150 cubic feet. Find the length of the prism.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 350

Answer:
The length of rectangular prism = 7 ft

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = base x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = (5) x (4) x (7)
volume = 150
length = 7 ft

Question 48.
How many cubic inches of tissues can the box hold?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 351

Answer:
The length of rectangular prism = 162 . 5 in

Explanation:
The volume of the rectangular prism = b ase x height
volume = b x h where b = l x w
volume = (5) x (5) x (6.5)
volume = 162.5 in

Question 49.
Draw a rectangular prism that has a volume less than 1 cubic inch.

Area, Surface Area, and Volume Practice Test

7 Practice Test

Find the area of the figure.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 352

Answer:
The area of the parallelogram = 13000 cm

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = the product of the base and the product of the height
area = 130 x 100
area = 13000 cm

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 353

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 154 in

Explanation:
The area of the triangle = (1/2 ) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 14 x 22
area = (1/2) x 308
area = 154 in

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 354

Find the surface area of the solid.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 355

Answer:
340  ft

Explanation:
Surface area = area of the bottom + area of the front +area of the back +area of a side + area of a side
surface area = 12 x 7 = 84+ (1/2) x 7 x 5 = 17.5+ (1/2) x  7 x 5 = 17.5+  13 x 5 = 65 + 12 x 13  = 156
bottom = 12 x 7 , front = (1/2) x 7 x 5, back = (1/2) x 7 x 5, side = 13 x 5 , side = 12 x 13
surface  area = 84 + 17.5 +17.5 + 65+156
area = 340 ft

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 356

Answer:
The volume of the prism =1567.5 m

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = Bh where b = l x w
where b = area of the base
volume = (9.5) x(11) x (15)
volume = 1567.5 m

Find the volume of the prism.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 357

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 3.5 cm

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = b x h
volume = (3/2) x (7/3)
volume = 1.5 x 2.33
volume = 3.5 cm

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 358

Answer:
The volume of the prism = 0.64 yd

Explanation:
The volume of the prism = b x h
volume = (4/5) x (4/5)
volume = 0.8 x 0.8
volume = 0.64 yd

Question 8.
Draw an octagonal prism.

Answer:

Question 9.
Find the numbers of faces, edges, and vertices of the solid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 359

Answer:
faces = 8
edges = 26
vertices = 10

Explanation:
The number of faces = 8
the number of edges = 26
the number of vertices = 10

Question 10.
The area of a parallelogram is 156 square meters. What is the height of the parallelogram when the base is 13 meters?

Answer:
The base of the parallelogram = 12 square meters

Explanation:
The area of the parallelogram = b x h
area = 13 x  12
area = 156
so base = 12 square meters

Question 11.
A candle is shaped like a square pyramid. Find the surface area of the candle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 360

Answer:
The surface area of the candle = 21.6 in

Explanation:
The area of the square pyramid = area +(1/2) x p x s
surface area = 14.4 +(1/2) x 4 x 3.6
surface area = 14.4 + 7.2
surface area = 21.6 in

Question 12.
You are wrapping the boxed DVD collection as a present. What is the least amount of wrapping paper needed to wrap the box?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 361

Question 13.
A cube has an edge length of 4 inches. You double the edge lengths. How many times greater is the volume of the new cube?

Answer:
2 times greater

Explanation:
Given that the cube has an edge length of 4 inches
They said to double the cube
4 x 2 = 8
the volume of the new cube is 2 times greater than that of the old cube

Question 14.
The Pentagon in Arlington, Virginia, is the headquarters of the U.S. Department of Defense. The building’s center contains a pentagon-shaped courtyard with an area of about 5 acres. Find the land areas (in square feet) of the courtyard and the building.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 362

Area, Surface Area, and Volume Cumulative Practice

7 Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
A cruise ship is carrying a total of 4971 people. Each life boat can hold a maximum of 150 people. What is the minimum number of lifeboats needed to evacuate everyone on the cruise ship?
A. 33 lifeboats
B. 34 lifeboats
C. 54 lifeboats
D. 332 lifeboats

Answer:
option A is correct

Explanation:
150/33 = 4971 boats
In the above question, the lifeboat can hold a maximum of 150 people
The minimum no of lifeboats needed = 33

Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 363

Question 2.
Which number is equivalent to the expression?
3 . 42 + 6 ÷ 2
F. 27
G. 33
H. 51
I. 75

Answer:
option H is correct

Explanation:
3 . 16 + 3
48 + 3
51
Question 3.
What is the volume of the package?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 364

Question 4.
A housing community started with 60 homes. In each of the following years, 8 more homes were built. Let represent the number of years that have passed since the first year, and let n represent the number of homes. Which equation describes the relationship between n and y?
F. n = 8y + 60
G. n = 68y
H. n = 60y + 8
I. n = 60 + 8 + y

Answer:
option I is the correct

Explanation:
n = 60 + 8 + y
where n = no of homes
y = number of years

Question 5.
What is the value of m that makes the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 365

4m = 6

Answer:
the value of m = (6/4)

Explanation:
m = (6/4)
4m = 6
4 x (6/4) = 6
6 = 6

Question 6.
What is the surface area of the square pyramid?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 366

Answer:
none of the options are correct

Explanation:
surface area of the pyramid = area +(1/2)x(5x 3)
area = 15+ (1/2) (15)
area = 15 + 7.5
area = 22.5 in
Question 7.
A wooden box has a length of 12 inches, a width of 6 inches, and a height of 8 inches.
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 367
Part A
Draw and label a rectangular prism with the dimensions of the wooden box.
Part B
What is the surface area, in square inches, of the wooden box? Show your work.
Part C
You have a two-fluid ounce sample of wood stain that covers 900 square inches. Is this enough to give the entire box two coats of stain? Show your work and explain your reasoning.

Answer:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = 432 in

Explanation:
The surface area of the rectangular prism = Area of the top + area of the bottom +area of front + area of back + area of side + area of a side
surface area = 12 x 6 + 12 x 6 + 6 x 8 + 6 x 8 + 12 x 8+ 12 x 8
surface area = 72+ 72 + 48 + 48 + 96 +96
surface area = 432 in
a :

Question 8.
On Saturday, you earned $35 mowing lawns. This was dollars more than you earned on Thursday. Which expression represents the amount, in dollars, you earned mowing lawns on Thursday?
F. 35x
G. x + 35
H. x – 35
I. 35 – x

Answer:
Option G is correct

Explanation:
x + 35 is correct

Question 9.
What is the area, in square yards, of the triangle?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 368

Answer:
The area of the triangle = 20 yd

Explanation:
Area of the triangle = (1/2) x b x h
area = (1/2) x 5 x 8 where b = 5 and h = 8 given
area = (1/2) x 40
area = 20yd

Question 10.
Which expression is equivalent to [latex]\frac{12}{35}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 369

Answer:
option b is correct

Explanation:
(2 x 6)/(7 x 5)
12 / 35
so option b is correct
Question 11.
The description below represents the area of which polygon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 370
F. rectangle
G. parallelogram
H. trapezoid
I. triangle

Answer:
option h is correct

Explanation:
The formula of trapezoid = 0ne half the product of its height and the sum of its bases.

Question 12.
What is the missing quantity in the double number line?
Big Ideas Math Answers 6th Grade Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume 371
A. 25 ounces
B. 165 ounces
C. 525 ounces
D. 600 ounces

Answer:
Option b is correct

Explanation:
6 + 15 = 21
150 + 15 = 165
so option b is correct

Conclusion:

We wish the information mentioned in the above sections will help you in your preparation. You can get the free links to download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 6 Chapter 7 Area, Surface Area, and Volume pdf. Practice all the problems available in the above links and also share it with your friends and peers. You can overcome all the difficulties in grade 6 maths. Moreover, bookmark our page to get the solutions of all Big Ideas Math Grade 6 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions PDF is included here. We have given the solutions to all the questions in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions in pdf format. Either you can learn BIM Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions Answers online or offline using pdf. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions Answer Key helps the students to enhance their knowledge. Also, it is the best source to get in-depth knowledge on the concept. Find out the real-time examples on Big Ideas Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions Math Answers for better practice.

Big Ideas Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions Math Book Answer Key

All the quick methods and tips are helpful for the students to save their time. Therefore, get the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions and make use of it to have quick learning. Check answers for every question of every topic. The following sections have quick links where they have each topic with problems. Get the complete grip on the fractions by referring to our Big Ideas Grade 5 Math Answers Chapter 10 Divide Fractions.

Lesson: 1 Interpret Fractions as Division

Lesson: 2 Mixed Numbers as Quotients

Lesson: 3 Divide Whole Numbers by Unit Fractions

Lesson: 4 Divide Unit Fractions by Whole Numbers

Lesson: 5 Problem Solving: Fraction Division

Chapter: 10 – Divide Fractions

Lesson 10.1 Interpret Fractions as Division

Explore and Grow`

You share 4 sheets of construction paper equally among 8 people. Write a division expression that represents the situation. What fraction of a sheet of paper does each person get? Use a model to support your answer?
Answer:
The division expression that represents the fraction of a sheet of paper does each person get is:
4 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you have 4 sheets of construction paper equally among 8 people.
Hence,
The division expression that represents the fraction of a sheet of paper is:
( The number of sheets of construction paper ) ÷ ( The number of people )
= 4 ÷ 8
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of a sheet of paper does each person get is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Structure
How can you check your answer using multiplication?
Answer: We can check the answer by using the partial products method or by using the simplification method.

Think and Grow: Divide Whole Numbers
You can use models to divide whole numbers that have a fraction as the quotient.
Answer: 
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 4
The total number of parts are: 8
So,
The fraction of the colored part out of the total number of parts = 4 ÷ 8
= \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
In \(\frac{1}{2}\),
1 represents the quotient
2 represents the remainder
Example
Find 2 ÷ 3.
One Way: Use a tape diagram. Show 2 wholes. Divide each whole into 3 equal parts.

Another Way: Use an area model. Show 2 wholes. Divide each whole into 3 equal parts. Then separate the parts into 3 equal groups.

Show and Grow

Divide. Use a model to help

Question 1.
2 ÷ 4 =0.5
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 2
The number of total parts is: 4
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 2 ÷ 4
= \(\frac{2}{4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.5

Question 2.
1 ÷ 3 = 0.33
Answer:

From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 3
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.33

Apply and Grow: Practice

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 3.
1 ÷ 8 =0.018
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 8
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 8
= \(\frac{1}{8}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.018

Question 4.
1 ÷ 4 =0.25
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 4
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.25

Question 5.
2 ÷ 6 =0.33
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 2
The number of total parts is: 6
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 2 ÷ 6
= \(\frac{2}{6}\)
= \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.33

Question 6.
2 ÷ 5 = 0.4
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 2
The number of total parts is: 5
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 2 ÷ 5
= \(\frac{2}{5}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.4

Question 7.
3 ÷ 7 = 0.42
Answer: 
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 3
The number of total parts is: 7
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 3 ÷ 7
= \(\frac{3}{7}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.42

Question 8.
5 ÷ 6 = 0.83
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 5
The number of total parts is: 6
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 5 ÷ 6
= \(\frac{5}{6}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.83

Question 9.
How many 6s are in 1?
Answer: There are six \(\frac{1}{6}\)s in 1

Explanation:
The number of 6s in 1 can be obtained by dividing 1 into 6 equal parts.
So,
The figure obtained will be like;

From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 6
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 6
= \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are six 6s in 1

Question 10.
How many 10s are in 9?
Answer: There are 9 \(\frac{9}{10}\)s in 9

Explanation:
The model for the number of 10s in 9 are:

From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 9
The number of total parts is: 10
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 9 ÷ 10
= \(\frac{9}{10}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are nine 9s in 10

Question 11.
Number Sense
For which equations does k = 8?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 3
Answer: Let the equations named A), B), C), and D)
So,
The four equations are:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 3
From the above equations,
The value ‘k’ must be in the numerator.
So,
In A), the value of the numerator is: 3
In B), the value of the numerator is: k
In C), the value of the numerator is: 2
In D) the value of the numerator is: 8
So,
From the above numerator values,
We can say that “k=8” holds good for Equation B)

Question 12.
Writing
Write and solve a real-life problem for 7 ÷ 12.
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 7
The number of total parts is: 12
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 7 ÷ 12
= \(\frac{7}{12}\)
Hence,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.58

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Three fruit bars are shared equally among 4 friends. What fraction of a fruit bar does each friend get?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 4
Divide 3 by 4 to find what fraction of a fruit bar each friend gets.
Use an area model to find 3 ÷ 4. Show 3 whole fruit bars. Divide each fruit bar into 4 equal parts. Then separate the parts into 4 equal groups.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You cut a 5-foot streamer into 6 pieces of equal size. What is the length of each piece in feet? in inches?
Answer: The length of each piece in feet is: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you cut a 5-foot streamer into 6 equal pieces of equal size.
So,
The model representing the 6 equal pieces of the 5-foot streamer is:

From the above model,
We can see that each part in the model represents \(\frac{5}{6}\) of each part.
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of each piece of a 5-foot streamer in feet is: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 14.
Four circular lemon slices are shared equally among 8 glasses of water. What fraction of a lemon slice does each glass get?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 7
Answer: The fraction of a lemon slice does each glass get is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
It is given that the four circular lemon slices are shared equally among 8 glasses of water.
So,
The model representing the portion that each glass get is:

From the above model,
We can say that each part represents \(\frac{1}{2}\) part
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the portion of a lemon slice does glass get is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 15.
You cut a 5-foot streamer into 6 pieces of equal size. What is the length of each piece in feet? in inches?
Answer: The length of each piece in feet is: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you cut a 5-foot streamer into 6 equal pieces of equal size.
So,
The model representing the 6 equal pieces of the 5-foot streamer is:

From the above model,
We can see that each part in the model represents \(\frac{5}{6}\) of each part.
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of each piece of a 5-foot streamer in feet is: \(\frac{5}{6}\)

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
A fruit drink is made using \(\frac{7}{4}\) quarts of orange juice and \(\frac{5}{4}\) quarts of pineapple juice. The drink is shared equally among 12 guests. What fraction of a quart does each guest get?
Answer: The fraction of a quart does each guest get is: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
It is given that a fruit drink is made using \(\frac{7}{4}\) quarts of orange juice and \(\frac{5}{4}\) quarts of pineapple juice.
So,
The total amount of fruit juice= \(\frac{7}{4}\) + \(\frac{5}{4}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 + 5}{4}\)
= \(\frac{12}{4}\)
It is also given that the drink is shared equally among 12 guests
So,
The fraction of a quart does each gust get = \(\frac{12}{4}\) ÷ 12
= \(\frac{12}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{12}{1}\)
= \(\frac{12}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of a quart does each person get is: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Interpret Fractions as Division Homework & Practice 10.1

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 1.
1 ÷ 6 =0.16
Answer:


From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 6
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 6
= \(\frac{1}{6}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.16

Question 2.
1 ÷ 7 =0.14
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 7
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 7
= \(\frac{1}{7}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.14

Question 3.
1 ÷ 5 = 0.20
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 1
The number of total parts is: 5
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 1 ÷ 5
= \(\frac{1}{5}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.20

Question 4.
3 ÷ 4 = 0.75
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 3
The number of total parts is: 4
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 3 ÷ 4
= \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.75

Question 5.
6 ÷ 7 = 0.85
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 6
The number of total parts is: 7
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 6 ÷ 7
= \(\frac{6}{7}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.85

Question 6.
5 ÷ 9 = 0.55
Answer:
From the above model,
The number of colored parts is: 5
The number of total parts is: 9
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts = 5 ÷ 9
= \(\frac{5}{9}\)
So,
The fraction of the colored parts out of the total number of parts in the decimal form is: 0.55

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says \(\frac{5}{12}\) is equivalent to 12 ÷ 5. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: No, your friend s not correct.

Explanation:
The given fraction is: \(\frac{5}{12}\)
From the given fraction,
The numerator is: 5
The denominator is: 12
We can write a fraction in the following form:
Fraction = \(\frac{Numerator}{Denominator}\)
So,
\(\frac{5}{12}\) is equivalent to 5 ÷ 12
But, according to your friend,
\(\frac{5}{12}\) is equivalent to 12 ÷ 5
Hence, from the above,
we can conclude that your friend is not correct.

Question 8.
Writing
Explain how fractions and division are related.

Question 9.
Structure
Write a division equation represented by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 8
Answer:
The division equation represented by the model is: 1 ÷ 4

Explanation:
The given model is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 8
From the given model,
The number of shaded parts is: 1
The total number of parts are: 4
So,
The division equation can be represented as:
Division equation = (The number of shaded parts) ÷ ( The total number of parts )
= 1 ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Question 10.
Number Sense
Eight friends share multiple vegetable pizzas, and each gets \(\frac{3}{8}\) of a pizza. How many pizzas do they share?
Answer: The total number of pizzas the eight friends shared are: 3 pizzas

Explanation:
It is given that the eight friends share multiple vegetable pizzas and each gets \(\frac{3}{8}\) of a pizza.
So,
The total number of pizzas shared by the eight friends = \(\frac{3}{8}\) × 8
= \(\frac{3}{8}\) × \(\frac{8}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3 × 8}{8 × 1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the total number of pizzas shared by the eight friends is: 3 pizzas

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Seven friends each run an equal part of a 5-kilometer relay race. What fraction of a kilometer does each friend complete?
Answer: The fraction of a kilometer does each friend complete is: \(\frac{5}{7}\) kilometer

Explanation:
It is given that there are seven friends each run an equal part of a 5-kilometer relay race.
So,
The fraction that each friend run = \(\frac{The total distance} {The number of friends}\)
= \(\frac{5}{7}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of a kilometer does each friend complete is: \(\frac{5}{7}\) kilometer

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A group of friends equally share 3 bags of pretzels. Each friend gets \(\frac{3}{5}\) of a bag of pretzels. How many friends are in the group?
Answer: The total number of friends in the group are: 5

Explanation:
It is given that a group of friends equally share 3 bags of pretzels and each friend gets \(\frac{3}{5}\) of a bag of pretzels.
So,
The total number of friends = \(\frac{The total number of bags}{The amount each friend gets}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{3}\)
= \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the total number of friends are: 5

Review & Refresh

Multiply.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 9
Answer: 9 × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 6

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{9}{1}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\)
So,
\(\frac{9}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= \(\frac{9 × 2}{1 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{6}{1}\)
= 6
Hence,
9 × \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 6

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 10
Answer: 5 × \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\)

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{5}{1}\) and \(\frac{7}{10}\)
So,
\(\frac{5}{1}\) × \(\frac{7}{10}\)
= \(\frac{5 × 7}{1 × 10}\)
= \(\frac{7}{2}\)
Hence,
5 × \(\frac{7}{10}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 11
Answer: 3 × \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{3}{1}\) and \(\frac{5}{12}\)
So,
\(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{12}\)
= \(\frac{3 × 5}{1 × 12}\)
= \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Hence,
3 × \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Lesson 10.2 Mixed Numbers as Quotients

Explore and Grow

You share 6 sheets of construction paper equally among 4 people. Write a division expression that represents the situation. How much paper does each person get? Use a model to support your answer.
Answer:
The division expression representing the situation is: 6 ÷ 4

Explanation:
It s given that you have shared 6 sheets of construction paper equally among 4 people
So,
The division equation representing the sharing of construction papers is: 6 ÷ 4
Now,
6 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{6}{4}\)
So,
The above equation represents that 4 is divided into 6 parts.
So,
The model representing the situation is:

From the above model,
We can say that the amount of does each person get is: 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) or 1.5 or \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Precision
Does each person get less than or more than 1 sheet of paper? Use the dividend and divisor to explain why your answer makes sense.
Answer:
From the above problem,
We can say that each person gets more than 1 paper.
So,
The division equation of the above problem is: 6 ÷ 4
The equivalent form of 6 ÷ 4 is: \(\frac{6}{4}\)
Now,
The simplest form of \(\frac{6}{4}\) is: \(\frac{3}{2}\) ( The simplest form is the division of the numerator and the denominator with the common multiple if we can divide)
The mixed form of \(\frac{3}{2}\) is: 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Think and Grow: Divide Whole Numbers

You can use models to divide whole numbers that have a mixed number as the quotient.
Example
Find 3 ÷ 2.
One Way:
Use a tape diagram. Show 3 wholes. Divide each whole into 2 equal parts.

Another Way: Use an area model. Show 3 wholes. Divide each whole into 2 equal parts. Then separate the parts into 2 equal groups.

Show and Grow

Divide. Use a model to help

Question 1.
5 ÷ 3 = ___
Answer: 5 ÷ 3 = 1\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 5 ÷ 3
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
5 ÷ 3 = 3 ÷ 3
= 1 R 2
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 1\(\frac{2}{3}\) or \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Question 2.
7 ÷ 2 = ___

Answer: 7 ÷ 2 = 3\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 7 ÷ 2
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
7 ÷ 2 = 6 ÷ 2
= 3 R 1
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) or \(\frac{7}{2}\) or 3.5

Apply and Grow: Practice

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 3.
12 ÷ 7 = ___

Answer: 12 ÷ 7 = 1\(\frac{5}{7}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 12 ÷ 7
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
12 ÷ 7 = 7 ÷ 7
= 1 R 5
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 1\(\frac{5}{7}\) or \(\frac{12}{7}\)

Question 4.
25 ÷ 20 = ___

Answer: 25 ÷ 20 = 1\(\frac{5}{20}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 25 ÷ 20
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
25 ÷ 20 = 20 ÷ 20
= 1 R 5
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 1\(\frac{5}{20}\) or \(\frac{5}{4}\)

Question 5.
15 ÷ 4 = ___

Answer: 15 ÷ 4 = 3\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 15 ÷ 4
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
15 ÷ 4 = 12 ÷ 4
= 3 R 3
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 3\(\frac{3}{4}\) or \(\frac{15}{4}\)

Question 6.
13 ÷ 6 = ___

Answer: 13 ÷ 6 = 2\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 13÷ 6
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
13 ÷ 6 = 12 ÷ 6
= 2 R 1
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 2\(\frac{1}{6}\) or \(\frac{13}{6}\)

Question 7.
16 ÷ 8 = ___

Answer: 16 ÷ 8 = 2

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 16÷ 8
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
16 ÷ 8
= 2 R 0
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 2 equal parts

Question 8.
92 ÷ 50 = ___

Answer: 92 ÷ 50 = 1\(\frac{21}{25}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 92÷ 50
So,
92 ÷ 50 = 50 ÷ 50
= 1 R 42
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 1\(\frac{42}{50}\) or 1\(\frac{21}{25}\)

Question 9.
How many 3s are in 7?
Answer: The number of 3 in 7 are: \(\frac{7}{3}\) or 2\(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
The division equation is: 7 ÷ 3
So,
The model for the given division equation is:

From the above model,
7 ÷ 3 = 6 ÷ 3
= 2 R 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 2\(\frac{1}{3}\) 3s in 7

Question 10.
How many 6s are in 21?
Answer: The number of 6s in 21 are: \(\frac{21}{6}\) or 3\(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:
The division equation is: 21 ÷ 6
So,
The model for the given division equation is:

From the above model,
21 ÷ 6 = 18 ÷ 6
= 3 R 3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 3\(\frac{3}{6}\) 3s in 21

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that \(\frac{35}{6}\) is equivalent to 35 ÷ 6. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: Yes, your friend is correct

Explanation:
It is given that \(\frac{35}{6}\)
We know that,
The decimal equation can be converted into a fraction as \(\frac{Numerator}{Denominator}\)
So,
\(\frac{35}{6}\) = 35 ÷ 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that your friend is correct

Question 12.
Writing
Write and solve a real-life problem for 24 ÷ 5.
Answer: 24 ÷ 5 = 4\(\frac{4}{5}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 24÷ 5
The model for the above division equation is:

From the above model,
24 ÷ 5 = 20 ÷ 5
= 4 R 4
Hence,
We can say that each part is divided into 4\(\frac{4}{5}\)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You share 7 bales of hay equally among 3 horse stalls. How many whole bales are in each stall? What fractional amount of a bale is in each stall?
Divide 7 by 3 to find how many bales of hay are in each stall. Use an area model to help.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
Six muffins are shared equally among 4 friends. How many whole muffins does each friend get? What fractional amount of a muffin does each friend get?
Answer: Each friend will get 1 muffin and 2 muffins are leftovers
The fractional part of a muffin does each friend get is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
It is given that there are six muffins are shared equally among 4 friends.
So,
The number of muffins each friend get = 6 ÷ 4
= 4 ÷ 4
= 1 R 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that each friend gets 1 muffin each and the fraction of each muffin get is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 14.
A cyclist bikes 44 miles in 5 days. She bikes the same distance each day. Does she bike more than 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles each day? Explain.
Answer: She bikes more than 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles each day.

Explanation:
It is given that a cyclist bikes 44 miles in 5 days.
So,
The distance that she bikes each day = 44 ÷ 5
So,
44 ÷ 5 = 40 ÷ 5
= 8 R 4
= 8\(\frac{4}{5}\) miles
But, it is given that she bikes 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles each day
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that she bikes more than 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) miles each day.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
At Table A, 4 students share 7 packs of clay equally. At Table B, 5 students share 8 packs of clay equally. At which table does each student get a greater amount of clay? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 15
Answer: At Table A, each student gets a greater amount of clay.

Explanation:
It is given that at Table A, 4 students share 7 packs of clay equally.
So,
The representation of clay at table A is: \(\frac{7}{4}\)
It is also given that at Table B, 5 students share 8 packs of clay equally.
So,
The representation of clay at table B is: \(\frac{8}{5}\)
So,
For comparison, equate the denominators.
So,
Multiply the first fraction at table A by \(\frac{5}{5}\) and the fraction at table B by \(\frac{4}{4}\)
So,
\(\frac{7}{4}\) × \(\frac{5}{5}\)
= \(\frac{35}{20}\)
So,
\(\frac{8}{5}\) × \(\frac{4}{4}\)
= \(\frac{32}{20}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that at table A, the students will get more amount of clay.

Mixed Numbers as Quotients Homework & Practice 10.2

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 1.
5 ÷ 2 = ___
Answer: 5 ÷ 2 = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 5 ÷ 2
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
5 ÷ 2 = 4 ÷ 2
= 2 R 1
Hence,
We can say that 5 ÷ 2 = 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) or 2.5 or \(\frac{5}{2}\)

Question 2.
10 ÷ 7 = ___
Answer: 10 ÷ 7 = 1\(\frac{3}{7}\) = \(\frac{10}{7}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 10 ÷ 7
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
10 ÷ 7 = 7 ÷ 7
= 1 R 3
Hence,
We can say that 10 ÷ 7 = 1\(\frac{3}{7}\) or \(\frac{10}{7}\)

Question 3.
3 ÷ 9 = ___
Answer: 3 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 3 ÷ 9
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
3 and 9 are the multiples of 3.
So,
3 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Hence,
We can say that 3 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 4.
11 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 11 ÷ 4 = 2\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 11 ÷ 4
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
11 ÷ 4 = 8 ÷ 4
= 2 R 3
Hence,
We can say that 11 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{11}{4}\) or 2\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 5.
13 ÷ 6 = ___
Answer: 13 ÷ 6 = 2\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 13 ÷ 6
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
13 ÷ 6 = 12 ÷ 6
= 2 R 1
Hence,
We can say that 13 ÷ 6 = \(\frac{13}{6}\) or 2\(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 6.
45 ÷ 8 = ___
Answer: 45 ÷ 8 = 5\(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation;
The given division equation is: 45 ÷ 8
The model representing the division equation is:

From the above model,
45 ÷ 8 = 40 ÷ 8
= 5 R 5
Hence,
We can say that 45 ÷ 8 = \(\frac{45}{8}\) or 5\(\frac{5}{8}\)

Question 7.
Number Sense
Between which two whole numbers is the quotient of 74 and 9?
Answer: The quotient of 74 and 9 is between 8 and 9

Explanation:
The given two numbers are 7 and 9
So,
By using the partial quotients method,
74 ÷ 9= 72 ÷ 9
= 8 R 2
So,
74 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{74}{9}\) or 8\(\frac{2}{9}\) or 8.3
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the quotient of 74 and 9 is between 8 and 9

Question 8.
Reasoning
Three friends want to share 22 baseball cards. For this situation, why does the quotient 7 R1 make more sense than the quotient 7\(\frac{1}{3}\)?
Answer:
It is given that three friends want to share 22 baseball cards.
So,
We have to find the number of baseball cards each friend possesses.
So,
It is sufficient to write the number of baseball cards possessed by each friend in the remainder form rather than the fraction form.
So,
The number of baseball cards possessed by each friend = \(\frac{The total number of baseball cards}{The number of friends}\)
= 22 ÷ 3
= 21 ÷ 3
= 7 R 1
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the remainder form is sufficient to find the number of baseball cars possessed by each friend rather than the fraction form.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Is \(\frac{2}{5}\) × 3 equivalent to 2 × 3 ÷ 5? Explain.
Answer: Yes, \(\frac{2}{5}\) × 3 equivalent to 2 × 3 ÷ 5

Explanation:
The given fraction and the number is: \(\frac{2}{5}\) and 3
So,
\(\frac{2}{5}\) × 3 = \(\frac{2}{5}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{2 × 3}{5}\)
= 2 × 3 ÷ 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\frac{2}{5}\) × 3 equivalent to 2 × 3 ÷ 5

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
A bag of 4 balls weighs 6 pounds. Each ball weighs the same amount. What is the weight of each ball?
Answer: The weight of each ball is: \(\frac{3}{2}\) pounds or 1.5 pounds

Explanation:
It is given that a bag of 4 balls weighs 6 pounds
So,
The weight of each ball = \(\frac{The total weight of the balls}{The number of balls}\)
= 6 ÷ 4
Since 6 and 4 are the multiples of 2, divide the two numbers by 2
So,
6 ÷ 4 = 3 ÷ 2
So,
3 ÷ 2 = 2 ÷ 2
= 1 R 1
= 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the weight of each ball is: 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds or 1.5 pounds

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Zookeepers order 600 pounds of bamboo for the pandas. The bamboo lasts 7 days. How many whole pounds of bamboo do the pandas eat each day? What fractional amount of a pound do the pandas eat each day?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 17
Answer:
The amount of bamboos the pandas eat each day is around 85 pounds
The amount of bamboos the pandas eat each day in the fraction form is: 85\(\frac{5}{7}\)

Explanation:
It is given that zookeepers order 600 pounds of bamboo for the pandas and the bamboos last 7 days for the pandas
So,
The number of bamboos the pandas eat each day = 600 ÷ 7
So,
By using the partial quotients method,
600 ÷ 7 = ( 560 + 35 ) ÷ 7
= ( 560 ÷ 7 ) + ( 35 ÷ 7 )
= 80 + 5
= 85 R 5
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that
The amount of bamboos the pandas eat each day is around 85 pounds
The amount of bamboos the pandas eat each day in the fraction form is: 85\(\frac{5}{7}\)

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A plumber has 20 feet of piping. He cuts the piping into 6 equal pieces. Is each piece greater than, less than, or equal to 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet?
Answer: Each piece is less than 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet

Explanation:
It is given that a plumber has 20 feet of piping and he cuts the piping into 6 equal pieces.
So,
The length of each piece = 20 ÷ 6
By using the partial quotients method,
20 ÷ 6 = 18 ÷ 6
= 3 R 2
So,
20 ÷ 6 = 3\(\frac{2}{6}\)
Now,
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\)
3\(\frac{2}{6}\) = \(\frac{20}{6}\)
For comparison, we have to equate whether the denominators or the numerators.
So,
Multiply 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) with \(\frac{3}{3}\)
So,
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{21}{6}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that each piece is less than 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet

Review & Refresh

Add.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 18
Answer: \(\frac{2}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Explanation:
The two given fractions are: \(\frac{2}{9}\) and \(\frac{2}{3}\)
So, in addition, we have to make either the numerators or the denominators equal
So,
Multiply \(\frac{2}{3}\)  with \(\frac{3}{3}\)
So,
\(\frac{2}{3}\)  = \(\frac{6}{9}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\frac{2}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 19
Answer: \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{34}{40}\)

Explanation:
The two given fractions are: \(\frac{1}{10}\) and \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So, in addition, we have to make either the numerators or the denominators equal
So,
Multiply \(\frac{1}{10}\)  with \(\frac{4}{4}\)
Multiply \(\frac{3}{4}\)  with \(\frac{10}{10}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{10}\)  = \(\frac{4}{40}\)
\(\frac{3}{4}\)  = \(\frac{30}{40}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\frac{1}{10}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{34}{40}\)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 20
Answer: \(\frac{3}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\) = \(\frac{49}{30}\)

Explanation:
The three given fractions are: \(\frac{3}{5}\) , \(\frac{5}{6}\) and \(\frac{1}{5}\)
So, in addition, we have to make either the numerators or the denominators equal
So,
Multiply \(\frac{3}{5}\)  with \(\frac{6}{6}\)
Multiply \(\frac{5}{6}\)  with \(\frac{5}{5}\)
Multiply \(\frac{1}{5}\)  with \(\frac{6}{6}\)
So,
\(\frac{3}{5}\)  = \(\frac{18}{30}\)
\(\frac{5}{6}\)  = \(\frac{25}{30}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\)  = \(\frac{6}{30}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\frac{3}{5}\) + \(\frac{5}{6}\) +\(\frac{1}{5}\)  = \(\frac{49}{30}\)

Lesson 10.3 Divide Whole Numbers by Unit Fractions

Explore and Grow

Write a real-life problem that can be represented by 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)?
Answer:
Suppose, we have an apple and there are 6 children and we are giving each child half of the piece.
So,
Each child receives 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) piece of the apple

What is the solution to the problem? Use a model to support your answer?
Answer:
The above problem is the division of an apple among the six children
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
The amount each child receive from an apple = 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 6 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{6}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 6 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 12

Structure
How can you check your answer using multiplication?
Answer:
We can check the answer using multiplication by the two rules regarding division and multiplication. They are:
A) a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
B) a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)

Think and Grow: Divide Whole Numbers by Unit Fractions

You can use models to divide whole numbers by unit fractions.
Example
Find 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
One Way:
Use a tape diagram to find how many \(\frac{1}{3}\)s are in 4. There are 4 wholes.
Divide each whole into 3 equal parts. Each part is \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 21
Because there are 3 one-thirds in 1 whole, there are
4 × 3 equal parts = 12 one-thirds in 4 wholes.

Show and Grow

Divide. Use a model to help

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 23
Answer: 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 6

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 3 and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 3 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 6
Hence,
3÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 6

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 24
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 10

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 2 and \(\frac{1}{5}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{5}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 5 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 10
Hence,
2÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 10

Apply and Grow: Practice

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 3.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 25
Answer: 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 1 and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 1 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{1}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 1}{1 × 1}\)
= 3
Hence,
1÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 26
Answer: 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 15

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 3 and \(\frac{1}{5}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)  = 3 × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 5}{1 × 1}\)
= 15
Hence,
3÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 15

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 27
Answer: 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 15

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 5 and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 5 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 5}{1 × 1}\)
= 15
Hence,
5÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 15

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 28
Answer: 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 16

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 4 and \(\frac{1}{4}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = 4 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{4}{1}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 4 × 4}{1 × 1}\)
= 16
Hence,
4÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 16

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 29
Answer: 7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 14

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 7 and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 7 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{7}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 14
Hence,
7÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 14

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 30
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{7}\) = 14

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 2 and \(\frac{1}{7}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{7}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{7}{1}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{7}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 14
Hence,
2÷ \(\frac{1}{7}\) = 14

Question 9.
How many \(\frac{1}{4}\)s are in 5?
Answer: There are 20 \(\frac{1}{4}\)s in 5

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
Now,
We have to find the number of \(\frac{1}{4}\)s in 5
So,
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = 5 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{5}{1}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 5 × 4}{1 × 1}\)
= 20
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 20 \(\frac{1}{4}\)s in 5.

Question 10.
How many \(\frac{1}{6}\)s are in 2?
Answer: There are 12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)s in 2

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
Now,
We have to find the number of \(\frac{1}{6}\)s in 2
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{6}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{6}{1}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{6}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 2 × 6}{1 × 1}\)
= 12
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 12 \(\frac{1}{6}\)s in 2.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton finds 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\). Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 31
Answer: No, Newton is not correct

Explanation:
The given division equation is: 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 6 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{6}{1}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 6}{1 × 1}\)
= 18
But, according to Newton,
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 2
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that Newton is not correct.

Question 12.
Writing
Write and solve a real-life problem for 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Answer:
Suppose we have 4 bags of wheat and we have to distribute the 4 bags by dividing each bag of wheat in half
So,
Each person receives 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) bag of wheat
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 4 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{4}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 4 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 8 bags of wheat when divide the 4 bags of wheat in half.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A chef makes 3 cups of salsa. A serving of salsa is \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup. How many servings does the chef make?
To find the number of servings, find the number of \(\frac{1}{8}\) cups in 3 cups.
Use an area model to find 3 ÷ \(\frac{1}{8}\). Divide each cup into 8 equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 32

Show and Grow

Question 13.
A litter of kittens weighs a total of 2 pounds. Each newborn kitten weighs \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound. How many kittens are in the litter?
Answer: The number of kittens in the litter are: 8 kittens

Explanation:
It is given that a litter of kittens weighs a total of 2 pounds and each newborn kitten weighs \(\frac{1}{4}\) pound.
So,
The number of kittens in the litter = \(\frac{The total weight of litter}{The weight of each newborn kitten}\)
= 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{4}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 4 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 8
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of kittens in the litter are: 8 kittens

Question 14.
You put signs on a walking trail that is 7 miles long. You put a sign at the start and at the end of the trail. You also put a sign every \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile. How many signs do you put on the trail?
Answer: The total number of signs you put on the trail is: 72

Explanation:
It is given that you put signs on a walking trail that is 7 miles long and you put a sign at the start and at the end of the trail.
It is also given that you put a sign every \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile.
So,
The total number of signs you put on the trail = The sign at the start of the trail + The sign at the end of the trail + The total number of signs for \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile
Now,
The total number of signs for \(\frac{1}{10}\) mile = 7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\)  = 7 × \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= \(\frac{7}{1}\) × \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 × 10}{1 × 1}\)
= 70
So,
The total number of signs you put on the trail = 1 + 1 + 70
= 72
hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 72 signs that you put on the trail

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 2 boards that are each 8 feet long. You cut \(\frac{1}{2}\)– foot pieces to make square picture frames. How many picture frames can you make?
Answer: The number of picture frames you can make is: 32

Explanation:
It is given that you have 2 boards that are each 8 feet long.
So,
The total length of 2 boards = 2 × 8 = 16 feet
It is also given that you cut \(\frac{1}{2}\)– foot pieces to make square picture frames.
So,
The total number of picture frames = \(\frac{The total length of 2 boards}{The length of each square frame}\)
= 16 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
16 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 16 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{16}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 16 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 32
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that we can make 32 picture frames.

Divide Whole Numbers by Unit Fractions Homework & Practice 10.3

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 33
Answer: 1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{9}\) = 9

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 1 and \(\frac{1}{9}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
1 ÷ \(\frac{1}{9}\)  = 1 × \(\frac{9}{1}\)
= \(\frac{1}{1}\) × \(\frac{9}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 9}{1 × 1}\)
= 9
Hence,
1÷ \(\frac{1}{9}\) = 9

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 34
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 6

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 2 and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 6
Hence,
2÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 6

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 35
Answer: 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 10

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 5 and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 5 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{5}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 5 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 10
Hence,
5÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 10

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 36
Answer: 9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 36

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 9 and \(\frac{1}{4}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = 9 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{9}{1}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 9 × 4}{1 × 1}\)
= 36
Hence,
9÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 36

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 37
Answer: 7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 21

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 7 and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 7 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3}{1}\) × \(\frac{7}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 7}{1 × 1}\)
= 21
Hence,
7÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 21

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 38
Answer: 8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 40

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 8 and \(\frac{1}{5}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)  = 8 × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{8}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 8 × 5}{1 × 1}\)
= 40
Hence,
8÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 40

Question 7.
Number Sense
Explain how you can check your answer for Exercise 6.
Answer:
We can check the answer for exercise 6 by using the below model:

From the above model,
Each part represents \(\frac{8}{5}\)
So,
The total value of the 5 parts is: \(\frac{40}{5}\)
Hence,
In the above way, we can say that we check the answer

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes finds 5 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\). Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 38.1
Answer: Yes, he is correct

Explanation:
We can write 5 as \(\frac{20}{4}\) or \(\frac{5}{1}\)
But, we only take \(\frac{20}{4}\) because the divided number given is 4
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{20}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{20}{4}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 20 × 4}{4 × 1}\)
= 20
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that Descartes is correct.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You need \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of clay to make a pinch pot. How many pinch pots can you make with 12 pounds of clay?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 42
Answer: You can make 24 pinch pots with 12 pounds of clay

Explanation:
It is given that you need \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of clay to make a pinch pot.
It is also given that you have 12 pounds of clay
So,
The number of pinch pots you can make by using 12 pounds of clay = \(\frac{The total amount of clay}{The amount of clay used to make each pinch pot}\)
= 12 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
12 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{12}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 12 × 2}{4 × 1}\)
= 24
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that we can make 24 pinch pots by using 12 pounds of clay.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Your art teacher has 5 yards of yellow string and 4 yards of green string. She cuts both colors \(\frac{1}{3}\)-yard pieces to hang of string into student artwork. How many pieces of student artwork can she hang?
Answer: The number of pieces of student artwork she can hang is: 27

Explanation:
It is given that your art teacher has 5 yards of yellow string and 4 yards of green string.
So,
The total number of yards of string = 5 + 4 = 9 yards of string
It is also given that she cuts both colors \(\frac{1}{3}\)-yard pieces to hang of string into student artwork.
So,
The number of pieces of student artwork she can hang = \(\frac{The total number of yards of strings}{The length of each yard f string}\)
= 9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{9}{1}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 9 × 3}{1 × 1}\)
= 27
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 27 pieces of student artwork that she can hang.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 43
Answer: \(\frac{2}{5}\) × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{20}\)

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{3}{4}\) and \(\frac{2}{5}\)
So,
\(\frac{2}{5}\) × \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= \(\frac{2 × 3}{5 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{6}{20}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{2}{5}\) × \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{6}{20}\)

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 44
Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{64}\)

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{1}{8}\) and \(\frac{5}{8}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{5}{8}\)
= \(\frac{1 × 5}{8 × 8}\)
= \(\frac{5}{64}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{5}{8}\) = \(\frac{5}{64}\)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 45
Answer: \(\frac{4}{9}\) × \(\frac{2}{7}\) = \(\frac{8}{63}\)

Explanation:
The given fractions are: \(\frac{4}{9}\) and \(\frac{2}{7}\)
So,
\(\frac{4}{9}\) × \(\frac{2}{7}\)
= \(\frac{2 × 4}{7 × 9}\)
= \(\frac{8}{63}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{4}{9}\) × \(\frac{2}{7}\) = \(\frac{8}{63}\)

Lesson 10.4 Divide Unit Fractions by Whole Numbers

Write a real-life problem that can be represented by \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3?
Answer:
Suppose we have 3 people and those 3 people each has to share \(\frac{1}{2}\) of the apple

What is the solution to the problem? Use a model to support your answer?
Answer:
The above problem is: We have to share \(\frac{1}{2}\) each for the 3 people
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) is the solution to the above problem.

Precision
Is the answer greater than or less than 1? Explain?
Answer: The answer is less than 1

Explanation:
The answer for the problem is: \(\frac{1}{6}\)
So,
For the comparison of \(\frac{1}{6}\) with 1, we have to see whether the numerators or the denominators are equal or not
So, in this case, the numerators are equal
So, compare the denominators
So,
1 < 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that \(\frac{1}{6}\) is less than 1

Think and Grow: Divide Unit Fractions by Whole Numbers

You can use models to divide unit fractions by whole numbers.

Show and Grow

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 48
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 2
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{8}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 49
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{2}\) and 5
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{1}{10}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{10}\)

Apply and Grow: Practice

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 50
Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{5}\) and 3
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{5 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{15}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 51
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{6}\) and 2
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2
= \(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 6}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 52
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and 5
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 5
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{3 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{1}{15}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 53
Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{5}\) and 4
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{5 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{20}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 54
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and 3
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{3 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 55
Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{8}\) and 2
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 2
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 8}\)
= \(\frac{1}{16}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{16}\)

Question 9.
How many 6s are in \(\frac{1}{2}\)?
Answer: There are \(\frac{1}{12}\) 6s in \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
Now,
We have to find the number of 6s in \(\frac{1}{2}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 6}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are \(\frac{1}{12}\) 6s in \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 10.
How many 2s are in \(\frac{1}{3}\) ?
Answer: There are \(\frac{1}{6}\) 2s in \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
Now,
We have to find the number of 2s in \(\frac{1}{3}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 2
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{6}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are \(\frac{1}{6}\) 2s in \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 11.
Writing
Write and solve a real-life problem for
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 56
Answer:
Suppose a box has 7 chocolates. We have to divide these seven chocolates into further \(\frac{1}{2}\) parts so that the chocolates can be distributed to more people
So,
The each part of chocolate we can get = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 7
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 7
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{7}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 7}\)
= \(\frac{1}{14}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that we can get \(\frac{1}{14}\) part of each chocolate.

Question 12.
Reasoning
Complete the statements.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You melt \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart of soap. You pour the soap into 4 of the same-sized molds. What fraction of a quart of soap does each mold hold?
You are dividing \(\frac{1}{4}\) quart into 4 equal parts, so you need to find \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 4.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You buy \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of grapes. You equally divide the grapes into 2 bags. What fraction of a pound of grapes do you put into each bag?
Answer: The fraction of a pound of grapes you put into each bag is: \(\frac{1}{8}\) pound

Explanation:
It is given that you buy \(\frac{1}{2}\) pound of grapes.
It is also given that you equally divide the grapes into 2 bags.
So,
The number of grapes in each bag = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 2
Now,
The fraction of pound of grapes you put into each bag = \(\frac{The number of grapes in each bag}{2}\)
=  ( \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 2 ) ÷ 2
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
( \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 2 ) ÷ 2
= ( \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\) ) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 2}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Hence, from the above
We can conclude that the fraction of pound of grapes in each bag is: \(\frac{1}{8}\) pound

Question 14.
You have \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup of red sand, \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of blue sand, and \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of white sand. You equally divide the sand into 3 containers. What fraction of a cup of sand do you pour into each container?
Answer: The fraction of a cup of sand you pour into each container is: \(\frac{7}{24}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you have \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup of red sand, \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of blue sand, and \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of white sand.
So,
The total amount of sand = \(\frac{1}{8}\) cup of red sand + \(\frac{1}{4}\) cup of blue sand + \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of white sand
In addition, we have to see either the numerators are equal or the denominators are equal.
If the numerators are equal we have to ake the denominators also equal.
So,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) is multplied by \(\frac{2}{2}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) is multiplied by \(\frac{4}{4}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{2}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{4}{8}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) + \(\frac{2}{8}\) + \(\frac{4}{8}\) = \(\frac{7}{8}\)
It is also given that all the sand is equally distributed into 3 containers
So,
The amount of sand in each container = \(\frac{7}{8}\) ÷ 3
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{7}{8}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{7}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 × 1}{8 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{7}{24}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amount of sand in each container is: \(\frac{7}{24}\) cup.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You, your friend, and your cousin share \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a vegetable pizza and \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a cheese share pizza. The pizzas are the same size. What fraction of a pizza do you get in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 58

Divide. Use a model to help
Answer: The fraction of a pizza you got is: \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you, your friend, and your cousin share \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a vegetable pizza and \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a cheese share pizza.
So,
The total amount of pizza = \(\frac{1}{2}\) of a vegetable pizza + \(\frac{1}{4}\) of a cheese share pizza
In addition, we have to see either the numerators are equal or the denominators are equal.
If the numerators are equal we have to ake the denominators also equal.
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) is multplied by \(\frac{2}{2}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2}{4}\)
So,
\(\frac{2}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{4}\)
So,
The fraction of pizza each get = \(\frac{The total amount of pizza}{3}\)
= \(\frac{3}{4}\) ÷ 3
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{3}{4}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 3 × 1}{4 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{3}{12}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of pizza each get is: \(\frac{3}{12}\)

Divide Unit Fractions by Whole Numbers Homework & Practice 10.4

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 59
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and 4
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{3 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 60
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{6}\) and 3
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{6 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{18}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 61
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{4}\) and 5
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{5 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{20}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{4}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{20}\)

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 62
Answer: \(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{45}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{5}\) and 9
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 9
= \(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{5 × 9}\)
= \(\frac{1}{45}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{45}\)

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 63
Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 6 = \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{8}\) and 6
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 6
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{8 × 6}\)
= \(\frac{1}{48}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 6 = \(\frac{1}{48}\)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 64
Answer: \(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{7}\) and 4
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{7 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{28}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{28}\)

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend divides \(\frac{1}{3}\) by 7 to get \(\frac{1}{21}\). He checks his answer by multiplying \(\frac{1}{21}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\). Does your friend check his answer correctly? Explain.
Answer: No, your friend does not check his answer correctly

Explanation:
It is given that your friend divides \(\frac{1}{3}\) by 7 to get \(\frac{1}{21}\).
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 7
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{7}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{7 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{21}\)
It is also given that your friend checks his answer by multiplying \(\frac{1}{21}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\).
Now,
\(\frac{1}{21}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{1 × 1}{21 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{63}\)
But, your friend wanted to check whether \(\frac{1}{21}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{1}{7}\)
But, the value becomes \(\frac{1}{63}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that your friend does not check the answer correctly.

Question 8.
Logic
Find the missing numbers.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You win tickets that you can exchange for prizes. You exchange \(\frac{1}{5}\) of your tickets and then divide them equally among 3 prizes. What fraction of your tickets do you spend on each prize?
Answer: The fraction of your tickets you spend on each prize is: \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you win tickets that you can exchange for prizes.
It is also given that you exchange \(\frac{1}{5}\) of your tickets and then divide them equally among 3 prizes
So,
The fraction of the tickets spent on each prize = \(\frac{The value of Exchange}{The number of prizes}\)
= \(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 3
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{5}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{5 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{15}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conlude that the fraction of tickets you spend on each prize is: \(\frac{1}{15}\)

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You have \(\frac{1}{8}\) gallon of melted crayon wax. You pour the wax equally into 8 different molds to make new crayons. What fraction of a cup of melted wax is in each mold? Think: 1 gallon is 16 cups.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 66
Answer: The fraction of a cup of melted wax in each mold is: \(\frac{1}{4}\)

Explanation:
It is given that you have \(\frac{1}{8}\) gallon of melted crayon wax.
It is also given that you pour the wax equally into 8 different molds to make new crayons.
So,
The fraction of melted crayon wax in each mold in gallons = \(\frac{The total amount of melted crayon wax }{The number of molds}\)
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 8
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 8
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{8 × 8}\)
= \(\frac{1}{64}\) gallons
But, it is given that
1 gallon = 16 cups
So,
The total number of cups that the melted crayon wax contained = \(\frac{1}{64}\) × \(\frac{16}{1}\)
= \(\frac{1 × 16 }{64 × 1}\)
= \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are \(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of melted crayon wax in each mold.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
0.9 ÷ 0.1 = ___
Answer: 0.9 ÷ 0.1 = 9

Explanation:
The given decimal numbers are: 0.9 and 0.1
The representation of the decimal numbers in the fraction form is: \(\frac{9}{10}\) and \(\frac{1}{10}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{9}{10}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\)  = \(\frac{9}{10}\) × \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 9 × 10}{10 × 1}\)
= 9
Hence, 0.9 ÷ 0.1 = 9

Question 12.
38.6 ÷ 100 = ___

Answer: 38.6 ÷ 100 = 0.386

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 38.6 and 100
The representation of the numbers in the fraction form is: \(\frac{386}{10}\) and \(\frac{100}{1}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{386}{10}\) ÷ \(\frac{100}{1}\)  = \(\frac{386}{10}\) × \(\frac{1}{100}\)
= \(\frac{ 386 × 1}{100 × 10}\)
= \(\frac{386}{1000}\)
= 0.386
Hence, 38.6 ÷ 100 = 0.386

Question 13.
2.57 ÷ 0.01 = ___
Answer: 2.57 ÷ 0.01 = 257

Explanation:
The given decimal numbers are: 2.57 and 0.01
The representation of the decimal numbers in the fraction form is: \(\frac{257}{100}\) and \(\frac{1}{100}\)
Now,
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{257}{100}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{100}\)  = \(\frac{257}{100}\) × \(\frac{100}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 257 × 100}{100 × 1}\)
= 257
Hence, 2.57 ÷ 0.01 = 257

Lesson 10.5 Problem Solving: Fraction Division

Explore and Grow

You want to make a \(\frac{1}{3}\) batch of the recipe. How you can use division to find the amount of each ingredient you need?
Answer:
It is given that you want to make a \(\frac{1}{3}\) batch of the recipe.
So,
From \(\frac{1}{3}\),
1 represents a batch of the recipe
3 represents the total number of ingredients in a batch
So,
The amount of each ingredient you need = \(\frac{The amount of the batch of the recipe }{The total number of ingredients}\)
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3
Now,
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{3 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{9}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amount of each ingredient you need is: \(\frac{1}{9}\)

Reasoning
Without calculating, explain how you can tell whether you need more than or less than 1 tablespoon of olive oil?
Answer: You need less than 1 tablespoon of olive oil

Explanation:
From the above problem,
The amount of each ingredient is: \(\frac{1}{9}\)
Since the amount of each ingredient is less than 1, you need less than 1 tablespoon of olive oil

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Fraction Division

Example
You have 4 cups of yellow paint and 3 cups of blue paint. How many batches of green paint can you make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 67

Understand the Problem

What do you know?

  • You have 4 cups of yellow paint and 3 cups of blue paint.
  • One batch of green paint is made of \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of yellow and \(\frac{1}{3}\) cup of blue.

What do you need to find?

  • You need to find how many batches of green paint you can make.

Make a Plan
How will you solve?

  • Find how many batches are possible from yellow, and how many from blue.
  • Choose the lesser number of batches.

Solve

So, you can make 8 batches of green paint.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
In the example, explain why you choose the fewer number of batches.
Answer: In the above example, the yellow paint has the less number of batches as the amount of each batch of yellow paint-filled is more than the batch of green paint
Hence,
We choose the fewer number of batches of yellow paint

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.

Question 2.
A landowner donates 3 acres of land to a city. The mayor of the city uses 1 acre of the land for a playground and the rest of the land for community garden plots. Each garden plot is \(\frac{1}{3}\) acre. How many plots are there?
Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve it? Explain?
Answer: The number of plots in the community is: 6

Explanation:
It is given that a landowner donates 3 acres of land to a city and the mayor of the city uses 1 acre of the land for a playground and the rest of the land for community garden plots.
So,
The portion of the land used for community garden plots is: 2 acres
It is also given that each garden plot is \(\frac{1}{3}\) acre.
So,
The number of plots = \(\frac{The portion of the land used for community garden plots}{The area of each garden plot}\)
= 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 2 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= 6
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 6 plots

Question 3.
A craftsman uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) gallon of paint to paint 4 identical dressers. He uses the same amount of paint on each dresser. How much paint does he use to paint 7 of the same dressers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 69
Answer: The paint used by the craftsman to paint 7 of the same dressers is: \(\frac{21}{16}\)

Explanation:
It is given that a craftsman uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) gallon of paint to paint 4 identical dressers.
So,
The paint used to paint each dresser = \(\frac{3}{4}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{3}{4}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{3}{16}\) gallon
So,
The amount of paint used to paint the 7 identical dressers = \(\frac{The paint used to paint each dresser}{1}\) × 7
= \(\frac{3}{16}\) × \(\frac{7}{1}\)
= \(\frac{3 × 7}{16 × 1}\)
= \(\frac{21}{16}\) gallon
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the paint used to paint 7 identical dressers is: \(\frac{21}{16}\) gallon

Question 4.
An airplane travels 125 miles in \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour. It travels the same number of miles each hour. How many miles does the plane travel in 5 hours?
Answer: The number of miles the plane travel in 5 hours is: 2,500 miles

Explanation:
It is given that an airplane travels 125 miles in \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour
So,
The number of miles traveled by plane in 1 hour = 125 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= 125 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= 125 × 4
= 500 miles
So,
The number of miles traveled by plane in 5 hours = ( The number of miles traveled by plane in 1 hour ) × 5
= 500 × 5
= 2,500 miles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of miles traveled by plane in 5 hours is: 2,500 miles

Question 5.
You make bows for gifts using \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard of ribbon for each bow. You have 4 feet of red ribbon and 5 feet of green ribbon. How many bows can you make?
Answer: The number of bows you can make is: 2 bows

Explanation:
It is given that you make bows for gifts using \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard of ribbon for each bow.
It is also given that you have 4 feet of red ribbon and 5 feet of green ribbon
So,
The total length of ribbon = 5 + 4 = 9 feet
we know that,
1 foot = \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
So,
9 feet = 9 × \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
= \(\frac{9}{1}\) yards × \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
= 3 yards
So,
The number of bows you can make = \(\frac{2}{3}\) yards × 3
= 2 bows
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of bows we can make is: 2

Question 6.
A landscaper buys 1 gallon of plant fertilizer. He uses \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the fertilizer, and then divides the rest into 3 smaller bottles. How many gallons does he put into each bottle?
Answer: The number of gallons he put into each bottle is: \(\frac{4}{15}\)

Explanation:
It is given that a landscaper buys 1 gallon of plant fertilizer and he uses \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the fertilizer
So,
The remaining amount of the fertilizer = 1 – \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{4}{5}\) gallons
It is also given that he divided the remaining amount of fertilizer into 3 smaller bottles.
So,
The amount of fertilizer put into each bottle = \(\frac{The remaining amount of the fertilizer}{The total number of bottles}\)
= \(\frac{4}{5}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{4}{5}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{4 × 1}{5 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{4}{15}\) gallons
hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amount of remaining fertilizer put into each bottle is: \(\frac{4}{15}\) gallons

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A sponsor donates $0.10 to a charity for every \(\frac{1}{4}\) kilometer of the triathlon an athlete completes. The athlete completes the entire triathlon. How much money does the sponsor donate?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 70
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Write and solve an equation.
Add 1.9, 90, and 21.1 to find how many kilometers the athlete completes.
Divide the sum by \(\frac{1}{4}\) to find how many \(\frac{1}{4}\) kilometers the athlete completes.
Multiply the quotient by $0.10 to find how much money the sponsor donates.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 71
Let m represent the total amount of money donated.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
You earn $5 for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour you do yard work. How much money do you earn in 1 week?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 73
Answer: The amount you earn in 1 week is: $700

Explanation:
The given table is:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 73
From the above table,
The total amount of time = 5\(\frac{1}{2}\) + 3 + 1\(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{11}{2}\) + 3 + \(\frac{3}{2}\)
= \(\frac{11 + 3}{2}\) + 3
= 7 + 3
= 10 hours
It is given that you earn $5 for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour you do yard work
So,
The amount earned in 10 hours in a day = 10 ÷\(\frac{1}{2}\) × 5 ( Since we have the time in hours but the money earned is given in half an hour basis )
= 20 × 5
= $100
We know that 1 week = 7 days
So,
The amount earned in 1 week = 100 × 7 = $700
hence, from the above,
We can conclude that we can earn $700 in a week

Problem Solving: Fraction Division Homework &  10.5

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.

Question 1.
A train travels 75 miles in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour. How many miles does the train travel in 8 hours?
Answer: The number of miles the train travel in  hours is: 1,200 miles

Explanation:
It is given that a train travels 75 miles in \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour.
So,
The number of miles the train travel in 1 hour = 75 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 75 × 2
= 150 miles
So,
The number of miles the train travel in 8 hours = The number of miles traveled by train in 1 hour × 8
= 150 × 8
= 1,200 miles
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the train travels 1,200 miles in 8 hours.

Question 2.
You need \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard of fabric to create a headband. You have 12 feet of blue fabric and 4 feet of yellow fabric. How many headbands can you make with all of the fabric?
Answer: The number of headbands you can make with all of the fabric is: 8 headbands

Explanation:
It is given that you need \(\frac{2}{3}\) yard of fabric to create a headband.
It is also given that you have 12 feet of blue fabric and 4 feet of yellow fabric.
So,
The total length of the fabric = 12 + 4 = 16 feet
We know that
1 foot = \(\frac{1}{3}\) yards
So,
16 feet = \(\frac{16}{3}\) yards
So,
The number of headbands you can create with all the fabric = \(\frac{The total length of the fabric}{The length of each fabric}\)
= \(\frac{16}{3}\) ÷ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
= \(\frac{16}{3}\) × \(\frac{3}{2}\)
= \(\frac{16 × 3}{3 × 2}\)
= 8 headbands
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that we can create 8 headbands with all the fabric.

Question 3.
An art teacher has 8 gallons of paint. Her class uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the paint. The teacher divides the rest of the paint into 4 bottles. How much paint is in each bottle?
Answer: The amount of paint in each bottle is: \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
It is given that an art teacher has 8 gallons of paint and her class uses \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the paint.
So,
The remaining amount of paint = \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 8
= \(\frac{1}{4}\) × \(\frac{8}{1}\)
=\(\frac{1 × 8}{4 × 1}\)
= 2 gallons
It is also given that the remaining amount of the paint divided into 4 bottles by the teacher
So,
The amount of paint present in each bottle = 2 ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amout of paint present in each bottle is: \(\frac{1}{2}\) gallons

Question 4.
You mix 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of frozen strawberries and 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of frozen blueberries in a bowl. A smoothie requires \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of your berry mix. How many smoothies can you make?
Answer: The number of smoothies you can make is:

Explanation:
It is given that you mix 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of frozen strawberries and 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of frozen blueberries in a bowl.
So,
The amount of berry mix = 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) cups of frozen strawberries + 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) cups of frozen blueberries
= 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) + 4\(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{13}{4}\) + \(\frac{9}{2}\)
In addition, equate the denominators
So,
Multiply \(\frac{9}{2}\) with \(\frac{2}{2}\)
So,
\(\frac{9}{2}\) = \(\frac{18}{4}\)
So,
The amount of berry mix = \(\frac{13}{4}\) + \(\frac{18}{4}\)
= \(\frac{31}{4}\)
Now,
It is also given that the smoothie requires \(\frac{1}{2}\) cup of your berry mix.
So,
The number of smoothies = \(\frac{31}{4}\) ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{31}{4}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{31 × 2}{4 × 1}\)
= \(\frac{31}{2}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of smoothies we can make are: \(\frac{31}{2}\)

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A sponsor donates $0.10 for every \(\frac{1}{4}\) dollar donated at the locations shown. How much money does the sponsor donate?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 74
Answer: The amount of money the sponsor donates is: $40.4

Explanation:
The given table is:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 74
From the above table,
The total amount of money collected = 25.25 + 12.50 + 63.25
= $101
It is given that a sponsor donates $0.10 for every \(\frac{1}{4}\) dollar
So,
the total amount of donated = The total amount of money collected ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 0.10
= 101 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) × 0.10
= 101 × 4 × 0.10
= 04 × 0.10
= $40.4
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amount of money donated by a sponsor is: $40.4

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
A nurse earns $16 for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour at work. How much money does she earn in 5 days?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 75
Answer: The money she earns in 5 days is: $1,280

Explanation:
The given table is:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 75
From the above table,
The total amount of time = 6\(\frac{3}{4}\) + 1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{27}{4}\) + 1 + \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{27 + 1}{4}\) + 1
= 7 + 1
= 8 hours
It is given that a nurse earns $16 for every \(\frac{1}{2}\) hour at work.
So,
The money she earned for 1 hour = 16 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 16 × 2 = $32
So,
The money earned for 8 hours = The money earned in 1 hour × 8
= 32 × 8 = $256
So,
The money earned in 5 days = The money earned in 1 day × 5
= 256 × 5 = $1,280
hence, from the above,
we can conclude that she can earn $1,280 in 5 days.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient. Then check your answer.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 76
Answer:  186 ÷ 12 = 1 R 4

Explanation:
Let 185.88 be rounded to 186
So,
By using the partial quotients method,
186 ÷ 12 = ( 120 + 36 + 24 ) ÷ 12
= ( 120 ÷ 12 ) + ( 36 ÷ 12 ) + ( 24 ÷ 12 )
= 10 + 3 + 2
= 17 R 4
Hence, 186 ÷ 12 = 17 R 4

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 77
Answer: 74 ÷ 24 = 3 R 2

Explanation:
Let 74.4 be rounded to 74
So,
By using the partial quotients method,
74 ÷ 24 = 72 ÷ 24
= 3 R 2
Hence, 74 ÷ 24 = 3 R 2

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 78
Answer: 42 ÷ 46 = 0.9

Explanation:
Let 42.32 be rounded to 42
So,
By using the partial quotients method,
42 ÷ 46 = 0.9
Hence,
42 ÷ 46 = 0.9

Divide Fractions Performance Task 10

Your city has a robotics competition. Each team makes a robot that travels through a maze. The time each robot spends in the maze is used to find the team’s score.
1. One-third of the students in your grade participate in the competition. The number of participating students is divided into 12 teams.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 79
a. What fraction of the total number of students in your grade is on each team?
Answer: The fraction of the total number of students in your grade is: \(\frac{1}{36}\)

Explanation:
It is given that there are \(\frac{1}{3}\) of the students in your grade are participating in the competition.
It is also given that the participating students are divided into 12 teams.
So,
The fraction of the total number of students in each team = \(\frac{The number of participating students}{Th total number of teams}\)
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 12
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ \(\frac{12}{1}\)
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1 × 1}{12 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{36}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of students that are in each team is: \(\frac{1}{36}\)

b. There are 3 students on each team. How many students are in your grade?
Answer: The number of students in your grade is: 36

Explanation:
It is given that the number of students is divided into 12 teams
It is also given that there are 3 students on each team
So,
The total number of students = The number of teams × The number of students in each team
= 12 × 3 = 36 students
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that there are 36 students in your grade

Question 2.
The maze for the competition is shown.
a. Write the length of the maze in feet.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 80
Answer:
The given maze for the competition is:
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 80
From the above maze,
The total length of the maze is: 8 feet 6 inches
We know that,
1 foot = 12 inches
Hence,
1 inch = \(\frac{1}{12}\) feet
So,
6 inches = 6 × \(\frac{1}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\) × \(\frac{6}{1}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet
So,
The total length of the maze in feet = 8 feet + \(\frac{1}{2}\) feet
= 8.5 feet or 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet

b. The length of the maze is divided into 6 equal sections. What is the length of each section of the maze?
Answer: The length of each section of the maze is: \(\frac{17}{12}\) feet

Explanation:
From the above Exercise,
The total length of the maze in feet is: 8.5 feet or 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet
It is given that the length of the maze is divided into 6 equal sections
So,
The length of each section of the maze = 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 6
= 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{6}{1}\)
= 8\(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{17}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{17}{12}\) feet
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the length of each section in a maze is: \(\frac{17}{12}\) feet

Question 3.
Each team has 200 seconds to complete the maze. The rules require judges to use the expression (200 – x) ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\), where x is the total number of seconds, to find a team’s total score.
a. Your robot completes the maze in 3 minutes 5 seconds. How many points does your team earn?
Answer: The number of points your team earn is: 75 points

Explanation:
It is given that each team has 200 seconds to complete the maze and the rules require judges to use the expression (200 – x) ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) where x is the total number of seconds
It is also given that your robot completes the maze in 3 minutes 5 seconds
We know that,
1 minute = 60 seconds
So,
The time taken by the robot to complete the maze in seconds = ( 3 × 60 ) + 5
= 185 seconds
So,
x= 185
So,
200 – x = 200 – 185 = 15
So,
The number of points the team earned = ( 200 – x ) ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 15 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 15 × 5
= 75 points
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the number of points earned by the team is: 75 points

b. Do you think the team with the most points or the fewest points wins? Use an example to justify your answer.
Answer: The team with the most points wins the competition because
Reason:
Suppose team A takes 2 minutes and team B takes 3 minutes to complete the competition
So,
The time is taken by team A in seconds = 120 seconds
So,
x= 120
So,
200 – x = 200 – 120 = 80
Now,
The time is taken by team B in seconds = 180 seconds
So,
x= 180
So,
200 – x = 200 – 180 = 20
Now,
The number of points earned by team A = 80 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 400 points
The number of points earned by team B = 20 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= 100 points
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the team with more points wins the competition

Divide Fractions Activity

Fraction Connection: Division

Directions:

  1. Players take turns rolling three dice.
  2. On your turn, evaluate the expression indicated by your roll and cover the answer.
  3. The first player to get four in a row, horizontally, vertically, or diagonally, wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 81
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 82

Divide Fractions Chapter Practice 10

10.1 Interpret Fractions as Division

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 1.
1 ÷ 2 = ___
Answer: 1 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
1 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 2.
3 ÷ 10 = __
Answer: 3 ÷ 10 = \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
3 ÷ 10 = \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Question 3.
4 ÷ 7 = __
Answer: 4 ÷ 7 = \(\frac{4}{7}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
4 ÷ 7 = \(\frac{4}{7}\)

Question 4.
11 ÷ 15 = ___
Answer: 11 ÷ 15 = \(\frac{11}{15}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
11 ÷ 15 = \(\frac{11}{15}\)

Question 5.
8 ÷ 9 = ___
Answer: 8 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
8 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Question 6.
13 ÷ 20 = ___
Answer: 13 ÷ 20 = \(\frac{13}{20}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
Hence,
13 ÷ 20 = \(\frac{13}{20}\)

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Nine friends equally share 12 apples. What fraction of an apple does each friend get?
Answer: The fraction of an apple each friend get is: \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Explanation:
It is given that nine friends equally share 12 apples.
So,
The fraction of an apple each friend get = \(\frac{The number of friends}{The number of apples}\)
= \(\frac{9}{12}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the fraction of an apple each friend get is: \(\frac{9}{12}\)

10.2 Mixed Numbers as Quotients

Divide. Use a model to help

Question 8.
8 ÷ 3 = ___

Answer: 8 ÷ 3 = 2\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
8 ÷ 3 = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
8 ÷ 3 = 6 ÷ 3
= 2 R 2
Hence,
8 ÷ 3 = 2\(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 9.
6 ÷ 5 = ___
Answer: 6 ÷ 5 = 1\(\frac{1}{5}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
6 ÷ 5 = \(\frac{6}{5}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
6 ÷ 5 = 5 ÷ 5
= 1 R 1
Hence,
6 ÷ 5 = 1\(\frac{1}{5}\)

Question 10.

10 ÷ 4 = ___
Answer: 10 ÷ 4 = 2\(\frac{2}{4}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
10 ÷ 4 = \(\frac{10}{4}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
10 ÷ 4 = 8 ÷ 4
= 2 R 2
Hence,
10 ÷ 4 = 2\(\frac{2}{4}\)

Question 11.

20 ÷ 11 = __
Answer: 20 ÷ 11 = 1\(\frac{9}{11}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
20 ÷ 11 = \(\frac{20}{11}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
20 ÷ 11 = 11 ÷ 11
= 1 R 9
Hence,
20 ÷ 11 = 1\(\frac{9}{11}\)

Question 12.

25 ÷ 2 = ___
Answer: 25 ÷ 2 = 12\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
25 ÷ 2 = \(\frac{25}{2}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
25 ÷ 2 = 24 ÷ 2
= 12 R 1
Hence,
25 ÷ 2 = 12\(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 13.

64 ÷ 9 = ___
Answer: 64 ÷ 9 = 7\(\frac{1}{9}\)

Explanation:
We know that,
a ÷ b = \(\frac{a}{b}\)
a\(\frac{b}{c}\) = \(\frac{ac + b}{c}\)
\(\frac{a}{b}\) = Remainder\(\frac{Quotient}{Divisor}\)
So,
64 ÷ 9 = \(\frac{64}{9}\)
By using the partial quotients method,
64 ÷ 9 = 63 ÷ 9
= 7 R 1
Hence,
64 ÷ 9 = 7\(\frac{1}{9}\)

10.3 Divide Whole Numbers by Unit Fractions

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 83
Answer: 4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 8

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 4 and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
4 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 4 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{4}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 2 × 4}{1 × 1}\)
= 8
Hence,
4÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 8

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 84
Answer: 6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 30

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 6 and \(\frac{1}{5}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
6 ÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\)  = 6 × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{6}{1}\) × \(\frac{5}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 6 × 5}{1 × 1}\)
= 30
Hence,
6÷ \(\frac{1}{5}\) = 30

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 85
Answer: 7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 28

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 7 and \(\frac{1}{4}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
7 ÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = 7 × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{7}{1}\) × \(\frac{4}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 7 × 4}{1 × 1}\)
= 28
Hence,
7÷ \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 36

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 86
Answer: 8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 24

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 8 and \(\frac{1}{3}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
8 ÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\)  = 8 × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{8}{1}\) × \(\frac{3}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 8 × 3}{1 × 1}\)
= 24
Hence,
8÷ \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 24

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 87
Answer: 9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 18

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 9 and \(\frac{1}{2}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
9 ÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\)  = 9 × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{9}{1}\) × \(\frac{2}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 9 × 2}{1 × 1}\)
= 18
Hence,
9÷ \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 18

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 88
Answer: 2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 20

Explanation:
The given numbers are: 2 and \(\frac{1}{10}\)
We know that,
a ÷ \(\frac{a}{b}\) = a × \(\frac{b}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
2 ÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\)  = 2 × \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= \(\frac{2}{1}\) × \(\frac{10}{1}\)
= \(\frac{ 2 × 10}{1 × 1}\)
= 20
Hence,
2÷ \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 20

10.4 Divide Unit Fractions by Whole Numbers

Divide. Use a model to help.

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 89
Answer: \(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{14}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{7}\) and 2
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 2
= \(\frac{1}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{7 × 2}\)
= \(\frac{1}{14}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 2 = \(\frac{1}{14}\)

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 90
Answer: \(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{2}\) and 9
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{9}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{2 × 9}\)
= \(\frac{1}{18}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 9 = \(\frac{1}{18}\)

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 91
Answer: \(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 7 = \(\frac{1}{21}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{3}\) and 7
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 7
= \(\frac{1}{3}\) × \(\frac{1}{7}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{7 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{21}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{3}\) ÷ 7 = \(\frac{1}{21}\)

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 92
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{30}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{6}\) and 5
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 5
= \(\frac{1}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{5}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{6 × 5}\)
= \(\frac{1}{30}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{6}\) ÷ 5 = \(\frac{1}{30}\)

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 93
Answer: \(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{21}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{7}\) and 3
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 3
= \(\frac{1}{7}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{7 × 3}\)
= \(\frac{1}{21}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{7}\) ÷ 3 = \(\frac{1}{21}\)

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 94

Answer: \(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{32}\)

Explanation:
The given numbers are: \(\frac{1}{8}\) and 4
We know that,
\(\frac{a}{b}\) ÷ a  = \(\frac{a}{b}\) × \(\frac{1}{a}\)
a= \(\frac{a}{1}\)
So,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{1}{8}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{ 1 × 1}{8 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{1}{32}\)
Hence,
\(\frac{1}{8}\) ÷ 4 = \(\frac{1}{32}\)

10.5 Problem Solving: Fraction Division

Question 26.
A mechanic buys 1 gallon of oil. She uses \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the oil, and then divides the rest into 4 smaller bottles. How much does she put into each bottle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 10 Divide Fractions 95
Answer: The amount of oil she put into each bottle is: \(\frac{5}{24}\)

Explanation:
It is given that a mechanic buys 1 gallon of oil and she uses \(\frac{1}{6}\) of the oil
So,
the remaining part of the oil = 1 –  \(\frac{1}{6}\)
= \(\frac{5}{6}\)
It is also given that she divides the rest of the oil into 4 smaller bottles.
So,
The amount of oil in each bottle = \(\frac{The remaining part of the oil}{The number of bottles}\)
= \(\frac{5}{6}\) ÷ 4
= \(\frac{5}{6}\) × \(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{5 × 1}{6 × 4}\)
= \(\frac{5}{24}\)
Hence, from the above,
We can conclude that the amount of oil in each bottle is: \(\frac{5}{24}\)

Conclusion:

Make use of the quick links and try to solve the problems in a simple manner. Redefine your true self with the BIM Answer Key for Grade 5 curated by subject experts. Test your knowledge by solving the questions which are given at the end of the chapter.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Worried about Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers? Stop your worry now! We are providing the complete material of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers pdf here. You can make your learning as fun with the help of various tricks mentioned here. Check the answer key provided here which helps you to know the step by step procedure of every problem.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers helps you to build self confidence and grip on the subject. Download BIM Grade 7 Chapter 1 Pdf and complete your preparation. In the below sections, we are providing the complete guide to various topics of chapter 1 i.e., Adding Integers, Adding Rational Numbers, Subtracting Integers, Subtracting Rational Numbers, Adding and Subtracting Rational Number and so on.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Check Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers here. With the help of this material, you can attend the mock tests and know the areas in which you are weak. Attending mock tests is the most important aspect of clearing the exams. If you know the weak areas, then you can easily work on them and become perfect in that concept.

Big Ideas Math 7th Grade Solution Key Chapter 1 pdf is available here. You can get it for free of cost where the questions and step by step solutions are provided. Tap on the below given links and get access to each concept. Refer to important questions, concepts and prepare timetable according to the topics present in each chapter.

Performance

Lesson: 1 Rational Numbers

Lesson: 2 Adding Integers

Lesson: 3 Adding Rational Numbers

Lesson: 4 Subtracting Integers

Lesson: 5 Subtracting Rational Numbers

Chapter: 1 – Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers STEAM VIDEO/Performance

STEAM Video

Freezing Solid

The Celsius temperature scale is defined using the freezing point,0°C, and the boiling point,100°C, of water. Why do you think the scale is defined using these two points?
Watch the STEAM Video “Freezing Solid.” Then answer the following questions.
1. In the video, Tony says that the freezing point of wax is 53°C and the boiling point of wax is 343°C.
a. Describe the temperature of wax that has just changed from liquid form to solid form. Explain your reasoning.
b. After Tony blows out the candle, he demonstrates that there is still gas in the smoke. What do you know about the temperature of the gas that is in the smoke?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 165
c. In what form is wax when the temperature is at 100°C, the boiling point of water? Consider wax in solid, liquid, and gaseous forms. Which is hottest? coldest?

Performance Task

Melting Matters

After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the STEAM concepts you learned to answer the questions in the Video Performance Task. You will answer questions using the melting points of the substances below.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 3
You will graph the melting points of the substances on a number line to make comparisons. How is the freezing point of a substance related to its melting point? What is meant when someone says it is below freezing outside? Explain.

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Getting Ready for Chapter 1

Getting Ready for Chapter

Chapter Exploration

Question 1.
Work with a partner. Plot and connect the points to make a picture.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 4.1

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding and Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Getting-Ready-for-Chapter-1-Question-1

Question 2.
Create your own “dot-to-dot” picture. Use atleast 20 points.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding and Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Getting-Ready-for-Chapter-1-Question-2

Vocabulary

The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 5

Lesson 1.1 Rational Numbers

Recall that integers are the set of whole numbers and their opposites. A rational number is a number that can be written as \(\frac{a}{b}\), where a and b are integers and b ≠ 0.

EXPLORATION 1

Using a Number Line

Work with a partner. Make a number line on the floor. Include both negative numbers and positive numbers.
a. Stand on an integer. Then have your partner stand on the opposite of the integer. How far are each of you from 0? What do you call the distance between a number and 0 on a number line?
Answer :
I stood on 4 and my friend stood on -4
The distance between 0 and 4 is 4 units
The distance between 0 and -4 is 4 units.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

b. Stand on a rational number that is not an integer. Then have your partner stand on any other number. Which number is greater? How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-b
I stand on 3/2 and my friend stands on 2.5
2.5 > 3/2
Explanation:
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

c. Stand on any number other than 0 on the number line. Can your partner stand on a number that is:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 7

  • greater than your number and farther from 0?
  • greater than your number and closer to 0?
  • less than your number and the same distance from 0?
  • less than your number and farther from 0?

Answer 1 :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-1
Answer 2 :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-2
Answer 3 :
less than your number and the same distance from 0 will be only the opposite of the number .
The opposite of 1.5 is – 1.5 .

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-3
Answer 4 :
less than your number and farther from 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-c-4

For each case in which it was not possible to stand on a number as directed, explain why it is not possible. In each of the other cases, how can you decide where your partner can stand?

1.1 Lesson

Try It
Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
| 7 |
Answer:
The Absolute value of 7 is 7
The distance between 0 and 7 is 7
| 7 |  = 7
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8
Answer:
The Absolute value of -5/3 is 5/3
The distance between 0 and -5/3 is 5/3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8 = 5/3
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-2

Question 3.
| -2.6 |
Answer:
The Absolute value of -2.6 is 2.6
The distance between 0 and -2.6 is 2.6
| -2.6 | = 2.6
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-3

Try It

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.1
Answer:
| 9 | = 9
| -9| = 9
both the values are same | 9 | = | -9 |
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-4
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.2
Answer:
|\(\frac{1}{2}\)| =\(\frac{1}{2}\)
–\(\frac{1}{2}\)    <  –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-5
so –\(\frac{1}{2}\)    <  –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 8.3
Answer:
|-4.5| =|4.5|
7  > -4.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-6
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
VOCABULARY
Which of the following numbers are integers?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 9
Answer:
9,-1, 15 are integers
Explanation:
-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, ……) So, every natural number is an integer, every whole number is an integer, and every negative number is an integer. … The set of integers does not include fractions i.e p/q form or numbers which are in decimals eg: 2.4, 3.2 etc.

Question 8.
VOCABULARY
What is the absolute value of a number?
Answer:
The absolute value of a number means the distance from 0.
Example :-
5 is 5 units away from 0.
So the absolute value of that -5 is 5.
You cannot have negative distance, so it has to be positive.
The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x. All absolute values are positive .

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10.1
Answer:
|-\(\frac{7}{2}\)|=\(\frac{7}{2}\) = 3.5
3.5 = |-3.5|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-9
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10.2
Answer :
|\(\frac{11}{4}\)| = 2.75
|-2.8| = 2.8
2.75 < 2.8
2.75 and  2.8 . Graph both the points on number line .Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-10

Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 11.
WRITING
You compare two numbers, a and b. Explain how a > b and | a | < | b | can both be true statements.
Answer:
Take
a = 2
b = -4
Compare we get
a > b  ,  2 > -4
| a | = | 2 | = 2
| b | = | -4 | = 4
Compare we get
| a | < | b | ,  2 < 4
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.1-Question-11

Question 12.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
Which expression does not belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 10

Answer :
Third number -6 is different
Explanation:
| 6 | = 6
| -6 | = – 6
Arrange the numbers in order
6 , 6 , – 6 , 6
The 3rd number that is -6 is a negative all other numbers are positive numbers so -6 is different from others.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 13.
An airplane is at an elevation of 5.5 miles. A submarine is at an elevation of 10.9 kilometers. Which is closer to sea level? Explain.
Answer:
Airplane is closer to sea level as it is only 8.85 kilometres away from sea level
Explanation:
airplane is at an elevation of 5.5 miles =  5.5
1 mile = 1.6 kilometres
5.5 miles = 8.85 kilometres.
submarine is at an elevation of 10.9 kilometres. =  10.9 kms
Airplane is closer to sea level as it is only 8.85 kilometres away from sea level
8.85 < 10.9

Question 14.
The image shows the corrective powers (in diopters) of contact lenses for eight people. The farther the number of diopters is from 0, the farsightedness greater the power of the lens. Positive diopters correct nearsightedness and negative diopters correct nearsightedness. Who is the most nearsighted? the most farsighted? Who has the best eyesight?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 11
Answers:
The people with nearsightedness are with Positive diopters  = 0.75 , 2.5, 1.5
0.75>1.5>2.5
the most nearsighted is 0.75 that is patient 2
The people with are farsightedness are with Negative diopters = -1.25, -3.75, -2.5, -4.75,-7.5
-7.5<-4.75<-3.75<-2.5<-1.25
the most farsighted is -7.5 that is patient 7
The best eyesight is for patient who has sight of 0 , after that patient 2 as best sight.

Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.1

Review & Refresh

Write the ratio.

  1. deer to bears
  2. bears to deer
  3. bears to animals
  4. animals to deer

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 12
Answer:
Number of Animals = 10
Number of Deer = 6
Number of Bears = 4
1. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Deer}{Number of Bears}\) = \(\frac{6}{4}\)=\(\frac{3}{2}\)

2. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Bears}{Number of Deer}\) = \(\frac{4}{6}\)=\(\frac{2}{3}\)

3. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Bears}{Number of Animals}\) = \(\frac{4}{10}\)=\(\frac{2}{5}\)

4. Ratio = \(\frac{Number of Animals}{Number of Deer}\) = \(\frac{10}{6}\)= \(\frac{5}{3}\)

Find the GCF of the numbers.

Question 5.
8, 20
Answer:
Factors of 8 = 2 × 2 × 2
Factors of 20 = 2 × 2 × 5
The common in both numbers = 2 × 2 = 4
4 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 6.
12, 30
Answer:
Factors of 12 = 2 × 2 × 3
Factors of 30 = 2 × 3× 5
The common in both numbers = 2 × 3 = 6
6 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 7.
7, 28
Factors of 7 = 7
Factors of 28 = 2 × 2 × 7
The common in both numbers = 7
7 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Question 8.
48, 72
Factors of 48 = 2 × 2 × 2 ×2 × 3
Factors of 72 = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3 × 3
The common in both numbers = 2 × 2 × 2 × 3= 24
24 is the gcf
Explanation:
the GCF of two numbers: List the prime factors of each number. Multiply those factors both numbers have in common. If there are no common prime factors, the GCF is 1.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

NUMBER SENSE
Determine which number is greater and which number is farther from 0. Explain your reasoning. (See Exploration 1, p. 3.)

Question 9.
4, -6
Answer:
4 > -6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-9
Explanation:
As distance cant be negative. so the -6 is farther from 0.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 13
Answer:
\(\frac{7}{2}\) = 3.5
– 3.25 < 3.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-10
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 14
Answer:
–\(\frac{4}{5}\) = – 0.8
– 0.8 > -1.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-11
Explanation:
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

FINDING ABSOLUTE VALUES
Find the absolute value.

Question 12.
| 8 |
Answer :
The Absolute value of 8 is 8
The distance between 0 and 8 is 8
| 8 |  = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-12
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 13.
| -2 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -2 is 2
The distance between 0 and -2 is 2
| -2 |  = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-13
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative.

Question 14.
| -10 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -10 is 10
The distance between 0 and -10 is 10
| -10 |  = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-14
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative.

Question 15.
| 10 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 10 is 10
The distance between 0 and 10 is 10
| 10 |  = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-15
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 16.
| 0 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 0 is 0
The distance between 0 and 0 is 0
| 0 |  = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-16
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 15

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{1}{3}\) is \(\frac{1}{3}\)
| \(\frac{1}{3}\) |  = \(\frac{1}{3}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-17
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 16

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{7}{8}\) is \(\frac{7}{8}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{7}{8}\) is \(\frac{7}{8}\)
| \(\frac{7}{8}\) |  = \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-18
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 17

Answer:
The Absolute value of –\(\frac{5}{9}\) is \(\frac{5}{9}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{5}{9}\) is \(\frac{5}{9}\)
| –\(\frac{5}{9}\) |  = \(\frac{5}{9}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-19
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 18

Answer:
The Absolute value of \(\frac{11}{8}\) is \(\frac{11}{8}\)
The distance between 0 and \(\frac{11}{8}\) is \(\frac{11}{8}\)
| \(\frac{11}{8}\) |  = \(\frac{11}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-20
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 21.
| 3.8 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 3.8 is 3.8
The distance between 0 and 3.8 is 3.8
| 3.8 |  = 3.8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-6th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Integers-Number-Lines-and-the-Coordinate-Plane-Practice-Test-Question-28
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 22.
| -5.3 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of -5.3 is 5.3
The distance between 0 and -5.3 is 5.3
| -5.3 |  = 5.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-22
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 19

Answer:
The Absolute value of –\(\frac{15}{4}\) is \(\frac{15}{4}\)
The distance between 0 and –\(\frac{15}{4}\) is \(\frac{15}{4}\)
| –\(\frac{15}{4}\)|  = \(\frac{15}{4}\) = 3.75
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-23
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 24.
| 7.64 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 7.64 is 7 .64
The distance between 0 and 7.64 is 7.64
| 7.64 |  = 7.64
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-24
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 25.
| -18.26 |

Answer:
The Absolute value of 18.26 is 18.26
The distance between 0 and -18.26 is 18.26
| -18.26 |  = 18.26
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-25
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 20

Answer:
4\(\frac{2}{5}\)=\(\frac{22}{5}\) = 4.4
The Absolute value of 4\(\frac{2}{5}\) is 4.4
The distance between 0 and 4.4 is 4.4
| 4.4 |  = 4.4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-26
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 21

Answer:
-5\(\frac{1}{6}\) = –\(\frac{31}{6}\) =-5.1
The Absolute value of -5.1 is 5.1
The distance between 0 and -5.1 is 5.1
| -5.1 |  = 5.1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-27
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive.
Distance cant be negative

COMPARING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 22
Answer:
|-5| = 5
Graph 2 and 5
2 < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-28
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 23
Answer:
|-1| = 1
|-8| = 8
Graph 1 and 8
1 < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-29
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 24
Answer:
|5| = 5
|-5| = 5
Both are equal
|5| = |-5|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-30
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 25
Answer:
|-2| = 2
Graph 2 and 0
|-2| > 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-31
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 26
Answer:
|-\(\frac{7}{8}\)| = I-0.875I = 0.875
Graph 0.4 and 0.8
0.4  < 0.875
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-32
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 27
Answer:
|4.9| = 4.9
|-5.3| = 5.3
Graph 4.9 and 5.3
|4.9| < |-5.3|
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-33
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 28
Answer:
|4.7| =4.7
1/2 = 0.5
– 4.7  <  0.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-34
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 35.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 29
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)| =\(\frac{3}{4}\)
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)|  > -|\(\frac{3}{4}\)|
Graph \(\frac{3}{4}\) and –\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-35
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 30
Answer:
-|1\(\frac{1}{4}\)| = –\(\frac{5}{4}\) = -1.25
-|-1\(\frac{3}{8}\)| = –\(\frac{11}{8}\) = -1.375
Graph -1.25 and – 1.375
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-36
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend compares two rational numbers. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 37.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 31
Answer:
No,
Explanation:
Absolute value of |-10| is 10
10  > -10
All Negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 32
Answer:
Yes,
Explanation:
|-\(\frac{4}{5}\)| = \(\frac{4}{5}\) = 0.8
-|\(\frac{1}{2}\)| = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) = – 0.5
0.8 > – 0.5
All Negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.

Question 39.
OPEN-ENDED
Write a negative number whose absolute value is greater than 3
Answer:
Negative number -4
|-4| = 4
|-4| > 3

Question 40.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The summit elevation of a volcano is the elevation of the top of the volcano relative to sea level. The summit elevation of Kilauea, a volcano in Hawaii, is 1277 meters. The summit elevation of Loihi, an underwater volcano in Hawaii, is -969 meters. Which summit is higher? Which summit is closer to sea level?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 33

Answer:
Summit elevation of Kilauea, a volcano in Hawaii = 1277 meters.
Summit elevation of Loihi, an underwater volcano in Hawaii, = -969 meters.
1277 > -969
The lesser summit is closer to the sea level
The summit is higher is elevation of Kilauea,a volcano in Hawaii

Question 41.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The freezing point of a liquid is the temperature at which the liquid becomes a solid.
a. Which liquid in the table has the lowest freezing point?
b. Is the freezing point of mercury or butter closer to the freezing point of water, 0°C?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 34
Answer:
a. The liquid which has low freezing point is Airplane Fuel that is -53 °C.
b. The Freezing point of mercury = -39 °C
The Freezing point of butter = 35 °C
The Freezing point of water = 0 °C
-39 > 0 > 35 °C
The Freezing point of butter is closer to freezing point of water .

ORDERING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Order the values from least to greatest.

Question 42.
8, | 3 |, -5, |-2|, -2
Answer:
| 3 | = 3
|-2| = 2
8, 3, -5, 2, -2
-5 < -2 < 2 < 3 <8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-42
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 43.
| -6.3 |, -7.2, 8, | 5 |, -6.3
Answer:
| -6.3 | = 6.3
| 5 | = 5
6.3 , -7.2, 8, 5 , -6.3
-7.2 < -6.3 < 5 < 6.3 < 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-43
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 35
Answer :
| 3.5 | = 3.5
| -1.8 | = 1.8
| 2.7 | = 2.7
3\(\frac{2}{5}\) = \(\frac{17}{5}\) = 3.4
3.5, 1.8, 4.6, 3.4, 2.7
1.8 < 2.7 < 3.4 < 3.5 < 4.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-44
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 45.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 36
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{4}\)|=\(\frac{3}{4}\)
|\(\frac{5}{8}\)| = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
|\(\frac{1}{4}\)| = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
|-\(\frac{1}{2}\)|= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
|-\(\frac{7}{8}\)|= \(\frac{7}{8}\)
\(\frac{1}{4}\) < \(\frac{1}{2}\) < \(\frac{5}{8}\) <\(\frac{3}{4}\)  < \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-45
Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 46.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table shows golf scores, relative to par.
a. The player with the lowest score wins. Which player wins?
b. Which player is closest to par?
c. Which player is farthest from par?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 37
Answer a :
Player 3 < Player 4 < Player 2 < Player 5 < Player 1
-4 < -1 < 0 < 2 < 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-46
The Lowest score is -4 of player 3
Answer b :
The player closest to par is player 2 (0)
Answer c :
The player is farthest from par is  player 1 (5)

Question 47.
DIG DEEPER!
You use the table below to record the temperature at the same location each hour for several hours. At what time is the temperature coldest? At what time is the temperature closest to the freezing point of water, 0°C?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 38
Answer :
3:00 p.m < 11:00 am <10:00 am < 2:00 p.m < 12:00 p.m  < 1:00 p.m
-3.4 < – 2.7 < -2.6 < -1.25 < -0.15 < 1.6
The Temperature which is coldest is  – 3.4 °C  at 3:00 p.m
Time is the temperature closest to the freezing point of water, 0°C is  – 1.25 at 2:00 p.m
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.1-Question-47

Reasoning
Determine whether n ≥ 0 or n ≤ 0

Question 48.
n + | -n | = 2n
Answer:
| -n | = n
n + n = 2n
Above statement is true.

Question 49.
n + | -n | = 0
Answer:
| -n | = n
n + n = 2n not equal to 0
So, above equation is not equal to 0 .

TRUE OR FALSE?
Determine whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 50.
If x < 0, then | x | = −x
Answer:
False
| x | = x
Whatever the value may be | x |  of all numbers is positive .
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

Question 51.
The absolute value of every rational number is positive.
Answer:
True.
Explanation:
The distance between a number and 0 on a number line is called as Absolute values. The absolute value is written as |x| , Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x.  All absolute values are positive .

Lesson 1.2 Adding Integers

EXPLORATION 1
Using Integer Counters to Find Sums

Work with a partner. You can use the integer counters shown at the left to find sums of integers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 39
a. How can you use integer counters to model a sum? a sum that equals 0?
Answer:
+1 + ( – 1 ) = 0

b. What expression is being modeled below? What is the value of the sum?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 40
Answer :
– 3 + (+2) = -1
The Value of the sum  = -1.
c. INDUCTIVE REASONING
Use integer counters to complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers- Lesson-1.2-Adding-Integers-Exploration-1-c
d. How can you tell whether the sum of two integers is positive, negative, or zero ?
Answer:
Adding two positive integers always yields a positive sum
Adding two negative integers always yields a negative sum.
e. Write rules for adding

  1. two integers with the same sign,
  2. two integers with different signs, and
  3. two opposite integers.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 42

Answer e :
1.
There are two cases to consider when adding integers. When the signs are the same, you add the absolute values of the addends and use the same sign.
2.
When the signs are different, you find the difference of the absolute values and use the same sign as the addend with the greater absolute value.
3.
Rule: The sum of any integer and its opposite is equal to zero.
Summary: Adding two positive integers always yields a positive sum; adding two negative integers always yields a negative sum.

1.2 Lesson

Try It

Use a number line to find the sum.

Question 1.
-2 + 2
Answer:
2 + 2 =0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -2 to represent -2. Then draw an arrow 2 units to the right representing adding +2.
So, -2 + 2 =0

Question 2.
4 + (-5)
Answer:
4 + (-5) = -1.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 4 to represent 4. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5.
So, 4 + (-5) = -1

Question 3.
-3 + (-3)
Answer:
-3 + (-3) = -6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing adding -3.
So, -3 + (-3) = -6

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 4.
7 + 13
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers :  7 + 13 = 20

Question 5.
– 8 + (-5)
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers :   – 8 + (-5) = -13

Question 6.
– 2 + (-15)
Answer:
Words: Add absolute values of the integers. Then use the common sign.
Numbers : – 2 + (-15) = -17

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 7.
-2 + 11
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers : -2 + 11 = 9

Question 8.
9 + (-10)
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers :  9 + (-10) = -1

Question 9.
-31 + 31
Answer:
Words :  Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .
Numbers :  -31 + 31 = 0

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the sum of two integers.
Answer:
To add two Positive integers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
To add two integers of positive plus negative integer  using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.


ADDING INTEGERS

Find the sum. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 11.
– 8 + 20
Answer:
– 8 + 20 = 12
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-11
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -8 to represent -8. Then draw an arrow 20 units to the right representing adding 20.
So, -8 + 20 = 12

Question 12.
30 + (-30)
Answer:
30 + (-30) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-12
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 30 to represent 30. Then draw an arrow 30 units to the left representing adding -30.
So,30 + (-30) = 0

Question 13.
– 10 + (-18)
Answer:
– 10 + (-18) = -28
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Lesson-Question-13
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -10 to represent -10. Then draw an arrow -18 units to the left representing adding -18.
So,- 10 + (-18) = -28

Question 14.
NUMBER SENSE
Is 3 + (-4) the same as -4 + 3? Explain.
Answer:
3 + (-4) = – 1
-4 + 3 = -1
Explanation:
If the order of the addends changes, the sum stays the same. If the grouping of addends changes, the sum stays the same.
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value .Then use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value .

LOGIC
Tell whether the statement is true or false. Explain your reasoning.

Question 15.
The sum of two negative integers is always negative.
Answer:
True .
Explanation:
– 2 + (- 3) = – 5
-4 + ( – 5 ) = – 9
Then Use the sign of the integer with the greater absolute value.

Question 16.
The sum of an integer and its absolute value is always 0.
Answer:
Sometimes, if the integer is negative then the statement is true.
Example:
Sum of a negative integer and its absolute value is always 0
-4 and  | -4| =  | 4|
-4 + 4 = 0

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 17.
At 12:00 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine is 435 pounds per square inch. From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure increases 58 pounds per square inch. From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure decreases 116 pounds per square inch. What is the water pressure at 1:00 P.M.?
Answer:
At 12:00 P.M. The water presure on a submarine = 435 pounds per square inch.
From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure increases 58 pounds per square inch.
From 12:00 P.M. to 12:30 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine = 435 + 58 = 493 pounds per square inch.
From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure decreases 116 pounds per square inch.
From 12:30 P.M. to 1:00 P.M., the water pressure on a submarine = 493 + 58 = 551 pounds per square inch.
Therefore the water pressure at 1:00 P.M. = 551 pounds per square inch.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
The diagram shows the elevation changes between checkpoints on a trail. The trail begins atan elevation of 8136 feet. What is the elevation at the end of the trail?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 43
Answer:
The elevation at the start of the trail = 8136 Feet
The elevation gets decreases by 174 ft .
now the elevation is at = 8136 – 174 = 7962
From 7962 feet the elevation increased by 250 feet
Now The elevation is at = 7962 + 250 = 8212
8212 feet the elevation decreases by  182 feet
Now The elevation is at = 8212 – 182 = 8030
Now the elevation is increased by 282 feet .
Now The elevation at the end = 8030 + 282 = 8312 feets.

1.2 Practice

Review & Refresh

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 44

Answer:
| -7| = 7
5 < 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-1
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 45
Answer:
| -2.6| = 2.6
| -2.06| = 2.06
2.6 > 2.06
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 46
Answer:
|-\(\frac{3}{5}\)| = 0.6
|\(\frac{5}{8}\)| = 0.625
0.6 > – 0.625
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers.
When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.

Add.

Question 4.
8.43 + 5.21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-4
Explanation:
Write down the numbers, one under the other, with the decimal points lined up. Put in zeros so the numbers have the same length . Then add, using column addition, remembering to put the decimal point in the answer.

Question 5.
2.316 + 4.09
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Write down the numbers, one under the other, with the decimal points lined up. Put in zeros so the numbers have the same length . Then add, using column addition, remembering to put the decimal point in the answer.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 47
Answer:
\(\frac{5}{9}\) + \(\frac{3}{9}\) = \(\frac{5 + 3 }{9}\) =\(\frac{8}{9}\)
Explanation:
Step 1: Make sure the bottom numbers (the denominators) are the same.
Step 2: Add the top numbers (the numerators), put that answer over the denominator.
Step 3: Simplify the fraction (if needed)

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 48
Answer:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
Lcm of 2 , 8  is 8 Multiply 1/2 with 4 in numerator and denominator we get,
\(\frac{4}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{8}\)
= \(\frac{5}{8}\)
Explanation:
Step 1: Make sure the bottom numbers (the denominators) are the same.
Step 2: Add the top numbers (the numerators), put that answer over the denominator.
Step 3: Simplify the fraction (if needed)

Question 8.
The regular price of a photograph printed on a canvas is $18. You have a coupon for 15% off. How much is the discount?
A. $2.70
B. $3
C. $15
D. $15.30
Answer:
Price of a photograph = $18
Discount = 15% off
Discount price = 15% of $18 = \(\frac{15}{100}\) × 18 = \(\frac{27}{10}\) = 2.7
Discount Price = 2.7$

Question 9.
Represent the ratio relationship using a graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 49
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-9

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING INTEGER COUNTERS
Use integer counters to complete the table. (See Exploration 1, p. 9.)

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 50
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-10 and 11

USING NUMBER LINES
Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 51
Answer:
3 + ( – 4) = -1
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to 3 represent first integer that is 3 and from 3 the arrow moves to left representing adding -4 to the first integer and ends at -1 which is the sum.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 52
Answer:
-2 + 4 = 2
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to -2 represent first integer that is -2 and from -2 the arrow moves to right representing adding 4 to the first integer and ends at 2 which is the sum.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 53
Answer:
5 + ( -1) = 4
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to 5 represent first integer that is 5 and from 5 the arrow moves to left representing adding -1 to the first integer and ends at 4 which is the sum.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 54
Answer:
-5 + 2 = -3
Explanation:
The arrow  from 0 to -5 represent first integer that is -5 and from -5 the arrow moves to right representing adding 2 to the first integer and ends at -3 which is the sum.

ADDING INTEGERS
Find the sum. Use integer counters or a number line to verify your answer.

Question 16.
6 + 4
Answer:
6 + 4 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-16
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 6 to represent 6. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding 4. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, 6 + 4 = 10

Question 17.
– 4 + (-6)
Answer:
– 4 + (-6) = -10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-17
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the left representing adding -6. The arrow ends at -10 showing the sum.
So,- 4 + (-6) = -10

Question 18.
-2 + (-3)
Answer:
-2 + (-3) = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-18
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -2 to represent -2. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing adding -3. The arrow ends at -5 showing the sum.
So, -2 + (-3) = -5

Question 19.
-5 + 12
Answer:
-5 + 12 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-19
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -5 to represent -5. Then draw an arrow 12 units to the right representing adding 12. The arrow ends at 7 showing the sum.
So, -5 + 12 = 7

Question 20.
5 + (-7)
Answer:
5 + (-7) = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-20
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 5 to represent 5. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing adding -7. The arrow ends at -2 showing the sum.
So, 5 + (-7) = -2

Question 21.
8 + (-8)
Answer:
8 + (-8) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-21
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 8 to represent 8. Then draw an arrow 8 units to the left representing adding -8. The arrow ends at 0 showing the sum.
So, 8 + (-8) = 0

Question 22.
9 + (-11)
Answer:
9 + (-11) = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-22
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 9 to represent 9. Then draw an arrow 11 units to the left representing adding -11. The arrow ends at -2 showing the sum.
So, 9 + (-11) = -2

Question 23.
-3 + 13
Answer:
-3 + 13 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-23
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 13 units to the right representing adding 13. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, -3 + 13 = 10

Question 24.
-4 + (-16)
Answer:
-4 + (-16) = -20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 16 units to the left representing adding -16. The arrow ends at -20 showing the sum.
So, -4 + (-16) = -20

Question 25.
-3 + (-1)
Answer :
-3 + (-1) = -4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 6 to represent 6. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding 4. The arrow ends at 10 showing the sum.
So, -3 + (-1) = -4

Question 26.
14 + (-5)
Answer:
14 + (-5) = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-26
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 14 to represent 14. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5. The arrow ends at 9 showing the sum.
So, 14 + (-5) = 9

Question 27.
0 + (-11)
Answer:
0 + (-11) = -11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-27
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -11 to represent -11.  The arrow ends at -11 showing the sum.
So, 0 + (-11) = -11

Question 28.
-10 + (-15)
Answer :
-10 + (-15) = – 25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-28
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -10 to represent -10. Then draw an arrow 15 units to the left representing adding -15. The arrow ends at -25 showing the sum.
So, -10 + (-15) – 25

Question 29.
-13 + 9
Answer :
-13 + 9 = -4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-29
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -13 to represent -13. Then draw an arrow 9 units to the right representing adding 9. The arrow ends at -4 showing the sum.
So, -13 + 9 = -4

Question 30.
-18 + 18
Answer:
-18 + 18 = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-30
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -18 to represent -18. Then draw an arrow 18 units to the right representing adding 18. The arrow ends at 0 showing the sum.
So, -18 + 18 = 0

Question 31.
-25 + (-9)
Answer :
-25 + (-9) = -36
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-31
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -25 to represent -25. Then draw an arrow 9 units to the left representing adding -9. The arrow ends at -36 showing the sum.
So, -25 + (-9) = -36

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the sum. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 55
Answer :
9 + ( -6 ) = 3
Yes it is right.
Explanation:
|9| > |-6|  so subtract |-6|   from |9| we get 3.
Use the sign of greater number that is  +

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 56
Answer :
No , it is wrong.
Explanation:
|-10| = |10| so add |10| to |10| we get 20
Use the sign of greater number that is  –

Question 34.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The temperature is 3°F at 7:00 A.M. During the next 4 hours, the temperature increases 21°F. What is the temperature at 11:00 A.M.?
Answer :
The temperature at 7:00 A.M = 3°F
After 4 hours temperature increases to 21°F
The temperature at 11:00 A.M. = 3°F  + 21°F = 24°F

Question 35.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your bank account has a balance of -$12. You deposit $60. What is your new balance?
Answer :
Current bank balance =-$12
Money deposited = $60
New balance = -12 +60 = 48 $.

Question 36.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A lithium atom has positively charged protons and negatively charged electrons. The sum of the charges represents the charge of the lithium atom. Find the charge of the atom.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 57
Answer :
Number of positively charged protons = 3
Number of negatively charged electrons = -3
Sum of the charges = 3 + (-3) = 0

Question 37.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two integers with different signs that have a sum of 25. Write two integers with the same sign that have a sum of -25.
Answer:
Two integers with different signs have sum of 25 are 36, -11
Two integers with same signs have sum of -25 are -16 , -9

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you find the sum using mental math. Then find the sum.

Question 38.
9 + 6 + (-6)
Answer :
9 + 6 + ( -6) = 9 + ( 6 + ( -6)) = 9 + 0 = 9
We have one is positive and another 6 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one is positive and another 6 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 39.
-8 + 13 + (-13)
Answer:
-8 + 13 + (-13) = -8 + (13 + (-13) ) = -8
13 + ( -13) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 13 is positive and another 13 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 40.
9 + (-17) + (-9)
Answer:
9 + (-17) + (-9) = (-17) + ( 9 + (-9) ) = – 17
9 + (-9) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 9 is positive and another 9 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 41.
7 + (-12) + (-7)
Answer:
7 + (-12) + (-7) = (-12) + ( 7 + (-7)) = -12
7 + (-7) = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 7 is positive and another 7 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 42.
-12 + 25 + (-15)
Answer:
-12 + 25 + (-15) = 25 + ( -12 + (-15) ) = 25 – 25 = 0
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.
We have one 25 is positive and another 25 which is negative . so sum of a positive integer and its opposite gives the sum 0

Question 43.
6 + (-9) + 14
Answer :
6 + (-9) + 14 = (6 + 14 ) + ( – 9 ) = 20 +( -9) = 11
Explanation:
Associative property of addition: Changing the grouping of addends does not change the sum.
The commutative property of addition says that changing the order of addends does not change the sum.

ADDING INTEGERS

Find the sum.

Question 44.
13 + (-21) + 16
Answer :
13 + (-21) + 16
= (13 + 16) + ( -21)
= 29 + ( -21)
= 8

Question 45.
22 + (-14) + (-12)
Answer :
22 + (-14) + (-12)
= 22 + ((-14) + (-12))
= 22 + (-26)
= -4

Question 46.
-13 + 27 + (-18)
Answer:
-13 + 27 + (-18)
= 27 + (-13 + (-18))
= 27 + (-31)
= -4

Question 47.
-19 + 26 + 14
Answer:
-19 + (26 + 14)
=- 19 + 40
= – 21

Question 48.
-32 + (-17) + 42
Answer:
-32 + (-17) + 42
=(-32 + (-17) ) + 42
=-49 + 42
= -7

Question 49.
-41 + (15) + (-29)
Answer:
-41 + (15) + (-29)
=(-41 + (-29)) + 15
= -70 + 15
= – 55

DESCRIBING A SUM
Describe the location of the sum, relative to p, on a number line.

Question 50.
p + 3
Answer:
p + 3 = 0
Moving 3 to other side it becomes -3
p = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-50

Question 51.
p + (-7)
Answer :
p + (-7) = 0
Moving  – 7 to other side it becomes +7
p = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-51

Question 52.
p + 0
Answer :
p + 0 = 0
p = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-52

Question 53.
p + q
Answer :
p + q = 0
p = – q
As q value is not mentioned so cannot estimate p value.

ALGEBRA
Evaluate the expression when a = 4, b = -5, and c = -8.

Question 54.
a + b
Answer:
a + b
Take a = 4, b = -5, we get
4 + ( -5) = -1

Question 55.
-b + c
Answer:
-b + c
Take c = -8, b = -5, we get
-(-5) + (-8) = 5 + (-8) = -3

Question 56.
| a + b + c |
Answer:
| a + b + c |
Take a = 4, b = -5, and c = -8, we get
| 4 + (-5) + (-8) | =| -9|  = 9

Question 57.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the income and expenses for a school carnival. The school’s goal was to raise $1100. Did the school reach its goal? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 58
Answer:
Income of games = $650
Income on concessions =$530
Income on Donations = $52
Total Income = $650 + $530 + $52 = $1232
Expenses on Flyers = -$28
Expenses on Decorations = -$75
Total Expenses = -($28 + $75) =-$103
School Amount = Total Income + Total Expenses = $1232 +(-$103) = 1129$
Yes the school reaches its goal as the school amount = $1129.

OPEN-ENDED
Write a real-life story using the given topic that involves the sum of an integer and its additive inverse.

Question 58.
income and expenses

Question 59.
the amount of water in a bottle

Question 60.
the elevation of a blimp

MENTAL MATH
Use mental math to solve the equation.

Question 61.
d + 12 = 2
Answer:
d + 12 = 2
d = 2 – 12
d = – 10

Question 62.
b + (-2) = 0
Answer:
b + (-2) = 0
b = 2

Question 63.
-8 + m = -15
Answer:
-8 + m = -15
m = -15 + 8
m = – 7

Question 64.
DIG DEEPER!
Starting at point A, the path of a dolphin jumping out of the water is shown.
a. Is the dolphin deeper at point C or point E? Explain your reasoning.
b. Is the dolphin higher at point B or point D? Explain your reasoning.
c. What is the change in elevation of the dolphin from point A to point E?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 59
Answer:
From A the dolphin gets started
At B the dolphin is +24 feet
At C the dolphin is (+24 – 18)feet = 6 feet
At D the dolphin is (6 + 15 ) = 21 feet.
At E the dolphin is (21 – 13 ) = 8 feet.
Answer a :
The dolphin is deeper at Point E
Point E > Point D
8 > 6
Answer b :
The Dolphin is higher at  Point B
Point B > Point D
24 > 21 feet.
Answer c :
The change in elevation of the dolphin from point A to point E is 8 feets.

Question 65.
NUMBER SENSE
Consider the integers p and q. Describe all of the possible values of p and q for each circumstance. Justify your answers.
a. p + q = 0
b. p + q < 0
c. p + q > 0
Answer a :
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = – 3
p + q = 3 + (-3) = 0

Answer b :
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = -4
p + q = 3 + (-4) = -1
p + q < 0
-1 <0

Answer c:
The values of the integers p and q are
p = 3
q = 4
p + q = 3 + (4) = 7
p + q > 0
7 <0

Question 66.
PUZZLE
According to a legend, the Chinese Emperor Yu-Huang saw a magic square on the back of a turtle. In magic square, the numbers in each row and in each column have the same sum. This sum is called the magic sum.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 60
Copy and complete the magic square so that each row and each column has a magic sum of 0. Use each integer from 4 to 4 exactly once.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Practice-Question-66

Lesson 1.3 Adding Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Adding Rational Numbers
Work with a partner.
a. Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on each number line. What addition expressions are being modeled? What are the sums?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 61
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.3-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
b. Do the rules for adding integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :
Yes
Explanation:
The rules for adding integers apply to other real numbers, including rational numbers. Add their absolute values. Give the sum the same sign. Find the difference of their absolute values.
If the two rational expressions that you want to add or subtract have the same denominator you just add/subtract the numerators which each other. When the denominators are not the same in all expressions that you want to add or subtract as in the example below you have to find a common denominator.

c. You have used the following properties to add integers. Do these properties apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.

  • Commutative Property of Addition
  • Associative Property of Addition
  • Additive Inverse Property

Answer c :
Yes, Commutative property of addition and associative Property of addition are applied to all rational numbers.
Explanation:
Associative Property
Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Distributive Property
Distributive property states that for any three numbers x, y and z we have
x × ( y + z ) = (x × y) +( x × z)

1.3 Lesson

Try It
Find the sum. Write your answer in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 62
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 62
Because the signs are same
=|-\(\frac{1}{2}\)| + |-\(\frac{3}{2}\)|
= |\(\frac{4}{2}\)| = 2
Both the signs are negative so, use a negative sign in the sum .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 63
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 63= –\(\frac{5}{8}\)
= -1\(\frac{3}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= –\(\frac{11}{8}\) + \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Lcm of 8 , 4 are 8
= –\(\frac{11}{8}\) + \(\frac{6}{8}\)
Both the signs are different
=|\(\frac{6}{8}\)| – |-\(\frac{11}{8}\)|
=\(\frac{6}{8}\) – \(\frac{11}{8}\)
=-\(\frac{5}{8}\)
 |\(\frac{6}{8}\)|  < |–\(\frac{11}{8}\)|
So use negative sign.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 64
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 64
Both the numbers have different signs.
write 4 as \(\frac{8}{2}\)
=|\(\frac{8}{2}\)| – |-\(\frac{7}{2}\)|
= \(\frac{8}{2}\) – \(\frac{7}{2}\)
=\(\frac{1}{2}\)
So use positive sign as \(\frac{8}{2}\) > \(\frac{7}{2}\)

Try It

Find the sum.

Question 4.
-3.3 + (-2.7)
Answer:
-3.3 + (-2.7)
=|-3.3| + |-2.7|
=3.3 +2.7
=6.0
Use negative sign as both numbers are negative. so, sum = -6.0

Question 5.
-5.35 + 4
Answer:
-5.35 + 4
=|-5.35|  – |4|
= 5.35 – 4
=-1.35
Use negative sign as |-5.35|  > |4| so, sum = -1.35

Question 6.
1.65 + (-0.9)
Answer:
=1.65 + (-0.9)
=|1.65|  – |-0.9|
= 1.65 – 0.9
= 0.75
|1.65|  > |-0.9|  so use positive sign so sum = 0.75

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 7.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the sum of two rational numbers.
Answer:
Step 1 : first make the denominators of the numbers equal
Step 2 : Second, draw a number line.
Step 3 : Mark the first Rational number from 0 on the number line.
Step 4 :Next, if the second Rational Number is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first Rational Number … or Next, if the second Rational Number is Negative, move that many units to the left from the location of the first Rational Number
Step 5 :Your answer will be the point you end on.

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 65
Answer:
= –\(\frac{7}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Both the signs are different write \(\frac{1}{5}\) as \(\frac{2}{10}\)
=|\(\frac{2}{10}\)| – |-\(\frac{7}{10}\)|
=\(\frac{2}{10}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
=-\(\frac{5}{10}\)
 |\(\frac{2}{10}\)|  < |–\(\frac{7}{10}\)|
So use negative sign.  so sum is –\(\frac{5}{10}\)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 66
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 66
Because the signs are same
LCM of the denominators = 3 × 4 = 12
So –\(\frac{3}{4}\) should be multiplied with 3 to  Numerator and Denominator
and –\(\frac{1}{3}\) should be multiplied with 4 to  Numerator and Denominator we get,
=|-\(\frac{9}{12}\)| + |-\(\frac{4}{12}\)|
= –\(\frac{13}{12}\)
Both the signs are negative so, use a negative sign in the sum .
So sum is –\(\frac{13}{12}\)

Question 10.
-2.6 + 4.3
Answer:
=4.3 + (-2.6)
=|4.3|  – |-2.6|
= 4.3 – 2.6
= 1.7
|4.3|  > |-2.6|  so use positive sign so sum = 1.7

Question 11.
DIFFERENT WORDS, SAME QUESTION
Which is different? Find “both” answers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 67

Answer :
Add -4.5 and 3.5
Find the sum of -4.5 and 3.5
The above two statements means the same which sum of the numbers.
Where as , What is the distance between -4.5 and 3.5 and what is -4.5 increased by 3.5 ? these two statements are different from the above statements.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
A bottle contains 10.5 cups of orange juice. You drink 1.2 cups of the juice each morning and 0.9 cup of the juice each afternoon. How much total juice do you drink each day? When will you run out of juice?
Answer:
Volume of orange juice = 10.5 cups
Volume of juice drank in morning = 1.2 cups
Volume of juice drank in afternoon = 0.9 cups
Total Volume of juice drank in one day = 1.2 + 0.9 cups = 2.1 cups
Number of days juice gets completed = 10.5 ÷ 2.1 = 5 days.
You will run out of juice on 5 th day .

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
The table shows the changes in elevation of a hiker each day for three days. How many miles of elevation must the hiker gain on the fourth day to gain mile of elevation over \(\frac{1}{4}\) mile of elevation over the four days?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 68
Answer:
Change in Elevation on first day = –\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in elevation on Second day = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Change in elevation on third day = –\(\frac{1}{5}\)
Total change in elevation for 3 days = –\(\frac{1}{4}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)  + (-\(\frac{1}{5}\) )
Lcm of 2,4 and 5 is 20
= –\(\frac{5}{20}\) + \(\frac{10}{20}\) + (-\(\frac{4}{20}\) )
= \(\frac{1}{20}\)
Gain in elevation = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in elevation on fourth day = C
C + \(\frac{1}{20}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
C = \(\frac{1}{4}\)  – \(\frac{1}{20}\) ( \(\frac{1}{4}\)  = \(\frac{5}{20}\) )
= \(\frac{5}{20}\) – \(\frac{1}{20}\) = \(\frac{4}{20}\) =\(\frac{1}{5}\)
Change in elevation on fourth day = \(\frac{1}{5}\)

Adding Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.3

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 1.
3 + 12
Answer:
3 + 12 = 15
|3| + |12| = 15
Both the signs are same so use positive sign to the sum .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent 3. Then draw an arrow 12 units to the right representing adding +12.The arrows end at showing the sum
So, 3 + 12 = 15

Question 2.
5 + (-7)
Answer:
5 + (-7)
|5| – |-7|
= 5 – 7
= -2
|5| < |-7| so use negative sign.
so , sum is  – 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 5 to represent 5. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing adding -7.The arrows end at showing the sum
So, 5 + (-7) = -2

Question 3.
-4 + (-1)
Answer :
-4 + (-1)
|-4| + |-1|
= 4 + 1
= -5
Both have the same signs
so , sum is  – 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -4 to represent -4. Then draw an arrow 1 units to the left representing adding -1.The arrows end at showing the sum
So,
-4 + (-1) -5

Question 4.
-6 + 6
Answer:
-6 + 6
|-6| – |6|
= 6 – 6
= 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-4
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -6 to represent -6. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the right representing adding +6.The arrows end at showing the sum
So,
-6 + 6 = 0

Subtract.

Question 5.
69 – 38
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-5

Question 6.
82 – 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-6

Question 7.
177 – 63
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-7

Question 8.
451 – 268
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-8

Question 9.
What is the range of the numbers below?
12, 8, 17, 12, 15, 18, 30
Answer :
8, 12 , 12 , 15 , 17, 18, 30
Smallest number = 8
Largest number = 30
Range = largest number – smallest number = 30 – 8 = 22
Explanation:
The range is the difference between the largest and smallest numbers. The midrange is the average of the largest and smallest number.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING TOOLS
Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on the number line. Write the addition expression being modeled. Then find the sum. (See Exploration 1, p. 17.)

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 69
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-10
-2 + ( 5) = 3
-2 + 5
|-2| – |5|
= 2 – 5
= 3
|-2| < |5| so use positive sign so, sum is 5
Explanation:
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -2 represent -2 . Then another arrow is drawn from -2 to 3 represent adding of -5. then the arrow ends at 3 showing the sum .

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 70
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-11
5 + (-4)
|5| – |-4|
= 5 – 4
= 1
|5| > |-4| so use positive sign so, sum is 1
Explanation:
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 5 represent 5 . Then another arrow is drawn from 5 to 1 represent adding of -4 then the arrow ends at 1 showing the sum .

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 71
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 72
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-13

Question 14.
-4.2 + 3.3
Answer :
-4.2+ 3.3
|-4.2| – |3.3|
= 4.2 – 3.3
= 0.9
|-4.2| > |3.3|
so , sum is  – 0.9

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 73

Question 16.
12.48 + (-10.636)
Answer :
12.48 + (-10.636)
|12.48| – |-10.636|
= 12.48 – 10.636
= 1.844
|12.48| > |-10.636|
so , sum is  1.844

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 741

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-17

Question 18.
-20.25 + 15.711
Answer :
-20.25 + 15.711
|-20.25| – |15.711|
= 20.25 – 15.711
=  – 4.539
|20.25| > |15.711|
so , sum is  – 4.539

Question 19.
-32.306 + (-24.884)
Answer :
-32.306 + (-24.884)
|-32.306| + |-24.884|
= 32.306 + 24.884
= – 7.422
Both the signs are same
so , sum is  – 7.422

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 75
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-20

Question 21.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the sum. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 76
Answer :
No, the sum is -3.95
Explanation :
The procedure to solve above sum is right but in the last after adding the numbers he should put negative symbol to the sum as both the addends are negative.
The sum of negative numbers will always be negative .

OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life situation that can be represented by the addition expression modeled on the number line.

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 77
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-22
Explanation:
The coin is buried under ground of 1.6 metres. then again it is removed from ground and buried with increase of 0.6 length from previous buried length . Now where is the coin located.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 78
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-23
Explanation:
Rahul gained 1.25$ on his birthday and spent 1.25$ on video game . how much money is left over with rahul .

Question 24.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You eat \(\frac{3}{10}\) of a coconut. Your friend eats \(\frac{1}{5}\) of the coconut. What fraction of the coconut do you and your friend eat?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 79
Answer :
Coconut part eaten by me = \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Coconut part eaten by friend = \(\frac{1}{5}\)
Total Coconut eaten by me and my friend = \(\frac{3}{10}\) + \(\frac{1}{5}\)
\(\frac{1}{5}\) is written as \(\frac{2}{10}\)
= \(\frac{3}{10}\) + \(\frac{2}{10}\)
= \(\frac{5}{10}\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Total Coconut eaten by me and my friend = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 25.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your bank account balance is $20.85. You deposit $15.50. What is your new balance?
Answer :
My Account Balance = $20.85
Deposited Money = $15.50
New Balance = $20.85 + $15.50 = .635

Question 26.
NUMBER SENSE
When is the sum of two negative mixed numbers an integer?
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-26

Question 27.
WRITING
You are adding two rational numbers with different signs. How can you tell if the sum will positive, negative, or zero?
Answer :
The sign of the sum will always be the sign of the absolute value of the greater number.
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-27

Question 28.
DIG DEEPER!
The table at the left shows the water level (in inches) of a reservoir for three months compared to the yearly average. Is the water level for the three-month period greater than or less than the yearly average? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 81

Answer :
Water level in june month = -2\(\frac{1}{8}\) = –\(\frac{17}{8}\)
Water level in July month = 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{5}{4}\)
Water level in August month  = –\(\frac{7}{8}\)
Average of Yearly = Water level in (June  + July + August ) ÷ 3
= (-\(\frac{17}{8}\) + \(\frac{5}{4}\) + (-\(\frac{7}{8}\) )) ÷ 3
Take \(\frac{5}{4}\) = \(\frac{10}{8}\) as it is multiplied by 2 with numerator and denominator
= (-\(\frac{17}{8}\) + \(\frac{10}{8}\) + (-\(\frac{7}{8}\) )) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{14}{8}\) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{7}{4}\) ÷ 3
= –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
Average of Yearly = –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
3 months water level = –\(\frac{7}{4}\)
–\(\frac{7}{4}\)  > –\(\frac{7}{12}\)
3 months water level is greater than average of yearly .

USING PROPERTIES

Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you find the sum using mental math. Then find the sum.

Question 29.
4.5 + (-6.21) + (-4.5)
Answer :
4.5 + (-6.21) + (-4.5)
we know 4.5 – 4.5 = 0, we get
4.5 – 4.5 – 6.21 = -6.21
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 82
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 82
= Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-30

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 83
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-31

ADDING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the sum. Explain each step.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 84
Answer :
Converting the fraction form into decimal form
4\(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{19}{4}\) = 4.75
= 6 + 4.75 + (-2.5)
add | 6|+ | 4.75 |we get,
= | 10.75 | –  | -2.5 |
= | 8.55|
6 is greater number so we get positive sign for the sum.
Therefore sum = 8.55

Question 33.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 85
Answer :
Convert the fraction form into decimal form we get ,
\(\frac{4}{5}\) = 0.8
= -4.3 + 0.8 + 12
absolute values of the numbers
= | -4.3 |  + | 0.8 | + | 12 |
add | 0.8 | + | 12 | = | 12.8 |
= | -4.3 |  + | 12.8 |
= 12.8 – 4.3
= 8.5
12 is greater number so sum sign is positive
Therefore sum  = 8.5

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 86
Answer :
Convert the fraction forms into decimal forms we get,
5\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{16}{3}\) = 5.33
-3\(\frac{1}{6}\) = –\(\frac{19}{6}\)  = -3.16
we get equation as ,
5.33 + 7.5 + (-3.16)
=| 5.33 | + | 7.5 |  – | -3.16 |
= 5.33 + 7.5 – 3.16
= 12.53 – 3.16
= 9.37
as 7.5 is greater than all numbers so sum sign will be positive.
Therefore sum = 9.37

Question 35.
PROBLEM SOLVING
The table at the right shows the annual profits (in thousands of dollars) of a county fair from 2013 to 2016. What must the 2017 profit be (in hundreds of dollars) to break even over the five-year period?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 87
Answer :
Profit in  2013 = 2.5
Profit in 2014 = 1.4
Profit in 2015 = -3.3
Profit in 2016 = -1.4
Total Profit from 2013 to 2016 = 2.5 + 1.4 + ( -3.3 ) + (-1.4) = | 2.5 | + | 1.4 | – | -3.3 | – | -1.4 | = 2.5 + 1.4 -3.3 -1.4=2.5 – 3.3 = -0.8
– 3.3 is greater than all numbers so sum sign is negative.
The 2017 profit should be to break even over the five-year period is greater than -0.8 .

Question 36.
REASONING
Is | a + b | = | a | + | b | true for all rational numbers a and b? Explain.
Answer :
Sometimes based on the values of a and b
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-36

Question 37.
REPEATED REASONING
Evaluate the expression.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 88
Answer :
\(\frac{1}{2}\)
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.3-Question-37

Lesson 1.4 Subtracting Integers

EXPLORATION 1
Using Integer Counters to Find Differences

Work with a partner.

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 89
a. Use integer counters to find the following sum and difference. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 90
Answer :
4 + (-2) = 2 and 4 – 2 = 2
Explanation:
When -2 is added to 4 or when2 is subtracted from 4 we get the same sum and difference.

b. In part (a), you removed zero pairs to find the sums. How can you use integer counters and zero pairs to find -3 – 1?
c. INDUCTIVE REASONING
Use integer counters to complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 91
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Exploration-1-c
d. Write a general rule for subtracting integers.
Answer :
To subtract integers, change the sign on the integer that is to be subtracted. If both signs are positive, the answer will be positive. If both signs are negative, the answer will be negative. If the signs are different subtract the smaller absolute value from the larger absolute value.

1.4 Lesson

Try It

Use a number line to find the difference.

Question 1.
1 – 4
Answer :
1 – 4 = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-1
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 1 represent 1 . Then , Draw an arrow 4 units to the left to represent subtracting 4, or adding -4.
So,  1 – 4 = – 3

Question 2.
-5 – 2
Answer :
-5 – 2 = -7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-2
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -5 represent -5 . Then , Draw an arrow 2 units to the left to represent subtracting 2, or adding -2.
So, -5 – 2 = -7

Question 3.
6 – (-5)
Answer :
6 – (-5) = 11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-3

Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 6 represent 6 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the right to represent subtracting -5, or adding 5.
So,  16 – (-5) = 11

Try It

Question 4.
8 – 3
Answer :
=8 – 3
=8 + ( – 3)      Add opposite of 3
=5                  Add
The difference is 5

Question 5.
9 – 17
Answer :
= 9 – 17
= 9 + ( – 17)      Add opposite of 17
= -8                  Add
The difference is -8

Question 6.
-3 – 3
Answer :
= -3 – 3
= -3 + ( – 3)      Add opposite of 3
= -6                  Add
The difference is -6

Question 7.
-14 – 9
Answer :
= -14 – 9
= -14 + ( – 9)      Add opposite of 9
= -25                 Add
The difference is -25

Question 8.
10 – (-8)
Answer :
= 10 – ( -8 )
= 10+ ( 8)      Add opposite of -8
= 18               Add
The difference is 18

Question 9.
-12 – (-12)
Answer :
= -12 – ( -12 )
= -12 + ( 12)      Add opposite of -12
= -24                 Add
The difference is -24

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 10.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the difference of two integers.
Answers :

To Subtract two Positive integers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
To Subtract two integers of positive plus negative integer  using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.

MATCHING
Match the subtraction expression with the corresponding addition expression. Explain your reasoning.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 93

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 94

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 95

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 96

SUBTRACTING INTEGERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 15.
10 – 12
Answer :
10 – 12 = -2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-15
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 10 represent 10 . Then, Draw an arrow 12 units to the left to represent subtracting 12, or adding -12.
So,  10 – 12 = -2

Question 16.
6 – (-8)
Answer :
6 – (-8) = 14
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-16
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 6 represent 6 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the right to represent subtracting -8, or adding 8.
So,  6 – (-8) = 14

Question 17.
-7 – (-4)
Answer :
-7 – (-4) = -3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-17
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -7 represent -7 . Then, Draw an arrow 4 units to the left to represent subtracting -4, or adding 4.
So,  -7 – (-4) = -3

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 18.
A polar vortex causes the temperature to decrease from 3°C at 3:00 P.M. to -2°C at 4:00 P.M. The temperature continues to change by the same amount each hour until 8:00 P.M. Find the total change in temperature from 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M.
Answer :
Temperature decrease from 3°C at 3:00 P.M. to -2°C at 4:00 P.M
Temperature decrease from 3:00 P.M. to 4:00 P.M = 3°C – (-2°C) = 5 °C
For one hour it decreases 5 °C
From to 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M. = 5 hours
Temperature decrease from 3:00 P.M. to 8:00 P.M. = 5 hours × 5 °C = 25 °C

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
While on vacation, you map several locations using a coordinate plane in which each unit represents 1 mile. A cove is at(3, 7), an island is at(5, 4), and you are currently at (3, 4). Are you closer to the cove or the island? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 97
Answer :
Island is close to the cove
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Lesson-Question-19

Subtracting Integers Homework & Practice 1.4

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 98
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-1

Question 2.
-8.75 + 2.43
Answer :
=2.43 – 8.75
=2.43 + (-8.75)   Add opposite of  8.75
= -6.32
The difference is  – 6.32

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 99
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-3

As both the numbers are negative so, sum is negative.

Add.

Question 4.
2.48 + 6.711
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-4

Question 5.
12.807 + 7.116
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-5

Question 6.
18.7126 + 14.033
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-6

Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 100
Answer :
– 1 + (-3)             Add opposite of 3
= -4                     Add
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -1 represent -1 and then an arrow from -1 drawn towards right represent – 3  units . so the sum is -4. the arrows end showing the sum at -4.
– 1 + (-3) = -4

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 101
Answer :
2 + ( – 5 )      add opposite of 5
= -3
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 2 represent 2 and then an arrow from 2 drawn towards left represent – 5  units . so the sum is -3. the arrows end showing the sum at -3.

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING INTEGER COUNTERS
Use integer counters to find the difference. (See Exploration 1, p. 23.)

Question 9.
5 – 3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-9
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 5 positive counters and 3 negative counters then 3 zero pairs will be canceled and only 2 positive counters are left, the sum is +2

Question 10.
1 – 4
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-10
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 1 positive counters and 4 negative counters then 1 zero pair will be canceled and only 3 negative counters are left, the sum is -3

Question 11.
-2 – (-6)
Answer :
Convert the equation in addition form
-2 – (-6) = -2 + 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-11
Explanation:
A Positive counter and negative counter form zero pair .
Take 6 positive counters and 2 negative counters then 2 zero pair will be canceled and only 4 positive counters are left, the sum is +4

USING NUMBER LINES
Write an addition expression and write a subtraction expression represented by the number line. Then evaluate the expressions.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 102
Answer :
4 – 3 = 1
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to 4 represent 4 and then an arrow from 4 drawn towards left represent  3  units . so the sum is 1. the arrows end showing the sum at 1.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 103
Answer :
-2 + 5 = 3
Explanation :
An arrow is drawn from 0 to -2 represent -2 and then an arrow from -2 drawn towards right represent 5  units . so the sum is 3. the arrows end showing the sum at +3.

SUBTRACTING INTEGERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 14.
4 – 7
Answer :
Words : To subtract an integer add its opposite .
Numbers : 4 – 7 = 4 + (-7) = -3
Model : Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-14
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent 4 . Then, Draw an arrow 47units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So,  4 – 7 = -3

Question 15.
8 – (-5)
Answer :
8 – (-5) = 13
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-15
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 8 represent 8 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the right to represent subtracting -5, or adding 5. The arrow ends at 13 showing the difference.
So, 8 – (-5) = 13

Question 16.
– 6 – (-7)
Answer :
– 6 – (-7) = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-16
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -6 represent -6 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting -7, or adding 7. The arrow ends at 1 showing the difference.
So, – 6 – (-7) = 1

Question 17.
– 2 – 3
Answer :
– 2 – 3 = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-17
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -2 represent -2 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the left to represent subtracting 3, or adding -3. The arrow ends at – 5 showing the difference.
So, – 2 – 3 = -5

Question 18.
5 – 8
Answer :
5 – 8 = – 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-18
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 5 represent 5 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the left to represent subtracting 8, or adding -8. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So, 5 – 8 = – 3

Question 19.
-4 – 6
Answer :
-4 – 6 = – 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-19
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent -4 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting 6, or adding -6. The arrow ends at – 10 showing the difference.
So, -4 – 6 = – 10

Question 20.
-8 – (-3)
Answer:
-8 – (-3) = -5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-20
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -8 represent -8 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the Right to represent subtracting -3, or adding 3. The arrow ends at – 5 showing the difference.
So, -8 – (-3) = -5

Question 21.
10 – 7
Answer :
10 – 7 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-21
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 10 represent 10 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at 3 showing the difference.
So, 10 – 7 = 3

Question 22.
– 8 – 13
Answer :
– 8 – 13 = -21
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-22
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -8 represent -8 . Then, Draw an arrow 13 units to the left to represent subtracting 13, or adding -13. The arrow ends at – 21 showing the difference.
So, – 8 – 13 = – 21

Question 23.
15 – (-2)
Answer :
15 – (-2) = 17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-23
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 15 represent 15 . Then, Draw an arrow 2 units to the Right to represent subtracting -2 or adding 2. The arrow ends at 17 showing the difference.
So, 15 – (-2) = 17

Question 24.
-9 – (-13)
Answer :
-9 – (-13) = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -9 represent -9 . Then, Draw an arrow 13 units to the Right to represent subtracting -13, or adding 13. The arrow ends at 4 showing the difference.
So, -9 – (-13) = 4

Question 25.
-7 – (-8)
Answer:
-7 – (-8) = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4 represent 4 . Then, Draw an arrow 47units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at – 3 showing the difference.
So, -7 – (-8) = 1

Question 26.
– 6 – (-6)
Answer :
– 6 – (-6) = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-26
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -6 represent -6 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting -6, or adding 6. The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, – 6 – (-6) = 0

Question 27.
-10 – 12
Answer :
-10 – 12 = -22
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-27
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -10 represent -10 . Then, Draw an arrow 12 units to the left to represent subtracting 12, or adding -12. The arrow ends at – 22 showing the difference.
So, -10 – 12 = -22

Question 28.
32 – (-6)
Answer :
32 – (-6) = 38
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-28
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 32 represent 32. Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the Right to represent subtracting -6, or adding 6 The arrow ends at 38 showing the difference.
So, 32 – (-6) = 38

Question 29.
0 – (-20)
Answer :
0 – (-20) = 20
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-29
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from  0 to 20 which represent 20 .
So, 0 – (-20) = 20

Question 30.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the difference. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 104

Answer :
Yes
Explanation :
7 – (- 12 )
= 7  + 12            Add opposite of -12
= 19                    Add

Question 31.
A scientist records the water temperature and the air temperature in Antarctica. The water temperature is -2°C. The air is 9°C colder than the water. Which expression can be used to find the air temperature? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 105
Answer :
-2 – 9  is the correct option
Explanation :
Temperature of water = -2°C.
The air is 9°C colder than the water It means
Temperature of Air = -2 – 9 °C. = – 11 °C

Question 32.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A shark is 80 feet below the surface of the water. It swims up and jumps out of the water to a height of 15 feet above the surface. Find the vertical distance the shark travels. Justify your answer.
Answer :
The shark is located at  = – 80 feet
The height of shark when jumps = + 15 feet .
The vertical Distance traveled by shark = 80 + 15  feet = 95 feet (As distance cant be negative )
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Integers-Homework-Practice-1.4-Question-32

Question 33.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The figure shows a diver diving from a platform. The diver reaches a depth of 4 meters. What is the change in elevation of the diver?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 106
Answer :
The diver reaches a depth of 4 meters.
Height of diver diving from a platform = 10 metres
The change in elevation of the driver  =10 – (-4) = 10 + 4 = 14 metres.

Question 34.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two different pairs of negative integers, x and y, that make the statement x – y = 1 true.
Answer :
Let x = 1 and y = 2
x – y
= 1 – 2
= -1
Let x = 2 and  y = 3
x – y
= 2 – 3
= – 1
From Above values of x and y the statement x – y = -1 is explained

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you evaluate the expression using mental math. Then evaluate the expression.

Question 35.
2 – 7 + (-2)
Answer :
2 + (-2) is zero pair
=2 – 7 + (-2)         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= 2 – 2 – 7
= – 7

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 36.
– 6 – 8 + 6
Answer :
6 + (-6) is zero pair
=-6 – 8 + 6         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -6 + 6- 8
= – 8
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 37.
8 + (-8 – 5)
Answer :
8 – 8 = 0 zero pair
8 + (-8 – 5)
= (8 – 8)- 5  (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -5
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 38.
-39 + 46 – (-39)
Answer :
39 + (-39) is zero pair
=-39 + 46 – (-39)         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= -39 + 39+ 46
= 46
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 39.
[13 + (-28)] – 13
Answer :
13 + (-13) is zero pair
=[13 + (-28)] – 13         (order of addends changed but sum remains the same )
= [13 + (-13)] – 28
= – 28
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 40.
-2 + (-47 – 8)
Answer :
– 2 + (-47 – 8)
= -2 – 8 +(-47)      add -2 – 8
= – 10 + (-47 )
= – 57
Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

ALGEBRA

Evaluate the expression when k = -3, m = -6, and n = 9.

Question 41.
4 – n
Answer :
4 – n
Take  n = 9 we get,
4 – 9 = – 5

Question 42.
m – (-8)
Answer :
m – (-8)
Take m = ( -6)
= (-6) – ( -8)
= -6 + 8
= -2

Question 43.
-5 + k – n
Answer :
-5 + k – n
Take k =-3 and  n = 9
– 5 + (-3) – 9
= -5 – 3 – 9
= -8 – 9
= – 17

Question 44.
| m – k |
Answer :
| m – k |
Take  m = (-6) and k = (-3)
| (-6) – (-3) |
= | -6 + 3 |
= | – 3 |
= 3

Question 45.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The table shows the record monthly high and low temperatures for a city in Alaska.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 107
a. Which month has the greatest range of temperatures?
Answer :
Range in Jan = 56 – (-35) = 91
Range in Feb = 57 – ( -38) = 95
Range in Mar = 56 – (-24 ) = 80
Range in Apr =72 – (-15) = 87
Range in May = 82 – 1 = 81
Range in Jun = 92 – 29 = 63
Range in Jul = 84 – 34 = 50
Range in Aug = 85 -31 = 54
Range in Sep = 73 – 19 = 54
Range in Oct = 64 – (-6) = 70
Range in Nov = 62 – (-21 ) = 83
Range in Dec = 53 – (-36) = 89

The Greatest Range of temperature is in February = 95
b. What is the range of temperatures for the year?
Answer :
Range of Year =  (Jan  + Feb + March +April +May +June +July +Aug +Sep +Oct +Nov +Dec ) ÷ 12
=  (91 + 95 + 80 +87 + 81 + 63 + 50 + 54 + 54 + 70 + 83 + 89 ) ÷ 12
= 897 ÷ 12 = 74.75

REASONING
Tell whether the difference of the two integers is always, sometimes, or never positive. Explain your reasoning.

Question 46.
two positive integers
Answer :
True
Explanation :
Example :
2 integers are 2 , 4
4 – 2 = 2

Question 47.
a positive integer and a negative integer
Answer :
True
Explanation
Take X = 5 and Y = -6
X – Y = 5 – (-6) = 5 + 6 = 11

Question 48.
two negative integers
Answer :
Sometimes based on the values of integers
Explanation :
Take x = – 2 , y = – 4
x – y = (-2) – (-4) = -2 + 4 = 2
Here the difference is positive.

Take x = – 6 , y = – 2
x – y = -6 – (-2) = -6 + 2 = – 4
Here the difference is negative.

Question 49.
a negative integer and a positive integer
Answer :
Sometimes
Take X = -8 and Y = 3
X-Y = -8 – 3 = -8 + 3 = -5
Here we got negative differences

NUMBER SENSE
For what values of a and b is the statement true?

Question 50.
| a – b | = | b – a |
Answer :
True
Explanation:
Take a = -3 and b = 2
| a – b | = | (-3) – 2 | = | -3 – 2 | = | -5 | = 5
| b – a | = | 2 – (-3) | = | 2 + 3 | = | 5 | = 5
| a – b | = | b – a |

Question 51.
| a – b | = | a | – | b |
Answer :
False
Explanation :
| a – b | = | a | – | b |
Take a = -3 and b = 2
| a – b | = | (-3) – 2 | = | -3 – 2 | = | -5 | = 5
| -3 | – | 2 | = 3 – 2 = 1
| a – b | is not equal to | a | – | b |

Lesson 1.5 Subtracting Rational Numbers

EXPLORATION 1

Subtracting Rational Numbers

Work with a partner.
a. Choose a unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on each number line. What expressions involving subtraction are being modeled? What are the differences?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 108
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.5-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-1-a
b. Do the rules for subtracting integers apply to all rational numbers? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :

When subtracting rational numbers we follow the rules for subtracting integers.
  • KEEP the sign of the first number the same.
  • CHANGE subtraction to addition.
  • CHANGE the sign of the second number to the opposite, positive becomes negative, negative becomes positive

c. You have used the commutative and associative properties to add integers. Do these properties apply in expressions involving subtraction? Explain your reasoning.
Answer :
No properties are followed
Explanation:
Properties of subtraction:

  • Subtracting a number from itself.
  • Subtracting 0 from a number.
  • Order property.
  • Subtraction of 1

EXPLORATION 2
Finding Distances on a Number Line
Work with a partner.
a. Find the distance between 3 and 2 on a number line.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Lesson-1.5-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Exploration-2-a
b. The distance between 3 and 0 is the absolute value of 3, because |3 – 0 | = 3. How can you use absolute values
to find the distance between 3 and 2? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 109
Answer b :
The distance between 3 and 0 is the absolute value of 3, because |3 – 0 | = 3.
The Distance between 3 and 2 is  |3 – 2 | = 1
Explanation :
Absolute values of all numbers are positive

1.5 Lesson

Try It

Find the difference. Write your answer in simplest form.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 110
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 111
Answer :

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 112
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-3

Try It

Find the difference.

Question 4.
-2.1 – 3.9
Answer :
– 2.1 – 3.9 = – 6.0
both have negative signs so, difference also have negative sign .

Question 5.
-8.8 – (-8.8)
Answer :
0
Explanation :
Rewrite the differences as a sum by adding the opposite.
=  – 8.8 + 8.8
= 8.8 + ( -8.8 )
Because the signs are different and |8.8 | = |- 8. 8 |
we get ,
= 0  ( zero pair )

Question 6.
0.45 – (-0.05)
Answer :
0.45 – (-0.05)
= 0.45 + 0.05
= 0. 50

Try It

Evaluate the expression. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 113
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-7

Question 8.
7.8 – 3.3 – (-1.2) + 4.3
Answer :
7.8 – 3.3 – (-1.2) + 4.3
= 7.8 – 3.3 + 1.2 + 4.3
Add all the positive numbers
= 7.8 + 1.2 + 4.3 – 3.3
=9.0 + 4.3 – 3.3
= 13.3 – 3.3
= 10.0

Try It

Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.

Question 9.
– 3 and 9
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-9
The distance between -3 and 9 is 12 units

Question 10.
-7.5 and -15.3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-10
Explanation :
The distance between -7.5 and -15.3 = 15.3 – 7.5 = -7.8

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 114
Answer :
1\(\frac{1}{2}\) = \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 1.5

–\(\frac{2}{3}\) = –\(\frac{2}{3}\) = – 0.6
Distance between 1.5 and  -0.6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-11
Explanation :
Distance between 1.5 and  -0.6 = 1.5 + 0.6 = 2.1

Self-Assessmentfor Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 12.
WRITING
Explain how to use a number line to find the difference of two rational numbers.
Answer :
Difference of two rational numbers using a number line:

  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is positive, move that many units to the right from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.
Difference of two rational numbers using a number line:
  1. First, draw a number line.
  2. Then, find the location of the first integer on the number line.
  3. Next, if the second integer is Negative, move that many units to the Left from the location of the first integer. …
  4. Your answer will be the point you end on.

SUBTRACTING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the difference. Use a number line to justify your answer.

Question 13.
4.9 – 1.6
Answer :
4.9 – 1.6 = 3.3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-13
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4.9 represent 4.9 . Then, Draw an arrow 1.6 units to the left to represent subtracting 1.6, or adding -1.6. The arrow ends at 3.3 showing the difference.
So, 4.9 – 1.6 = 3.3

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 115
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-14
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to 7/8 represent 7/8 . Then, Draw an arrow 6/8 units to the right to represent subtracting -6/7, or adding 6/8. The arrow ends at 13/8 showing the difference.
So, Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 115= \(\frac{13}{8}\)

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 116
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.5-Lesson-Question-15

Self-Assessmentfor Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 16.
A parasail is \(\frac{3}{100}\) mile above the water. After 5 minutes, the parasail is \(\frac{1}{50}\) mile above the water. Find and interpret the change in height of the parasail.
Answer :
Height of parasail above water = \(\frac{3}{100}\)
After 5 mins Height of parasil above water \(\frac{1}{50}\)
change in height of the parasail = \(\frac{3}{100}\) – \(\frac{1}{50}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{1}{50}\)  as \(\frac{2}{100}\)
change in height of the parasail = \(\frac{3}{100}\) – \(\frac{2}{100}\) = \(\frac{1}{100}\)

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You withdraw $55 from a bank account to purchase a game. Then you make a deposit. The number line shows the balances of the account after each transaction.
a. Find and interpret the distance between the points.
b. How much money was in your account before buying the game?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 117
Answer :
a : Distance between the points. = $6.18 + $25.32 = $ 31.50
b : Withdrawal amount = $55
Balance after withdrawal = -$25.32
Money before buying the game = $55 +(-25.32$) = $29.68

Subtracting Rational Numbers Homework & Practice 1.5

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 1.
9 – 5
Answer :
9 – 5
= 9 + (- 5)                    Add opposite of 5
= 4                               Add
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 9 represent 9 . Then, Draw an arrow 5 units to the left to represent subtracting 5, or adding -5. The arrow ends at 4 showing the difference.
So, 9 + (- 5)  = 4

Question 2.
– 8 – (-8)
Answer :
– 8 – (-8)
8 – 8  = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-2
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 8 represent 9 . Then, Draw an arrow 8 units to the left to represent subtracting 8, or adding -8. The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, 8 – 8  = 0

Question 3.
– 12 – 7
Answer :
– 12 – 7 = – 19
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-3

Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to -12 represent -12 . Then, Draw an arrow 7 units to the left to represent subtracting 7, or adding -7. The arrow ends at -19 showing the difference.
So, – 12 – 7 = – 19

Question 4.
12 – (-3)
Answer :
12 – (-3)
= 12 + 3
=15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-4

Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 12 represent 12 . Then, Draw an arrow 3 units to the right to represent subtracting -3, or adding 3. The arrow ends at 15 showing the difference.
So, 12 – (-3) = 15

Find the volume of the prism.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 118
Answer :
Edge of a cube = 4 ft
Volume of cube = a × a × a = 4 × 4 × 4 = 12ft^3

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 119
Answer :
Width of cuboid = 3m
Height of cuboid = 3m
Length of cuboid = 5m
Volume of cuboid = length × width × height = 5 × 3 × 3 = 45 m^3

Order the values from least to greatest.

Question 7.
6, | 3 |, | -4 |, 1, -2
Answer :
The absolute values are  | 3 | = 3 and | -4 | = 4
6, 3, 4, 1, – 2
-2, 1, 3, 4, 6 order from least to greatest
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 8.
| 4.5 |, -3.6, 2, | -1.8 |, 1.2
Answer :
| 4.5 | = 4.5 and  | -1.8 | = 1.8
4.5 , -3.6, 2, 1.8, 1.2
-3.6 < 1.2< 1.8 < 2 < 4.5 order from least to greatest

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING TOOLS
Choosea unit fraction to represent the space between the tick marks on the number line. Write an expression involving subtraction that is being modeled. Then find the difference. (See Exploration 1, p. 29.)

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 120
Answer :
\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-9
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to \(\frac{3}{4}\) represent \(\frac{3}{4}\). Then, Draw an arrow \(\frac{1}{4}\) units to the left to represent subtracting –\(\frac{1}{4}\), or adding –\(\frac{1}{4}\). The arrow ends at \(\frac{1}{2}\) showing the difference.
So, \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{4}\) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 121
Answer :
-1 – (-\(\frac{3}{4}\)) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-10
Explanation :
Draw a arrow from 0 to -1 represent -1. Then, Draw an arrow -1 units to the right to represent subtracting –\(\frac{5}{4}\), or adding \(\frac{5}{4}\). The arrow ends at \(\frac{1}{4}\) showing the difference.
So, -1 – (-\(\frac{3}{4}\)) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)

SUBTRACTING RATIONAL NUMBERS
Find the difference. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 122
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 123
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-12

Question 13.
-1 – 2.5
Answer :
– 1 + (- 2.5)       add opposite of 2.5
= – 3.5               add

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 124
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-14

Question 15.
5.5 – 8.1
Answer :
5.5 – 8.1 = 5.5 + (-8.1 )                Add opposite of 8.1
= – 2.6                           Add

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 124.1
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-16

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 125
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-17

Question 18.
-4.62 – 3.51
Answer :
-4.62 – 3.51
= -4.62 + (-3.51)  Add opposite of 3.51
= |-4.62 | + |-3.51 |
=4.62 + 3.51
= -8.13
Both the values are negative so use negative sign in the difference
So, -4.62 – 3.51 = -8.13

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 126

Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-19

Question 20.
-7.34 – (-5.51)
Answer :
Answer :
-7.34 – (-5.51)
= -7.34 + 5.51
= | 7.34| – |5.51 |
=7.34 – 5.51
= – 1.83
| -7.34|  > |5.51 | use negative sign to the difference
So, -7.34 – (-5.51) = – 1.83

Question 21.
6.673 – (-8.29)
Answer :
6.673 – (-8.29)
= 6.673 + 8.29
=14.963

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 127
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-22Question 23.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Question 23.
Your friend finds the difference. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 128

Answer :
No
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-23

OPEN-ENDED
Describe a real-life situation that can be represented by the subtraction expression modeled on the number line.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 129
Answer :
4.5 – 6 = -1.5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-24
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to 4.5 represent 4.5 . Then, Draw an arrow 6 units to the left to represent subtracting 6, or adding -6. The arrow ends at -1.5 showing the difference.
So, 9 + (- 5)  = 4

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 130
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Homework-Practice-1.5-Question-25
Explanation:
Draw a arrow from 0 to –\(\frac{5}{8}\) represent –\(\frac{5}{8}\). Then, Draw an arrow \(\frac{5}{8}\)units to the left to represent subtracting –\(\frac{5}{8}\), or adding \(\frac{5}{8}\). The arrow ends at 0 showing the difference.
So, –\(\frac{5}{8}\)  – ( –\(\frac{5}{8}\) ) = 0

Question 26.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Your water bottle is \(\frac{5}{6}\) full. After tennis practice, the bottle is \(\frac{3}{8}\) full. How much of the water did you drink?
Answer :
Amount of water in the bottle = \(\frac{5}{6}\)
Amount of water in the bottle after drinking = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Amount of water drank = \(\frac{5}{6}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{6}\) = \(\frac{20}{24}\) and \(\frac{3}{8}\) = \(\frac{9}{24}\)
Amount of water drank = \(\frac{20}{24}\) – \(\frac{9}{24}\) = \(\frac{11}{24}\)
Therefore, Amount of water drank = \(\frac{11}{24}\)

Question 27.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You have 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) ounces of sodium chloride. You want to replicate an experiment that uses 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) ounces of sodium chloride. Do you have enough sodium chloride? If not, how much more do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 130.1

Answer :
Amount of sodium chloride with me = 2\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{8}{3}\)
Amount of sodium chloride required for experiment = 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) =\(\frac{11}{4}\)
Amount of sodium chloride more required for experiment = \(\frac{11}{4}\) – \(\frac{8}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{11}{4}\) = \(\frac{33}{12}\) and \(\frac{8}{3}\) =\(\frac{24}{12}\)
Amount of sodium chloride more required for experiment = \(\frac{33}{12}\) – \(\frac{24}{12}\)
= \(\frac{9}{12}\)

Question 28.
REASONING
When is the difference of two decimals an integer? Explain.
Answer :
The difference between 2 decimals is an integer when the portion of each decimal to the right of the decimal point is the same,
Explanation:
example:
8.25 – 7.25 = 1
The decimal position of two numbers is same that is 0.25

USING PROPERTIES
Tell how the Commutative and Associative Properties of Addition can help you evaluate the expression. Then evaluate the expression.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 131
Answer :
\(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\)
= \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
=  \(\frac{2}{3}\)  ( as \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{3}{4}\) =0, zero pair)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 132
Answer :
\(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) – ( – \(\frac{3}{5}\) )
= \(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) + \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Add \(\frac{2}{5}\) and \(\frac{3}{5}\) we get,
= \(\frac{5}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{5}\) = \(\frac{10}{10}\)
= \(\frac{10}{10}\)  – \(\frac{7}{10}\)
= \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Therefore \(\frac{2}{5}\) – \(\frac{7}{10}\) – ( – \(\frac{3}{5}\) ) = \(\frac{3}{10}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 31.
8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 – (-1.6)
Answer :
8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 – (-1.6)
= 8.5 + 3.4 – 6.5 + 1.6
= 8.5 + 3.4 + 1.6 – 6.5
= 8.5 + 5.0 – 6.5   { as (3.4 + 1.6 = 5.0)}
= 13.5 – 6.5   { as 8.5 + 5.0 =13.5)}
= 7.0

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 133
Answer :
-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) – (-8\(\frac{1}{3}\)) – ( -4\(\frac{1}{4}\))
= –\(\frac{7}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\) + \(\frac{17}{4}\)
=\(\frac{17}{4}\) –\(\frac{7}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
= \(\frac{10}{4}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) + \(\frac{25}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{2}\) = \(\frac{15}{6}\) and  \(\frac{25}{3}\) = \(\frac{50}{6}\)
= \(\frac{15}{6}\) + \(\frac{50}{6}\)
= \(\frac{65}{6}\)
-1\(\frac{3}{4}\) – (-8\(\frac{1}{3}\)) – ( -4\(\frac{1}{4}\)) = \(\frac{65}{6}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 33.
2.1 + (5.8 – 4.1)
Answer :
2.1 + (5.8 – 4.1)
= 2.1 + 1.7
= 3.8

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 34.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 134
Answer :
2\(\frac{3}{8}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) + 3\(\frac{1}{8}\) – (-\(\frac{1}{2}\) )
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) – \(\frac{9}{2}\) + \(\frac{25}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) +\(\frac{25}{8}\) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) – \(\frac{9}{2}\)
= \(\frac{44}{8}\) – \(\frac{8}{2}\)
= \(\frac{11}{2}\) – \(\frac{8}{2}\)
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)
2\(\frac{3}{8}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) + 3\(\frac{1}{8}\) – (-\(\frac{1}{2}\) ) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Explanation:
Commutative Property : For any two rational numbers a and b, a + b = b+ a. We see that the two rational numbers can be added in any order. So addition is commutative for rational numbers.

Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

FINDING DISTANCE ON A NUMBER LINE
Find the distance between the two numbers on a number line.

Question 35.
2.7 and 5.9
Answer :
The distance between 2.7 and 5.9 on a number line = | 2.7 – 5.9| = |-3.2 | = 3.2
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 36.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 135
Answer :
The distance between –\(\frac{7}{9}\) and –\(\frac{2}{9}\) on a number line = | –\(\frac{7}{9}\) – (-\(\frac{2}{9}\) )| = | –\(\frac{7}{9}\) + \(\frac{2}{9}\) | =| –\(\frac{5}{9}\) |= \(\frac{5}{9}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 37.
-2.2 and 8.4
Answer :
The distance between -2.2 and 8.4 on a number line = | -2.2 – 8.4| = | -10.6 | = 10.6
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 136
Answer :
The distance between \(\frac{3}{4}\)and \(\frac{1}{8}\) on a number line = | \(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{1}{8}\) |
Rewrite \(\frac{3}{4}\) = \(\frac{3}{8}\)
= | \(\frac{3}{8}\) +\(\frac{1}{8}\) | =| \(\frac{4}{8}\) |= 2
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 39.
-1.85 and 7.36
Answer :
The distance between -1.85 and 7.36 on a number line = | – 1.85 – 7.36| = | – 9.21 |= 9.21
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 137
Answer :
-3\(\frac{2}{3}\)= – \(\frac{11}{3}\) =-3.6
-7 and -3.6
The distance between -7 and -3.6 on a number line = | -7 – (-3.6)| = | -7 + 3.6 | =| -3.4 |= 3.4
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 41.
2.491 and -3.065

Answer :
The distance between 2.491 and -3.065 on a number line = | 2.491 – (-3.065)| = | 2.491 + 3.065 | =|5.556  |= 5.556
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 138
Answer :
-2\(\frac{1}{2}\) =-\(\frac{5}{2}\) = – \(\frac{10}{4}\)
-5\(\frac{3}{4}\) = –\(\frac{23}{4}\)
The distance between – \(\frac{10}{4}\)  and –\(\frac{23}{4}\) a number line = | – \(\frac{10}{4}\)  – (-\(\frac{23}{4}\) )| = | – \(\frac{10}{4}\) + \(\frac{23}{4}\)  | = | – \(\frac{13}{4}\) |=  \(\frac{13}{4}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 139
Answer :
-1\(\frac{1}{3}\) = –\(\frac{4}{3}\) = –\(\frac{16}{12}\)
12\(\frac{7}{12}\) = \(\frac{151}{12}\)
The distance between –\(\frac{16}{12}\) and \(\frac{151}{12}\)  on a number line = | –\(\frac{16}{12}\) – \(\frac{151}{12}\) |=| –\(\frac{167}{12}\) |= \(\frac{167}{12}\)=13.91
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 44.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The number line shows the temperatures at 2:00 A.M. and 2:00 P.M. in the Gobi Desert. Find and interpret the distance between the points.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 140
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 141
Answer :
Temperature at 2 A.M inthe Gobi Desert= -13 °F
Temperature at 2 P.M in the Gobi Desert = 38 °F
Distance between the two points as per above figure = -13 °F – (-38 °F) = |-13 + 38 | = |25| = 25
Explanation
The Distance between two numbers is the absolute values of the difference of the numbers .

Question 45.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A new road that connects Uniontown to Springville is 4\(\frac{1}{3}\) miles long. What is the change in distance when using the new road instead of the dirt roads?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 142
Answer :
Distance between Springville to union town using L-shaped road = 2\(\frac{3}{8}\) + 3\(\frac{5}{6}\)
= \(\frac{19}{8}\) + \(\frac{23}{6}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{19}{8}\) = \(\frac{57}{24}\) and  \(\frac{23}{6}\) = \(\frac{92}{24}\)
= \(\frac{57}{24}\) + \(\frac{92}{24}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\)
Change in distance from old to new road = \(\frac{149}{24}\) – 4\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\) – \(\frac{13}{3}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{13}{3}\) = \(\frac{104}{24}\)
= \(\frac{149}{24}\) – \(\frac{104}{24}\)
= \(\frac{45}{24}\)
= \(\frac{15}{8}\)
Change in distance from old to new road = \(\frac{15}{8}\).

FINDING DISTANCE IN A COORDINATE PLANE
Find the distance between the points in a coordinate plane.

Question 46.
(-4, 7.8), (-4, -3.5)
Answer :
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2
d=√(-4−(-4))2+(-3.5−7.8)2
d=√(-4+4)-2+(-11.3)2
d=√(-11.3)2
d = 11.3
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 47.
(-2.63, 7), (1.85, 7)
Answer :
d=√(1.85−(-2.63))2+(7−7)2
d=√(1.85+2.63)2+(0)2
d=√(4.48)2
d=4.48
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 143
Answer :
–\(\frac{1}{2}\) = -0.5
\(\frac{5}{8}\) = 0.625
d=√(0.625−(-0.5))2+(-1−(-1))2
d=√(0.625+0.5)2+(-1+1)2
d=√(1.125)2+(0)2
d=1.125
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 49.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 144
Answer :
2\(\frac{1}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{3}\) = 2.3
-5\(\frac{2}{9}\) = –\(\frac{47}{9}\) = -5.2
d=√(6−6)2 + (-5.2−2.3)2
d=√(0)2 + (-7.5)2
d=7.5
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 50.
(-6.2, 1.4), (8.9, 1.4)
Answer :
d=√(8.9−(-6.2))2+(1.4−1.4)2
d=√(8.9+6.2)2+(0)2
d=√(15.1)2
d=15.1
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 51.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 146
Answer :
7\(\frac{1}{7}\) = \(\frac{50}{7}\)
1\(\frac{4}{5}\) = \(\frac{9}{5}\)=\(\frac{18}{10}\)
–\(\frac{9}{10}\)
d=√(\(\frac{50}{7}\)−\(\frac{50}{7}\))2+(-\(\frac{9}{10}\)−\(\frac{18}{10}\))2
d=√(0)2+(-\(\frac{27}{10}\))2
d = \(\frac{27}{10}\)
Explanation:
Given endpoints (x1,y1)(x1,y1) and (x2,y2)(x2,y2), the distance between two points is given by
d=√(x2−x1)2+(y2−y1)2

Question 52.
DIG DEEPER!
The figure shows the elevations of a submarine.
a. Find the vertical distance traveled by the submarine.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 146.1
b. Find the mean hourly vertical distance traveled by the submarine.
Answer a :
Elevation of submarine 3 hours ago = -725.6 ft
Elevation of submarine now = -314.9 ft
Vertical Distance traveled by submarine =  |-725.6 – (-314.9) | = |-725.6 + 314.9 |=|-410.7 | = 410.7
Answer b :
Vertical distance traveled in 3 hours = 410.7
Hourly vertical distance traveled by the submarine = 410.7 ÷ 3 = 136.9 feets

Question 53.
LOGIC
The bar graph shows how each month’s rainfall compares to the historical average.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 147
a. What is the difference in rainfall of the wettest month and the driest month?
Answer :
Rainfall of the wettest month = july = 2.36
Rainfall of the driest month =April = -1.67
The difference in rainfall of the wettest month and the driest month = 2.36 – (-1.67) = 2.36 +1.67 = 4.03

b. What do you know about the total amount of rainfall for the year?
Answer :
Rainfall in the Jan month = -0.45
Rainfall in the Feb month = -0.88
Rainfall in the Mar month = 0.94
Rainfall in the Apr month =-1.67
Rainfall in the May month =-0.96
Rainfall in the Jun month = 0.83
Rainfall in the Jul month = 2.36
Rainfall in the Aug month = 1.39
Rainfall in the Sep month = 0.35
Rainfall in the Oct month = -1.35
Rainfall in the Nov month = -0.90
Rainfall in the Dec month = -1.39
The total amount of rainfall for the year = Rainfall in the (Jan + Feb +mar + APR + may +jun +Jul +Aug +Sep +Oct +Nov +DEC ) months
= -0.45 + (-0.88) +0.94 + (-1.67) + (0.96) + 0.83 + 2.36 + 1.39 +0.35 +(-1.35)+ (-0.9) + (-1.39)
= 4.22

Question 54.
OPEN-ENDED
Write two different pairs of negative decimals, x and y that make the statement x – y = 0.6 true.
Answer :
Take x = -1 and y = -1.6
Explanation:
Take x = -1 and y = -1.6
x – y = -1 – (-1.6) = -1 +1.6 = 0.6
Then the above statement is proved .

REASONING
Tell whether the difference of the two numbers is always, sometimes, or never positive. Explain your reasoning.

Question 55.
two negative fractions
Answer :
Sometimes
Explanation :
Take x =- \(\frac{1}{3}\) and y =- \(\frac{2}{3}\)
x – y = – \(\frac{1}{3}\) – ( – \(\frac{2}{3}\)) = – \(\frac{1}{3}\) + \(\frac{2}{3}\)
– \(\frac{1}{3}\) – ( – \(\frac{2}{3}\)) = \(\frac{1}{3}\)

Question 56.
a positive decimal and a negative decimals
Answer :
Always
Because the operation – (-) becomes positive so adding of two numbers take place so difference will be the positive number .
Answer :
Take x = 5.6 and y = – 2.4
x – y =5.6 – ( -2.4) = 5.6 + 2.4 =8.0

Question 57.
STRUCTURE
Fill in the blanks to complete the decimals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 148
Answer :
5.54 – 9.51 = -3.61

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
A land surveyor uses a coordinate plane to draw a map of a park, where each unit represents 1 mile. The park is in the shape of a parallelogram with vertices (-2.5, 1.5), (-1.5, -2.25), (2.75, -2.25), and (1.75, 1.5). Find the area of the park.
Understand the problem.
You know the vertices of the parallelogram-shaped parkand that each unit represents 1 mile. You are asked to find the area of the park.
Make a plan.
Use a coordinate plane to draw a map of the park. Then find the height and base length of the park. Find the area by using the formula for the area of a parallelogram.
Solve and check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Connecting-Concepts-Question-1

Base of the parallelogram = 4.25
Height of the parallelogram = 3.75
Area of the parallelogram = base × height  = 4.25 × 3.75 = 15.9375 sq.units

Question 2.
The diagram shows the height requirement for driving a go-cart. You are 5\(\frac{1}{4}\) feet tall. Write and solve an inequality to represent how much taller you must be to drive a go-cart.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 149
Answer :
My Height = 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Height Required for driving a go-cart = 5\(\frac{1}{3}\)
Height more required for me for driving = 5\(\frac{1}{3}\) – 5\(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{16}{3}\) – \(\frac{21}{4}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{16}{3}\) =\(\frac{64}{12}\) and \(\frac{21}{4}\) = \(\frac{63}{12}\)
= \(\frac{64}{12}\) – \(\frac{63}{12}\)
= \(\frac{1}{12}\)
Height more required for me for driving == \(\frac{1}{12}\)
H ≥ \(\frac{1}{12}\)

Performance Task

Melting Matters

At the beginning of this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Freezing Solid.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 150

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 151

Graphic Organizers

You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term absolute value.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 152

Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study the concept.

  1. integers
  2. rational numbers
  3. adding integers
  4. Additive Inverse Property
  5. adding rational numbers
  6. subtracting integers
  7. subtracting rational numbers

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 153
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Chapter-Review-Graphic-Organizers-7

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 154

1.1 Rational Numbers (pp. 3-8)

Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
| 3 |
Answer :
Absolute value of 3 is 3
| 3 | = 3
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 2.
| -9 |
Answer :
Absolute value of -9 is 9
| -9 | = 9
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 155
Answer :
Absolute value of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 155is \(\frac{3}{4}\)
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 4.
| -5.2 |
Answer :
| -5.2 | = 5.2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 156
Answer :
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 156= \(\frac{6}{7}\)

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 6.
| 4.15 |
Answer :
| 4.15 | = 4.15

Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 157
Answer :
|-2| = 2
2 > -2
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 158
Answer :
|-\(\frac{1}{3}\)| = \(\frac{1}{3}\) = 0.33
|-\(\frac{5}{6}\)| =\(\frac{5}{6}\) = 0.3
0.33 > 0.3
|-\(\frac{1}{3}\)| > |-\(\frac{5}{6}\)|
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 159
Answer :
|1.7| = 1.7
-1.7   = -1.7
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 10.
Order Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 160 and −2 from least to greatest.
Answer :
|2.25| = 2.25
|-1.5| = 1.5
|2\(\frac{1}{2}\)| = |\(\frac{5}{2}\)| =\(\frac{5}{2}\) = 2.5
1\(\frac{1}{4}\)=\(\frac{5}{4}\) = 1.25
2.25, 1.5, 1.25, 2.5 and – 2
-2 < 1.25 < 1.5 < 2.25 < 2.5
Explanation:
All positive integers are greater than negative integers.
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 11.
Your friend is in Death Valley, California, at an elevation of −282 feet. You are near the Mississippi River in Illinois at an elevation of 279 feet. Who is closer to sea level?
Answer :
My friend is at Death Valley, California, at an elevation = −282 feet. = | -282 | =282 feet
I am at the Mississippi River in Illinois at an elevation = 279 feet. = | 279 |= 279 feet
Who is closer to sea level = 0 is 279 feet that means 279 > 282 feet
I am closer to sea level .

Question 12.
Give values for a and b so that a < b and | a | > | b |.
Answer :
Take a = -5 and b = 2
– 5 < 2
| a | = | -5 | = 5 and  | b | = | 2 | = 2
| 5 | > | 2 |
Hence proved a < b and | a | > | b |

Question 13.
The map shows the longitudes (in degrees) for Salvador, Brazil, and Nairobi, Kenya.Which city is closer to the Prime Meridian?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 160.1
Answer :
Longitudes of Salvador = -38.5108 (in degrees)
Distance of Longitudes of Salvador from prime meridian = | -38.5108| = 38.5108
Longitudes of Nairobi = 36.8167 (in degrees) = 36.8167
Distance of Longitudes of Nairobi from prime meridian = | 36.8167 | = 36.8167
Which is closer to prime meridian = | -38.5108| > | 36.8167 |
So, Longitudes of Nairobi from prime meridian is closer to prime meridian .

1.2 Adding Integers (pp. 9-16)

Question 14.
Write an addition expression represented by the number line. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 189

Find the sum. Use a number line to verify your answer.
Answer :
– 3 + 4 = 1
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding +2.The arrow ends at 1, showing the sum.
So,- 3 + 4 = 1

Question 15.
-16 + (-11)
Answer :
-16 + (-11)
=|-16 | +| -11 |
= 16 + 11
= -27
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 16.
-15 + 5
Answer :
-15 + 5
= |-15 | – |5 |
= 15 – 5
= -10  as |-15 | > |5 | so use negative sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 17.
100 + (-75)
Answer :
100 – 75
= |100 | – |-75 |
= 100 – 75
= 25  as |100 | > |-75 | so use positive sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 18.
-32 + (-2)
Answer :
-32 + (-2)
=|-32 | +| -2 |
= 32 + 2
= -34   (both the numbers are negative so use negative symbol in the sum)
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Answer :
-16 + (-11)
=|-16 | +| -11 |
= 16 + 11
= -27
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 19.
-2 + (-7) + 15
Answer :
-2 + (-7) + 15
=|-2 | +| -7 | + 15
= -9 + 15
= 6
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 20.
9 + (-14) + 3
= 9 + 3 +(-14)
=12 +(-14)
= |12 | – |-14 |
= 12 – 14
= 2  as |-14 | > |12 | so use negative sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 21.
During the first play of a football game, you lose 3 yards. You gain 7 yards during the second play. What is your total gain of yards for these two plays?
Answer :
First play of a foot ball game i lose 3 yards = -3 yards
Second play of a foot ball i gain 7 yards = + 7 yards
Total gain of yards for these two plays = -3 + 7 = 4

Question 22.
Write an addition expression using integers that equals -2. Use a number line to justify your answer.
Answer :
Take x = 3 and y = – 5
x + y
=3 +(-5)
= |3 | – |-5 |
= 3 – 5
= -2  as |-5 | > |3 | so use negative sign.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.2-Adding-Integers-Question-22
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent +3. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing adding -5.

Question 23.
Describe a real-life situation that uses the sum of the integers -8 and 12.
Answer :
During the first play of a basketball game, you lose 8 yards. You gain 12 yards during the second play. What is your total loss of yards for these two plays.
First play of a Basketball ball game i lose 8 yards = -8 yards
Second play of a basket ball i gain 12 yards = + 12 yards
Total loss of yards for these two plays = 8 + ( -12 ) = -4

1.3 Adding Rational Numbers (pp. 17–22)

Find the sum. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 162
Answer :
\(\frac{9}{10}\) +(-\(\frac{4}{5}\))
Rewrite –\(\frac{4}{5}\) = –\(\frac{8}{10}\)
= |\(\frac{9}{10}\) | – |-\(\frac{8}{10}\) |
=  \(\frac{9}{10}\) – \(\frac{8}{10}\)
= 1  as |\(\frac{9}{10}\) | > |-\(\frac{4}{5}\) | so use positive sign.
\(\frac{9}{10}\) +(-\(\frac{4}{5}\)) = 1
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 163
Answer :
-4\(\frac{5}{9}\) = –\(\frac{41}{9}\)
=-\(\frac{41}{9}\)+\(\frac{8}{9}\)
=|-\(\frac{41}{9}\) | – |\(\frac{8}{9}\)|
=\(\frac{41}{9}\) –\(\frac{8}{9}\)
= – \(\frac{33}{9}\)
–\(\frac{41}{9}\)+\(\frac{8}{9}\)= = – \(\frac{33}{9}\)
|-\(\frac{41}{9}\) | > |\(\frac{8}{9}\)| so, use negative sign
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 26.
-1.6 + (-2.4)
Answer :
-1.6 + (-2.4)
=|-1.6 | +| -2.4 |
= 1.6 + 2.4
= -4.0
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 27.
Find the sum of Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 190. Explain each step.
Answer :
– 4 + 6 \(\frac{2}{5}\) + (-2.7)
Convert the fraction form into decimal form
6 \(\frac{2}{5}\)= \(\frac{32}{5}\) =6.4
– 4 + 6.4 + (-2.7)
add negative numbers , we get,
-4 – 2.7 + 6.4
= -6.7 +6.4
= |-6.7 | – |6.4 |
= 6.7 – 6.4
= -0.3  as |-6.7 | > |6.4 | so use negative sign.
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 28.
You open a new bank account. The table shows the activity of your account for the first month. Positive numbers represent deposits and negative numbers represent withdrawals. What is your balance (in dollars) in the account at the end of the first month?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 191
Answer :
Deposit on 3/5 = 100
Withdrawal on 3/12 = 12.25
Deposit on 3/16 = 25.82
Deposit on 3/21 = 14 .95
Withdrawal on 3/ 29 = 18.56
Total Balance in the end of the month = Total deposits – Total withdrawals = ( 100 + 25.82 + 14.95 ) -( 12.25 + 18.56 ) = 140.77 – 30.81 = 109.96

1.4 Subtracting Integers (pp. 23–28)

Find the difference. Use a number line to verify your answer.

Question 29.
8 – 18
Answer :
8 – 18 = -10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-29
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 8 to represent 8. Then draw an arrow 18 units to the left representing subtract 18 or adding -18.
So, 8 – 18 = -10

Question 30.
-16 – (-5)
Answer :
-16 – (-5) = -16 +5 = -11
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-30

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to -16 to represent -16. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the right representing subtract -5 or adding +5.
So, -16 – (-5) = -11

Question 31.
-18 – 7
Answer :
-18 – 7 = -25
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-31
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -18 to represent -18. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing subtracting 7 or,adding -7.
The arrow ends at -25 showing the difference.

So,-18 – 7 = – 25

Question 32.
-12 – (-27)
Answer :
-12 – (-27) =-12 + 27 = 15
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-1.4-Subtracting-Integers-Question-32

Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -12 to represent -12. Then draw an arrow 27 units to the right representing subtracting -27 or,adding 27.
The arrow ends at 15 showing the difference.
So, -12 – (-27) = 15

Question 33.
Your score on a game show is -300. You answer the final question incorrectly, so you lose 400 points. What is your final score?
Answer :
My score on game show = -300
Final question score = -400
Total score = – 300 + (-400 ) = -300 – 400 = -700

Question 34.
Oxygen has a boiling point of -183°C and a melting point of -219°C. What is the temperature difference of the melting point and the boiling point?
Answer :
Boiling point = -183°C
Melting point = -219°C
Temperature difference of the melting point and the boiling point = – 183 – (-219) = – 183 + 219 = 36 °C

Question 35.
In one month, you earn $16 for mowing the lawn, $15 for baby sitting, and $20 for allowance. You spend $12 at the movie theater. How much more money do you need to buy a $45 video game?
Answer :
Money earned in mowing the lawn =$16
Money earned for baby sitting = $15
Money earned for allowance = $20
Money spend on Movie Theater = $12
Total Money = Total Money earned – Money spend = (16+15+20) – (12 ) = 51 – 12 = 39
Cost price of video game = $45
More money required to buy video game = cost price of video game – Total Money with me = 45 – 39 = 6$

Question 36.
Write a subtraction expression using integers that equals -6.
Answer :
x – y = -6
Take x = -3 and y =3
x – y =-3 – 3 = -6

Question 37.
Write two negative integers whose difference is positive.
Answer :
Take x= -5 and y = -10
x – y = – 5 – (-10) = – 5 + 10 = 5
difference is positive

1.5 Subtracting Rational Numbers (pp. 29–36)

Find the difference. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 38.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 192
Answer :
–\(\frac{5}{12}\) – \(\frac{3}{10}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{5}{12}\) = \(\frac{25}{60}\) and \(\frac{3}{10}\)= \(\frac{18}{60}\)
= –\(\frac{25}{60}\) – \(\frac{18}{60}\)
= –\(\frac{43}{60}\) (as both have same signs)

Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 193
Answer :
3\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
= \(\frac{15}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{15}{4}\)  = \(\frac{30}{8}\)
= \(\frac{30}{8}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\)
Add opposite of  – \(\frac{30}{8}\)
= \(\frac{30}{8}\) + (- \(\frac{7}{8}\))
Add
= \(\frac{23}{8}\)
3\(\frac{3}{4}\) – \(\frac{7}{8}\) = \(\frac{23}{8}\) .

Question 40.
3.8 – (-7.45)
Answer :
3.8 – (-7.45)
Add opposite of -7.45
3.8 + 7.45 = 11.25

Question 41.
Find the distance between -3.71 and -2.59 on a number line.
Answer :
The distance between -3.71 and -2.59 on a number line = | – 3.71 – (-2.59)| = | – 3.71 + 2.59 | =| -1.12 |= 1.12
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 42.
A turtle is 20\(\frac{5}{6}\) a pond. It dives to a depth of 32\(\frac{1}{4}\) inches. What is the change in the turtle’s position?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 167
Answer :
The turtle is at  = 20\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Turtle drives to a depth = 32\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Change in the turtle’s position = 20\(\frac{5}{6}\) – 32\(\frac{1}{4}\)
= \(\frac{125}{6}\) – \(\frac{129}{4}\)
Rewrite \(\frac{125}{6}\) = \(\frac{250}{12}\) and \(\frac{129}{4}\) =\(\frac{387}{12}\)
= \(\frac{250}{12}\) – \(\frac{387}{12}\)
= –\(\frac{137}{12}\)
Change in the turtle’s position = –\(\frac{137}{12}\)

Question 43.
The lowest temperature ever recorded on Earth was -89.2°C at Soviet Vostok Station in Antarctica. The highest temperature ever recorded was 56.7°C at Greenland Ranch in California. What is the difference between the highest and lowest recorded temperatures?
Answer :
The lowest temperature ever recorded on Earth = -89.2°C
The highest temperature ever recorded = 56.7°C
The difference between the highest and lowest recorded temperatures = 56.7 – ( -89.2 ) = 56.7 + 89.2 = 145.9°C

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Practice Test

Practice Test

Find the absolute value.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 168
Answer :
|-\(\frac{4}{5}\)| = \(\frac{4}{5}\)
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 2.
| 6.43 |
Answer :
| 6.43 | = 6.43
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Question 3.
| – 22 |
Answer :
| – 22 | = 22
Explanation :
The absolute value or modulus of a real number x, denoted |x|, is the non-negative value of x without regard to its sign. Namely, |x| = x  and |-x| = x .

Copy and complete the statement using <, >, or =.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 169
Answer :
| – 8 | = 8
4 < 8
Explanation :

Explanation:
The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.
So write the numbers which are bigger with negative symbol are smaller arrange all the negative numbers in this order and then follows 0 and positive numbers from least to greatest .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 170
Answer :
| – 7 | = 7
7 > -12
Explanation :
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers. The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 171
Answer :
| 3 | = 3
-7 < 3
Explanation:
All negative numbers are lesser than positive numbers. The Negative Numbers which are near to the 0 are greater.With negative numbers, we have to remember that as the digit gets bigger, the number gets smaller.

Add or subtract. Write fractions in simplest form.

Question 7.
-6 + (-11)
Answer :
-6 + (-11)
=|-6 | +| -11 |
= 6 + 11
= -7
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 8.
2 – (-9)
Answer :
2 – (-9)
= 2 + 9    add opposite of -9
= 11         add
2 – (-9) = 11

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 172
Answer :
–\(\frac{4}{9}\)+ (- \(\frac{23}{18}\))
Rewrite –\(\frac{4}{9}\) = –\(\frac{8}{18}\)
= |-\(\frac{8}{18}\) | + |- \(\frac{23}{18}\) |
= \(\frac{8}{18}\) + \(\frac{23}{18}\)
= –\(\frac{31}{18}\)  as both signs are negative so use negative sign in the difference
–\(\frac{4}{9}\)+ (- \(\frac{23}{18}\)) = –\(\frac{31}{18}\)
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 173
Answer :
\(\frac{17}{12}\) – (- \(\frac{1}{8}\) )
Rewrite –\(\frac{17}{12}\)  = –\(\frac{34}{24}\) and –\(\frac{1}{8}\) =- \(\frac{3}{24}\)
= \(\frac{34}{24}\) +  \(\frac{3}{24}\)
= \(\frac{31}{24}\)  as | \(\frac{17}{12}\) | > | \(\frac{1}{8}\) | so use positive sign.
Explanation :
Subtract lesser absolute value from the greater absolute value . Then use the sign of the greater absolute value .

Question 11.
9.2 + (-2.8)
Answer :
9.2 + (-2.8)           add opposite of 2.8
= 9.2 – 2.8
= 6.4

Question 12.
2.86 – 12.1
Answer :
2.86 + (-12.1)          add opposite of 12.1
= 9.24

Question 13.
Write an addition expression and write a subtraction expression represented by the number line. Then evaluate the expressions.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 174
Answer :
3 + (-4) = -1
Explanation :
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 3 to represent 3. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the left representing adding -4.
So, 3 + (-4) = -1

Question 14.
The table shows your scores, relative to par, for nine holes of golf. What is your total score for the nine holes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 175
Answer :
Total score of nine holes = score of ( 1st +2nd +3rd + 4th + 5th + 6th + 7th + 8th + 9 th ) holes
= 1 + (-2) + (-1) + 0 + (-1) + 3 + (-1) + (-3) + 1 = -3

Question 15.
The elevation of a fish is 27 feet. The fish descends 32 feet, and then rises 14 feet. What is its new elevation?
Answer :
Elevation of a fish = 27 feet
Fish descends = -32 feet
Fish Rises = 14 feet.
New elevation = 27 – 32 + 14 = 41 – 32 = 9 feet

Question 16.
The table shows the rainfall (in inches) for three months compared to the yearly average. Is the total rainfall for the three-month period greater than or less than the yearly average? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 176
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 177
Answer :
Rainfall in October = -0.86
Rainfall in November = 2.56
Rainfall in December = -1.24
Total rainfall for the three-month period = rainfall in October +rainfall in November + rainfall in December = -0.86+2.56+ (-1.24) = 0.86+2.56-1.24 = 2.18
Average Rainfall of Yearly = Total rainfall for the three-month period ÷ 3 months = 2.18 ÷ 3 = 0.726
2.18 >0.726
The total rainfall for the three-month period greater than the yearly average .

Question 17.
Bank Account A has $750.92, and Bank Account B has $675.44. Account A changes by –$216.38, and Account B changes by – $168.49. Which account has the greater balance? Explain.
Answer :
Final balance of A > Final balance of B = $534.54 > $534.54
Explanation :
Bank Account of A = $750.92
Account A changes = -$216.83
Final balance of A= $750.92 – $216.83 = $534.54
Bank Account of B = $675.44
Account A changes = -$168.49
Final balance of B = $675.44  – $168.49 = $506.45
Therefore Final balance of A > Final balance of B = $534.54 > $534.54

Question 18.
On January 1, you recorded the lowest temperature as 23°F and the highest temperature as 6°C. A formula for converting from degrees Fahrenheit F to degrees Celsius C is Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 194 What is the temperature range (in degrees Celsius) for January 1?
Answer :
Lowest temperature = 23°F
Highest temperature = 6°C.
Converting lowest temperature into Celsius C  = \(\frac{5}{9}\) 23°F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= \(\frac{115}{9}\) °F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= – \(\frac{45}{9}\) = -5
Lowest temperature = 23°F = -5°C

Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
A football team gains 2 yards on the first play, loses 5 yards on the second play, loses 3 yards on the third play, and gains 4 yards on the fourth play. What is the team’s total gain or loss?
A. a gain of 14 yards
B. a gain of 2 yards
C. a loss of 2 yards
D. a loss of 14 yards

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 178
Answer :
Option c – a loss of 2 yards
Explanation :
Gain on First play = 2 yards
Loss on Second play = -5 yards
Loss on third play = -3 yards
Gain on fourth play = 4
Total Gain = 2 + 4 = 6
Total Loss  = -5 + (-3) = – 8
Total loss > total gain
|-8| > |6|
So overall there is a loss
Team Loss = 6 + (- 8 ) = – 2 loss

Question 2.
Which expression is not equal to 0?
F. 5 – 5
G. -7 + 7
H. 6 – (-6)
I. -8 – (-8)
Answer :
Option F = 5 – 5 = 0
Option G= -7 + 7 = 0
Option H = -6 – (-6) = 6 + 6 = 12
Option I = -8 – (-8) = -8 + 8 = 0
Explanation :
The sum of a number and its addictive inverse , or opposite , is 0 .
Example  a + (-a) = 0

Question 3.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 179
A. -4.5
B. -0.5
C. 0.5
D. 4.5
Answer :
Option C
Explanation :
|-2 – (-2.5 )| = |-2 + 2.5|= |0.5|  = 0.5

Question 4.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 179.1
17 – (-8)
Answer :
17 – (-8) = 17 + 8 = 25

Question 5.
What is the distance between the two numbers on the number line?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 180
Answer :
Option H = 1\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Rewrite –\(\frac{7}{4}\)  =-\(\frac{14}{8}\)
The distance between –\(\frac{7}{4}\)  and \(\frac{3}{8}\)  on a number line = | –\(\frac{14}{8}\) – \(\frac{3}{8}\) | =| –\(\frac{11}{8}\)  |= 1\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 6.
What is the value of the expression when a = 8, b = 3, and c = 6?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 181
A. -65
B. -17
C. 17
D. 65
Answer :
Option C
Explanation :
Take a = 8, b = 3, and c = 6
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 181= | 8×8 – 2(8)(6) + 5(3) | = | 64 – 96 + 15| =| 79 – 96 | = | -17 | = 17

Question 7.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 182
Answer :
-9.74 + (- 2.23)
=|-9.74 | +| -2.23 |
= 9.74 + 2.23
= -11.97   (both the numbers are negative so use negative symbol in the sum)
Explanation:
Add Absolute values and then use the common sign in the sum .

Question 8.
Four friends are playing a game using the spinner shown. Each friend starts with a score of 0 and then spins four times. When you spin blue, you add the number to your score. When you spin red, you subtract the number from your score. The highest score after four spins wins. Each friend’s spins are shown. Which spins belong to the winner?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 183
F. 6, 7, 7, 6
G. -4, -4, 7, -5
H. 6, -5, -4, 7
I. -5, 6, -5, 6
Answer :
F. 6+7-7-6 = 0
G. -4+(-4)+ 7-(-5) = 8-7+5 = 4
H. 6+(-5)- (-4) +7= 6 -5+4+7 =12
I. -5-6+ (-5)- 6 = -22

Question 9.
What number belongs in the box to make the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 184
Answer :
Option A = \(\frac{3}{17}\)
Explanation :
3\(\frac{1}{2}\) ÷ 5\(\frac{2}{3}\) = \(\frac{7}{2}\) ÷ \(\frac{17}{3}\)
= \(\frac{7}{2}\) × \(\frac{3}{17}\)
The missing term is \(\frac{3}{17}\)

Question 10.
What is the value of the expression?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185
F. -346
G. 0.59
H. 5.9
I. 59
Answer :
Option I
Explanation :
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185= 2.95 ÷ 0.05 = 295 ÷ 5 = 59

Question 11.
You leave school and walk 1.237 miles west. Your friend leaves school and walks 0.56 mile east. How far apart are you and your friend?
A. 0.677 mile
B. 0.69272 mile
C. 1.293 miles
D. 1.797 miles
Answer :
Distance between me and my friend = | 1.237 – 0.56 | = 0.677
Explanation:
The distance between any two numbers on a number line is the absolute value of the difference of the number .
| p – q | = | q – p |

Question 12.
Which property does the equation represent?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 185.1
F. Commutative Property of Addition
G. Associative Property of Addition
H. Additive Inverse Property
I. Addition Property of Zero
Answer :
Option G. -Associative Property of Addition
Explanation:
Associative Property : Take any three rational numbers a, b and c. Firstly add a and b and then add c to the sum. (a + b) + c. Now again add b and c and then a to the sum, a + (b + c). Is (a + b) + c and a + (b + c) same? Yes and this is how associative property works. It states that you can add or multiply numbers regardless of how they are grouped.

Question 13.
The values of which two points have the greatest sum?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 186
A. R and S
B. R and U
C. S and T
D. T and U
Answer :
Option B. – R and U is having greatest sum
R = -2.9
S = -0.3
T = 0.6
U =1.1
A. R and S = -2.9 + (-0.3) = -3.2
B. R and U = -2.9 + 1.1 = 4.0
C. S and T = -0.3 +0.6 = 0.3
D. T and U = 0.6 + 1.1 = 1.7

Question 14.
Consider the number line shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers 187
Part A
Use the number line to explain how to add -2 and -3.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Cumulative-Practice-Question-14-A
-2 + (-3) = -2 – 3 = -5
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to -3 to represent -3. Then draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing subtract 3 or adding -3.The arrows end at -5 showing the sum .
So, -2 + (-3) = -5
Part B
Use the number line to explain how to subtract 5 from 2.
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-1-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Adding-and-Subtracting-Rational-Numbers-Cumulative-Practice-Question-14-B
2 – 5 = -3
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 2 to represent 2. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the left representing subtract 5 or adding -5. The arrow ending at-3 showing the difference .
So, 2 – 5 = -3

Question 15.
Which expression represents a negative value?
F. 2 – | -7 + 3 |
G. | -12 + 9 |
H. | 5 | + | 11 |
I. | 8 – 14 |
Answer :
Option F = -2
Explanation:
F. 2 – | -7 + 3 | = 2 – 4 = – 2
G. | -12 + 9 | = | -3| = 3
H. | 5 | + | 11 | = 5 + 11 = 16
I. | 8 – 14 | = | -6 | = 6

Final Verdict:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 1 Adding and Subtracting Rational Numbers helps you in preparing the time table. With the help of the above given material you can know your mistakes and resolve your mistakes. Stay tuned to bigideasmathanswers.com to get the problems and solutions. We wish all the candidates best of luck for their preparation. Stay tuned to our site and get all the updates.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Enhance your skills with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. The mathematics of the elementary and middle school curriculum is not trivial. Starting from infancy and continuing throughout the preschool period, they develop a basic skills, concepts, and misconceptions about numbers and mathematics. Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 from here.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Test yourself by solving the problems from Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. Make maths as your favorite subject by learning the simple tricks from Bigideas Math Answers Grade K Ch 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20. Tap the below links to learn the chapter according to the list of the topics.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Model and Count 20

Lesson: 2 Count and Write 20

Lesson: 3 Count to Find How Many

Lesson: 4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Lesson: 5 Order Numbers to 20

Lesson: 6 Compare Numbers to 20

Chapter: 9 – Count and Compare Numbers to 20

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Vocabulary

Directions:
Count the fruit in each group. Write each number. Is the number of apples equal to the number of bananas? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 v 3

Lesson 9.1 Model and Count 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place 20 linking cubes on the carpet. Slide the cubes to the ten frames.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.1 Model and Count 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3


Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.1 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Model and Count 20 Homework & Practice 9.1.5

Lesson 9.2 Count and Write 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use linking cubes to show how many ants are in the story Ants at the Picnic. Write how many ants are in the story.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count the grasshoppers. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow...

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the animals in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life-

Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the insects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the insects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.2 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Count and Write 20 Homework & Practice 9.2.5

Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many

Explore and Grow

Directions:
You have 14 crayons in your box. Your friend has 11 crayons in his box. Use linking cubes to show the crayons in each box.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many..

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the group that has the given number of objects.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle any group that has the given number of objects.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
You have 20 coins in your piggy bank. You drop and break your piggy bank. Did you find all of your coins? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Think and Grow- Modeling Real Life

Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the group that has the given number of objects.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.2

Directions:
3 and 4 Circle any group that has the given number of objects. 5 You have 20 toys in your piñata. You break your piñata. Did you find all of your toys? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 9
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.3 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.3 Count to Find How Many-Count to Find How Many Homework & Practice 9.3.5

Lesson 9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:

  • Place 11 linking cubes on the ten frames. Trace the number.
  • Place another cube on the ten frames. Write the number to tell how many.
  • Place 1 more cube on the ten frames. Write the number to tell how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-Lesson 9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Think and Grow-9.4-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 3 Count forward from 11and stop at 16. Write the numbers you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Apply and Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Your teacher labels the class cubbies and stops at 7. Count forward to finish labeling the cubbies. Write the numbers you count.
  • Label the first cubby with a number from 1 to 16. Count forward from your number to finish labeling the cubbies. Write the numbers you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.2

Directions:
3 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 4 Count forward from 14 and stop at 19. Write the numbers you count. 5 Your teacher is numbering tags and stops at 12. Count forward to finish numbering the tags. Write the numbers you count. 6 Write a number from 1 to 16 on the first tag. Count forward from your number to finish numbering the tags. Write the numbers you count.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.4 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.4-Count Forward from Any Number to 20 Homework & Practice 9.4.6

Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place 11 linking cubes on the ten frames. Place more cubes on the ten frames as you count forward to 20. Trace or write the missing numbers.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5 Order Numbers to 20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice.2

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Line up the students for lunch by writing the numbers in order. Circle the student who is first. Underline the student who is last.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5

Directions:
1 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.1

Directions:
2 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Say each number. Write each number. Then write the numbers in order. 3 Line up the train cars by writing the numbers in order. Circle the train car that is first. Underline the train car that is last.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.5 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.5-Order Numbers to 20-Order Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.5.3

Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place linking cubes on the ten frames to show the numbers. Which number is greater than the other number? Which number is less than the other number?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Write each number.
  • Is the number of green dots equal to the number of yellow dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.
  • Compare the numbers of red dots and blue dots. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • Compare the numbers of yellow dots and red dots. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number. 1 Is the number of blue bouncy balls equal to the number of green bouncy balls? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Compare Numbers to 20-Apply and Grow-Practice3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You have 14 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is 1 more than 12. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • You have 18 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is greater than 15 and less than 17. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 6
Answer:
I am having more balls than my Friend has in both the cases.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6

Directions:
1 Count the dots in each set of ten frames. Write each number. Is the number of blue dots equal to the number of red dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.1

Directions:
2 Count the bouncy balls in each group. Write each number. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Count the dots on each domino. Write each number. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. 4 You have 13 balls. Your friend has a number of balls that is 1 more than 19. Draw the balls. Write the numbers. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 9.6 10
Answer:
I am having less Balls than my friend has.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Compare Numbers to 20 Homework & Practice 9.6.4.

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Performance Task

Directions: 1 Use the clues to fond the number of fruit in each crate. Write each number.

  • The number of apples is more than 16 but less than 18.
  • The number of bananas is more than 15 but less than 17.
  • The number of oranges is more than 18 but less than 20.
  • The number of pears is 1 more than the number of oranges.
  • The number of pineapples is 1 less than the number of oranges.
  • Write the numbers in order.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 -Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Performance Task.1

Number Boss
Directions:
Each player flips a card and places it on the page. Compare the numbers. The player with the greater number takes both cards. If the numbers are equal, flip the cards again. The player with the greater number takes all the cards. Repeat until all cards have been used.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 2

Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Count the paste jars. Color the boxes to show how many. 2 Count the insects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

9.1 Model and Count 20

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 Chapter Practice-9.1 Model and Count 20.1

9.2 Count and Write 20

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.2 Count and Write 20.2

Directions:
3 Circle any group that has the given number of objects. 4 You have 20 erasers in your box. You drop your box. Did you find all of your erasers? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 5 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count.

9.3 Count to Find How Many

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.3 Count to Find How Many.3

Question 4.
Big
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter Practice-9.3 Count to Find How Many.4

9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter-9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20-Count to Find How Many.5

Directions:
6 Count forward from the number in the blue circle to the number in the red circle. Write the numbers you count. 7 Line up the students for recess by writing the numbers in order. Circle the student who is first. Underline the student who is last.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -Chapter-9.4 Count Forward from Any Number to 20-Count to Find How Many.6

9.5 Order Numbers to 20

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-Lesson 9.6 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 -9.5 Order Numbers to 20.7

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number. 8 Is the number of yellow dots equal to the number of blue dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 9 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 10 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

9.6 Compare Numbers to 20

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.8

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 chp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-9-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-20-9.6 Compare Numbers to 20.10

Final Words

We believe that the details provided in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 have brought a smile to your face. The Answer Key for Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapter 9 Count and Compare Numbers to 20 is prepared by the subject experts. Bookmark our website i.e, bigideasmathanswers.com to get the latest information about the Big Ideas Math Grade K Answers Chapters that is from 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11

Improve your performance skills by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Book Grade 1 Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. You can acquire the free pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data. We have presented the Grade 1 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data in pdf format so that you can practice online or offline mode.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data

Take the given pdf as a reference and score maximum marks in the exams. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Ch 11 Represent and Interpret Data helps you built self-confidence in yourself. Unlimited practice will make you master maths. In this chapter we will discuss the topics like Sort and Organize Data, Read and Interpret Picture Graphs, Bar Graphs, etc. It is necessary to practice with the Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data to score maximum marks in the exams.

Lesson: 1 Sort and Organize Data

Lesson: 2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Lesson: 3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Lesson: 4 Represent Data

Lesson: 5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Performance Task

Represent and Interpret Data Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
category
mark

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to match.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Vocabulary-Define-It
Explanation:
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Picture graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Lesson 11.1 Sort and Organize Data

Explore and Grow

Explain how you can sort the objects.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Here we can classify the given data in two tabular forms .
In First tabular column we can classify it based on favorite item.
we have pencils – 3 ; Crayons – 3 and Markers – 3
In Second tabular column we can classify it based on favorite Color.
we have yellow color – 3 items , Green color – 3 items and Blue color – 3 items.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
As per the above given figure we can see the number of stickers in the given figure
we observe
The number of umbrellas – 4
The number of bucket – 5
The number of Crab – 6

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Lesson-11.1-Sort-and-Organize-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of balls in the given figure
we observe
The number of balls Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Foot balls – 5 + 3 = 8
The number of Soccer ball – 5
The number of Basket ball – 3

Question 3.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 6
There are 7 tigers. The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same.
There are 7 foxes. There are 3 raccoons.
Answer:
The numbers of foxes and raccoons are the same and There are 7 foxes are true statements as per the given information in the tabular column .
Explanation:
There are 7 tigers statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 10 tigers
There are 3 raccoons statement is false because as per the tabular column there are 7 raccoons

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 7
How many sunny days are there? ________ days
Is the number of cloudy days greater than or less than the number of rainy days?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunny days =  5 + 3 = 8
Number of cloudy days = 4
Number of rainy days = 3
Therefore Number of cloudy days are greater than Number of rainy days.
4 > 3 .
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 8
How many sunflowers are there? ___________ sunflowers
Is the number of roses greater than or less than the number of daisies?
greater than           less than
Answer:
Number of sunflowers = 2
Number of roses = 5 + 1 = 6
Number of daisies =5 + 2 = 7
The Number of roses are lesser than number of daises
6 > 7
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Sort and Organize Data Practice 11.1

Question 1.
Complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Sort-Organize-Data-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
As per the above given figure we can see the number of Insects
we observe
The number of Insects in Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
The number of Caterpillars =5 + 2 = 7
The number of Flies = 5 + 3 = 8
The number of lady bugs = 2

Question 2.
MP Reasoning
Which sentences are correct?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 10
9 students like princess movies.
4 students like superhero movies.
Princess movies are the most favorite
Answer:
9 students like princess movies is correct
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct
Explanation:
As per the given tally chart of Favorite movie we notice
The number of students like super heroes movies= 5
The number of students like Princess movies = 5 + 4 = 9
The number of students like Mystery movies = 5
Princess movies are the most favorite is correct because more number of students likes this movie

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 11
How many students chose fruit? ________ students
Is the number of students who chose yogurt greater than or less than the number of students who chose cereal?
greater than               less than
Answer:
Number of students chose fruit = 4 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt = 5 students.
Number of students chose Cereal = 5 + 1 = 6 students.
Number of students chose Yogurt are less than Number of students chose Cereal
5 < 6

Review & Refresh

Compare.

Question 4.
45 ○ 55
Answer:
45 < 55

Question 5.
74 ○ 47
Answer:
74 > 47

Question 6.
22 ○ 22
Answer:
22 = 22

Lesson 11.2 Read and Interpret Picture Graphs

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 12
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 13
Each ○ = 1 counter.
Answer:
The First picture is the Tally chart of Yellow and Red color counters.
Tally chart marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
In this tally chart we see Red color shows group of five counters and another 1 counter total = 5 + 1 = 6 counters.
Yellow color shows four counters with four vertical lines.
The second graph is the Picture graph. A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
In this each counter is marked as ○. In this picture chart we notice the red color counter has 6 counters marked with 6 ○.
In the yellow color we have 4 counters marked with four ○ .
In both the charts the representation is different from each other .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 14
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student.
How many students chose museum? _________
Which trip is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 16
Answer:
As we have 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the museum row that means 8 students chose the museum trip
as Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 = 1 student
Number of students chose museum = 8
Number of students chose Zoo = 6
Number of students chose play = 2
The trip which is least favorite is play as only two students chooses it .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 17
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
How many students chose pasta? _________
How many students chose soup? _________
Which lunch is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 19
Answer:
As per the above picture graph we know Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 18 = 1 student.
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Explanation:
The least favorite lunch is soup because less students chooses it compared to pasta and Taco
Only 3 students chooses soup so it is least Favorite.

Question 3.
Writing
In Exercise 2. how do you know which lunch is the most favorite?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students chose pasta = 5
Number of students chose soup = 3
Number of students chose Taco = 8
Taco is the favorite lunch
Explanation:
Taco lunch is chose by 8 number of students compared to soup and pasta 5 and 3 respectively.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 20

Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose rides greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose animals?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses Rides = 5
Number of students chooses Animals = 2
Number of students chooses Games = 4
Number of students chose Rides are greater than number of students chose animals .
5 > 2 .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 22
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose frog greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose bear?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 21 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses frog = 3
Number of students chooses Bear = 6
3 < 6.
3 lesser than 6 so Number of students who chose frog are lesser than number of students chose bear.

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Practice 11.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 23
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
How many students chose summer? ________
How many students chose fall? _________
Which season is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 25
Answer:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Winter is the least favorite among other seasons.
Explanation:
Number of students chose spring = 3
Number of students chooses summer = 7
Number of students chooses Fall = 4
Number of students chooses Winter = 1.
Among all 4 seasons only winter season is chosen by only one student compared to other seasons .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the least when looking at a picture graph?

________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Winter
Explanation:
Less number of Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24 means less number of students chosen so Winter is least favorite has it has only one Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 24.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 26
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Is the number of students who chose water greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose juice?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice .
Explanation:
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27 = 1 student.
Number of students chooses water =4
Number of students chooses juice = 4
As both juice and water have equal number students that is 4 so both are equal .
Number of students chooses water = Number of students chooses Juice = 4

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
31 + 40 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-4
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 1 + 0 = 1
Then add the values in tens place 3 + 4 = 7.
Therefore sum = 71
Lesson 11.3 Read and Interpret Bar Graphs

Question 5.
62 + 20 = ___________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-and-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Practice-11.2-Review-Refresh-Question-5
Explanation:
Step 1: Write the numbers one below the other as per the places of the digits.
Step 2 :Start adding from the ones digit. Write the sum under the ones digit.If the sum of the ones digit is greater than 9, write the ones digit of the sum under the ones and carry forward its tens digit to the tens column.
Step 3: Add the tens digits.(If there was a carry forward digit, add it along)

Numbers are arranged as shown in above picture . then add the numbers in one place 2 + 0 = 2
Then add the values in tens place 6 + 2 = 8.
Therefore sum = 82

Explore and Grow

How are the graphs similar? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 28

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 30
Answer:
Picture Graph – A picture graph, or pictograph, is a graph used to display information that uses images or symbols to represent data.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done with Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 27
Bar Graph – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Here as per the given diagram the representation is done in strips with different colors .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 31
How many students chose coins? ______________
Which object is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 32
Answer:
Number of students chooses coins = 6
The object which s least favorite is stickers
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Rocks = 4
Number of students chooses Stickers = 2
Number of students chooses Coins = 6
Compared with Rocks and Coins the stickers are chosen less that is only 2 students .
The object which s least favorite is stickers

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 33
How many students chose card games?
____________

How many students chose board games?
____________

Which activity is the most favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 34
Answer:
Number of students chooses card games = 5
Number of students chooses board games =6
The most favorite activity is Board games as it chosen by 6 number of students .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses card games = 5 (as bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses board games =6 (as bar is marked up to 6)
Number of students chooses puzzles = 2 (as bar is marked up to 2)
Compared to card games and puzzles , the board games are chosen by more students that is 6 number of students.
So , The most favorite activity is Board games

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the activities in Exercise 2 from the most favorite to the least favorite.

_____________, _____________, _____________
Answer:
Board games (6) , Card games (5) and Puzzles (2).

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 35

Is the number of students who chose firefighter greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose doctor?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students chooses than doctor .
Explanation:
Number of students chooses firefighter = 5 (bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Police Officer = 7 (bar is marked up to 7)
Number of students chooses Doctor =4 (bar is marked up to 4)
Compare the students of firefighter and Doctor = 5 > 4
So Number of students chooses firefighter are greater than number of students who chooses doctor .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 36
Is the number of students who chose bike greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students who chose kite?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite.
Explanation:
Number of students chooses bike = 6
Number of students chooses kite = 6
Both have same number of students.
So Number of students chooses bike are equal to the number of students who chooses kite = 6

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Practice 11.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 37
How many students chose reading? _____________
How many students chose kickball? _____________
Which activity is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 38
Answer:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3
Number of students chooses Computer = 5
Least Favorite activity is Reading
Explanation:
Number of students chooses Reading = 3 (the bar is marked up to 3)
Number of students chooses Computer = 5 (the bar is marked up to 5)
Number of students chooses Kickball = 6 (the bar is marked up to 6)
Among three activities the Reading is chosen by only 3 students .
Compared to other two activities it is less chosen by  the students .

Question 2.
Writing
How do you know which category has the most when looking at a bar graph?

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________

___________________________________________
Answer:
The category which has the most is Kick ball as it is marked up to 6 bars.
longer the bar marking the most favorite is the activity .

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Use the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 39
Is the number of pairs of shorts greater than, less than, or equal to the number of shirts?
greater than         less than             equal to
Answer:
Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.
Explanation:
Number of Shirts = 5 (as the bar is marked up to 5 )
Number of Shorts = 4 (as the bar is marked up to 4 )
Number of Shirts are greater than Number of shirts = 5 > 4.
So, Number of pairs of shorts is lesser than the number of the shirts.

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
9 + 1 + 7 = ____________
Answer:
9+ 1 + 7 = 17

Question 5.
6 + 3 + 6 = ___________
Answer:
6 + 3 + 6 =15

Lesson 11.4 Represent Data

Explore and Grow

Use your color tiles to complete the tally chart and the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 40
Each ○ = 1 color tile.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Explore-Grow
Number of Red Tiles = 4
Number of Blue Tiles = 6
Number of Yellow Tiles = 2
Bar chart – A bar graph can be defined as a chart or a graphical representation of data, quantities or numbers using bars or strips.
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different colors .
The number of students who chooses Blue color = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses pink color = 5 (group of 5 )
The number of students who chooses Yellow color = 2
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of students as per the color .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 42
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 43
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Farm Animals .
The number of students who chooses Pig = 4
The number of students who chooses Cow = 6 ( group of 5 + 1 )
The number of students who chooses Horse = 5 ( group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15  = 1 student with respective Farm Animals and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 44
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Sports .
The number of students who chooses Swimming = 4
The number of students who chooses Karate = 2
The number of students who chooses Soccer = 5 (group of 5 )
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with Sports and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You ask 10 students whether they are right-handed or left-handed. 2 are left-handed. The rest are right-handed. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 45
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 46
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 47 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
Number of students = 10
Number of students left handed = 2
Number of students Right handed = 10 – 2 = 8
Represent Eight Students with Eight Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 15 in the above figure .

Show and Grow

Question 4.
You ask 11 students whether they like the swings or the slide. 5 like the swings. The rest like the slide. Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 48
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Lesson-11.4-Represent-Data-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Number of students = 11
Number of students like swing = 5
Number of students like slide = 11 – 5 = 6
Mark the slide up to 6 with yellow color as bars.

Represent Data Practice 11.4

Question 1.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 50
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-1
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 3 different Winter Activities. .
The number of students who chooses Sledding = 6 (Group of 5 + 1)
The number of students who chooses Skating = 3
The number of students who chooses Snowman = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of students with different colors .

Question 2.
Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 52
Each ○ = 1 balloon.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-2
Explanation:
We should complete the Picture graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers students who chooses the 2 different Balloons .
The number of students who chooses Blue balloon = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of students who chooses Red balloon = 2
The same is represented in the Picture chart representing the Each ○ = 1 balloon with respective Balloons color and marking the respective number of students in the picture graph

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 8 students whether they buy or pack their lunches. 6 students buy. The rest pack. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 53
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 54
Each Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 = 1 student.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Practice-11.4-Question-3
Explanation:
Total Number of students = 8
Number of students who buys lunch = 6
Number of students who packs their lunches = 8 – 6 = 2
Now mark 2 Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 55 in the pack category as 2 students pack there lunches in the picture graph

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new equation.

Question 4.
2 + 6 = _____________
_____________ + _____________ = _____________
Answer:
2 + 6 = 8
6 + 2 = 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Question 5.
_____________ = 8 + 1
_____________ = _____________ + _____________
Answer:
9 = 8 + 1
9 = 1 + 8
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same.

Lesson 11.5 Solve Problems Involving Data

Explore and Grow

Complete the bar graph to show 19 toys in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 56

Write a question about your graph. Have your partner answer the question.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Total Number of Toys = 19
Number of Stuffed animals = 6
Number of Cars = 8
Number of Dinosaurs = 5
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars  and marking the bars with respective number of Toys with different colors .
My Partner answered the question with different numbers. but the overall number of toys = 19 .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 57
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 58 = 1 student.
How many more students like butterflies than birds? _________ students
How many students were asked? _________ students
Answer:
Number of students like bats = 4
Number of students like butterflies = 7
Number of students like birds = 6
Number of more students like butterflies than birds = 7 – 6 = 1 students
Number of students asked = total number of students
Total number of students = Number of students like( Bats + Butterflies + Birds ) = 4 + 7 + 6=17.
Therefore Number of students asked = 17.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 59
Each Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 60 = 1 student.
How many fewer students chose circle than square? _________ fewer students
How many students chose square or triangle?_________ students
Answer:
Number of students chooses square = 7
Number of students chooses Circle = 5
Number of students chooses Triangle = 7
Number of Fewer students chose circle than square = 7 – 5 = 2 students
Number of students chooses square = Number of students chooses Triangle = 7

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 9 students to name their favorite rainy-day activity. Complete the bar graph to show how many chose reading. Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 61
Answer:
Number of students asked favorite rainy-day activity = 9
Number of students likes Games = 3
Number of students likes Painting = 1
Number of students likes Reading = total number of students – games – painting =9 – 3 – 1
= 9 – 4 = 9 – 5
Number of students likes Reading = 5
Explanation:
Now the number of students like reading is marked with bars up to 5 with Yellow color as shown in the below figure .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Lesson-11.5-Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Show-Grow-Question-3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 62
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more hits did Newton hit than Descartes? _________ More Hits
Answer:
Number of Hits by me = 4
Number of hits by Newton = 5
Number of hits by Descartes = 2
Number of more hits by Newton than Descartes = 5 – 2 = 3

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Write and answer a question using the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 63
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 64
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Who Laps more runs than me ? ________ runs.
Answer:
Number of lap runs by me = 2
Number of lap runs by Descartes = 5 ( group of 5)
Number of lap runs by Newton = 1.
Descartes lap runs more than me
Number of lap runs more than me = 5 – 2 = 3.
Therefore number of runs more than me by Descartes = 3

Solve Problems Involving Data Practice 11.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 65
How many more dogs are there than penguins? _________ more dogs
How many bears and dogs are there in all? _________ bears and dogs
Answer:
Number of Bears = 7
Number of Penguins = 2
Number of Dogs = 5
Number of dogs more than penguins = 5 – 2 = 3
3 more dogs are there than penguins
Number of Bears and Dogs = 7 + 5 = 12

Question 2.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 19 students to name their favorite fruit. Complete the tally chart to show how many chose apples. Explain how you know.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 66
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Total Number students = 19
Number of students like Banana = 5+2 = 7
Number of students like Orange = 2
Number of students like apple = 19 – 7 – 2 = 19 – 9 = 10
Explanation:
Now mark 10 apples in the above tally graph with 2 sets of group of 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-2

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 67
________________________________________

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many more students like potato than carrot ? _________ more Potatoes .
Explanation:
Number of students like carrots = 3
Number of Students like Potatoes = 6
Number of more students like potatoes than carrots = 6 – 3 = 3
Therefore 3 more students like potatoes than carrot .

Review & Refresh

Question 4.
51 + 40 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-4

Question 5.
76 + 3 = __________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret- Solve-Problems-Involving-Data-Practice-11.5-Question-5

Represent and Interpret Data Performance Task

Question 1.
Ask your classmates about their eye colors. Use your data to complete the tally chart.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 68
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-1
Total number of class mates = 15
Number of class mates with black eye color = 9
Number of class mates with brown eye color = 4
Number of class mates with blue eye color = 2
All the above data is marked in the tally graph as shown in above figure .

Question 2.
Use your tally chart to complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 69
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
Describe two ways to tell how many students you asked.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Number of students with black eyes = 9
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
The Total Number of students asked = Number of students with (black eyes + brown eyes + blue eyes)
= 9 + 4 = 2 = 15
By counting the number of bars will also say the total number of students .

Question 4.
Write and answer a question about your graphs.

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
Is the number of Students with brown greater than, less than, or equal to the number of students with blue eyes?
greater than         less than             equal to
Explanation:
Number of students with brown eyes = 4
Number of students with blue eyes = 2
Therefore Number of students with brown eyes are greater than number of students with blue eyes.

Represent and Interpret Data Chapter Practice

Sort and Organize Data Homework & Practice 11.1

Complete the tally chart.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-1
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of Cars
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of red cars = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of white cars = 3 (represented with three vertical lines)
Number of blue cars = 5 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 71
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Chapter-Practice-Sort-Organize-Data-Homework-Practice-11.1-Question-2
Explanation:
Explanation:
The above chart is represented in tally chart of Number of pets
Tally chart – Tally marks are a quick way of keeping track of numbers in groups of five. One vertical line is made for each of the first four numbers; the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four.
Number of Cats = 4 (represented with four vertical lines)
Number of Dogs = 2 (represented with two vertical lines)
Number of Fishes = 8 (represented with four vertical lines and the fifth number is represented by a diagonal line across the previous four and three vertical lines)

Read and Interpret Picture Graphs Homework & Practice 11.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 72
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 73 = 1 student.
How many students chose science? ____________
Which subject is the least favorite? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 74
Answer:
Numbers of Students Who likes Art = 5
Number of students who likes Math = 6
Number of students who likes Science = 4
Among the three subjects the less favorite subject is Science .
As it has less number of students .

Read and Interpret Bar Graphs Homework & Practice 11.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 75
How many students chose turtle? __________
Which is the most favorite sea creature? Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 76
Answer:
Number of students choose turtle = 5
Number of students choose jellyfish = 2
Number of students choose Shark = 6
Among the three sea creature shark was chosen by more number of student compared with other two .
Therefore Most Favorite sea creature is Shark .

Represent Data Homework & Practice 11.4

Question 5.
Complete the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Read-Interpret-Picture-Graphs-Homework-Practice-11.2-Question-3
Explanation:
We should complete the Bar graph using Tally graph
In tally graph it represent the numbers Beads of 3 different colors.
The number of Beads of Blue color = 5 ( group of 5)
The number of Beads of Red color = 2
The number of Beads of  Yellow color = 4
The same is represented in the Bar chart representing the bars with respective colors and marking the respective number of Beads as per the color .

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You ask 13 students whether they like volleyball or basketball. 7 like volleyball. The rest like basketball. Complete the picture graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 78
Each Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 = 1 student.
Answer:
Total Number of Students = 13
Number of Students who likes Volley ball = 7
Number of students who likes Basketball = 13 – 7 = 6
Now Number of students who likes basketball is represented with 7 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 79 in the above figure.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-Data-Homework-Practice-11.4-Question-6

Solve Problems Involving Data Homework & Practice 11.5

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 80
How many fewer students chose green than purple? ____________ fewer students
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like purple = 5 + 4 =9
Number of Students who likes Green = 5
Number of Students who likes Orange = 2
Number of Fewer Students choose Green than purple = 9 – 5 = 4
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (purple + green +orange )
= 9 + 5 + 2 = 16
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 16

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Write and answer a question using the bar graph.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 81

________________________________________

________________________________________
Answer:
How many students were asked? ____________ students
Answer:
Number of Students who like Computer = 4
Number of Students who likes Stuffed Animals = 3
Number of Students who likes Train = 6
Number of Students were asked =Numbers of Students who likes (Computer + Stuffed Animals + Train )
= 4 + 3 + 6 = 13
Therefore Number of Students were asked = 13

Represent and Interpret Data Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Match each number on the left with a number that is 10 more.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 82
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-1

Question 2.
Complete.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 83
56 + 6 = __________
Answer:
56 + 6 = 62
60 + 2 = 62
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-2

Question 3.
Order from shortest to longest.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 84
____________, ____________, ____________
Answer:
Yellow , Blue , Red
Explanation:
Red is the longest line
Blue is second longest line
Yellow is third line which is less than both

Question 4.
Shade the circle next to the number that tells how many horns there are.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 85
○ 3
○ 10
○ 6
○ 19
Answer:
Number of horns = 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-4

Question 5.
Shade the circle next to the sum.
12 + 5 = ____________
○ 15
○ 17
○ 16
○ 7
Answer:
12+5=17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-5

Question 6.
There are 85 pages in a book. You read 10 of them. How many pages are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 86
○ 95
○ 85
○ 75
○ 80
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Total Number of pages in a book = 85
Number of pages read by me = 10
Remaining number pages left to read = 85 – 10 = 75.

Question 7.
Is each sentence true?
52 is greater than 36.       Yes         No
100 < 90                          Yes         No
75 is less than 57.            Yes         No
89 > 81                            Yes         No
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-7

Question 8.
You collect 22 cans for a food drive. Your friend collects 36. How many cans do you and your friend collect in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 87

______________ cans
Answer:
Total Number of Cans collected by me = 22
Total Number of cans collected by my friend = 36
Total Number of cans collected by me and my friend = 22 + 36 = 58

Question 9.
Measure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 88
about ___________ color tiles
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-9
we need to know the measure of the given figure
From the above figure it is clearly marked that it measures 13 cms long .

Question 10.
Shade the circles next to the choices that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 89
○ 50 – 30
○ 5 tens – 2 tens
○ 50 – 20
○ 3 tens – 2 tens
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-11-Represent-and-Interpret-Represent-and-Interpret-Data-Cumulative-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
We notice in the given figure we have 5 tens in that 2 tens were crossed that means 2 tens were subtracted so remaining number of tens = 5 tens – 2 tens .

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 90
How many students chose ham? ___________

Which sandwich is the least favorite?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 91
Answer:
As per the given bar graph we observe
Number of students choose ham  = 2
Numbers of students choose turkey = 4
Number of students choose Cheese = 4
Number of students choose turkey = Number of students choose Cheese = 4
So only ham is left with 2 less than turkey and cheese
Therefore ham sandwich is the least favorite

Question 12.
Use each card once to write an addition equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data 92
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
2 + 3 =5
3 + 2 =5
Explanation:
Whatever may be the order of the addends the sum always will be the same .

Conclusion:

Hence Download a Free pdf of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 11 Represent and Interpret Data from the direct links. Also, test yourself by solving the questions given at the end of the chapter. Along with this chapter, you can also find other Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters. Stay with us to get the latest updates regarding the Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Answer Key Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5

Students of Elementary School can get the best study material to score good marks in the exams. Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 Pdf from this page. Improve your math skills Big Ideas Math Book K Grade Answer Key Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers 0 to 5 and solve the problems. Students of Kth Grade can understand the concepts in-depth with the help of the Big Ideas Math Answer Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5

Teachers and parents can understand the graph of the student’s performance by making them practice from Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Solution Key Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5. All the answers seen on this page are prepared by the math experts. You can perform well in practice tests, Assessment tests, and chapter tests by using Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5. Make use of the below links and try to complete your homework with the time.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Model and Count 1 and 2

Lesson: 2 Understand and Write 1 and 2

Lesson: 3 Model and Count 3 and 4

Lesson: 4 Understand and Write 3 and 4

Lesson: 5 Model and Count 5

Lesson: 6 Understand and Write 5

Lesson: 7 The Concept of Zero

Lesson: 8 Count and Order Numbers to 5

Chapter 1 – Count and Write Numbers 0 to 5

Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 2

Answer:
The ducks are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
In the pond, there are 2 ducks.
we have to color the ducks.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1-1

Chapter 1 Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 3
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 5
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 6

Lesson 1.1 Model and Count 1 and 2

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 7

Directions:

  • Place 1 counter on the blue sky. Decide which frame shows 1. Slide the counter to the frame.
  • Place 2 counters on the green grass. Decide which frame shows 2. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 8
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 8.1

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 8.2

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-2

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 9

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-3
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 10

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 11

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 12

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-6

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 13

Answer:
a.The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.

b.The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-7

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 1 and 2 Homework & Practice 1.1

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 14

Answer:
a.The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.

Answer:
b.The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 15

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-9

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 16

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-10
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 17

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-11

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 18

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-12

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 19

Answer:
a.The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.

Answer:
b.The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.1-13

Directions:
3 and 4. Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 1.2 Understand and Write 1 and 2

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 20
Directions:
Use counters to show how many dogs and how many fish are in the story My Pets. Write how many dogs and how many fish are in the story.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 21

Directions:
Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 22

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 23

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 24

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 25

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 26

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 27

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 28

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 29

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-8

Directions:
1 – 8 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 30

Answer:
Lizards = one.
birds = two.
tortoise = two.
snakes = two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The lizards are one.
birds = two.
tortoise = two.
snakes = two.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-9

Directions: Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 1 and 2 Homework & Practice 1.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 31

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 32

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-11

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 33

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-12

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 34

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-13

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the linking cubes. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 35

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-14

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 36

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-15

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 37

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-16

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 38

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-17

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 39

Answer:
snails = two.
tortoise = two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
snails = two
tortoise = two.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.2-18

Directions:
5 – 8 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 9 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 1.3 Model and Count 3 and 4

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 40
Directions:

  • Place 4 counters on top of the water. Decide which frame shows 4. Slide the counters to the frame.
  • Place 3 counters at the bottom of the bowl. Decide which frame shows 3. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 41

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 42

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-1

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 43

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-1

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 44

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 45

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-3

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 46

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 47

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-5

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 48

Answer:
b.The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-6

Answer:
a.The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 3 and 4 Homework & Practice 1.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 49

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-7

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 50

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 51

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 52

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-9

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 53

Answer:
a.The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.

Answer:
b.The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.3-10

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 1.4 Understand and Write 3 and 4

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 54

Directions:
Use counters to show how many trees and how many birds are in the story We Go Camping. Write how many trees and how many birds are in the story.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 55

Directions: Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 57

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 58

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 59

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 60

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 61

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 62

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-6

Directions:
1 – 6 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 63

Answer:
a.The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
b.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
c.The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
d.The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-7

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 3 and 4 Homework & Practice 1.4

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 64

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 65

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-9

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 66

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-10

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 67

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-11

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the linking cubes. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 68

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-12

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 69

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-13

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 70

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-14

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 71

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-15

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 72

Answer:
a.The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
b.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
c.The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.4-16

Directions:
5 – 8 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 9 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 1.5 Model and Count 5

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 73

Directions:
Place 5 counters on the blanket. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 74
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 74.1

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-16

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 74.2

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-17

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 75

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-18

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 76

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-19

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 77

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-020

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 78

Answer:
a.The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.

Answer:
b.The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-021

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 5 Homework & Practice 1.5

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 78.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 79

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-022

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 80

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-023

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 81

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-024

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 82

Answer:
b.The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.

Answer:
a.The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.5-025

Directions:
3 Count the watermelon slices. Color the boxes to show how many. 4 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 1.6 Understand and Write 5

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 83
Directions:
Use counters to show how many turtles are in the story. Write how many turtles are in the story.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 84
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 84.1

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-1

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 84.2

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-2

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 85

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 86

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 87

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are three objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 88

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-6

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 89

Answer:
a.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
b.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
c.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
d.The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-8

Directions: Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 5 Homework & Practice 1.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 90

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-9

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 91

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-10

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 92

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-11

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 93

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-12

Directions: 1 – 4 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 94

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-13

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 95

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-14

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 96

Answer:
a.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
b.The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Answer:
c.The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-15

Directions:
5 and 6 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 7 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 1.7 The Concept of Zero

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 97

Answer:
The box is empty.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 0.
so we have to fill the color for 0 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.6-16

Directions: The box is empty. Show the number of toys in the box. Write the number on a box flap.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 98

Answer:
a.The objects are 0.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 0.
so we have to fill the color for 0 boxes.

Answer:
1.a.The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.

Answer:
1.b. The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-1

Directions:

  • Count the leaves on the bottom branch. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the sheep in each pen. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 99

Answer:
The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 100

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-3

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 101

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 102

Answer:
The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-5

Directions
1 – 4 Count the fireflies. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 103

Answer:
a.The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
b.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
c.The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
d.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-6

Directions: Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

The Concept of Zero Homework & Practice 1.7

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 104

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 105

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-7

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 106

Answer:
The objects are 0.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 0.
so we have to fill the color for 0 boxes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 106

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the flowers. Say the number. Write the number. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 107

Answer:
The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-8

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 108

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-9

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 109

Answer:
a.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
b.The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.7-10

Directions: 3 and 4 Count the fireflies. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 1.8 Count and Order Numbers to 5

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 110

Directions: Trace the numbers. Then make linking cube trains that are 0 to 5 cubes long. Order the trains to match the numbers 0 to 5.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 111

Answer:
b.The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
c.The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
e.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
1, 2, 3, 4, and 5

Explanation:
The number in order are one, two, three, four, and five.
given that write the numbers in order.
1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-2

Directions:

  • Count the objects in each ve frame. Say the number. Write the number.
  • Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 1.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 112

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 113

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 114

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 115

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-6

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 116

Answer:
The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-7

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 117

Answer:
1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Explanation:
the numbers in order are
one, two, three, four and five.
1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-8

Directions: 1 – 5 Count the objects. Say the number. 6 Write the number. Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 1.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 118

Answer:
a.Yellow = 3
blue = 1
orange = 4
green = 5
pink = 2

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are different colors of stars.

Yellow = 3
blue = 1
orange = 4
green = 5
pink = 2

Answer:
b.five
four
three
two
one

Explanation:
In the above-question, given that
write the numbers in reverse order.
five
four
three
two
one
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-9

Directions:

  • Count the stars in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.
  • Write the numbers in reverse order. Start with the number 5.

Count and Order Numbers to 5 Homework & Practice 1.8

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 119

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 120

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-11

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 121

Answer:
The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are one object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-12

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 122

Answer:
one
two
three

Explanation:
Given that,
write the numbers in order. start with the number 1.
one
two
three
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-13

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the birds. Say the number. Write the number. 4 Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 1.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 123

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 124

Answer:
orange flag=3
yellow flag = 2
green flag = 4
blue flag = 5
pink flag = 1

Explanation:
In the above question given that,
count the flags in the picture.
orange flag=3
yellow flag = 2
green flag = 4
blue flag = 5
pink flag = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-14

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 125

Answer:
pink flag = 1
yellow flag = 2
orange flag = 3
green flag = 4
blue flag = 5

Explanation:
Given that write the numbers in order.
pink flag = 1
yellow flag = 2
orange flag = 3
green flag = 4
blue flag = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-15

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 126

Answer:
blue flag = 5
green flag = 4
orange flag = 3
yellow flag = 2
pink flag = 1

Explanation:
Given that write the numbers in reverse order.
blue flag = 5
green flag = 4
orange flag = 3
yellow flag = 2
pink flag = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-16

Directions:
5 Count the flags in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.
6 Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 1.
7 Write the numbers in reverse order. Start with the number 5.

Count and Write Numbers 0 to 5 Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 127

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 128

Answer:
a.The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
b.The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
c.The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
d.The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it

Answer:
e.The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-17

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 129

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-18

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 130

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-19

Directions:
1 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number. Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 0. 2 A chicken lays five eggs. Draw to show how many eggs. 3 Show how many eggs in another way.

Count and Write Numbers 0 to 5 Activity

Number Land
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 131
Directions: Put the Subitizing Cards 0–5 into a pile. Start at Newton. Take turns drawing a card and moving your piece to the matching number. Repeat this process until you have gone around the board and back to Newton.

Count and Write Numbers 0 to 5 Chapter Practice 1

1.1 Model and Count 1 and 2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 132

Answer:
The objects are 2.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 2.
so we have to fill the color for 2 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-20

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 133

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given object is 1.
so we have to fill the color for 1 box.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-21

1.2 Understand and Write 1 and 2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 134

Answer:
The object is one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-22

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 135

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-23

Directions: 1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

1.3 Model and Count 3 and 4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 136

Answer:
The objects are 3.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 3.
so we have to fill the color for 3 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-24

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 137

Answer:
The objects are 4.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 4.
so we have to fill the color for 4 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-25

1.4 Understand and Write 3 and 4

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 138

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-26

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 139

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-27

Directions: 5 and 6 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 7 and 8 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

1.5 Model and Count 5

Question 9
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 140

Answer:
The objects are 5.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
The given objects are 5.
so we have to fill the color for 5 boxes.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-28

1.6 Understand and Write 5

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 141

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-29

1.7 The Concept of Zero

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 142

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-30

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 143

Answer:
The objects are zero.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 0 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-31

Directions: 9 Count the ears of corn. Color the boxes to show how many. 10 Count the beavers. Say the number. Write the number. 11 and 12 Count the owls. Say the number. Write the number.

1.8 Count and Order Numbers to 5

Directions:
13 – 17
Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 18 Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 1.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 144

Answer:
The objects are one.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there is 1 object.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-32

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 145

Answer:
The objects are five.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 5 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-33

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 146

Answer:
The objects are four.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 4 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-35

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 147

Answer:
The objects are two.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 2 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-36

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 148

Answer:
The objects are three.

Explanation:
In the above-given figure,
there are 3 objects.
so, we have to count it and we have to write it.

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-37

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 149

Answer:
The numbers in order are 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Explanation:
Given that 1.
write the numbers in order.
start with the number 1.
1
2
3
4
5.
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-1-Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5-1.8-38

Conclusion:

We wish the above article i.e, Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 Answer Key is helpful for all elementary school students. Thus, the students who are unable to make their children finish homework in time can make use of the BIM Grade K Chapter 1 Count and Write Numbers Numbers 0 to 5 Solution Key pdf. Keep in touch with us to get the Solution Key of all Bigideas Math Grade K chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13

Practice is the only way to get complete knowledge. So, solving every different problem available on Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles will lead you to get a grip on complete concepts. As we have given simple tricks and techniques on Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Solution Key, students can easily learn maths. All the answers and explanations will lead the students to promote to high grades without any struggle. Refer to Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Grade 4 Answer Key PDF for quick support. Become a pro in maths using BIM Grade 4 Answer Key.

Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Math Book Answer Key

Make your preparation easy and clear all the exams without hesitation by preparing with Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Answers Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles PDF. Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Solution Key is prepared by highly experienced math experts. Great research is made before the preparation of Big Ideas Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Answer Key PDF. Students can get the best preparation by referring to our BIM Grade 4 Chapter 13 material.

Lesson: 1 Points, Lines and Rays

Lesson: 2 Identify and Draw Angles

Lesson: 3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Lesson: 4 Understand Degrees

Lesson: 5 Find Angle Measures

Lesson: 6 Measure and Draw Angles

Lesson: 7 Add Angle Measures

Lesson: 8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Performance Task

Lesson 13.1 Points, Lines and Rays

Explore and Grow

Use a straightedge to connect the dots A through Z. Describe the picture you make. How many points do you connect? How many line segments do you make?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 1
Answer:
Points connected are 25.
Line segments used are 25.

Structure
Draw your own connect-the-dots picture on another sheet of paper. Have your partner use a straightedge to connect the dots to make your picture. How many points did your partner connect? How many line segments did your partner make?
Answer:
Yes, he used line segments to connect the dots. He connected 20 dots and 19 line segments.

Think and Grow: Points, Lines, Line Segments, and Rays

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 2

Example
Draw and label \(\overline{L M}\)
\(\overline{L M}\) is a ___
Another name for \(\overline{L M}\) is ___
Answer:
Line segments are represented by a single overbar with no arrowheads over the letters representing the two endpoints.
The line segment Represented as \(\overline{L M}\)

Example
Draw and label \(\overrightarrow{S T}\)
\(\overrightarrow{S T}\) is a ___
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3

Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{S T}\)
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-and-Draw-Lines-and-Angles-ST

Ray \(\overrightarrow{S T}\)

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.1

Answer:
It is a line segment vu. Line segments are represented by a single overbar with no arrowheads over the letters representing the two endpoints.
It is represented as \(\overline{V U}\)

Question 2.
Draw and label two points P and Q on the line shown.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.2
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 3.3

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 4
Answer:
It is called as point B.
A point in geometry is a location. It has no size i.e. no width, no length and no depth. A point is shown by a dot and named in capital letter.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 5
Answer:
It is called as \(\overrightarrow{C D}\). The symbol of a ray is →.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 6

Draw and label the figure.
Answer:

Question 7.
\(\overline{G H}\)
Answer:
\(\overline{G H}\) means a line segment. It is said as line segment GH.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-7

 

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7
Answer:
It is a ray. It is said as rayBig Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-8

Question 9.
\(\overrightarrow{L M}\)
Answer:
It means a ray. It is said as ray LM.

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles- Lesson 13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Show-Grow-Question-9

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 8

Question 10.
Name a ray.
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{A D}\).

Question 11.
Name a point that lies on two lines.
Answer:  E .

Question 12.
Name two different line segments.
Answer: DE and EF.
\(\overline{D E}\) and \(\overline{E F}\)

Question 13.
Logic
Your friend says he can draw two line segments between two points, and may be even more. His drawing is shown. Explain why this is not possible.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 9
Answer:
Only one line can be drawn passing through any two points but a number of lines can be drawn through a point.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
There are direct ferry routes between each pair of cities on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible ferry routes. How many ferry routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 10
Start at Poole. Draw a line segment from Poole to each of the other cities. Repeat this process until a route is shown between each city.
You draw __ ferry routes in all.
Answer:
3 Possible routes.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
There are direct flights between each pair of cities on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible flight routes. How many flights routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 11
Answer:
Total 10 routes were found.

Question 15.
Which road signs contain a figure that looks like a ray?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 12
Answer:
One way road sign look like a ray.

Question 16.
Which letters in the banner can be made by drawing line segments? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 13 ,
Answer:
Letters – W,E,L,M AND E.

Points, Lines and Rays Homework & Practice 13.1

Name the figure shown. Write how to say the name.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 14
Answer:
It is said as Line segment EF and represented as \(\overline{E F}\).

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 15
Answer:
It is said as ray GH and represented as \(\overrightarrow{G H}\).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 16
Answer:
It is said as line JK and represented as Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 7

Draw and label the figure.

Question 4.
two points L and M on the line shown
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 17
Answer:

Question 5.
\(\overrightarrow{N O}\)
Answer:

It is represented as \(\overrightarrow{N O}\).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Points-Lines-Rays—Homework-Practice-13.1-Question-6.jpg

Use the figure.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 19

Question 7.
Name a line segment.
___CE____

Question 8.
Name two different rays.
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{C D}\) and \(\overrightarrow{E F}\).

Question 9.
Name two different lines
Answer
\(\overline{D B}\)and \(\overline{A E}\).

Question 10.
Writing
Explain the difference between a line and a line segment.

Line-segment

1. It has two end points.

2. The length of a line-segment is definite. So, it can be measured.

3. The symbol of a line-segment is _____

Line

1. There are no end points in a line.

2. There are no end points. So, length of a line cannot be measured.

3. The symbol of a line is ↔

Question 11.
Structure
Name the figure in as many ways as possible.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 20
Answer:
\(\overline{X Y}\),\(\overline{Y Z}\) and \(\overline{X Z}\).
\(\overrightarrow{Y Z }\)
LINE – XZ

Question 12.
Structure
Draw and label a figure that has four points, two rays, and one line segment.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Points-Lines-Rays—Homework-Practice-13.1 -Question-12

\(\overrightarrow{R S }\) and \(\overrightarrow{Q S}\).
\(\overline{P S}\)

DIG DEEPER!
Write whether the statement is true or false. If false, explain.

Question 13.
A line segment is part of a line. _______
Answer: Yes

Question 14.
A ray is part of a line segment. ____
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Line-segment- It has two end points. But where as Ray has a starting point but no other end point.

Question 15.
There are an infinite number of points on a line. ___
Answer: Yes

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
There are direct helicopter flights between each pair of resorts on the map. Draw line segments to represent all of the possible flight routes. How many flight routes did you draw in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 20.1
Answer:
Total possible flight routes are 6 routes.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
Which road signs contain a figure that looks like it is made of only line segments?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 21
Answer:
Road signs – +,T and Y are made of line segments.

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 22
Answer:
0.15 < 0.16.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 23
Answer:
2.4 < 2.42

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 24
Answer:
6.90 = 6.9

Lesson 13.2 Identify and Draw Angles

Explore and Grow

Draw the hands of the clock to represent the given time.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 25
For each clock, describe the angle that is formed by the minute hand and the hour hand.
Answer:

Reasoning
Explain how line segments, rays, and angles can be related.

Think and Grow: Angles

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 26

Angles can be either right, straight, acute, or obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 27

Example
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 28
Write three names for the angle and classify it.
Three names for the angle are
___, ____ and ____.
The angle opens ___ a right angle and less than a straight line.
So, it is an __ angle.
Answer:
Three names for the angle are actue, obtuse and right angles.
The angle opens more than a right angle and less than a straight line.
So, it is an obtuse angle.

Show and Grow

write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 29
Answer:
It is a right angle called as P.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 30
Answer:
It is a straight angle. It can be represented as XYZ, ZYX.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 31
Answer:
It is a obtuse angle. It is represented as Q.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 32
Answer:
It is a actue angle. It is represented as MNO or ONM.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 33
Answer:
It is a straight angle. It can be represented as RST, TSR.

Draw and label the angle.

Question 7.
∠XYZ is right

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.2-Identify-Draw-Angles-Question-7.jpg

Question 8.
∠JKL is straight.
Answer:

Use the figure. Use three letters to name each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 34

Question 9.
Name an acute angle.
Answer:
∠CFD

Question 10.
Name two different obtuse angles.
Answer:
∠CFG and ∠ACF.

Question 11.
Name two different straight angles.
Answer:
∠BDF and ∠CDE.

Question 12.
Name three different right angles.
Answer:
∠CFD , ∠CFG and ∠BDF.

Question 13.
Structure
Draw to complete each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 35
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Which angle of the skateboard ramp is acute?
You need to find an angle that is open less than a right angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 36
Angle A opens __more than __ a right angle and less than a straight line.
Angle B _is equal__ a right angle.
Angle C opens _less than__ a right angle.
Angle _∠C__ is an acute angle.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
Use three letters to name an angle of the wind turbine that is obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 37
Answer:
∠VTU.

Question 15.
Trace and label two right angles, two obtuse angles, and two acute angles in the painting.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 38
Answer:

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
How many different angles are in the window? Name all of the different angles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 39
Answer:
Right angles – ∠AFC , ∠BFD , ∠CFE
Obtuse angles – ∠AFD and ∠BFE.
Acute angles – ∠AFB, ∠BFC , ∠CFD and ∠DFE.
Straight angles – ∠AFE.

Identify and Draw Angles Homework & Practice 13.2

Write a name for the angle and classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 40
Answer:
∠O is straight angle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 41
Answer:
∠TUV is a right angle as TU is perpendicular to UV .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 42
Answer:
∠XYZ is a obtuse angle as, we can see clearly angle formed is more than 90 degrees.

Draw and label the angle.

Question 4.
∠ABC is obtuse.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Homework-Practice-13.2- Question-4

Question 5.
∠MNO is acute.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Homework-Practice-13.2- Question-5

Use the figure. Use three letters to name each angle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 43

Question 6.
Name an acute angle.
Answer: ∠BFC

Question 7.
Name a straight angle.
Answer: ∠DEF

Question 8.
Name two different right angles.
Answer: ∠DEA and ∠DEG.

Question 9.
Name three different obtuse angles
Answer: ∠EFJ and ∠EFC.

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 44
Answer:
The above figure contains ∠JKL a angle.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Can you make a straight angle using an acute angle and an obtuse angle that share a common ray? Draw a picture to support your answer.
Answer:
Yes
Explanation:
The total sum of a straight angle =180.
As per the figure,
The Obtuse angle = 120 degrees.
The acute angle = 60 degrees.
Therefore The straight angle = Obtuse angle + Acute angle.
= 120 + 60
= 180 degrees.

Question 12.
Structure
Write a capital letter that has more than two right angles.
Answer: B

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Use three letters to name the angles of the flag of the Czech Republic that are obtuse.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 45
Answer:
∠AFC and ∠EFC are obtuse angles.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
Horses see an object with binocular both eyes at the same time using vision. Classify the angle that describes the horse’s binocular vision.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 46
Answer:
The angle that formed in binocular vision is Acute angle.

Review & Refresh

Question 15.
Write 1\(\frac{7}{12}\) as a fraction.
Answer:

(1 x 12 ) + 7 =19

Question 16.
Write \(\frac{9}{6}\) as a mixed number.
Answer:

Lesson 13.3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Explore and Grow

Use a straightedge to draw and label a figure for each description. If a figure cannot be drawn, explain why.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 47

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Explore-Grow

Reasoning
Find the figure that shows two lines that cross once. How many angles are formed by two lines? Name and classify the angles of the figure above.
Answer:
Four angles are formed – ∠FOJ , ∠FOH ,∠GOJ and ∠GOH.

Think and Grow: Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

You can describe a pair of lines as intersecting, parallel, or perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 48

Example
Draw and label the lines with the given description.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 49
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 50
Answer:

Show and Grow

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 51
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Show-Grow-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 52
Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 53
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 54

Answer:

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 55

Question 5.
Name a pair of lines that appear to be parallel.
Answer:
AC ll DF.

Question 6.
Name two lines that are perpendicular.
Answer:
BE ⊥ DF and DE ⊥ EB.

Question 7.
Name two intersecting lines.
Answer:
DE and EB
CB and BE

Question 8.
Reasoning
All perpendicular lines are also intersecting lines. Are all intersecting lines perpendicular? Explain.
Answer:
Perpendicular Lines means which bisect the lines at right angles .But where as the intersecting lines meet at one point but doesnot form right angles.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 56

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Which street appears to be parallel to 2nd Street?
Look for a street that will not intersect with 2nd street.
___ Street appears to be parallel to 2nd Street.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 57
Answer:
3rd street.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Which trail appears to be parallel to Fox Trail?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 58
Answer:
Wolf Run Trail

Question 11.
Which trail appears to be perpendicular to Fox Trail?
Answer:
Oak Trail.

Question 12.
Trace and label a pair of line segments that appear to be parallel and a pair of line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 60
Answer:

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Design three paths for a park. Two of the paths are perpendicular. Label these paths as Path 1 and Path 2. The third path intersects both perpendicular paths at exactly one point. Label this path as Path 3.
Answer:

Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines Homework & Practice 13.3

Example

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 60.1

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 61
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 62
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13- Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Practice-Homework-Question-2

Use the figure.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 63

Question 3.
Name a pair of lines that appear to be parallel.
Answer:
AG ll CJ

Question 4.
Name two lines that are perpendicular.
Answer:
BE ⊥ DF
HE DF

Question 5.
Name two intersecting lines.
Answer:
CJ and DF .

Question 6.
Structure
Name two line segments that appear to be parallel. Then name two line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 63.1
Answer:
AB ll DC and AD⊥ DC .

Question 7.
Reasoning
Can two lines that share a point be parallel? Explain.
Answer:
Two Lines can be parallel but a point cannot be a parallel.
Explanation:
Parallel lines are co planar lines that do not intersect. In two dimensions, parallel lines have the same slope . We can write the equation of a line parallel to a given line if we know a point on the line and an equation of the given line. y=2x+3 .

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 64l
Answer:
No, It cannot be an acute angle. Because it is a right angle.
Explanation:
As line SW is perpendicular to line UV and line SW is parallel to line TX then from figure it is clear that line TX will be perpendicular to line UV.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 65
Modeling Real Life
Which street appears to be parallel to Park Avenue?
Answer:
Peach Street.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Which street appears to be perpendicular to Peach Street?
Answer:
Lake Road

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Trace and label a pair of line segments that appear to be parallel and a pair of line segments that appear to be perpendicular.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 66
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent amount of time.

Question 12.
20 min = ___ sec
Answer:
1min = 60sec
20 mins = 20 x 60
= 1200 sec.

Question 13.
6 yr = ___ wk
Answer:
1 year = 52 weeks.
6 years = 6 x 52
= 312 weeks

Lesson 13.4 Understand Degrees

Explore and Grow

Find the elapsed time for each set of clocks. Describe, in your own words, the turn that the minute hand makes.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 67
Answer:
Elapsed time is the time or difference between a beginning time and an ending time.

Reasoning
Explain how elapsed time shown by an analog clock relates to angles formed in a circle.
Answer:
On a clock, we can see different kinds of angles based on its amplitude; void, acute, straight, obtuse, flat angles—even a full angle.

Think and Grow: Degrees

Angles are measured in units called degrees. Think of dividing a circle into 360 equal parts. An angle that turns through \(\frac{1}{360}\) of a circle measures 1°, and is called a“one-degree angle.” A full turn through the entire circle is 360°.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 68
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 69

Example
Find the measure of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 70
An angle that turns \(\frac{1}{360}\) of a circle measures _1__ degrees.
An angle that turns through \(\frac{20}{360}\) of a circle measures _20__ degrees.
So, the measure of the angle is _20 degrees__.

Example
Find the measure of a right angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 71
Answer:
22.5 degrees.

Show and Grow

Find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 72
Answer:
60 degrees.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 73

Answer:
45 degrees.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the measure of the angle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 74
Answer:
85 degrees

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 75
Answer:
120 degrees.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 76
Answer:
45 degrees.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 77
Answer:
(1/9) x (—/—) = —–/360
=40 degrees.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 78
Answer:
(1/2) x (—/—) = —–/360
=180 degrees.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 79
Answer:
(1/5) x (—/—) = —–/360
=360/5=72 degrees.

Question 9.
A circle is divided into 8 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =8
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/8 part of angle formed = 360/8 =45 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 45 =90 degrees.

Question 10.
A circle is divided into 4 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 3 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =4
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/4 part of angle formed = 360/4 =90 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 3 parts = 3 x 45 =135 degrees.

Classify the angle as right, straight, acute or obtuse.

Question 11.
30°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 12.
120°
Answer:
Obtuse angle
It is the angle which lies between 90 degrees and 180 degrees or in other words; an obtuse angle is greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees.

Question 13.
90°
Answer:
Right angle
A right angle is always equal to 90 degrees.

Question 14.
180°
Answer:
Straight angle
A straight angle is 180 degrees. It is just a straight angle because the angle between its arms is 180 degrees.

Reflex Angle

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Both circles are divided into sixths. Your friend says the measure of Angle D is greater than the measure of Angle C. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 80
Answer:
No
Explanation:
Both the angles are divided into 6 equal parts irrespective of size of the circle. Both the angles C and D will be equal. As the sum of the circles is 360 degrees for all circles ,when divided equally the angles will be equal.

Question 16.
Reasoning
Does each figure show the same angle? If not, which two angles are shown? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 81
Answer:
Both the Angles are equal.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Spokes divide the Ferris wheel into 20 equal parts. What is the angle measure of 1 part?
Write a fraction that represents 1 part.
Because the Ferris wheel has 20 equal parts,
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 82
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 83
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 17.
The game spinner is divided into10 equal parts. What is the angle measure of 1 part?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 84
Answer:
Number of parts divided=10
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/10 part of angle formed = 360/10 =36 degree.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A circular quesadilla is cut into 8 equal pieces. Five pieces are eaten. What is the angle measure formed by the remaining pieces?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 85
Answer:
Total Number of parts divided = 8.
Total sum of angle = 360 degrees.
Angle of each part = 360/8 degrees = 45 degrees.
Number of parts eaten = 5
Angle of 5 parts = 5 x 45 degrees = 225 degrees.
Angle formed by remaining parts = 360- 225 degrees =135 degrees
or
Number of remaining parts =3
Angle of remaining parts = 3 x 45 degrees. = 135 degrees.

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
When a light wave hits an object, the object reflects a colored light at an angle to your eye. The color of the reflected light is the color you see. What fraction of a circle is shown by the angle? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 86
Answer:
Reflected angle = 30 degrees.
Total sum of angle = 360 degrees.
Fraction angle reflected in circle = 30 / 360 degrees = 1 /12 fraction.

Understand Degrees Homework & Practice 13.4

Find the measure of each angle

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 87
Answer:
50 degrees

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 88
Answer:
(1/3) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/3 = 120 degrees.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 89
Answer:
(1/12) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/12 = 30 degrees.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 90
Answer:
(1/10) x (—/—) = —–/360
=360/10 = 36 degrees.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 91
Answer:
(1/6) x (—/—) = —–/360
= 360/6 = 60 degrees.

Question 6.
A circle is divided into 5 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =5
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/5 part of angle formed = 360/5 =72 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 72 =144 degrees.

Question 7.
A circle is divided into 10 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 3 parts?
Answer:
Number of parts =10
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/10 part of angle formed = 360/10 =36 degree.
Therefore measure of angle that turns through 3 parts = 3 x 36 =108 degrees.

Classify the angle as right, straight, acute, obtuse

Question 8.
90°
Answer:
Right angle
A right angle is always equal to 90 degrees.

Question 9.
45°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 10.
160°
Answer:
Obtuse angle
It is the angle which lies between 90 degrees and 180 degrees or in other words; an obtuse angle is greater than 90 degrees and less than 180 degrees.

Question 11.
60°
Answer:
Acute angle
An acute angle lies between 0 degree and 90 degrees, or in other words; an acute angle is one that is less than 90 degrees.

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which angle measure does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 92
Answer:
1/8 of a circle

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend uses the equation to find an angle a measure. Explain what the letters a and b represent.
360° ÷ a = b
Answer:
Where a is the Number of parts where circle is divided.
b is the angle of 1 part.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
The steering wheel is divided into 3 equal parts. Find the angle measure of 1 part.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 93
Answer:
Number of parts =3
The total sum of angle in circle = 360.
The measure of 1/3 part of the angle formed = 360/3 =120 degrees.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You and your friend take pie-shaped pieces from a circular quiche. Your friend takes \(\frac{2}{8}\) of the quiche. You take a piece with an angle measure of 72°. Who takes a larger piece? Explain.
Answer:
It Is given that pie taken your friend is 2/8 So it is clear that quinche is divided into 8 parts.
Number of parts =8
Total sum of angle in circle = 360.
Measure of 1/8 part of angle formed = 360/8 =45 degree.
Piece taken by friend is 2/8 = 2 x 45 = 90 degrees.
Piece taken by you measures 72 degrees.
Therefore Your Friend takes larger piece.

Review & Refresh

Multiply

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 94
Answer:
=7 x (7/2)
=1/2 = 0.5

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 95
Answer:
= 10 x (53/6)
=88.33

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 96
Answer:
=4 x (51/8)
=51/2
=25.5

Lesson 13.5 Find Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

How many triangular pattern blocks can you put together around one vertex?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 97
Answer: 2
How can you determine the measure of each angle in a triangular pattern block?
Answer:
If we add all three angles in any triangle we get 180 degrees.
So, the measure of (angle A + angle B + angle C) = 180 degrees.

Repeated Reasoning
Find all of the angle measures of the other pattern blocks. Organize your results in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 98
Answer:

Think and Grow: Find Angle Measures

Example
Use the pattern block to find the measure of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 99
Each angle of the pattern block has a measure of _60__.
The angle is equal to _60 degrees__ of the angles of the pattern block.
So, the measure of the angle is __60 degrees_.

Example
Use the pattern block to find the measure of the angle.
Each acute angle of the pattern block has a measure of _30__.
The angle is equal to _30__ of the acute angles of the pattern block.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 100
So, the measure of the angle is _150 degrees__.

Show and Grow

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 101

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 102

Answer:

Question 3.
Use pattern blocks to find how many 60° angles are in a straight angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 103
Answer:

Total 3 triangles are used.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 104

Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 105

Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 106

Answer:

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 107

Answer:

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 108

Answer:

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 109

Answer:

Question 10.
How many 90° angles are in a straight angle? Explain.
Answer: 2
A straight has 180 degree as its sum of angle.
One right angle = 90 degrees.
=90 x2 =180.
So if we have 2 right angles the its sum will be equal to 180 degrees.

Question 11.
How many 30° angles are in a 150° angle? Explain.
Answer:
=150/30=5 times.

Question 12.
Structure
Use two different pattern blocks to form an obtuse angle. Find the angle measure. Draw a model to support your Answer.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the measure of the smaller angle formed by the clock hands. Then explain how you could find the measure of the larger angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 110
Answer:
The angle formed at 3 clock = 90°.
The sum of angles=360°
The larger angle = 360° – 90°=270°

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A circular compass is divided into 8 equal sections. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the compass?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 111
A full turn through a circle is 360°. So, divide 360° by 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 112
Each angle formed at the center of the compass is __45°_.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You have a circular craft table. You divide the table into 3 equal sections. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the table?
Answer:
Number of sections =3
The total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
The measure of 1/3 part of the angle formed at the center of the table = 360°/3 =120°

Question 15.
A chef has a wheel of cheese that is cut into6 equal pieces. The chef uses 2 pieces. What is the angle measure formed by the missing pieces?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 113
Answer:
Number of parts =6
Total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
Measure of 1/6 part of angle formed= 360°/6 =60°
Chef uses 2 peices
Angle formed by used peices = 2 x 60° =120°
Therefore, the angle measure formed by the missing pieces = 120°

Question 16.What is the angle measure formed by the remaining slices?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 114

Answer:
Number of parts =5
Total sum of angle in circle = 360°.
Measure of 1/5 part of angle formed= 360°/5 =72°
used peices = 2
Angle formed by Remaining peices = 3 x 72° =216°
Therefore, the angle measure formed by the remaining pieces = 216°

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You make a tile pattern for a border on a wall. Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block. Draw two ways you can arrange 1 triangle tile and 1 hexagon tile to create a straight angle.
Answer:

Find Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.5

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 115
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 116
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 117

Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 118

Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 119
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 120
Answer: The angle formed is 80°. It cannot be represented by pattern blocks.

Question 7.
How many 30° angles are in a right angle? Explain.
Answer:
Right angle =90°
How many 30° angles we have in right angle = 90°/30°=3

Question 8.
Structure
Draw to show how you can use three different pattern blocks to form a straight angle.
Answer:

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the measure of the angle shown is 120°. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 121
Answer:
No, As the angle is 130°.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
The hands of a clock form a straight angle. What time could it be? Explain.
Answer:
The time as per mage is 6 o clock.
Explanation:

  • One hand is very thin and moves very fast. It’s called the seconds hand. Every time it moves, a second has gone by.
  • Another hand is thick and long like the seconds hand. It’s called the minutes hand. Every time it moves one little tick, a minute has gone by. Every 60 times it moves a whole step, an hour has gone by.
  • The last hand is thick, too, but smaller than the minutes hand. It’s called the hours hand. Every time it moves one big tick, an hour has gone by. Every 24 times it moves a whole step, a day has gone by

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
The scale is divided into 5 equal sections by each whole kilogram measurement. What is the measure of each angle formed at the center of the scale? What is the mass of the bananas?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 122
Answer:
The whole Kilogram is divided into 5 parts
1kg = 1000 grams
=1000 grams / 5
=200 grams.
As per the image the weight of banans showing mark on one.
one unit = 200 grams.
Therefor, weight of bananas = 200 grams.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
The gasoline tank gauge is divided into 4 equal sections. What are the measures of the angles formed at the starting point of the red arrow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 123
Answer:
The gasoline is in a shape of semi circle.
Sum of the angles = 180°
Number of sections divided = 4 parts. (equal).
Angle of each section : 180° /4 = 45° .
Therefore the measures of the angles formed at the starting point of the red arrow = 45° .

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the rectangle.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 124
Answer:
Area of Rectangle = length X breadth.
AREA = 19 m x 16 m = 304 sq m.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 125
Answer:
Area of Rectangle = length X breadth.
AREA = 28 in x 15 in =420 sq in.

Lesson 13.6 Measure and Draw Angles

Explore and Grow

Find the measure of each angle. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 126
Answer:

Construct Arguments
Does the angle shown have a measure of 90°? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 127
Answer:
The intersecting line form right angle =90 degrees
The angle marked = ?
The total angle = 360 degrees.
The marked angle= 360 – 90 = 270 degrees.

Think and Grow: Measure and Draw Angles

Example
A protractor is a tool for measuring and drawing angles.

Find the measure of ∠STU. Then classify it.
Step 1: Place the center of the protractor on the vertex of the angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 128
Step 2: Align one side of the angle, \(\overrightarrow{T U}\), with 0° mark on the inner scale of the protractor.
Step 3: Find where the other side of the angle, \(\overrightarrow{T S}\), passes through the inner scale.
So, the measure of ∠STU is ___. It is an ___ angle.

Example
Draw ∠ABC that measures 65°.
Step 1: Place the center of the protractor on point. Align \(\overrightarrow{B C}\) with the 0° mark on the inner scale of the protractor.
Step 2: Use the same scale to draw a point at 65°. Label the point A.
Step 3: Use the protractor to draw \(\overrightarrow{B A}\).
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 129

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the measure of ∠DEF. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 130

Answer:

Question 2.
Use a protractor to draw ∠XYZ that measures 110°.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 131

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 132

Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 133

Answer:

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 5.
25°
Answer:

Question 6.
160°

Answer:

Question 7.
180°
Answer:

Question 8.
48°
Answer:

Question 9.
Writing
Why does one side of the angle you are measuring have to be lined up with the straight side of the protractor?
Answer:
We see two sets of degrees along the edge: an inner and outer scale. Both scales go from 0 to 180, but they run in opposite directions. If the angle opens to the right side of the protractor, use the inner scale. If the angle opens to the left of the protractor, use the outer scale.
To mark 0° on the inner scale of the protractor. So that we can next mark the angle we want to measure.

Question 10.
Precision
Newton says the measure of ∠ABC is 130°. Explain what he did wrong.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 134

Answer:
The ∠ABC is 50 degrees not 130 degrees .
To measure an angle ABC, we place the mid point of the protractor on the vertex B of the angle. The base AB arm falls along with the base line of the protractor as shown in the figure above
The angle is measured on the protractor counting from 0 up to the point where the arm BC lies. In the above figure ∠ABC = 50°.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A contractor builds two roofs. How much greater is the angle measure of Roof A than the angle measure of Roof B?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 135
Use a protractor to measure the angle of each roof.
The angle measure of Roof A is _50°_ and the angle measure of Roof B is _40°__.
Subtract the angle measure of Roof B from the angle measure of Roof A.
_50°__ − _40°__ = _10°__
The angle measure of Roof A is _10°__ greater than the angle measure of Roof B.

Show and Grow0

Question 11.
An inspector compares two ramps. How much greater is the angle measure of Ramp B than the angle measure of Ramp A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 136
Answer:

Ramp A angle is 10 degrees and Ramp B angle is 20 degrees
Ramp B angle is 10 degrees greater.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
On a trail map, two straight trails intersect. One of the angles formed by the intersection is 70. What are the other three angle measures?
Answer:
A trail is formed with 4 angles.
Sum of the angles in trial = 360°.
if one angle =70°
Sum of other 3 angles = 360° – 70° = 290 °.

Measure and Draw Angles Homework & Practice 13.6

Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 137

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 138

Answer:

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 3.
40°
Answer:

Question 4.
125°
Answer:

Question 5.
Reasoning
Measure the angles of each quadrilateral. What do you notice about the sum of the angle measures of each quadrilateral?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 139
Answer:
The angles of the square are 90° each .
The angles of Quadilateral are two angles are 90°.
And other angles are 50°.
For every quadrilateral, the sum of the interior angles will always be 360°.

Question 6.
Precision
Use a protractor to draw a triangle with the angle measures of 0°. Describe your drawing.
Answer:

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a protractor to draw a triangle with the angle measures of 90°, 35°, and 55°.
Answer:

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A snowboarder compares 2 mountain trails. How much greater is the angle measure of Trail B than the angle measure of Trail A?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 140

Answer:
The angle is 5° greater.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
On a map, there is a Y-intersection where one straight road branches off into two straight roads. One of the angles formed by the intersection measures 45°. Give two possible measures for the other angles formed by the intersection.
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent length

Question 10.
5 km = ___ m.
Answer:
1km = 1000m
5 km = 5 x 1000 m = 5000m

Question 11.
7 m = ___ mm.
Answer:
1m = 1000mm
7 m = 7 x 1000 mm = 7000mm

Lesson 13.7 Add Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

Use a protractor to draw ∠PQR that measures 70°.
Draw another angle that measures 30° and shares side \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q} R}\). Label your angle. How many angles are in your figure? What do you notice about their measures?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 141
Make a copy of ∠PQR. Draw and label a different angle that measures 30° and shares \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q} R}\). How many angles are in your figure? What do you notice about their measures?

Construct Arguments
What conclusions can you make from your figures above?
Answer:
The Above triangle formed is a scalene triangle- has no equal side.

Think and Grow: Add Angle Measures

When an angle is decomposed into parts that do not overlap, the angle measure of the whole equals the sum of the angle measures of the parts.
Two angles are adjacent when they share a common side and a common vertex, but no other points in common. When two or more adjacent angles form a larger angle, the sum of the measures of the smaller angles is equal to the measure of the larger angle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 142
Example
Find the measure of ∠WXY.
∠WXY and ∠ZXY are adjacent. The measure of ∠WXZ is equal to the sum of the measures of and ∠ZXY. Complete the equation.
_41°__ + __32°_ = _73°__
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 143
So, the measure of ∠WXY is _73°__.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the equation to find the ∠PQR.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 144

Answer:
∠PQR = ∠PQS +∠SQR
= 43° + 77° =120°

Question 2.
Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to complete the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 145

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 146
Answer:
∠QRS= ∠QRT +∠TRS
= 62° + 19° =81°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 147

Answer:
∠ABC = ∠ABD +∠DBC
= 66° + 37° =103°

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 148

Answer:
∠MNO = ∠MNQ +∠QNP +∠PNO
= 45° + 87° +22°
=154° .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 149

∠VWX = ∠VWZ +∠ZWY +∠YWX
= 36° + 38° +73°
=147° .

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 150
Answer:
∠M= ∠LMO +∠OMN +∠LMN
= 100° + 80° +180°
=360°
° .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 151

Answer:
∠W= ∠SWT +∠TWU +∠UWV +∠VWS
= 120° + 60° + 90° + 90°
=360°

Question 9.
Number Sense
The sum of seven adjacent angle measures that share a vertex is 154°. Each angle has the same measure. What is the measure of each angle?
Answer:
The sum of seven equal angles = 154°.
Measure of each angle = 154°/7 = 22°.

Question 10

DIG DEEPER!
∠PRS is adjacent to ∠QRS in Exercise 3. The measure of ∠PRS is 9°. Find the measure of ∠QRP. Classify angle ∠QRP.
Answer:
∠QRP = 9°
Two angles are adjacent when they share a common side and a common vertex, but no other points in common. When two or more adjacent angles form a larger angle, the sum of the measures of the smaller angles is equal to the measure of the larger angle.

Think and Grow : Modeling Real Life

Example
A store installs 3 security cameras on the same light post. Each camera has a viewing angle of 28°. The viewing angles of the cameras are adjacent. What is the total viewing angle of the cameras?
Add the viewing angle measures of the cameras.
28° + 28° + 28° = _84°__
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 152
The total viewing angle of the cameras is __84°_

Show and Grow

Question 11.
A landscaper installs 3 sprinklers in 1 location in the grass. Each sprinkler has a spraying angle of 90°. The spraying angles of the sprinklers are adjacent. What is the total spraying angle of the sprinklers?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 152.1

Answer:
As 3 sprinklers are adjacent all the 3 angles are equal.
Each angle of the sprinkler = 90°
Total spraying angle of the sprinklers= 3 X 90° = 270°

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You use 4 rhombus tiles and 4 trapezoid tiles to make the pattern for a mosaic. Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block. What is the measure ∠NUQ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 153
Answer:
As we know th pattern blocks of trapezoid have 60° and rhombus have 30°.
Each tile is the same size and shape as a pattern block
∠NUQ= 30° + 60°+ 60° =150°

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
You make the pattern for a quilt. Each rhombus is the same size and shape. Name all of the 60° angles in the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 154

Answer:
All 60° angles in the pattern = ∠AHC +∠BHD +∠CHE+∠DHF +∠EHG.

Add Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.7

Write an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 155

Answer:
∠EFG= ∠EFH +∠HFG
= 27° + 44°
=71°

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 156

Answer:
∠JKL= ∠JKM +∠MKL
= 53° + 85°
=138°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 157

Answer:
∠PQR= ∠PQT +∠TQS +∠SQR
= 68° + 47° +54°
=316°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 158

Answer:
∠VWX= ∠VWZ +∠ZWY +∠YWX
= 19° + 42° +35°
=96°

Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 159

Answer:

∠D= ∠CDB +∠BDA +∠ADC
= 120° + 60° +180°
=360°

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 160

Answer:
∠N= ∠JNM +∠MNL +∠LNK + ∠KNJ
= 150° + 30°+90° + 90°
=360°

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Is it possible for the sum of two acute adjacent angle measures to be greater than the measure of a right angle? If so, draw a sketch to support your answer.
Answer:
Here ∠ABC and ∠CBD are both acute angles.
∠ABD= ∠ABC +∠CBD
= 60°+60°
=120°
sum of two acute adjacent angle=120° is more than 90° .

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a protractor to measure the angle. Then decompose the angle into 2 parts so that one part is 25° greater than the other. What is the measure of each part?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 161
Answer:
The measure of given angle = 120°
The given angle is divided into two parts one angle is 25° greater than other.
The measure each part = a + ( a + 25°) = 120°
120° – 25° =2a
105° = 2a
a=55.5°
a + 25° = 77.5°

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A carpenter glues 3 identical pieces of wood next to each other to make the table shown. The 30° angles of the pieces of wood are adjacent. What is the total angle of the table formed by the pieces of wood?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 162
Answer:
Angle of each wood piece = 30°
As all angles are adjacent so angle of other wood pieces will be same.
so all 3 angles = 30° each.
Total angles = 3 x 30° = 90° .

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
You use 3 triangle pattern blocks and 3 rhombus pattern blocks to make the pattern for an art project. What is the measure of ∠ADE?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 163
Answer:
The pattern block angle of triangle = 60°
The pattern block angle of Rhombus = 60°
∠ADE = ∠ADB + ∠BDE. = 60°+60° =120°

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 164
Answer:

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 165

Answer:

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 166

Answer:

Lesson 13.8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Explore and Grow

Draw and label ∠EDF where point F is between the rays of ∠CDE. Explain how you can find the measure of ∠CDF.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 167
Answer:
∠CDE=∠CDF + ∠EDF
= 45 + 45 =90°  (USING PROTACTOR).

Explanation:

Draw and label ∠LMP. Explain how you can find the measure of ∠NMP.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 168
Answer:

Reasoning
Draw Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169 in your figure above. Explain how you can find all of the angle measures in your figure. What do you notice?
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169is a which bisect the LN. so angles are divided into 2 parts equally. Using protractor we can find the measure of the angles.
This are complementary angles.

Think and Grow: Find Unknown Angle Measures

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 169.1

Example
Find the measure of ∠DEG.
∠DEG and ∠GEF are complementary. The sum of their measures is 90.°
Step 1: Write an equation to find the measure of ∠DEG.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 171

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Write and solve an equation to find the measure of ∠NLM.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 172

Answer:
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.
∠NLM=180°- ∠KLN
= 180° – 62° = 118°

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 172.1
Answer:
Complementary angles form a right angle (L shape) and have a sum of 90 degrees.
∠MKL=90°- ∠MKJ
= 90° – 45° = 45°

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 173
Answer:
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.
∠MNP=180°- ∠PNO
= 180° – 22° = 158°

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 174
Answer:
∠TRU= ∠SRQ -∠SRT -∠URQ
= 90° – 30° – 40°
=20°

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 175

Answer:
∠YWZ= ∠XWV -∠VWZ -∠YWX
= 180° – 31°-111°
=38°

Question 6.
Find the measures of ∠AEB, ∠AED, and ∠DEC.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 176

∠AEB= ∠AEC -∠BEC
= 180° – 67° = 113°
∠DEC= ∠DEB -∠BEC
= 180° – 67° = 113°
∠AED= ∠AEC -∠DEC
= 180° – 113° = 67°

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Write and solve equations to find the measure of ∠KMJ.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 177

Answer:
∠KME= ∠KMG -∠GME
= 180° – 124° = 56°
∠KMJ= ∠JME -∠KME
= 90° – 56° = 34°

Question 8.
Writing
Define complementary angles and supplementary angles in your own words.
Answer:
Complementary angles form a right angle (L shape) and have a sum of 90 degrees.
Supplementary angles form a straight line and have a sum of 180 degrees.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The foul lines on a baseball field are perpendicular. A baseball player hits a ball as shown. What is the measure of the angle between the path of the ball and the 1st base foul line?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 178
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
The 3rd base foul line and 1st base foul line are perpendicular.
So, the measure of the angle between the foul lines is _90° __.
Write an equation to find the measure of the angle between the path of the ball and the 1st base foul line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 179

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Runway 1 and Runway 2 are perpendicular. What is the measure of the missing angle between Runway 1 and Runway 3?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 180

Answer:
Angle between Runway 1 and Runway 3= 90 – Angle between Runway 2 and Runway 3.
=90 – 58 =32°

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
What is the measure of the missing g angle between View Street and Elm Street?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 181
Answer:
Angle between View Street and Elm Street=360 – Angle between IIIstreet and view street – Angle between elm street and IIIstreet.
=360- 90 -152
=118°

Find Unknown Angle Measures Homework & Practice 13.8

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 1.
∠JKM
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 182
Answer:
∠JKM= ∠JKL -∠MKL
= 90° – 9° = 81°

Question 2.
∠PNM
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 183

∠PNM= ∠MNO -∠PNO
= 180° – 145° = 35°

Question 3.
∠QRU
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 184
Answer:
∠QRU= ∠QRS -∠URT-∠TRS
= 90°-28° – 13°
=49°

Question 4.
∠ZWV
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 185
Answer:
∠ZWV= ∠VWX -∠ZWY-∠YWX
= 180°- 32° – 24°
=124°

Question 5.
Reasoning
∠ABC and ∠CBD are adjacent. ∠ABC is a right angle.
∠CBD is acute.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 186
Answer:
∠ABD=∠ABC-∠CBD
= 90 – 35 = 65°

Question 6.
Structure
Which equations can you use to find the measure of angle ∠MKJ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 187

Answer:
180 – 57 = x

Question 7.
Open-Ended
An acute angle and an obtuse angle are adjacent and supplementary. What might the measures of each angle be?
Answer:

let,  be obtuse angle and  be acute angle.
So, 
That means (obtuse angle) and (acute angle) are supplementary

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Newton bounces a ball off of a wall to Descartes. \(\overline{A D}\)⊥\(\overline{D B}\). The measures of ∠ADC and ∠BDE are equivalent. Find the measures of ∠ADC and ∠BDE.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 188

Answer:
∠ADC and ∠BDE. are equal
∠CDE= ∠ADC + ∠BDE – ∠BDA.
180 = a + a – ∠BDA.
∠BDA.=180 -2a

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Owls see an object with both eyes at the same time using binocular vision. What angle measure describes the owl’s binocular vision? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 189
Answer:
left monocular + Binocular vision = 180
Binocular vision = 180 – 110=70 degrees.

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction as a money amount and as a decimal

Question 10.
\(\frac{49}{100}\)
Answer:
0.49

Question 11.
\(\frac{25}{100}\)
Answer:
0.25

Question 12.
\(\frac{7}{100}\)
Answer:
0.07

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Performance Task 13

A rural town is expanding and needs to plan the construction of new roads.

Question 1.
What is another name for Main Street?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 190
Answer:
Line AC.

Question 2.
Use the directions to complete the map.
a. Draw Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 191 and label it with a street name of your choice.
b. The library will be at point E on Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 191.1 and on the other side of Main Street as the school. Plot and label the library E at point E.
c. Draw a new road through point E that is perpendicular to Main Street. Label it with a street name of your choice.

Question 3.
City planners want to construct a new residential neighborhood southeast of the town hall.
a. The measure of ∠ABD is \(\frac{1}{6}\) of 360°. What is the measure of the angle?
Answer:
∠ABD=(1/6) x 360 =60 degree.
b. Classify ∠DBC. What is its measure?
Answer:
∠DBC=180 -∠ABD = 180-60 = 120 degrees.
c. Draw a road from point B to the new neighborhood. The road divides ∠DBC exactly in half.
Answer:

Question 4.
Is the distance between the supermarket and the police station more than or less than a mile? Explain.
Answer:
Distance between the supermarket and the police station= AB + BC
= (1/4) + (5/8).
=(2+5)/8
=7/8.=0.8 mile
which is less than 1 mile.

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Activity

Geometry Dots

Directions:

  1. Players take turns connecting two dots, each using a different color.
  2. On your turn, connect two dots, vertically or horizontally. If you close a square around an angle, find the measure of the angle inside the square. If you do not close a square, your turn is over.
  3. Continue playing until you find all of the angle measures.
  4. The player that finds the most angle measures wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 192

Answer:

Identify and Draw Lines and Angles Chapter Practice 13

13.1 Points, Lines and Rays

Name the figure. Write how to say the name.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 193
Answer:
It is a point said as Point F

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 194
Answer:

It is said as line GH. and represented as GH with overhead arrow.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 195
Answer:
It is a ray JK .It is represented with Over head arrow to left.

Draw and label the figure.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 196
Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 197
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-Identify-Draw-Lines-Angles-Chapter-Practice 13-13.1-Points-Lines-Rays-Question-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 198
Answer:

Use the figure

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 199

Question 7.
Name a line segment.
Answer: CE

Question 8.
Name two different rays.
Answer: CA and  CB.

13.2 Identify and Draw Angles

Question 9.
Write a name for the angle and classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 200
Answer:
∠SRQ. It is a obtuse angle.

Question 10.
∠TUV is a right angle. Draw and label the angle.
Answer:

13.3 Identify Parallel and Perpendicular Lines

Draw and label the lines with the given description.

Question 11.

Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 201

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-4-Chapter-13-13.3-Identify-Parallel-Perpendicular-Lines-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 202
Answer:

13.4 Understand Degrees

Find the measure of each angle.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 203

Answer:
115°

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 204

Answer:
=(1/5) x(—–/—–)= —-/360.
=72°/360°

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 205

Answer:
=1/4 x 360
=90°

Question 16.
A circle is divided into 12 equal parts. What is the measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts?
Answer:
Number parts divided = 12
Total sum of the angles = 360°
Angle of 1 part = 360°/12. = 30°.
The measure of the angle that turns through 2 parts = 2 x 30°. = 60°.

Question 17.
Which one Doesn’t Belong? Which angle measure does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 206
Answer:
1/6 of a circle = 360/6 = 60°.
60/360 of a circle = 1/6.
60°
1/8 of a circle = 360°/8=45°
Therefore 1/8 of a circle is different.

13.5 Find Angle Measures

Use pattern blocks to find the measure of the angle.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 207

Answer:

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 208

Answer:

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 209
Answer:

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 210

Answer:

 

13.6 Measure and Draw Angles

Question 22.
Find the measure of the angle. Then classify it.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 211

Question 23.
Use a protractor to draw a 45° angle.
Answer:

Modeling Real Life
On a map, two straight railroad tracks intersect. One of the angles formed by the intersection is 30°. What are the three other angle measures?

13.7 Add Angle Measures

Question 25.
Write an equation to find the measure ∠EFG.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 212

Answer:
∠EFG = ∠EFH+∠HFG.
=37° + 48° = 85°.

Question 26.
Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Use the angle measures to write an equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 213

Answer:

13.8 Find Unknown Angle Measures

Write and solve an equation to find the measure of the angle.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 214
Answer:
Complementary angles =90°.
∠ABD = ∠ABC-∠DBC.
=90°-27° = 63°.

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 215

Answer:
Supplementary angle =180°
∠HFG = ∠EFG-∠EFH.
=180° + 42° = 38°.

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 216

Answer:
Complementary angles =90°.
∠MKL = ∠LKJ-∠MKN-∠NKJ.
=90°-45°-22°= 23°.

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles 217

Answer:
Supplementary angles =180°.
∠SPR = ∠OPQ-∠OPS-∠RPQ.
=180°-25°-52°= 103°.

Conclusion: 

The solutions provided in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles are prepared by the subject experts. So Download Bigideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 13 Identify and Draw Lines and Angles for free and start practicing the problems. Also, bookmark our page to get the Solution Key of Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Chapters.